Peacock Is Launching New Interactive Features for World Cup Fans Today

In the past two years or so, Peacock has set a high bar for innovations in sports broadcasting. Since the launch of its Summer Olympics viewing hub in 2024, it’s rolled out tons of great new features, from alternate views of sporting events, a multiview option that allows fans to watch more than one thing at a time and clever ways for fans to curate and interact with their content. And since you can currently watch Spanish-language broadcasts of every 2026 FIFA World Cup match on Peacock, it only makes sense that it’s rolling out more new features to enhance the viewing experience.

Starting today, June 30, Peacock’s Spanish-language World Cup hub is rolling out Visión de Campo, a vertical viewing format that allows fans to watch alternate camera angles dedicated to specific moments and athletes, offering unprecedented access to matches from their teams’ perspectives. (If this sounds familiar, that’s because Peacock also offers this feature during the NBA and NHL seasons as Courtside Live and Rinkside Live, respectively.) 

Visión de Campo won’t be available for every single match, but for now, here’s a schedule of the matches where you can check it out (additional matches are TBA). While the format is mobile-first, you can also watch it at home on living room devices as a multiview or picture-in-picture option alongside the main match feeds.

  • Tuesday, June 30, 9 p.m. ET: Mexico vs. Ecuador
  • Wednesday, July 1, 8 p.m. ET: USA vs. Bosnia-Herzegovina
  • Tuesday, July 14, 3 p.m. ET: Semifinal  No. 1 (Teams TBD)
  • Wednesday, July 15, 3 p.m. ET, Semifinal No. 2 (Teams TBD)
  • Sunday, July 19, 3 p.m. ET, World Cup Final (Teams TBD) 

Fans can track their predictions with the Tu Brackets feature in the Peacock app.

NBCUniversal/Peacock

In addition to Visión de Campo, Peacock is rolling out an interactive bracket feature called Tu Brackets starting on Wednesday, July 8, the day before the quarterfinals begin. 

You’ll need to act quickly to use this feature, though; the brackets launch on July 8, and fans need to lock in their bracket selections by Thursday, July 9, at 4 p.m. ET, when the first quarterfinal match begins. Once your bracket is created, you can track your teams and selections directly in the Peacock app all the way to the end of the tournament to see how your predictions fare. (Note that this is for personal entertainment and there’s no betting component to this feature.)

These new features complement the features you can already access on Peacock, including multiview, the interactive prediction and trivia game Predicciones, match replays, live games, highlights and more. Want to know more about the World Cup? Here’s everything else you need to know about this year’s tournament. 

Categories: Gadgets

What’s on Paramount Plus in July 2026? Star Trek, Big Brother and More

When Paramount Plus first arrived on the scene, the streaming service made a name for itself as the destination for fans of Paramount-owned brands. You could watch CBS shows such as Survivor and The Amazing Race alongside nostalgic favorites from MTV and Comedy Central, including The Challenge, South Park, Paramount films and more. Paramount Plus has expanded even more since then, becoming the home of UFC fights, Taylor Sheridan‘s Yellowstone universe and his standalone series such as Mayor of Kingstown, Tulsa King and The Madison.

This month, a new season of Star Trek: Strange New Worlds premieres on the platform, along with a new season of Big Brother (you’ll be able to watch the CBS simulcast live every week with a Paramount Plus Premium subscription, or next day with a Paramount Plus Essential plan). Also arriving exclusively on Paramount Plus this month is the new crime thriller Wardriver, which stars Dane DeHaan, Sasha Calle and Mamoudou Athie. Several favorite series also have big finales this month; catch Dutton Ranch, the RuPaul’s Drag Race All Stars finale and the series finale of The Chi.

Here are the new releases we’re most excited to see on Paramount Plus this July. 

July 8

Paramount

In Wardriver, Dane DeHaan stars as Cole, a hacker who used his tech savvy to steal from banks. When Cole’s skills catch the eye of a black-market tech predator named Oscar (Mamoudou Athie), he’s roped in to a million-dollar cyber heist that might have deadly consequences if he fails. Wardriver makes its post-theatrical debut exclusively on Paramount Plus on July 8. 

July 9

CBS

CBS’s long-running hit Big Brother, hosted by Julie Chen Moonves, returns this month, and the 28th season will kick off with a special 90‑minute premiere on Thursday, July 9 (8-9:30 p.m. ET). It will simulcast on CBS and Paramount Plus Premium. Throughout the season, fans can tune in for weekly episodes on Wednesdays at 8 p.m. ET, followed by hourlong shows on Thursdays and Sundays at 8 p.m. ET.  Paramount Plus and Pluto TV viewers will also be able to watch alternate feeds from inside the Big Brother House throughout the week. (Every episode is available to watch live on Paramount Plus Premium, and streams the next day with a Paramount Plus Essential Plan.)

July 14

Paramount Plus

The Real Wolf of Wall Street

The Wolf of Wall Street is a modern classic directed by Martin Scorsese and starring Leonardo DiCaprio as Jordan Belfort, a 1980s-era stockbroker who was eventually convicted of fraud and stock market manipulation. Belfort wrote the book that the film was based on, and now, members of his inner circle, his ex-wife Nadine and the law enforcement officers that brought him to justice are part of a new three-part docuseries, The Real Wolf of Wall Street. The show features interviews and never-before-seen footage that depict the wild and debauched nature of Belfort’s exploits, providing even more context for the situation. All three episodes arrive on July 14.

July 23

Paramount Plus

Star Trek: Strange New Worlds (Season 4)

Season 4 of the Paramount Plus original series, Star Trek: Strange New Worlds, features Captain Christopher Pike (Anson Mount) and the crew of the U.S.S. Enterprise as they journey to, well, strange new worlds. The series is a prequel to the original Star Trek series, which ran from 1966-69, and features new characters as well as familiar ones like Spock (played by Ethan Peck) and Number One (Rebecca Romijn). 

The 10-episode season premieres on Thursday, July 23 on Paramount Plus. New episodes will drop weekly on Thursdays through Sept. 24.

July 29

Paramount Plus

Diarra From Detroit (Season 2)

Creator, writer, and producer Diarra Kilpatrick also stars in the detective series Diarra From Detroit as a divorcee who gets pulled into the Detroit underworld when she starts investigating the whereabouts of her missing Tinder date. The series, now a Paramount Plus original, first debuted on BET Plus in 2024. The show features an impressive cast that includes Phylicia Rashad, DomiNque Perry, Claudia Logan and Bryan Terrell Clark, and this season features guest stars like Cliff “Method Man” Smith, Morris Chestnut, Glynn Turman, Bokeem Woodbine, Amber Riley and Lil Rel Howery. Catch the first two episodes on Wednesday, July 29, followed by one new episode every Wednesday through Sept. 9. 

Categories: Gadgets

Clicks shows off its BlackBerry-inspired phone in a new hands-on video

Clicks Technology, a startup that’s preparing to launch its own take on the BlackBerry smartphone, is showing off what it has in store in a new video, released today.

The device, known as the Clicks Communicator, was first introduced at January’s Consumer Electronics Show (CES) in Las Vegas to cater to people who do a lot of work on their phones, like texting and emailing. It’s particularly meant to appeal to those who miss the BlackBerry’s physical keyboard, which some argue is better for these types of tasks.

Priced at $499, the Communicator looks a lot like a modern-day BlackBerry might, with a screen for viewing and responding to messages, and a tactile, touch-sensitive keyboard below.

The phone goes beyond being just a BlackBerry dupe, however, by innovating in other areas. For instance, its clever “Signal Light” feature offers a light-up button on the side of the phone that can be customized with different colors and light patterns to indicate when you’ve received messages from certain people, groups, or apps. 

It also offers customizable back covers that can be popped off and swapped, a 3.5 mm headphone jack, a physical SIM card tray (in addition to an eSIM), expandable microSD storage (up to 2TB), and a tactile switch for turning on or off airplane mode.

The Clicks Communicator may also appeal to the growing number of users looking to distance themselves from modern-day smartphones, with their addictive social apps and games. (The company partnered with the Niagara Launcher to provide access to the Android apps it runs). With the Signal Light, you can safely ignore your phone unless you see a critical notification come through.

In the new video, the company shows its pre-production hardware and internal software as a preview of what’s to come when the phone begins shipping in the fourth quarter of this year.

At CES, TechCrunch was able to get a feel for the Communicator by handling a prototype that was the same size and weight as the device that’s preparing to ship at the end of this year. We found it felt good to hold, not too light or heavy, and was easy to grip. The keys were also fairly clicky, giving it a BlackBerry-like feel, though the team was then planning to slightly adjust the pressure to make the device work better for fast typers.

Future videos will go more in-depth into specific Clicks Communicator features, like the Signal Light, Prompt Key, Message Hub, touch-sensitive keyboard, and more.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

If It Has a Screen, It Can Run Doom. How a Game From 1993 Became a Porting Legend

The first-person demon-shooting Doom has some shocking longevity. The video game has been part of tech culture since it launched in 1993, with its signature view of a gun centered of the screen firing at nightmarish pixelated fiends becoming an iconic image in gaming. Even if you’ve never played, you’ve seen it. That isn’t even necessarily because of nostalgia, although that’s a factor. To some extent, it’s because Doom can seemingly be played on anything with electricity running through it. 

This isn’t new. Doom has, essentially, always been a port. It was developed by id Software on a NeXTcube workstation, but its first release was to IBM PCs running MS-DOS. Less than two years after its initial launch, it was ported to OS/2, IRIX, Solaris, MacOS, Linux and Microsoft Windows. 

It was also ported to a load of consoles, including the Super Nintendo, Sega Saturn, PlayStation, Xbox 360 and PlayStation 3. This trend continued for literally decades, and you can buy Doom on your Xbox Series X or PlayStation 5 today, along with PC and, at least for a while, the Nintendo Switch

That alone is impressive. There have been dozens of official ports over the years, and that has no doubt helped the game’s longevity. Younger gamers can continue to experience the godfather of the first-person shooter genre without having to unearth hardware and operating systems from the Clinton administration. 

It’s with the unofficial ports that things start to get weird. Doom has become a meme thanks to the challenge of getting it to run on anything with pixels — or something close enough. At its I/O developer conference this year, Google engineers showed off an operating system they vibe-coded from scratch using Gemini AI — by running Doom on it. 

As it turns out, that’s part of a long tradition.

The original SNES version of Doom had a striking red cartridge, which housed the SuperFX chip necessary to run the game on an SNES. 

id Software

How the Doom meme started

We’re going to use some really fun words in this article that don’t seem like they should be here, such as “potato” and “pregnancy test.” However, the game’s descent into porting madness began innocently enough. The first port that raised eyebrows was to the Super Nintendo, which launched in the US in 1991. At the time, the Super Nintendo lacked the hardware to properly run the game, and folks believed that running Doom on the Super Nintendo was impossible. The SNES had a 16-bit chip that was far too weak to run it, so the only hope was a game cartridge containing a SuperFX chip, a coprocessor that assisted the SNES in processing 3D graphics. 

Despite looking nearly impossible on paper, an enterprising developer for Sculptured Software named Randy Linden undertook the challenge anyway. The game required a significant amount of work. In an interview with Gaming Reinvented, Linden outlined his experience porting the game. 

“The development was challenging for a few reasons, notably, there were no development systems for the SuperFX chip at the time,” Linden said in the interview. “I wrote a complete set of tools — assembler, linker and debugger — before I could even start on the game itself.”

Linden used a “hacked-up” StarFox cartridge, since it included the SuperFX chip necessary to run Doom on a console, and even custom-wrote his own game engine, which he dubbed the Reality Engine, to make it work. 

It wasn’t perfect. The SNES version had five fewer levels than the PC version, no floor or ceiling textures and enemy sprites could only be rendered from the front. That means you couldn’t sneak up on enemies since they were always facing you. Regardless, the game was completed with the help of other Sculptured Games employees and launched for the console. 

This can-do attitude was the first of many such attempts to port Doom onto something where it shouldn’t be, and is the first real example of the popular community sentiment that if it has a screen and a microchip, it can be made to run Doom. 

YouTube creator Equalo wired up several hundred potatoes to power a TI-84 calculator running Doom. 

Equalo/Screenshot by CNET

It only gets weirder from here

It took some time before things went off the rails. The next major weird port was to Texas Instruments graphing calculators, specifically the TI-83 Plus and TI-84 Plus, in the early 2000s. I was actually there for that one, since I had a graphing calculator as a teenager and took computer science classes. Learning how to install Doom on the graphing calculator was a fairly popular mid-class slacking off activity in my school at the time. 

The documentation for all the various things to run Doom is pretty sketchy, so it’s one of those things where if you weren’t there, you may have missed it. In an effort to help piece things together, here are several more ridiculous things that have run Doom over the years. 

Smart appliances: Modern smart appliances are much more powerful than PCs from the 1990s, so basically all of them have the capacity to run Doom. The game has been installed on smart fridges, pressure cookers, air fryers, toasters and washers.

Potatoes: This is a tad misleading. Doom actually ran on a TI-84 Plus graphing calculator, but that graphing calculator was powered by several hundred potatoes rigged together a la Portal 2. 

Pregnancy test: This one is also a bit misleading. Hardware modder Foone Turing showed off a video of Doom gameplay on a pregnancy test. This was accomplished by tearing out the guts, replacing them entirely and running Doom on what was essentially a little computer stuffed into the pregnancy test. Still cool!

A volumetric display: My personal favorite is the volumetric display. Volumetric displays are displays that can display things in three dimensions, such as a holo projector from Star Trek. 

YouTube creator Ancient ran Doom on a very cool volumetric display, rendering the game in true 3D. 

Ancient/Screenshot by CNET

E. coli: Yep, we’re talking about the germs on uncooked chicken. A Ph.D. student named Lauren Ramlan created a screen out of bacteria and then, of course, used it to play Doom. It runs at only a few frames per day and would take approximately six centuries to complete. 

Minecraft: People have done some wild things in Minecraft, from ordering a pizza to accepting a phone call. Players have also built PCs in the game using Redstone strong enough to run Doom. 

The MacBook Pro Touch Bar: The controversial software bar at the top of MacBook Pro laptops was not spared from the meme, as the Touch Bar was, in fact, used to play Doom.

A PDF file: Here’s the link (PDF), but it only works in Chromium browsers such as Google Chrome and Microsoft Edge. It uses Chromium’s PDF engine to run JavaScript, which is then used to run the game. There are limitations, such as all the pixels being text characters instead of graphics, but it works. 

Doom itself: A software modder figured out a code execution exploit in Doom 2 that he used to run the original Doom. It actually ran pretty well. 

Those are just the well-known examples. There are dozens of others, including one Twitch streamer who had a bot that ran Doom based on user inputs from the chat, allowing a Twitch chat to play Doom live. 

Doom came out in the early 1990s and was optimized for hardware from that time, making it a breeze to run on virtually all modern hardware.

ZeniMax

Okay, so why Doom?

It seems a little odd that Doom, of all games, is the one that gets all the attention when it comes to weirdly modified ports to strange and unusual pieces of tech. Why don’t other games enjoy this level of meme success? 

It is far less complicated than you might expect. The developer, id Software, released the source code to the public for nonprofit use in 1997. 

“This code only compiles and runs on Linux,” John Carmack, co-founder of id Software and legendary game developer, wrote on the game’s GitHub. “Still, the code is quite portable, and it should be straightforward to bring it up on just about any platform. Port it to your favorite operating system. Have fun.”

John Romero, who created Doom alongside John Carmack, is seen here playing the game alongside other gamers at Milan Games Week 2016. 

Rosdiana Ciaravolo/Getty Images

That is precisely what people did. They downloaded the completely free source code and ported it to whatever ridiculous device they wanted, essentially making Doom the game that people chose to run on everything. The game was released in the early 1990s, back when computers had processors that measured power in MHz instead of today’s GHz. Virtually any tech device in circulation today is strong enough to play this game, even if it doesn’t have nearly as much horsepower as a modern smartphone or gaming PC. 

Carmack does lament some things in his GitHub post. Due to copyright constraints, the Linux version doesn’t include the sound library. There are code-level mistakes that Carmack recommends developers fix in their own versions of the game, referring to some of his original decisions as “downright silly in retrospect.” It’s reasonable to assume those weren’t high priorities when porting the game to a pregnancy test. 

YouTube creator sammyuri made a computer in Minecraft that could play Minecraft, albeit very slowly.

sammyuri/Screenshot by CNET

Doom isn’t alone

Doom is definitely the most well-known game that gets ported to random or absurd things, but it’s not the only one. There are a handful of other games that’ve seen some strange ports to various devices as well. 

Wolfenstein 3D and Quake: Two more id Software first-person shooter games, and groundbreaking titles in their own right, both of which were released to the open source community years ago. They’ve been ported to all sorts of devices, including the iPod Classic. 

Minecraft: Minecraft is written in Java, and as such, has been decompiled by many people. This allowed people to port the game to all sorts of things, including graphing calculators. Players have also created computers in Minecraft specifically to run Minecraft within itself.

Skyrim: Developer Bethesda Game Studios has ported Elder Scrolls 5: Skyrim to several platforms and once joked about porting the game to fridges, Amazon Echo devices and a pager. 

Super Mario 64: Modders decompiled the game and posted the results on GitHub. Thanks to these efforts, homebrewed ports of the game have popped up for multiple consoles, including the Nintendo 3DS. 

There are other examples, although they tend to stay within the bounds of sanity. Half-Life, Diablo, and Portal all have open-source efforts that have led to homebrewed ports on other game consoles, similar to Super Mario 64. Enterprising Google searchers can find plenty of examples of strange and surprising software ports. For example, did you know that the TI-84 calculator can run a Game Boy emulator? Now you do.

Doom still sits atop the mountain as the game modders prefer when porting a game to something that really shouldn’t run games. Where will it show up next?

Categories: Gadgets

Nothing Ear 3A and Phone 4B Set for Multicolored July 7 Launch

British tech company Nothing is gearing up to launch the next two devices in its ever-expanding product portfolio on July 7. In the phone category, Nothing is set to launch the Phone 4B, the successor to the Phone 4A, which it just announced in March. Meanwhile in audio, its newest offering will be the Ear 3A — likely its next pair of in-ear headphones, building on the success of the Ear 3.

Nothing teased the Phone 4B launch last week, then confirmed over the weekend that the phone was on its way, and gave us a series of pictures and a bunch of details to whet our appetites for the upcoming launch. The company’s phone strategy is very much focused on only releasing one major flagship phone every other year, but delivering a range of budget and mid-range alternatives in the interim.

The upcoming Phone 4B, pictured in blue, has a unibody design that Nothing says is both strong and smooth. The Glyph Bar, which was also on the Phone 4A, will now flash with live updates, and the phone will come with a slimmed-down version of its predecessor’s transparent bump.

The Nothing Ear 3A launch is also scheduled for July 7.

Nothing

On Tuesday, Nothing said it will also launch the Ear 3A on the same day as the Phone 4B. In a teaser image, the company listed four colors — white, black, yellow and pink — presumably letting us know the shades it’s chosen for the upcoming buds.

Nothing has always had a distinct design language that differentiates from its comparatively bland competitors in the Android phone market, which since the company’s inception has been defined by its transparency. But throughout 2026, we’ve seen the company increasingly experiment with color — particularly blue, pink and yellow.

Nothing’s Chief Brand Officer Charlie Smith told me back in March at Mobile World Congress that the company’s embrace of color is an important part of its culture of “rebellious creativity.” “If we want to make technology fun,” Smith said, “we can’t do that by things just being gray, black and white.”

The Phone 4A’s pale pink hue was one of CNET Editor at Large Andrew Lanxon’s favorite things about the phone when he reviewed it back in May. “It’s a fun color that doesn’t take itself too seriously — and that’s refreshing,” he said. “Would I like to see the next model go eye-meltingly magenta? Absolutely.”

On its Ear 3A teaser post, the company has included some brighter tones, but the blue Phone 4B looks very similar in color to the blue iteration of the Phone 4A. Bolder tones for the headphones would make sense, especially given that the launch tag line on Nothing’s website describes them as “your new party pill.”

With July 7 just one week away, we don’t have long to wait to find out exactly what that means.

Categories: Gadgets

How to Keep Yourself Safe in an Extreme Heat Wave

A heat wave in Europe has broken June temperature records and is being blamed for dozens of deaths. Soaring temps are expected to hit the eastern US this week, and you’ll need to stay vigilant and protect yourself and your family from the heat.

National Weather Service forecasters expect a long-lasting heat wave in the central to eastern US that will likely to last into the July 4 holiday weekend. Meteorologists are predicting temperatures in the 90s and low 100s Fahrenheit along with high humidity. That means heat indices near or above 105 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit. 

That means there will be no relief even at hours when the sun isn’t at its strongest. “Overnight lows will also be quite warm,” NWS forecasters wrote, “with some record high minimums possible, bringing little to no relief from the heat in the nighttime hours.” Those nighttime temps can be just as dangerous as the triple-digit highs. 

If you have underlying health conditions, the heat can worsen them if you aren’t careful.

Heat waves are getting worse due to climate change caused largely by the burning of fossil fuels. An analysis by European climate scientists on this week’s heat wave found a similar event in 1976 would’ve been about 3.5 degrees Celsius cooler, and one in 2003 about 2 degrees cooler. “This summer shows that at 1.4°C of global warming, extreme heat is already reaching the limits of our societies’ ability to cope,” the scientists wrote.

As temperatures rise this week, it’s crucial to stay safe and alert of all weather advisories. This may mean staying in and changing your plans or taking extra precautions if you have no choice but to be outside. In extreme heat situations, listening to the experts on how to protect yourself can be a matter of life and death.

Temperatures in London reached 36.4 degrees Celsius, or more than 97 degrees Fahrenheit, as Europe deals with a deadly heat wave. High temperatures are expected for the eastern and central US this week.

Dan Kitwood/Getty Images

Keep an eye on the heat

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has a HeatRisk tracking tool that gives you the daily risk level based on your ZIP code, plus tips to help manage your health in the heat. Pay attention to your weather app for temperatures and weather alerts. You may also see the temperature that it feels like, which can be higher than the “official” temperature because of humidity and other factors.  

During heat waves, you may expect temperatures to cool at night, but sometimes they don’t drop enough to offer genuine relief. Cooler night temperatures give your body a chance to reset from the heat that can impact your body. But when temperatures remain high, your body doesn’t have that chance, which can be dangerous for your health. So even when the sun goes down, continue to pay attention to how hot it is — and not just outside your home.

Make sure your home is cool 

Keeping your home cool is essential to protecting your health during a heat wave also helps keep your pets safe and protect loved ones from the extremely warm temps. 

“Stay in the coolest area of your home as much as possible,” said CNET Editor Corin Cesaric-Eppie. “The National Weather Service also cautions against direct sun exposure as it can result in a sunburn, which makes it more difficult for your body to cool down.”

In your home, air conditioning is the most common way to ensure you stay comfortable and safe.

Cesaric-Epple and CNET’s Labs team have reviewed more than a dozen portable and window AC units and found that window units have optimal cooling performance. Energy Star models can also keep you cool while using less electricity.

If you’re not in the market for a new AC unit, there are other tips to keep your home cool. Consider keeping your curtains closed to prevent sunlight from warming up your home. And use weatherstripping or other materials to seal up any gaps around your doors and windows to keep cool air in and hot, humid air out. 

Stay hydrated 

It’s especially important to stay hydrated during heat waves. Dehydration can be dangerous because your body needs sweat to stay cool. Drink water regularly and take water with you when you go outside. The CDC recommends drinking eight ounces of water every 15 to 20 minutes when working outside in the heat. You should drink in short intervals instead of consuming a large amount all at once. Most importantly, the CDC doesn’t recommend drinking more than 48 ounces of water per hour. 

CNET has more advice to help you stay cool this weekend, and throughout the summer, including a handheld fan we recommend to help you stay cool, and heat illness signs to watch out for. 

Categories: Gadgets

Dataland, the First AI Museum, Converts Info Into a Multisensory Kaleidoscope

Whatever I was expecting from the world’s first AI museum isn’t what I saw at Dataland. The brand-new facility is a showcase for different ways to beautify data visualization using large language models — part artistic translation and part experiential exhibit that invites patrons to interact as they walk through its handful of rooms.

But in an age of generative AI models spitting out slop mimicry of human-made art, it’s incredibly easy to get the wrong idea about Dataland.

Days before its doors open on June 20, I visited the downtown Los Angeles space where Dataland is housing its modest but vibrant museum. It’s tucked into the Grand LA, the most artistic office park I’ve ever seen, with open-air spiral staircases and a view of the striking Frank Gehry-designed Walt Disney Concert Hall across the street. The doors open to an entryway detailing the debut exhibition, Machine Dreams: Rainforests. Then the exhibition begins: five specially built, windowless rooms of varying sizes, their sleek black floors reflecting swirling colors.

Refik Anadol giving a tour of his museum, Dataland.

David Lumb/CNET

Dataland is the creation of Refik Anadol, a Turkish artist, programmer and researcher who’s been creating his version of AI art for a decade. His signature style is to use algorithms he’s programmed to translate raw data into wild, dynamic visuals — most commonly, orbs of shifting color that pulse like waves, a churning panoply of form and hue. The context of the data matters less than its conversion into a hypnotizing, ever-shifting display.

Anadol placed one such piece in the Museum of Modern Art in New York City a few years ago. He’s also created more experimental works layered over public spaces at the Guggenheim Museum Bilbao and Barcelona’s famous Gaudí-designed building Casa Batllo, among others. Dataland is a permanent installation showcasing his experiments in merging information and visuals. Or, as he puts it, “Data is my pigment.”

It might be one of the worst times to launch anything that merges art and AI. Any hint of using AI in traditionally creative work draws scrutiny and skepticism. Film and TV shows generated by AI have flopped, while gamers have swiftly rebuked any studios or publishers they’ve heard use AI in production. Today, there’s no consensus on how much AI is acceptable in artistic expression: Many believe using it anywhere in the production process taints the work with artificiality and insincerity. That’s because images generated by AI often resemble the art and styles they’re trained on, and can even be prompted to look just like they came out of Studio Ghibli or The Simpsons. 

The museum Anadol designed with his team does none of that.

The museum’s works are not drawn on canvas and don’t imitate traditional art. Unlike the AI slop flooding the internet, they’re not churned out to compete with human-crafted works; they’re based on data. And their output is an experience, making the museum feel more like an immersive attraction than an art gallery. Think of Dataland as a supercharged version of the Van Gogh experience that recently toured the US, but that’s interested in giving attendees a show and having them inform the performance. 

The Data Pavilion, the largest room in Dataland.

David Lumb/CNET

At the start of the tour, Anadol posed Dataland’s central question: Can artwork feel us back? And if so, what does that mean?

“This is an AI museum dedicated to human-machine collaboration,” Anadol said. “There’s a lot of hysteria, paranoia, fears and concerns [around AI.] We felt, how can we share the best of the best digital arts in a place architecturally built from scratch with this medium in mind — digital art, specifically, [and] AI art is a part of digital art. ” 

Attendees will likely get hung up on the balance of the human and the machine in what they see — I certainly did. Anadol and the team behind the museum have given their LLM free rein to vary the visuals and sound while adhering to a broader preset sequence of themes.

“Art happens in the mind and the soul, and it requires significant work and research, thinking and imagining and creativity,” Anadol said. “There is no text here, there is no prompting here. The emotions of the audience, visitors, listening to the heart of the rainforest, and me, as well as of course artists, together create the artworks in real-time.”

Dataland creator Refik Anadol showing some of the many photos among the data trove that the museum sends through an LLM to translate into audiovisual experiences.

David Lumb/CNET

Dataland’s uphill battle to present data-driven AI art

It might have been better if Anadol had billed his production as a Data Creation Museum, free of the baggage surrounding AI and the questions about exactly what role it plays in the works on display.

AI is intrinsic to creating the visuals I saw, but it’s born from specific datasets — in this exhibition’s case, info sourced from and images taken of 16 rainforests around the world. In our tour of the museum, Anadol stressed that everything we saw was built on “ethical data” — that is, ethically sourced data licensed from the Smithsonian and other repositories. 

That doesn’t guarantee any information used wasn’t stolen at some point before it ended up in those collections, but provenance will continue to be a challenge for anyone working with licensed datasets, and ethical sourcing is far from a new issue for museums and galleries. 

All the visuals were made with a proprietary large language model, which Anadol calls the “Large Nature Model,” built from rainforest images and available to the public for free. This LLM generates the museum’s imagery on the fly. Anadol says it runs in data centers in Oregon powered by sustainable energy.

Writ large, Dataland is a mix of old and new — walking through its rooms feels like stepping inside one of today’s Instagram-friendly immersive experiences. What isn’t obvious is how the jumble of data produced by museum visitors factors into the audiovisual experience, theoretically making every visit different. You’d have to go back and compare to understand what’s changed, because as you walk through the first time, there’s little to show how your presence is altering the art you’re seeing.

At $49 for admission, Dataland is more of a sumptuous curiosity than a can’t-miss destination, unless you’re ready to do some cognitive legwork — a visual feast that’s far more enriching when you stop to examine its ingredients. Walk through in the 60 to 75 minutes most visitors are expected to spend there and it’ll probably linger in your mind as an enjoyable multisensory jaunt. But think about the floods of data we consume and produce every day, and the museum becomes an intriguing springboard for translating and interpreting that data through processes like Anadol’s.

David Lumb/CNET

Delving into the AI museum: Seeing, feeling, smelling, eating

The museum begins with an intake room that introduces the exhibition. As Dataland opens — and likely through its first year — that exhibition is Machine Dreams: Rainforests, which uses data from 16 rainforests around the world to create a multisensory experience. Anadol expects to rotate exhibitions annually.

The first room sets the stage for the other four, with walls of LED displays that project a dynamic light show like the world’s most advanced screensaver. The wall screens were the only light in the room, reflected off the slick black floor meticulously kept clean to preserve the mirror effect. (I was asked to wear over-shoe coverings during my preview tour, though public attendees don’t have to). 

After a short preview of the rooms ahead of us, we scanned a printed QR code (public attendees scan one via a mobile app) to unlock a box containing a pair of devices. The first is a simple wrist wearable to track your location and vitals (heart rate, skin temperature, etc.), generating the data that supposedly tweaks your experience. The second is a horseshoe-shaped plastic scent emitter that hangs around your neck and quietly releases smells based on the part of the exhibition you’re near. In my experience, it was barely noticeable, but that’s far better than being overwhelmed by scent.

The Data Pavilion, accessible via escalator, is the largest room in the museum.

David Lumb/CNET

The tour group took an escalator down to the Data Pavilion. It is by far the largest room in the museum and serves as the centerpiece and experiential anchor. Screens stretched 30-feet up the walls to the ceiling, and projectors seamlessly extend the visualizations to the floor and ceiling. Different “chapters” shifted the visuals from a rainbow spectrum of strings and dots to a cyberworld of chips resembling the inside of a server rack to a digitized forest. Anadol pointed out the lidar scanners in the ceiling that track everyone’s position; I watched as projected fireflies spread around my feet while light vines on the walls waved along to my movement. 

“So when we enter the museum, and, of course, when I enter the gallery, the whole gallery is sensing us — our heartbeats, our emotions, our movements,” Anadol said. 

I have no reason to doubt it, though I didn’t notice my data’s contributions to the experience. I was more impressed by the high-production visuals and sound than by contemplating the “real-time sand molecules personally composed for you,” as he described. Again, I have to figure out for myself which parts of the experience were tailored to me, and whether that changes my perception of them.

At a certain point, you move on from the audiovisual kaleidoscope of the Data Pavilion to the next room. It’s a long hall with a few exhibits, including a wall of dots representing all the data used in the museum — a constellation of information. There was a tray of chocolates made by a local chef who had crafted the flavors based on the rainforest data — or at least descriptive words Anadol selected to represent all the soil, plant life, animals and more. Each bonbon represented a taste profile for a strata of the environment; my favorite was flavored with mushrooms for the fungal floor of the forest.

The Machine Dreams: Rainforests exhibition includes chocolates from a local chocolatier who crafts them based on descriptions Anadol and his Dataland team provided.

David Lumb/CNET

What do you get out of an AI museum?

Dataland is impressive in its execution, and inconclusive in its takeaways. Simply taking it all in is enjoyable enough, letting the swirling colors and sound wash over you, with polished reflective floors and not a stray cable in sight to distract. You’re seeing data, but there’s no obvious lesson in how it’s translated. 

The exhibit in the fourth room, the Infinity Room, is a great example. Dream of Ruwe Pinu, as it’s called, is a metaphorical journey inspired by a dream Anadol had about a bird during one of his trips to the Amazon. It begins in complete darkness before launching into an audiovisual experience that’s nearly blinding in its vibrancy. While the audio features a 1987 recording of the last male of a species of Hawaiian bird, the visuals coalesce into a hummingbird flying through a rainforest in high-resolution graphics. It felt like a kind of conventional escapism — and, at times, like I was watching a computer graphics stress test.

Dataland’s Infinity Room during the Machine Dreams: Rainforests exhibition featured “The Dream of Ruwe Pinu,” an experience focused on a bird in a rainforest that includes audio recordings of an extinct Hawaiian bird.

David Lumb/CNET

The museum’s final room, the AI Sanctuary, showed the tour group’s personal data summarized in an “emotion score” to gauge how excited, involved and moved we were by the exhibits. I scored lower than almost everyone else. (Read into that what you will.) After seeing our museum stats, the room shifted into one of Anadol’s signature paintings of light and color, which we were told was our collective tour group’s data, swirling in color and form. 

It’s cool to see our body data translated into an abstract painting. But without any visible relationship between data values and motion, I was left visually whelmed but emotionally inert.

If you like, you can have your personal museum data converted into a paper disc, like a drink coaster, which you can view at a kiosk or take to the merch store to have your activity printed on a T-shirt. (Otherwise, the data is deleted; Dataland doesn’t store it.)

My personal data generated during my trip through the museum was transferred to a drink coaster-like wafer that can be used for personalized merchandise.

David Lumb/CNET

I was hoping for more insights into my personal activity cross-referenced with the exhibits — some relationship between the art and my own data beyond the metrics I could already track with a wearable or smartwatch. That’s a steep ask for a $49-and-up ticket. Perhaps a future exhibition at Dataland will get there; Anadol pointed to the chocolates as one example of the kinds of collaborations he and his team could explore.

“Sure, we have AI in there, but it’s a human-machine collaboration, and we are every single one of us experimenting with new ideas,” Anadol said. “Every year we’ll have another breakthrough, I’m guessing. So that’s just the beginning of version one, day one.”

If any space has the infrastructural capacity to explore new ways of creating digital art, it’s Dataland. Tucked in the hallways behind the museum’s public displays are backrooms filled with racks of GPUs — 150 Nvidia RTX Pro 6000 Blackwell industrial-grade graphics cards that retail for $13,000 or more apiece, which power the visualizations across the museum. 

One of two rooms containing racks of advanced GPUs used to power the colossal visual experience in Dataland, with Anadol in the foreground.

David Lumb/CNET

This absurd level of graphical horsepower is very promising for future exhibits, as is Anadol’s relationship with Nvidia, which he demonstrated onstage at GTC 2025 to introduce his AI art. (He showed me a message from Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang congratulating him on the opening of Dataland.) Further, the Large Nature Model itself runs on a Google server cluster in Oregon that uses sustainable energy, Anadol said. 

There’s a lot that Dataland could become, and it’s opened at a time of great potential change. Anadol acknowledges that AI and technology are changing people’s lives and disciplines, which is cause for concern: “I’ve been using AI for 10 years, and even sometimes I feel that it’s too fast,” he said. But it’s here with us, transforming our lives.

“I always believe the future of inspiration, joy and hope,” Anadol said. “As an artist, I found my role in society is to tell the world what this technology is and show the world how to use it as best I can.”

Categories: Gadgets

Shark’s New Transformer Vacuum Breaks Down Into Three Different Vacuums

I love cordless vacuums, and I don’t just say that because I’m one of CNET’s primary testers of the category. I say it because switching from corded vacuums to cordless vacuums was a big quality-of-life upgrade, thanks to the ease of use and maneuverability around my apartment. The downside is that cordless vacuums don’t usually match the suction power and cleaning capabilities of upright or canister models. 

Shark’s PowerDetect Transformer 3-in-1 is the company’s attempt to address this trade-off without forcing you to buy multiple vacuums.

“The upright vacuum has looked and worked the same way for decades,” said Petra Oman, vice president of marketing at SharkNinja, in a press statement. “We saw an opportunity to rethink the category by eliminating the bulky hose and creating a system that adapts to the way people actually clean. Transformer delivers the deep-cleaning performance consumers expect from an upright, with the flexibility and reach needed to clean everything from floors and carpets to stairs, furniture, ceilings and the car.”

The main upright dustbin is detachable when you want to use it as a slimmer cordless vac. 

Shark

As the name suggests, the PowerDetect Transformer is three vacuums in one. It’s a full-size upright vacuum that’s intended for deep cleaning carpets and hardwood floors with the strongest suction. Shark says you can remove the main canister with one click, and it’ll turn into a slim stick vacuum for regular, lightweight cleaning, getting under furniture and into other tight spots. One more click turns it into a handheld vacuum, making it easier to clean stairs, upholstery, corners and cars. 

In terms of specs, the Transformer will have key features from Shark’s most popular models, including LED lighting to help you find debris and automatic detection of dirt levels, flooring types, edges and movement to automatically adjust suction and cleaning performance. It features anti-tangle brushrolls, odor-neutralizing tech like the Shark Stratos and HEPA filtration. It’ll also come with an auto-emptying system that empties the debris into the main dustbin when the handheld clicks back into place. 

I haven’t had a chance to go hands-on with this vacuum yet, and I’m not entirely sure how the system breaks down. I’ll be testing it both at home and at CNET’s Louisville lab. The most interesting question will be whether the PowerDetect Transformer can truly deliver the cleaning performance of an upright vacuum without compromising elsewhere. 

The Transformer has all the key features we’ve liked from the most popular Shark models.

Shark

Price and availability 

The Shark PowerDetect Transformer 3-in-1 will be available on SharkNinja and TikTok Shop for $529. It’ll also come to Amazon, Walmart, Best Buy, Target, Costco and Sam’s Club. 

Categories: Gadgets

The Genius Way I Cleared the Dreaded ‘iPhone Storage Is Full’ Message

If you’ve ever managed files on your computer, you know it can be, for the most part, very simple. There are drives, and in those drives are folders. In those folders are files. You can open them up, move them around and (barring some special circumstances) delete what you don’t need. It’s easy to organize in specific ways, by file size, for instance, to make managing them that much easier. 

Plug an Android phone into your computer, and you’ll find much of the same. There are folders and files, making it quick and easy to transfer or back up data and clean out the large files filling up your phone. 

But if you plug in an iPhone, all bets are off. Can anything be done to make managing files on an iPhone easier? The answer is yes… sort of.

The problem

My wife recently got the dreaded warning messages that her iPhone storage was full. Apple helpfully shows how much storage is occupied by different types of data. If you’ve ever faced a similar warning, you’ve probably noticed that a great deal of that space is photos and videos. That was the case for my wife, and I figured a quick sweep to delete the biggest ones, often 4K resolution, would free up plenty of space. 

That turned out to be true, but the process of clearing them out turned into more of a hassle than I expected.

Cleaning up your iPhone’s storage can prove tricky.

Mark Knapp/CNET

Accessing files on the iPhone

Getting to the files on an iPhone isn’t too difficult. You can browse them freely on the phone itself, though it’s not always readily apparent when a file is on the iPhone or actually stored in iCloud and just visible on the phone. This is a fairly slow way to manage files. Even worse, Apple doesn’t provide a way to quickly see which files are the largest. So, making a quick sweep of large, unnecessary files is not possible. The best that can be done here is to simply view only videos and sift through them one by one. 

Alternatively, you can plug an iPhone into a computer. After accepting a prompt on the device, it will show its photo library to the computer. That’s a good start, but still not ideal. It breaks the library into folders by the month the content was captured. If you’ve owned your phone for a few years, this means you’ll be looking at dozens of folders. Checking the folder size is yet again a one-by-one process.

Also readThe Lazy Way to Reclaim Your iPhone Storage Without Losing a Single Photo

Looking to simplify the process, I figured I’d copy backups of all the folders from the oldest year, and then bulk delete them from the phone. Nope. Not only does the iPhone seem to have a penchant for denying large file offloads by timing out partway through the backup, but it also refuses to allow the deletion of the folders. So then, to ensure data safety, I assume, the process becomes a tedious little nightmare: copy folder > check that copy was successful > open folder > select all files > delete all files > proceed to next folder > repeat. For a few years’ worth of folders and relying on the 480-megabit-per-second speeds of the phone’s USB 2.0, this becomes a lengthy and tedious process that doesn’t even effectively target the original goal of clearing out large files. 

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

There are workarounds

I assumed I was missing something. There had to be a better way. I already knew Google Drive was out. Sure, Wi-Fi uploads can actually outpace USB 2.0 speeds, but not always by much. Also, having reviewed a few iPhones over the years, I’ve found that every time I try to upload a bunch of photos to Google Drive, the iPhone will fail to complete all of the uploads and not offer to try again or even indicate in any way which files didn’t make the leap. 

Sure, there’s iCloud. Everything can just get backed up there and deleted from the iPhone. But that’s a costly solution that actually rewards Apple for not having a better method for iPhone owners to clean up their phone’s storage. 

Yes, the iPhone’s Files app can sort files by file size. And that’s a great way to tackle some of the bigger junk sitting on your phone. However, that’s not combined with a quick way to back up the file elsewhere, nor does it let you see the photos and videos on the camera reel. 

There is a workaround to view photos and videos in the Files app, or at least it appears that way. You can go to the Photos app, select all your photos/videos either one by one or, if they’re in a collection, by hitting select all. Then you select Share to Files. From there, you can see them in files, sort by size and even (it appears) delete them. 

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

So what’s the problem with that? For one thing, this still doesn’t help back them up elsewhere. But more importantly, it doesn’t delete the original files. When the Photos app shares those files with the Files app, it makes copies to share, and when you delete them in the Files app, it just deletes the copies, leaving the original right where it was, taking up space.

I checked the Windows Photos app, which has an iPhone syncing feature. It shows all the local images in one pane, shows file sizes and allows bulk selection and deletion. However, it also doesn’t allow sorting by file size or type. It will let you import items, but afterward it will deselect them in the phone, so you can’t promptly delete them. If you toggle “Show only selected items” before importing, then you can quickly reselect the ones you imported and delete them. It’s a step in the right direction for quick backup and deletion, but it doesn’t help target large files to make file management easy. 

I also checked the Apple Devices app for Windows, iTunes and Windows Phone Link. None of these can do the job, either. In fact, the Apple Devices app just tries to get me to fill the iPhone up with even more photos from my computer. 

Backing up your iPhone on your Mac.

Nelson Aguilar/CNET

Just to cover my bases, I tried Mac as well. The Photos app on Mac can show iPhone photos and let you import and then delete, but it also doesn’t have any sorting methods to help quickly figure out what’s worth deleting. The Mac has no better access to the phone’s photo library file structure than Windows does. On a Mac, accessing the iPhone in Finder brings up sync settings. You can sync photos, but not manage them. You can manage storage, but just for movies, shows, songs, podcasts, audiobooks and books — not photos and videos from the camera. 

Also readHow to Free Up Your iPhone’s Storage by Deleting Data You Don’t Need

A helpful tool

Hitting a wall at every turn sent me trudging around the internet, where I found a sparkle of hope. There’s another workaround of sorts, even if it wasn’t the answer I hoped for.

A true genius among us recognized the problem and used Shortcuts to create the sort of tool Apple should have had all along. In Shortcuts, they built a quick automation that analyzes the video library, sorts by size and then creates a new album with the 30 largest video files. From there, you can then go into the Photos app, open that new album and select any of those large files you want to delete. Alas, as wonderfully as this helps with clean up, it doesn’t help with backing up the files first. So it separates the process into backing up and deleting, rather than moving or offloading. It’s a good place to start, though.

While this method still doesn’t improve the iPhone’s file management options, it at least helps clear out space so the iPhone can go back to working properly… even if properly doesn’t mean conveniently

Categories: Gadgets

Origin PC Millennium Desktop Review: A Smart Build but Not the Perfect Configuration


Pros

  • Exceptional 1080p performance
  • Good upgradeability
  • Convenient air filtration
  • Clean aesthetic and cable management

Cons

  • Premium pricing
  • Needs a lot of space
  • Included storage is just so-so

The Origin PC Millennium makes some curious choices, but its strong foundation and customization options let you make smarter ones. The giant gaming desktop starts at $3,139, but as our test unit was configured, it’s not a very smart buy against RTX 5080-powered machines like the Starforge Explorer III Pro or Lenovo Legion Tower 7 Gen 10. It’s also dramatically more expensive than the Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 without providing much extra performance. 

Make no mistake, it’s a strong machine, but spending close to $4,000 for decent 1080p gaming, lagging 4K performance is probably not a compelling choice. Still, there’s room to improve here with different options. That may not get the Millennium deep enough into value territory to compete against the Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10, but the Origin is a solid, well-built (if massive) PC that should be a lot easier to upgrade than any Lenovo desktop. That’s a long-term value that can add up. With PC component pricing as messy as it is lately, the Origin PC Millennium at least manages to stack up well against the price of building a similar machine yourself.

Origin PC Millennium

Price as reviewed $4,196Size 100.2 liter (21.5 x 12.5 x 22.8 in/546 x 318 x 578 mm), 51lbsMotherboard Gigabyte X870E AORUS ELITE Wi-FiCPU 4.7GHz AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3DMemory 32GB DDR5-6000Graphics Nvidia GeForce RTX 5070 TiStorage 2TB NVMe M.2 PCIe Gen 4 SSD (boot) (Corsair MP600 Core XT R2)Networking 2.5GbE, Realtek Wi-Fi 7 RTL8922AE 802.1be, Bluetooth 5.4Connections USB4 Type-C (x2 rear), USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-A (x2 rear), USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type-C (x1 front), USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type-A (x4 front, x4 rear), USB 2.0 (x4 rear), 3.5mm audio connector (x1 front, x2 rear), SPDIF (x1 rear), 2.5Gb Ethernet, HDMI 2.1 (x1 on motherboard, x1 on GPU), DisplayPort 2.1b (x3 on GPU)Operating system Windows 11 Home

Our test unit came with the configuration above, notably including a motherboard that’s not offered in Origin PC’s configuration choices any longer, currently replaced by an Asus ROG motherboard. At the time of writing, this configuration had a listed price of $4,196, but an ongoing discount until July 31 lowers that to $3,693. That may be a critical discount, as the Origin PC Millennium otherwise costs nearly as much as many RTX 5080-packed systems, like the Lenovo Legion T7 34IAS10 or Starforge Explorer III Pro, while only carrying an RTX 5070 Ti itself. Also, given the price fluctuations caused by RAM, SSD and GPU shortages, this price could go up (then again, so will the others). 

So. Many. Fans.

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

The Millennium starts with a base price of $3,139 (though currently on sale for $2,762). This gets you an Intel Core Ultra 5 260K, an MSI Z890-P Wi-Fi motherboard, 32GB (2×16) of Crucial Pro DDR5-6400 memory, an RTX 5060 8GB, Windows 11 Home, a 1TB Corsair MP600 Core XT R2 drive and a Corsair 850x Shift Series Plus Gold power supply. Technically, you can knock the price down a little by leaving out a graphics card entirely, but that would be financially foolish since you’d be giving up an RTX 5060 ($299) just to save $88.

Origin PC offers plenty of customization. You get a choice of both Intel Core Ultra 200-series and some 14th-gen Intel Core processors, as well as several Ryzen 9000 Series processors. Regardless of CPU choice, Origin PC has a base MSI motherboard and an Asus ROG motherboard as a pricey ($491 in the case of AMD) upgrade. The 14th-gen Intel Core processors are limited to an MSI motherboard. 

The cooling system is quiet and efficient. 

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

Origin PC offers 32GB, 64GB and 96GB memory capacities, though only some configurations can get the 96GB capacity. You can get one or two M.2 SSDs installed. The drive options range from 1TB to 8TB, largely using Corsair MP600 or MP700 drives or a Samsung 9100 Pro. Graphics options range from the RTX 5060 up to the RTX 5090 from Nvidia. The Radeon RX 9070 XT is the sole option from AMD. 

Power supply options include the Corsair 850x Shift, Corsair RM1000x Shift, Corsair RM1200x Shift and Corsair HX1500i, though certain hardware configurations may limit these options depending on their power requirements. All configurations include the Corsair iCUE Link Titan 360 RX RGB AIO liquid cooler for the CPU and seven Corsair iCUELink RX120 RGB case fans. Origin PC offers some further customization options such as front I/O placement, a side panel display and UV prints. Why all the Corsair components? It’s Origin PC’s parent company. 

Making the most of 3D V-Cache

The Origin PC Millennium has excellent performance. For one thing, it’s not struggling with heat. Six intake fans mean plenty of fresh air getting to the graphics card and CPU’s 360-millimeter radiator. Under a heavy gaming load, the Origin PC Millennium hardly stirs up more than a faint whirring. After all, with so many fans, none of them has to work too hard.

My review system’s 5070 Ti GPU did well, but you can go up to a 5090 if you’ve got the money.

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

For general computing, the Origin PC Millennium has more than enough might, as demonstrated by the 11,502-point score in PCMark, which may be the highest score I’ve ever seen on that test. Scores of just 5,000 and above tend to be a good sign for a PC, so 11,000-plus points suggest the system won’t struggle one bit with office work. 

The AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3D isn’t the be-all-end-all of CPUs, but it has some major merits. Multicore performance is middle-of-the-road for high-end gaming CPUs, though single-core performance proves more competitive. The real edge this CPU provides is in 1080p gaming. 

The cabling is nice and tidy.

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

The CPU’s special 3D V-Cache is like magic for 1080p gaming. In spite of its RTX 5070 Ti, the Origin PC Millennium can outstrip RTX 5080-powered systems at 1080p and not even by small margins. It blew past the Alienware Area-51 (Intel Core Ultra 9 285K plus RTX 5080), Starforge Explorer III Pro (Intel Core Ultra 7 265K plus Nvidia RTX 5080) and Lenovo Legion T7 34IAS10 (Intel Core Ultra 9 285K plus Nvidia RTX 5080) in our Guardians of the Galaxy and Shadow of the Tomb Raider benchmarks. 

However, those systems retake their lead if you bump the resolution up to 4K. They also outshine the Origin PC Millennium in 3DMark’s synthetic benchmarks. Looking at the Velocity Micro SX3 Raptor Z95A I tested a while back (AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3D paired with an Nvidia RTX 5080 FE) as a reference, the Origin PC Millennium could likely jump right back into the lead if it also had an RTX 5080. 

Corsair’s iCUE software runs the lightshow. 

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

The RTX 5070 Ti’s advantages over the non-Ti variant are clear, but strictly looking at frames-per-dollar value, Origin PC might simply be asking too high a price. The Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 is about half the price, half the size and makes good use of an AMD Ryzen 7 7800X3D and RTX 5070 to get within about 10% of the Origin PC Millennium’s 1080p performance.

The Corsair MP600 Core XT R2 included in the system isn’t a standout either. It lags behind what’s packed into a lot of systems I’ve tested over the last year or so, including cheaper systems. It’s fine, but I’d opt to get the minimum available option from Origin PC and then augment with some better drives afterward. 

Big and roomy with some smart (and not so smart) choices

The Origin PC Millennium’s case is interesting. While it measures 21.5 by 12.5 by 22.8 inches for a total of roughly 100 liters of volume, that measurement accounts for rather sizable corner pieces that expand the width. Without those, the case becomes a more reasonable 9.8 inches wide and that brings the volume down to 78.6 liters. You’ll still need to find space for a 100-liter desktop, but you’ll be putting a smaller actual case into that space.  

You’ll need this handle to move this beast of a PC around. 

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

Those metal corner pieces are handy for hoisting the heavy and sizable system around. There’s really nowhere else great to grab it. A small hand strap is included at the rear for carrying, but a clean tear before it even reached me for testing was enough indication that it wasn’t up to the task.

Overall, the case design is commendable. It has plenty of space, as you’d hope for such a large system, and it makes good use of it. The power supply actually gets to sit sideways in the base, making for easy access to its modular ports. The front has nice, deep air scoops, so the three 120mm fans at the front aren’t starved for fresh air despite being behind a glass panel. There’s also space for three more 120mm intake fans on the side of the system. Both of those inlets (as well as the bottom grille) are covered with a fine metal mesh that filters out dust. These filters are easy to remove and rinse when they get dirty. 

While there are some air filters in the case, there is no filter for the top fan vent. 

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

With six intake fans, one rear exhaust and three radiator fans blowing out through the top of the case, there should be good positive pressure inside to keep dust out of unfiltered openings. The top of the case is one of those unfiltered openings, so it could see some gradual buildup whenever the system is powered down. Fortunately, the Millennium shouldn’t actively suck dust into itself. 

There are also some awkward choices inside the Origin PC Millennium. Perhaps the worst offender is the approach to the 2.5-inch drive bays. Behind the motherboard, there are four holders for 2.5-inch drives, but Origin PC has nullified three of them. One is occupied by the special fan controller. Two have had their mounting screw holes appropriated to hold zip ties that guide some peripheral power cables, leaving just one drive holder actually open. While I’d maybe forgive this in a smaller system, the Origin PC Millennium case has more space than anything else. Thankfully, there’s room in the main compartment to throw in a multidrive cage of your own if you want. 

The port assortment is ample, but will vary depending on your motherboard choice. 

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

There are also some downsides to the side panels. The metal ones feel and sound flimsy, which hurts the build’s otherwise premium feel. It could greatly benefit from some smartly placed vibration-damping pads. The glass side panel is just awkward to remove. It has a toolless design, but because of the metal corner pieces of the case, I unavoidably slammed the panel into the corner piece and then dropped it to the floor when removing it. The fall is short, and the slam isn’t extreme, but it would be nice to have a smoother way to remove the panel. Getting it back into place is equally awkward. 

It’s hard to be too mad, though, as the internal cable routing is so clean. The system is tidy. All the RGB fans glowing inside don’t illuminate a rats’ nest interior. There’s also a clean view of the little display on the CPU water pump. 

Further upgrades (apart from 2.5-inch drivers) appear fairly easy. The system has two extra RAM slots, two extra PCIe x16 slots (PCIe 4.0 x4 and PCIe 3.0 x4 bandwidth) and three extra M.2 slots in our test configurations. The Asus ROG motherboard option will have even more M.2 slots. 

Plenty of I/O choices on the back.

Joseph Maldonado/CNET

The system also comes with a considerable host of ports. It has four USB-A ports and one USB-C port at the front, all at 5-gigabits-per-second bandwidth. The rear has a ton of connections as well, but since our test configuration’s motherboard isn’t available, the ports it includes won’t be what you might get. The MSI motherboard, for instance, only gets one USB4 port, while the Asus motherboard offers even more USB-C ports and six 10Gbps USB-A ports. 

So basically, the Millennium is big, highly upgradable, highly customizable, but pricey. Definitely be careful with your build options, too.

Geekbench 6 (single core)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 2,729Minisforum AtomMan G7 Ti 2,833Dell XPS 8960 2,948Alienware Area-51 3,149Origin PC Millennium 3,327Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 3,303Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 3,382

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Geekbench 6 (multicore)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 14,349Minisforum AtomMan G7 Ti 16,959Origin PC Millennium 17,217Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 18,338Dell XPS 8960 18,699Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 20,998Alienware Area-51 21,929

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Cinebench 2024 CPU (multicore)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 1,041Origin PC Millennium 1,267Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 1,321Minisforum AtomMan G7 Ti 1,431Dell XPS 8960 1,554Alienware Area-51 2,313Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 2,256

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Shadow of the Tomb Raider gaming test (1080p)

HP Omen 35L 174Alienware Area-51 248Dell XPS 8960 250Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 289Origin PC Millennium 336Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 362Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 397

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance (FPS)

Guardians of the Galaxy gaming test (4K)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen10 125HP Omen 35L 139Origin PC Millennium 155Alienware Area-51 177Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 187Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 263

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance (FPS)

3DMark Fire Strike Ultra (4K)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 14,610HP Omen 35L 16,426Dell XPS 8960 17,525Origin PC Millennium 17,933Alienware Area-51 21,463Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 21,665Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 33,075

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

3DMark Speed Way (4K)

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 5,870Origin PC Millennium 7,505Dell XPS 8960 7,520Alienware Area-51 8,717Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 9,009Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 14,536

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

The Rift Breaker CPU (1080p)

Alienware Area-51 166Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 201Dell XPS 8960 202Origin PC Millennium 229Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 254Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 268

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Procyon Stable Diffusion XL

Lenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen 10 2,672Origin PC Millennium 3,260HP Omen 35L 3,656Alienware Area-51 3,814Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A 4,257Corsair Vengeance A7500 Air 7,144

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Configurations

Alienware Area-51 Microsoft Windows 11 Pro; 3.7GHz Intel Core Ultra 9 285K; 64GB DDR5-6400; 16GB Nvidia GeForce RTX 5080 graphics; 2TB SSDDell XPS 8960 Microsoft Windows 11 Home;3.4GHz Intel Core i714700K; 21GB DDR5 RAM; 16GB Nvidia RTX 4080 Super graphics; 1TB SSDCorsair Vengeance A7500 Air Microsoft Windows 11 Home; 4.4Ghz AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D; 64GB DDR5-4800 RAM; Nvidia RTX 5090 graphics; 2TB Corsair MP700 Elite (boot drive); 2TB Corsair MP600 Core XT HP Omen 35L Microsoft Windows 11 Pro; 4.2GHz AMD Ryzen 7 8700G; 64GB DDR5 3,600MHz; 16GB Nvidia RTX 4080 Super graphics; 2TB SSD + 1TB SSDLenovo Legion Tower 5 Gen10 Microsoft Windows 11 Home; 4.2GHz AMD Ryzen 7 7800X3D; 32GB DDR5-5600 RAM; Nvidia RTX 5070 graphics; 1TB NVMe M.2 PCIe Gen 4 SSDMinisforum AtomMan G7 Ti Microsoft Windows 11 Home; 2.2GHz Intel Core i9-14900HX; 32GB DDR5 5,600MHz RAM; 8GB Nvidia RTX 4070 graphics; 1TB SSDOrigin PC Millennium Microsoft Windows 11 Home; AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3D; 32GB DDR5-6000 RAM; 16GB Nvidia GeForce RTX 5070 Ti; 2TB NVMe M.2Velocity Micro Raptor Z95A Microsoft Windows 11 Home; 2.5GHz AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3D; 64GB DDR5 RAM; 16GB Nvidia GeForce RTX 5080 graphics; 2TB SSD

Categories: Gadgets

Your Home Router Was a Target of Russian Military Intelligence. Here’s What to Do Now

The April 7 advisory from the FBI and NSA carried a message most home router owners probably didn’t expect to find directed at them: Your device may have been part of a Russian military intelligence operation. The GRU unit known as APT28 — also known as Fancy Bear and Forest Blizzard — spent at least two years compromising home and small office routers across 23 US states, using the access to intercept communications and mask broader cyberattack activity. Federal agents remotely reset thousands of affected devices. The five-step fix that keeps them secure from here is yours to complete.

The attack targeted small-office/home-office routers, also known as SOHO routers, and was carried out by a unit in the Russian military intelligence agency, the GRU. Government agencies are urging people to follow basic router hygiene steps, such as updating to the latest firmware and changing default login credentials. The UK’s National Cyber Security Centre includes a number of TP-Link routers specifically targeted by the hackers.

While that news sounds pretty alarming, it’s worth keeping in mind that the attack compromised enterprise routers specifically, so your home Wi-Fi router likely isn’t at risk. That said, some of the affected routers can be used as standard home routers, so it’s worth checking whether your model was exploited in the attack.

“There is a big trend of exploiting routers these days, and that goes both for the consumer and enterprise or corporate routers,” Daniel Dos Santos, vice president of research at the cybersecurity company Forescout, told CNET.

What type of attack is this?

A news release from the NSA notes that the attack indiscriminately targeted a wide pool of routers, with the goal of gathering information on “military, government and critical infrastructure.”

This attack is linked to threat actors within the Russian GRU — which go by APT28, Fancy Bear, Forest Blizzard and other names — and has been ongoing since at least 2024, according to the FBI. 

It’s known as a Domain Name System hijacking operation, in which DNS requests are intercepted by changing the default network configurations on SOHO routers, allowing the actors to see a user’s traffic unencrypted. 

“For nation-state actors like Forest Blizzard, DNS hijacking enables persistent, passive visibility and reconnaissance at scale,” says a Microsoft Threat Intelligence report on the attack. 

Microsoft identified more than 200 organizations and 5,000 consumer devices impacted by the GRU’s attack. 

Which routers were affected?

The FBI’s announcement refers to one router specifically, the TP-Link TL-WR841N, a Wi-Fi 4 model that was originally released in 2007. The UK’s National Cyber Security Centre lists 23 TP-Link models that were targeted, but notes that it is likely not exhaustive.

Here is the list of affected devices:

  • TP-Link LTE Wireless N Router MR6400
  • TP-Link Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Archer C5
  • TP-Link Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Archer C7
  • TP-Link Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WDR3600
  • TP-Link Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WDR4300
  • TP-Link Wireless Dual Band Router WDR3500
  • TP-Link Wireless Lite N Router WR740N
  • TP-Link Wireless Lite N Router WR740N/WR741ND
  • TP-Link Wireless Lite N Router WR749N
  • TP-Link Wireless N 3G/4G Router MR3420
  • TP-Link Wireless N Access Point WA801ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Access Point WA901ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Gigabit Router WR1043ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Gigabit Router WR1045ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR840N
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR841HP
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR841N
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR841N/WR841ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR842N
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR842ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR845N
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR941ND
  • TP-Link Wireless N Router WR945N

A TP-Link Systems spokesperson told CNET in a statement that the affected models all reached End of Service and Life status several years ago.

“While these products are outside our standard maintenance lifecycle, TP‑Link has developed security updates for select legacy models where technically feasible,” the spokesperson said. 

TP-Link is urging people with these outdated routers to upgrade to a newer device if possible. You can find a list of available security patches on its security advisory page addressing the recent attack. 

How to keep your router safe

The NSA referred organizations to a list of best practices for securing your home network. The most important thing you can do if you’re using one of the impacted devices is to upgrade your router as soon as possible. It likely hasn’t received firmware updates in years, which is like leaving the door to your network unlocked. 

“The longer you carry on doing that, the greater the risk,” said Rik Ferguson, vice president of security intelligence at Forescout. “The router sits in such a privileged position within any network. All of your communication, all of your traffic, has to pass through that device.”

In addition to using a newer device that’s still getting security updates, there are a few other steps you can take to lock down your network: 

  • Update your firmware regularly: Many networking devices allow you to enable automatic firmware updates in the settings. If this is an option, I’d highly recommend doing it. If it’s not, you can find updates for your router by logging into its web interface or using its app.
  • Reboot your router: The NSA’s guidance recommends rebooting your router, smartphone and computers at least once a week. “Regular reboots help to remove implants and ensure security,” the agency says. 
  • Change default usernames and passwords: One of the most common ways hackers gain access is by trying default, manufacturer-set login credentials. “There’s a whole underground economy that underlies all of that,” says Ferguson. “Basically, they just harvest credentials, either through attacks of their own, or by stockpiling them from other sources and buying them.” This username and password combination is different from your Wi-Fi login, which should also be changed every six months or so. The longer and more random your password, the better
  • Disable remote management: Most regular users don’t need to remotely manage their Wi-Fi router, and this is one of the primary ways threat actors can change your router’s settings without your knowledge. You can typically find this option in your router’s admin settings
  • Use a VPN: The FBI’s announcement on the attack specifically recommends that organizations with remote workers use a VPN when accessing sensitive data. These services encrypt your traffic as it passes through a remote server, keeping it safe from hackers.
Categories: Gadgets

Best Tower Fans for 2026: We Tested 14 Fans to Help You Keep Cool During This Heat Wave

I tested 14 of the latest tower fan models, most of which arrived as review samples from manufacturers.

John Carlsen/CNET

John Carlsen/CNET

As I planned my tower fan tests, I thought about why people use fans. For example, airflow, loudness and energy efficiency are immediately obvious criteria, but I considered other ways tower fans can be comfortable. Ultimately, I decided that air texture and sound profiles (white noise and device sounds) were also important.

There are 10 total points possible for each test criterion. Here’s how I calculate the product scores:

  • Airflow (20%): You’ll get the maximum cooling effect with higher airflows — measured in feet per minute on an anemometer — because it helps sweat evaporate faster.
  • Air texture (15%): How a tower fan feels is a game changer for people who are sensitive to airflow like I am, but my texture test is very subjective because I lack the resources to study whether turbulence is the deciding factor. While I evaluated medium and high speeds, I didn’t test the low speed in this category. This is because some of the low speeds were almost imperceptible, like Dyson and Levoit, while faster fans from Amazon Basics and OmniBreeze weren’t much different than the medium speeds.
  • Loudness (15%): Even if a tower fan sounds nice, being overly loud can grate on the senses, especially when you or a child is trying to sleep. I measured this in decibels (dBa) across low, medium and high speed settings.
  • Sound profile (15%): What a fan sounds like in terms of white noise, and the ability to turn off interface sounds greatly enhances the user experience. Evaluating white noise is the subjective half of this test, while the ability to mute and disable device sounds forms the objective half.
  • Energy efficiency (15%): The average energy consumption of tower fans, measured in watts, isn’t particularly high, but it adds up on your electric bill. This is doubly true when running multiple fans 24/7.
  • Price (10%) and features (10%): These round out the remainder of the score, but generally depend on static specifications rather than qualitative testing.

Airflow: Speed

While airflow speed is important in terms of providing an objective comparison point between tower fans, it also affects the air texture, loudness and white noise, so it weighs more heavily than other categories in my scoring.

John Carlsen

I previously used an anemometer to test handheld vacuums and car vacuums, but it was difficult to log data over time. (Plus, a particularly powerful vacuum damaged it.) For tower fan testing, I upgraded to an app-enabled anemometer for more automatic logging.

For this test, I used speed in feet per minute instead of volume in cubic feet per minute to keep the test simple enough to leave time for other testing. For example, using cubic feet per minute would triple the test time as I’d need to measure the airflow in more than one place. Likewise, it requires knowing the area of each fan’s air outlet, which is more difficult to determine on the narrow outlets of bladeless fans. Using FPM means I have a reasonably balanced comparison between fans of all types and sizes, even if I lose some of the nuance that comes with measuring volume.

My airflow testing uses a simple tunnel — courtesy of Dreame’s massive shipping box — to isolate airflow between the fan and the anemometer. Initially, I used clear plastic to seal one end around the fan so only the exhaust blew through the tunnel, but it interfered with bladeless fans like the Dyson. So I added a second test with the tunnel unsealed. Because I did two kinds of tunnel tests for low, medium and high speeds, this means a total of six one-minute tests per fan. I tested each speed continuously for one minute, giving enough time between each test for speeds to level out. Across 14 fans, that’s over 5,000 second-by-second data points.

Unsealed-tunnel testing: In terms of pure power, the Dreo TurboCool is the undisputed champion. Not only did it produce the highest median speeds in the medium and high categories, but it was the only tower fan with a maximum speed above 1,000 FPM (1,043 FPM). Across the three speeds I tested, it had a median speed of 689 FPM, making it the only fan to surpass 600 FPM.

Zafro 42, Dreo Smart, OmniBreeze and Zafro 36 all produced exceptional airflow above 500 FPM, while the Vornado OSCR37 came in at 492 FPM. None of the other fans came in above 400 FPM, with the Midea, Levoit and Vornado Strata in the 300s. All of the bladeless tower fans produced lower airflow overall than the traditional models. Part of the reason for this is the relatively tiny air outlets on bladeless fans, making measurement more difficult. Dyson and Lasko tied for the lowest median airflow — 197 FPM.

Sealed-tunnel testing: In general, most of the fans performed worse in the sealed-tunnel test, so it plays almost no role in the scoring. However, Midea (472 FPM median) and Amazon Basics (453 FPM median) performed better when sealed. I suspect these fans handle back pressure more effectively, but it doesn’t really affect day-to-day use outside these isolated tests. Lasko and Vornado Strata didn’t consistently do well in sealed-tunnel tests, but did better at low and high speeds, respectively.

Airflow: Air texture

When temperatures are mild, I’d argue that how the air feels on your skin at lower speeds is more important than how fast it blows.

John Carlsen/CNET

High airflow is only part of the equation for an excellent tower fan — the texture of the airstream matters just as much. Unlike wind speed, my texture test is purely subjective — it’s simply how consistently I enjoyed the breeze from a tower fan at medium and high speeds. 

Although the bladeless tower fans from Dyson, Dreame and Shark didn’t perform as well in terms of raw power, they produced the most comfortable air textures at medium and high speeds — 10 out of 10. The Vornado Strata 8 Omni and Levoit Classic also earned perfect texture scores on both settings. While Dreo TurboCool earned 9 out of 10 in both categories, it achieves a 10 when the misting function is active. Lasko WhisperForce earned a perfect texture score at medium speed, though its max speed was slightly more turbulent.

This isn’t to say the other fans were uncomfortable, as Midea and Zafro generally felt nice, while Dreo Smart and Vornado OSCR37 lost some charm at top speed. However, the wind from OmniBreeze and Amazon Basics — the only fans under $40 — was only passable.

Sound profile: Loudness

In terms of volume, none of the tower fans surpassed 60 dBa on the highest speed setting, meaning they’re unlikely to drown out a normal conversation.

John Carlsen/CNET

I used my trusty sound meter to measure the loudness of each fan from 39 inches away (1 meter). While this is a good distance for testing, most people place fans farther away, so your experience will likely be quieter than these results. I reduced noise as much as possible in my home office for this test, which meant leaving the AC off on a hot day and taking occasional breaks to cool the room as the indoor temperature reached into the 80s.

On low speeds, most of the fans weren’t loud enough for the sound meter to register a result — it can’t measure below 30 dBa. However, Midea (39 dBa), OmniBreeze (41 dBa) and Amazon Basics (42 dBa) were more audible, but not all that loud.

The standouts during medium-speed tests were Shark (39 dBa), Vornado Strata (41 dBa) and Levoit (42 dBa), because they were equal to or better than the worst performers in the low-speed test. OmniBreeze was the loudest in this test, producing 54 dBa, while Dreo Smart and Amazon Basics both came in at or just above 50 dBa. In general, I found most fans under 50 dBa to be more than quiet enough for a bedroom at night.

Although none of the fans was quieter than 50 dBa in the high-speed test, Amazon Basics (51 dBa), Vornado Strata (51 dBa), Shark (53 dBa), Dyson Cool (54 dBa) and Zafro 36 (54 dBa) were all equal to or quieter than the loudest models of the medium-speed tests. Both Dreo models were the loudest in this test at 59 dBa.

Sound profile: White noise

While I’ll admit my subjective ear isn’t ideal for rating white noise on fans like the Dyson Cool, I’ve extensively used white noise daily for well over a decade to help me sleep.

John Carlsen

If you rely on the noise a tower fan makes almost as much as its ability to blow air, you can relate to how some fans have idiosyncrasies like wobbles, whines and hums that spoil otherwise great white noise. Fans with fewer of these, or where they were pleasant, earned more credit.

The tower fans with the cleanest, most enjoyable white noise were Dreo, Dyson and Levoit. I’m particularly fond of Levoit’s respective hum and whoosh on low and high speeds. Dyson’s pleasant hiss was similarly outstanding as was the loudness of Dreo’s white noise. While Midea’s slight wobble and Zafro’s humming oscillation on low speeds were nearly as pleasant, the overall white noise quality is excellent.

Vornado Strata, Shark TurboBlade, Dreame, Lasko and Amazon Basics all had various wobbles, whines and hisses that stood out as I listened. Short-term white noise is good, but might grate on the nerves of people with sensory sensitivities after a while. Vornado OSCR37’s whine and wobble were even more distracting. Still, the worst white noise profile was OmniBreeze, which has a whir and a whine that are borderline annoying, especially because the whine changes pitch when you turn on the oscillation.

Sound profile: Beeps and clicks

Loud beeps and overly clicky remotes can break focus and disturb light sleepers.

John Carlsen/CNET

Another sound consideration beyond white noise and loudness is how the tower fan sounds when you’re controlling it. The gold standard is a fan that has beeps, but also allows you to disable them until you want them again: a persistent mute function. Dreo, Shark, Levoit and Zafro all have this setting, though Zafro retains a startup chime, even if you unplug the fan to move it to another room. Dreame has a semi-persistent mute that resets when changing outlets.

Dyson, Lasko and Vornado all lack beeps entirely, but this removes an audio feedback option that might benefit people with visual impairments.

While OmniBreeze has a mute function, it resets every time to turn the fan off, which I’ve found very distracting. Midea lacks a mute function entirely.

Another thing I listened for was how clicky a remote was, again giving more credit to silent remotes like those of Vornado and OmniBreeze. Dyson and Shark’s remote made noise, but it was relatively quiet. However, most tower fan remotes landed in the moderately clicky category — Dreo, Zafro, Levoit, Midea and Dreame — they aren’t loud by any means, but noticeable. Lasko’s remote felt the loudest and had a harsh click that I found unpleasant.

Energy efficiency

I used Tapo P115 smart plugs to monitor each fan’s energy draw in low and high modes during the other tests.

John Carlsen/CNET

While tower fans aren’t necessarily energy hogs compared to other cooling methods, having more efficient devices can save a fair amount on energy bills, particularly when using multiple fans in a household.

The average power draw on the lowest fan speed was 9 watts, with the Vornado Strata 8 Omni (1 watt) earning the prize for most efficient, even if it’s a small fan. Lasko, Levoit and Zafro weren’t far behind at 2 watts of energy draw. Except for Midea (20 watts), Amazon Basics (21 watts), OmniBreeze (24 watts) and Vornado OSCR37 AE (36 watts), the other fans all came in below 6W on low.

Vornado Strata (13 watts) and Levoit Classic (19 watts) maintained dominance in the highest-speed testing as well, with Zafro and Dreo Smart falling below 25 watts. Amazon Basics, Dreo TurboCool, Lasko and Midea form the center of the pack, mostly keeping close to the average of 34 watts. Shark, Dyson, Dreame, OmniBreeze and Vornado OSCR37 AE were the least-efficient models in this test, averaging 49 watts.

Tower fan test results

Tower fanMedian airflowTextureMax loudnessWhite noiseBeeps and clicksMax power consumption Zafro 36 532 FPM9/1054 dBa9/109/1020 wattsVornado Strata 8 Omni 335 FPM10/1051 dBa8/109.5/1013 wattsLevoit Classic 42-inch 335 FPM10/1055 dBa10/109/1019 wattsDreo TurboCool 765S 689 FPM9/1059 dBa10/109/1040 wattsShark TurboBlade 236 FPM10/1053 dBa8/108/1048 wattsOmniBreeze Wi-Fi 551 FPM7/1057 dBa6/108/1050 wattsAmazon Basics 28″ 453 FPM6.5/1051 dBa8/104.5/1030 wattsDreame MF10 256 FPM10/1056 dBa8/108/1045 wattsDreo Smart 554S 591 FPM7.5/1059 dBa10/109/1025 wattsDyson Cool AM07 197 FPM10/1054 dBa10/109/1050 wattsLasko WhisperForce 197 FPM9.5/1057 dBa8/108/1031 wattsMidea Detachable 335 FPM8/1056 dBa9/106.5/1036 wattsVornado OSCR37 AE 492 FPM8/1055 dBa7/109.5/1050 wattsZafro 42 591 FPM8.5/1056 dBa9/109/1025 watts

Categories: Gadgets

Your Contract-Free Internet Provider May Be Costing You More in Fees

Contracts and hidden fees can be a significant point of frustration. Imagine agreeing to a year’s worth of terms with an internet service provider without knowing what could happen next month. Maybe a new ISP announces it’s coming to your area, you land a new job in a different town or your internet needs change and you decide to switch plans. Breaking the agreement you locked yourself into can be costly and tedious. Even worse are the unexpected fees that show up on your monthly bill.

I dove into 13 ISPs that CNET readers rated highly through our People’s Picks survey. All of the ISPs listed below work to mitigate the frustrations that contracts can cause. But some providers make fees trickier to navigate. Whether you’re charged one-time fees or choose month-to-month billing, there are some caveats to watch out for. If you don’t, you may be surprised and disappointed by what you find hidden in the fine print.

CNET’s People’s Picks: Internet service providers 

What to know about the no-contract ISP frenzy

All 13 People’s Picks ISPs have contract-free service plans, which give you more control and flexibility with your internet service. 

Contracts have generally become a thing of the past among 5G home internet providers such as T-Mobile and Verizon. As those services have become widely available in a relatively short period of time, competitors have been forced to do away with some of their more irritating features, including contracts and data caps, according to CNET principal writer Joe Supan 

However, month-to-month service doesn’t mean it’s cheaper or that there aren’t other service requirements. 

A credit check and advanced payment may be required. Before signing up for month-to-month service, most providers, including Spectrum, AT&T and Xfinity, require a credit check to determine whether you qualify or need to pay a deposit. And you’ll likely need to pay for your first month upfront to kick-start a pay-as-you-go plan, rather than paying after the fact as you would with a contract.

The cost per Mbps may be higher for month-to-month service. If you’re deciding between service plans or providers, it’s best to compare prices between no-contract ISPs and those that require a contract. We recommend factoring the cost per Mbps, which is the internet speed compared to the plan price. For example, GFiber has an excellent cost per Mbps and doesn’t require a contract. If you prefer the best deal over flexibility, you may opt for a contract for a lower monthly payment. Whereas you may be OK with paying more if you want the freedom to cancel whenever without termination fees. 

Many contract-free ISPs still have plenty of fees

Among the 13 People’s Picks providers that scored highly, Electric Power Board, Quantum, Sonic, Ting and Ziply were the only providers that didn’t receive complaints from CNET readers about price hikes and hidden fees. Readers who have Ting reported that their bill has stayed the same over the past year, and most Sonic users reported the same. Only a small percentage noted a price increase, and only because a promotional period ended. 

Hidden fees, or “junk fees,” typically include charges for data cap coverages. Some ISPs are even charging subscriptions for internet service and network maintenance. And other fees also add up, such as charges for equipment rental, installation and activation. It’s not uncommon to sign up for a service expecting one price, only to get a higher bill because of unexpected fees such as activation or installation.

“Activation and equipment fees are still pretty common, and I wouldn’t consider them a red flag necessarily. What I would look out for is if a provider will waive the fee if you use your own equipment. You should be able to buy your own modem and router without being forced to use your ISP’s,” Supan said.

Watch this: How to Get Fiber-Optic Speeds Without the Fiber

03:00

You could be overlooking the broadband facts label, which lists your plan’s speeds and price.Supan said broadband labels are useful for anyone shopping for internet service. “All the fees are laid out clearly, including one called ‘early termination fee.’ This will tell you how much you’ll be on the hook for if you leave your contract before it’s over,” he explained.

Before signing up with a service provider, look for any charges that may not be advertised, such as data cap overage charges or credit card processing fees. It’s also worth asking if any fees can be waived or if there’s a discount available. For example, Xfinity charges less for self-installation compared to professional set-up. And you may be able to skip equipment rental charges by getting your own router. 

“This is one of the best ways to save money on your internet bill. You can get a quality router for $100, while most ISPs charge around $10 a month,” said Supan. “In most cases, buying your own equipment will pay for itself within a year.”

You may be comfortable with some fees, which is OK. But it’s most important to know what you’re signing up for beforehand. 

Categories: Gadgets

Best Sounding Wireless Earbuds in 2026: AirPods, Sony and More

Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 4: Sennheiser makes some of the best-sounding noise-canceling earbuds and the Momentum True Wireless 4 sound great, though their noise canceling and voice-calling performance don’t measure up to what you get with flagship models from Bose, Sony and Apple earbuds. Rumor has it that Sennheiser will release the Momentum True Wireless 5 in 2026, so we removed the Wireless 4 from the list.

Beats Powerbeats Pro 2: The Powerbeats Pro 2 are easily among the best-sounding sports earbuds. Not only do they feature a new, more refined design with better ergonomics, but new drivers, a more powerful Apple H2 chip, a new built-in heart-rate sensor and, yes, active noise canceling for the first time in a pair of Powerbeats. And that noise canceling is quite good, as is the sound quality and voice-calling performance — so long as you get a tight seal from one of the five different included eartips. Read my Beats Powerbeats Pro 2 review.

Skullcandy Method 360 ANC: In a surprise move, Skullcandy joined forces with Bose in 2025 to create a budget version of Bose’s $299 QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds. With “Sound by Bose,” not only do the Method 360 ANC buds sound better than most earbuds in this price class (they sound very similar to Bose’s $170 QuietComfort Earbuds), they also fit comfortably and securely thanks to Bose’s Fit Kit system that features stability bands to lock the buds in your ears. They were featured on our best wireless earbuds list and remain a good value, but Skullcandy has released the Method 540 ANC in 2026 (it has a 20% slimmer case). Read the Skullcandy Method 360 ANC review.

Sony Pulse Explore: There are a lot of new gaming earbuds out there, but what makes the Sony Pulse Explore earbuds special is that they feature planar magnetic drivers, a speaker technology typically found in high-end over-ear audiophile headphones but rarely in earbuds. While they’re missing some features found in typical premium earbuds (noise canceling and ear-detection sensors), that they’re as good as they are for listening to music and making calls is a revelation. Read my full review.

Edifier NeoBuds Planar: In 2024, Edifier released a set of earbuds, the Spirit S10, from its audiophile brand Stax that featured low-distortion planar magnetic drivers (planar magnetic drivers have only recently started appearing in true-wireless earbuds). The sound of the Stax buds was a little too neutral for some folks, including me, and the noise canceling wasn’t quite strong enough. But both the sound and noise-canceling have improved with Edifier’s similarly styled new-for-2025 NeoBuds Planar. While they retain the clean, clear sound of the Stax buds, they serve up more bass and sound more alive and dynamic than the Spirit S10s. They also have more effective noise canceling, plus good voice-calling performance.

Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro: Leaks have revealed that Samsung will release new Galaxy Buds 4 Pro earbuds, so we moved the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro off the best list despite the fact that they remain very good earbuds. They may be nicely discounted once Samsung releases a new model. Read my Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro review. 

Sony WF-1000XM5: Sony has released the new WF-1000XM6 earbuds, which are noticeably improved from the earlier XM5s, which are still appealing earbuds and should be nicely discounted now that the XM6 has arrived. Read my Sony WF-1000XM5 review. Earfun is now shipping the Earfun Air Pro 4 Plus, which have a dual-driver design and sound better for about $20 more. The Earfun Air Pro 4 are still a very good value, but I like the Plus model better.

Beyerdynamic Amiron 300: While Beyerdynamic’s original Free Byrd impressed with sound quality, its new-for-2024 Amiron 300 earbuds address the previous design shortcomings with a compact, lightweight form factor that fits my ears well. The sound quality is outstanding — rich, detailed and fairly open with a very pleasant tonal balance out of the box. There’s impressive instrument separation that allows you to distinctly hear each element in complex tracks. The bass response is particularly noteworthy — articulate and punchy without overwhelming the mix — while the midrange offers nice clarity and accuracy, which benefits vocal reproduction. Voice-calling performance is solid thanks to three microphones in each bud, with callers reporting they could hear me well even in noisy environments, with only minimal background noise intruding.

JBL Live Beam 3: The Live Beam 3 (around $170) earbuds look similar to the earlier Live Buds Pro 2, which I like a lot, especially when they go on sale for less than $100. Essentially, JBL’s AirPods Pro 2 competitor, their distinguishing feature is the 1.45-inch touchscreen LCD integrated into their charging case that acts as a remote control for the buds and allows you to access their features. Equipped with 10mm drivers, not only do they offer clear, well-defined sound with punchy bass, but their noise canceling and voice-calling performance are very solid. Their battery is also good — they offer up to 10 hours of battery life with ANC on and 12 hours with it off at moderate volume levels (a 10-minute charge gives you four hours of battery life). Available in four color options, they’re IP55 splash-proof and dust-resistant.

Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds: Bose is now shipping its improved QC Ultra Earbuds (2nd gen), which means you’ll be able to find discounts on the original QC Ultra Earbuds, which feature excellent sound and previously best-in-class noise-canceling performance.

Google Pixel Buds Pro 2: Google’s redesigned its Pixel Buds Pro 2 to fit more ears better. Not only are the Pixel Buds Pro 2 smaller than their predecessor, but Google’s equipped them with its new Tensor A1 chip, which offers more processing power and enables its new “hands-free, eyes-free” Gemini virtual AI assistant. So long as you get a snug fit and tight seal (yes, that’s critical for sound quality and noise-canceling performance), these buds deliver excellent sound, strong noise-muffling capabilities and a robust feature set, particularly for Android and Google Pixel phone users.

Sony LinkBuds Fit: Truth be told, in some ways, I like Sony’s new LinkBuds Fit ($200) better than its flagship WF-1000XM5 noise-canceling earbuds. While they don’t sound quite as good or have noise-canceling that’s quite on par with those buds, they’re lightweight (4.9 grams) and fit my ears comfortably and securely. Part of that is due to Sony’s new Air Fitting Supporters, but it’s also redesigned its eartips and included a wide range of sizes, including XL tips that fit my ears well. Despite being a slight step down from the WF-1000XM5s for performance, their sound quality, noise canceling and call-quality performance are all very good. They also have built-in voice controls.

Status Between 3ANC: Status Audio has announced the Pro X, the next-generation of its noise-canceling earbuds (they’re available for preorder for $250 and will make this list of best-sounding wireless earbuds once they ship in September, based on my testing an early sample), but the more affordable Between 3ANC ($150) will remain on sale. Status’ earbuds aren’t exactly the sleekest or most attractive earbuds you can buy, but if you don’t mind their utilitarian look and giant stems, you are getting an excellent-sounding set of earbuds. The Between 3ANC, the company’s first noise-canceling earbuds, also do a good job muffling ambient sound, though they aren’t up to the level of the Bose QuietComfort 2 earbuds for noise-canceling prowess. They did perform very well in my voice-calling test, reducing much of the background noise around me in the streets of New York while picking up my voice clearly, or so callers told me.

Creative Labs Aurvana Ace 2: There’s been some hype recently around solid-state semiconductor Micro-Electromechanical System, aka MEMS, speakers and you can find xMEMS drivers in Creative Labs’ Aurvana Ace ($130) and Ace 2 earbuds ($150). The newer Ace 2 has support for Qualcomm’s AptX Lossless for the limited number of devices that support that audio codec, but otherwise the two models seem nearly identical, except for their color schemes. While the Ace 2 is missing features like ear-detection sensors that are often found in buds in this price range, they do sound quite impressive (if you get a tight seal), with nicely detailed, accurate sound and well-defined bass that has some warmth to it (it does help to play around with the companion app’s equalizer settings to optimize the sound to your liking). I found their adaptive noise canceling good, though not necessarily great. The same was true for the voice calling performance.

Bowers & Wilkins PI7 S2: While they’ve been replaced by the new and improved PI8s, the PI7 S2s, which feature a dual-driver design, remain among the very best-sounding true-wireless earbuds. The step-down PI5 S2s, which have a single-driver design, don’t sound quite as good but are more affordable. Learn more about the high-quality headphones in my full Bowers & Wilkins PI7 S2 earbuds review.

Sony LinkBuds S: Unlike the “open” LinkBuds, the LinkBuds S are traditional noise-isolating earbuds with tips you jam in your ears. They’re more compact and lighter than Sony’s former flagship WF-1000XM4 and also feature Sony’s V1 processor. (Sony has since released the more compact WF-1000XM5.) While their sound and noise canceling don’t quite measure up to either XM4s or XM5s, they’re still quite good. They’re the Sony buds for people who want 80% of Sony’s flagship earbuds’ features and performance for significantly less. Read my full Sony LinkBuds S review to see how they stack up.

Jabra Elite 10: Yes, the Jabra Elite 10s have some potential drawbacks: Their noise canceling is lighter compared with competitors, they’re pricey at $249, and they’ll probably have to come down a bit to better compete with the AirPods Pro 2 — at least for Apple users. Still, they’re really good earbuds that are not only comfortable to wear for long periods but also sound excellent. Learn more about the Elites in my full Jabra Elite 10 review.

Bang & Olufsen Beoplay EX: Bang & Olufsen’s $399 Beoplay EX buds are the company’s best true-wireless earbuds. They feature a comfortable, secure fit (except perhaps for those with really smaller ears), top-notch build quality, great sound, good noise canceling and improved voice-calling performance over B&O’s EQ buds, with three microphones in each earbud they help with reducing background noise while picking up your voice. While they’re out of most people’s price point, they’re arguably the best earbuds out there with stems and offer slightly superior sound to the AirPods Pro 2 with better clarity, deeper more powerful bass and richer, more accurate sound. I looked at the earbuds in my hands-on of the Band & Olufsen Beoplay EX when they debuted in 2022.

Audio-Technica ATH-TWX9: Audio-Technica has put out several truly wireless earbuds over the last few years, but none of them have been good. That changes with the ATH-TWX9, which sports a premium design plus premium sound and a pretty robust feature set, including strong active noise canceling, Multipoint Bluetooth pairing and a case equipped with wireless charging and UV LED sterilization. In the box, you’ll also find a plethora of ear tip options, and I was able to tight seal and comfortable fit. These buds are IPX4 splash-proof and are rated for 6 hours of battery life at moderate volume levels.

1More Evo: Known for delivering good bang for the buck, 1More has released a more premium set of buds that are equipped with a 10mm dynamic driver paired with a balanced armature. They have support for Sony’s LDAC codec for high-resolution wireless streaming over Bluetooth with music services like Qobuz or Tidal that offer high-resolution music files. The Evo buds sound better than the company’s other earbuds, offering better clarity and bass definition as well as a relatively wide soundstage. They also feature solid noise canceling, multipoint Bluetooth pairing, wireless charging, a transparency mode and an IPX4 splashproof rating. Battery life is rated at 5.5 hours with ANC on and 8 hours without it off. A 15-minute quick charge gives you 4 hours of juice.

Beyerdynamic Free Byrd: Beyerdynamic may be late to the game, but it’s finally introduced its first true wireless earbuds, which feature active noise canceling, up to 11 hours of battery life (with noise canceling off) and impressive sound quality. Learn more about the debut buds in my full Beyerdynamic Free Byrd review.

Sony WF-1000XM4: Released in 2021, Sony’s WF-1000XM4 earned a CNET Editors’ Choice Award. They’re still excellent earbuds, but Sony has now released the next-gen WF-1000XM5. They may be a good option if you find them at a good discount. See why they earned such high marks in my full Sony WF-1000XM4 review.

Final Audio ZE8000: Japan-based Final Audio, which makes some high-end audiophile headphones, including the $4,299 D8000 Pro, has released its ZE8000 ($199) true wireless earbuds that feature a unique stick design and excellent sound. The largest tips fit my ears comfortably and securely, though they do stick out a bit. 

Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3: The Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3 were among the best new true-wireless earbuds of 2022. They’re still among the best true-wireless earbuds, but Sennheiser has released the upgraded Momentum True Wireless 4. Also, the newer AirPods Pro 2 and Sony WF-1000XM5 buds are arguably superior, so only look to buy the Momentum True Wireless 3 when they’re significantly discounted. Still, they offer some pretty impressive features that I noticed in my full review of the Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3.

JBL Live Pro 2: Over the years, JBL has put out some decent true-wireless earbuds, but nothing that really got me too excited. That’s finally changed with the arrival of the Samsung-owned brand’s new Live Pro 2 and Live Free 2 buds. Both sets of buds — the Live Pro 2 have stems while the Live Free 2 have a pill-shaped design — offer a comfortable fit along with strong noise canceling, very good sound quality and voice-calling performance, plus a robust set of features, including multipoint Bluetooth pairing, an IPX5 splash-proof rating and wireless charging.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 30 #645

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition is a tough one. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Hoops happenings.

Green group hint: Look up!

Blue group hint: Baseball award-winners.

Purple group hint: Gridiron cinema titles.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: Actions with a basketball.

Green group: Found at the top of an arena.

Blue group: World Series MVPs.

Purple group: First words of football movies.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 30, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is actions with a basketball. The four answers are dribble, pass, pivot and shoot.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is found at the top of an arena. The four answers are banners, catwalk, lights and speakers.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is World Series MVPs. The four answers are Dent, Knight, Springer and Viola.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is first words of football movies. The four answers are Friday, gridiron, remember and varsity.

Categories: Gadgets

Taking a Flight or Road Trip This July Fourth? Use These Tips to Travel Smarter and Cheaper

This July Fourth week, more Americans are expected to travel than last year, but not everyone will see savings — proper planning is needed. 

Mark Lee/Getty Images

Fireworks, beach days and cookouts make July Fourth one of the most fun weekends of the year — even with the record-setting heat wave coming our way. To me, this upcoming weekend is the peak of the summer season. This year, though, many travelers are planning with extra factors in mind: higher costs and more travelers than ever before. 

AAA projects that 72.2 million Americans will travel at least 50 miles from home between June 27 and July 5, with an estimated 61.4 million expected to drive to reach their destinations. With inflated gas and ticket prices, you may be wondering how to keep costs down. Below, I’ll break down some important travel stats and tips, so you can make the most of your holiday weekend. 

Gas prices vs. the rest of your travel bills

Between filling up the tank and paying for lodging and airfare, you may feel like girding your loins and guarding your wallet this year.

For drivers, gas will be the major factor, as prices have reached four-year highs of more than $4 a gallon. Gas prices have been surging this year, beginning in March, in connection with the Iran War. Due to the conflict, oil shipping routes and crude oil supplies have been drastically restricted, leading to higher rates at the gas pump. For context, the average gallon of regular gas was just under $3 in the US before the Iran War began in late February. 

AAA points out that although gasoline has gotten more expensive, filling up during a road trip can still be cheaper for many families than flying, especially when you’re traveling with kids or a group and can split the gas costs.

Meanwhile, air travel is also not getting easier as AAA forecasts that 5.85 million Americans will fly over the holiday week (only a 0.2% increase over last year), and domestic flights are averaging around $830 per ticket. AAA says round-trip domestic flights to top destinations are about 5% more expensive than last year at this time, based on booking data. 

Car rentals are expected to be roughly 10% more expensive than last year during this holiday week, according to AAA, with Thursday, July 2, slated to be the busiest pickup day. That means driving your own car might still be more economical than flying and renting a vehicle. 

Don’t forget charging costs for EV drivers

For electric vehicle owners, the holiday math is different… but it’s still math. 

AAA reports the national average cost of electricity at public EV charging stations is 41 cents per kilowatt-hour, as of June 18, 2026. So while EV charging may not fluctuate as drastically as gasoline, the trip budget still depends on how often you stop, how fast you charge and what you can reliably access along the way.

The way to get the most savings from an EV is to charge at home, but you can’t always do that if you’re road-tripping. Still, at 41 cents per kilowatt-hour, charging at public stations is likely cheaper per mile than paying for gas in an internal-combustion vehicle. 

Traffic check

Even if you manage costs well, getting stuck in traffic can turn an affordable plan into an exhausting one. That means planning your routes and ETAs will be incredibly important. 

AAA expects the busiest days to be this Thursday, July 2, Friday, July 3, and Sunday, July 5, with the most congested hours on the road between 3 p.m. to 6 p.m. on average.  

That makes Saturday, July 4, the lighter day overall, but AAA still expects a spike in traffic from about 10 a.m. to 2 p.m. as people head to their plans. 

How to make the trip easier and save money

  • Leave earlier than you think you need to: Timing matters. AAA’s forecast suggests that if you can avoid the late afternoon peak, you’ll likely spend less time idling in traffic and more time enjoying your destination and holiday plans.
  • Make a quick “road-trip readiness” check before you pull out: AAA reports that 687,000 roadside assistance calls were made during the July Fourth weekend last year. A pretrip inspection can reduce common problems like dead batteries and flat tires, which can blow up schedules and add unexpected costs.
  • If you’re flying, build flexibility into your dates: Weekdays tend to be less expensive to fly, and choosing basic economy, booking airport parking in advance and bringing your own meals can help you save.
  • Plan for safety before you plan for speed: AAA encourages drivers to commit to safety initiatives like “100 Days of Safe Driving” to prevent accidents and “Slow Down, Move Over” when approaching stopped vehicles on the roadside because delays, breakdowns and roadside workers can appear anywhere and anytime during a holiday rush.

More Americans are expected to travel this July Fourth week than last year, but that trip will likely be more expensive, especially without proper planning. Americans are still choosing to plan trips despite higher costs, and the road is the more popular option. 

For many travelers, smart timing, basic vehicle preparation and a flexible plan for flights (or charging stops) can make the difference between a trip that drains your budget and one that is so seamless that you will only remember the fun and fireworks. 

Categories: Gadgets

Tidal to Label AI-Generated Music and Remove Fraudulent Material

Music streaming service Tidal says it will start labeling music that’s wholly generated by artificial intelligence and will also remove tracks that are fraudulent or deceptive. The company will implement automated tools in mid-July to identify and tag such music. 

Listeners will start to see an “AI” icon next to music that it detects as 100% AI-generated. For now, the icon applies only to songs that are fully AI-generated, though some tracks may use AI for certain elements rather than the entire composition. The company said it will “expand these policies to music that is substantially AI-generated when AI detection technology is sufficiently reliable to do so.”

Tidal will also remove royalties for AI-generated music. Monetization will only be available to original music “that is directly produced, written and performed by people.” Forbes reported that the AI-generated music market could be worth $4 billion by 2028.

The company is also taking a firm position on blocking or removing AI-generated music associated with fraudulent activity. According to the new AI policy, “fraudulent activity includes (but is not necessarily limited to) AI-generated music that aims to deceive listeners, interfere with authentic artists and their audience, or involves high-volume uploads or unusual streaming activity.”

AI policies have become necessary for music streaming services for two main reasons: AI music tools such as Suno have made it easy to generate full songs with little or no musical training, and streaming services like Tidal also allow customers to upload their own music.

While the announcement was focused on users, artists can dispute an AI designation according to Tidal’s published terms and conditions.

“Any creator who believes their work has been incorrectly flagged can contact our Support team, and we’ll work with them promptly,” a Tidal representative told CNET. 

As streaming platforms face the rapid rise of AI-generated music, several major services have begun rolling out their own detection and enforcement tools. The industry’s response has largely focused on labeling synthetic content and limiting abuse of automated uploads. 

Some Tidal competitors, such as Deezer, have released AI detection tools. Spotify also tightened its AI policies in September last year. Its approach is broadly similar to Tidal’s and includes a “spam filter” tool, though the company also encourages artists to report AI-generated fakes directly.

Categories: Gadgets

Supreme Court Supports Privacy Protections for Cellphone Location Data

The US Supreme Court ruled on Monday that law enforcement agencies must obtain a valid warrant before conducting geofence searches, reaffirming that probable cause is required to subpoena cellphone location data.

The decision in Chatrie v. United States held that users’ digital, on-device location data is private and that the Constitution places limits on the government’s ability to access tracking data from tech companies. In the 6-3 ruling (PDF) written by Justice Elena Kagan, the Supreme Court found “an individual has a reasonable expectation of privacy in records about his cellphone’s location” and that geofencing warrants “intrude on that constitutionally protected interest.”

Privacy experts celebrated the decision. Alan Butler, executive director of the Electronic Privacy Information Center, said in a statement after the ruling: “EPIC applauds the Supreme Court’s recognition that warrantless geofence searches are fundamentally incompatible with the Fourth Amendment’s protections against unreasonable searches and seizures.” 

Geofence warrants and the Constitution  

Geofencing is generally carried out by law enforcement officials when a case has no clear suspects. Police will draw a shape on a map around a crime scene, specify a time window to inquire about and serve a geofencing warrant to a tech giant requesting information about any connected devices present within those fences during that time.

After cross-referencing this information with any suspects or suspicious individuals, police can subpoena additional account details (email addresses, phone numbers, usernames and more) associated with devices within the geofence.

The Court ruling found that users are not necessarily voluntarily sharing their private information with a company like Google, meaning the third-party doctrine (PDF) — a legal principle that states people have no expectation of privacy when it comes to data willingly shared with others — does not apply.

As a result, the Fourth Amendment, which prohibits unreasonable searches and seizures, protects against the current iteration of geofencing warrants. Those warrants are far less stringent and have fewer legal guardrails than traditional search warrants.

Crucially, the Supreme Court did not outright ban law enforcement geofencing; rather, police must already have probable cause about a suspect and obtain a search warrant to use geofencing data more narrowly.

Critics point out that geofencing doesn’t just ensnare potential suspects but harvests location data from everyone in the area. In cases where law enforcement draws a border around a large chunk of a map, an agency may be asking for information about millions of people at a time.

Geofencing has been referred to as a type of reverse searching, since authorities are using the location data to pin a crime to a suspect, rather than naturally discovering evidence that would suggest a suspect was in the area when the crime was committed.

Google, one of the most frequently subpoenaed tech companies, has taken its own steps toward protecting itself from geofencing warrants in recent years, shifting users’ location data away from Sensorvault servers and moving it onto the users’ devices. Nonetheless, police can still serve warrants to private individuals to subpoena the location information from their phones.

If this doesn’t sound like the type of geofencing you’re used to, that’s because the term is colloquially used to describe several use cases for location-based technology. It can also refer to the technology behind smart home controls or Big Tech advertising practices. The Supreme Court’s decision only applies to the warrants.

How this case came to be

The case elevated to the Supreme Court was based on Chatrie v. United States (PDF). The plaintiff in the case, Okello T. Chatrie, was arrested in 2019 after police connected him to a $195,000 bank robbery. Law enforcement requested data from Google, locating devices around the bank during the time of the robbery. The list of potential suspects narrowed from 19 people to just three, eventually leading to Chatrie’s capture.

Chatrie’s lawyer, Adam Unikowsky, argued (PDF) the police did not have probable cause to comb through his client’s information, and instead turned to “instruments that allowed the government to search first and develop suspicions later.”

Even if the data was found independently of a geofencing search, Unikowsky argued (PDF), a follow-up warrant would be unconstitutional because probable cause still wouldn’t exist to “search the virtual private papers of every single person within the geofence merely because of their proximity to the crime.”

It’s unclear how the new precedent may affect the outcomes of past cases, including Chatrie’s. Previous courts ruled that Chatrie’s sentence would not change because the geofencing evidence was obtained in good faith, but the Supreme Court’s ruling leaves the warrant’s validity in question.

Chatrie’s case returns to a lower appellate court, which will decide whether there was probable cause for a geofencing warrant. A representative of Chatrie’s legal team did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

Categories: Gadgets

The Strawberry Moon Appears Tonight, but This Full Moon Isn’t Pink at All

The third and final micro moon of 2026, arrives tonight, and it’s a tasty one — the strawberry moon. It’s also the first full moon of the astronomical summer, coming about a week after the summer solstice.

The strawberry moon reaches peak illumination at 7:56 p.m. ET on June 29, which is still during daylight hours for everyone in North America. That means the best time to see the full moon is that same evening once the sun has set. The moon is set to rise out of the southeastern sky just after sunset and streak across the southern horizon until it sets in the southwest just before sunrise. 

The sun won’t rise too far above the horizon in June thanks to the summer solstice. 

Stellarium

One of the least friendly moons to watch

You may notice that the strawberry moon isn’t terribly high in the sky this month, and that’s normal. June’s full moon is the lowest full moon of any given year, due to the same mechanics that give us the summer solstice. The Earth is tilted on its axis, and during the summer solstice, the Northern Hemisphere is tilted toward the sun. That means the sun is higher in the sky than it is at other times of the year. 

This also works with the moon, albeit in reverse, since the moon is always opposite the sun. The Northern Hemisphere is tilted away from the moon, so the moon appears lower in the sky than it normally does. It’s not quite as low as last year’s Strawberry Moon, which was the lowest full moon in decades, but if you’re somewhere with a lot of trees, you may have some trouble finding it. 

A micro moon is noticeably smaller and less bright than a supermoon or even a regular full moon.

NASA/JPL-Caltech

June’s full moon is also the final micro moon of the year, and so in addition to being low on the horizon, it’s also smaller than usual. The moon’s orbit around Earth is elliptical instead of circular, which means the moon is sometimes closer to Earth, a phenomenon known as perigee, and sometimes farther away, a phenomenon known as apogee. 

Since the moon is in apogee, it’s approximately 7% smaller than it would normally appear during a typical full moon and about 14% smaller than a supermoon. The full moon is still easy to find and the brightest thing in the night sky, but you may have to walk around the block to see it behind the trees in your neighborhood.

Why is the June full moon called the strawberry moon?

June gets its gastronomical name from its timing, not its color. The name comes from the short strawberry picking period associated with the Native American tribes of the northeastern US, according to The Old Farmer’s Almanac. 

The Almanac also notes that the strawberry moon is sometimes called the honey moon in Europe, which could be connected to the popularity of June as a wedding month.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 30

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is a real challenge. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Separate a space.

Green group hint: Light the cauldron.

Blue group hint: Reuse, reduce…

Purple group hint: Selective service.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Dividing structures.

Green group: Participate in some Winter Olympics.

Blue group: Common recyclables.

Purple group: What “draft” might refer to.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 20, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is dividing structures. The four answers are fence, gate, hedge and wall.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is participate in some Winter Olympics. The four answers are curl, luge, skate and ski.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is common recyclables. The four answers are bottle, box, can and newspaper.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is what “draft” might refer to. The four answers are breeze, on tap, recruit and sketch.

Categories: Gadgets

Windows 10 Users Can Get Free Security Updates Until 2027 — Here’s How

Support for Windows 10 officially ended last October. Microsoft is prioritizing updates for the latest OS, Windows 11, and has thus stopped providing security updates for its decade-old predecessor. But if updating to Windows 11 isn’t an option, you can still continue getting security updates until 2027.

Windows 10 users can snag a year of extended security updates for the prior OS for $30. If you’re on a budget, there’s a free option that will let you keep extended security updates for a year. You’ll just be required to connect your OneDrive account and enable cloud backup.

Getting free updates on Windows 10, which was released more than a decade ago in July 2015, is a pretty big deal. As the most widely used Windows OS, it accounts for just over 53% of installs as of May 2025. Millions of people would be left without security support unless they upgrade. The cloud backup option gives users a choice without incurring a cost. 

The only potential issue is OneDrive. Anyone with a Microsoft account gets up to 5GB of storage for free. However, as The Verge points out, some backups may exceed this limitation, requiring users to purchase a monthly or yearly plan. At $2 a month for 100GB of cloud storage, a year of OneDrive still costs less than the $30 for a year of additional security updates, but it may still cause frustration among some customers. 

Microsoft is offering a year of Windows 10 security updates, but there is a catch. 

Microsoft

How to get Windows 10 security updates for free

Per Microsoft’s blog post, there are now three options for those who want to stay on Windows 10 and still receive security updates: 

These options are available now. Microsoft began offering its Extended Security Updates program in July. Signing up for this option will guarantee updates through Oct. 14, 2027, although businesses can purchase up to 3 years of additional updates. So, this isn’t a long-term solution, but rather gives you more time to upgrade to Windows 11. 

It’s been an uphill battle for Microsoft, as people have been reluctant to upgrade their existing hardware. There are myriad differences between the two operating systems. Still, Microsoft’s string of unpopular decisions, along with Windows 11 compatibility issues, have kept the prior-generation OS around a lot longer than it normally would.

Categories: Gadgets

Comcast to Separate Into Two Companies, With NBCUniversal Set to Spin Off

In a media environment that’s seen a surge in mergers and acquisitions, Comcast plans to divide into two companies. The company announced on Monday that it plans to split its media and entertainment brand from its telecom business. NBCUniversal and Sky will spin off as a separate, independent entity. The separation is a tax-free transaction that will give Comcast shareholders stock ownership in both companies, and it’s expected to be completed within a year. 

“This is a very exciting day for our company,” said Brian L. Roberts, Comcast’s chairman and co-CEO, in a statement. “The transaction we are announcing will unlock a more entrepreneurial management approach and open up a multitude of new opportunities for each business. I very much look forward to helping guide our collective growth for this next chapter.”  

The company cited competition and “rapidly changing markets” as reasons for the change, and aims to refine its focus with the split. Comcast points to its position in the technology sector serving broadband, wireless and cable customers, and spotlighted NBCUni’s foothold in streaming, theme parks, movies and television. The announcement follows news that Comcast-owned Sky has committed to a $2 billion deal to buy the streaming and broadcast arms of UK free-to-air TV network ITV.

Sky, a pay-TV broadcaster based in the UK, offers film and TV content, streaming platforms, smart TVs, and mobile and internet connectivity. Its programming includes live sports, Sky News and original shows such as The Day of the Jackal (which streams on Peacock in the US).

Sky will be under the NBCUniversal umbrella with Mike Cavanaugh taking the reins as CEO of the venture, while Michael Angelakis will step up as Comcast’s new CEO. 

This new split may see each company positioned for unique partnership and licensing opportunities within the media realm, possibly expanding which programming, subscriptions or bundles customers are offered. Previously, Comcast spun off some of its NBCUniversal-owned properties into Versant, a separate company that includes ownership of USA Network, E!, CNBC, Rotten Tomatoes, Fandango, GolfPass and more. 

Categories: Gadgets

Bots Now Outnumber Humans Online. Here’s Why It Matters.

The internet was built on the assumption that there’s a human being on the other side of every screen. That assumption is no longer true. According to Cloudflare’s Radar platform, agentic AI bots now generate 57.4% of all web requests globally, while humans account for just 42.6%—a milestone reached far sooner than almost anyone expected. Cloudflare CEO Matthew Prince had predicted bots would surpass human traffic by 2027. Instead, that crossover happened this month.

“Welp, that happened faster than I predicted,” Prince said in a post on X on June 3. “Thought it would be [at the] end of 2027, then early 2027, but agentic traffic [is] growing so fast that bots have now passed human traffic online for the first time in the Internet’s history.”

He backed up his claim with a post to Cloudflare Radar, the company’s internet measurement system, showing that agentic bot usage is up to 57.4% of total traffic, while human traffic has dropped to 42.6%. 

Prince said in another post that the data is “a bit messy” but “clearly on the other side now,” indicating this is a trend that isn’t going away. 

Agentic AI traffic now exceeds that of real human users.

Cloudflare

These are not the bots you’re looking for

It is important to clarify what Prince refers to regarding web traffic. Regular bots, like search engine scrapers and web performance tools, eclipsed human internet traffic well over a decade ago. There are reports that those same bots exceeded human traffic on small websites even sooner, which led to a lot of small website owners exceeding their hosting usage limits faster than expected. 

The agentic bots Prince is referring to are the systems that search the internet on your behalf when you ask an AI chatbot a question and return the results. Those searches and visits generate real web traffic, even if it doesn’t look that way from your AI chat window. The data means that more AI agents are visiting these webpages than real humans. Humans still physically engage with content more than AI does, but AI visits webpages more often. 

The compact British Overseas Territory of Gibraltar has some of the highest agentic AI web traffic usage of any country on Earth. 

Cloudflare

Digging into the data

The above numbers reflect worldwide traffic patterns, but they differ by region. North America as a whole skews more toward bot usage, with bots accounting for 68.6% of activity and humans 31.4%. If you zoom in on the American Midwestthe trend reverses, with humans leading at 54.5% versus 45.5% for bots. The trend is consistent across regions: Broader areas tend to be dominated by agentic bot traffic, while smaller areas within those regions often still show higher levels of human usage.

There are some outliers as well. During peak hours, up to 97% of traffic originating from tiny Gibraltar is bot traffic. Other countries, like Cuba and Laos, sit at the other end of the spectrum, with 80.8% and 84.7% of each country’s traffic coming from human users, respectively. 

North America, Europe and Africa lean toward bots, while Asia, South America and Oceania still see more human internet use most of the time. 

Dead Internet Theory

Interest in something called Dead Internet Theory has increased in recent years, fueled by perceptions that online activity is becoming less human-driven.

The idea behind Dead Internet Theory is that bots and AI generate most of the internet’s activity. The theory seemed far-fetched to many when it emerged in the late 2010s, but it’s becoming harder to argue against as data like Cloudflare’s becomes public. 

The implications become more concerning with additional context: Forty percent of Facebook posts are estimated to be generated by bots. Music-streaming service Deezer announced in April that 44% of new music uploaded to its platform is now AI-generated. And a report from Axios posits that AI generates 52% of all online articles (though not this one — honest).

Categories: Gadgets

Chrome Has Been Secretly Downloading AI to Your Computer. Here’s What You Can Do

Chrome has been running an experiment on its users’ hard drives. Since at least April 2026, the browser has been automatically downloading Gemini Nano, Google’s on-device AI model, to eligible desktop and laptop computers without prompting users, notifying them or offering a straightforward way to opt out. A Chrome data folder most people have never opened powers a set of AI features, including scam detection and text assistance and reinstalls itself if removed through standard means. Privacy advocates say the practice raises serious questions about consent. Here’s how to find the file and what your options actually are for getting rid of it.

The mysterious file in question is Gemini Nano, an AI model that runs on devices, such as smartphones and laptops rather than in the cloud. According to Alexander Hanff, a Swedish computer scientist and lawyer known as That Privacy Guy, it’s been installed on some Chrome browsers without permission. You won’t know when it’s been downloaded onto your device, either. 

Hanff said Gemini Nano will only be installed if the device meets the hardware requirements. It’s still unknown how many people have gotten the install.

Gemini Nano performs tasks such as detecting scam phone calls, helping you write text messages, summarizing recordings and analyzing Pixel phone screenshots. It’s not to be confused with the AI Mode pill in the address bar. If you use AI Mode, your queries are routed to Google Gemini servers, not to Gemini Nano.

A Google spokesperson told CNET that Gemini Nano will automatically uninstall if the device doesn’t have enough resources, such as processing power, memory, storage space or network bandwidth. 

“In February, we began rolling out the ability for users to easily turn off and remove the model directly in Chrome settings,” the spokesperson said. “Once disabled, the model will no longer download or update.”

Google gives more information about on-device generative AI models in Chrome on this web page.

How to get rid of the AI model 

If you want to remove the 4GB AI model from your device, first check whether it’s installed. 

Hanff said Chrome users will not know they have Gemini Nano unless they search for it, because “Chrome did not ask” and “Chrome does not surface it.”

The easiest way to remove Gemini Nano from your device is to uninstall Chrome.

On a Mac

  1. If you’re using a Mac, open Finder by clicking the blue smiling face icon on the far left of the dock.
  2. Then, click Go in the top menu bar and hold the Option key so that Library appears in the dropdown menu. 
  3. Click Library, then navigate to Application Support > Google > Chrome > Default. See if there’s a folder called OptGuideOnDeviceModel. If the folder exists and contains a file named weights.bin, the AI model was installed.
  4. To permanently remove it on a Mac, open Chrome and click the three-dot menu in the top-right corner. Then click Settings, then System and toggle off On-device AI.

On a Windows device

If you’re running a Windows device, there are a few ways to check whether Gemini Nano is installed.

  1. One way is via a Run Command. Press the Windows key and R, paste in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Google\Chrome\User Data\OptGuideOnDeviceModel and then press Enter. If that file comes up, see if weights.bin is in there.
  2. You can also use File Explorer to check whether the AI model is installed. Navigate to C:\Users\[YourUsername]\AppData\Local\Google\Chrome\User Data\OptGuideOnDeviceModel and look for weights.bin.
  3. To get rid of the AI model in Windows, open Chrome, navigate to Settings > System, and toggle off On-device AI. While still in Chrome, type chrome://flags in the address bar and search for Optimization Guide. Then, set Enables Optimization Guide on Device to Disabled.
  4. Then restart Chrome by completely closing it, using the menu to exit, not just closing windows.
  5. Finally, delete local files by navigating to \AppData\Local\Google\Chrome\User Data and deleting the OptGuideOnDeviceModel folder.

Watch this: Google I/O 2026: New Gemini, Smart Glasses and a Whole New Laptop OS. Here’s What to Expect

06:44

Why does it matter?

Hanff said the push might be intended to help Google cut costs by moving AI work off its own servers and onto your computer.

“Running inference on users’ own hardware allows them to push ‘AI features’ without the compute costs,” Hanff told CNET.

AI inference is the process by which the model actually does the things you prompt it to, as opposed to the training of it, which generally happens in a data center. If it’s happening on your computer instead of in the cloud, that could have an impact on things like your computer’s speed or battery life, in addition to storage space the model’s taking up on your hard drive.

But Hanff suggested there could be legal ramifications, at least in Europe. He suggested that the Gemini Nano install could constitute a breach of the European Union’s General Data Protection Regulation’s principles of lawfulness, fairness and transparency. Hanff said that, considering the potential environmental impacts, Google should have announced it under the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive.

“Google has given us every reason not to trust them with a history spanning two decades of global privacy violations at massive scale,” Hanff told CNET. “So, I suspect they figured asking permission (what the law requires) would hinder their ability to push this model and, of course, whatever comes after it.”

Categories: Gadgets

Flipper Device’s new Busy Bar is a customizable display for productivity

London-based Flipper Devices is known for its Flipper Zero gadget, used by hackers and tinkerers to access different radios with Bluetooth, RFID, NFC, and a sub-1GHz transceiver. The company today took a different direction and launched a productivity-focused gadget called Busy Bar, which helps you set timers, block apps, and display custom messages and widgets on an LED display.

Flipper Devices announced the device last year, and now it is putting it on open sale next month. The Busy Bar looks like a table clock with many knobs and buttons. On the front, it has a 72×16 LED matrix display with up to 400 nits of brightness, support for 16 million colors, and a sensor to adjust brightness automatically.

On the back, there is a monochrome screen to display status, timer, battery, and connectivity indicators. This lets you look at information if the screen is facing the other side. What’s more, there is a small speaker on the side for playing custom sounds and notifications.

Image Credits:Flipper Devices

On top, there is a mode selector switch, a start/stop button, an indicator, and a scroll wheel to navigate menus and set the time. The device has Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and USB connection options.

The Busy Bar has a 3250 mAh battery, which can last up to eight hours of active status time and up to two weeks of standby time. The company said that with a 15W adapter, users can fully charge the device in an hour.

The idea behind the device is that you can set a message to indicate to others (and to yourself) when you are doing a task. This is helpful in a work-from-home setup where you might have other people in the house. You can also set Pomodoro-style timers for productivity blocks for you to concentrate on finishing tasks.

Flipper Devices is releasing apps for iOS, Android, and macOS, with support planned for a Windows app. Users can block select apps with different types of timers on iOS and Android. Plus, there is a mic integration with macOS, through which the device shows an “on call” status on the display and mutes notifications when you join meetings or start recording or streaming.

Image Credits: Flipper DevicesImage Credits:Flipper Devices

The Busy Bar is also Matter-certified, meaning that it can work with your existing smart home setup across Amazon, Apple, and Google-based smart home ecosystems. This means users can trigger smart home automations based on the bar’s status.

The company has made the device suitable for developers to customize with open firmware. They can use open HTTP API, MQTT, and official Python and TypeScript libraries to build widgets and complexions. Users can also control the Busy Bar over the internet through its cloud API.

Users can join the waitlist on Busy Bar’s website, and the first 3,000 users will be able to purchase the device at $199. All other users will have to shell out $249 for the device. Shipping and sales will begin from July 14 to the U.S., EU, U.K., and Canada. The company also plans to release accessories, including wall mounts, screen protectors, and custom switches.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

xTool’s New Printer Will Make It Easier Than Ever to Be Creative. The Preorder Is Live Today

While I understand the technology behind it, UV printing will always feel like magic. Buying a box that can bring all your magnificent ideas to reality? It’s magical, and it’s only getting better. xTool, a leader in innovative digital fabrication technology, has just opened the preorder window for its “print anything” O1 Omni printer.

The tagline for the Omni is “From rigid to fabric. Print it all.” xTool says the print anything capability is made possible by a “flexible, innovative dual-printhead architecture.” Makers will be able to configure the system for dual-UV printing to unlock advanced multilayered effects using specialized neon ink, or choose a hybrid UV and fabric setup to give you as many material options as possible.

The O1 Omni printer is available in three configurations. There’s the entry-level UV edition: $1,699 preorder ($2,499 retail price), the effect-optimized dual-head UV edition for specialized neon ink: $2,699 preorder ($3,299 retail price) and the ultimate cross-category hybrid UV and fabric edition for printing directly onto cotton or onto film: $2,799 preorder ($3,499 retail price).

Possibilities are pretty much endless as the Omni stands in a lane of its own. It merges UV (printing on solid surfaces), DTG (printing directly onto fabric), DTF (printing flat images to plastic transfers) and UV DTF (printing raised images onto plastic transfers) technologies.

That means, you can print intricate designs on fabric, wood, acrylic, glass, metal and more. xTool says the Omni can print on “virtually any surface imaginable,” or at least any surface that can fit inside the machine.

James Bricknell/CNET

CNET’s 3D printing expert James Bricknell got to spend some time with the Omni at CES in January and had this to say:

“I’ve used a couple of really good UV printers in the last year or so and, more importantly, I’ve used a lot of great xTool lasers. The Omni is bringing a relatively new technology to a company that has a proven track record in the maker community, and the addition of Direct to Film as well as Direct to Garment makes this a unique one-stop shop for custom creation.”

During the preorder process, you’ll be required to pay a refundable $50 deposit to secure your printer and lock in the early-bird savings. You’ll also receive a special bonus package of jigs, ink discounts and credits for xTool’s generative AI tool Atomm, valued at $459. Launched date is scheduled for July 15.

Categories: Gadgets

Pocket raises $11M in bet on rising demand for AI note-taking devices

Unlike AI gadgets like Rabbit or Humane, companies building dedicated gadgets for recording and transcribing meetings have actually seen some traction. The market is huge — though a bit constrained, as smartphones work fine for such tasks when paired with note-taking apps — and startups like Plaud, Mobvoi, Anker, Viaim, and Vibe have jumped in to take advantage.

In this crowded market, Y Combinator-backed Pocket thinks it can win with its design, packaging, and pricing. The company sells a $129 credit card-shaped puck, which sticks to the back of your phone, and promises unlimited recordings, transcriptions, and to-do items, no subscription required.

The startup says it has sold more than 130,000 units since launching last year, and that momentum has now helped it score $11 million in funding from Accel, Y Combinator, and ElevenLabs CEO and co-founder Mati Staniszewski.

Pocket’s core idea isn’t novel: You stick the puck to the back of your phone, turn on recording during a meeting, and it’ll record and transcribe your conversations.

Image Credits:Pocket

Users can then ask the accompanying phone app to generate summaries of meetings, ask an AI assistant questions about meetings, create mind maps, and transform the text into different templates.

While the basic transcription comes free with the puck, the company sells a $200-per-year plan to unlock unlimited AI summaries, queries to the AI assistant, daily highlights, and file attachments.

“You can record on the go, offline, and in the field, which is exactly how lawyers, salespeople, doctors, real estate agents, construction workers, and students use Pocket today,” Accel partner Cecilia Wang said. “Not only are people present rather than shifting focus to take notes, but more information and insights also get captured than ever before, which otherwise would have been lost. Over time, that accumulation of insights is really valuable: one central place where your ideas, conversations, and thoughts live, rather than scattered and lost,” Wang said.

Pocket was founded by Akshay Narisetti, who was a founding member of rival note-taking startup Omi; and Gabriel Dymowski, who previously founded a blockchain-based document management startup.

Pocket co-founders Akshay Narisetti and Gabriel Dymowski Image Credits:Pocket

“We thought every meeting notetaker was built for online conversations, but nothing was geared towards real-life talk. AI really needs a lot of context to work better for us, and a lot of that context exists offline,” Narisetti told TechCrunch.

For its enterprise customers, Pocket offers custom workflow management, webhook support, and integration with apps such as Google Calendar, OneDrive, Google Drive, Obsidian, Claude and Cursor. Plus, there is a model context protocol (MCP) server to connect its AI assistant to other databases.

Like other meeting notetakers, Pocket wants to help people automate tasks like drafting emails, updating CRMs, and creating action items based on meetings. The company is banking on shipping software fast to enable these integrations.

Devices like Pocket undoubtedly face competition from software players such as Granola, Zoom, Fireflies, Otter, and Read AI. However, device-first companies like Plaud, which is on track to generate annual revenue of $100 million via software sales, are also building enterprise capacity along with desktop apps for digital meetings.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

T-Mobile Is Automatically Pushing Legacy Customers Onto Its Current Plans

Some T-Mobile customers who’ve held onto old phone plans are being notified that their accounts will soon be automatically upgraded to the company’s current lineup of plans, which in some cases will mean an increase in their mobile phone bills.

A representative of T-Mobile chose to not share which plans are being retired, but said some of them stretch back 10 to 15 years. That could include Simple Choice, T-Mobile One, One Plus and Magenta family of plans, as well as grandfathered Sprint plans that carried over when T-Mobile and Sprint merged in 2020.

The change affects thousands of customers and will apply within the next few weeks, to be reflected on the next billing cycles. Affected subscribers, which also includes some small businesses, should expect to get the news via text or through the T-Life app starting today.

It’s not unusual for companies to take action to shake people off older plans. AT&T added a fee to some of its legacy plans in May, and T-Mobile added price hikes in March 2025. What’s different here is that T-Mobile is taking action directly and automatically, versus encouraging its customers to upgrade.

Allan Samson, chief marketing officer at T-Mobile, explained during a briefing late last week that “absolutely nothing is required of the customer, and it just is going to happen.”

He said the legacy plans will be moved to comparable modern plans in the current lineup, which includes Essentials, Essentials Saver, Experience More, Experience Beyond and Better Value. That will bring more features such as expanded international roaming, premium 5G speeds and greater hotspot data than what are available on their older plan.

For customers who do see a price increase, “the price they’re going to be paying in a huge majority of cases is still going to be below what that exact plan sells for today,” said Samson. “We’re not moving you all the way up to the rack rate” that a new customer would pay. 

If you’ve been moved to a new plan and aren’t happy with the one that’s been chosen for you, your only options will be to shop for a new T-Mobile plan or look for a new provider.

Modernizing internal systems

At the heart of the move is a need to reduce complexity in the company’s internal systems.

In an internal email sent to employees today and acquired by CNET, T-Mobile Chief Operating Officer Jon Freier noted that retiring the plans clears out over 1,100 legacy billing codes. “Simplifying the plan mix means even more resources and focus on delivering the outstanding experience we’re known for,” he wrote.

Samson explained that like any software or hardware company, there comes a point when the need to modernize outweighs the costs of continuing to support and test for backward compatibility.

“A rate plan is a snapshot of the capacity and capability of your network in that moment in time,” Samson said, citing the limited network capacity when the old plans were active. “Fifteen years ago, you checked the weather and maybe your stock report and that was about it. Today we’re streaming 4K movies.”

T-Mobile expects that a shift like this, where customers are being moved to new plans whether they want to or not, will require extra support that the company is prepared for.

In his memo to employees, Freier acknowledged that “for our frontline teams … while the immediate future will bring increased customer contact volume, we are confident this plan simplification will make your job easier over time.”

Categories: Gadgets

The One Thing a Water Quality Scientist Wants You to Know About Drinking Tap

Reliable municipal water is a luxury many in the US enjoy, but it’s not always guaranteed. Faulty pipes, bacterial contamination and corporate chemical dumping have quietly compromised drinking water across the country for decades. And in older homes, the risk may start at the pipes in your own walls, where lead and asbestos can leach contaminants long before water hits your tap.

Before we dive into common drinking water contaminants and potential problems, let’s clarify that this list doesn’t necessarily indicate unsafe levels of any given contaminant in your area’s drinking water. The easiest way to determine what’s in your water is to review your local water utility’s annual water quality report. Don’t forget to consult the EPA’s handy guide to reading them (PDF).

It’s critical to review your local water quality report to determine whether you want to take additional filtration steps at home to further enhance your drinking water.

EPA

The biggest myth about tap water, according to an expert

Experts I spoke with identified toxins that could be leaching into your tap water.

Elena Zaretskaya/Getty Images

According to water scientist Dr. Eric Roy, the biggest misnomer about tap water is that just because it looks, smells and tastes clean, it is clean. Some of the most harmless impurities, namely byproducts of treatment-center disinfectants, are the ones that affect taste and odor the most, while others, including lead, which can greatly affect your health, can’t be detected by human senses at all.

The moral of the story? Clean drinking water isn’t a given, and relying on your senses and a bit of wishful thinking isn’t really a safeguard against potential problems. Learning what’s in your water and then treating it appropriately is the most sensible course of action.

Tap Score’s lab-testing and evaluation shows you where the issues are in your tap water.

Screenshot by CNET

To arm yourself with useful information, you can have your water tested by a reliable independent water lab, such as Tap Score, for about $300 and get a detailed breakdown of what’s in your water and how it could affect your health. 

Similarly, you can buy home test kits from Safe Home and Easytest for about $30 or less. Both at-home kits test for lead, bacteria, and excess chlorine. (Most people lack the resources for professional water testing services.) If you use well water, it’s a good idea to test it at least once a year. 

5 most common tap water contaminants

Pulling back the curtain on what’s in your drinking water might encourage you to invest in a water filter. (Even if it’s mostly for houseplants, like my Typhoon III reverse osmosis system.)

John Carlsen/CNET

I asked Kyle Postmus, senior manager of the Global Water Division at NSF (formerly the National Sanitation Foundation), about pollutants that could bypass the water treatment process. “While municipal water treatment systems are highly effective at removing many contaminants, certain pollutants can still make it through the treatment process.” Postmus also points out that location, infrastructure age and source water quality all affect the presence of a pollutant.

He notes that the testing and certification work of organizations like NSF helps ensure the efficacy of the water treatment process. “NSF certifies water treatment products against rigorous standards to ensure they perform as claimed, providing consumers with independent assurance of effectiveness.” 

1. Lead

Old lead pipes are the most common culprit for the toxic metal leaching into drinking water.

Gina Pricope/Getty Images

Lead typically sneaks in after the treatment process because some cities still use outdated lead pipes, which can increase contamination. For example, the Utah Lead Inventory notes that some cities where I live have documented lead pipes in their water systems. The ideal solution for removing lead is to replace outdated water pipes but the EPA also suggests a few ways to reduce lead contamination:

  • Purchase a water filter certified for lead removal, such as our top pick, the Zero Water filter.
  • Regularly clean your faucet’s aerator to remove sediment.
  • Drink only cold water — hot tap water can hold more lead than cold water.
  • Flush your pipes before drinking water if it has been stagnant for an extended period. The easiest way to do this is to take a shower, wash the dishes or do the laundry.

2. Microorganisms

Storms and flooding can cause dangerous microorganisms to enter drinking water supplies.

Melissa Sue Gerrits/Getty Images

Postmus says that some resistant microorganisms may survive standard treatment. However, a more common source of bacterial contamination is an accidental sewage overflow, sometimes after a heavy storm. In most cases, you can remove this kind of contamination by boiling, filtering or disinfecting your water.

For Legionella, one of the most important steps is to set your water heater to at least 140°F to prevent bacterial growth. This also reduces the likelihood of bacterial growth where hot and cold water mix, such as at faucets. (Notably, the CDC says that no single method can control Legionella, so you’ll likely need additional disinfectant and flushing steps if it becomes an issue in your home.)

3. Emerging contaminants

Many emerging contaminants originate from the products you use at home and they aren’t yet regulated by water treatment standards.

Waterdrop

Emerging Contaminants are a class of contamination that Postmus says includes pharmaceuticals, personal care products and certain industrial chemicals. Per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS) are notable recent examples of emerging contaminants.

These pollutants may not yet be subject to regulation, but the Safe Drinking Water Act requires the EPA to evaluate contaminant candidates every few years. Look for NSF’s water filter certification program for emerging contaminants — NSF/ANSI 401 — if you want to remove them from your drinking water. Water filter brands like Waterdrop and Aquasana are a good starting point. 

4. Volatile organic compounds

You can find VOCs in a ton of products like gasoline, adhesives, solvents and cleaning chemicals.

Rorra

Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are a type of chemical that easily dissolves in water — hence the word volatile — and are usually the source of the smells (and flavors) we associate with chemicals. The primary source of VOCs, such as trihalomethanes, is the water treatment process itself, as many are minor byproducts of disinfection. Fortunately, a properly functioning water treatment facility uses rigorous testing to ensure that VOCs stay out of your tap. Chemical spills are also common sources of VOCs in drinking water, as they can contaminate groundwater. 

Activated carbon filters, such as the AquaTru Carafe reverse osmosis filter or Rorra countertop filter system, are excellent tools for removing VOCs from water.

5. Chlorine and chloramine

Water that is properly treated is safe for humans but those with pets may want to consider a filter that removes trace amounts of chlorine or chloramines.

David Watsky/CNET

These disinfectants (which don’t really fall under the VOC umbrella) aren’t typically harmful to people in properly treated water, but they’re not good for aquatic pets such as fish, turtles, and frogs. If you have these types of pets, it’s a good idea to treat the water to remove chloramines.

Reverse osmosis filtration is a mainstay for aquarium enthusiasts but you can also find chloramine removal products at the pet store. For chlorine, simply let it sit out for a few days and it will eventually dissipate from the water.

Water purification at home

It’s easy to improve water quality at home with the right kind of water filter.

Culligan

Postmus recommends that consumers look for an NSF-certified water filter to address specific contaminants. “NSF-certified water filters are rigorously third-party tested to ensure they work according to the manufacturer’s claims and are safe to use and won’t leak. For ease, consumers can check NSF’s Product Listing Page that lists all NSF-certified water filters.”

One reason to check the certification page is to verify the manufacturer’s claims and ensure the filter will work as intended. “This is a crucial step when it comes to something as important to your health as your water.” 

Most of CNET’s top-tested countertop water filters, water filter pitchers and filtered water bottles are NSF/ANSI-certified; however, you can also find fridge filters and whole-home filtration systems that meet the same standards.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 29 #644

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition features a diverse batch of categories. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: City of angels.

Green group hint: Grab your racket.

Blue group hint: Wear your tartan.

Purple group hint: Best athletes.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: A Los Angeles athlete.

Green group: Wimbledon women’s singles winners.

Blue group: Scottish soccer clubs.

Purple group: All-star ____.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 29, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is a Los Angeles athlete. The four answers are Bruin, Charger, Laker and Trojan.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is Wimbledon women’s singles winners. The four answers are Barty, Graf, King and Williams.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is Scottish soccer clubs. The four answers are Celtic, Hearts, Motherwell and Rangers.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is all-star ____. The four answers are break, game, team and weekend.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 29 #1114

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle features one of those purple categories that hides words within other words. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Like a ne’er-do-well.

Green group hint: Devour.

Blue group hint: Turn up the music.

Purple group hint: Think forest items.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Old timey troublemakers.

Green group: Consume with gusto.

Blue group: Parts of a speaker.

Purple group: Ending in parts of a tree.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 29, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is old timey troublemakers. The four answers are miscreant, rogue, ruffian and scoundrel.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is consume with gusto.  The four answers are crush, guzzle, inhale and snarf.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is parts of a speaker. The four answers are cabinet, cone, magnet and woofer.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is ending in parts of a tree. The four answers are embark (bark), groot (root), nudibranch (branch) and strunk (trunk).

Categories: Gadgets

Best OTA TV Antenna for Cord-Cutters in 2026

Top antennas testing results

PriceNo. of channels (NYC)No. of channels (LA)No. watchable test channels (out of 14) Antennas Direct Clearstream Eclipse 401047011Btfdreem Smart TV Antenna — Amplified 298110411Channel Master Flatenna 29988611Gesobyte Amplified HD Digital TV Antenna — Low 309211613Mohu Gateway 3510412811Mohu Leaf 3510213112Ultra Vizion HD Digital TV Antenna 441046910

We’ve tested dozens of antennas in the past 10 years with a view to finding the best performance and ease of installation for the least amount of money. Compared to a live TV streaming service, OTA TV does have some restrictions, namely, it is usually confined to a single television, and the broadcast signal from an OTA TV antenna won’t work on phones or other devices. Thankfully, you can kick it up a notch with an OTA DVR with networking capabilities and dedicated apps. Our favorite right now is the Tablo 4th Gen.

When you’re buying a TV antenna the two things you desire most are: the most number of channels available, and the best reception or picture quality. In our tests, we wanted to find the antennas that were able to pull in more channels than the others, and that also delivered stronger, clearer TV signals, even on “problem” channels. Using the TiVo Edge as our test machine, we hooked up each antenna in turn and tested how many total channels we could receive in our LA and New York locations. The Edge lists the signal strength of each channel, and while a signal strength reading of 70% usually means it’s watchable we watched all of the predetermined test channels (below) to determine the signal quality. In deciding a winner, we tried to find the antenna that had the best performance with both line of sight and without.

Testing an antenna by searching for channels using the TiVo Edge

Ty Pendlebury

With that in mind, we tested seven indoor antennas with prices ranging from $29 to $50 (all much less than the most basic cable TV service). Here are the seven TV antennas we looked at:

While most of the antennas were made by “name” manufacturers, the Gesobyte and the Btfdreem were chosen specifically because they were two of the highest-selling antennas on Amazon, although the latter is currently unavailable.

In my test site in Upper Manhattan, I have a direct line of sight to the broadcast tower located in the Empire State Building.

Ty Pendlebury

Much like real estate, how well a TV antenna works is based on location, location, location. We tested the antennas in two main places: in uptown Manhattan, New York with a line of sight to the broadcast tower six miles away, and in Reseda, California, at least 10 miles from the closest tower (though no line of sight). Depending on your own location, for instance, you might receive broadcasts from multiple antennas. In addition, hills or large buildings in the way will affect the frequency range and reception of TV channels.

We situated each antenna in the same spot each time and connected it to the TiVo Edge, which gives signal strength data as well as a total channel count. We used two metrics to determine which TV antenna performed best. The first was a raw measure of the number of channels the antenna could detect, while the second involved several predetermined “problem channels.” For these, we consulted a list of channels culled from various forums, for both testing areas, and gauged how well the antennas pulled in each channel.

The TiVo Edge is a now-discontinued OTA recorder for cord-cutters.

Joshua Goldman/CNET

Our list of “problem” channels in Manhattan was WABC 7.1 (ABC), WNET 13.1 (PBS), WPIX 11.1 (CW — Manhattan only) and WNJB 58.1 (PBS — New Jersey only). In addition, we added popular channels CBS 2.1, WNBC 4 (NBC), and WNYW 5 (Fox). Meanwhile, we compiled a list of channels in LA including KCBS 2.1 (CBS), KNBC 4.1 (NBC), KTLA 5.1 (CW), KABC 7.1 (ABC), KTTV 11.1 (FOX), KCOP 13.1 (MyNetwork) and KCET 28.1 (PBS).

While the outcome will vary depending on where you live and how far you are from TV towers, in our tests the best-performing models received the greatest number of popular channels as well as local channels, radio broadcasts and Spanish-language stations.

Most of the TV antennas were based on the same rectangular design, but there was one important consideration: the cable. Did the antenna have a long, high-performance coaxial cable or, even better, a detachable one? You’ll be sticking one of these in your window, which could be a long way from your TV, so longer is better.

It’s worth noting that some of these antennas — the Btfdreem, Gesobyte and the Ultra Vizion Plus — included gain-boosting amplifiers. Based on our experiences in several locations over the years, amplifiers can affect signal strength in wildly unpredictable ways. The Ultra Vizion wouldn’t work at all with the amp attached, while the others did. The numbers printed above are the best results with or without amplification. If you can’t get TV reception with an indoor antenna, a gain amp may not actually help you, and in other cases, it could make your reception worse by overloading channels that already have a strong signal.

Several antennas in our list include a powered amplifier, but use thoughtfully, as these may actually make a strong signal worse.

Sarah Tew/CNET

Categories: Gadgets

Samsung Galaxy A27 Gets a Minor Redesign and Higher Price

The Samsung Galaxy A27 5G comes with a minor design tweak over last year’s Galaxy A26, but, like most electronics, the lower-cost phone is getting more expensive this year — specifically, a $50 price bump over its predecessor.

The $350 Galaxy A27 was announced last week ahead of a July 14 US launch. The most obvious change is that the A27 will feature a smaller punch-hole design for its 12-megapixel selfie camera, rather than a thicker notch. The phone will only be available in black in the US, while other regions will get more fun colors like blue and pink, as Samsung is showing off in its announcement.

On the inside, the Galaxy A27 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 6 Gen 3 chip, which might make this phone run fairly well for the price. It’s the same processor used in Motorola’s $500 Moto G Stylus. When I reviewed the Stylus, I found the Snapdragon 6 Gen 3 more than capable of handling my everyday tasks, but compared to other $500 phones, it’s underpowered. At $350, it will likely be more competitively priced.

Other features include a 6.7-inch AMOLED display with support for a 120Hz refresh rate, 25-watt wired charging for its 5,000-mAh battery and six years of Android software updates along with security support. The phone has a 50-megapixel wide-angle camera, a 5-megapixel ultrawide camera and a 2-megapixel macro camera.

Affordable phones have been particularly susceptible to price increases amid the ongoing RAM shortage caused by the demand of memory by AI data centers. The shortage, called RAMagedeon, has driven up electronics prices over the past year. Samsung’s $200 Galaxy A17, the company’s lowest-priced phone in the US, keeps its price but most of the Galaxy A lineup and similarly-priced Motorola phones have seen cost increases. To Samsung’s credit, the company provides its cheaper phone lineup with some of the longest software and security support commitments we see in the under-$400 price range, which will be all the more critical for customers who just need a long-lasting phone at a lower price.

Categories: Gadgets

From Photo Backups to My Own Cloud Server: My Trip Into Home Data Storage

The clock started ticking three years ago when I learned Drobo was going out of business. That name not ringing a bell? Drobo made external storage devices that bundled hard drives into an easy, set-it-and-forget-it RAID configuration for people like me who wanted to keep our data safe and in one place.

My family bought one in early 2009, when my daughters were little, and we were concerned about protecting all the baby photos and videos we’d collected. The Drobo, with its four hard drive bays, seemed like a good place to park our media and other data in addition to creating online backups using Google Photos, iCloud and Flickr as our off-site protection.

For the next 17 years, the Drobo never failed us. It wasn’t fancy, it wasn’t attached to any network, and its USB 2.0 and Firewire ports were soon left behind by devices with faster connections. But as reliable, if slow, external storage, it did the job and was a stalwart under-the-desk companion. Although network-attached versions of my device and competitors eventually put this type of storage on home networks, the Drobo was a preview of what the marketplace would look like in about 15 years. Network-attached storage devices, or NAS, would become more attractive, easier to set up and use and increasingly important for those who want to wrangle and use their data in addition to backing it all up.

At the time, the Drobo was all I needed. When I primarily used a Mac, I backed up to the Drobo using Time Machine. When I moved full-time to a Windows PC, I made sure to update backups regularly, even though most of my important files were synced to cloud services more frequently.

It took me until this year to find the right replacement for the Drobo, even though I knew that a hardware failure in a gadget no longer supported by its maker could be a big problem for my data. 

So I started looking. And I got lost and confused very quickly. This is my journey into the rabbit hole that is network-attached storage.

What’s changed since the Drobo days

For its day (the late 2000s/early 2010s), a Drobo device was a good option for personal data storage. The company is no longer in business.

Drobo

When I started looking online for devices that could replace my Drobo, I found that the only people still talking about it were photographers and video editors, with blog posts detailing how they’d migrated their image libraries to faster, bigger storage solutions.

Everyone else talking about the type of solution I was looking for seemed to have evolved into a different type of gadget lover altogether. They were NAS enthusiasts, hungry for more and more space. Critically, they weren’t just looking for the safest, easiest way to park their data securely. They were expanding on all the things their NAS could do beyond just storing files. 

They bragged about devices that could stream 4K video to people inside and outside their homes using apps like Jellyfin and Plex. They used their NAS devices to host Minecraft servers and run home security hardware on virtual machines. They downloaded media files, added them to their home libraries, and synced them with their smartphones.

Some were already using their NAS servers to run AI tools like OpenClaw to automatically manage their stored files or to carry out media search-and-assimilation missions to find movies or TV shows. (Not all of this activity, as you might imagine, is strictly legal.)

A common thread in discussions about NAS devices involved owners trying to wrest back control of their photo libraries and fed up with paying for streaming services such as Netflix and Hulu. The term “data sovereignty” came up a lot. That’s a term that could apply to how governments and AI companies manage your cloud data, but it’s also become a way for NAS owners to justify the time and money they spend on network storage. These people say they want to rely less on streaming services and cloud storage and keep their data local. Many of these NAS owners are also in the seemingly never-ending process of digitizing their physical media — CDs, DVDs, Blu-rays and even 4K discs — to build out their digital media libraries. 

The NAS devices I was seeing still used less power than a PC but included powerful enough processors and enough memory to make them full-blown personal servers. They could transcode 4K video and serve it to multiple users, or run autonomous processes full-time. I wasn’t sure I was ready to dive so deeply into all of these ways to use a NAS, but I was pretty convinced I wanted one to start exploring those possibilities.

Hardware price hikes make for harder NAS decisions

If I’d bought an NAS device when Drobo exited the market in 2023, I would have saved a bundle.

Unfortunately, I made this decision in the middle of RAMageddon, as memory prices and PC component costs skyrocketed. That includes traditional hard drives, SSDs and NVMe solid-state drives that modern NAS devices use.

On Reddit thread after Reddit thread, I saw NAS owners complain about the high price of storage for their growing needs and how many of them were taking to eBay or stripping out old servers for high-capacity industrial-life hard drives that could be repurposed for NAS storage. 

NAS owners debated the merits of a few leading companies known for quality NAS products, including industry leader Synology, QNAP, Asustor and a younger upstart, Ugreen. Each of these manufacturers offers a range of devices, some with two hard drive bays, some with four or more, some meant for entry-level consumers, others for businesses with critical data needs.

Read more: What Is RAMageddon? Why AI Is Making Laptops and Phones More Expensive

My takeaway was that Synology had the strongest software ecosystem, but even its most loyal customers were frustrated by hardware that had become increasingly dated and uncompetitive. QNAP and Asustor each had their fans, but Ugreen began to stand out for its intuitive interface and flexibility. Even if you weren’t a fan of its built-in operating system or its relatively limited app ecosystem, you could install an open-source NAS operating system such as TrueNAS or Unraid instead.

I began pricing used devices on Facebook Marketplace and eBay, hoping to get a sweetheart deal from someone upgrading, but other people had the same idea. Low-price used devices are in short supply, and most of the ones I found for sale were so old they were no longer supported.

I was also pricing used hard drives: It seemed like two good NAS options were Seagate’s IronWolf series and Western Digital’s Red Plus drives (they also sell a Red Pro line). Iron Wolf drives are meant to last and are super reliable. Red Plus drives are also meant for the long haul, while remaining quiet. I wasn’t sure yet whether my NAS device would be placed in my office or living room, but I didn’t want the sound of server-grade hard drives grinding and clicking 24/7.

Synology is perhaps the best-known manufacturer of NAS devices, including this two-bay model, the DS720+. 

Sarah Tew/CNET

My four-bay Drobo had 4TB of hard drive space; with RAID redundancy, that left about 2.7TB of usable storage. Even with everything backed up, I am still using only a fraction of that space. But I wanted to at least double that. I began pricing devices with at least four bays. I didn’t want to be limited to two hard drives, and I knew that, for a RAID configuration, having only two would cost me half my storage space. Drobo handled those decisions for me. Now I had to understand RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 6, each offering its own trade-offs in capacity, performance and fault tolerance.

Other things to consider when purchasing: Some NAS devices are limited by their Ethernet ports to, say, 1 Gbps (the speed of a basic Google Fiber internet connection), while others offer multiple ports that can handle multiple file requests at speeds of 2.5 Gbps per port or even 10 Gbps. This matters if you plan to move large data files, stream 4K movies from your NAS or serve multiple people simultaneously. I also wanted to make sure whatever I bought could use faster SSDs and NVMe drives, had a capable processor that wouldn’t age out quickly and had RAM that could be upgraded later if I chose to expand my needs. 

In the end, I opted against used hardware. A flash sale on Ugreen’s DXP4800 Pro on Amazon and the availability of three WD Red Plus 4TB drives at Walmart and Adorama got the best of me. I wasn’t going to spend the money on NVME drives yet. The model I was buying has two slots for them in addition to the hard drive slots. 

Between the Amazon discount and cash back from my credit card, the NAS cost about $700. The three hard drives cost me about $160 each. It was a lot more than I’d initially planned to spend. I rationalized that if the device lasted even half as long as my Drobo had, it would still be a worthwhile investment — both for protecting my family’s data and for finally getting my digital life organized.

Looking back, the hardest part of becoming a NAS user was simply deciding what to buy.

A snazzy new NAS

My hard drives and the DXP4800 Pro arrived, and I got to work setting up. I was surprised to find that unboxing the NAS, installing the hard drives and connecting it to my router and TV via HDMI took less than half an hour.

I downloaded Ugreen’s NAS app on my phone, and it found the device on my home network without any extra steps or troubleshooting. None of my files were on the device yet, but I was surprised by how quickly it was set up and ready to go.

Over the next few days, I experimented and made decisions about how to set things up. I installed the Ugreen app on my PC and created folders for backups and documents, plus a shared space for photos, videos and music that my family could access from their own devices.

Ugreen’s NAS devices use a Debian-based operating system called UGOS. In addition to native apps and a suite of system-monitoring tools, UGOS also includes Docker to install virtual containers for software such as Jellyfin or OpenClaw. 

Omar Gallaga/CNET

That’s when things started to get complicated. Did I want to stick with Ugreen’s own operating system or explore other options? For simplicity, I opted for the built-in software.

Did I want to use Plex or Jellyfin for my media? Or both? Jellyfin is listed as a native app on Ugreen’s operating system (Plex is not), but it requires a separate piece of software called Docker. Docker creates virtual containers for software like Jellyfin and is easy to set up and install. But it involves getting your head around the idea that you’re now a system administrator of virtual systems and that these instances are meant to run all the time unless you manually shut them down. After a few failed attempts to point Jellyfin to the wrong directories, I finally got it running and was impressed by its slick interface.

I also had to decide whether to migrate all my photos to Ugreen’s photo management app. I decided to only add new photos and deal with my archives later. This came in handy during a recent Pokemon Go trip, when I shared a folder with friends so we could all add photos and videos to a private cloud space. The same went for a few comics that I own (Ugreen has its own app for comics and graphic novels) and video files of movies I’d ripped from DVDs ages ago. I gathered the files I had across computer hard drives and transferred them into new NAS folders titled Movies, Comics, Music and TV Shows.

Devices such as Ugreen’s NAS DXP4800 Plus aim to make network-attached storage dead simple to set up and use.

Ugreen/CNET

I want to access and share my media from anywhere, which the Ugreen NAS app handles well, but I’ve been cautious about third-party apps like Jellyfin. I’ve seen plenty of warnings from hard-core NAS users that any NAS exposure to the internet is a risk to personal data. It’s also the reason I haven’t tried OpenClaw. I’m not familiar enough with home network security to trust an AI agent with my NAS data, and I’m not sure I ever will be.

Before migrating all my backups and data to the NAS, I made a few hardware upgrades. I added an APC UPS for about $80, as frequent thunderstorms had me worried. Power outages can put NAS data at risk, so I wanted to protect my new investment. The unit was also on Ugreen’s compatibility list and connects via USB, allowing the NAS to shut down safely before the battery runs out.

I also added a network switch to increase my home network’s bandwidth to 2.5 Gbps. Ugreen makes a switch that plays nice with no hassles for another $50. It gave me more high-speed ports, including two for the connections going to the NAS.

That paid off when I began moving thousands of files across the network to their new home on the NAS. What took several days with the Drobo took less than an hour across my recently upgraded home network.

NAS lessons learned

Even though it felt like I absorbed a whole new language (NASspeak?) on my journey, I still have tons to learn. I’m not completely comfortable with ideas like port forwarding and reverse proxies, and I’m behind on my goal of setting up accounts for my daughters and other family members to access photos and other files.

Some NAS experts don’t think you should expose your network-attached storage to anyone outside your home network, even if you trust the person accessing your data. It makes your data more vulnerable while offering features you can likely already handle on your PC or Mac.

But the goal for me wasn’t just to back up my data and keep it locked away. I wanted to let my daughters explore baby photos and videos they’ve never seen. I wanted to be able to consolidate years of photos, videos and music and organize it all. That’s still a distant, but achievable goal.

Storing backups of aging DVDs, such as my Season 1 disc for GetBackers, a show I did voiceover work on, was one motivation for buying a NAS device. Jellyfin, a media-management app, is how I’ve organized my videos for streaming.

Omar Gallaga/CNET

There’s some decision paralysis. The NAS can do so much, but each new step is a project that takes time and dedication to see through.

I can tell you a few lessons I’ve learned so far.

A NAS is not a complete backup solution. You can mitigate the risk of hard drive failure with a RAID setup, and you can duplicate your files across all your devices to a NAS, but that still doesn’t protect you in case of a fire, burglary or a device failure that takes out all the drives at once. NAS owners preach the gospel of 3-2-1 backups: three copies of your important files on two different types of media and one off-site backup. That could be your computer and phone’s original files, a NAS backup and a cloud backup site such as iDrive, Carbonite or Backblaze. A NAS can be part of a backup plan, but it’s not the total solution.

If you actively use your NAS, you will always feel you need more storage. Hard drive prices are a nice reality check, but once you realize the possibilities for a NAS, it’s easy to feel pinched. A long time ago, I did voice work on an anime show called GetBackers. I still have all 10 DVDs for the full run of the show. Once I got my NAS set up, I thought I’d back up all the DVDs in case my 20-year-old discs wear out. But three episodes into digitizing the files, including subtitles and the original Japanese audio track, I realized I might end up using dozens, perhaps hundreds of gigabytes for just one show. And this was just the first of 10 DVDs. 

You’ll want more space, but you may not be able to afford it now. All told, I spent about $1,300: $700 for the Ugreen NAS, almost $500 for the hard drives and more than $100 for a battery backup and new network switch. I would have loved to equip my NAS with solid-state drives to transfer data even faster and to invest in gigantic 18TB drives. But the prices are simply too high right now. I wasn’t willing to spend thousands more on storage when my needs, for now, are modest. A few years ago, this would have been a much less expensive project.

Help is available for every little problem. Between Reddit, Google and YouTube, every question I had about setting up or using my NAS was answered. And based on the communities I’ve frequented, the ones that can’t be answered can be solved with AI. Many Reddit threads I saw were full of power NAS users telling tales of how they used Claude to walk them through setting up their Docker containers or writing new code to introduce a feature not included in their device’s operating system. If owning a NAS turns you into the family’s IT administrator, at least there’s a whole IT department of fellow NAS users, and their AI assistants, who can also help.

No one wants to hear about your NAS. Outside of people in NAS subreddits (and perhaps anyone reading this article?), nobody in your life is patient enough to hear about your awesome NAS device. Not your significant other, not your kids, not friends you can otherwise talk tech with. Network-attached storage is boring. Want to kill a conversation in 10 seconds? Start by talking about how you got Jellyfin to display movie posters with MPAA ratings, or how quickly you were able to transfer a 25GB file across your home network. Make friends in the Reddit NAS groups, then keep it to yourself. 

Categories: Gadgets

You’ve Only Got a Few Days Left to Save Your Samsung Messages

July is when Samsung Messages stops working, and for anyone still using the app as their primary texting platform, that’s no longer a future problem. It’s a this-week problem. Samsung announced the US shutdown months ago, and the migration path has always been clear: Google Messages is the destination, and the process is straightforward. What isn’t automatic is your text history. Conversations, RCS threads and message archives don’t transfer on their own, and once the app goes dark, whatever didn’t make it over isn’t coming back.

Lithium-ion batteries don’t fail all at once. Instead, they erode. Each charge cycle, each hour spent at 100% and each fast-charging session contributes incrementally to a capacity loss that’s invisible until suddenly it isn’t. Most people notice the decline a year or two into owning a phone and assume it’s just what happens. It’s what happens, but the rate at which it happens is heavily influenced by how you charge the device. A few habit changes, applied consistently, can meaningfully extend how long your phone holds a useful charge.

The steps that preserve your text history are ones you have to take yourself, before the deadline, and the longer you wait, the more likely it is that something gets left behind.

On a page with information about the switch, Samsung links to instructions on switching to Google’s Messages app, including for phones still on Android 12 and Android 13. Samsung has historically included its own Messages app on Galaxy phones, but began transitioning toward Google Messages as early as 2021.

To encourage people to switch to Google Messages, Samsung’s instructions list new features, such as typing indicators, easier group chats and the ability to send higher-quality images. Google’s Messages app also has AI-powered spam detection and filters, multi-device access to messages, and some built-in Gemini AI features. 

It’s also the app that most Android phones use as their default texting app, including Samsung’s more recent Galaxy S26. There are other SMS texting app alternatives in the Google Play Store if you don’t want to use the one made by Google.

Samsung hasn’t said when exactly in July messaging will no longer work in the app. A Samsung representative didn’t respond to a request for comment. Once the app is deactivated, only messaging to emergency services will work on Samsung Messages. 

While the phone maker stopped including it as the default texting app in 2021, it wasn’t until 2024 that Samsung stopped preinstalling it alongside Google Messages. The Galaxy S26 can’t download the Samsung Messages app, and other phones won’t be able to download it after the app’s July sunset.

Samsung said users of Android 11 or lower aren’t affected by the end of service, but would also likely benefit from switching to a supported texting app like Google Messages. To switch to Google Messages, the company asks users to download the app if it’s not already installed and to set it as the default SMS app when prompted after launching it. 

The post also notes that anyone using an older Galaxy Watch running Samsung’s Tizen operating system will no longer have access to their full conversation history, as these watches cannot use Google Messages. Samsung said that they will still be able to read and send text messages, but the company’s newer watches (Galaxy Watch 4 and later) that run WearOS will still have access to full conversations.

Categories: Gadgets

Govee’s smart nugget ice maker makes every iced drink feel like a luxury

For some people, the ice in a beverage is almost as important as the drink itself. That’s the audience Govee had in mind when designing its latest ice maker, the GoveeLife Smart Nugget Ice Maker Pro. This $500 premium smart home gadget is aimed at those who crave what’s called “the good ice,” the soft, chewable nugget ice often found in fast food or restaurant drinks. 

Govee says that the modern-design gadget delivers nugget ice in as little as six minutes. That’s a claim that proved true in my testing. It can make up to 60 pounds of ice per day, and has a 3.5-pound ice basket that automatically refills as you scoop out ice.

The hefty price tag means it’s not for people who are perfectly happy with refrigerator ice and don’t know what “good ice” even means. Instead, it’s for self-proclaimed ice enthusiasts willing to splurge on a fun, luxury gadget that makes everyday drinks a little more enjoyable. 

It’s simple to use, as you just need to fill the tank with water and press start on the screen. You can also control the ice maker with the GoveeHome app, which lets you start ice production from your phone or schedule it so ice is ready when you need it, such as before your morning coffee. 

Image Credits:TechCrunch/Aisha Malik

The app control is quite convenient. I could start ice production from my phone while working at my desk, and by the time I wanted an iced latte, there was fresh nugget ice ready to go without ever having to walk to the kitchen to turn the machine on. The app also shows ice production in real time and how much is currently in the ice bin, which is useful for wanting to stop production when you just want a certain amount. 

The ice maker also supports voice commands with Alexa and Google Assistant, which means a quick ““Hey Google, start the ice maker,” leads to fresh ice. 

The ice maker uses what Govee calls AI NoiseGuard technology to keep operating noise low, too. Designed to operate at around 40 dB, the system can automatically trigger defrosting cycles to minimize noise and help ensure a steady supply of ice. The machine does produce a steady hum while making ice, but I didn’t find the noise distracting or overtly loud. 

It wouldn’t be a Govee product if it didn’t offer customizable ambient lighting. The smart ice maker has a light that illuminates the ice basket and adds a fun visual element to the appliance. Through the app, you can choose from a variety of presets or create your own custom lighting effects. You can choose how bright you want the lights to be or turn them off altogether. 

I mostly kept it on a light pink setting, but occasionally switched to the “cyberpunk” mode, which casts a changing purple and red glow that felt fun and futuristic when I had people over. 

Image Credits:TechCrunch/Aisha Malik

Measuring 17.28 inches deep, 13.98 inches wide, and 17.01 inches tall, the ice maker takes up a lot of counter space and weighs a hefty 50 pounds. If you have a small kitchen, it can appear bulky, especially because its sleek design doesn’t exactly resemble an ice maker from afar.

As for setup, it was pretty straightforward, but afterwards I definitely needed my husband’s help to place it in our kitchen, and then again when I needed to move it around when it came to descaling and cleaning the machine. 

Overall, the nugget ice elevated my iced drinks, giving them a coffee shop feel at home and making my morning routine more enjoyable. I also observed that the ice melted more slowly than my fridge ice, so my drinks stayed colder for longer without getting watered down as quickly.

Another big plus was its speed. It made ice much faster than my refrigerator, so I always had enough on hand when hosting friends and family. The ice maker itself was something guests noticed when they came over, not just because of its size and beaming lights, but because the nugget ice was a hit with the other self-proclaimed ice connoisseurs in my life (some even threatened to steal it). 

Whether or not the GoveeLife Smart Nugget Ice Maker Pro is for you really comes down to how much you care about having nugget ice on demand and how often you’ll actually use it. If you aren’t much into ice, you obviously don’t need a fairly niche appliance.

But if you’re someone who regularly drinks iced beverages and loves “the good ice,” this ice maker could be the gadget you never knew you needed.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

I’ve Tested the Best Phones. But None Will Ever Replace My Camera

Today’s best phone cameras are astonishingly capable when it comes to taking pictures. With large sensors, wide apertures and a wealth of extra software features, they can take images that rival what you’d expect from pro-level mirrorless cameras.

I’ve thoroughly tested all of today’s best camera phones, including the iPhone 17 Pro, Galaxy S26 Ultra and Leica Leitzphone in my time as both phone reviewer and professional photographer.

But I still wouldn’t ever want to fully replace my camera with just a phone. I have a few key reasons why.

Ergonomics

While cameras have come in all shapes and sizes over the last few decades, they’re designed to be held the same way, with your fingers naturally resting in the same places when pressing the shutter button. They feel like a natural fit and even smaller compact cameras such as the Fujifilm X100VI or my own Leica Q3 43 still allow you to hold them up to take your shot in a typically comfortable way.  

Phones aren’t built to be cameras first, so they naturally force a different way of holding them. The big touchscreens mean you have to delicately hold the phone by its edges to avoid accidentally touching something on screen, and with no viewfinder, there’s no option to hold them up to your eye, as you would with most regular cameras.

When holding a phone like a camera, it can feel like you have to be exceptionally delicate with it, especially if you’re quickly shooting one-handed. I often worry I’m going to drop it.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Phones are small and thin (at least compared to most cameras), making it difficult to get a firm grip, and tapping an on-screen button to take a photo always feels awkward. I worry about dropping the phone as I shuffle my fingers around into the right position. Even those phones that offer physical shutter buttons on the edge (or let you use the volume key as a shutter) still feel like you’re holding them in a way they were never truly designed for. 

Sure, you can get camera grips or cases that help bulk out the phone to give you something to hold onto and some of those even offer shutter buttons and settings wheels to let you use them like a compact camera. I’ve tried many of them, but none feel as good as holding an actual camera. 

Image quality

Today’s best phone cameras can take truly stunning images. I’ve been blown away by the photos I’ve been able to capture with Xiaomi and Leica’s Leitzphone, especially when using its filmic color profiles. But even this phone — arguably the best camera phone money can buy — doesn’t fully compete with a real camera. 

Leica and Xiaomi’s Leitzphone can take some beautiful images, but even so, its quality isn’t on par with an actual Leica camera.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

And how can it? While it has a larger image sensor than most phones, it’s still tiny compared to the vast majority of cameras out there. As is its lens. It’s why all smartphone cameras have to rely heavily on software image processing to squeeze every bit of quality they can from their sensors. Some take this way too far with images that can look seriously overprocessed, with heavy-handed sharpening being a common factor in most phones’ quality.

In reality, if you just look at these images on your Instagram feed, you’d probably never realize they were taken on a phone. The often “crunchy”-looking over-sharpened aesthetic a lot of phones produce typically only becomes apparent when you zoom into the fine details. But those signs will still be there, often alongside increased saturation and an over-reliance on HDR techniques to control highlights and shadows. 

Pro cameras with larger image sensors and higher-quality lenses can produce far more natural-looking details without an algorithm stepping in.

The Google Pixel 10 Pro uses generative AI to add detail back into its images when taken at over 30x zoom. It’s a neat idea in theory, but I’d rather know that everything in my images is what I actually captured and not what an algorithm thinks should be there.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Generative AI

Speaking of algorithms, I can say with certainty that I don’t want generative AI anywhere near my photos. That’s becoming increasingly difficult to avoid with phone cameras. Google proudly boasted that it uses generative AI to upscale its zoom photos on the Pixel 10 Pro while some of Samsung’s new camera features involve using AI to replace items of clothing on your subject. Apple’s upcoming iOS 27 will even allow you to change the perspective of an image after you’ve taken it, using AI to create an angle that you never actually took in the first place.

Almost all phones offer some kind of AI in their image-taking workflow. Even phones that aren’t actively changing the background or other elements in your images are still using generative tools to upscale your photos to make them look “better.”

The result is that it’s difficult to say that you’ve really taken an image when you don’t know how much of it has been reconstructed by software. Oppo explained that its recent Find X9 Ultra doesn’t use any generative AI when in its Master mode — and honestly, you can tell; shots in its regular mode can certainly look over-processed, especially when it comes to the artificially-lifted shadows. Switching to Master mode (and thereby bypassing all the AI) is the way to get the best-looking shots from this phone. I found the same when using the camera on the Honor Magic 8 Pro. 

I didn’t realize the Oppo Find X9 Pro was using generative AI in its telephoto zoom shots, but that’s clearly what’s happening here as it’s tried to artificially recreate the face of the person in the foreground — and it’s not done it well. 

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Call me a purist, a luddite or a technophobe, but AI has no place in my photography — either at the point of capture or when I’m editing my images later. I want to know that what I captured in my finished shot is what I, the photographer, actually wanted in that frame, not just what an algorithm spat out. 

Life cycle

I own and frequently use cameras that are decades old. My Pentax K1000 film camera was released in 1976, while one of my favorite digital cameras — the Sony RX1R — is now 13 years old and still going strong. A phone’s life cycle is much shorter, with even top models receiving security updates for only up to seven years.

This Yashica A was released in the 1950s making it around 70 years old yet I was still able to take some great photos with it.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Once that support period is over, your phone is simply not safe to use and it’s time to upgrade. Sure, the idea is that by then, new technology would be available, so the phone you’d be upgrading to would be even better than your old one. But it still means that the phone camera you’re used to shooting with, which delivers the look and tones you like, simply isn’t going to hang around as long as a regular camera. 

That lifespan can really sting, especially as advanced camera phones tend to demand more money — like the £1,700 ($2,245) Leitzphone. Are you better off buying one expensive device that does everything for a shorter period of time, or spending less on a regular phone and also buying a camera that’ll last you much longer? That’s a decision only you can make.

The Pixel 10 Pro has a long software support period of around seven years.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

The look

I might be vain here, but as a professional photographer, I simply wouldn’t want to be seen only taking photos on a phone. It doesn’t matter if that phone is the best in the world at taking images; there’s a certain stigma around it that suggests a level of amateurism. I’m not really talking about what it looks like to strangers on the street — if anything, using a phone allows you to blend in and become effectively invisible, which is amazing for things like street photography.

I’m talking about more professional scenarios. If I turned up to a shoot for a commercial client paying me five figures for my images and all I used was a phone, I don’t think I’d ever get work from that client again. I could argue all I want that the quality is good enough, that they’re paying for my expertise and that the end images will still be great but it wouldn’t matter. That client would see the phone and wonder why the hell they’re paying so much for someone to take some snaps on a phone — they could have done that themselves and saved a ton of money in the process.

Some of my shoots involve a lot of gear and setup. If I turned up just with a phone, I’d never get hired again.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Don’t get me wrong, I don’t believe that only the best gear can take the best photos — I’ve done commercial shoots using Canon’s cheapest 50mm “nifty fifty” lens and had images taken with that lens licensed for luxury photo books. Most clients care about the images, not the equipment you’re using to get them. But there’s a balance to be struck here and using professional gear suggests that you are a professional. Turning up to a shoot — commercial, wedding, whatever — and pulling out my iPhone for the job isn’t going to do my photography career any favors.

So many notifications

I’ve saved my most important one for last because it’s the biggest stumbling block for me when using a phone as a camera for extended periods. If I’m taking images — whether wandering around a Tuscan village on holiday, taking photos for my YouTube channel or on set for a commercial job — I don’t want distractions that pull me away from the creative mindset I’m trying to maintain. 

Using my phone for any purpose already means battling with near-constant incoming notifications from my email, from Slack, WhatsApp, Instagram and many others. It’s a perpetual onslaught of things going on that makes it increasingly difficult to concentrate on the task at hand. Sure, you can turn Do Not Disturb on — and I do — but I also don’t want to miss important phone calls or other messages I might need to act on. So I don’t like switching things off altogether either. 

One of the reasons I’ve enjoyed using film cameras recently is that there are absolutely zero distractions so you can focus completely on staying in the moment.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Using a dedicated camera feels like choosing the right tool for the right job. Unlike our phones, it’s not trying to be something else by doing 1,000 other things in the background. My camera doesn’t come with bubble-pop games pre-installed and it’s not vibrating every ten seconds while my friends share memes on our WhatsApp group. Using the camera means shutting off from everything else going on in my life and focusing on the joy of image creation. 

I don’t want one device that can do all the things. Sometimes it’s better to have a product that does only one thing but it does that one thing exceptionally well. And just as I don’t want a wrench that’s also a DAB radio and a meat thermometer, I don’t want a camera that’s a games console, an exercise tracker and my portal to social media. 

It’s why I — and many other photographers around the world — have also really enjoyed getting into analog film photography recently as it strips out even more of the technology and allows for a more simplistic, arguably more authentic way to take images.

I use my camera increasingly as a way of finding some zen in the chaos of life and not feeling like I’m constantly switched on. It’s why my camera makes me feel more inspired. Picking it up means making an intentional decision to want to go and take photos, not just whipping out my phone to get a quick snap if I happen to see a cute dog. That intentionality invokes a deeper sense of creativity. And more often than not, it results in better, more meaningful photos.

I took this on an iPhone 14 Pro, so I know that phones can take exceptionally good images. I’d just rather use a regular camera for my real photography.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

As the adage goes, the best camera is the one you always have with you, but that doesn’t mean it’ll always be the one you can take your best photos with. I love using phone cameras and I’m thrilled that I can have something so capable in my pockets for those occasions where I don’t have my camera with me. 

But phones will always be supplementary cameras for me — great for those spur-of-the-moment opportunities or for shooting behind-the-scenes content. And yes, I will sometimes opt to use it on those outings where I don’t want a camera round my neck. But I’ll still always have a regular camera for my work and whether it’s a modern digital or a vintage film camera, it’ll always be the thing I reach for when I want to switch off from the world and truly focus on the joy of taking photos.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple’s Price Hikes Aren’t Just an AI Problem

Last week, in an exclusive interview with the Wall Street Journal, outgoing Apple CEO Tim Cook warned that the memory chip crunch made price increases “unavoidable.” He also made what seemed like a promise: “We’re willing to use our balance sheet to help be a part of the solution.” 

So much for that. On Thursday, Apple rammed through hefty price increases for many of its popular devices. Macs, iPads, the Vision Pro, HomePods and Apple TV products all saw price hikes ranging from 15% to over 30%. Even budget-friendly models, like the MacBook Neo and refurbished devices, weren’t exempt, though iPhones and AirPods were spared for now.

Surging memory costs and tight supplies have shattered any belief that one of the most successful tech giants would shield its customers from the wrath of RAMageddon. It’s a pattern that’s becoming increasingly common across the consumer electronics industry.

Microsoft, Motorola, Samsung and now Apple have all blamed higher component costs — driven largely by artificial intelligence data centers hogging all the available RAM — to jack up price tags for everyday people. 

That’s not to say that chipflation isn’t real. Smartphones rely on DRAM for short-term memory and NAND flash for short-term storage, both of which are also needed for data centers. As these power-hungry AI warehouses face bottlenecks processing larger, high-bandwidth workloads, chipmakers are racing to increase supply, driving prices higher across the industry.

“The unprecedented AI infrastructure growth has changed the semiconductor supply chain, driving insatiable demand,” said Neil Shah, vice president of research at the global technology research firm Counterpoint. “The situation is not bound to be better, at least for the next two years.”

Are Big Tech profits a mirage?    

After months of absorbing higher costs for memory and storage chips, which have quadrupled in price since 2025, Apple says it can no longer absorb the costs. “We have never seen a component price increase this much, this quickly,” a company representative told CNET via email. 

But with Big Tech sitting on some of the largest cash piles in history while reporting consistently strong profit margins, many loyal customers are pissed they’re being made to foot the bill. Or maybe millions of Americans don’t even notice because they’re too busy scraping their paychecks to cover groceries, rent, insurance and utility bills, after years of tariffs and inflation. 

On the surface, there’s rarely been a better time to be a major technology company. The Magnificent Seven, a moniker for the most dominant companies in the stock market, includes Apple, Microsoft, Alphabet (Google), Amazon, Nvidia, Meta and Tesla. Their massive market capitalizations have masked the otherwise decrepit state of the “regular” economy outside of Wall Street, which feels to most of us like it’s running on fumes.

Chipmaker Nvidia has become the world’s most valuable company, with a record-breaking valuation of $4.7 trillion. SpaceX’s initial public offering, which included AI developer xAI, made Elon Musk the world’s first trillionaire (for a week or so, at least). AI developers such as OpenAI, Anthropic and Google have raised millions of dollars in investor funding on the promise that their products will change the world.

Despite not being a major player in the AI gold rush (or perhaps because the company took a more cautious approach to AI spending), Apple maintains industry-leading margins, reporting $112 billion in net income in 2025. For the second quarter of 2026, the company reported 17% revenue growth, beating investor expectations.

Except the financial narrative around AI is starting to shift. As Big Tech sheds trillions to finance ever-larger AI server farms — and turns to debt markets to get the cash — it’s facing new skepticism. Consumers aren’t seeing a clear payoff, and investors want tangible returns. AI is increasingly looking like a gigantic money pit. 

Are price hikes really ‘unavoidable’?

Even though the silicon crunch is real, shifting the burden to consumers is a choice. If any company had the resources to ride out the chip shortage and absorb higher component costs, it’s Apple. The Cupertino company’s healthy profit margins have helped it weather supply chain disruptions and rocky economic waves better than others, even during the COVID downturn and the subsequent period of peak inflation. 

Anshel Sag of Moor Insights told CNET that Apple is simply not impervious to global market forces. Sag said he believes the tech giant held off on price hikes as long as it could, thereby gaining a short-term competitive advantage. But now things have changed. 

“We are now so deep (almost a year) into the memory shortage that all attempts to stockpile inventory or anticipate price increases have likely been exhausted, and Apple now has to raise prices,” Sag said via email. 

The question, then, is whether Apple could have chosen to absorb lower profit margins rather than pass those higher costs on to consumers. Within Silicon Valley, Apple is hardly struggling — its net profit margin stands at 27%, according to Macrotrends data. That would make these price hikes more of a calculated business decision rather than an economic inevitability. 

In a post on X, US Senator Bernie Sanders accused Cook of corporate greed, noting that the company spent $310 billion on stock buybacks, which artificially boost stock prices and benefit company execs and highly invested shareholders.

 “These price hikes aren’t unavoidable. They’re unacceptable,” Sanders said.

Corporate greed is Tim Cook, the billionaire Apple CEO, claiming that hiking prices on Apple products by over $200 is “unavoidable” after it made $112 billion in profits last year & spent $310 billion on stock buybacks.

These price hikes aren’t unavoidable. They’re…

— Sen. Bernie Sanders (@SenSanders) June 25, 2026

Are we subsidizing the AI gold rush? 

Over the last year, we’ve seen major tech conglomerates like Google, Microsoft, Meta and Amazon spend huge sums to build massive computer systems for AI. These hyperscalers paid top dollar to secure the available supply of components for their generative AI and large language models, or LLMs — which then drove up prices across the rest of the tech industry.

Apple, in the meantime, deliberately sat out the massive AI infrastructure spending race. Instead of burning cash on its own AI data centers and cloud warehouses, the company is now integrating Google Gemini models to power its AI-upgraded Siri, while continuing to rely on its own Private Cloud Compute services. At its annual WWDC event earlier this month, Apple made a renewed push into AI, unveiling its overhauled Apple Intelligence offerings.

But Apple’s initial restraint didn’t protect it from the supply chain fallout. In last week’s exclusive interview with Cook, the Wall Street Journal reported that Apple had lost some of its historic buying leverage with suppliers as AI companies secured market share. Now it has to catch up. 

Cook, who is set to step down as CEO on Sept. 1, had also implied during the interview that the company could lean on its own cash reserves to secure memory supply, which could have shielded customers from price hikes. CNET asked Apple why it didn’t end up tapping its own cash reserves, but did not get a response.

“Apple is between a rock and a hard place with this situation,” Sag said. “The memory suppliers have all the leverage, and Apple’s investors wouldn’t let them eat the cost difference.” 

That leaves us, the regular folk, subsidizing soaring AI costs, even if we don’t use the technology and never asked for it. For years, Apple did fine with a subpar AI virtual assistant while Google pulled ahead. And Siri’s shortcomings, long a source of criticism for responses like “I’m sorry, I didn’t get that,” did little to dent demand for Apple products.

In fact, despite the tech industry’s continued push for ubiquitous AI, the tech just isn’t enough to entice consumers to switch: Only 11% of smartphone owners would upgrade for new AI features, according to a CNET survey

Will tech ever be affordable? 

Even if higher input costs justified some of Apple’s recent price increases, the markups go well beyond simply covering expenses. Take the entry-level MacBook Neo, marketed as an affordable option for students, which saw a $100 price jump just months after its launch, despite no meaningful improvements in hardware features or functionality.

As my colleague Matt Elliot pointed out, Apple seems to be using the widely reported memory shortage as a convenient cover to raise the Neo’s price. In reality, the company exhausted its initial supply of surplus smartphone processors for its budget laptop and now faces higher production costs for new A18 Pro chips. 

While the chip shortage explains some of the pressure on Apple, the company treated it like a blank check. And those massive price hikes could have consequences, including dampening buyer demand, since fewer of us can afford Apple products. Apple could also take a hit to its public image, since rising costs are likely to cement the brand’s reputation as “elitist” — though critics have made that point for years. 

Plus, the unprecedented price spike could also freak out investors — in fact, it already has. After Thursday’s price increases, Apple’s stock price plunged by over 6%, its worst single-day drop in over a year. 

Still, the tech giant is likely to conquer these hurdles without taking a major sales hit, according to Francisco Jeronimo, vice president of client devices at IDC. “Where a price rise can push a budget Android buyer in an emerging market to delay a purchase or drop to a cheaper brand,” Jeronimo said, “the typical Apple customer tends to absorb it.”

In large part, that’s because Apple has unique market power stemming from its loyal customer base. It’s developed financial resilience from that retention and a tightly integrated ecosystem. When you own an iPhone, Apple Watch, AirPods and a MacBook, abandoning one of them means disrupting your entire digital lifestyle. 

And Apple knows it. 

CNET’s Katelyn Chedraoui and Blake Stimac contributed to this story. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 28 #643

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

The World Cup is swinging into the knockout round, and today’s Connections: Sports Edition includes a World Cup category. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Very cool!

Green group hint: Hoops data.

Blue group hint: Allez les Bleus!

Purple group hint: Where the dunking happens.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: Style.

Green group: Basketball stats, abbreviated.

Blue group: Members of France’s World Cup squad.

Purple group: NBA arenas.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 28, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is style. The four answers are flair, panache, pizzazz and swagger.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is basketball stats, abbreviated. The four answers are FG, FT, PF and TO.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is members of France’s World Cup squad. The four answers are Barcola, Gusto, Mbappé and Olise.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is  NBA arenas. The four answers are Barclays, Kia, Moda and TD.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Standing Desks of 2026

I tested the Seville Classics Airlift Height Adjustable Desk with Glass Top, the Seville Classics Airlift Pro S3 Electric Height Adjustable Standing Desk (no longer available), the Steelcase Solo Sit-To-Stand Desk, the Fezibo Height Adjustable Electric Standing Desk with Double Drawer, the Grovemade Desk and the FlexiSpot E7 Pro, but they didn’t make the cut.

The Airlift with Glass Top came close to earning a spot above. It’s a beautiful, sturdy desk at a midrange price that would be a great add to a modern workspace. It also features a small center drawer for holding the basics. Unfortunately, its built-in touchscreen wasn’t very responsive and the two USB-A ports, while theoretically a nice tech feature, are outdated for most of today’s phones and tablets.

Another close contender for a spot on the list was the FlexiSpot E7 Pro (also available in the UK). The desk is a great size for a small space, which can be very hard to find. The quality of the desktop and mechanical pieces of the desk are great. It lifts quickly and quietly and looks very nice. FlexiSpot put a lot of thought into cable management and covering cord mess. FlexiSpot also added a space for USB-C charging on the controller. However, the controller isn’t as up to date as some of the other desks we’ve tested; it is made of a plastic that doesn’t feel very durable, and it doesn’t stop as quickly as some of the other models. When assembling, the hardware was difficult to work with, even when using a drill; furthermore, not all the holes for the desk were predrilled, which increases the risk of puncturing through the top of the desktop. This was competing with the Branch Standing Desk for best small desk, and the build experience and remote quality of the Branch desk had the FlexiSpot E7 Pro beat.

The Airlift Pro S3 was a decent desk, but it was a little tougher to install than the others in its size range, and it had a cheaper-looking finish than the overall winner for best standing desk (the Uplift V3 Standing Desk).

The Steelcase Solo desk was surprisingly simple to install for its size. Instead of using screws to install the legs, these simply lock into place. The desk is sturdy, looks nice and is quiet when raising and lowering.

The Fezibo model was intriguing to me because of its built-in storage, but I found this model more difficult to assemble than many of the others. Still, it’s a reasonable option if you’d like storage compartments integrated into your desk and two levels: one for holding your monitor and the other for your keyboard and related accessories.

The Grovemade Desk I received had some mechanical errors. While the team was great about getting this fixed and working with me on it, it did mean having to take the desk halfway apart and put it back together. After replacing the legs, the lift function was louder and a bit more clunky than others we have tested. The cord management and craftsmanship are fantastic and the drawer allows you to keep your desktop clean while a lot of standing desks don’t offer that. While the price of the Grovemade Desk likely reflects the great care they take in hand crafting the desktops, compared to other desks on this list, you can get great quality options for much less money.

As always, consider your specific needs before you buy a sit-stand desk. Do you have a lot of space and a higher budget? Consider the Uplift models. The Ikea model is a fantastic midsize manual desk at a great price. Regardless of your home setup, one of these models is bound to suit your needs. If you aren’t sold on a standing desk, consider a standing desk converter for your existing desk instead.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Desks of 2026: I’ve Spent Nearly 4,000 Hours Testing Desks. These Are the Ones You Want

Testing desks is something of a subjective game. Much like office chairs, the tests are based on comfort, reliability and ease of setup rather than things you can test in electronics such as wattage and battery usage. I still tested each one rigorously and will continue to test them for longevity in the coming months.

I tested these desks by asking three people to try each one. Each of them used the desk for at least 16 hours and then gave me their impressions. The three people were 6 feet, 1 inch tall; 5 feet, 8 inches tall; and 5 feet, 4 inches tall respectively, to give me a good cross-section of average user height.

James Bricknell/CNET

Setup time and package quality

Building desks can often be difficult and time-consuming. For each desk, I timed how long it took to unpack and assemble, and I noted whether the manual was easy to follow. I followed the instructions as closely as possible so that each build was performed as if I had never built one before. I also thoroughly checked the packaging, to make sure it wasn’t damaged, and if it was secure enough to carry the desk it had in it. Any damage was noted, and images were sent to the manufacturers for review.

Structural integrity

Modern desks need to be able to hold a good amount of weight. If you’re at a writing desk you might only have a small laptop, but if you’re using a gaming desk, it likely has two monitors and a giant gaming PC as well. For each desk, I checked the maximum load specification, and I tried to match that with the materials we actually use on our desks.

I used:

  • A heavy gaming PC tower
  • Two 27-inch gaming monitors on a dual monitor arm
  • A MacBook Pro
  • Two different keyboards and assorted mice and trackpads
  • My Oculus Quest 2
  • My phone stand and USB hub
  • A podcasting mic and headphones

Depending on the length and weight capacity of the desk, I mix and match these items, then check for any bowing of the top or inconsistencies in how the desk felt as I worked.

James Bricknell/CNET

The wibble-wobbles

This is a bit of a throwback from when my dad used to make furniture. Anything my dad built would be critiqued by my mum, and if it didn’t pass muster, she would say, “It’s a bit wibbly-wobbly, isn’t it, dear?” Once I’ve built each desk and loaded it for normal use, I would check it for the wibble-wobbles. This means rocking it from side to side and forward and backward to check that all the screws, bolts and fixtures kept everything rigid.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 28 #1113

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is a tough one, especially the purple category. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Good stuff!

Green group hint: Now’s the time.

Blue group hint: Fender or Gibson.

Purple group hint: Think planks.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: High-quality.

Green group: Signals to commence.

Blue group: Accessories for a guitarist.

Purple group: They have boards.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 28, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is high-quality. The four answers are choice, fine, prime and select.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is signals to commence. The four answers are begin, go, now and start.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is accessories for a guitarist. The four answers are capo, pick, slide and strap.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is they have boards. The four answers are chess, corporation, darts and surfer.

Categories: Gadgets

Your Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra Can Take Better Photos by Changing Just a Few Settings

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra is one of the best phones you can buy in 2026, and if you already own one, I have some positive news for you: Your phone can take better photos than it does right now.

Samsung added a larger aperture (on two sensors) and upgraded its camera processing to fare better against Apple’s iPhone 17 Pro this year. However, if you haven’t played around with the settings, you aren’t making the most of Samsung’s new upgrades.

The Galaxy S26 Ultra has a versatile camera system, but the default settings might not work for everyone. They didn’t for me. So I took a deep dive into the buried menus and found ways to improve the shutter speed, reduce compression and trigger the 24-megapixel processing pipeline, among other things. If you aren’t satisfied with the image quality on your Samsung phone right now, I recommend taking a look at these options in the Samsung Camera Assistant.

Locate the Camera Assistant settings

Change these Camera Assistant settings to get the most out of your Galaxy S26 Ultra cameras.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

The Camera Assistant on Galaxy smartphones is a Good Lock module (essentially like a plugin). It adds additional settings to the default Camera app. For the longest time, Samsung didn’t preload these settings on its flagship phones, but things have changed with One UI 8.5 on the latest Samsung flagships. You can now find the Camera Assistant settings within the Camera app.

To find these additional settings:

  1. Open the Camera app.
  2. Tap on the four-dot icon to get the menu.
  3. Tap on Settings.
  4. Scroll to the Camera Assistant. Tap on it.
  5. It’ll take you to the Samsung Galaxy Store with a pop-up for Camera Assistant. Tap on Install.

However, if it is not present here, you’ll need to install the Good Lock app through the Galaxy Store. Search for Camera Assistant and download the module from there.

Once located, you’re now ready to take control over the processing and camera performance. Several of these options aren’t objectively better than the other, but here’s what I recommend changing and which setting could fit in what scenario.

Use all those megapixels

Changing to 24-megapixel mode will give you better photos in all scenarios.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

The Galaxy S26 Ultra has a 200-megapixel main camera, but it defaults to 12-megapixel photos out of the box. While these photos are small in size, you won’t get the same amount of detail and clarity as higher-resolution modes. I don’t recommend capturing everything in 200-megapixel mode, either – it is slow and will eat up your storage quicker than anything else.

I’ve found the 24-megapixel mode to be the best of both worlds. It can take quick snaps and get sharp results simultaneously without having a large file size.

The best part is that Samsung upgraded its processing to capture 24-megapixel resolution photos even in digital zoom.


Enlarge Image

24-megapixel image in 9.2x zoom (213mm).

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

As a result, you get 24-megapixel shots on three camera sensors, including these zoom ranges: 0.6x to 0.9x for ultrawide, 1x to 1.9x for the main and 5x to 9.9x for the periscope telephoto camera.

The 10-megapixel 3x tele sensor misses out on this feature due to its lower resolution and the main camera defaults everything from 2x to 2.9x in 12 megapixels, despite using a higher resolution mode.


Enlarge Image

The 24-megapixel vs 50-megapixel shot: The 50-megapixel mode photo (right) is about 900 KB larger, but it doesn’t give you objectively more detail or clarity.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

I suggest you change the default resolution to 24-megapixel mode because it is enough for almost all scenarios. The only time I’ve noticed a difference was while capturing neon lights in each mode. The former artificially brightens the whole frame, whereas the 50-megapixel mode in 9.2x zoom exposes for the signboards, which results in more natural-looking photos like the example below.


Enlarge Image

The 24-megapixel vs. 50-megapixel shots at 9.2x zoom: In both photos, I tapped on the Star Wars sign to focus. The 50-megapixel mode processed it better than the 24-megapixel mode.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

For most of the other scenarios, 24-megapixel mode remains the sweet spot and here’s how you can make it the default resolution for your Galaxy S26 Ultra photos:

  1. Go to the Camera Assistant.
  2. Scroll down to find the Photos settings.
  3. Tap on 24 MP resolution
  4. You’ll see two settings: 24 MP in Photo mode and Keep 24 MP resolution. Turn on both of them.

While you’re at it, these are the settings to change under the Camera Assistant settings if:

You want full control over lenses

Disabling Auto Lens Switching will give you more control over the cameras on Galaxy S26 Ultra.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

You need to disable Auto Lens Switching. By default, the Galaxy S26 Ultra camera system automatically switches between the four rear cameras based on the lighting, the phone’s distance from the subject and zoom range.

It isn’t the smartest decision to rely on your phone’s smarts. For example, when you take the phone close to the subject for a macro shot, it takes a few seconds to land on a usable lens based on your distance. In this time, the moment could be lost.

You can instead decide on the lens you want to use, get close to the subject and take the photo, without any automatic lens switching. All you need to do is turn off the Auto Lens Switching toggle under the Lens and Zoom option.

You need more accurate skin tones


Enlarge Image

Photo Softening turned off (left) vs. Photo Softening set to high (right).

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

Samsung phones can oversharpen skin tones, especially under artificial lighting conditions. If you’re not a fan of the processed look, you can opt for softer skin tones by going to the Photo Softening option under the Photos menu and setting it to Medium or High.

In the above two shots, you can notice how the left image (with Photo Softening turned off) has a stronger black point and shadows. In comparison, the shot on the right (with Photo Softening turned to High) has a more natural feel to it. My skin and beard still have similar details in both shots, but I prefer the softer, less processed photo on the right.

What else?


Enlarge Image

Adaptive Pixel and Upscale Digital Zoom turned off (left) vs. both settings turned on (right). Notice the complications on the watch — the left one has sparkles, which aren’t visible on the left photo.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

By default, Samsung keeps Distortion Correction turned on and Adaptive Pixel and Upscale Digital Zoom turned off. But you should experiment with these settings according to your photos. Turning them on could result in a better-looking shot. For example, when capturing my watch, the default settings couldn’t get the sparkles on the earthphase complication (on the left with Snoopy). However, once I turned on Adaptive Pixel and Upscale Digital Zoom, it was able to give me more details on the dial.

On the other hand, Distortion Correction fixes the bending lines in a photo, which could be caused by lens distortion. So turning it on results in better-looking photos, especially those that involve buildings.

Other than these two settings, I used to recommend turning on Quick Tap Shutter until last year. However, I haven’t seen a noticeable difference in photos with this setting turned on or off on my Galaxy S26 Ultra. Samsung has improved the shutter speed on its flagship this year, but moving subjects can still get a halo effect in default settings. You can slightly improve on this by enabling the Prioritize Focus over Speed toggle (located under Focus).

Tinkering around with these settings has helped me make the most of the camera in my pocket. I hope they’ll improve your photo-taking experience on the Galaxy S26 Ultra, too. I also suggest exploring the filters present in the viewfinder and trying to create your own, according to your taste. It is fun!

Watch this: Which Phone Takes Better Photos? iPhone 17 Pro Max vs. Galaxy S26 Ultra

05:35

Categories: Gadgets

Polestar Faces a Ban on Selling Its EVs in the US

Automaker Polestar will not be allowed to sell its 2027 models and beyond in the US after the US Department of Commerce’s Bureau of Industry and Security banned those sales over concerns about Chinese-made connected technology. And the company has no plans to return.

The crux of the issue is Polestar’s ownership by Volvo and Volvo’s own parent company, China-based Geely.

The Swedish manufacturer of electric vehicles, which became a distinct brand in 2017, revealed the ban in an SEC filing, which it paired with a press release this week announcing that it’s shifting manufacturing to Europe.

It said in the release that it will continue to sell existing stock of its Polestar 3 and Polestar 4 vehicles in the US and to support customers through its service network. 

A representative for Polestar told CNET in an email that, because of the Commerce Department’s decision, the company has no plans to sell new cars in the US from model year 2027 onward, including the planned Polestar 7.

The company has marketed the Polestar 7 as a premium compact SUV. It’s due out in 2028.

This decision isn’t surprising: A 2024 letter from Polestar (PDF) to the Bureau of Industry and Security foreshadowed what would eventually happen. It said at the time that the agency’s prohibitions could eventually lead the company to stop selling vehicles in the US, even ones it manufactures in South Carolina.

The US ban has not been posted on the Commerce Department’s website or social media, but it’s in line with the agency’s directive to police technology from China that the government considers a potential security threat. This month, the department issued a $36 million penalty against Bosch for exporting sensors and auto software to Huawei. 

In May, however, the Bureau of Industry and Security granted Volvo special authorization to sell its vehicles in the US after the auto company said it discussed its connected technology with the department. 

A representative of the Bureau of Industry and Security did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

US agencies aren’t just looking at the auto industry. The Federal Communications Commission has targeted consumer products including routers and drones that have technology made in China.

Considering EVs in the US

Polestar is not one of the top 10 EV manufacturers, lagging behind larger companies including Tesla, BYD and Volkswagen. 

Electric vehicles only account for about 6.5 percent of the US auto market, according to industry watcher Edmunds. In the US, EVs are typically priced higher, and federal rebates to purchase these types of vehicles have been phased out. 

With gas prices high this summer, consumers may be giving EVs another look, but concerns remain about pricing and range. 

Some automakers are trying to boost the appeal of electric vehicles through lower-cost models. Slate is taking preorders for a basic, modular EV truck that costs $24,950 before delivery fees. Other EV models, such as the Chevrolet Bolt, can be found for about $30,000.

Categories: Gadgets

Prediction Markets Let You Bet on Anything. That’s a Problem

In late May, federal authorities charged a Google software engineer with insider trading after he won $1.2 million on the prediction-market website Polymarket. The 36-year-old Michele Spagnuolo allegedly placed bets that musician D4vd and rapper Kendrick Lamar would top Google’s most-searched list. The bets paid off, prosecutors said, because Spagnuolo had access to confidential company data. 

The popularity of prediction markets, where you can bet on thousands of real-world outcomes across nearly every facet of modern life, is spreading faster than governments can keep up. Even Mark Zuckerberg, Meta’s chief executive, is reportedly developing a standalone prediction market app to compete with the most popular platforms, Kalshi and Polymarket. 

You may have even been tempted yourself to put down cash on your favorite pop-culture hunch. But the recent Google case highlights just one of the biggest concerns for a multibillion-dollar industry prone to abuse. Numerous insider trading cases have prompted federal regulators to intensify scrutiny, cracking down on the illegal use of classified information for betting. 

A New York Times investigation in May flagged more than 11,000 Polymarket accounts for suspicious, high-profit trading patterns, often involving perfectly timed bets on geopolitical events, and flawless, loss-free track records. And it’s not just corporate employees; it’s also military personnel and government officials manipulating classified information. 

With Polymarket, users trade shares using cryptocurrency to bet on the outcomes of real-world events. 

Adobe Stock

A US Army special forces soldier allegedly received a payout of $400,000 by “predicting” the capture of Venezuelan president Nicolas Maduro. Former Congressman George Santos allegedly won tens of thousands of dollars by betting he wouldn’t be at Trump’s State of the Union address, despite posting on X that he would be.

Just last week, a Wall Street Journal investigation revealed that Polymarket ran a deceptive, secret marketing campaign by paying social media influencers to film fake trades and stage massive winnings on lookalike dummy websites to draw people in.

“This industry is growing fast and will continue to grow as long as courts and regulators allow it,” Columbia University professor of economics Rajiv Sethi told CNET.

People generally have strong opinions surrounding prediction markets, and many (like me) feel a bit icky about them. But how the industry shakes out will depend on several regulatory battlegrounds. Prediction markets are facing intense pushback from lawmakers over insider trading, highlighted by a congressional probe and a proposed bill to ban prediction-market bets by service members. Yet because no one can agree whether betting markets are legitimate financial tools or just a glorified form of gambling, they’re causing a massive headache at the state and federal levels. 

Kalshi lets users trade contracts on events ranging from politics and economic data to weather and sports. 

Adobe Stock

How prediction markets work

To any casual observer, Polymarket and Kalshi seem like virtual casinos, except you’re betting against other participants, not against “the house.” You can buy and sell contracts about anything: the weather, geopolitical events, election results, sports, entertainment awards, ad nauseam. 

Several high-profile predictions over the past several months involved the US attacking Iran, Michael B. Jordan winning the Oscar for Best Actor and bitcoin topping $125,000. You can even predict if someone is going to utter a certain word in a speech or news conference in what are called “mention markets.” 

With a mainstream boom in prediction market platforms over the last few years, other companies have joined the fray: Robinhood, PredictIt, Metaculus and even traditional sportsbooks FanDuel and DraftKings. 

These types of “idea futures” aren’t new, though. Informal information markets date back hundreds of years, as seen in the 1500s in Italy, where people predicted who the next pope would be.

Today’s prediction markets claim they aren’t technically gambling or akin to trading stocks, even though you’re risking money in hopes of a profit. In essence, you’re predicting something will or won’t happen. For every “share” you buy for that event outcome, you get $1 if you’re right and nothing if you aren’t. The markets don’t set the “odds,” and neither do the platforms — the traders do.

The amount of shares you’re able to buy for a certain outcome depends on how many shares are being sold for the opposite outcome by other traders. For example, if you wanted to buy 500 shares of a Yes outcome on France winning the World Cup, there would have to be 500 corresponding shares of No on France winning. 

Though the basic unit for prediction markets is only $1, business is booming for Kalshi and Polymarket, which collect transaction fees for each trade. Together, they’ve crossed $150 billion in lifetime trading volume.

Polymarket offers predictions on the weather and a lot else.

Polymarket/Screenshot by CNET

A personal look inside

I’m not a bettor. I suck at poker, I still can’t understand a Daily Racing Form, and don’t get me started about March Madness brackets. So, I’m not about to test my luck (yet) with Kalshi or Polymarket, but I did want to take a peek under the hood.

Kalshi and most other prediction markets are available for customers in all 50 states, but Polymarket, a cryptocurrency-based company, is restricted in the US and several other countries, at least for now. Some people try to bypass geographic restrictions using a VPN, even though Polymarket says it blocks VPN IP addresses.

Kalshi and Polymarket both offer a dizzying array of exchanges. Kalshi has basic event categories, from the California governor race to the price of a gallon of gas. It also has some rather off-the-wall ones, like the “Scary Tomatoes” score on Rotten Tomatoes and the US government’s disclosure of aliens. 

The mention markets on Kalshi were even stranger. Will someone say “road trip” or “meals for two” during the next Cracker Barrel earnings call? What will the hosts say during Love Island Aftersun? I’ll pass.

Columbia professor Sethi advises anyone interested in trading prediction markets to tread lightly at first.

“Most novice retail traders lose money, so my advice to those who want to experiment is to focus on events about which you know something about the topic, and keep bets small to begin with, until you get a feel for your likely performance,” Sethi told CNET.

The hard truth is that prediction market traders are far more likely to lose than to win. The Wall Street Journal reported in May that 0.1% of all Polymarket accounts won 67% of the profits. That translates to 2,000 top traders netting more than $500 million, while 1.1 million Polymarket customers didn’t make a profit.

Moreover, given the difficult task of preventing insider trading, I’d say “buyer beware” when trading in these speculative markets. 

There are thousands of events to predict on with Kalshi.

Kalshi/Screenshot by CNET

Social function or political tool

Another fundamental question I have is whether these markets serve a socially useful purpose. 

Better Markets, a nonprofit focused on financial and economic justice, argues that prediction markets lack real value. While traditional financial contracts help institutions manage risks, prediction markets do not. Unlike the stock market, they fail to fund businesses or help investors build long-term wealth.

Amanda Fischer, chief operating officer at Better Markets, said that bets around elections or war in Iran “serve no function but to degrade our democracy and encourage insider trading.” According to Fischer, prediction markets look more like gambling, especially since over 90% of bets on those platforms are related to sporting events. 

In response to scandals around insider trading, Kalshi says it is aggressively self-policing by tracking suspicious activity and requiring some of its users to disclose their employers. Kalshi also says its safeguards against politicians and athletes are stricter than those of traditional stock exchanges.

Donald Trump Jr. (left) holds official advisory roles at both Kalshi and Polymarket. 

Mandel Ngan/AFP/Getty Images

Meanwhile, Polymarket’s decision to maintain user anonymity has drawn heavy criticism from financial experts, who argue it leaves the platform vulnerable to fraud. Without strict identity verification, the platform allows insiders to exploit nonpublic information while enabling bad actors to “spoof” trades and trick ordinary people into following fake trends, according to Sethi, who wrote an opinion piece for the Financial Times titled “Polymarket Anonymity Must End.”

As prediction markets continue to face security concerns over fraud and insider trading, they have a powerful shield from the federal government and President Trump, who has aggressively pushed back against state-level restrictions. 

This political alignment is further complicated by the president’s son, Donald Trump Jr., who reportedly has an eight-figure investment in Polymarket and serves as an adviser to Kalshi. Although his involvement has sparked intense suspicion of a conflict of interest, Trump Jr. maintains that he does not trade on the platforms or lobby the government on their behalf.

A regulatory dilemma 

At its core, the regulatory mess stems from an identity crisis. Prediction markets are hard to classify, straddling the line between commodity contracts and security-based investments. This has triggered a massive turf war over jurisdiction, as the federal government attempts to override state and tribal gaming laws that view these markets as illegal sportsbooks trying to bypass local restrictions.

Kalshi says it strictly prohibits insider trading and actively screens users who trade on confidential data. 

Daniel Heuer/Bloomberg/Getty Images

Several US states and even private citizens have sued Kalshi, claiming the company has violated state gambling laws. Native American pueblos and a tribe in New Mexico have also sued Kalshi, alleging the company is violating gaming agreements and federal law.

Sandia Pueblo Gov. Stuart Paisano, one of the plaintiffs, in a statement, said, “The use of prediction markets for gambling purposes diverts essential revenue away from our governments, provides an end-run around regulation of gaming on our lands, and allows gaming by underage people.”

At the federal level, prediction markets are formally categorized as commodities and derivatives, placing them under the jurisdiction of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, or CFTC. 

Kalshi CEO Tarek Mansour, who, along with fellow MIT graduate Luana Lopes, founded the company in 2018, says prediction markets aren’t traditional sportsbooks but more like open marketplaces. Mansour says Kalshi’s event contracts are financial derivatives, just like common futures, options and swaps, and should be appropriately regulated by the CFTC.

But some legal scholars and financial reform advocates argue that prediction markets should fall under the purview of the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC.

According to Better Markets’ Fischer, the CFTC has fewer tools to police insider trading in prediction markets. As an agency tasked with specifically overseeing agricultural and certain financial derivatives, it was only recently self-appointed as a gambling regulator. “As a result, there are some gaps and ambiguity in the CFTC’s legal framework,” she said. 

Fundamentally, the CFTC’s rules on insider trading are historically much weaker than the SEC’s. “The SEC has 90 years of law and legal precedent, which have created a robust set of rules around insider trading,” said Fischer. 

The CFTC is supposed to act as the federal watchdog over Kalshi and take direct legal action against insider trading and market manipulation. 

Timon Schneider/SOPA Images/LightRocket/Getty Images

The CFTC is also chronically understaffed, according to Fischer. The agency has cut more than 20% of its staff during the second Trump administration.

Fischer said CFTC’s enforcement is a “drop in the bucket” compared with the enormous volume of trades being transacted at Kalshi. “The CFTC has only been able to identify and prosecute the most egregious cases, and in many other instances, has delegated enforcement to firms like Kalshi, whose only tool is to kick users off the platform,” Fischer said.

Do we really need this?

The danger of prediction markets is the financialization of our society at large, where “every opinion is a tradeable asset,” wrote Jathan Sadowski, associate professor at Monash University in Melbourne, Australia.

There’s also a risk if prediction markets define “truth” as simply a publicly verifiable consensus. If, as Sadowski noted, “the market is the ultimate arbiter of what’s valuable and true,” that leads to a “world that creates endless incentives for arbitrage, manipulation, collusion and exploitation in the pursuit of profit extraction.”

In an episode of Last Week Tonight on prediction markets, comedian John Oliver asked if we’ll be able to believe our eyes when future events occur. “When something unexpected happens in the world, it would be really nice not to have to automatically question whether it’s only because someone is trying to move a market.”

At the end of the day, I keep coming back to why these tools exist in the first place. Prediction markets shouldn’t just be a playground for day traders looking for their next fix. But to prove that it’s not just another corrupt form of speculative gambling, the industry has some massive hurdles to clear. 

CNET’s Laura Michelle Davis heavily contributed to and edited this story.

Categories: Gadgets

Expect Extreme Heat in Much of the US Starting This Weekend. How to Stay Safe

A heat wave in Europe this week has broken June temperature records and is being blamed for dozens of deaths, and another round of soaring temps is expected to hit the eastern US next week.

National Weather Service forecasters expect a long-lasting heat wave in the central to eastern US to start this weekend and likely to last into the July 4 holiday weekend. Temperatures in the 90s and low 100s Fahrenheit are expected, along with high humidity. That means heat indices near or above 105 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit. 

It’s not just the afternoon highs, either. “Overnight lows will also be quite warm,” NWS forecasters wrote, “with some record high minimums possible, bringing little to no relief from the heat in the nighttime hours.” Those nighttime temps can be just as dangerous as the triple-digit highs. 

Don’t be fooled by a cool breeze or what your weather app says. Outdoor temperatures that say 90 degrees can still feel like 100 degrees or hotter. Your health conditions can make heat even more critical. As much as we love summer fun outdoors, heat waves can be dangerous and deadly. 

And heat waves are getting worse and more frequent due to climate change caused largely by the burning of fossil fuels. An analysis by European climate scientists on this week’s heat wave found a similar event in 1976 would’ve been about 3.5 degrees Celsius cooler, and one in 2003 about 2 degrees cooler. “This summer shows that at 1.4°C of global warming, extreme heat is already reaching the limits of our societies’ ability to cope,” the scientists wrote.

As temperatures rise this weekend, it’s crucial to stay safe and alert of all weather advisories. Expert guidance may mean changing your plans or taking extra precautions. As much as keeping cool seems obvious, some reminders can be lifesaving. 

Temperatures Thursday in London reached 36.4 degrees Celsius, or more than 97 degrees Fahrenheit, as Europe deals with a deadly heat wave. High temperatures are expected for the eastern and central US next week.

Dan Kitwood/Getty Images

Keep an eye on the heat

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has a HeatRisk tracking tool that gives you the daily risk level based on your ZIP code, plus tips to help manage your health in the heat. Pay attention to your weather app for temperatures and weather alerts. You may also see the temperature that it feels like, which can be higher than the “official” temperature because of humidity and other factors.  

During heat waves, you may expect temperatures to cool at night, but sometimes they don’t drop enough to offer genuine relief. Cooler night temperatures give your body a chance to reset from the heat that can impact your body. But when temperatures remain high, your body doesn’t have that chance, which can be dangerous for your health. So even when the sun goes down, continue to pay attention to how hot it is — and not just outside your home.

Make sure your home is cool 

Keeping your home cool is essential to protecting your health during a heat wave also helps keep your pets safe and protect loved ones from the extremely warm temps. 

“Stay in the coolest area of your home as much as possible,” said CNET Editor Corin Cesaric-Eppie. “The National Weather Service also cautions against direct sun exposure as it can result in a sunburn, which makes it more difficult for your body to cool down.”

In your home, air conditioning is the most common way to ensure you stay comfortable and safe.

Cesaric-Epple and CNET’s Labs team have reviewed more than a dozen portable and window AC units and found that window units have optimal cooling performance. Energy Star models can also keep you cool while using less electricity.

If you’re not in the market for a new AC unit, there are other tips to keep your home cool. Consider keeping your curtains closed to prevent sunlight from warming up your home. And use weatherstripping or other materials to seal up any gaps around your doors and windows to keep cool air in and hot, humid air out. 

Stay hydrated 

It’s especially important to stay hydrated during heat waves. Dehydration can be dangerous because your body needs sweat to stay cool. Drink water regularly and take water with you when you go outside. The CDC recommends drinking eight ounces of water every 15 to 20 minutes when working outside in the heat. You should drink in short intervals instead of consuming a large amount all at once. Most importantly, the CDC doesn’t recommend drinking more than 48 ounces of water per hour. 

CNET has more advice to help you stay cool this weekend, and throughout the summer, including a handheld fan we recommend to help you stay cool, and heat illness signs to watch out for. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 27 #1112

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is a fun mix of categories. Horse people and board-game players, you both get a category. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Do not pass Go.

Green group hint: Think Vogue.

Blue group hint: Straight lines.

Purple group hint: Neigh!

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Monopoly squares.

Green group: Components of a fashion show.

Blue group: Commonly striped things.

Purple group: Ending in horse gaits.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 27, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is Monopoly squares. The four answers are Boardwalk, Income Tax, Short Line and Water Works.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is components of a fashion show. The four answers are catwalk, collection, designer and model.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is commonly striped things. The four answers are barber pole, billiard ball, credit card and crosswalk.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is ending in horse gaits. The four answers are decanter (canter), envelope (lope), firewalk (walk) and foxtrot (trot).

Categories: Gadgets

This Is Why Your Smartwatch Is Giving You Anxiety, and What You Can Do About It

Whenever I wear a smartwatch, I find that my anxiety increases — specifically, my health anxiety. Also known as hypochondria or illness anxiety disorder, this type of anxiety makes me worry that I am or may become ill even when I’m healthy.

What’s ironic is that part of my job involves testing health-monitoring wearables, including fitness trackers and smart rings. While I love exploring this technology and do think it can help you learn more about your body, I have to be careful about how I use it so my anxiety isn’t triggered.

“Healthy adults and individuals with pre-existing medical conditions are increasingly using these devices to manage their health. Whether 24/7 access to health information from a wearable actually helps or potentially harms people is really unclear,” says Dr. Lindsey Rosman, assistant professor of medicine in the Division of Cardiology and co-director of the Cardiovascular Device and Data Science Lab at the University of North Carolina School of Medicine.

When you add in the ability to search your symptoms online or ask an AI chatbot in your wearable’s app about every anxiety-induced health question that pops into your head, it becomes even more difficult to discern between what’s helpful and harmful. 

To help myself and others with health anxiety navigate the world of wearables so we can either enjoy using them or know when it’s time to stop, I reached out to experts for their advice.

1. Turn off health-related alerts

Rosman has observed clinically that it can be beneficial to either scale back or turn off the features that make you anxious. This can be especially helpful for people with pre-existing conditions that are already being treated, such as atrial fibrillation (AFib, an irregular heartbeat), as your wearable’s irregular heart rhythm notifications will only make you anxious and can prompt you to see your doctor when it’s not medically necessary.

Plus, certain medications can affect the accuracy of wearable sensors, provoking false alarms. 

“We published a case report on a patient who performed over 900 EKGs [electrocardiograms or ECGs, which measure the heart’s electrical activity] on her smartwatch in a single year,” says Rosman. While most of the EKGs were normal, inconclusive alerts fueled her anxiety, leading to multiple ER visits, spousal conflict and the need for therapy to reclaim her daily life. The patient had no psychiatric history prior to getting a smartwatch.

When you get an unexpected health alert on your device, it can understandably cause panic.

Cole Kan/CNET/Apple

Dr. Karen Cassiday, author of Freedom from Health Anxiety and owner and managing director of the Anxiety Treatment Center of Greater Chicago, says that even patients who don’t have health anxiety can find wearables to be intrusive when they get too many alerts. “They discover they want to be less aware of every moment of their body’s functioning,” she says.

“We published a case report on a patient who performed over 900 EKGs on her smartwatch in a single year.”

Dr. Lindsey Rosman

Thankfully, most wearable health features can be turned off completely or customized. 

For instance, Shyamal Patel, SVP of science at Oura, maker of the Oura Ring, shares that the device’s Personalized Activity Goals allow you to choose to see steps instead of calories, adjust your daily activity goal or hide calories completely, which can be necessary for anyone who finds calorie counting triggering or overly rigid. 

2. Avoid checking your device all the time

Referring to a 2024 study she worked on that examined the impact of wearables on the psychological well-being of patients with AFib, Rosman says that about half of the participants were checking their heart rate every day out of habit, not because they felt symptoms. 

Cassidy explains that while people with health anxiety may initially find wearables helpful, compulsively checking to make sure their vitals are normal can accidentally become a form of negative reinforcement that further propels the anxiety.

“Often when I work with anxious people, we try to cut back or eliminate the need to compulsively check for reassurance on their wearables, as well as with ChapGPT or other digital ‘doctors,’” says Cassiday. 

When people refrain from compulsively checking, wearables can provide useful feedback that counters the false belief that something terrible will happen to their health.  

If checking your health metrics causes anxiety, try reducing how often you view them on your device or in its app. Setting an alert to check weekly, at a minimum, could help — especially since it’ll give you a broader picture, making you less likely to hyperfocus on a single data point that seems off. 

You should also avoid checking your wearable’s health information right after you wake up or before you go to bed, as this can set the tone for an anxious day or make it harder to fall asleep. 

If having a screen on your wrist makes it difficult for you to stop checking, a screenless smart ring or fitness tracker such as the Whoop 5.0 may be a better option, since they rely on apps instead of screens.

A screenless smart ring may help you stop compusively checking your device.

Anna Gragert/CNET

“You choose how much or how little you engage with the app, which gives those who might be anxious about their health the option to limit the amount of time they spend with their data,” says Patel.

3. Focus on trends, not one-off metrics

When I asked both Patel and Dr. Jacqueline Shreibati, head of clinical for platforms and devices at Google, how people who wear their devices can reduce health anxiety, they emphasized the importance of tracking trends — not individual metrics.  

“We focus on long-term trends (rather than isolated metrics) to help users maintain a balanced relationship with their data,” says Shreibati. “What being healthy means differs for everyone, and we encourage users to consult their physician if they have any concerns.”

Patel points to the Tags and Trends features in the Oura app. Tags lets you tag lifestyle factors such as travel, alcohol, meditation or late meals, which you can then view in Trends to see how your behavior affects your recovery and sleep over weeks, rather than looking at a single score that may one day seem abnormal.

Instead of viewing a single sleep or stress score, consider looking at that data weekly or monthly.

Vanessa Hand Orellana/CNET

4. Remember that your smartwatch can’t replace a doctor

“Most consumer wearables were originally developed as personal wellness devices, which are not required to demonstrate safety and efficacy like traditional medical devices (e.g., a blood pressure cuff or pacemaker),” Rosman explains. 

Yet we’ve begun using these wearables to monitor our health, using metrics such as heart rate and rhythm, blood oxygen, stress, sleep and physical activity. Now, some of these devices have medical-grade sensors, software and algorithms approved by the US Food and Drug Administration to detect irregular heart rhythms, hypertension and sleep apnea.

Despite FDA approval, wearables are simply not doctors, and they cannot provide medical diagnoses or treatment. That’s why it’s essential to understand what your device actually measures.

The ECG feature on many smartwatches is just one example of this. FDA-cleared as it may be, a single-lead ECG that only uses one electrode to record your heart’s electrical activity from your wrist is not the same as the 12-lead, hospital-grade ECG a cardiologist would use. 

While your wearable’s ECG can surface a potential symptom worth investigating with your doctor, it can’t replace a professional or their medical-grade equipment.

Performing an ECG on your smartwatch is not the same as having that same measurement taken in a doctor’s office.

Viva Tung/CNET/Apple

The gap is even wider for features including stress and sleep scores, which haven’t been clinically validated because there’s no one single gold standard to validate against. These numerical scores are calculated from bodily signals such as heart rate, temperature, movement and heart rate variability, which tend to correlate with your stress and sleep states. But the translation from raw signal to “your stress score is 74” is more of an educated estimate.

“What you’re seeing is a rough indicator of how your nervous system is functioning, not a medical diagnosis,” Rosman emphasizes.

Patel adds that not all physiological stress is inherently negative. “Some forms of short-term physiological stress can be healthy and adaptive,” he says. “That’s why we aim to pair data with in-app context and insights, so members can better understand what they’re seeing rather than receiving that information in a vacuum.” 

Nonetheless, when you don’t know exactly what your wearable is measuring, a “bad” stress or sleep score can seem scary when it isn’t necessarily a cause for alarm, but rather a sign that you may want to have a deeper conversation with your doctor.

5. Get your doctor’s thoughts

Just like you should talk to your doctor before starting a new medication or diet, you should get their thoughts on whether you could benefit from using a wearable.

“Education is probably the most underused tool we have,” Rosman says. 

When you don’t know what a healthy heart rate or ECG looks like, one seemingly atypical reading can send you into a panic. That’s why it’s essential to speak with your doctor so you understand your own baseline and if a wearable makes sense for your current health condition.

“A fast heart rate after climbing stairs is not the same as a dangerous arrhythmia, but without that context, a notification can feel terrifying.”

Dr. Rosman

As a guide, Rosman provides the following questions you can ask your doctor:

  • What type of wearable should I use? 
  • How often should I check this data? 
  • What are healthy numbers for me? 
  • What do I do when I get an alert? 
  • When should I call the clinic or seek emergency care versus waiting? 

“A fast heart rate after climbing stairs is not the same as a dangerous arrhythmia, but without that context, a notification can feel terrifying,” Rosman adds. “So much wearable-related anxiety comes not from the data itself, but from not knowing what to do with it.”

6. Know when it’s time to remove your device and get help

When asked when someone should consider parting with their wearable or seeing a professional for health anxiety, Cassiday says that it’s similar to what many notice when they keep checking their smartphone for the next text, TikTok or other digital data.  

“If you find yourself interrupting pleasurable activities or your free time to check, or if you feel anxious about not checking, you have a problem,” Cassiday states. 

For instance, if you only stop thinking that you’ll have a heart attack when you check your wearable and see your resting heart rate. Or, put simply, if you only feel at peace after someone or something, such as a wearable reassures you that you’re in good health, it’s time to get professional support. 

If health anxiety is making it difficult for you to enjoy life, then it’s time to talk to a professional.

Constantinis/Getty Images

To find help, Cassiday recommends using the resources provided by the Anxiety and Depression Association of America or the International OCD Foundation, as health anxiety can be related to obsessive-compulsive disorder. 

7. Consider cognitive behavioral therapy 

When you have health anxiety, the gold standard for care is cognitive behavioral therapy. It involves exposure to health-related worries without any form of reassurance and learning to accept the uncertainty that comes with not knowing our future health status, manner of death or time of death.  

“If you find yourself interrupting pleasurable activities or your free time to check, or if you feel anxious about not checking, you have a problem.”

Dr. Karen Cassiday

“People need to learn that all the vague symptoms that trigger their health anxiety are just normal variations of normal body functioning and aging,” Cassiday explains. “They have to reframe the symptoms they notice as nothing to examine, discuss or manage and instead trust the facts of their other evidence of good health.”

CBT can help you live in the present instead of spiraling into the anxiety-inducing “What if?” of the future.

Who should and shouldn’t use wearables

Wearables can be great for people who like tracking their fitness to motivate them toward their goals, or for patients and their care teams when medically necessary. Though they usually cost hundreds of dollars, wearables can be less expensive than medical tests. Some are even HSA- or FSA-eligible

“In AFib specifically, being able to correlate your symptoms with actual rhythm data can be genuinely empowering,” Rosman says. She’s observed that the patients who thrive with wearables are those who use the data as information — not as something to fear — and those who don’t participate in 24/7 surveillance.

In Rosman’s 2024 study, two-thirds of AFib patients said their wearable made them feel safer and more in control. Even so, there is still the risk of unintended consequences.

While they can be beneficial, wearables can also come with risks — especially since there isn’t enough research on the subject.

Giselle Castro-Sloboda/CNET

Just as doctors would never prescribe a medication without knowing the potential benefits, risks and how to manage them, wearables should be no different. “The technology has moved so much faster than the science, and we need the scientific evidence from clinical trials to catch up,” Rosman explains. 

Since the evidence isn’t there yet, Rosman is hesitant to say anyone should categorically avoid wearables. 

“The technology has moved so much faster than the science, and we need the scientific evidence from clinical trials to catch up.”

Dr. Rosman

Despite that, people who are highly anxious about their heart or prone to obsessive symptom monitoring should approach with caution. The same goes for those with conditions involving unpredictable, abrupt symptoms, such as paroxysmal AFib and POTS, because the uncertainty of not knowing when the next episode will hit is stressful enough, and constant monitoring can make it worse.

A note on the science (or lack thereof)

Rosman has conducted research on the connection between wearables and anxiety, including a 2025 review describing the psychological effects of wearables on patients with cardiovascular disease and a 2024 study examining their impact on the psychological well-being of patients with AFib. 

The 2025 review found that while wearables can help promote healthy behaviors and provide data for diagnosis and treatment, they also pose risks, such as adverse psychological reactions. 

In the 2024 study, it was concluded that wearables were connected with higher rates of patients becoming preoccupied with their symptoms, being concerned about their treatments and using both formal and informal health care resources.

On the other hand, a 2021 study that analyzed the 2019 and 2020 US-based Health Information National Trends Survey found that using wearable devices for self-tracking can indirectly reduce psychological distress. Still, misinterpretation of wearable data may cause unnecessary panic and anxiety. 

A 2020 qualitative interview study featuring patients with chronic heart disease also found that while wearables’ data may be a resource for self-care, it can create uncertainty, fear and anxiety.

Ultimately, more studies are needed. 

“Honestly, we don’t have good scientific evidence in this area yet,” says Rosman. “Despite widespread use, there have been no clinical trials I’m aware of that have looked at the benefits and potential health risks of specific wearable health features.”

Rosman’s team plans to be the first to investigate this in patients with pre-existing heart conditions.

Wearables’ impact on our health care system

When wearables cause health anxiety, they can prompt healthy individuals to schedule unnecessary doctor’s appointments. This places a burden on our health care system, which is already experiencing shortages, making it difficult for people who actually require medical attention to access care. 

Rosman’s 2024 study found that those using a wearable sent nearly twice as many patient portal messages to their doctors. Responding to these messages from patients takes time, isn’t reimbursed by insurance and can contribute to burnout.

When health anxiety caused by wearables prompts people to message their doctors, it can put a strain on the health care system.

MoMo Productions/Getty Images

As a result, Rosman believes we need better systems for managing wearable data in clinical settings before we scale it further: “Wearables are changing how we deliver care in ways we haven’t fully prepared for.”

“If we’re not thoughtful about access, wearables could actually widen health disparities rather than close them. That’s the opposite of what we want.”

Dr. Rosman

Wearables can further widen health care inequity due to their cost. 

“These devices are expensive, they were mostly designed and tested in young healthy people and they’re marketed toward higher-income consumers,” Rosman explains. “If we’re not thoughtful about access, wearables could actually widen health disparities rather than close them. That’s the opposite of what we want.”

The bottom line

While wearables have their benefits, there are also risks to consider, especially given the limited research on the subject.

If you purchase a wearable and it triggers health anxiety, you don’t have to use every available feature, wear it constantly or continue to wear it at all. Before you even buy that device, you can arm yourself with anxiety-reducing knowledge by getting your doctor’s expert opinion.  

However, if health anxiety continues to take over your life, it may be time to remove your wearable and seek professional help. 

As for me, writing this piece has been a necessary reminder that, while there’s a lot we can’t control in life, the power is in our hands (or on our wrists or fingers) when it comes to the technology we put on our bodies or invite into our homes. Just like an itchy sweater or a lumpy armchair, we can send the technology that doesn’t serve us packing.  

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 27 #642

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition features a tricky purple category. You’ll need to look inside of words for four words that have a certain connection. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Wow, you’re terrific!

Green group hint: Hoops winners.

Blue group hint: Hoops stars who’ve been honored.

Purple group hint: A name is hidden in each word.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: A revered star.

Green group: Last four NBA champions.

Blue group: WNBA players in the Basketball Hall of Fame.

Purple group: Starts with an NFL starting QB.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 27, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is a revered star. The four answers are great, icon, legend and superstar.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is last four NBA champions. The four answers are Boston, Denver, New York and Oklahoma City.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is WNBA players in the Basketball Hall of Fame. The four answers are Cash, Catchings, Leslie and Whalen.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is starts with an NFL starting QB. The four answers are Jacksonville, Mayer, Williamsport and Youngster.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Strands Hints, Answer and Help for June 27 #846- CNET

Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.

I thought that the theme for today’s NYT Strands puzzle was a bit unclear. Once I found a few clues, though, it was pretty easy to solve. Some of the answers are difficult to unscramble, so if you need hints and answers, read on.

I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story. 

If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.

Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far

Hint for today’s Strands puzzle

Today’s Strands theme is: Suite re-lease

If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Home, sweet home.

Clue words to unlock in-game hints

Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:

  • PART, PARTS, CART, CARTS, CARL, CARLS, TALE, PALE, LIFE

Answers for today’s Strands puzzle

These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:

  • FLAT, LOFT, CONDO, STUDIO, PENTHOUSE, EFFICIENCY

Today’s Strands spangram

The completed NYT Strands puzzle for June 27, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

Today’s Strands spangram is APARTMENTS. To find it, start with the A that is four letters down on the far-left row, and wind across.

Toughest Strands puzzles

Here are some of the Strands topics I’ve found to be the toughest.

#1: Dated slang. Maybe you didn’t even use this lingo when it was cool. Toughest word: PHAT.

#2: Thar she blows! I guess marine biologists might ace this one. Toughest word: BALEEN or RIGHT. 

#3: Off the hook. Again, it helps to know a lot about sea creatures. Sorry, Charlie. Toughest word: BIGEYE or SKIPJACK.

Categories: Gadgets

iPhone 18: Everything We Know About Apple’s Biggest Updates

Key takeaways

  • Features: Dynamic Island could be smaller and cameras might have a variable aperture — plus, there are rumors of a bigger battery. However, some components could be downgraded due to memory component shortages.
  • Colors: Apple could launch light blue, dark cherry and dark gray versions or variations thereof.
  • Price: After Apple hiked prices on Macs, iPads, HomePods and the Apple TV, it’s looking like iPhones won’t be immune to higher costs.
  • Release date: Apple might split the iPhone 18 launch between fall 2026 and spring 2027.

Apple never directly reveals details about upcoming hardware at its Worldwide Developers Conference, which happened at the beginning of June, but that hasn’t stopped the flow of rumors about the iPhone 18 lineup that’s just a few short months away.

The iPhone 18 lineup is shaping up to be one of Apple’s most consequential in years and also one of its most complicated. The Pro and Pro Max models are expected to arrive in September, joined for the first time by Apple’s long-rumored foldable device, widely referred to as the iPhone Fold or iPhone Ultra, which is expected to start above $2,000.

The standard iPhone 18, iPhone 18E and a second-generation iPhone Air, meanwhile, are reportedly being pushed to spring 2027, a significant departure from the all-in-one-fall-event model Apple has followed for years. If you’ve been waiting to upgrade to a standard iPhone, that shift changes the calculus considerably.

Previously, the iPhone 17 series impressed us with its surprisingly feature-packed base model, the incredibly slender iPhone Air, the boldly redesigned iPhone 17 Pro and 17 Pro Max and the entry-level iPhone 17E. We’re hoping the iPhone 18 lineup will surprise us, too. 

The company is only a year or so away from the 20th anniversary of the original iPhone’s launch. While the company sells more phones in the US than rival Android phones, Apple is consistently behind Samsung in global sales and just ahead of Chinese phone-makers like Xiaomi. A lot is at stake for Apple with the next iPhone, including building interest in a possible foldable device, such as the rumored iPhone Fold.

Some of the hottest rumors include Dynamic Island shrinking, along with the possibility that the iPhone 18 and 18 Pro will have the same RAM as the iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max. Also, word is that Apple could split the launch of its iPhone 18 lineup, with the premium models coming out this year and more entry-level models following next year. Here’s a look at all the rumors and leaks we’ve uncovered about the potential iPhone 18 series.

Latest rumors

iPhone 18 design differences

We had CNET’s creative director show us what a light blue-colored iPhone Pro might look like.

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

We’re hearing there likely will be three models: the base iPhone 18, the iPhone 18 Pro and the iPhone 18 Pro Max. There also may be iPhone models not in this series, like a second-generation Air or the much-rumored folding iPhone. That could mean a total of six iPhone models that are in the works if you include the also-rumored 18E.

Designs for the iPhone tend to remain the same year after year, and current rumors suggest this trend will continue. The screen sizes of the three handsets look to be the same as before — 6.3 and 6.9 inches, respectively — with minor design differences in the camera bumps on the back. A Weibo tipster also appears to hint that Apple’s brightness requirements are incredibly demanding, which might result in OLED supply issues. This leads some to suspect it has a much brighter screen. 

The base iPhone 18 is rumored to have a smaller camera bump compared to its predecessor, while the Pro and Pro Max will retain the wider “plateau” to accommodate their three rear cameras. 

According to a leak from the Chinese social media site Weibo, the Pro model could get a “subtle transparent finish” on the rear glass panel. A Chinese leaker reportedly said that the iPhone 18 Pro could have a more unified design versus the two-tone look it has now. Some rumors also suggest that it could have a heavier, thicker build.

It might also come in three new colors: light blue, dark cherry and dark gray. Earlier rumors pointed to a coffee brown color; however, that option appears to have been scrapped, according to supposed dummy units shared by Sonny Dickson on X. 

Other rumors suggest that changes may be coming to the iPhone’s Dynamic Island. Gurman and Weibo user Digital Chat Station suggest that Apple may reduce the size of the Dynamic Island on the iPhone 18 models. This could result in a small pinhole cutout for the camera, as the Face ID sensors may be located beneath the display.

The Information also recently reported that the iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 18 Pro Max will feature under-screen Face ID, confirming the Bloomberg rumor. Additionally, the outlet said the front camera would be moved to the top left corner of the screen and, as a result, would miss the Dynamic Island cutout. 

Contrary to that claim, X account Ice Universe alleges that the Dynamic Island cutout on the iPhone 18 Pro models will remain, but will instead be “approximately 35% narrower” than on current iPhone 17 Pro models. This relates to how the Dynamic Island looks by default: the area enlarges when Live Activities or other information are displayed, just like the existing Dynamic Island. MacRumors suggests that the new iPhone will only have partial under-screen Face ID, which still requires a Dynamic Island. 

Watch this: No Regular iPhone 18? Why Apple May Split the iPhone Event

06:23

Another piece of evidence that supports the shrinking Dynamic Island claim is recently leaked images from the X account @earlyappleleaks. The photos show what appears to be an iPhone 18 Pro prototype with a much smaller Dynamic Island cutout. Similarly, X account Ice Universe shared a photo of what it claims to be an iPhone 18 Pro screen protector. It, too, shows a much smaller Dynamic Island.

We’ve tested under-display cameras on several phones over the years. The part of the display in front of the camera features fewer screen elements and translucent wiring, allowing the selfie camera to “see through” the screen, much like looking out a window with open blinds. While the idea of a display with minimal or no cutouts is a worthy one, under-display cameras often result in poor image quality. However, maybe Apple is the company that will finally figure out how to integrate a high-quality camera under the display.

Otherwise, Bloomberg’s Gurman also warns that the 18 Pro could be “underwhelming,” noting that it could feature only minor tweaks. This is a bit of a departure from prior iPhone Pros, as the Pro has usually been the more premium version of the iPhone lineup. 

A bigger battery for iPhone 18 Pro

After years of customers asking, Apple finally chose battery over case slimness in the iPhone 17 Pro. And that model continues to surprise us, coming out on top in Patrick Holland’s recent comparison of battery life across 35 phones. We’re especially curious about whether Apple will adopt new silicon-carbon battery technology.

Based on a post on the Chinese social media site Weibo, spotted by 9to5Mac, the iPhone 18 Pro could include a battery in excess of 5,000 mAh — specifically, 5,000 mAh for models with a physical SIM card slot (as required in some countries) and 5,200 mAh for models that rely solely on eSIM (which give up more internal space that can be filled with more battery).

A recent post by Chinese Weibo-based leaker Digital Chat Station claims that Apple is trying out different battery capacities for different regions. The China model is apparently testing out a 4,056-mAh battery while the US model is testing out a 4,288-mAh battery. MacRumors suggests this is because the US model doesn’t have a physical SIM card slot and therefore has more space for a larger battery. 

New cameras on iPhone 18

The iPhone 17 Pro had three rear cameras: a wide-angle lens, an ultrawide and a 4x telephoto.

CNET

The iPhone’s cameras are another feature that may receive a significant upgrade in 2026. Macworld reports that Weibo leaker Digital Chat Station said the iPhone 18 Pro Max could feature a variable-aperture camera, similar to how lenses on DSLR and mirrorless cameras work. This allows people greater control over depth of field and image brightness. The Information also reported that at least one rear camera on the 18 Pro would have a mechanical iris, another name for a lens’ aperture. 

We’ve seen variable aperture phone cameras before. The Galaxy S9 launched in 2018 with a mechanical dual-aperture lens on its main camera that could switch between f1.5, allowing more light to enter and creating a shallower depth of field, and f2.4, which sharpened the subject more. But the S9’s image sensor was tiny, and photos from it were just OK. Xiaomi had a variable aperture, between f1.9 and f4.0, on the 2023 13 Ultra and 2024 14 Ultra, but each had a large 1-inch-type sensor that could take advantage of it. Sadly, to the frustration of CNET’s Andrew Lanxon, the company removed the variable aperture on the Xiaomi 15 Ultra.

Macworld also says the telephoto lenses on the iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max could get a faster aperture, letting more light hit the sensor for better low-light shots. Additionally, MacRumors reports that all iPhone 18 models (except the 18E) would get upgraded 24-megapixel front-facing cameras for improved selfies. We should note that the iPhone 17 series and Air all have Apple’s new Center Stage selfie camera, which has a square 18-megapixel sensor and can take either horizontal or vertical photos, no matter which way you’re holding the phones.

There is also some speculation that the iPhone’s Camera Control button could be simplified. Instead of capacitive and pressure sensors, it might just be pressure-sensing for all of the Camera Control’s functions. 

Updated A20 chip and iPhone 18 specs

The new iPhone models run iOS 26 and have either an A19 or A19 Pro chip: (left to right) iPhone 17, iPhone Air, iPhone 17 Pro Max and iPhone 17 Pro.

Patrick Holland/CNET

As the iPhone 17 lineup uses the A19 and A19 Pro chips, it makes sense that the upcoming iPhone 18 would use Apple’s new A20 processor. The rumored chips are said to use a new process called Wafer-Level Multi-Chip Module, which incorporates the RAM directly into the same wafer as the CPU, GPU and neural engine. This apparently results in better efficiency and faster performance because everything would be located on the same chip. 

We’re also hearing that the iPhone 18 lineup could use Apple’s next-gen C2 modem chip for improved wireless connectivity. Additionally, The Information reports that Apple is preparing to support 5G networks from satellites, potentially giving iPhone 18 models full satellite phone capabilities, not just for emergencies and texting

That said, a recent rumor on Weibo suggests that the iPhone 18’s specs could be “downgraded” to be closer to an iPhone 18E model. That could also be more focused on reducing production costs on the back end.

MacRumors recently reported that the iPhone 18 could have 12GB of RAM, according to a research note by analyst Jeff Pu.

Although this is not exclusive to the iPhone 18, Apple also recently announced that Google’s Gemini will be running its AI-powered Siri later this year. 

Yep, it looks like prices are going up

Outgoing Apple CEO Tim Cook sent up a warning flare that the company would be increasing prices due to the “RAMageddon” component shortage, and sure enough, the next week prices jumped on Mac, iPad, Home Pod and Apple TV models. Although that doesn’t promise more expensive iPhones, MacRumors pointed to Chinese leakers who purport to confirm that you’ll pay more for the new models.

Although no one would argue that iPhone models have been cheap, the prices have stayed fairly consistent for years. Now, with a possible iPhone Ultra foldable in the works, the top end of the line could push well past the $2,000 mark.

iPhone 18 and iPhone 18 Pro release date

The logo for Apple’s fall 2026 event invitation is interactive: a heat signature stays where you touch or click and hold.

Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET

For years, Apple has held its annual iPhone launch event in the fall. But according to multiple reports, Apple’s smartphone release schedule could look different in the coming years.

Bloomberg has reported that Apple plans to release the more expensive iPhone 18 Pro, the iPhone 18 Pro Max and its new foldable in fall 2026, while the more affordable iPhone 18 and the iPhone 18E (and maybe a potential iPhone Air 2) could debut six months later in February or March 2027.

Seeing as Apple has released the iPhone 16E and 17E in the spring of 2025 and 2026, that’s not a surprising development. It does mean, however, that if you’re holding out for a more affordable iPhone, you could have to wait until next year to plan your purchase. 

Watch this: The iPhone 17’s Unexpectedly Satisfying Tips and Accessories

08:14

Categories: Gadgets

Whew! Windows 10 Users Get a Year’s Extension for Security Updates

If I still had to use a PC running Windows 10, I’d be thrilled that Microsoft is extending its Extended Security Updates program for that operating system until Oct.14, 2027. Its original end-of-life date was Oct.13 of this year.

Yesterday, Microsoft quietly updated its original blog post from almost exactly a year ago with the new information, but without changing the post date (according to the Wayback Machine). Veteran Windows reporter Ed Bott from ZDNET noticed the stealth change to Microsoft’s Windows 10 Consumer ESU page. 

Microsoft didn’t offer a real reason for the date change, beyond saying that it “gives customers more time and flexibility to find the best PC for their needs while keeping them protected,” in a statement via email.

Microsoft

Since Microsoft ended support for Windows 10 in October 2025, the program is the only way to continue receiving security patches to help protect old systems from new and future threats. 

Although extending programs like these isn’t unusual — sometimes users push back, and sometimes a company isn’t quite ready to implement them — this year it seems even more important to delay them. Upgrading from Windows 10 to Windows 11 not only requires more powerful hardware, but also a piece of security hardware (or software emulation) called a Trusted Platform Module in order to run. 

Unlike Apple, Microsoft doesn’t overhaul its operating system annually, which makes sense: Windows serves a very heterogeneous market, which makes development far more complicated than Apple’s we-control-all-the-hardware approach. Though Windows 10 is 5 years old, a chunk of people never upgraded because of those updated hardware requirements, or even recently bought used systems that wouldn’t support it.

Prices of laptops and desktop PCs have been rising due to artificial intelligence and data centers’ voracious appetite for the manufacturing resources previously allocated to consumer components like memory and storage — including a surprise round of increases this week from Apple. So it’s a pretty bad time to buy consumer electronics, and will probably remain so through at least the next year.

If you’re running Windows 10 and haven’t yet enrolled in the program, it’s still a pretty simple process, provided you’re running at least 22H2 and have a Microsoft account. In ideal circumstances, it’s just a link available from within Windows Update. 

And if you can afford it, computer prices haven’t yet peaked, and a wave of cheap laptops has emerged in response to the success of Apple’s entry-priced MacBook Neo

Categories: Gadgets

Major Bummer for Students: Apple Hikes Price of MacBook Neo

Apple raised prices across the board on Thursday, pointing the finger at RAMageddon for what Apple CEO Tim Cook called an “unavoidable” response to rising memory and storage prices as demand for these components surged with the spread of AI data centers. The price hikes hit many Apple product lines, including the iPad, Mac, Apple TV, HomePod and VisionPro. Seemingly, only the iPhone and Apple Watch were spared.

What I’m most upset about is that Apple raised the price of its budget MacBook Neo. We finally got a MacBook built for student budgets, and in the blink of an eye, it’s gone. The $499 Neo student pricing lasted about as long as a semester. 

Only three-and-a-half months after Apple drastically reduced the entry point for the MacBook, it’s turned around and raised the price by $100. Now, the MacBook Neo starts at $699 at Apple, and students can get it for $599. (At the time of this writing, it’s still available for $590 at Amazon.)

The cost of the step-up model with Touch ID and double the storage also went up by $100. It now costs $799, or $699 with Apple’s education discount. (It’s still $690 at Amazon.)

Is it really the RAM?

Apple and other computer-makers point to the surge in demand for memory and storage from AI data centers, called RAMageddon, as the reason for rising component prices, which have forced them to hike the price of the computers they sell. But with only 8GB of RAM and a modest 256GB SSD, the baseline MacBook Neo doesn’t seem to merit a $100 increase. And given that the step-up model gets you only a 512GB SSD with no accompanying increase in memory, its $100 price hike feels steep, too.

I think Apple is hiding the real reason behind the Neo’s price hike: It sold through its initial supply of Neos that used leftover iPhone processors and now must incur the added cost of manufacturing new A18 Pro chips to meet Neo demand. 

As previously reported, Apple was preparing a new production run of the MacBook Neo, increasing the number of units to 10 million from its initial run, estimated at 5 to 6 million. And the math changes for Apple if it no longer has a stash of A18 Pro chips it can borrow for this new Neo run.

I suspect RAMageddon is a convenient excuse for Apple to cover the added costs to make new Neos. Or at least, it’s not the only reason for Apple raising the price of the Neo just a few months after its debut.

Apple did not immediately respond to a request for comment on this theory.

It’ll now cost you $799 to turn that lock button into a Touch ID sensor.

Matt Elliott/CNET

Bigger increases for MacBook Air and Pro

What throws cold water on my Neo theory is that Apple slapped even larger price increases on the MacBook Air and Pro lines. The price of the MacBook Air went up by $200, and the MacBook Pro increased by $300. 

The 13-inch MacBook Air now starts at $1,299, and the 15-inch Air now starts at $1,499.

The 14-inch MacBook Pro now starts at $1,999, and the 16-inch Pro now starts at $2,999. 

The MacBook Air comes with a minimum of 16GB of RAM and 512GB SSD, and the MacBook Pro comes with a minimum of 16GB of RAM and a 1TB SSD. 

“We have never seen a component price increase this much, this quickly,” Apple said in the statement. “We have now reached a point where we need to begin raising prices on a number of products, including today’s increases for iPad and Mac.”

MacBook price increases

ModelOld priceNew price MacBook Neo $599$69913-inch MacBook Air $1,099$1,29915-inch MacBook Air $1,299$1,49914-inch MacBook Pro $1,699$1,99916-inch MacBook Pro $2,699$2,999

Neo vs. Air

As much as it hurts for students and their parents to pay $100 more for a MacBook Neo for school, you could try to console yourself by comparing that increase to the new pricing for the MacBook Air. With the Neo jumping from $599 to $699, and the Air jumping from $1,099 to $1,299, the gap between the two has widened. The Neo now costs $600 less than the cheapest Air.

While that reasoning might help justify being forced to pay more for a MacBook Neo, the $100 price increase still hurts anyone who’s already facing the higher costs of higher education.

The MacBook Air now starts at $1,299, a $200 increase from its previous price.

Matt Elliott/CNET

Other Macs are more expensive now, too

Apple’s Mac desktops weren’t spared. Pricing increased for the iMac, Mac Mini and Mac Studio.

Apple raised the price of the iMac by $200 to $1,499. It brought back the baseline M4 Mac Mini with 16GB of RAM and 256GB of storage that it discontinued in May, but it returned with a $200 increase. The M4 Pro model also got hit with a $200 price hike. 

Those increases pale in comparison to what the Mac Studio received. The M4 Max model now starts at $2,499, up $500. And if you’re sitting down, I’ll tell you what the Mac Studio with the M3 Ultra chip now costs. It starts at $5,299, a staggering rise in price of $1,300.

Mac desktop price increases

ModelOld priceNew price iMac $1,299$1,499Mac Mini (M4) $599$799Mac Mini (M4 Pro) $1,399$1,599Mac Studio (M4 Max): $2,499, up from $1,999 (+$500) $1,999$2,499Mac Studio (M3 Ultra): $5,299, up from $3,999 (+$1,300) $3,999$5,299

Categories: Gadgets

MacPaw Is Launching a Next-Gen AI Assistant Soon. What to Know About Eney

You might already be familiar with MacPaw’s existing lineup of user-friendly Mac software — CleanMyMac, Setapp and ClearVPN are a few standouts. But with Eney, MacPaw has set out to create an entirely new kind of daily productivity app, one that combines all the AI technologies available today into a proactive AI assistant designed to fix scattered workflows.

MacPaw placed Eney on Setapp, MacPaw’s unified software marketplace, for its beta launch, and since then the company’s developers have been collecting user feedback to help evolve Eney into a potent AI assistant that adapts to you and your work habits rather than forcing you to adapt instead.

AI-powered assistants and chatbots may be the future of productivity, but for them to be useful, they need to anticipate where and how you might need help with day-to-day tasks. Here, we give an overview of Eney’s forthcoming features and why it might be the perfect companion for your future Mac workflow.

Bridging the gap between people and tech

Studies have found that the cognitive cost of AI is increasing while our attention spans are shrinking. Basically, AI is exhausting users by offering too many options, clicks and outputs. According to MacPaw’s internal research, users also want “infinite interfaces” that adapt based on their inputs, and an AI experience that turns complex tasks into intuitive processes. Users want proactive, adaptive tools that effortlessly navigate digital environments and reduce cognitive load. 

That’s why, over the course of Eney’s beta testing, MacPaw has launched numerous skills and integrated third-party tools to improve and streamline the user experience. Feedback has shown that while people are eager to create personalized vibe-coding tools by utilizing various AI solutions, many find the process to be time-consuming, preferring a plug-and-play solution. Eney has evolved into just that. 

Eney can get it done without brain drain

Users will be able to offload tedious tasks to Eney or allow the assistant to manage a schedule, tidy up files and handle the busywork that’s usually a time suck. 

Here’s a small sampling of Eney’s capabilities to date:

  • Create a morning briefing: Open your Mac and Eney will scan your calendar and provide you with a briefing of your tasks for that day. Eney can also collect the latest world news as you sip your coffee, synthesizing it into a digestible summary to keep you informed in less time, without having to weed through sources yourself.
  • Open and complete tasks in your tools: Eney can launch your Gmail, browser searches and the work apps you already use and get your day running from one unified interface.
  • Accelerate your workflow: Eney can quickly summarize long videos and PDFs, create meeting notes, upload and forward files to your team, translate documents, convert files and more.

But it isn’t so much the individual tasks Eney can accomplish that will impress you as the fact that Eney never stops learning. 

A proactive AI assistant that adapts 

Perhaps the most exciting aspect of Eney’s development process is that it’s being specifically designed to adapt to your habits and workflow over time. Using Eney feels personal and smooth, never clunky or generic. 

For example, Eney is capable of offering you help before you even ask for it. While other AI assistants sit and wait for you to think through and type out your next prompt, Eney provides ready-to-use prompts to keep your work flowing at a fast clip. 

For example, if you tell Eney to organize your computer’s desktop, you’ll be given a breakdown of the existing files, organized by size or file type or how much space they’re taking up, before Eney offers multiple further suggestions: should it organize by file type? Should it leave any files where they are? Once you confirm the next step, you’ll be presented with more options, ranging from simple tasks like deleting duplicate files to more complex ones like extracting archived files and organizing their contents. 

In other words, Eney acts proactively, always showing you its progress when completing a task and asking for permission before performing major actions.

Try Eney today

But if you don’t want to wait, you can try Eney today and see how it surfaces what matters and keeps work moving. 

Click here to learn more about Eney and how an AI assistant can help you save time and get more done.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Google Pixel Phone to Buy in 2026

Display size, tech, resolution, refresh rate, brightness 6.3-inch OLED; 2,424×1,080 pixels; 60 to 120 Hz variable refresh rate6.3-inch LTPO OLED; 2,856×1,280 pixels; 1 to 120Hz variable refresh rate6.8-inch LTPO OLED; 2,992×1,344 pixels; 1 to 120Hz variable refresh rate6.3-inch POLED, 2,424×1,080 pixels, 60-120 Hz variable refresh rateCover display: 6.4-inch OLED; 2,364×1,080 pixels; 60 to 120Hz refresh rate; Inner display: 8-inch OLED; 2,152 x 2,076 pixels; 1 to 120Hz refresh rate (LTPO)Camera 48-megapixel (wide), 13-megapixel (ultrawide), 10.8-megapixel (5x telephoto)50-megapixel (wide), 48-megapixel (ultrawide), 48-megapixel (5x telephoto)50-megapixel (wide), 48-megapixel (ultrawide), 48-megapixel (5x telephoto)48-megapixel (wide), 13-megapixel (ultrawide)48-megapixel (wide), 10.5-megapixel (ultrawide), 10.8-megapixel (5x telephoto)Special features Gorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,000 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 6E; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 30W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2 15W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Super Res Zoom up to 20x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 polished back
with satin finish aluminum frameGorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,300 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 7; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 30W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2 15W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Pro Res zoom up to 100x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; High-Res Portrait mode; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla GlassVictus 2 silky matte back with polished finish aluminum frame; ultrawideband chipGorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,300 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 7; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 45W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2.2 25W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Pro Res zoom up to 100x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; High-Res Portrait mode; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla GlassVictus 2 silky matte back with polished finish aluminum frame; ultrawideband chip7 years of OS, security and Pixel feature drops, Gorilla Glass 3 cover glass, IP68 dust and water resistance, 3,000-nit peak brightness, 2,000,000:1 contrast ratio, 30W fast charging with 45W charging adapter (charger not included), 10W wireless charging Qi certified, Satellite SOS, Wi-Fi 6E, NFC, Bluetooth 6, dual-SIM (nano SIM + eSIM), Camera Coach, Add Me, Best Take, Magic Eraser, Magic Editor, Photo Unblur, Super Res Zoom, Circle to Search; colors: lavender, berry, fog, obsidian (black)IP68 rating, gearless hinge, cover and internal screen 3,000 nits peak brightnes, Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 cover and back glass, Satellite SOS, ultra-wideband chip, Qi2-certified, free Google VPN. 7 years of OS, security and Pixel Drop updates

Categories: Gadgets

15 Hidden iOS 27 Features You Can Check Out in the Developer Beta

Apple spent a lot of time talking about artificial intelligence at WWDC this year, including how Apple Intelligence is getting a boost from Google’s Gemini models. Apple unveiled Siri AI, a major overhaul of its voice assistant that can hold longer conversations, answer questions about what is on your screen and pull relevant information from your messages, emails and photos.

Siri AI is only one part of iOS 27. Apple also announced more advanced photo-editing tools, expanded parental controls, updates to its Liquid Glass design and several performance improvements intended to make the iPhone feel faster and more responsive.

Some of the most immediately useful changes, however, are much smaller. After installing the iOS 27 developer beta, I noticed new features tucked inside apps you already use every day: a faster way to pull up your Safari tabs, a separate alarm-volume setting, new tools for saving and organizing photos, and a Custom EQ option for AirPods.

The iOS 27 developer beta is available now, with a public beta expected in July and the full update arriving this fall. Developer betas can be buggy and may affect battery life, app compatibility and everyday performance, so you should avoid installing them on your primary iPhone unless you are comfortable dealing with unfinished software.

Here are some of the less obvious iOS 27 features worth checking out.

Expand the edges of a photo with Extend

The Photos app is getting a new Extend tool that can expand an image beyond its original borders. You can use it to straighten a crooked horizon, change the aspect ratio of a photo or give your subject more breathing room in the frame.

Photos’ new Extend tool can expand an image beyond its edges.

Nelson Aguilar/CNET

Extend uses generative AI to create the additional parts of the image, similar to generative-expand tools already available in some photo-editing apps. Apple has also added a Spatial Reframing feature, that allows you to touch and drag to adjust the perspective of an image.

Create a Shortcut by describing what you want

The Shortcuts app can be powerful, but building an automation from scratch requires some patience. In iOS 27, you can simply describe what you want a shortcut to do, and the app will assemble the required steps for you.

You could ask it to create a shortcut that texts someone when your phone is about to die or go into Focus mode when you arrive at work. You may still need to make a few adjustments, but you no longer have to start from scratch.

Shortcuts can now build an automation from a simple description.

Nelson Aguilar/CNET

AirDrop files up to 80% faster

AirDrop is also getting a speed boost. Apple says some AirDrop transfers can be up to 80% faster in iOS 27, making it quicker to send photos and files to someone nearby.

There is some fine print, though. Apple tested the improvement by transferring multiple photos totaling 30MB between nearby contacts while the phones were not connected to a Wi-Fi network. Your own results will depend on what you’re sending and the conditions around you, but any improvement should be noticeable if you regularly use AirDrop to share large batches of photos.

Open the Camera app faster in Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode can help stretch your battery when your iPhone is running low, but it can also make parts of the phone feel slower. In iOS 27, Apple says the Camera app launches faster when Low Power Mode is turned on.

That is a small improvement, but it matters when you are trying to quickly capture something before the moment passes and your phone dies

Move between Wi-Fi and cellular more smoothly

I always have issues in that moment of limbo when I’m leaving my apartment and too far away to have good Wi-Fi service, but not far enough for my phone to automatically disconnect. It always ends up disrupting whatever I’ve got going on my phone, like a download, stream or FaceTime call, and then I end up having to disable Wi-Fi.

In iOS 27, Apple says the phone can more seamlessly transition between Wi-Fi and cellular data as you move around, without you having to open the Control Center and manually turn off Wi-Fi.

Keep texting while a video is still sending

Sending a large video through Messages can be annoying when you have a weak connection. Until the file finishes uploading, the conversation is pretty much on hold, because text messages are sent in order.

A new continuous-send feature lets you keep sending texts while a large photo or video is still being delivered. Messages also adds a send indicator to each outgoing message, making it easier to see what has already gone through and what’s still in progress.

Show both sides of a FaceTime call

Dual Capture in FaceTime lets you stream video from your front and rear cameras at the same time during a one-on-one call. That means the other person can see your face while you show them what is happening in front of you.

It could be useful when you are giving someone a tour, showing them a view or asking for help with something in front of you without constantly flipping the camera back and forth. There is one limitation: Apple says Dual Capture is available only on the iPhone Air and iPhone 17 lineup.

Save any frame from a video as a photo

The Photos app now lets you save a single frame from a video as a photo with a tap. That means you no longer need to pause a clip at exactly the right moment, take a screenshot and crop out the video controls afterward.

There’s already a feature to take stills while you’re shooting a video, which I use when I’m recording a live concert, but it’s nice to have the feature for after, especially when there’s a great still image buried somewhere inside them.

Review several selected photos at once

Selection View gives you a faster way to review and modify a group of photos after selecting them in your library. You can also manage included metadata, such as location information.

This should make it easier to clean up a batch of pictures before sharing them, rather than opening each one individually and making the same changes over and over again.

Rate your photos and videos with stars

If your photo library is overflowing with thousands of images, iOS 27 gives you another way to organize the ones you really care about. You can now assign photos and videos a rating from one to five stars.

Once you have rated your photos, you can filter your library and collections by rating. That could make it easier to narrow down a set of pictures for Instagram or keep track of the images you still need to edit.

Sync new photos to iCloud immediately

Photos also includes an option to prioritize syncing new images and videos to iCloud for one day, even if it comes at the expense of battery life or system performance.

Normally, your iPhone may delay some syncing to conserve power or handle other tasks. The new setting is useful when backing up your photos matters more than preserving battery life, like after a photo shoot or an event where you captured something you don’t want to lose.

Customize the EQ on your AirPods

AirPods are getting a Custom EQ setting that lets you adjust the lows, mids and highs. That gives you more control over how your music sounds without relying on a broader EQ setting.

You could boost the bass, pull back the high end or make smaller adjustments based on your own preferences. It is not a replacement for a full professional equalizer, obviously, but it should be more than enough for people who want their AirPods to sound a little more personalized.

Set your alarm volume separately from everything else

This feature should’ve been available on the iPhone a long time ago: You can set your alarm volume independently from the rest of your system volume.

That means you can keep videos, music and other audio relatively quiet without worrying that your alarm will also be too soft to wake you up. I’ve had times when I’ve missed an alarm because the volume was at zero, but hopefully, no more.

Give a widget an entire Home Screen page

Widgets can now take up an entire Home Screen page if you want them to. Apple calls them extra-large widgets, with support for apps including Calendar, Photos and Music.

A full-page Calendar widget could make it easier to see your schedule at a glance, while a Photos widget could turn one page of your Home Screen into something like a digital photo frame. I don’t think I want a widget to take up my entire screen (isn’t that what apps are for?), but it could make sense for the apps you check often but only quickly want to glance at.

See all your Safari tabs with one tap

Safari has a small change that makes it much easier to see all the tabs you have open. Instead of double tapping on the tab button, you now only have to tap once to view all your tabs. It’s a minor interface tweak, but it removes some of the friction from jumping between webpages, especially if you regularly keep hundreds of tabs open at once, like me.

For more from WWDC, check out some of the biggest announcements and how to download the iOS 27 developer beta.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Family Phone Plans for 2026

“5G” is an umbrella term that encompasses the current fifth-generation cellular wireless network technologies. All the major carriers and phones support 5G connections, which can offer faster data speeds than older technologies such as 4G LTE or 3G.

Essentially there are three types of 5G: Millimeter-wave (mmWave), which can be fast but has limited range; low-band 5G, which has slower speeds but works on a broader range; and midband, which is a balance between the two that’s faster than low-band but also covers a larger range than millimeter-wave. Midband also incorporates C-band, a batch of spectrum auctioned off by the Federal Communications Commission in 2021.

Your phone’s 5G connection depends on which type blankets the area you’re in, as well as other factors, such as population density and infrastructure. For instance, mmWave is super fast, but its signals can be thwarted by buildings — or glass, or leaves — or whether you’re inside a structure.

When your device is connected to a 5G network, it can show up as several variations such as 5G, 5G Plus, 5G UW or others, depending on the carrier. Here’s a list of icons you see at the top of your phone for the major services:

AT&T: 5GE (which isn’t actually 5G, but rather a sly marketing name for 4G LTE), 5G (low band), 5G Plus (mmWave, midband)

Verizon: 5G (low band, also called “Nationwide 5G”), 5G UW/5G UWB (midband and mmWave, also called “5G Ultra Wideband”)

T-Mobile: 5G (low band), 5G UC (midband and mmWave, also called “Ultra Capacity 5G”)

There’s also 5G Reduced Capacity (5G RedCap), which is a lower-power, smaller-capacity branch of 5G used by devices such as smartwatches and portable health devices; the Apple Watch Ultra 3, for example, connects via 5G RedCap.

Just around the corner is 5G Advanced, promising much faster speeds due to carrier aggregation, or combining multiple spectrums.

Categories: Gadgets

New Shows and Movies to Watch on Peacock in July 2026

Peacock is home to some of the most addictive original reality series out there, including The Traitors, Love Island and House of Villains. It’s also the streaming home to Bravo franchises such as The Real Housewives, Summer House and Top Chef. But even though the platform boasts a fantastic roster of unscripted TV, you can also find incredible scripted shows, including the darkly funny Poker Face, dramas such as All Her Fault and more. 

With its vast library spanning every genre and an expanding slate of original and exclusive content, it seems like there’s always something new to try — or old favorites to binge. This month, one of the biggest new originals to hit the platform is The Five Star Weekend, a new series starring Jennifer Garner, Regina Hall, D’Arcy Carden, Chloe Sevigny and Gemma Chan as friends who meet for a weekend in Nantucket. (Garner’s 13 Going on 30 co-star Judy Greer pops up in the show, too!) 

Also out this month, you can catch a new season of Married at First Sight, plus great movies including Black Bag, Jaws and more. Here’s a look at the titles we’re excited to check out on Peacock in July 2026.

July 1

Universal Studios/Getty Images

It’s a summer rite of passage at this point for at least one of the major streaming services to carry Jaws, the quintessential summer blockbuster. This year, Peacock is dropping not just the 1975 original, but all three sequels, too: Jaws 2, Jaws 3-D and Jaws: The Revenge. Listen, none of the follow-ups are as good as the original, but each one is a summer vibe. The films arrive on Peacock on July 1, just in time to celebrate the Fourth of July with the terrorized residents of Amity. 

July 2

Focus Features

From its logline, Black Bag sounds like a fun crime thriller about a British intelligence officer, George Woodhouse (Michael Fassbender), who suspects his wife (Cate Blanchett), also a spy, might be a traitor and starts trailing her to gather proof. But director Steven Soderbergh paints the film with his signature brushstrokes, making it stylish and sexy thanks to moody lighting and killer chemistry between the two leads. The tension is palpable throughout. The film, which came out in 2025 and was a personal favorite of ours last year, is available exclusively on Peacock starting July 2. 

July 4

Peacock

Macy’s 4th of July Fireworks Spectacular 2026

Jaws isn’t the only summer viewing tradition you can catch on Peacock this month. The Macy’s 4th of July Fireworks Spectacular is back for its 50th year. The first one was a celebration of the nation’s bicentennial in 1976, and this time it’ll be more festive than ever as America commemorates its 250th birthday. 85,000 fireworks shells in 30 different colors will illuminate the sky over New York City, and the broadcast will feature performances from Noah Kahan, Post Malone, Bebe Rexha, Salt-N-Pepa, Shaboozey, Blake Shelton and The Voice winner Alexia Jayy. Peacock and NBC will simulcast the fireworks show on July 4 starting at 8 p.m. ET.

July 9

Peacock

The Five Star Weekend might be the biggest Peacock Original to land on the streamer this July, if we’re talking sheer star power. The series, which is a beach read in TV form, is based on Elin Hilderbrand’s novel and stars Jennifer Garner as Hollis Shaw, a woman who invites four friends, played by D’Arcy Carden, Gemma Chan, Regina Hall and Chloë Sevigny, to her Nantucket home for a lavish weekend away. But there are secrets buried deep in these friendships, and you know they’re bound to come out. All eight episodes of the series will be released at once on July 9.

July 10

Universal Pictures

Reminders of Him is another title based on a best-seller. This one is adapted from Colleen Hoover’s book and stars Maika Monroe as Kenna, a woman who has just been released on parole after serving six years for vehicular manslaughter, the result of an accident that killed her boyfriend. Now living in her boyfriend’s hometown, she attempts to reconnect with his family, who have been raising her daughter, and finds unlikely support from his best friend (Tyriq Withers). The cast also includes Lainey Wilson, Lauren Graham and Bradley Whitford. The film arrives exclusively on Peacock on July 10.

July 12

Peacock

Married at First Sight (Season 20)

One of the most extreme reality dating shows out there, Married At First Sight features couples whose very first meeting is at the altar, and they see where things go from there. The series spent 18 seasons on A&E before moving over to Peacock, where the 20th season will arrive on July 12. 

Categories: Gadgets

Best T-Mobile Plans: How to Choose and Which Ones to Pick in 2026

“5G” is an umbrella term that encompasses the current fifth-generation cellular wireless network technologies. All the major carriers and phones support 5G connections, which can offer faster data speeds than older technologies such as 4G LTE or 3G.

Essentially there are three types of 5G: Millimeter-wave (mmWave), which can be fast but has limited range; low-band 5G, which has slower speeds but works on a broader range; and midband, which is a balance between the two that’s faster than low-band but also covers a larger range than millimeter-wave. Midband also incorporates C-band, a batch of spectrum auctioned off by the Federal Communications Commission in 2021.

Your phone’s 5G connection depends on which type blankets the area you’re in, as well as other factors, such as population density and infrastructure. For instance, mmWave is super fast, but its signals can be thwarted by buildings, glass, leaves or by being inside of a structure.

When your device is connected to a 5G network, it can show up as several variations such as 5G, 5G Plus, 5G UW or others, depending on the carrier. Here’s a list of icons you see at the top of your phone for the major services:

AT&T: 5GE (which isn’t actually 5G, but rather a sly marketing name for 4G LTE), 5G (low band), 5G Plus (mmWave, midband)

Verizon: 5G (low band, also called “Nationwide 5G”), 5G UW/5G UWB (midband and mmWave, also called “5G Ultra Wideband”)

T-Mobile: 5G (low band), 5G UC (midband and mmWave, also called “Ultra Capacity 5G”)

There’s also 5G Reduced Capacity (5G RedCap), which is a lower-power, smaller-capacity branch of 5G used by devices such as smartwatches and portable health devices; the Apple Watch Ultra 3, for example, connects via 5G RedCap.

Just around the corner is 5G Advanced, promising much faster speeds because of carrier aggregation, or combining multiple spectrums.

Categories: Gadgets

Prime Day Final Day Live: We Picked Out the 172+ Best Deals Worth Buying Before the Sale Ends

The NotePin S AI wearable, seen here on the wrist of CNET’s Katie Collins, could be really useful for my job. And it’s on sale for Prime Day.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

I took over the role of CNET’s editorial leader earlier this year, and while I’ve participated in Prime Day sales as a TV reviewer and general deals editor here for (literally) decades, this is my first Prime Day as EIC. In case you’re wondering what purchases a person like me is considering this time around, here’s a sampling.

iPad 11-inch A16 ($300): My artistic daughter has been asking for an iPad and if my wife approves, I’ll likely get her this basic version, our top pick for most people. I’d also get her the Apple Pencil (on sale for $60). We’d save both of these for Christmas presents.

Belkin Portable Charger Bank ($38): My family and I always need portable chargers. Half our devices call for Lightning and the other half for USB-C. This does both and I like the built-in cables.

Plaud NotePin S AI Notetaker ($152): In my new role I take more meetings than ever, and I also have plenty of valuable face-to-face conversations in the office and beyond. I currently depend on the Otter app on my phone and Gemini+Google Meet recordings at work to take notes (with appropriate permission, of course). This AI wearable could be my “secret weapon” to consolidate everything in one place.

JBL Go 4 Bluetooth Speaker ($38): I actually bought this one a few days ago when it was $40 – still a great deal, but now even better. It’s no longer one of our best Bluetooth speakers but it’s good enough for my (other) daughter, who wants one for the beach. At this price, I won’t be too annoyed if (when?) it gets destroyed by sand and surf. And yes, I got her the pink one which I know she’ll love. We’re saving this for her birthday.

Anker Solix F2000 portable power station ($749): I own a travel trailer and upgraded to solar with an inverter, but at a recent (shady) campsite, I still had to break out my loud, annoying propane generator. Sure, I could just add more standard 12V LiPo4 batteries, but this portable power station is so much more versatile. It includes a 30A RV outlet, and the wheels make it worth the extra $50 over the Bluetti AC200L. No way my wife approves this one, but it stays on the list anyway because I’m camping tech obsessed.

Categories: Gadgets

Amid Amazon’s Robot Surge, Proteus Charts a New Path Forward

The robots glide across the floor, sometimes pausing to spin a quarter turn or two before resuming their route. They come close to one another but never collide. It’s not choreographed – they’re adapting on the fly – but the movement does have the feel of a ballet.

If ballet dancers were mechanized platforms on wheels, that is. Flat-topped and low to the ground, like oversized bathroom scales granted the gift of movement and the ability to navigate on their own.

These are Amazon’s Proteus robots in action. 

In a spacious Amazon warehouse in London, as in its counterparts around the world, Proteus, Titan and fellow robots are perpetually tasked with fetch quests – finding and retrieving shelving units that contain items that all of us order day in and day out and bringing them to stations where those items are picked, packed and sent on their way.

Some of those days are busier than others – Prime Day sales, for example, when Amazon orders surge. During these periods, fulfillment centers bring on thousands more workers and the robots keep pace.

We visited two Amazon locations – the LCY3 London fulfillment center and the BOS27 robot development facility in Westborough, Massachusetts – to better understand the role robots play in ensuring our packages reach us at speed, both now and in the future.

After decades of humanity’s sci-fi-inspired preoccupation with robots, advances in AI (including large language models and vision language models) over the past five years are increasingly allowing robots to interact with people in more natural ways. For the most part, these real-world robots bear little resemblance to the pop culture depictions, particularly of the humanoid variety. Humanoids are starting to spring up, but most robots around us today are much closer to the type Amazon and other companies are using in industrial settings.

Proteus version two — coming soon to a fulfillment center near you.

Katie Collins/CNET

In Amazon facilities, the robots range from Proteus, which could be a Roomba’s more strapping younger sibling, to Vulcan, a robotic arm with a sense of touch that can pick up objects and understand what it’s handling. Altogether, Amazon has over 1 million robots operating in fulfillment centers, handling tasks such as stowing, picking, sorting and transporting. 

Even though Amazon has been developing robots for years, it’s still only in the early stages of growing its robotics portfolio, said Tye Brady, Amazon’s chief technologist, speaking in London in early June.

What it’s learned so far is that robots make the environment safer, and therefore more efficient. In centers where robots have been deployed, Amazon has seen a 41% reduction in the number of accidents and a 40% increase in the amount of goods delivered. 

“The efficiencies allow us to pass on a low cost to our customers,” said Brady. “The robotic systems allow us to store more goods physically closer to our customers as well.”

Over time, Brady added, the gradual introduction of robots is creating a powerful cycle within Amazon. “We deploy systems, we learn from them, we improve them and then we expand on what they can do for people,” he said.

That’s exactly what it’s done with Proteus, with a new version ready and raring to replace the existing model in fulfillment centers across the globe in the next few years.

Freewheeling Proteus robot gets language skills

Proteus is Amazon’s first fully autonomous robot – a “collaborative robot” designed to work and move around in the same spaces as humans going about their normal activities, not cordoned off behind fences with tightly restricted access for employees. It’s loaded with sensing and navigation capabilities.

“You just put them where the people are, or put the people where they are, and they’ll get right around you,” said Travis Hearn, a QA engineer at Amazon’s BOS27 facility, located 30 miles west of Boston along a once rural road now lined with low-rise industrial and commercial buildings. Cyclone fencing divvies up sectors of a cavernous space, where a diverse array of mobility and manipulation robots go through their paces.

The more diminutive demo area for Proteus, by contrast, is wide open, simulating the fulfillment center terrain it’s built to traverse, potentially several hundred meters from where chutes drop customer packages to where those packages get placed into delivery vehicles.

In a London fulfillment center, an Amazon mobility robot has slid under a rack that it’ll lift and tote across the floor.

Katie Collins/CNET

A Proteus robot – 7.8 inches tall, 31.5 inches long and 29.9 inches wide – can carry up to almost 900 pounds. That’s modest compared to what the larger, lookalike Hercules and Titan mobile robots can carry (1,250 and  2,500 pounds, respectively). Racks holding the goods for delivery get stacked on top, creating tall rectangles that scoot from one station to another.

But Proteus can be much more freewheeling than its fellow bots. It doesn’t need markers on the floor to know where it is or what route to follow. It learns its environment over time. It also recognizes when something – or someone – unexpected is in the way.

“You could think of it like an invisible force field, a bubble around the vehicle. So if somebody stepped in the way of the vehicle, then it would come to a safe stop or slow down,” Scott Dresser, Amazon’s vice president of robotics, said in an interview this week at BOS27. “The intelligence is to find and detect people and safely avoid them.”

The first-generation Proteus has been around for several years, and Amazon has a little over 4,000 of them at 25 sites. Earlier this month, the company introduced the Proteus 2, which gains natural language processing so that people will be able to direct it with voice prompts.

“What makes this possible is a new AI architecture that allows employees to interact with Proteus through natural language using advancements in our generative and agentic AI systems,” said Brady. 

Amazon employees will be able to talk to the robot the same way they do their colleagues, including gesturing – with a casual, “Hey Proteus, could you take this to the corner of the building?” It will be able to figure out route planning and timing and then execute the task on its own.

The second-generation Proteus will be rolled out to Amazon facilities in the coming months.

Robots doing fulfillment work for Amazon orders

The new Proteus will be deployed at LCY3 in the first half of 2027. Meanwhile, Amazon robots are already an essential part of the furniture.

Situated in Dartford, right at London’s eastern-most point, LCY3 is a strategically located fulfillment center on the banks of the River Thames, serving the British capital and beyond. Here, Prime Day orders are picked, packed and shipped across the UK and Europe.

Last year Amazon invested $60 billion across Europe to grow its operations on the continent, and it has ambitious goals for improving delivery times. It’s growing Amazon Now ultra-fast delivery to 20-plus sites in the UK, and it’s accelerating same-day delivery by adding more than 25 sites across Europe this year.

“When we make delivery faster, we are not just moving boxes quicker,” said Mariangela Marseglia, vice president of Amazon European Stores, speaking at the London event. “We are giving people minutes, hours back.” 

Faster delivery, she added, comes from working safer and smarter. This is where the robots come in.

Amazon is experimenting with different robotic systems for different tasks.

Katie Collins/CNET

To hit its delivery goals in Europe, Amazon is investing more than $10 billion to expand and modernize its fulfillment network with robotics across the continent over the next few years. Some of the robotics systems it’s putting in place have been built on suggestions made by Amazon employees, said Armin Cossman, the company’s vice president of operations for Europe.

A new system called Stark, for example, was the idea of an Amazon operations employees in Spain. It picks up huge crates from conveyer belts and places them onto trolleys – repetitive work that puts an enormous amount of strain on the human body. Stark is being piloted in Barcelona, but Amazon plans to bring it to at least 15 more sites across Europe by the end of 2027.

It’s the first successful deployment of collaborative robots in Amazon’s fulfilment network, said Cossman. “Employees work side by side with collaborative technology – the same space working together on the same process.”

On both of our visits to its sites, Amazon was careful to impress upon us that this human-robot collaboration is a key part of its robotics strategy. The company, which has been repeatedly accused of unsafe work conditions in its warehouses and of looking to replace workers with machines, wanted us to know, and you to know, that its robots aren’t here to take its workers’ jobs – just to make them better.

Amazon’s Proteus robots can navigate safely around other robots and humans.

Katie Collins/CNET

“When people have a people versus machines mentality, I find that wrong,” said Brady. “I believe that people, when they have technologies as a tool set, that there’s nothing in this world that they can achieve.”

Amazon has upskilled 700,000 workers, he added, with many more to come. He also anticipates the creation of new jobs linked to robotics as Amazon’s portfolio evolves.

“Robots create jobs. Full stop. It’s a fact,” said Paul Miller, vice president and principal analyst at market researcher Forrester. “New jobs are created to maintain the robots, to manage the robots and to do the new work that’s made possible because automation has lowered the cost, improved the consistency or accelerated the delivery of the tasks people once performed.”

Still, some individuals will be adversely affected by the disruption, Miller added. Those people will need to be supported as they change careers to ensure they’re better off.

At LCY3, there were many workers stationed across the 2 million square feet of operating space, spread out across airy halls with natural light flooding in from the Thames-view windows. Many were packing deliveries or unpacking returns, and some were working with and on the robots.

One key role is that of amnesty responder, whose responsibility it is to rescue items that have fallen from the pods the Proteus robots whisk around. Fallen items are the main point of failure in the Proteus system. When something tumbles out of one of the shelving units, the amnesty responder hits a button and the entire ballet pauses to allow the human in the loop to retrieve the offending object. Only once they’ve exited the arena does the dance continue.

On rare occasions, Amazon acknowledged, a collision occurs. Usually this will result in the Proteus needing a new camera lens, courtesy of the mechanic that’s always on hand. Then it’s back to work.

What next for Amazon robotics

Amazon’s robotics capabilities are evolving fast.

Beyond the walls of its fulfillment centers are delivery robots, such as the Amazon Scout and Amazon Prime Air drone. The latter is already live at eight sites across the US. Meanwhile, the company is testing the service in Darlington in the UK.

The MK30 drone can deliver shoebox-sized packages, allowing Amazon to deliver from a range of 60,000 items within a two-hour window. With its six propellors, a redundancy that allows the drone to continue on even if one fails, it will hover above the ground and drop packages without damaging them (it can detect obstacles on the ground).

Amazon Prime Air is another of the company’s robotics projects.

Katie Collins/CNET

Meanwhile, today’s robots are the preliminaries for what comes next. No, not humanoids, like in Elon Musk’s fever dreams of swarms of Optimus robots doing factory jobs.

Amazon has more modest expectations, targeting somewhere between what it’s doing with robots today and what humanoids may eventually deliver. That could include merging the capabilities of its mobility (e.g. Proteus) and manipulation (e.g. Sparrow) robots. Dresser said Amazon sees paths to using some combination of those technologies.

“How can we move and manipulate in the same robot, and what does that look like? Because we think that that is where our operations are heading,” Dresser said. “I think we’re going to see some new, interesting form factors in the coming months that are going to be in our warehouses very quickly.”

It’s clearly a company learning in real time – designing robots to meet its specific needs, and then refining them based on how they perform when thrust into real-world situations. “The systems we’re building today,” said Brady, “are laying the foundation for what comes next.”

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 26 #1111

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle features a super-tricky purple category, where you’ll need to play with the letters of a word. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Yum!

Green group hint: Think trees.

Blue group hint: Not high up.

Purple group hint: Rainbow elements, but with a twist.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Crunchy snack item.

Green group: Various amounts of wood.

Blue group: Areas of low ground.

Purple group: Colors plus a letter.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 26, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is crunchy snack item. The four answers are chip, cracker, nut and pretzel.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is various amounts of wood. The four answers are board, log, splinter and tree.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is areas of low ground. The four answers are dale, dell, gorge and hollow.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is colors plus a letter. The four answers are bronzer, pinky, redo and tang.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Strands Hints, Answer and Help for June 26 #845- CNET

Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.

Today’s NYT Strands puzzle depends on your memory of a classic folktale you probably heard in your childhood. Some of the answers are difficult to unscramble, so if you need hints and answers, read on.

I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story. 

If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.

Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far

Hint for today’s Strands puzzle

Today’s Strands theme is: “I’ll gobble you up!”

If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Trip trap, trip trap.

Clue words to unlock in-game hints

Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:

  • BEER, BEERS, LEER, LEERS, THERE, HERE, ROLL, STOP, POTS, BRAT, BRATS

Answers for today’s Strands puzzle

These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:

  • PASS, HORNS, THREE, TROLL, BRIDGE, BROTHERS

Today’s Strands spangram

The completed NYT Strands puzzle for June 26, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

Today’s Strands spangram is BILLYGOATSGRUFF. To find it, start with the B that’s the first letter of the top row, and wind down.

Categories: Gadgets

Watch Every Formula 1 Austrian Grand Prix Race This Weekend for Free on Apple TV

Formula One is trying to reach a broader audience this season: It streamed its first race on Netflix; the latest season of the great docu-series F1: Drive to Survive is currently available on both Apple TV and Netflix; and now, another first, you can stream this weekend’s Austrian Grand Prix for free on Apple TV, no subscription required. 

(And purely from a “reaching a broader audience” perspective, it also can’t hurt that one of the most successful drivers on the circuit, Lewis Hamilton, happens to be dating reality TV superstar Kim Kardashian, who has been showing up to many of his races.)

Hamilton, who drives for Ferrari, is currently No. 2 in the drivers’ standings this season behind Kimi Antonelli of Mercedes. Rounding out the top five drivers in the standings this season are George Russell, Charles Leclerc and Lando Norris. You can catch them and the rest of this season’s top drivers competing in this weekend’s Grand Prix. 

Per usual, a Formula 1 race is actually a full weekend of practice and qualification races that culminate in the Grand Prix, and you’ll be able to watch every race of the weekend from Friday’s practices through Sunday’s main event. Here’s what you need to know if you want to tune in.

When is the next Formula 1 race?

The Austrian Grand Prix, which takes place at Red Bull Ring in the Styrian hills of Austria, is scheduled for Sunday, June 28, at 9 a.m. ET (6 a.m. PT, 2 p.m. BST). Practices and a qualifying race are scheduled for Friday and Saturday. 

How to watch the Austrian Grand Prix for free

As of this racing season, Apple TV is the streaming home of F1 races, and fans can catch every race on the platform included with their subscription. This weekend, Apple TV is opening things up to nonsubscribers, too. Anyone can watch all five events at the Red Bull Ring, including Sunday’s Grand Prix. You’ll just need the Apple TV app, which you can download to your smart TV or streaming device.

Apple/Zooey Liao/CNET

An Apple TV subscription costs $13 a month, and new subscribers get a free seven-day trial. To watch this weekend’s F1 races, you’ll just need the Apple TV app; no paid subscription is required. However, if you’d like to watch other Apple TV content such as Friday Night Baseball, Widow’s Bay, Severance and Ted Lasso, you will need the paid Apple TV subscription, which costs $13 per month.

Save money on a subscription with a bundle such as Apple One, StreamSaver or the Apple TV and Peacock bundle.

Austrian Grand Prix weekend race schedule

All times ET.

Friday, June 26

  • Practice 1: 7:30 a.m. on Apple TV 
  • Practice 2: 11 a.m. on Apple TV 

Saturday, June 27

  • Practice 3: 6:30 a.m. on Apple TV 
  • Qualifying: 10 a.m. on Apple TV 

Sunday, June 28

  • Austrian Grand Prix: 9 a.m. on Apple TV 
Categories: Gadgets

Some Apple Products Just Got More Way More Expensive. Are iPhones Next?

Last week, reports began swirling that Apple would soon raise prices due to “RAMageddon,” a term for the storage and memory chip shortage driven by the rapid expansion of AI infrastructure. However, it was unclear when exactly that would happen or which devices would take a hit. 

Now, we have some answers. Apple raised prices on select MacBooks, iPads and HomePods on Thursday. The Wall Street Journal was the first to report the price increases, and Apple confirmed them to CNET. 

But so far, iPhone prices have remained static. 

In a statement to CNET, Apple cited strong demand for storage and memory chips as the reason for the significant price hikes, including increases of up to 33% for some devices. Demand for chips is rising because, in addition to being used in virtually every electronic device, they also power AI compute in data centers.

“We have never seen a component price increase this much, this quickly,” Apple said in its statement. “We have now reached a point where we need to begin raising prices on a number of products, including today’s increases for iPad and Mac.”

Given that every iPhone uses these chips, it’s logical to expect price increases to hit iPhones. The question is when.

“Just because Apple didn’t raise the iPhone’s price today doesn’t mean it won’t,” said Patrick Holland, CNET’s director of content for hardware. “The company typically announces new iPhone models in the fall, and if there is an increase, it would likely come then.”

The rumored iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max models could arrive this September alongside a rumored foldable iPhone, which is expected to start at more than $2,000.

Outside of the Apple store, though, the prices have not yet increased on Apple products, and some are still facing deep discounts during Amazon Prime Day sales, which ends Friday. After the sale, though, prices may increase across the board and keep rising.

Our tech experts believe the new iPhone prices will most likely increase this fall, and other models could face cost hikes as well. 

Apple’s most affordable laptop, the MacBook Neo, increased $100, making it now $699.

Apple/CNET

“It’s entirely possible that the entire iPhone line could experience a price increase this fall too, since the cost of components is still going up,” said Mike Sorrentino, senior editor on CNET’s mobile team. “Normally we’d recommend waiting until the fall to buy a new iPhone, but this year could be an exception if you really do need a new phone since electronics costs are so volatile.”

Should I buy Apple tech now before prices increase more?

Ultimately, whether you purchase tech now comes down to personal budget and needs. 

I, for one, have been wanting to upgrade my iPhone 13. The idea of waiting another year only to face a possible price increase of several hundreds of dollars has made me consider taking the plunge now on an iPhone 17 Pro Max. But even without an increase, a $1,200 phone isn’t cheap. 

This news has me considering whether I’m willing to spend that kind of money on a phone in the first place. With the possibility of more price bumps on the horizon, I’m considering a much more affordable Android phone, like the Pixel 10, for the first time in my adult life.

“If Apple raised iPhone prices, it would be wild and get a lot of attention, even more than the increases on other products we saw today,” Holland said.

Holland also noted that Apple is typically careful with pricing its most popular product but recently raised the “barrier of entry for the iPhone 17 Pro by doing away with a 128GB version that was $999 and making the $1,099 256GB model the cheapest pro phone people could buy.”

Given today’s $100 price increase on the MacBook Neo, the most affordable MacBook, Apple shows it is willing to raise entry-level prices as well.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Battery Life Laptops of 2026

There are a ton of laptops on the market at any given moment, and almost all of those models are available in multiple configurations to match your performance and budget needs. So if you’re feeling overwhelmed with options when looking for a new laptop, it’s understandable. To help simplify things for you, here are the main things you should consider when you start looking.

Price

The search for a new laptop for most people starts with price. If the statistics chipmaker Intel and PC manufacturers hurl at us are correct, you’ll be holding onto your next laptop for at least three years. If you can afford to stretch your budget a little to get better specs, do it. And that stands whether you’re spending $500 or more than $1,000. In the past, you could get away with spending less upfront with an eye toward upgrading memory and storage in the future. But laptop makers are increasingly moving away from making components easily upgradable, so again, it’s best to get as much laptop as you can afford from the start. 

Generally speaking, the more you spend, the better the laptop. That could mean better components for faster performance, a nicer display, sturdier build quality, a smaller or lighter design from higher-end materials or even a more comfortable keyboard. All of these things add to the cost of a laptop. I’d love to say $500 will get you a powerful gaming laptop, for example, but that’s not the case. Right now, the sweet spot for a reliable laptop that can handle average work, home office or school tasks is between $700 and $800 and a reasonable model for creative work or gaming upwards of about $1,000. The key is to look for discounts on models in all price ranges so you can get more laptop for less. 

Operating system

Choosing an operating system is part personal preference and part budget. For the most part, Microsoft Windows and Apple’s MacOS do the same things (except for gaming, where Windows is the winner), but they do them differently. Unless there’s an OS-specific application you need, go with the one you feel most comfortable using. And if you’re not sure which that is, head to an Apple store or a local electronics store and test them out. Or ask friends or family to let you test theirs for a bit. If you have an iPhone or iPad and like it, chances are you’ll like MacOS too. 

But when it comes to price and variety (and, again, PC gaming), Windows laptops win. If you want MacOS, you’re getting a MacBook. While Apple’s MacBooks regularly top our best lists, the least expensive one is the M1 MacBook Air for $999. It is regularly discounted to $750 or $800, but if you want a cheaper MacBook, you’ll have to consider older refurbished ones. 

Windows laptops can be found for as little as a couple of hundred dollars and come in all manner of sizes and designs. Granted, we’d be hard-pressed to find a $200 laptop we’d give a full-throated recommendation to, but if you need a laptop for online shopping, email and word processing, they exist. 

If you are on a tight budget, consider a Chromebook. ChromeOS is a different experience than Windows; make sure the applications you need have a Chrome, Android or Linux app before making the leap. But if you spend most of your time roaming the web, writing, streaming video or using cloud-gaming services, they’re a good fit. 

Size

Remember to consider whether having a lighter, thinner laptop or a touchscreen laptop with a good battery life will be important to you in the future. Size is primarily determined by the screen — hello, laws of physics — which in turn factors into battery size, laptop thickness, weight and price. And keep in mind other physics-related characteristics, such as an ultrathin laptop isn’t necessarily lighter than a thick one, you can’t expect a wide array of connections on a small or ultrathin model and so on. 

Screen

When it comes to deciding on a screen, there are a myriad considerations: how much you need to display (which is surprisingly more about resolution than screen size), what types of content you’ll be looking at and whether you’ll be using it for gaming or creative work.

You really want to optimize pixel density; that is, the number of pixels per inch the screen can display. Though there are other factors that contribute to sharpness, a higher pixel density usually means sharper rendering of text and interface elements. (You can easily calculate the pixel density of any screen at DPI Calculator if you don’t feel like doing the math, and you can also find out what math you need to do there.) We recommend a dot pitch of at least 100 pixels per inch as a rule of thumb.

Because of the way Windows and MacOS scale for the display, you’re frequently better off with a higher resolution than you’d think. You can always make things bigger on a high-resolution screen, but you can never make them smaller — to fit more content in the view — on a low-resolution screen. This is why a 4K, 14-inch screen may sound like unnecessary overkill but may not be if you need to, say, view a wide spreadsheet.

If you need a laptop with relatively accurate color, that displays the most colors possible or that supports HDR, you can’t simply trust the specs — not because manufacturers lie, but because they usually fail to provide the necessary context to understand what the specs they quote mean. You can find a ton of detail about considerations for different types of screen uses in our monitor buying guides for general purpose monitors, creators, gamers and HDR viewing.

Processor

The processor, aka the CPU, is the brains of a laptop. Intel and AMD are the main CPU makers for Windows laptops, with Qualcomm as a new third option with its Arm-based Snapdragon X processors. Both Intel and AMD offer a staggering selection of mobile processors. Making things trickier, both manufacturers have chips designed for different laptop styles, like power-saving chips for ultraportables or faster processors for gaming laptops. Their naming conventions will let you know what type is used. You can head to Intel’s or AMD’s sites for explanations so you get the performance you want. Generally speaking, the faster the processor speed and the more cores it has, the better the performance will be.

Apple makes its own chips for MacBooks, which makes things slightly more straightforward. But, like Intel and AMD, you’ll still want to pay attention to the naming conventions to know what kind of performance to expect. Apple uses its M-series chipsets in Macs. The entry-level MacBook Air uses an M1 chip with an eight-core CPU and seven-core GPU. The current models have M2-series silicon that starts with an eight-core CPU and 10-core GPU and goes up to the M2 Max with a 12-core CPU and a 38-core GPU. Again, generally speaking, the more cores it has, the better the performance. 

Battery life has less to do with the number of cores and more to do with CPU architecture, Arm versus x86. Apple’s Arm-based MacBooks and the first Arm-based Copilot Plus PCs we’ve tested offer better battery life than laptops based on x86 processors from Intel and AMD.

Graphics

The graphics processor handles all the work of driving the screen and generating what gets displayed, as well as speeding up a lot of graphics-related (and increasingly, AI-related) operations. For Windows laptops, there are two types of GPUs: integrated (iGPU) or discrete (dGPU). As the names imply, an iGPU is part of the CPU package, while a dGPU is a separate chip with dedicated memory (VRAM) that it communicates with directly, making it faster than sharing memory with the CPU.

Because the iGPU splits space, memory and power with the CPU, it’s constrained by the limits of those. It allows for smaller, lighter laptops, but doesn’t perform nearly as well as a dGPU. In fact, there are some games and creative software that won’t run unless they detect a dGPU or sufficient VRAM. Most productivity software, video streaming, web browsing and other nonspecialized apps will run fine on an iGPU, though.

For more power-hungry graphics needs, like video editing, gaming and streaming, design and so on, you’ll need a dGPU; there are only two real companies that make them, Nvidia and AMD, with Intel offering some based on the Xe-branded (or the older UHD Graphics branding) iGPU technology in its CPUs.

Memory

For memory, we highly recommend 16GB of RAM (8GB absolute minimum). RAM is where the operating system stores all the data for currently running applications, and it can fill up fast. After that, it starts swapping between RAM and SSD, which is slower. A lot of sub-$500 laptops have 4GB or 8GB, which in conjunction with a slower disk can make for a frustratingly slow Windows laptop experience. Also, many laptops now have the memory soldered onto the motherboard. Most manufacturers disclose this, but if the RAM type is LPDDR, assume it’s soldered and can’t be upgraded. 

However, some PC makers will solder memory on and also leave an empty internal slot for adding a stick of RAM. You may need to contact the laptop manufacturer or find the laptop’s full specs online to confirm. And check the web for user experiences, because the slot may still be hard to get to, it may require nonstandard or hard-to-get memory or other pitfalls.

Storage

You’ll still find cheaper hard drives in budget laptops and larger hard drives in gaming laptops, but faster solid-state drives have all but replaced hard drives in laptops. They can make a big difference in performance. But not all SSDs are equally speedy, and cheaper laptops typically have slower drives; if the laptop has only 4GB or 8GB of RAM, it may end up swapping to that drive and the system may slow down quickly while you’re working. 

Get what you can afford, and you likely need less than you think. If you need to go with a smaller drive, you can always add an external drive or two down the road or use cloud storage to bolster a small internal drive. The one exception is gaming laptops: We don’t recommend going with less than a 512GB SSD unless you really like uninstalling games every time you want to play a new game. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 26 #641

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

World Cup watchers, there’s another category for you in today’s Connections: Sports Edition. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Hoosier schools.

Green group hint: Fore!

Blue group hint: Gridiron guides.

Purple group hint: Stopping the scoring.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: Indiana colleges.

Green group: Golf equipment brands.

Blue group: First-year NFL head coaches.

Purple group: USMNT World Cup goalkeepers. 

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 26, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is Indiana colleges. The four answers are Butler, Indiana, Notre Dame and Purdue.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is golf equipment brands. The four answers are Callaway, Ping, PXG and Titleist.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is first-year NFL head coaches. The four answers are Brady, Hafley, Minter and Monken.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is USMNT World Cup goalkeepers. The four answers are Freese, Friedel, Howard and Meola.

Categories: Gadgets

Here We Go Again: Microsoft Raises Xbox Prices Amid Memory Shortage

Microsoft announced yet another price increase for the Xbox Series X and S consoles, starting Aug. 1. This is the third time Microsoft has hiked the price of its Xbox consoles since May 2025, another example of gaming hardware increasing in price due to the ongoing global memory shortage.

Xbox console prices are jumping $100 for the 512GB model and $150 for the 1TB models. Microsoft says it will discontinue the 2TB version of the Xbox Series X. Here’s the new breakdown of prices:

  • Series S 512GB: $500
  • Series S 1TB: $600
  • Series X 1TB digital: $750
  • Series X 1TB disc drive: $800

Microsoft’s blog post said the company spent several months working with suppliers, hoping to avoid another price increase. “Unfortunately, console storage and memory prices have increased by more than 2.5x, and we expect another doubling by the fall of 2027.” It noted that the the components crisis — which was also behind the latest price hike for Apple products — is hitting consoles particularly hard.

That same blog post introduced buy now, pay later and zero-interest financing options, which the company framed as “programs to make XBOX consoles more accessible.” 

Microsoft initially raised the price of the Xbox Series X|S back in May 2025, shortly after President Trump instituted new tariffs on products manufactured in other countries. The company raised the prices again last October, likely due to the beginning of the current memory shortage

Both Nintendo and Sony also re-evaluated the pricing of their respective consoles due to the tariffs and the cost of memory. The PS5 saw its price jump twice: The first came last August, followed by another in March. Nintendo will increase the price of the Switch 2 in September, and it already hiked up the price of the original Switch last August. 

New products aren’t immune, either. On Monday, Valve revealed the price of its PC gaming console, the Steam Machine, which starts at $1049. The price tag shocked many gamers, as the company had telegraphed that its new hardware should be similarly priced as other home consoles when it was first revealed last November. Instead, it’s $150 more expensive than the PS5 Pro. Valve also hiked the price of its Steam Deck portable console last month.

For more, check out our best budget laptops and whether iPhones might be next on the price hike list.

Categories: Gadgets

These Products Dodged Apple’s Price Hikes. Our Expert Explains Why

Apple is the latest to join the list of tech giants that are increasing product prices because of the rising price of components. But while it increased prices Thursday on items like the budget-friendly MacBook Neo (now $699) and iPad (now $449), a few popular Apple products were unaffected — notably the iPhone and the Apple Watch

Other products that appeared not to see price increases included Apple Displays, the Apple Pencil and other accessories like phone cases and keyboards. 

Since Apple cites the RAM shortage for the price hikes, it’s surprising that the iPhone and Apple Watch — both of which are essentially little computers — still have the same prices we saw yesterday. 

Apple could mark up more prices soon

So why is it that two of Apple’s flagship devices and accessories, like AirPods, escaped the markup? CNET Editor-at-Large Scott Stein has a thought: “They’re waiting to rip that band-aid off in the fall,” Stein said. 

Historically, Apple has announced new products, like a new iPhone, at an event in September. Stein speculates that we could see a price jump when new devices are released, and other devices won’t be exempt over time. 

“I don’t think a single Apple product is going to survive price increases,” Stein said. The sweeping price increases lead Stein to believe that more devices will cost more over time. Especially since most of Apple’s devices use chips that are in high demand.

Apple didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment. 

Future prices depend on the chips 

The future of prices could depend on chips being sourced and availability, Stein said. Apple reportedly has a preliminary chip agreement with Intel amid the chip shortage and high demand with its current supplier, Taiwan Semiconductor. Whether we see price increases on other products in the future will be up to Apple. 

For now, there’s still time to get a deal on an Apple product, but not for long. Some retailers, like Amazon, still have some of Apple’s original prices listed. It’s unclear when we’ll see the price increases across retailers. However, Amazon has a few Apple devices on sale, like the 11-inch iPad Pro and the iPad mini. But don’t wait too long because Amazon’s Prime Day sale ends June 26. 

Categories: Gadgets

Peppa Pig Contract Backlash Is the Latest Over the Use of AI in Entertainment

The relationship between the entertainment industry and AI is again being tested. Hollywood industry news site Deadline reported that the owner of the animated series Peppa Pig is getting pushback after asking the show’s child voice actors to sign contracts that would allow for AI recreations of their voices.

Peppa Pig, which runs on Nickelodeon as well as streaming services such as Paramount Plus and Amazon’s Prime Video, is wildly popular and in its 11th season. It is owned by the toy company Hasbro. 

The Deadline story centers on an open letter from the Agents of Young Performers Association, a UK-based group that represents child performers. The letter states that a long-running animated TV series “has offered contracts to child voice actors insisting that they agree to the use of AI thus allowing them to use the child’s voice in all commercial assets within their franchise.”

The letter does not mention Peppa Pig by name, but Deadline said industry sources confirmed that it is in reference to that show.

At issue is the matter of consent. “Children cannot provide fully informed legal consent and a parent or guardian’s approval should never be used as a blanket licence to capture, clone, train, or reuse a child’s voice indefinitely,” the letter stated. “Any agreement involving a child’s voice should be fully exempt from all AI usage.”

Hasbro acknowledged the letter’s existence.

“Hasbro is aware of the open letter circulating regarding AI clauses in children’s performance contracts. We are not able to comment on specific negotiations or contractual arrangements,” it said via email in response to a query from CNET.

The toymaker did speak to the larger topic more generally. “The protection of child performers is core to who Hasbro is, it’s part of our DNA. As industry standards around AI continue to evolve, we are committed to engaging with this issue in a responsible and transparent manner,” the statement said.

A representative for AYPA told CNET that it was not confirming the identity of the “international children’s franchise producing a long running animated television series” referenced in the letter, which by intent did not name a specific studio or project.

“Here in the UK, children are not permitted to join Equity until the age of 10 and yet parents of child actors who are not able to join the union for support and guidance are being asked to sign away their rights.  A Non AI clause should be standard in all contracts for child actors,” AYPA’s email said.

AI and Hollywood’s fraught relationship

The response to the reported contract wording is another episode in a tumultuous saga over the use of AI in movies, television, music and video games. Deadline’s story came out in the same week that the movie studio A24 announced a deal with Google DeepMind to develop AI filmmaking tools, a move that has some fans of indie cinema seeing red.

AI has been the subject of Hollywood strikes over how the technology will be used in scripts and to replicate the likenesses of performers. As AI models have gotten more sophisticated, it’s stirred anxiety over whether, or when, it would supplant the work of talent and crew across movies and television. AI can speed up production and save money for studios, but those efficiency gains could potentially put many people in the entertainment industry out of work.

When artists or studios aren’t transparent about their use of AI, as happened last year with a Will Smith video that included AI-generated concert footage, the backlash can be swift.

Music companies are also fighting their own battles over AI deepfakes on music platforms and on social media, while also licensing the use of music from major artists for AI remixes, as UMG is doing.

The video game industry, too, is at a crossroads. Some studios and developers swear they have no plans to use AI in any stage of game development, while others are deploying generative AI to create game assets or supplement voice talent in their titles.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple’s Price Increases Extend to Refurbished Macs and iPads

Apple’s Certified Refurbished store has been a sanctuary for people who balk at the prices of new Apple products, but it provided little shelter from today’s increases across many of its lines. Reconditioned items are also more expensive.

Outgoing Apple CEO Tim Cook warned last week that price increases were coming due to the scarcity of memory components that are being reserved for building out AI infrastructure.

The stock of Apple’s refurbished store fluctuates wildly, but comparing a few current items as of June 25 with listings found at the Internet Archive’s Wayback Machine reveals price bumps of around 6% to 15%.

Read more: Apple Price Increase: How Much Every iPad, Mac and Home Device Costs Now

For example, a refurbished 15-inch MacBook Air M4 with 16GB of memory and 256GB of storage cost $929 on June 14, and now lists for $1,019, an increase of $90. It originally sold for $1,199.

A 14-inch MacBook Pro M5 with 16GB of memory and 512GB of storage was $1,359 on June 14, and now lists for $1,439, an $80 jump. Its original price was $1,599.

Kicking these prices up by less than $100 doesn’t seem like a big difference, except that these are machines with existing memory and processors — Apple likely isn’t sourcing new components. That said, there’s no visibility into what goes into each reconditioned product, so it’s possible these items did get new logic boards. But they could also have needed new screens or replacement cases.

Apple’s Certified Refurbished store can garner great deals on reconditioned equipment, but it, too, is seeing price increases.

Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET

Refurbished iMac models see a more substantial increase. A refurbished 24-inch iMac M4 with 16GB of memory and 256GB of storage was $1,099 on June 14 and now costs $1,269, a $170 difference.

Macs aren’t the only refurb products seeing higher costs. A 13-inch iPad Pro M4 (Wi-Fi model) with 256GB of storage sold for $1,019 on June 14 and is now $150 more expensive at $1,169.

The prices for new Apple TV and HomePod configurations also saw increases, but as of June 25, Apple did not list any refurbished inventory.

These are the costs for Apple’s own Certified Refurbished store. From a cursory look, it appears the price jumps haven’t migrated to other stores that sell refurbished Apple products, such as Best Buy. Those also include older models that can be great deals if you don’t need this year’s or even last year’s machine.

If you’re looking to buy one of the affected Apple products, Amazon’s Prime Day prices have not incorporated any of Apple’s new pricing so far.

An Apple representative didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple Price Increase: How Much Every iPad, Mac and Home Device Costs Now

It’s a bad day for folks looking to upgrade their Apple devices anytime soon. The $4 trillion tech company announced on Thursday that it is raising prices on a wide range of products, from iPads to Macs and home devices.

One of the bigger sticker shocks is with the MacBook Neo. Released earlier this year, Apple touted the new laptop as its budget-friendly Chromebook competitor, perfect for students. Now, you’ll have to shell out $699, a $100 increase from its initial $599.

Outgoing CEO Tim Cook hinted earlier this month that price hikes were in the works, calling them “unavoidable,” pointing to the boom in artificial intelligence and its corresponding compute requirements. 

Supply chain shortages have been caused by record-high demand for memory and storage chips in big AI data centers. That’s led several big tech companies to raise their prices, from Microsoft to Samsung.

Despite not being one of the biggest developers of AI software — like OpenAI, Anthropic or Google — Apple isn’t immune to rising production costs. The iPhone maker struck a deal in May with Intel to produce some of its chips. But production challenges didn’t stop Apple from reporting a 17% spike in revenue in its most recent earnings call.

We’re tracking all the biggest Apple sales for Amazon Prime Day, which may help ease the pain of these price hikes. Here’s a full breakdown of the Apple iPads, Macs and home devices that are getting higher price tags.

Every Apple device that’s getting a price increase

We pulled the data so you don’t have to search. These are the base prices, meaning that opting for a device with more storage, an Apple Care subscription or other add-ons could make your final total even higher. We compared with what these base products cost at launch.

June 2026 Apple price increases

Original priceNew priceiMac $1,299$1,499MacBook Neo $599$699MacBook Air (13-inch) $1,099$1,299MacBook Air (15-inch) $1,299$1,499MacBook Pro (14-inch) $1,699$1,999MacBook Pro (16-inch) $2,699$2,999Mac Studio (M3 Ultra) $3,999$5,299Mac Studio (M4) $1,999$2,499Vision Pro $3,499$3,699iPad mini $499$599iPad Pro (11-inch) $999$1,199iPad Air (11-inch) $599$749iPad $349$449Apple TV $129$199HomePod $299$349HomePod mini $99$129

For more, check out our roundup of the best MacBook alternatives and the best tablets.

Categories: Gadgets

This Lab Winner Window AC Cools My Old Home in the Summer, and It’s $60 Off During Prime Day

CNET’s key takeaways

  • The Windmill AC normally starts at $339 for 6,000 BTUs, but you can find it on sale right now at Windmill’s website or Amazon for $279, ($60 off). 
  • Not only is the Windmill AC the easiest unit I’ve ever installed, it’s the only AC unit I’ve tried that effectively kept my older and not well-insulated home cool during heat waves. 
  • Bonus: It’s actually stylish. (I still would have paid for an ugly one that works.) 

There are a lot of things I love about living in an older home — my 100-year-old rental has original 1920s art deco tile, tall ceilings, and a lot more character than you might find in a newly constructed house. One thing it doesn’t have? Central air conditioning.

With record-breaking heat waves regularly hitting in my area, I needed to find window ACs that could cool my poorly insulated 2,500 square foot home.

I hunted for the right one for years. Every summer I’d buy and test out new window air conditioners, only to feel frustrated by how poorly they worked. I’d sell them at the end of the season, and restart the cycle again the following year.

Finally, after years of sweating through sweltering three-digit temperatures and overbearing humidity, I found it: the Windmill WhisperTech window air conditioner. This innovative powerhouse was so effective at cooling my oversized master bedroom, that I eventually bought two more. These three AC units effectively cool my 2,500-square-foot Philadelphia row home even during intense heat waves. And they look great while they do it.

The Windmill AC isn’t the cheapest option on the market, but for me, it was well worth every cent. If you’re also fed up with sweating indoors, here’s why you need to try this game-changing AC.

I’ve had the 12,000 BTU Windmill WhisperTech air conditioner for three years, and it keeps our master bedroom comfortable during intense temperatures. (It’s stylish, too!)

Courtney Johnston/CNET

My experience with the Windmill air conditioner

I was skeptical about the Windmill window air conditioner when it first arrived. It was lighter than other units I’d tried out (I could pick it up myself), so I panicked, thinking there was no way this one could cool our south-facing 350 plus square foot bedroom.

But within minutes, my partner and I had the unit installed and running. Only a few hours later, our bedroom felt less like a sauna and dropped to 68 degrees Fahrenheit — a feat that hadn’t happened with prior ACs. The humidity, which often jumped up to 65% or higher on humid days also dropped to below 50%. I was equally impressed by how well it maintained its set temperature, too. Especially during intense heat waves. 

The very next day, I ordered a second unit for the other end of our house.

Note: CNET does scientific testing on window ACs at our Louisville testing labs. In our recent comparison of window and portable AC units, the Windmill 8k was found to be the top-performing window AC unit.

What makes the Windmill AC different?

Windmill air conditioners have a few unique features, but what prompted me to add one to my cart was the unit’s cooling design. Windmill ACs push cool air out of the top of the unit at a 45 degree angle for better cooling. After trying several big name window ACs that pushed air out horizontally, I was excited to find that this feature actually cooled a second-story room with a tall ceiling; the air seemed to circulate better since the unit pushes the cold air up, rather than out and down.

No need to hide the ugly Window AC

I’d deal with an ugly air conditioner as long as it cooled my home. But I’m glad I don’t have to. The Windmill air conditioner has a sleek, minimal design that many of my friends and family have commented on. The unit has an attractive front panel design that hides its air filter and houses tiny buttons that are nearly hidden at the top of the panel. 

The LED display lights automatically dim, so you don’t have to worry about any visual disruptions at night. It also comes with side panel covers that offer extra insulation and a seamless look.

Windmill also offers colorful magnetic panel fronts to add some whimsy to your window, if you’re into that kind of thing. 

It’s the quietest AC I’ve ever owned

Although it wasn’t a main selling point for me, I’m now a huge fan of Windmill’s Whispertech quiet cooling technology. My first priority was an air conditioner that made my house feel comfortable; I just assumed that would come with some noise. The specs list it as 42 decibels — softer than the average household refrigerator. I found my Windmill units comfortably quiet, even after regularly using two for almost three years.

My partner and I are able to watch TV at a normal volume, talk to each other from other ends of the house and jump on work calls without the noise bothering us. I actually enjoy the white noise effect it offers in our bedroom at night.

I do sometimes find the running noise distracting when I’m on work calls, but that would happen with any AC since my window is right next to my desk. This typically only happens if it’s on high or medium, so I just switch it to low or eco-mode to solve this problem.

You can install it in minutes (really)

I’ve installed three of these units in multiple homes and windows, and it only takes me five to ten minutes to set up. That’s because this unit comes pre-assembled. There’s no attaching panels or screwing brackets onto the base before installing it.

All you have to do is add the window foam to the sides of your windows, set the unit onto your window pane, expand the side panels, shut your window, then secure it with screws. If you can’t drill into your window panes or if you rent (like me) and don’t want to, you can secure it to a block of wood. 

I usually have my partner help me install this (one of us lifts while the other opens and lowers the window), but I’ve successfully installed it on my own in the past. 

It comes with a smart app and voice control

Windmill will send a remote with your window AC, but if you have multiple units to control, I highly recommend using Windmill’s smart app. It takes just a few minutes to install and register your device (they send a QR code you can use to make set up even easier). 

The Windmill app makes it easy to control settings for multiple window air conditioners in one spot.

Screenshot by Courtney Johnston

The app’s easy to use and helpful if you leave the house and forget to adjust the temperature before you go. It does occasionally show the wrong temperatures, though. I had an issue with my office AC’s temperature on the app showing as 61 degrees when it clearly wasn’t, but a quick reset of the AC solved that.

Similar to a smart thermostat, you can create automations to lower or raise the temperature, speed or even shut the unit off at certain times of day. It’s a great tool if you want to raise the temperature while you’re at work or away for a weekend.

I don’t use the voice control with Alexa feature, but if you’re into that, it seems easy to set up.

Eco mode keeps my energy bill low

Since I have gas heat, my electric bill tends to go up in the summer when I’m running the AC. While that’s still the case, I don’t worry about large energy bill surges anymore. Windmill’s eco-mode helps my rooms stay cool without causing a surprise electric bill. 

Windmill air conditioners are Energy Star rated, with up to a 15 Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio rating. To earn an Energy Star rating, air conditioners need a CEER rating of 12 or higher. 

Solves the storage dilemma

I’m lucky to have a basement where I can store my air conditioners when I’m not using them. But if you don’t have an extra closet or garage to house these units during the winter, Windmill sells winter covers that will protect your unit, keep your house insulated, and add a pop of color (if you choose) to your window.

I like this idea, although the current options are fairly limited and I don’t personally love any of the color schemes they offer.

The specs

  • 6,000, 8,000, 10,000 and 12,000 BTU units available. 
  • Pre-assembled for easy installation
  • WhisperTech quiet technology
  • The 6,000 BTU unit is 42 decibels
  • Comes with side panel covers for extra insulation and a seamless finish
  • Airflow at a 45 degree angle
  • Auto-dimming LED lights
  • Three cooling options
  • Three fan speeds
  • Eco-mode
  • Remote control
  • Smart app and voice control
  • One-year limited warranty
  • The 6,000 BTU unit retails for $350, but we usually see it on sale for  $340. The 12,000 BTU retails for $629 and often on sale for $589. 

CNET’s buying advice

I recommend Windmill window air conditioners to everyone I know who’s looking for one. My experience with the three units I own has been nothing but positive. They’ve outperformed GE and Midea air conditioners I’ve tried in the past and work well to keep my humid row house cool and comfortable.

The biggest drawback of the Windmill air conditioner is its price. While the cost is on par with competitors like July (yes, they’re an AC company named after one of the hottest months of the year) and Midea, you can find more affordable options. Paying $630 for a 12,000 BTU window air conditioner is a steep price, but you can frequently find them on sale at Windmill’s website or at Amazon, Home Depot, Lowes, P.C. Richards and Costco.

If a Windmill AC isn’t in your budget, don’t go into debt to buy one. Instead consider the GE 5,000 BTU mechanical window air conditioner, CNET’s best budget pick, the GE AHEC05AC window AC for around $160-170. 

Categories: Gadgets

AI-Powered War Is Coming. This Fight Over a Data Center Just Made That Case

If a federal court decides to shutter a data center in Memphis, Tennessee, it “directly threatens” the US government’s ability to protect our national security, according to the Trump administration’s chief digital and artificial intelligence officer.

The case began in April when the NAACP filed a class action lawsuit against xAI, Elon Musk’s AI company. The complaint alleges that xAI’s Colossus 2 data center violates the Clean Air Act. The data center includes a power plant in Mississippi with 27 gas turbines. Those turbines, which the nation’s oldest civil rights organization says are operating without the necessary federal permits, can produce significant pollution, which poses serious health risks for nearby Black communities in Tennessee and Mississippi.

The US government filed a motion on June 15, encouraging the court to dismiss the case. The Memphis data center powers xAI’s ability to provide AI to its customers, one of which the US government, Cameron Stanley, the Department of Defense’s chief digital and artificial intelligence officer, wrote in the filing. 

xAI’s data center operation in Memphis, Tennessee.

Steve Jones/Southern Environmental Law Center

The US government uses a specifically created, government version of Grok, called Grok Gov Model. That AI tech is integrated into the Maven Smart System, an AI-powered military system created by mega-defense contractor Palantir and used by the US and NATO. The Maven system is used in “targeting, intelligence, readiness and recruitment,” Stanley wrote. 

While the defense department has struck deals with eight major AI companies, Grok is one of three AI enterprise providers that are “equipped to sustain mission-critical operations” for secret and top secret missions. Grok has features that other frontier AI models do not, Stanley wrote. For this reason, the government says, Grok AI is essential for national security. 

Stanley cited Grok’s prowess in Operation Epic Fury, the US-Israeli bombing campaign against Iran that began in February. US defense systems that have integrated Grok AI “enabled US forces to deploy over 2,000 munitions to 2,000 distinct targets within 96 hours during Operation Epic Fury, a testament to the greatly increased operational efficiency made possible by the Grok Gov Model,” Stanley wrote. 

Stanley doesn’t clarify how exactly Grok was used during Operation Epic Fury, and the Department of Defense declined to comment. xAI did not respond to requests for more information on how its Grok Gov Model works.

Community backlash against the rising flood of data centers has been swift and fierce, but this new development in the NAACP’s case raises a new question: If AI is used in warfare, are data centers essential for national security? 

AI is already being used in the military and defense industries. The Defense Department’s chief technology officer said in May that AI use in the agency was up 1,775% over the previous year; Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth said in a statement in January that the US will “become an ‘AI-first’ warfighting force across all domains.” 

While AI can be used for general business tasks — the kinds that you and I can use AI for, like data management and writing emails — defense leaders have said AI holds promise in improving surveillance, targeting and autonomous weapons. And the government’s spending reflects those goals, with the defense department adding a $13.4 billion line item to its 2026 budget solely for autonomous systems.

But there are still many unanswered questions about the role that new AI technology — and the data centers that power it — should play in defense and military operations.

The clash of environmental law and national security

In response to Stanley’s statement, the NAACP said it plans to continue to “stand up for democracy” against what it called bullying and authoritarianism. 

“At a time when the ultra-rich seem to be protected and supported by some of our government entities, it is important that polluting industries don’t get to benefit at the expense of the health of Black communities,” Abre’ Conner, NAACP director of environmental and climate justice, said in a statement.

There are a lot of concerns about the environmental impact that data centers have on the communities they’re moving into. Data centers require billions of gallons of clean water to cool servers, use a lot of electricity to keep them running and their outputs have been known to contaminate the surrounding neighborhoods. Nearby communities have been challenging data centers’ operational permits on these environmental grounds. 

Watch this: AI Data Center Infrastructure Plans Continue to Draw Controversy

01:58

The Environmental Protection Agency and the US government often participate in environmental litigation. But the government’s action here isn’t typical, Vincent Joralemon, law professor at the University of California, Berkeley, says.

“The more unusual thing here is the government intervening on the side of a private polluter to dismiss a citizen suit entirely,” Joralemon says. “As far as I know, this is the first time the federal government has intervened in a Clean Air Act citizen suit against a private company to argue the case must be thrown out.”

The Clean Air Act establishes a federal standard for the acceptable amount of emissions of hazardous air pollutants from stationary and mobile sources. Big projects like data centers need government permits to operate, which include confirmation that a company has implemented the “best available pollution controls.” A key point of the NAACP’s argument is that xAI doesn’t have these permits.

Tennessee state representative Justin Pearson speaks at a rally in opposition to Elon Musk’s data center in Memphis on April 25, 2025.

Brandon Dill for The Washington Post via Getty Images

There is ample precedent for enforcing the Clean Air Act and operational permits that likely strengthen the NAACP’s arguments, Joralemon says. But the “novel” national security argument from the government could affect how the court resolves the case.

“Even a judge who finds a violation might hesitate to order a full shutdown [of the data center] if the government frames it as cutting power to defense-critical AI and could instead narrow the remedy or compliance obligations,” Joralemon says. Appeals, no matter the ruling, are likely, he notes.

National security concerns have won out over environmental ones in the past, like in a 2008 US Supreme Court case that found Navy sonar activity was permissible, despite the harm to marine life. These defense carve-outs make sense in principle, Joralemon says. 

But, like other experts, he’s “somewhat skeptical of all AI companies claiming national security when it is convenient.”

AI in the military

The military’s adoption of new technology — from land mines to nuclear weapons to drones — has long stirred fear and raised the stakes for warfare and its aftermath. The advent of AI has turbocharged the debate in recent years. 

Experts raised concerns at the beginning of the year when the Pentagon got into a public feud with Anthropic after the AI developer refused to allow its Claude AI to be used for surveillance and autonomous weaponry. 

President Trump slammed the company, calling it “woke,” and since then, the Defense Department says it has transitioned two-thirds of its AI activities away from Anthropic’s tools to other models. OpenAI, which makes ChatGPT, picked up a Pentagon contract shortly after Anthropic bowed out.

Dario Amodei, Anthropic’s CEO, pulled the company out of talks with the US government to provide it Claude AI.

Chris Ratcliffe/Bloomberg via Getty Images

Governmental AI can be used “anywhere from the back office to the battlefield,” says Michael Horowitz, political science professor at the University of Pennsylvania and former deputy assistant secretary of defense.

“There are military uses of AI for logistics or HR that look like the uses of any company in America, all the way up to potential uses of AI closer to the battlefield in helping commanders more quickly and accurately identify potential targets,” Horowitz says.

AI has been powering some government activities for a while now. Defense employees using the Maven Smart System use almost 2 billion tokens every day, Stanley wrote in his statement. Tokens are a basic measuring unit for AI processing; having a chatbot write a one-paragraph email might take 400 tokens, for example. Vibe coding an app would take significantly more, because it’s a more involved and compute-intensive process.

Weapons targeting systems are one area of military activity where AI integration is being considered. This image is from March during the US’ Operation Epic Fury against Iran.

The White House/US Central Command

While Grok is one of three AI models being used to do this work, it’s unique in the AI industry. Grok is known for having lax safeguards compared to those applied by other AI companies. It made millions of sexual deepfakes earlier this year, and before that, it spewed racism and anti-semitism, even referring to itself as “MechaHitler.” The government’s Grok may be in a different harness than the one used to abuse people online, but it’s based on the same commercial architecture.

Stanley didn’t explicitly say Grok or other AI was used in targeting and missile deployment during Operation Epic Fury, but an AI-powered version of that future isn’t out of the realm of possibility. These systems need to have stringent safety guardrails. We’ve already seen how fatal it can be when these operations go awry. 

A missile launch done in March as part of the the US’ Operation Epic Fury.

The White House/US Central Command

In March, shortly after the Pentagon’s dust-up with Anthropic, the US launched a missile strike against an Iranian elementary school, killing 156 people, 120 of whom were children. In the days following the strike, there were concerns that AI was used in the mission. An early analysis from the New York Times found that it was outdated location information that led to the deadly mistake — human error, not AI. The US’ internal investigation is ongoing, but members of Congress have been demanding more info on the role of AI in the strike from Hegseth and the department.

Having humans in the loop to make decisions about military activity will be essential to any AI-powered defense system. 

“We never want to be in a condition where AI is making the decision about the use of force — that’s up to commanders and operators,” Horowitz says.

If AI is essential, so are data centers

If AI is part of modern war, the energy sources powering it are essential — that’s the argument the government is making in its defense of xAI. Data centers must be recognized as “a long-term strategic tool vital to maintaining our technological advantage against adversaries,” Stanley wrote.

Right now, these data centers are powering all of our AI activity. The demand for AI is so high that AI companies are racing to build more — there are over 900 operational data centers in the US now, with over 1,200 more planned, according to data center tracking firm Clearview. All this energy is needed for AI companies to build and train new, more advanced AI models for all of us to use. 

The Trump administration is investing in using AI for its military operations, and data centers are a key piece of that puzzle. Because of that, “It’s likely that [data centers] will be thought about in the same breadth as critical infrastructure,” Horowitz says, similar to the electrical grid, cell networks and oil refineries.

President Trump was joined by tech leaders, OpenAI CEO Sam Altman (left) and Google DeepMind CEO Demis Hassabis (right) at the G7 conference in June 2026.

Julia Demaree Nikhinson/Pool/AFP via Getty Images

If these AI systems and data centers are essential to national security, then there is an argument that they deserve government oversight, Joralemon says. But so far, the Trump administration has been hesitant to enact rules or laws around AI, lest it slow down American innovation compared to Chinese AI labs. 

So if warfare is getting an AI update, powered by data centers and potentially at the expense of the environment and the health of communities, then the systems need to work. The success or failure of these systems will have grave consequences.

“No one wants their technologies to work more than militaries because technologies that aren’t safe don’t work, and…it’s soldiers whose lives are on the line,” says Horowitz. “So the American military should be highly incentivized to get the integration of AI into military operations right.”

Categories: Gadgets

Apple raises Mac and iPad prices, spares iPhone for now

Amid a worldwide memory shortage driven by the AI buildout, Apple is raising prices of its Mac and iPad lineups, as reported by Bloomberg. For the moment, there is no rise in iPhone prices, but there is a possibility that it could arrive later in the year.

The new entrant to the MacBook lineup, MacBook Neo, will now cost $699 instead of $599. The company also raised the base MacBook Air’s price from $1,099 to $1,299 and the MacBook Pro’s price from $1,699 to $1,999. The desktop-class Mac Studio now costs $2,499, up from $1,999

iPads also received a price bump: the Air now costs $749, up from $599, and the Pro now costs $1,199, up from $999. The base iPad model with the A16 chip now costs $449 instead of $349, and the iPad Mini with the A17 chip costs $599 instead of $499.

Apple’s smart home devices are costlier as well. The standard HomePod is up from $299 to $349, HomePod Mini is up from $99 to $129, and the Apple TV box is up from $99 to $129.

The company’s Vision Pro headset is now priced at $3,699, from its already costly tag of $3,499.

“The consumer electronics industry is facing an unprecedented challenge. The rapid expansion of AI data centers has created an extraordinary surge in demand for memory and storage. We have never seen a component price increase this much, this quickly,” the company told CNBC in a statement.

“We know this is not welcome news, and we are working tirelessly to find solutions,” it added.

Last week, Tim Cook told the Wall Street Journal that price hikes for Apple’s products were “unavoidable,” as memory and storage component prices keep rising because of the AI boom. During the company’s earnings call in April, Cook alluded that for iPhones, the company was facing constraints on the main processing chip rather than memory. He also said that it “may take several months to reach supply-demand balance” for Mac Studio and Mac Mini.

Apple discontinued the base 256GB $599 Mac Mini in May, and made the $799 base model with 512GB storage the base model. The M4 Pro configuration is now $1,599, up from $1,399.

In March, analyst firm Counterpoint noted that smartphone DRAM prices have jumped by 50%, and NAND Flash storage prices have jumped by over 90% quarter-over-quarter in Q1 2026.

“We have reached a point where absorbing memory price hikes is impossible unless one wishes to run a business at a major loss. Memory prices have increased more than fourfold since Q4 2025, and this single component has eroded the profit margins of most consumer electronics players. Apple has done well to hold prices steady until now, though it hinted at increases last week,” Tarun Pathak, Research Director at Counterpoint, told TechCrunch.

“The growing demand for AI infrastructure has fundamentally changed the memory supply chain, meaning higher BOM (Bill of Materials) costs are now a lasting challenge. We also expect other PC and tablet OEMs to follow Apple’s example. They may raise prices on select products, cut discounts, or adjust their product lines to focus more on premium devices,” he added.

While the AI chip crunch is affecting consumer companies, suppliers like Micron are reaping the benefits. The company clocked in a 4x jump in year-over-year revenue in its most recent earnings.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

I Tested Leica’s SL3-P Camera in Scotland. These Are My Favorite Photos.

The SL3-P is Leica’s latest addition to its interchangeable lens mirrorless camera lineup and I’ve been able to spend some time testing it. Sitting right in between its siblings, the SL3 and the SL3-S, the P version is best thought of as the Goldilocks of the range, offering better specs than the entry level S model, but at a more palatable price than the flagship SL3 — despite having higher specs in some areas. It packs a 44-megapixel full-frame image sensor, offers 40 frames per second raw shooting, phase detection autofocus (with subject tracking) and advanced video skills including 8K open gate recording and Apple ProRes codec support. 

As with any Leica it comes with a pretty hefty price tag attached. It’ll set you back £5,150, which sits neatly between the £4,500 of the SL3-S and the £5,920 of the SL3. US prices aren’t known at the time of writing but for reference that UK price converts to roughly $8,090. 

I was lucky enough to get hold a model ahead of its launch, along with a 28-70mm f/2.8 zoom lens, both of which I took away with me on a photography trip to the Scottish island of Mull. Here’s a selection of my favorite example photos from the Leica SL3-P. Note that all images were taken in raw and have been edited in Adobe Lightroom. You can click each image to see larger versions. 


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

For my first image I wanted to take advantage of the camera’s in-body image stabilization which can let you take slow shutter images without needing a tripod. I took this at about half a second in order to blur the motion of the water and ordinarily I’d require the camera securely locked on a tripod to avoid the whole image being blurred due to the camera movement. The built-in stabilization has done a great job here, capturing crisp details on the static parts of the scene and turning that water into silky smooth ribbons.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

A more tranquil scene here. The camera offers around 15 stops of dynamic range which has been helpful here in capturing a balanced image with subtle tonal gradations from the darker parts of the scene to the bright clouds. I’ve done little to the edit here, instead wanting to maintain a natural look that complements the soft feel of the scene.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

I took this image of this cute dog at the full 70mm end of the zoom lens I was using — plus I cropped a bit more in post. It’s pin-sharp though and I loved being able to shoot in aperture priority mode here to quickly get the snap when the moment happened.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

This beach was nice enough but I wanted to find some more interesting foreground to put into the scene and I felt I’d struck gold when I saw this haggard old tree stump. While I put the camera into black and white mode to help me visualize the scene, as I was shooting in raw I could have reverted to color in post if I wanted to. However, I love the dramatic, moody look here and I enhanced the “cinematic” feel with this wide, narrow panoramic crop.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

But if you want moody shots, this boat scene is for you. It was raining hard this morning, but I wasn’t concerned — the camera is IP54 rated for water resistance, so a bit of rain wasn’t going to be a problem. Instead, I kept on shooting through the bad weather and came away with an atmospheric shot of these abandoned fishing boats. I’ve upped the drama in Lightroom and I love that the camera’s raw files offer enough flexibility to let me edit my shots however I want.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

This image was taken with a 1-minute shutter speed which absolutely meant it had to be locked down on a tripod — there’s no way any human could keep that still for a full minute! I noticed these old pier supports and I knew they’d make for an interesting monochrome scene. 


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Whereas this image was taken with a whopping shutter speed of 3.5 minutes. I used a PolarPro 10-stop neutral density filter here to limit the amount of light coming into the lens and therefore allow me to use such long exposure times. The result is that the motion of the clouds overhead has been turned into these ethereal streaks across the sky, while the water lapping around the rocks has been turned ghostly still. This technique can be great for taking dramatic-looking images especially in cloudy conditions like this.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Not long after I took the long exposure shot the sun broke through the clouds and I was even treated to a bit of blue sky. I love the colors of this scene but I think I got especially lucky as the CalMac ferry chugged its way through the frame. By combining both elements — the lighthouse and the ferry — along with the mountains in the background I’ve been able to capture a photo that really tells the story of this island.


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

The following day I was on the ferry, traveling back to mainland Scotland and eventually back to my home in Edinburgh. I snagged this shot looking over the back of the ferry and I love how vibrant it is. The vivid reds stand out beautifully against the green floor of the deck and against the blue sky above, while the waving flag adds the perfect central focal point. 


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Back in (rainy) Edinburgh, I took the camera out for a spot of street photography and I’m particularly pleased this image. Shot through the glass of a bus stop, I was relieved that the camera’s autofocus was able to detect the true subject of this image — the chap in the phone booth — rather than try to focus on the people in the foreground. 


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

While here, the camera’s subject detection did a spot-on job of identifying — and locking onto — this person taking a photo on their phone. Quick street photography can be enhanced with accurate subject tracking autofocus as it allows you to quickly fire off a frame when you see an image-worthy moment take place and you don’t need to worry that you might miss focus. 


Enlarge Image
Andrew Lanxon/CNET

However here I happened to be in manual focus and quickly got in close to snag this image of a little dog looking mournfully out of the car window. 

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

I’ve enjoyed my time with the Leica SL3-P. It’s a solid all-round mirrorless camera that combines great image quality with the typically solid feel you’d expect from an expensive, hand-built Leica camera. Still, it’s not the Leica for me. As a more “regular” mirrorless camera it feels and operates in much the same way you’d expect of a Canon, Nikon or Sony camera, without the same thrill you’d hope from a Leica product — at least in my opinion. I bought a Leica Q3 43 last year and its smaller size and fixed 43mm lens means it remains not just my favorite Leica camera, but my favorite camera I’ve ever owned. 

But this is the camera you’d choose if you want more pro-level specs for commercial photo and video work, along with a wide choice of lenses at your disposal — as an L-mount camera, you can use not just Leica’s lenses, but options from Panasonic, Sigma, Viltrox and various others. It’s a solid all-round “do anything” camera and while it might not give me the creative thrill I want from a camera, maybe you’ll feel differently. 

Categories: Gadgets

Stop Making These 4 Common Mistakes With Your Electric Toothbrush

You probably don’t give much thought to brushing your teeth since you’ve been doing it for as long as you can remember. However, it’s important to pay attention to the way you brush them if you want to keep them healthy. If you use an electric toothbrush, it’s easier to get lazy and assume the brush is doing enough to keep your teeth plaque-free. Believe it or not, using an electric brush incorrectly can actually harm your teeth.

Even if you’ve been a long-time electric toothbrush user, it’s always a good idea to refresh your memory on how to correctly use one.

How to correctly use an electric toothbrush

Ready to make the switch to a powered toothbrush? Or, are you ready to learn how to use yours correctly? Fortunately, using one of these brushes is relatively simple and requires no more effort than using a manual toothbrush. 

  1. Charge your toothbrush: Your electric toothbrush should have an indicator that lights when it is charged. 
  2. Outside surfaces: Hold your toothbrush at a 45-degree angle and begin brushing the outside surfaces of your teeth. Hold the brush’s rotating heads against each tooth for 2 to 5 seconds before moving on to the next one. 
  3. Inner surfaces: After brushing the outer surfaces of your teeth, move to the inner surfaces, holding the brush’s rotating heads against them for 2 to 5 seconds before moving on to the next tooth. 
  4. Chewing surfaces: Next, hold your brush’s head against the chewing surfaces of your teeth. Hold your brush against each surface for a few seconds before moving on to the next. 
  5. Get the gums: You’re not done yet. Run the rotating heads of your electric toothbrush along your gum line and on your gums. This will remove any remaining plaque in your mouth. 
  6. Brush your tongue: As a final step, gently brush the roof of your mouth and your tongue. This is a good way to remove stubborn food particles, and brushing these areas of your mouth can also help freshen your breath.

Brushing with an electric toothbrush is just as easy as using a manual one — with the right instructions.

sergeyryzhov/Getty Images

Common but harmful electric toothbrush mistakes

While it’s easy to use an electric toothbrush, there are still mistakes you should avoid when brushing your teeth. Here are the most common: 

1. Not brushing long enough

Don’t rush your brush. The ADA recommends brushing your teeth for 2 minutes twice a day with a soft-bristle toothbrush. Rushing this makes it more likely that you won’t scrub away enough plaque from your teeth. 

2. Not replacing a worn toothbrush head

Don’t overuse the heads of your electric toothbrush. The ADA recommends changing these heads every 3 to 4 months. If the bristles on these heads are frayed or matted, replace them immediately, even if you’ve used them for less than 3 months.

3. Brushing too hard

You might be tempted to push down hard when you brush your teeth, but this can harm your teeth and gums. Brushing too hard can wear down your gums and teeth. That could wear down your enamel, making your teeth overly sensitive to hot or cold temperatures. Brushing too hard could also cause your gums to recede. 

4. Using the wrong toothbrush

You can effectively brush your teeth with either an electric or a manual toothbrush. You will need to use the right brush. The ADA recommends using a toothbrush with soft bristles and a long handle to reach the back of your mouth.

Do you want to make sure your toothbrush is up to snuff? Look for the ADA Seal of Acceptance. Brushes approved by the American Dental Association feature a seal on their packaging.

An electric toothbrush can be easier for kids to use because of the built-in timers.

Peter Dazeley/Getty Images

Electric toothbrush benefits to consider

There are several advantages to using an electric toothbrush, like manageability and effectiveness. Here are some of the most important: 

Electric toothbrushes might be more effective

Studies have shown that electric toothbrushes may more efficiently prevent tooth decay. 

In 2014, the Cochrane Collaboration reviewed 56 clinical trials of unsupervised toothbrushing involving more than 5,000 subjects of adults and children. Researchers found that individuals who used an electric toothbrush for one to three months experienced an 11% reduction in plaque compared to those who used a manual toothbrush for the same period.

Another study that followed adults for 11 years also found that participants who used an electric toothbrush had healthier teeth. The 2019 study, conducted by researchers at the University of Greifswald in Germany found that those who used electric toothbrushes had healthier gums and kept 19% more teeth throughout the study than those who used manual brushes.

A better choice for young children

Children often struggle to clean their teeth properly with a manual toothbrush. They might get bored before finishing the recommended 2 minutes of brushing, which can make it easier for plaque to build up on their teeth. An electric toothbrush can help. Because the heads of such brushes rotate in different directions, they provide greater brushing power and can more effectively remove plaque in less time.

Some electric toothbrushes have built-in timers, allowing younger children to know when they’ve reached the 2-minute mark. 

If you’re looking for an effective toothbrush that’s easy to easy and may be more effective at remove plaque, consider an electric model.

mrs/Getty Images

More effective at removing plaque if you have braces

Do you have braces? If so, an electric toothbrush might be the better choice for your dental health. A study published in the American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics found that participants who used a manual toothbrush after getting braces were more likely to accumulate plaque and to have an increased risk of gingivitis than those who used electric toothbrushes.

Better at removing plaque in general

Your goal when brushing your teeth is to remove as much plaque as possible. That’s because the bacteria in plaque eat away at your teeth’s protective enamel. Your teeth are more likely to suffer decay and you’re more likely to experience painful cavities if you don’t remove this plaque. 

Easier to use for some

An electric toothbrush might be easier to use for people with chronic pain or disabilities. That’s because the brushes’ rotating heads do most of the cleaning. With manual toothbrushes, you have to do the brushing work yourself.

Categories: Gadgets

Want Dinner Fast? This Is the Best Meal Kit Service for Quick-Fire Recipes


Score Breakdown

Taste/results 7/10Value 9/10Ease of recipes 8/10Recipe variety 9/10Healthiness 7/10

Pros

  • Recipes are highly customizable
  • Boxes arrived organized with all the necessary ingredients
  • Oven-ready meals require almost no prep
  • You can easily skip a week at no cost or penalty
  • Tons of speedy recipes that are easy to execute
  • Website and ordering is easy

Cons

  • Best value of any meal kit compared with grocery prices
  • Very few options for vegetarians or vegans
  • Some recipes are clunky and lack creativity
  • Too much plastic is used in packaging
  • $11 for shipping on every box

There’s a clear trend in the evolution of meal kits and it bends toward speedy meals. Nearly every service now has a section of its menu with recipes that can be made in under 30 minutes, some as quickly as 15. To find the best meal kit services, we tested every one we could get our oven mitts on. In doing so, we found a clear favorite for quick, uncomplicated meals that still taste great. 

As a busy person with mouths to feed, I appreciate speedy, simpler recipes. As a former recipe editor and seasoned meal kit tester at CNET, I also have high standards for meal kits. Ine service I’ve tried is best at threading the needle between convenience and quality,

Home Chef’s speedy recipes are a serious boon for this busy guy.

David Watsky/CNET

Home Chef sets itself apart with dozens of meals that can be made in 20 minutes or less. The service also has some of the most customizable recipes, allowing you to swap one protein for another or replace meat with a plant-based alternative. And in a recent evaluation, we found that Home Chef offered the best value (tied with HelloFresh) compared with the cost of making the same meals with groceries bought at the store.

After two rounds of cooking meal kits from the popular subscription service, here’s a firsthand review of Home Chef. 

What is Home Chef, and how does it work?

In a sea of competitors, Home Chef has emerged as a leading meal kit delivery service, emphasizing flexible, customizable meal plans with speedy recipes tailored to your taste. The service launched in 2013, just a year after Blue Apron, and was acquired by grocery giant Kroger in 2018. 

Home Chef is a subscription service for weekly meal kits, so there is no option to buy just one or two meal kits online. New customers sign up via the website or app, and a short quiz helps determine which meal plan is best for you, as well as which recipes and ingredients should be avoided. 

Every meal plan except for one (the smallest) breaks down to $10 per serving, plus $11 for shipping.

Home Chef/Screenshot by CNET

Then you’ll choose the number of recipes per week — as few as two or as many as six — as well as how many servings you’d like per recipe: two, four or six. Subscribers can choose their own meals each week or let the Home Chef team pick them. You’re free to skip a week anytime you’d like and can add meals or servings (at cost) to your delivery as you go.

I found the meal plan selection and ordering process simple, clear and intuitive. When selecting meal kits, a major differentiator between Home Chef and others is the ability to swap the protein in just about any recipe. Alternative ingredients include several steak cuts, chicken, shrimp, scallops, mahi mahi and Impossible meat. Certain premium swaps will incur a few-buck upcharge, while others won’t.

Home Chef makes weekly recommendations based on your prior orders.

David

Meals are delivered once a week in neatly packaged cooler boxes, with each ingredient pre-portioned in separate plastic bags and ready to be cooked. In our first delivery, we also received a small Home Chef binder designed to keep your recipe pages for future use when you want to recreate meals, which was a nice touch. Meals should be made within a few days of arrival, as many ingredients are not suitable for freezing. 

What Home Chef meals are like

Home Chef still sends meal kits in plastic bags, something we’d love to see them change.

David Watsky/CNET

Home Chef keeps things approachable — meals are straightforward to cook and don’t demand much culinary know-how. The service caters to a broad audience, leaning into comfort food and dishes that feel familiar on an American dinner table. 

Expect plenty of classics: burgers with potatoes, baked chicken or pork tenderloin with vegetables and a savory sauce, pasta, teriyaki steak with peppers over rice, and keto pork lettuce wraps. That said, the menu isn’t without its more inventive options — prosciutto and butternut chowder or bruschetta shrimp risotto, for instance, offer a bit more culinary ambition.

Home Chef’s BBQ pork lettuce wraps was one of the best and easiest meal kits I’ve made in some time.

David Watsky/CNET

Home Chef offers premium meals, which it calls the “culinary collection,” but they are priced differently (more on that below). A good many of Home Chef’s seafood options, such as crusted ahi tuna and pan-seared mahi-mahi, fall into the premium meal category, as do higher-end cuts of beef. In sticking with the theme of flexibility, you can pop one of these premium meals into your weekly order anytime (at a cost) if you’re feeling fancy. Below is an overview of Home Chef’s meal categories. 

  • Culinary Collection: Premium meal kits with higher-quality ingredients.
  • Express: Ready in 15 minutes or less.
  • Fast & Fresh: Oven-ready meals that require almost no prep.
  • Oven-Ready: Meals that arrive in an oven-ready tray.
  • Family: Dishes available only in four-plus servings.
  • Plus: Include premium ingredients and recipes.
  • Tempo*: Premade meals (heat-and-eat)

The produce arrived fresher than I remeber in previous rounds of testing.

David Watsky/CNET

Read more: Purple Carrot Review: Healthy Plant-Based Cooking Made Simple

Home Chef is great for speedy meals

The meals we tried were easy to prepare, which is one of the calling cards for the meal kit service. Home Chef offers quick-fire meals made with fresh, pre-portioned ingredients that take just 15 minutes or so to prepare. There are more complicated dinner projects that can take up to 45 minutes, but I loved how easy it was to make Home Chef’s quickfire recipes and I liked nearly all of the ones I whipped up. 

It’s up to you which types of meals you’d like to have sent, but beware: if you let Home Chef choose your meals, you might get some 45-minute meals in your box.

In several boxes of meal kits received, there were no missing ingredients.

David Watsky/CNET

Our Flex Editor received two simple meals to try: a baked chicken dish and burgers with carrots and fries. They were both extremely easy to prepare and tasty, and she had no qualms about the quality of the meat or produce. In fact, it was even her first time making burgers, and she considered it a success. 

Because the simple chicken dish was a one-pan meal, it allowed plenty of time to clean up any small messes made during preparation while the dish baked in the oven. She appreciated how seamless the recipes were. For example, she made the tomato topping for the chicken while the veggies baked, so there was no wasted time between steps.

This baked Piri Piri chicken topped with feta couldn’t have been simpler.

David Watsky/CNET

If you want something even simpler, though, there is also a category of oven-ready meals that require only assembling the fresh ingredients in an aluminum baking tray (provided) and popping it into the oven with almost no chopping or prep. These are about as quick and easy as meal kits get, but your bragging rights for a home-cooked meal stay firmly intact. Some meals labeled express plus take only 20 or 30 minutes to prepare, and those labeled family meals can be assembled simply in one pot and are designed to feed up to six people.

The portions aren’t huge, but plenty satisfying for me.

David Watsky/CNET

Support materials

Recipe cards make cooking easy, even for newbies.

David Watsky/CNET

Each meal kit comes with a comprehensive description, nutritional facts, prep time and a recipe card with ingredients and directions. It was especially nice to have a section on the recipe card that detailed what ingredients would be used more than once, so you’re aware beforehand of what you might need to preserve. 

The recipe card features a nice, big, glossy image so you can visualize the dish and know what to aim for, plus photos for each step of the process. There’s also a Home Chef mobile app that’s helpful and easy to use. All Home Chef recipes can be found online in a pinch. The instructions for each dish I made were easy enough to follow, but at times, a bit wordy. Home Chef tends to provide more information than the average home chef needs, perhaps with true beginners in mind.

Customization is one of Home Chef’s key selling points.

Home Chef

Our wellness editor wishes that Home Chef provided more information about where the produce and other ingredients come from, or at least what they are made of. For instance, when making the elotes quesadillas, to see what was in the Chipotle crema, she had to look at the nutrition facts online.

Home Chef allows you to swap proteins easily 

Home Chef’s big claim to fame is that its meal kits and plans are highly customizable to suit you or your family’s rhythm. You can swap or upgrade the protein in most of the weekly meals. If a meal includes a “customize it” button, you can swap the chicken for pork, for instance. Some proteins, like salmon, steak and plant-based proteins, trigger an up-charge of $3 or $4 per portion. 

Who is Home Chef good for?

We’d suggest Home Chef for anyone who is trying to learn to cook from scratch or lighten their meal-planning or grocery-shopping load. Because many of Home Chef’s meals are fast and easy to prepare and can feed up to six people, it is one of the best meal kit services for families or people new to cooking. It’s also good for people who are fairly specific about what they like to cook and eat, since you can make so many changes and swaps. Because Home Chef makes it so easy to skip weeks — and won’t charge you for doing so — it’s great for those who travel or have unpredictable schedules.

Don’t expect many plant-based options

There are very few vegetarian options in Home Chef’s weekly menu.

David Watsky/CNET

Our wellness editor, a 20-year vegetarian who often eats plant-based foods, tried three vegetarian meals from Home Chef. While they were tasty, the meals were all on the more indulgent side with plenty of cream and cheese. As a result, this would not be a good fit for vegans, as Home Chef doesn’t offer vegan recipes. She also doesn’t think Home Chef would be a good choice for vegetarians seeking healthier, non-comfort-food options.

Home Chef’s nutrition facts can be found online.

Home Chef

Is Home Chef healthy?

Though Home Chef offers calorie-conscious, carb-conscious and vegetarian meals, based on the three vegetarian meals our wellness editor tried, she wouldn’t say Home Chef is healthy. She wishes her recipes had less cream, cheese and pasta, with more of a focus on healthy grains and produce. However, this depends on the recipes you get and your dietary preferences. As a result, she recommends checking the nutrition facts for each recipe online.

How much does Home Chef cost?

Plans range from $10 to $12 per serving.

Screenshot by David Watsky

Home Chef’s meal kits are purchased per kit, and you can order up to 6 per week. The per-serving price is $10 to $12 for nearly every plan. The larger plans cost $10 while the smallest — two meals with two servings each — costs $12. This puts Home Chef right in the middle when compared with other services. Home Chef is a few bucks more expensive per serving than Blue Apron and EveryPlate, but cheaper than premium services like Sunbasket, Marley Spoon and Green Chef. 

New customers get 30% off their first order, which brings the price down to $7 per serving, plus free shipping (which is originally $11 per delivery, one of the more expensive surcharges of any meal kit service) and the service offers frequent discounts and promotions that could bring the price of your box down.

What I cooked and how it went

Most of the recipes we made took less than 20 minutes of active cooking.

David Watsky/CNET

The three of us cooked 11 Home Chef recipes. Ingredients arrived fresh and intact with no spills or spoilage. Most of the meals I made were sufficient, and some were better. But a few proved a bit clunky or overly simple and not worth the cost, especially since you can buy the same ingredients for about 50% less (I did the math). 

Here’s a full breakdown. 

Piri Piri chicken topped with feta and fried onions: The only real labor in this recipe was prepping the fresh green beans before baking them with the chicken. It was a huge hit.

The Piri Piri chicken was a smashing success.

David Watsky/CNET

Keto BBQ pork lettuce wraps with spicy slaw and fried onions: Fresh and flavorful, this was one of the best, simple meal kits I’ve ever made. 

I would make this pork taco recipe again and again.

David Watsky/CNET

One-pot pork chili con carne with bacon bits: This pork chili seemed overly simple at first, but turned out to be one of the best of the bunch. Let’s just say I will be adding bacon to my chili from here on out. 

Home Chef’s pork chili with bacon and sour cream was a winner for me.

David Watsky/CNET

Sweet potato bowl with poblano pepper and cilantro-lime rice: This recipe was very clunky and definitely not worth the per-serving price. The poblano was far too big. I only added three-quarters of it after dicing, and the finished dish was still way too hot, even for a spice lover like me.

My Mexican-style sweet potato bowl with poblano peppers and cilantro rice. 

David Watsky/CNET

Moo shu pork tacos: This recipe was a super-fun, quick and easy meal kit to execute. It took less than 20 minutes, and the flavors were balanced and interesting, thanks to the toasted sesame oil and spicy sriracha. 

You’ll need little more than a skillet and a chef’s knife to make Home Chef’s moo shu tacos.

David Watsky/CNET

Keto-friendly pork-stuffed peppers: I liked these low-carb Italian-style peppers just fine, but, again, with such simple ingredients, it’s hard to stomach paying $10 to $12 per serving.

The Italian stuffed peppers were super simple, requiring very little effort. 

David Watsky/CNET

Honey sriracha chicken with crispy wontons was an oven-ready meal, meaning all I really had to do was assemble the chicken breast, precut vegetables and edamame in a baking tray (provided) and cook for 20 minutes. The temperature and timing were on point, and the chicken came out tender, while the vegetables kept their snap. 

Bruschetta shrimp risotto: This recipe was the most complicated Home Chef meal kit I cooked. Risotto famously requires a bit more attention than most dishes, but it was still fairly easy to make and a delicious meal in the end. I might have wanted a bit more detailed instruction on tending to the risotto, especially if I were a beginner learning the ropes of the rice dish.

Home Chef offers some more challenging recipes, including this rich shrimp bruschetta risotto.

Home Chef

Minecraft mushroom fields beef burger with truffle potato and carrot “torch” fries: This recipe was our Flex Editor’s introduction to burger-making, and she was thoroughly pleased with how they turned out. And you can’t go wrong with pairing a burger with fries, but the carrots were a nice addition. The kit provided enough beef for four burgers, and the produce and ingredients were all fresh. Although it was a fairly simple meal, the simple mushroom sauce helped fancy it up and added a tasty flavor. 

This meal was simple, but the easy-to-make mushroom sauce helped dress it up.

Corin Cesaric/CNET

Sheet pan tomato salsa chicken with roasted butternut squash: This meal was even simpler than the burgers, as it was a one-pan dish that required minimal prep and cleanup, making it an ideal weeknight dinner for a busy household. The chicken was tasty, but the cutlets were much thinner than the photo Home Chef provided, so it wasn’t the most filling dinner. 

This easy chicken dish took less than 30 minutes to prepare and cook.

Corin Cesaric/CNET

Vegetarian Home Chef recipes

Mexican-style elotes quesadillas: While our wellness editor found this recipe simple to make in about 35 minutes and delicious, it was on the more indulgent side. Though each serving was 610 calories, it contained 71% of the daily value for salt and 80% of the daily value for saturated fat. As a result, our wellness editor went light on the salt, cheese and crema. She also added pinto beans for more variety and fiber.

Home Chef’s Mexican-style elotes quesadillas took about 35 minutes to prepare.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Cozy gnocchi soup: Again, while tasty, this recipe was on the heavier side with a cream sauce base, Parmesan cheese and gnocchi. Our wellness editor had trouble finishing the dish because it was so filling. It also contained 80% of the daily value of sodium, so she was careful not to add extra salt during cooking.

The cozy gnocchi soup was very filling.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Cheesy baked spinach rigatoni: Like the other two vegetarian meals, this was on the heavier side with the cream sauce base, butter, Swiss cheese and a French roll. It was tasty, but after two other indulgent meals, our wellness editor wanted something a bit lighter and more produce-forward.

The cheesy baked rigatoni was served with a side of garlic bread.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Home Chef packaging and environmental friendliness

In a previous study, Home Chef received the worst green score among four major meal kit services tested for plastic waste in their packaging. Each recipe is housed in its own plastic bag, and there are numerous small plastic bags and containers within them. Besides the excessive plastic associated with each meal, most of the rest of the packaging is recyclable, including the boxes, insulation sheets and ice packs. 

Some plastic is necessary for meal kits to work, but Home Chef uses more than the average service. 

David Watsky/CNET

Our wellness editor thought that Home Chef could do a better job packaging its ingredients, since some of the same ingredients were repackaged two or three times for one recipe. Personally, she also found the binder to be a waste because it’s not something she needs in her kitchen and would have preferred the recipe cards on their own. (However, if you plan to stick with Home Chef for a long time, she acknowledges that the binder could be nice to have on hand.) Similar to other meal kits she’s tested, she wishes there were more biodegradable or compostable packing, or a method of sending the ice packs back for reuse.

Unfortunately, the same ingredients were repackaged two or three times.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Our editors’ experiences compared

Editor NameCooking experienceFood preferenceCNET roleKey opinions on Home Chef David Watsky Experienced chef and meal kit expertGluten-freeCNET’s Kitchen & Home Tech Senior Editor- User-friendly service struck a fair balance with consistently good meal kits that were unpretentious and easy to prepare. – Found many recipes clunky and not worth the $10-$12 per serving cost. – Appreciated the ability to swap proteins and skip weeks. – Overall, Home Chef may now be worth the price compared with other services like Sunbasket.Corin Cesaric Novice cookMeat and veggies, plus plant-based optionsCNET’s Health & Home Flex Editor- Found the ease and quickness refreshing. – Had no concerns about the quality of the meat or produce.Anna Gragert An experienced home cookVegetarian, health-consciousCNET’s Health & Wellness Editor- Not the best meal kit service for vegetarians or vegans. – Meals were tasty but on the indulgent side and not as healthy as preferred. – Prefers more accessible information on ingredient sourcing and less plastic packaging.

The final verdict on Home Chef

Home Chef has made significant improvements since we first tested it.

David Watsky/CNET

This user-friendly service struck a fair balance with consistently good meal kits that were unpretentious and easy to prepare. I appreciate the ability to change proteins in nearly any recipe, and I’m sure families with picky eaters will, too. This time around, most of the meal kits I prepared were good or better, even if one or two were bland or uninspired. The produce was fresh, and the boxes arrived organized and without missing items.

In our most recent tests, Flex Editor Corin Cesaric, a self-proclaimed amateur cook, found the ease and speed of her two meals refreshing. As for Anna Gragert, our wellness editor and a vegetarian of 20 years, she found that Home Chef isn’t the best meal kit service for vegetarians or vegans.

Compare that with Blue Apron or Marley Spoon, two meal kit services we’ve tested that offer high-end recipes such as bistro steaks and roasted trout, but cost more than Home Chef. Blue Apron and other meal kit services also don’t allow for as much customization as Home Chef. If that’s important for you and the crew you’re feeding, Home Chef could be the right fit to make your dinner routine a breeze. 

Watch this: How to Cook a Whole Chicken in an Air Fryer in 60 Minutes

03:25

Categories: Gadgets

Prime Day Live: We Picked Out the 157+ Best Deals Worth Buying on Day 3

The NotePin S AI wearable, seen here on the wrist of CNET’s Katie Collins, could be really useful for my job. And it’s on sale for Prime Day.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

I took over the role of CNET’s editorial leader earlier this year, and while I’ve participated in Prime Day sales as a TV reviewer and general deals editor here for (literally) decades, this is my first Prime Day as EIC. In case you’re wondering what purchases a person like me is considering this time around, here’s a sampling.

iPad 11-inch A16 ($300): My artistic daughter has been asking for an iPad and if my wife approves, I’ll likely get her this basic version, our top pick for most people. I’d also get her the Apple Pencil (on sale for $60). We’d save both of these for Christmas presents.

Belkin Portable Charger Bank ($38): My family and I always need portable chargers. Half our devices call for Lightning and the other half for USB-C. This does both and I like the built-in cables.

Plaud NotePin S AI Notetaker ($152): In my new role I take more meetings than ever, and I also have plenty of valuable face-to-face conversations in the office and beyond. I currently depend on the Otter app on my phone and Gemini+Google Meet recordings at work to take notes (with appropriate permission, of course). This AI wearable could be my “secret weapon” to consolidate everything in one place.

JBL Go 4 Bluetooth Speaker ($38): I actually bought this one a few days ago when it was $40 – still a great deal, but now even better. It’s no longer one of our best Bluetooth speakers but it’s good enough for my (other) daughter, who wants one for the beach. At this price, I won’t be too annoyed if (when?) it gets destroyed by sand and surf. And yes, I got her the pink one which I know she’ll love. We’re saving this for her birthday.

Anker Solix F2000 portable power station ($749): I own a travel trailer and upgraded to solar with an inverter, but at a recent (shady) campsite, I still had to break out my loud, annoying propane generator. Sure, I could just add more standard 12V LiPo4 batteries, but this portable power station is so much more versatile. It includes a 30A RV outlet, and the wheels make it worth the extra $50 over the Bluetti AC200L. No way my wife approves this one, but it stays on the list anyway because I’m camping tech obsessed.

Categories: Gadgets

JBL Tour Pro 3 Earbuds Review: Lower Price and Enticing Improvements


Pros

  • Good fit, comfortable to wear
  • Dual-driver design serves up clear, well-defined sound with punchy bass
  • Best frequency response in lab tests
  • 1.6-inch color touchscreen
  • Good noise-canceling and voice-calling performance
  • Wireless charging
  • Support for LDAC codec (Android), AAC
  • Spatial sound with head-tracking
  • Case works as Bluetooth dongle

Cons

  • They sound very good, but don’t rise to a special level
  • Noise canceling is behind competitors
  • Smart charging case is a tad heavy

When they were released, back in the fall of 2024, JBL’s flagship Tour Pro 3 earbuds cost $330. While they had a touchscreen LCD in their charging case, which doubled as a Bluetooth dongle, I thought they were too expensive for what they ultimately delivered. 

But over time, the price has dropped (around $250 or less sometimes), making them a better deal. Plus, they now have the distinction of earning our first CNET Labs award for most accurate frequency response, having tested closest to the Harman Target Curve. Combine that with the added benefit of some firmware updates that have improved their performance, and they’re easier to recommend today. They do face steep competition, however, from the likes of Apple’s AirPods Pro 3 and Samsung’s Galaxy Buds 4 Pro

Read more: Best Wireless Earbuds of 2026

JBL Tour Pro 3 design

The Tour Pro 3 earbuds have a premium charging case, but I wasn’t sure the design of the buds themselves was quite premium enough when I first encountered the Tour Pro 3 at $330. While the buds felt substantial, sporting dual-drivers inside, their plastic chrome accents made them look a little cheap to me — or not as refined looking as some premium buds. They’re IP55 splash-proof and dust-proof.


Enlarge Image

The Tour 3 Pro come in black (pictured) or latte. 

David Carnoy/CNET

At their lower price, it’s easier to be less nitpicky. They are comfortable to wear and relatively lightweight at 5.6 grams per bud. By comparison, JBL’s step-down Beam 3 buds, which have a single 10-millimeter dynamic driver, weigh 5 grams each. They, too, have a touchscreen LCD in their charging case (it’s a bit smaller at 1.5 inches compared to the Tour Pro 3’s 1.6-inch touchscreen), and I decided to recommend that model because it costs significantly less — it’s $150 today — for only a slight step down in performance.

Aside from the Tour Pro 3’s larger touchscreen and dual-driver design, the one key difference between it and the Beam 3 is its charging case turns into a Bluetooth transceiver, so you can plug it into the headphone port on an inflight entertainment system and have it transmit audio to your buds wirelessly (you can plug the case into any auxiliary or USB-C port and have it transmit audio). Only a few earbuds, including the pricey Bowers & Wilkins Pi8 earbuds, offer this feature. 

The buds’ smart case doubles as a Bluetooth transceiver, a feature only available with a few earbuds.  

David Carnoy/CNET

The touchscreen is responsive and serves as a remote control for the buds, so you skip tracks forward and back and adjust settings, including sound modes and equalizer settings, without touching your phone. It’s a nice feature, but incorporating a touchscreen in a charging case does make it heavier and bulkier, which some people may take issue with; the charging case weighs 71.8 grams or about 2.5 ounces compared to 44 grams or 1.6 ounces for the AirPods Pro 3’s charging case.

JBL Tour Pro 3 features

Upgraded to Bluetooth 6.0 with a firmware update, the Tour Pro 3 have a robust feature set, including the aforementioned smart charging case along with ear-detection sensors to automatically pause audio when you take a bud out, spatial sound with head-tracking, Bluetooth multipoint, a basic Find My Buds feature, equalizer settings and support for Auracast public broadcasts and Sony’s LDAC audio codec for Android devices (AAC for Apple devices). 

Like some buds these days, the Pro 3s have a sound personalization feature called Personi-Fi 3.0. It’s found in the JBL Headphones companion app for iOS and Android and creates a unique sound profile tailored to your hearing (and hearing tastes). I also appreciate JBL’s VoiceAware feature that lets you control how much of your own voice you hear through your earbuds during phone calls.

You can adjust equalizer settings with the case.

David Carnoy/CNET

Also, the buds have a feature — SmartTalk — that detects your voice when you start to have a conversation with someone and automatically lowers the volume of your music and switches from noise canceling to ambient aware modes (on the smart case touchscreen, you enable TalkThru for the feature to work). This is similar to the Apple AirPods Pro 3’s Conversation Awareness and the Sony WF-1000XM6 speak-to-chat feature.

JBL Tour Pro 3 noise cancellation

The JBL Tour Pro 3’s noise canceling is quite effective, especially if you’re able to get a tight seal from one of the six pairs of eartips that come in the box, including a set of foam tips. I wouldn’t rate the noise cancellation as high as it is on the Sony WF-1000XM6, AirPods Pro 3 and Bose Quiet Comfort Ultra (Gen 2), but it’s only a small step behind (I’d grade it a B-plus or maybe even an A-minus). 

JBL Tour Pro 3 sound quality

As I said earlier, the Tour Pro 3s are equipped with a dual-driver design. They have a 10.2mm dynamic driver for bass and mids (vocals) combined with a dedicated 5.1-by-2.8mm balanced armature driver for the highs. They sound good, with rich, detailed sound that’s well-balanced and has nice depth to it. As advertised, the bass is both meaty and punchy, and has lots of kick to it without sounding boomy.

Our labs recently started testing frequency response for many of the top earbuds out there right now. As noted, the JBL Tour Pro 3 wireless earbuds have earned a CNET Labs award for best frequency response, which means their frequency response lines up most closely to the Harman Target Curve, the “science-backed” target frequency response for the ideal tonal balance for headphones and earphones. This isn’t so surprising given that JBL is a subsidiary of Harman, which is owned by Samsung. 


Enlarge Image

Noise-canceling performance is strong but not quite up to the level of Sony’s, Apple’s and Bose’s. 

JBL

All that said, while the Tour Pro 3s are impressive-sounding earbuds, I can’t say they truly wowed me (I’d grade them an A-minus on the sound front). For pure sound quality, I would take the Sony WF-1000XM6 or the new Noble Osprey ($200), which also feature a dual-driver design, over the JBL Tour Pro 3. Those earbuds just sound a little more special than the Tour Pro 3 buds, offering a little more pure, natural sound. In the case of the Noble Osprey, their treble performance is a step up from the Tour Pro 3s, with more sparkle and clarity. 

JBL Tour Pro 3 voice-calling performance and battery life

I’ve generally been pleased with JBL’s earbuds voice-calling performance over the last few years, and the Tour Pro 3 are quite good in the voice-calling department (they have three microphones in each earbud). Callers said they only heard minimal background noise when I spoke to them from the noisy streets of New York. They said my voice sounded reasonably clear, though slightly muffled.

The voice-calling performance isn’t quite up to the level of what you get with Anker’s new Liberty Pro 5 series buds or Sony’s WF-1000XM6 (the AirPods Pro 3’s and Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro’s voice-calling performance are also top-tier), but it’s very good overall. I’d grade it an A-minus. 

The Tour Pro 3s are rated for up to 8 hours of battery life with noise canceling on at moderate volume levels, which is good (it goes up to 11 hours with ANC off). The case adds around 32 hours of battery life with noise canceling on.  

JBL Tour Pro 3 final thoughts

When they first came out, I thought the Tour Pro 3 were good earbuds, but they fell short of my expectations for the price ($330). Now that they’ve been out over 18 months and their price has dipped to closer to $250 (and sometimes closer to $200 during flash sales) and received some firmware updates that improve performance, they’re more enticing. That’s particularly true if you value the smart charging case features (including the Bluetooth transceiver feature) that help distinguish them from other premium earbuds. I still think certain competing models offer slightly more pleasing sound quality, but their fit and overall performance package (sound quality, noise cancellation and voice-calling) is appealing. Even though they’re approaching two years old, they’re well worth considering, especially if they dip to $200.  

The Live Beam 3 earbuds look similar to the earlier Live Buds Pro 2, which I liked a lot, especially when they go on sale for less than $100. Essentially, they’re JBL’s AirPods Pro 2 competitor, and their distinguishing feature is the 1.5-inch touchscreen LCD integrated into the charging case that acts as a remote control for the buds and allows you to access their features. Equipped with 10mm drivers, not only do they offer clear, well-defined sound with punchy bass, but their noise-canceling and voice-calling performance is solid. Their battery is also good — they offer up to 10 hours of battery life with ANC on and 12 hours with it off at moderate volume levels (a 10-minute charge gives you 4 hours of battery life). Available in four color options, they’re IP55 splash-proof and dust-resistant.

Note that JBL’s flagship Tour Pro 3 earbuds also have an integrated LCD but feature dual drivers, which deliver even better sound than these buds with a little more depth and detail. However, the Live Beam 3s often sell for $50 off their $200 list price, which makes them a better deal overall.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple’s Foldable iPhone Ultra: Release Date, Price, and Leaks

  • The foldable iPhone release date could be as early as September 2026.
  • It could go by any of several names, including the iPhone Fold, iPhone Ultra or iPhone Flip.
  • The first foldable iPhone will likely be a book-style format, followed by a Razr-style clamshell design.
  • Recent design leaks point to a wider, squat look, similar to the original Google Pixel Fold.
  • One analyst predicts it could cost between $2,000 and $2,500.

Apple is the last major smartphone manufacturer to enter the foldable market, and by most accounts that wait is almost over. Leaks and supply chain reports now point to a September 2026 launch, alongside the iPhone 18 lineup. A folding iPhone is expected to arrive with a book-style design and a starting price north of $2,000. The name that’s stuck in the rumor mill for years, the iPhone Fold, may not be what Apple actually calls it. Recent leaks increasingly point to iPhone Ultra, a label that would position the device above the Pro lineup and signal a new tier of Apple hardware. Here’s everything the leaks, analyst reports and dummy unit images have revealed so far.

The most recent rumors come from leaker Digital Chat Station, who suggests the foldable could be called the iPhone Ultra, and from leaker Sonny Dickson, whose supposed dummy molds provide further support for the rumor that the iPhone Fold will be wide and squat.

We’ve gotten far more design leaks suggesting how Apple’s foldable may look. Most leaks, like Dickson’s above, suggest that the iPhone Fold will be a book-style foldable that’s squat and wide, looking more like the original Pixel Fold than taller, thinner models such as the Galaxy Z Fold 7 or the Pixel 10 Pro Fold.

The screen on the iPhone Fold is rumored to have little or no crease, according to a recent report by the Chinese publication UDN. Screen creases, especially on early foldable phones, have long annoyed consumers and critics, and they still remain despite the seam getting less noticeable over the years. Even Samsung’s most advanced Galaxy Z TriFold has two screen creases, one for each of its hinges. It would be a major breakthrough if Apple indeed finds a way to fold a screen in half without leaving a crease.

A report from leaker Fixed Focus Digital on Weibo suggests that Apple’s hinges could be made of liquid metal, an alloy possibly provided by Liquidmetal Technologies, with which Apple has had an exclusive contract since 2010. It’s been the topic of many rumors since then, and the basis of several patent applications, but so far, no products other than the SIM ejector tool that once shipped with iPhone models.

But we’ve yet to hear any official word on a foldable iPhone from Apple.

Mock-ups of potential iPhone foldables, including a clamshell “iPhone Flip” on the left and book-style foldable on the right, along with a flat iPhone for comparison on the bottom.

Zain bin Awais/CNET

Foldable phones represent a tiny fraction of all phones sold globally. In a recent survey, CNET found that 64% of people said they don’t want a foldable phone. But those numbers could change if Apple were to sell a foldable iPhone. As of April, IDC analysts predict that global foldable sales will jump 19% if the iPhone Fold launches in 2026, with Apple’s folding device capturing around 24% of the global market share.

A lot of hope and high expectations have been placed on Apple’s release of a foldable phone. And if rumors are correct, we won’t have to wait much longer for the company to do so.

Watch this: iPhone Flip: What Apple’s Foldable Future Could Look Like

05:01

iPhone Fold specs

A mock-up of a possible book-style foldable iPhone design.

Zain bin Awais

There are no confirmed specs for the iPhone Fold; Apple hasn’t even confirmed one exists or is coming out. So given that we don’t yet have an expected release year, it’s hard to predict what kind of internal specs the iPhone Fold will have. Presumably, Apple will equip it with its most powerful A-series chip, along with enough RAM to handle two or three displays (depending on whether it folds inward or outward and needs a dedicated outer screen).

We do have some predictions for other specs, though only for the rumored book-style Fold (not the clamshell). In March, analyst Kuo predicted the larger Fold could have a 5.5-inch outer screen and a 7.8-inch inner display. When folded, it’s rumored to be 9 to 9.5mm thick and 4.5 to 4.8mm when unfolded. Plus, a front-facing camera is also rumored to work whether the phone is folded or unfolded, along with two rear cameras.

Kuo predicted that the device will use the same high-density battery cells as used in what he referred to then as the “ultrathin iPhone 17,” which presumably meant the iPhone Air. But that trim thickness means the foldable may forgo Face ID, so the device could end up using Touch ID in a side button. 

Some rumors about hardware have emerged, too. In January, an analyst note seen by MacRumors suggested Apple’s foldable could launch with 12GB of RAM, the same amount in the Galaxy Z Fold 7‘s starting configuration. That could mean Apple doesn’t need much memory to handle multiple screens or isn’t banking on large AI features that require significant RAM.

And we finally have a prediction on the iPhone Fold’s battery, with Weibo leaker Fixed Focus Digital posting that it could have a 5,500-mAh capacity, as 9to5Mac first reported. That’s substantially larger than batteries on some other foldables. (The Galaxy Z Fold 7, for example, has a 4,400-mAh battery, but Samsung has been in the foldable game for years and has likely improved efficiency in an effort to slim down its devices.) Yet if the Weibo leak is true, this will be the largest battery ever on an Apple handset. The iPhone 17 Pro Max has a 5,088-mAh battery.

Watch this: Samsung’s iPhone Fold Killer Is Leaked

04:57

Design: What will the foldable iPhone look like?

This illustration, according to Apple’s patent filing, shows a “device that bends along a flexible portion, such as a flexible seam associated with a hinge.”

Apple/US Patent and Trademark Office

Apple seems to have taken out every patent under the sun when it comes to foldable displays, including an origami-style folding display, a flip-up display and even a wraparound display. As far back as 2021, a report from Bloomberg indicated Apple already had a prototype of a foldable iPhone display, and rumors since then have bounced back and forth between suggesting Apple will opt for either a clamshell style or a book-style foldable first. 

In March 2025, analyst Kuo made several specific predictions for Apple’s foldable: It would be a book-style device with a 5.5-inch outer screen that unfolds into a 7.8-inch internal display, measuring 4.5 to 4.8mm thick when unfolded and 9 to 9.5mm when folded. It would also use the same high-density battery cells as the “ultrathin iPhone 17” and include a hinge made of stainless steel and titanium alloy — a favorite material in Apple’s iPhone 16 Pro and Pro Max, as well as the Apple Watch Ultra 3.

A mock-up of the iPhone Fold based on unofficial leaked CAD renders from @SonyDIckson on X. 

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

Per Kuo’s predictions, the foldable will have two rear cameras and a front-facing camera on both the external and internal displays. Most interestingly, Kuo also expects that Apple’s book-style foldable will see the return of Touch ID as a side button, as Face ID might be left out due to space constraints — presumably for the array of depth-of-field sensors and cameras needed for the tech. 

Then there are the renders, which have gone from a trickle to steady stream through 2026. One set of 3D CAD renders from leaker Sonny Dickson (pictured above) points to a squat, wide design that looks much more like the Pixel Fold than the tall, thin Galaxy Z Fold 7 or the Honor Magic V6 Foldable. While Dickson didn’t supply any context for the renders, making them unlikely to have come from Apple itself, it does suggest a different design for the foldable than the current vogue of narrow rather than wide foldables.

The iPhone Fold has been rumored for years, with delays reportedly due to Apple’s dissatisfaction with a visible crease. Reports say the company has solved this issue, and a recent rumor from TrendForce (cited by 9to5Mac) suggests that an advanced adhesive led to a breakthrough in reducing the crease of its anticipated folding display.

iPhone Fold release date: It could launch later this year… or in 2027

The logo for Apple’s fall 2025 event invitation is interactive, with a heat signature that stays where you touch or click and hold.

Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET

Apple has neither confirmed the iPhone Fold nor announced a release date. But analysts and rumors have predicted that the foldable could come out in 2026 or be pushed until next year.

As for timing, since the iPhone Air was released alongside the iPhone 17 models, the Fold could come alongside the iPhone 18 series. But since Apple released the iPhone 16E early this year, far before the September window for its main iPhone release, the company could do the same with the iPhone 17E in 2026. Apple could even delay the launch of the standard iPhone 18 to the spring of 2027 to make room for the iPhone Fold in Apple’s September 2026 launch, according to an ET News report. Given that Samsung offsets its standard and foldable phone releases at Unpacked events months apart from each other, Apple could do the same.

The latest indications of an iPhone Fold release date come from Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman, who said the foldable is on track for a September launch. That was affirmed by analyst Kuo’s suggestion in June 2025 that production could kick off in 2026, with phones coming out later in the year. This follows Kuo’s earlier prediction in March 2025 that the company could release a crease-free book-style foldable by the end of 2026. Other analysts predict the iPhone Fold could launch in December. But it’s worth noting that Nikkei Asia reported in April on several production snags that could delay the iPhone Fold into 2027. 

It’s been an open secret for years that Apple is working toward a foldable iPhone, but buzz and possible release dates have been floated for just as long. Early rumors pointed to 2021 as a potential target date, but the year passed with no foldable iPhone in sight, as have successive rumors for potential releases in 2023 and 2025. 

Read more: Top Foldable Phones for 2025

Watch this: Foldable Phones May Be the Future. In South Korea, They’re the Present

04:40

iPhone Fold price

Analyst Kuo predicted that a book-style iPhone foldable coming in 2026 could be priced anywhere from $2,000 to $2,500, as it’s “expected to generate strong replacement demand — despite the premium price — provided quality meets expectations.”

A report last year found that half of American consumers are interested in buying a foldable phone, though Apple customers are slightly less willing to make the leap than Samsung or LG users. Perhaps the “Apple effect” will change those stats if and when a foldable iPhone ever becomes a reality.

Although Motorola offers one of the most affordable folding phones with its clamshell Razr at around $700, most others in the category are book-style foldables, such as the Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Pixel 9 Pro Fold, which cost around twice as much as most flagship phones. We don’t expect a foldable iPhone to be cheaper than its rivals. Apple’s foldable needs to be in line with current foldable and nonfoldable models to be able to compete against other brands and entice iPhone users to ditch their single-screen devices and pay more for a foldable.

iPhone Fold history

Mock-ups of what the iPhone foldables could look like.

Zain bin Awais/CNET

Rumors suggest Apple is developing a book-style foldable like the Galaxy Z Fold 7. Years ago, in 2017, folks predicted that a foldable iPhone could launch in the then-near future of 2020. Analysts and leakers have pushed the release date back ever since, while rumors and wish lists have persisted as phone fans keep their hopes alive. 

Early rumors pointed to 2021 as a potential launch window, but Kuo’s March 2021 report (via MacRumors) suggested a 2023 debut. That year has since come and gone. Reliable display analyst Ross Young said in February 2024 that the foldable iPhone had been pushed back to 2025, a timeline Kuo had previously reaffirmed in a tweet in April 2022.

Why the long wait? In February 2024, Weibo-based blogger Fixed Focus Digital suggested that the foldable iPhone project was delayed because Apple was dissatisfied with the screens’ performance. A mid-2024 TrendForce market analysts, reported in 9to5Mac, predicted that Apple’s strict requirements for reliability and the phone display’s crease meant it might not be released until 2027. But Kuo’s more recent March 2025 predictions explicitly noted a crease-free foldable display, suggesting Apple might have moved past this roadblock.

A new patent granted to Apple in July 2024, which was applied for years ago, shows how long the company has been working on a folding iPhone. Kuo’s report in March 2026 said that an Apple foldable could launch at the end of 2026, with a 7.8-inch, crease-free inner display and a 5.5-inch outer display.

Although many reports have focused on the company’s struggles to eliminate the crease within the internal folding display, Apple’s patent indicates that the development has been ongoing for some time. Creases have plagued smart foldable phones since their introduction in 2020, and although the most recent Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 have reduced the crease, it’s still visible and noticeable. Still, Samsung hasn’t let phone fans forget it’s long outpaced Apple in releasing foldables by releasing an app that lets Apple phone owners experience a Z Fold-esque experience by placing two iPhones side-by-side. 

While rumors began aligning in 2025 around the idea that Apple would release a book-style foldable first, they had previously asserted for years that a clamshell-style foldable would come first. Apple leaker Jon Prosser reported in early 2021 that the iPhone Fold will likely use a clamshell design and come in several “fun colors.” Between the bright pastels of the then-new iPhone 15 and Plus and the sleeker deep blue of the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max, an array of fun colors for Apple’s first foldable is a possibility, though they might be limited to the clamshell version of the phone.

Read more: I Visited Samsung’s Home Turf to See if Foldable Phones Are Really the Future

Watch this: The Biggest Battles Ahead for Apple’s Next CEO, John Ternus

05:03

iPhone 2026 lineup

CNET’s Jeffrey Hazelwood created these custom renders of what an iPhone 18 Pro might look like.

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

There’s no guarantee about which phones Apple will release during its usual September window, but the safest bet is on another series of flat phones, which we expect to be the iPhone 18 line. But what else could be coming alongside the usual lineup?

There could be an iPhone Air 2, though rumors conflict over whether to expect one next year. There’s been a lot more evidence for an iPhone Fold, though whether it comes out in 2026 or in later years is still uncertain. If the iPhone Fold does launch next year, more rumors have suggested a clamshell device has been prioritized and may come first — given reports of Apple researching a book-style foldable, we could get one of those as well. 

In mid-January, MacRumors reportedly saw a research note from analyst Jeff Pu suggesting that the iPhone Fold will pack 12GB of memory — as will the entire iPhone 18 line. Apple never discloses how much RAM is included in its phones, but specs sites such as GSMArena have reported that the standard iPhone 17 has 8GB of RAM, while the rest of the series (iPhone Air, 17 Pro and Pro Max) all have 12GB. If correct, that means Apple doesn’t think its foldable will need more memory than its standard flat phones; it would have more screen area but potentially no more advanced hardware than its iPhone 18 siblings.

It’s also interesting to see the standard iPhone 18 packing 12GB of memory, as the RAM shortage is predicted to hike prices on phones released in 2026, and potentially even wipe out the cheapest budget phones from the market until memory prices drop enough to make low-cost phones profitable again. Apple may be willing to absorb the costs for a more capable basic model of the iPhone 18, or perhaps it’ll pass those costs on to the consumer with a price hike. 

iPhone Fold or iPhone Air 2?

A mock-up by CNET designer Zooey Liao shows what an iPhone Air 2 with dual-rear cameras might look like.

Zooey Liao/CNET

While the iPhone Air came out with the iPhone 17 handsets, there are conflicting rumors about whether we’ll see an iPhone Air 2 in 2026. A recent report from The Information says Apple is delaying the release of the next version of the iPhone, citing people familiar with the matter. This follows rumors that disappointing iPhone Air sales led Apple to dial back production, though that claim was disputed by TD Cowen in a note seen by AppleInsider, which said the company would continue producing the thin phone. The Information later amended its story to say the delay could be caused by engineers reconsidering the Air’s design to support a second rear camera.

All of this casts doubt on whether we’ll get an iPhone Air 2 next year, but there’s not enough evidence yet to roundly dismiss the possibility. 

Two foldable iPhone foldables?

Foldable iPhone hopefuls will at least be encouraged that Apple seemingly continues to tinker with an iPhone Fold design. The company is said to be working on two sizes of folding iPhones: a book-style and a clamshell-style, according to an older report by The Information, although this may be contradicted by a newer report by the same site suggesting Apple had settled on the latter for a smaller device. This aligns with prior rumors hinting that the iPhone Flip will use a clamshell design similar to the Samsung Galaxy Z Flip series or Motorola Razr Ultra.

It sounds like Apple’s been struggling to meet its high expectations: The company’s design team wants the iPhone Fold to be half as thin as current iPhone models and to have displays on the outside that are visible when the device is folded shut, according to the report. Given that the iPhone Air, released in September 2025, whittled the typical iPhone thickness down to 5.6mm, Apple has made progress toward this goal. 

Development on the clamshell iPhone Flip was halted around 2020, the earlier report noted, to focus on a new project: a folding iPad. This device would have an 8-inch display, roughly the size of the iPad Mini. The foldable tablet reportedly had less strict durability and thickness requirements, since it wouldn’t need to fit in pockets like an iPhone Flip. Apple was also working on ways to reduce the crease in the display and get the iPad to lie fully flat.

Roadblocks: What still stands in Apple’s way? 

CNET’s Vanessa Hand Orellana tests the flexibility of a Corning glass display.

CNET

Samsung and others have been testing the waters, but Apple has been learning from the pain points of its competitors foldable devices and figuring out how they’d be used.

One of these pain points is the crease. Many of the current cover materials, including the glass and plastic mix that Samsung uses for the Z Fold and Z Flip, show a visible crease when folded out to full screen. To avoid it, Apple would likely have to wait for Corning, Apple’s glass provider, to create some kind of bendable version of its Ceramic Shield screen. The company is already working on a bendable glass but hasn’t announced a launch date for it. 

Kuo tweeted in April 2022 that Apple was testing a foldable OLED screen. Korean tech news site The Elec also reported that Apple was working with LG to develop a foldable OLED panel. 

Categories: Gadgets

Every College Student Needs a Trusty Laptop. Here Are the 4 I’d Buy

Whether you’re a student prepping to leave for college or a parent rushing to get your kid ready for the next school year, you’re going to need the right equipment for education in the digital age. Waiting until August to start your shopping spree is a bad idea — especially when you can track down some good deals right now.

I’m a few years removed from my own graduation at this point, but I remember how important it is to have a trusty laptop, some handy peripherals and a solid monitor in your dorm room. I’ve rounded up a list of affordable computers with solid processing power to help you figure out what to take to class in the fall.

Plenty of these latest laptops also have enough RAM to run an onboard LLM — and while I don’t recommend using AI to do your homework, having a new machine with solid silicon and plenty of memory is still a boon. Even many budget computers are now powerful enough to run taxing programs that were better left to more expensive laptops in the past.

Not sure what to take to class? These laptops and peripherals might be just what you need

STEM students and budding artists alike need the right tools for their workload come September. I’ve put together a list of budget and midrange laptops and peripherals to help you prepare for the school year without breaking the bank. Let’s find the right computer (and maybe some extra goodies) at the right price before the next semester.

Matt Elliott/CNET

MacBook Neo

Apple laptops are a longtime favorite of students, thanks to their respectable tech specs, easy-to-navigate operating system and product ecosystem continuity. It also helps that the tech giant has long offered a student discount on many of its entry-level products.

Released this spring, the budget MacBook Neo is a perfect pick for students, balancing a lower price point with solid performance. Thanks to RAMageddon, it’s becoming increasingly difficult to find a truly great laptop for less than $1,000, but Apple has cleverly repackaged its iPhone 16 silicon into a new shell alongside 8GB of memory and a 256GB hard drive to tamp down the price.

You can get a MacBook Neo from most tech retailers for $600 right now. Factoring in the student discount, the Neo is just $500. That’s a hard price to beat in 2026.

Matt Elliott/CNET

M5 MacBook Air

The M5-series MacBooks are the newest and flashiest of the Apple computers, so they’re more powerful (and more expensive) than the MacBook Neo. If you want something with a little bit more “oomph” and you’re not afraid to spend four figures, the 13-inch M5 MacBook Air is a portable laptop with solid specs that is continually supported by Apple software updates.

The M5 MacBook Air is normally $1,100, but the student discount saves you $100 and brings the price down to the cusp of three figures. The MacBook Air will cost you twice as much as the Neo, but in many respects, you’re getting twice as powerful hardware: In addition to the M5 silicon, the Air contains 16GB of RAM and a 512GB hard drive. You are unlikely to outgrow the MacBook Air in the next four years of school.

Dell

XPS 13

If you’re not rocking with MacOS, I totally understand — I’ve always preferred Windows computers, myself. Dell’s XPS 13 is a solid alternative to the MacBook Neo, in many ways serving as a direct competitor to Apple’s budget laptop.

The Apple student discount has Dell beat when it comes to pricing: The XPS 13 stays firmly at that $600 mark with a student discount applied. But aside from the Windows operating system, the XPS has some key advantages compared to the MacBook Neo.

The XPS 13 is more portable than the 2.7-pound Neo, weighing in at 2.2 pounds with its aluminum chassis. Its 2.5K resolution LCD screen also has a 120Hz refresh rate and touch capabilities, which the competition lacks. That extra $100 also buys you a bigger hard drive — the XPS 13’s base configuration comes with a 512GB SSD.

At a time when laptop prices are soaring, the XPS 13 offers a great value proposition in the budget laptop space.

Matt Elliott/CNET

OmniBook X Flip 14

If you’re a digital artist or a tactile notetaker, you might be looking at this list of laptops and finding it lacking. Some of these options are missing touchscreens, and all of them are lacking in color-critical accuracy and high-resolution displays. HP’s OmniBook X Flip 14 is on the more expensive side, but it may be the answer to your woes.

This laptop comes with an AMD Ryzen AI 5 340 processor, 16GB of memory and a 512GB SSD. Most importantly, the OmniBook X Flip 14 is a midrange two-in-one laptop, which means it can be folded along the hinge into a tablet mode that’s perfect for drawing on the screen.

The base configuration for this computer is $1,330 and includes a 2K-resolution LCD screen, but for another $90 you can upgrade to a 3K-resolution OLED panel, which makes perfect sense for this particular laptop. A $1,420 price tag is a hefty ask for a student, but this is a portable laptop that doubles as a drawing tablet, knocking out the need for two devices in one purchase.

Josh Goldman/CNET

Satechi Slim X2 Bluetooth Backlit Keyboard

You may be reluctant to spend upwards of $80 on a keyboard, but it makes sense to get a peripheral if you’re investing in one of the 13-inch budget laptop models.

The Satechi Slim X2 is a wireless keyboard that, much like its Apple Magic Keyboard competition, features a full slate of arrow keys and a number pad. It’s designed to mimic a Mac keyboard, with an entire row of Function key shortcuts — but it also works with Windows computers and can be connected to multiple other Bluetooth devices.

Unlike the Apple Magic Keyboard, the Satechi Slim X2 has backlit keys. They’ll help you see what you’re doing when you’re burning the midnight oil, working overtime to knock out last-second homework. The competition doesn’t offer the same backlit advantage — and it doesn’t go on sale nearly as often as Satechi’s Slim X2 backlit keyboard does.

David Carnoy/CNET

Logitech Mobi Fold Mouse

If using a touchpad irks you to no end, there’s a new mouse option that’s somewhat inexpensive and easy to tote around from one classroom to the next. Logitech’s Mobi Fold wireless mouse is an experiment in portability, weighing just 2.8 ounces and folding in on itself to take up less than an inch of space in your pocket. It’s not the most ergonomic mouse, but CNET reviewer David Carnoy still preferred it to the trackpad.

At $80, the Mobi Fold Mouse isn’t the cheapest option on the market. But when you’re lugging around a backpack full of textbooks, a laptop and other study materials, it suddenly becomes much more appealing to use a wireless mouse that tucks right into your pocket.

Lori Grunin/CNET

Innocn 40C1R

If you’re bringing a budget laptop to school — especially an ultraportable 13-inch model like the Neo or the XPS 13 — you might want to invest in a bigger display for when you’re kicking back at your dorm room desk.

The Innocn 40C1R is a big monitor at a solid price point. This older hardware doesn’t contain the flashiest tech specs, and it actually has a fairly low resolution LCD panel (3,440×1,440 pixels) relative to its size. Fast-paced gaming sessions also tend to suffer from motion blur and artifacting, so this might be a skip for video game enthusiasts.

But at the end of the day, the 40C1R is large and in charge: It’s a 40-inch flatscreen that will dominate your desk space, making it a great way to connect your laptop through a USB-C cable. If you want to mount this monitor above the desk, it’s bundled with the equipment necessary to do so, too.

You’re not going to find many similarly sized monitors at the $550 price point, and you can often find the Innocn 40C1R discounted for much less than that. This is a cheap and efficient way to transform your compact laptop display into a big-screen productivity station or a mini TV during slow nights on campus.

Categories: Gadgets

Consumer Cellular Introduces SpeakEasy Phone Plans for Seniors 75 and Up

Mobile phone use among older Americans continues to grow. According to Pew Research’s Mobile Fact Sheet published in November 2025, 95% of US adults age 65 and older own a cellphone, and 78% own a smartphone. Yet for many people age 75 and up, complicated devices and service plans can still be difficult to navigate. With this in mind, Consumer Cellular is expanding beyond its lineup of plans with its new SpeakEasy plans and phones designed for older users.

Many carriers offer senior-focused phone plans geared toward people 55 and over, which are typically stripped-down variations of other plans at reduced rates. AT&T, T-Mobile and Verizon limit their plans to two lines, with Verizon’s senior-focused plan available only to Florida residents. 

The SpeakEasy plans come in two varieties centered around the phone options:

  • SpeakEasy Flip is an $80 flip phone with large buttons, front-facing volume controls and an extra-loud speaker. Plans start at $14.95 per month, including 500MB of data and unlimited talk and text.

  • SpeakEasy Smart is a $100 smartphone running a simplified Android-based operating system with large buttons. Plans start at $19.95 per month and include 3GB of data and unlimited talk and text.

Consumer Cellular is currently offering two months of free service for SpeakEasy plans, and AARP members can save 5% on either plan. Prices listed do not include taxes and fees. The plans operate on AT&T‘s network.

These SpeakEasy options compete with other senior-focused phones and plans such as Jitterbug and Snapfon.

While the SpeakEasy plans are not limited to adults 75 and older, that demographic represents a sizable market, with roughly 26 million Americans in that age group, according to Roger Entner of Recon Analytics. He also noted that the major carriers either don’t offer or only offer a limited number of senior-friendly phones with large buttons.

“Consumer Cellular has spectacular customer service for older people,” Entner said in an email. “That is their key differentiation.” 

Categories: Gadgets

You Can Preorder Slate Auto’s $25K Electric Pickup Now

Slate Auto’s much-discussed sub-$25K electric truck is one step closer to reality. It’s now available for preorder on the company’s website. However, it could still be a year or two before drivers who preorder a Slate actually get their vehicles.

The base model of the car is priced at $24,950 and there are a number of color and accessory options available. But Car and Driver points out that it’ll end up costing more than $25,000 after factoring in a destination and delivery fee that the company says will be lower than typical. Even so, that fee could still run $1,200 to $1,500.

Even with that fee, however, Slate’s truck would stand apart in a US car market where SUVs rule the land and the average car price rose above $50,000 earlier this year before settling back down, according to Kelley Blue Book. Electric vehicles are typically priced about $5,000 to $7,000 more, making the Slate even more of an anomaly. 

This week, as it opened up preorders for the electric truck, Slate gave more details about its range and capabilities, which have changed since the truck was announced last year. New battery specs have raised the truck’s range from 150 miles per charge to 205. Slate is also banking on the truck’s custom options to draw customers: It’s offering more than 100 wrap colors and different ways to convert the two-seater truck to other builds, even after the vehicle is purchased.

Preordering the Slate truck costs $300 and is nonrefundable. The company says the 180,000 customers who already placed refundable reservations for $50 can put that $50 toward a preorder.  

According to Slate’s website, the first deliveries of the truck will be later this year. But full production of the Slate truck isn’t expected to ramp up completely until sometime in 2027. Slate has raised $1.3 billion and counts Amazon founder Jeff Bezos as one of its investors.

Reviewers have posted new impressions of the Slate

Not everyone is impressed with the concept, or even the pricing of the Slate, with The Wall Street Journal dismissing the company’s updates with the headline, “Will Anyone Buy This Cheap EV Truck With Hand-Crank Windows and No Radio?”

But those who’ve actually seen and ridden in the vehicle are singing its praises. Nick Yekikian at Edmunds wrote that the truck “is cute and has real charm in person” and said it has evolved since the last time he saw it. He wrote, “The build quality is generally more solid, and it looks ready to hit the road.” He also posted a video about his experiences with Slate.

Aaron Gold at MotorTrend wrote, after riding in the Slate, that it’s “pretty much what we were expecting, which is a good thing, as we at MotorTrend have high hopes for this cute, inexpensive electric truck.”

David Tracy at The Autopian called driving the truck “insanely fun.” He wrote, “It’s a simple pickup truck, and it’s reasonably cheap. Is it the cheapest? No. Is it the most practical for families? No. But what the Slate has going for it is this: It is, by far, the most soulful new vehicle an American consumer will be able to buy for $25,000.”

At least one other inexpensive EV is in the pipeline

As far as competition for inexpensive electric vehicles, the closest to Slate’s planned price is likely the Chevrolet Bolt at just under $30,000. But other automakers are working on less expensive electric vehicle models. 

Ford is expected to release a low-cost electric truck in the $30,000 range, due out in 2027. And political changes could open up the possibility of Chinese-built EVs, which have their fans in the US but are not widely available due to tariffs and other factors. As Reuters points out, some Chinese EVs are priced below $12,000; for the average cost of an American car, you could buy three or more of the cheapest EVs in China.

Categories: Gadgets

GTA 6 Confirms $80 Price Tag, Ultimate Edition, Midnight Preorders and More

Grand Theft Auto 6 preorders started at midnight your local time after publisher Rockstar Games finally confirmed the new installment’s price. The likely Game of the Year winner for 2026 will cost $80 when it releases on Nov. 19 for PS5 and Xbox Series X|S consoles, according to a statement from Rockstar. 

Along with the standard edition, Rockstar is also offering an Ultimate Edition of the game that comes with more content, including exclusive vehicles and cosmetics, for $100.

Calling GTA 6 a highly anticipated game doesn’t do it justice. It’s been more than a decade since the release of GTA 5, and after multiple delays, the latest entry in the GTA franchise is finally on its way. Will GTA 6 be the greatest game ever created? Who knows, but the excitement has already hit a fever pitch with three months left before launch.

What is the release date for GTA 6?

GTA 6 is currently slated to be released on Nov. 19, 2026. The game was initially scheduled for a 2025 release, but was twice delayed, to a May 2026 release, then to November

How much will GTA 6 cost? 

The standard edition for GTA 6 will cost $80. This makes it one of the few games with a price tag above the typical $70. Mario Kart World for the Switch 2 was the first game with a regular price tag of $80 when it launched last year. 

A GTA 6 Ultimate Edition is also available for $100. This version comes with a collection of vehicles, weapons, apparel and customizations. Here’s what comes in the Ultimate Edition: 

  • ’67 Vapid Dominator Buggy & Paradise Garage
  • ’95 Grotti Cheetah
  • Dinka Enduro motorcycle & Crest Kayak
  • Exclusive Vapid Ganado Retro Build mods
  • Rideout Customs & One-Eyed Willie’s mod shops
  • Classic Car Collection missions
  • Shitzu Squalo boat
  • Hawk & Little Morgan Revolvers
  • Personalized weapon variants
  • PTT Youngin$ Compound activities
  • Exclusive clothing, hairstyles, tattoos, and customization options for Jason and Lucia

Rockstar says the content will unlock for players who own the Ultimate Edition as they play through the single-player campaign.

Rockstar Games

Is GTA 6 available for preorder? 

GTA 6 preorders started on June 25 at midnight local time for PS5 and Xbox Series X|S consoles. Those who preorder will receive the Vintage Vice City pack that includes: 

  • ’55 Vapid Stanier
  • Shore Court Garage near Ocean Beach
  • Exclusive Vice City-inspired outfits and hairstyles for Jason and Lucia 
  • A tropical weapon pattern inspired by Tommy Vercetti’s iconic look

Which platforms will GTA 6 be available for? 

So far, GTA 6 is coming to the PS5 and Xbox Series X and S consoles. GTA 6 will likely come out on PC, but it won’t be at launch. There is currently no word on GTA 6 coming to the Switch 2. 

Will there be a physical edition of GTA 6?

Not really. Rockstar confirmed there will be a physical edition of GTA 6 sold at retailers, but it won’t include a disc. Instead, it will just have a code to download the game. Some gamers have expressed their disappointment with the lack of a physical disc on social media sites like Reddit.

Rockstar did say that pre-loading for GTA 6 will take place starting Nov. 12. 

Where does GTA 6 take place? 

GTA 6’s setting is the state of Leonida, the fictional version of Florida. It’ll include some time in the big city and surrounding areas, including the coasts and swamplands. The star of the game will be the return to Vice City, a fictitious version of Miami. GTA 6 takes place in a modern setting, so don’t expect the ’80s version players first experienced in GTA: Vice City. 

What is GTA 6’s story? 

Jason Duval and Lucia Caminos are two criminals in love. Jason has been working for drug runners, and in the opening, he’s on his way to pick up Lucia from the Leonida Penitentiary. She was serving time for an unknown crime, but it involved protecting her family. The two will work together to improve their lives one crime at a time. 

What else is new in GTA 6? 

The big innovation coming to GTA 6 is the dual protagonists. This system will be similar to the three-protagonist setup from GTA 5, but expect Jason and Lucia to be playable in certain missions. Rockstar includes RPG elements that let the protagonists customize their bodies based on the food they eat and the exercises they do. There will also be a wealth of changes that modernize the gameplay, such as making melee attacks more realistic and improving gun controls. 

Will there be a new GTA Online? 

Rockstar has yet to confirm that there will be a new GTA Online with GTA 6 at launch. It is likely that the online mode will be made available sometime after launch, which is what the studio did with the launch of the original GTA Online, as well as Red Dead Online. 

Categories: Gadgets

Micro Center Tech Days Delivers Big Savings on PC Building Essentials

If you’re a serious gamer, a creator or just a tinkerer, at some point you’ve either built your own PC or thought about it. One of the best benefits of optimizing a machine for your own personal use is how much money you can save. But in order to get more bang for your buck, you often have to buy parts over time as you wait for the best deal on each component.

Micro Center’s Tech Days, which runs from Tuesday, June 23 through Friday, June 26, is one of the best times of the year to get a head start on building your own PC. Whether you’re a hard-core gamer or just an everyday user, there are a variety of Tech Days bundles on GIGABYTE motherboards, which will give you a solid foundation for your next build at a reasonable price.

AMD’s flagship processor for high-end gaming and content creation

If you’re looking to build a high-end machine for gaming, video editing or 3D rendering, these two bundles are hard to beat. 

They both are built around AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D, a 16-core, 32-thread CPU that combines AMD’s 3D V-Cache gaming technology with workstation-class productivity performance. Either one would be the foundation of a system that can handle virtually anything you throw at it, whether premium gaming or heavy content-creation multitasking.

The difference between the two, which is seen in both the sticker price and the discount, is in the motherboard. The first bundle includes GIGABYTE’s X870E AORUS MASTER, an enthusiast-grade motherboard for premium power delivery and top-end features. The second bundle uses GIGABYTE’s X870 GAMING WIFI6, which delivers almost all the real-world performance of the first.

Top-tier CPUs without premium-priced extras

If you’re only doing one thing and that is high-end gaming, the best deal may be the 9800X3D bundle. Everything is optimized for one thing: speed in games. The B850 GAMING X WIFI6E motherboard and memory support are sufficient for what gamers need, but there aren’t any of the premium features that add cost.

The Intel Core Ultra 9 285K bundle is excellent if you prioritize productivity in software development, video editing or other content creation. It gives you Intel’s top consumer CPU paired with a strong (but not extravagant) GIGABYTE Z890 AORUS PRO ICE motherboard. 

Both these value bundles include 32GB of fast DDR5 memory and current-generation platforms, so they should remain relevant and upgradeable for a long time.

Value and accessibility with upgrade options

If you’re looking for value and accessibility in your next build, either the Ryzen 5 7600X bundle or the Ryzen 7 9700X bundle is the way to go. Both provide an affordable entry into AMD’s modern AM5 platform, with a GIGABYTE X870 or B650 motherboard and DDR5-6000 memory. 

They are excellent gaming foundations with 6 cores and 12 threads. But what makes them especially attractive is that they free up hundreds of dollars for a better graphics card, a larger SSD, a better monitor or even an upgrade later on. 

GIGABYTE bundles for every PC builder

Regardless of your needs as you outfit a new PC, you can get a solid foundation with a GIGABYTE motherboard — and a major discount — during Tech Days. Head over to Micro Center to choose your bundle today.

Disclaimers
Prices and availability are accurate as of publication and subject to change. Deals valid 6/23–6/26/2026 while supplies last. Deals may extend after the official Tech Days promotion. Check Micro Center’s website for the most current bundle deal. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 25 #640

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition is tricky today! If you’re from the Peach State, the blue group will be your jam. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: On the air.

Green group hint: The Metrodome was another one.

Blue group hint: Georgia players.

Purple group hint: Journalists, as a group.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: Roles on a broadcast team.

Green group: Former NFL stadiums.

Blue group: Atlanta Braves.

Purple group: ____ press.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 25, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is roles on a broadcast team. The four answers are color, play-by-play, sideline and studio.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is former NFL stadiums. The four answers are Candlestick, Silverdome, Texas and Veterans.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is Atlanta Braves. The four answers are Albies, Elder, Sale and Strider.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is ____ press. The four answers are bench, Christen, full-court and leg.

Categories: Gadgets

Meta Halts Employee Data Tracking After Sensitive Info Reportedly Exposed

Meta’s controversial surveillance tool, which tracked staff’s keystrokes, mouse clicks and content to train the company’s AI models, didn’t quite work out as planned. The Model Capability Initiative, which was implemented in April and strongly opposed by staff, has been paused following an incident in which employee data became accessible to the entire company.

Over the last several weeks, more than 1,600 Meta employees, including software engineers, research scientists and designers, signed a petition calling on the company to stop collecting and repurposing employee computer data. 

“We collectively believe that empowering individuals and communities through building responsible AI includes respecting their boundaries and privacy,” the petition states. “Any approach to AI that relies on intrusive, coercive, non-consensual data collection contradicts that principle.” 

Business Insider reported that the software tracked apps and programs such as Gmail, GChat and Metamate, an employee AI assistant, as part of its data collection. The data-tracking software also captured screenshots. It’s unclear if it will be reinstated. 

Citing an internal security notice and information from three Meta employees, Wired reported that private conversations, prompts, transcriptions, and performance reviews were exposed to “anyone inside the company.” 

In a statement obtained by Wired, a Meta spokesperson said the company was investigating the incident and would stop data tracking indefinitely. 

“We have carefully designed this program with privacy safeguards, and while we have no indication at this time that any data was improperly accessed by Meta employees, we’re pausing it while we investigate,” the spokesperson said.

A representative for Meta did not respond to CNET’s request for comment. 

Employers ramp up AI use 

Meta, which is spending at least $135 billion on AI infrastructure this year, is among several major tech companies ramping up AI investment, including Amazon ($200 billion), Microsoft ($190 billion), and Alphabet ($185 billion).

Meta AI, the company’s main chatbot, is integrated into its main social media platforms such as WhatsApp, Instagram and Facebook.

According to leaked audio from an in-house company meeting on April 30, Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg said it made sense to use his own employees to train the AI.

“The AI models learn from watching really smart people do things… The average intelligence of the people who are at this company is significantly higher than the average set of people that you can get to do tasks,” Zuckerberg said.

Rory Mir, director of open access and tech community engagement at the digital rights group Electronic Frontier Foundation, said Meta employees were right to oppose an invasive practice that raises privacy, consent, and trust concerns.

“Seeking new data for AI training is no excuse,” Mir told CNET. “Such disproportionate monitoring of workers is an abuse of power and highlights the necessity of legislation to protect worker privacy by requiring consent and due process.”

Companies are monitoring how much their employees use company AI tools in their daily work. CNBC reported in May that “almost every Fortune 500 is tracking overall AI usage” to determine whether workers are using it effectively and maximizing its potential.

Categories: Gadgets

Federal Judge Allows Search of ChatGPT Records in Crypto Fraud Case

A federal judge has ruled that prosecutors can compel OpenAI to turn over ChatGPT account records belonging to Richard Kim, the former chief executive of cryptocurrency startup Zero Edge, as part of a fraud case alleging he diverted investor money into crypto trades and online gambling.

Prosecutors allege that Kim diverted about $3.8 million from a $4.3 million fundraising round for Zero Edge and that, following his arrest, he used ChatGPT to research his case, including his trial strategy. Court filings indicate that Kim may also have used the AI to generate numerous prompts related to misappropriating investor funds, cryptocurrency trading and gambling. Kim has pleaded not guilty to securities and wire fraud charges. 

US District Judge Lorna Schofield on Monday rejected the defense’s attempt to shield the chatbot data, establishing that AI chat logs can be treated as third-party digital evidence subject to a search warrant. The warrant seeks Kim’s OpenAI records from October 2023 through May 2026, including prompts, responses and account information.

The case is a reminder that conversations with AI chatbots can become part of a legal record. As more people use tools like ChatGPT for research and personal advice, courts are beginning to treat AI chats like other digital records, such as your emails, texts and search history. That also means using a chatbot for legal research doesn’t automatically make the conversation private or protected. 

Can a chatbot be protected by attorney-client privilege? 

Kim’s lawyers tried to block a search warrant, arguing that the chatbot data contains privileged information and research related to the case. According to the defense, those digital records should be protected, as they would expose Kim’s internal thoughts, defense tactics and trial strategy. 

Prosecutors countered that for the attorney-client privilege to apply, a conversation must be confidential between a human and a licensed legal professional for the purpose of obtaining legal advice. An AI chatbot cannot be a lawyer.

Schofield’s ruling does not determine whether Kim’s ChatGPT records are protected by attorney-client privilege, but it does allow the warrant to proceed, meaning the defense cannot stop OpenAI from complying. Kim may still challenge specific records afterward.

The dispute adds to a growing legal question about whether conversations with tools like ChatGPT, Gemini or Claude can remain private when they are used for legal research.

This ruling aligns with a landmark decision from earlier this year in United States v. Heppner, in which another Manhattan judge found that a defendant’s exchanges with Anthropic’s Claude chatbot were not protected by attorney-client privilege or work-product protections.

In that case, US District Judge Jed Rakoff said that AI platforms are third-party data collectors, not legal counsel. He noted that the defendant used Claude without his attorneys’ direction and that the platform’s privacy terms weakened any claim that the chats were confidential. Rakoff said AI use directed by an attorney could be treated differently.

Future cases may draw sharper lines around when AI-assisted legal work can be protected, especially if a chatbot is used at an attorney’s direction. 

It’s not exactly a digital version of Miranda rights, but the warning here is similar: Anything you type can (and will) be used against you in a court of law.

(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, CNET’s parent company, filed a lawsuit against OpenAI in 2025, alleging it infringed Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)

Categories: Gadgets

Federal Judge Allows Search of ChatGPT Records in Crypto Fraud Case

A federal judge has ruled that prosecutors can compel OpenAI to turn over ChatGPT account records belonging to Richard Kim, the former chief executive of cryptocurrency startup Zero Edge, as part of a fraud case alleging he diverted investor money into crypto trades and online gambling.

Prosecutors allege that Kim diverted about $3.8 million from a $4.3 million fundraising round for Zero Edge and that, following his arrest, he used ChatGPT to research his case, including his trial strategy. Court filings indicate that Kim may also have used the AI to generate numerous prompts related to misappropriating investor funds, cryptocurrency trading and gambling. Kim has pleaded not guilty to securities and wire fraud charges. 

US District Judge Lorna Schofield on Monday rejected the defense’s attempt to shield the chatbot data, establishing that AI chat logs can be treated as third-party digital evidence subject to a search warrant. The warrant seeks Kim’s OpenAI records from October 2023 through May 2026, including prompts, responses and account information.

The case is a reminder that conversations with AI chatbots can become part of a legal record. As more people use tools like ChatGPT for research and personal advice, courts are beginning to treat AI chats like other digital records, such as your emails, texts and search history. That also means using a chatbot for legal research doesn’t automatically make the conversation private or protected. 

Can a chatbot be protected by attorney-client privilege? 

Kim’s lawyers tried to block a search warrant, arguing that the chatbot data contains privileged information and research related to the case. According to the defense, those digital records should be protected, as they would expose Kim’s internal thoughts, defense tactics and trial strategy. 

Prosecutors countered that for the attorney-client privilege to apply, a conversation must be confidential between a human and a licensed legal professional for the purpose of obtaining legal advice. An AI chatbot cannot be a lawyer.

Schofield’s ruling does not determine whether Kim’s ChatGPT records are protected by attorney-client privilege, but it does allow the warrant to proceed, meaning the defense cannot stop OpenAI from complying. Kim may still challenge specific records afterward.

The dispute adds to a growing legal question about whether conversations with tools like ChatGPT, Gemini or Claude can remain private when they are used for legal research.

This ruling aligns with a landmark decision from earlier this year in United States v. Heppner, in which another Manhattan judge found that a defendant’s exchanges with Anthropic’s Claude chatbot were not protected by attorney-client privilege or work-product protections.

In that case, US District Judge Jed Rakoff said that AI platforms are third-party data collectors, not legal counsel. He noted that the defendant used Claude without his attorneys’ direction and that the platform’s privacy terms weakened any claim that the chats were confidential. Rakoff said AI use directed by an attorney could be treated differently.

Future cases may draw sharper lines around when AI-assisted legal work can be protected, especially if a chatbot is used at an attorney’s direction. 

It’s not exactly a digital version of Miranda rights, but the warning here is similar: Anything you type can (and will) be used against you in a court of law.

(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, CNET’s parent company, filed a lawsuit against OpenAI in 2025, alleging it infringed Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)

Categories: Gadgets

People’s Picks ISP Winners: Is Your Internet Service Provider a Flop or Favorite?

The internet service provider you choose hinges on a lot. We rely on the internet for many daily tasks, streaming, shopping, work and social media. Several factors that go into choosing the right one, like cost effectiveness, satisfaction, speed and customer support are important. But Joe Supan, CNET’s broadband principal writer, says a reliable connection is paramount. 

We asked CNET readers what they like (and don’t) about their ISP for People’s Picks, CNET’s community awards program. Did your provider make the cut? Here’s what they said and what we didn’t expect to find out. 

CNET’s People’s Picks ISP Winners

J. Hazelwood/CNET

GFiber, previously known as Google Fiber, is a household name among internet service providers and a popular fiber internet option. CNET readers give it high scores, making it the overall top pick among ISPs. GFiber has an overall satisfaction score of 4.72 out of 5, and scores highly for reliability (4.70) and plan speed (4.82). GFiber also scores 4.28 out of 5 for price, 

Verizon Fios and AT&T Fiber are close runners-up to GFiber. Both score highly for reliability (4.39 and 4.48, respectively) and plan speed (4.41 and 4.49, respectively). But GFiber wins by a landslide for its customer support. Most CNET readers who have contacted customer support within the past year rate their experience as “Excellent,” while other GFiber customers say customer service was “Good” and don’t have any negative ratings for the fiber-optic ISP. 

Winner for: Fiber internet, customer service, price, reliability and speed

J. Hazelwood/CNET

T-Mobile is often known as a popular cellphone provider, but it wins CNET’s People’s picks for 5G internet. T-Mobile scores 4.20 out of 5 for customer satisfaction, the highest among 5G internet providers. 

CNET readers say their T-Mobile internet connection rarely drops, noting only a few times a year. And there’s no noticeable difference in speed during peak hours. T-Mobile readers haven’t experienced unexpected price hikes within the past year and many wouldn’t change providers if a new one moved into their neighborhood. 

T-Mobile’s 5G internet is a close runner-up to GFiber in terms of price. Verizon’s 5G internet is just behind T-Mobile, with a price score of 4.10 out of 5. T-Mobile won 5G internet by narrowly beating Verizon in speed and reliability. 

Wins for: 5G internet

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Starlink wins among major internet companies with a high overall satisfaction rating of 4.47 out of 5, compared to Verizon Fios and T-Mobile, which score 4.16 and 4.20, respectively. And it has the second-highest reliability score among major winners. Starlink scores 4.59 in reliability while GFiber scores 4.70. 

“A few years ago, it would have been unfathomable that a satellite company would be considered this reliable. This really speaks to how massive Starlink’s technical improvements have been,” said Supan. 

Satellite internet also scores fairly highly for plan speed (4.41 out of 5), with no noticeable changes during peak hours. However, Starlink falls short on price satisfaction compared to other major internet providers because it has traditionally required an upfront $349 charge for a satellite dish. However, it recently switched to a $10 monthly charge. 

“Starlink isn’t particularly fast or affordable, but it serves customers who essentially had no modern internet options before it came along,” said Supan. 

Wins for: Rural satellite internet, overall satisfaction for satellite, reliability for satellite and speed for satellite

CNET’s People’s Picks regional ISP winners

We poured through our readers’ responses to find the best ISP in each region based on the internet service features you rely on everyday. Here’s how each regional winner compares to other ISPs in your area and what to know before choosing one. 

West: Sonic

Wins for: Customer service, overall satisfaction, price, reliability and speed

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Sonic is a California-based fiber optic ISP that wins in several of CNET’s categories compared to other Western providers. It earns high marks for price (4.65 out of 5), speed (4.80 out of 5) and overall satisfaction (4.85 out of 5) — the highest among other Western providers. It even beats out national ISPs GFiber and Verizon FiOS for its reliability. 

Sonic received nearly flawless feedback from CNET readers. Many readers never experience internet drops or need to reset their router. They also report no noticeable speed differences during peak hours. And when it comes to customer service, no readers report poor or fair customer service. 

South: EPB (Electric Power Board)

Wins for: Customer service, overall satisfaction, price, reliability and speed

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Electric Power Board is a fiber optic ISP based in Chattanooga, Tennessee that scores highly compared to other southern ISPs. It scores 5 out of 5 for overall satisfaction, speed and reliability, and 4.5 out of 5 for price satisfaction, beating out national ISPs AT&T Fiber, GFiber, Comcast Xfinity and Spectrum

CNET readers also give EPB an “Excellent” customer satisfaction rating with no lower ratings. They don’t experience connection drops or speed lags, and wouldn’t change providers if another ISP came to their area. 

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Northeast: T-Mobile Home Internet 5G 

Wins for: Overall satisfaction and price

T-Mobile Home Internet 5G scores the highest overall satisfaction score in the northeast — earning a 4.40 out of 5. Verizon Fios comes as a close contender with a 4.19. CNET readers also give T-Mobile’s 5G home internet 4.60 out of 5. T-Mobile still has solid scores for customer satisfaction (4.20), with many readers noting no noticeable difference in speed during peak hours and no unexpected price hikes. 

Midwest: Quantum

Wins for: Overall satisfaction, reliability and speed

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Quantum Fiber wins among Midwest ISPs with a satisfaction score of 4.67 out of 5. Quantum has a flawless 5 out of 5 for reliability. CNET readers say the connection rarely drops — only a few times a year and they don’t experience speed lags during peak hours, which earns Quantum another 5 out of 5 score for speed. 

Quantum Fiber was acquired by AT&T earlier this year. Even though customers still see Quantum on their bills, they now have some AT&T perks and benefits like bundling wireless discounts. 

GFiber is a close second to Quantum with an overall satisfaction score of 4.64. It falls short on reliability, plan speed and price. 

These top 4 ISP features matter most 

Speed of plan 

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Speed and price are the two most important factors when shopping for internet. “The more people and connected devices in your home, the more speed you’ll need,” Supan says. 

Supan adds that even though ISPs generally highlight their download speeds, upload speeds are arguably just as important, especially if you work from home or play games online. CNET has an internet speed guide to help you determine whether you’re getting the right amount of speed for your home. 

GFiber scores a 4.82 out of 5 for speed, and most users don’t have any speed issues during peak hours. Regionally, Ting scores the highest 5 out of 5 score for speed compared to other regional providers. Your home internet speed will vary depending on your needs and usage. 

Price of plan

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Choosing an internet service provider with a reasonable price can be tough as prices continue to go up due to improvements in internet technology and equipment. How much you can expect to pay will depend on your plan’s speed, connection type and what providers are available in your area. 

Supan says that pricing isn’t always straightforward because many ISPs, especially cable providers, will hike your price after a year or two. However, providers are required to list increases in a broadband label so you can see exactly how much your bill will increase and when, he says. It’s also worth noting that some providers charge a fee if you exceed your plan’s data cap. And your price may change if an introductory promotional period ends. 

T-Mobile Home Internet scores highly with a 4.24 out of 5. It doesn’t have equipment fees, data caps or contracts, which makes its home internet service a more flexible and cost-effective option. Pricing starts at $50, depending on your plan. And Sonic scores 4.65 for no hidden fees or random price hikes. Sonic doesn’t require a contract and offers free installation. 

Reliability

J. Hazelwood/CNET

Earlier this year, CNET found that 86% of US adults experience wonky Wi-Fi connections or drops. And 1 in 5 (19%) regularly have Wi-Fi problems. Internet reliability can depend on a number of factors that may or may not be your ISP’s fault. 

Supan says some internet connection types can be more susceptible to drops or disconnections, but your ISP may still be able to help. You may be able to get your router replaced, or switch your internet channel from 2.4 GHz to 5 GHz. Your connection reliability may also depend on where your router is placed in your home or on the type of router you’re using. Bigger homes can usually benefit from a mesh router system to extend your connection and reduce dead zones. 

CNET readers highly recommend GFiber for reliability and give it a 4.70 out of 5. It offers mesh networking and Wi-Fi 7, the newest and fastest router generation, without data caps or throttling. Sonic scores even higher as a regional provider with 4.90 out of 5. Most don’t experience random connection drops, while others say only a few times a year. Sonic also offers a free Wi-Fi check when installing your internet to double-check your connection and Wi-Fi, which could speak to its high reliability score. 

Customer service

J. Hazelwood

Trying to troubleshoot your Internet troubles on your own can be tough. The right customer support can help — whether it’s extended live assistance hours, online assistance or text message notifications of outages. Some providers even let you schedule in-person appointments online and provide up-to-date articles. 

When choosing a provider, review the support options to ensure you’re comfortable with the availability and resources in case you need them. CNET readers give GFiber high marks for its fast, helpful customer support. 

GFiber scores a 4.72 out of 5 for CNET readers. It offers a customer support page and several ways to get help, including scheduling a call or an online chat. There’s also a list of FAQs covering topics such as billing, internet support and self-installation. EPB scores a flawless 5 out of 5 for excellent customer service ratings. It offers a comprehensive FAQ page with troubleshooting assistance, live online chat, short videos and phone assistance. 

Did you like these findings? CNET’s People’s Picks is community-driven and helps us spread the word about the tech and services you love. Take our ongoing TV survey to tell us what you love about yours. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 25 #1110

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is a bit of a stumper, especially the purple group. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Tech accessories.

Green group hint: Crammed together.

Blue group hint: Specific elements.

Purple group hint: Cheep, cheep!

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Computer peripherals.

Green group: Tightly packed.

Blue group: Hazardous elemental metals.

Purple group: Starting with bird homophones.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 25, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is computer peripherals. The four answers are microphone, monitor, printer and trackpad.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is tightly packed. The four answers are compact, compressed, dense and squashed.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is hazardous elemental metals. The four answers are francium, lead, mercury and polonium.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is starting with bird homophones. The four answers are cranium (crane), croquette (crow), ductile (duck) and hockey (hawk).

Categories: Gadgets

Researchers Turn Old Junk Drawer Smartphones Into a Mini Cloud Computing Platform

E-waste is a pretty serious problem, and researchers have been studying how to reduce, reuse and recycle old tech as long as there has been old tech to recycle. Google Research and the University of California San Diego came up with a pretty cool way to deal with at least some of it. 

Researchers used 2,000 discarded Google Pixel phones to create a mini computing platform. Unlike the famous Taiwanese grandfather who played Pokemon Go on 64 phones, the old Pixels underwent extensive modifications before being placed in their new home. The motherboards were removed and placed in self-governing clusters comprising 25 to 50 devices, according to the study.

The motherboards had their Android operating systems removed and replaced with Linux, which removed many consumer-facing protections, such as a low-memory killer function that helps phones run more smoothly, but would be counterintuitive in a server context. Everything that was unnecessary, like displays, camera arrays and batteries, was removed, leaving just the motherboards to do their thing. 

The Pixel phone server (the blue bars) did surprisingly well on benchmarks compared with an Asus server rack. 

Google

“Each smartphone ‘server’ fits in a standard datacenter tray,” Ryan Kastner, professor of computer science and engineering at UCSD, told CNET in an email. “We’re still determining the exact density, but we plan to fit dozens of phones per tray. Since we are removing the battery, chassis, and display, each device is significantly smaller than an unmodified phone.”

This setup was pretty successful. According to Google, the Pixels performed better or at least on par with professional server racks like the Asus RS720A, a popular choice for enterprise data centers. This made them viable for UC San Diego’s needs, including a small-scale cloud computing platform that could run applications for classes. 

UC San Diego says that 20 Pixels were enough to support a class with over 75 students, and with 2,000 Pixels, they could support 100 classes at once.  Computer science and engineering will be the first classes to test the tech.

“Longer term, we envision that other departments could move some of their compute requirements onto these systems as well,” Kastner said. “To enable this, we are working to integrate the smartphone clusters into the UCSD Data Science and Machine Learning Platform, which serves as a centralized compute resource for education and research across campus.”

The big win for UC San Diego was cost. The price of the Pixel phones and the time it took to set them up was “a fraction of the usual cost” of a comparable amount of server computing power. UC San Diego intends to study how long consumer-grade electronics can last in a more intense server environment and plans to launch the system in the fall 2026 semester. 

Not a simple process

The experiment is undeniably ambitious and, if the UC San Diego team succeeds, could represent a significant achievement. But it hasn’t been easy. Beyond challenges such as removing batteries to mitigate fire risks, researchers have had to navigate a range of additional technical and logistical obstacles.

“These devices were never meant to run a data center,” Kastner said. “That means we have a lot of exciting unknowns to answer, as well as some trouble getting the hardware to fit into a hole it doesn’t fit.”

One issue concerns the wireless communication systems that come with every smartphone, including Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and cellular signals. Kastner said that these would cause significant “self-interference” if left on, affecting a wide range of functions. All those avenues for connecting also pose a security risk, as even a single hacked phone could leak confidential information. To prevent such issues, the team ensured that all radios were permanently disabled. 

Another hurdle was temperature. The team is using standard data center cooling measures, such as fans and heatsinks, to dissipate heat. Smartphones have many consumer protections in place to prevent them from overheating. These protections aren’t necessary in a datacenter environment, so the team spent quite a bit of time finding and disabling these protections, an act that Kastner refers to as a “needle in a haystack situation.” 

Part of the experiment is to see whether these higher temperatures affect long-term reliability. 

“Giving these smartphones new lives is no small feat,” said Kastner. “Repurposing the smartphone to operate as a general-purpose compute processor that can handle diverse cloud workloads was, and remains, a significant challenge and requires undoing a lot of sophisticated techniques that are required for it to operate as a smartphone.”

A small solution to a big problem

While small in scale, the experiment could pave the way for further academic research. Google says that the vast majority of school usage, including teaching, grading and even research, is “within the capabilities of a single smartphone to host.” Should UC San Diego’s experiment prove successful, colleges all over the world could use old, discarded smartphones in similar server setups to help reduce costs.

However, this approach isn’t the next big thing in data center or server construction. Data centers can process hundreds of gigabytes per second on the low end. Data centers for AI and other enterprise applications require much larger, stronger and more robust solutions, which bring with them an entirely different set of environmental concerns, such as the enormous amount of water they require to stay cool and the fact that some data centers use enough electricity to power tens of thousands of homes.

There is no chance that a gaggle of old smartphone motherboards will make an impact on the broader data center industry, but it is nice to see it work on smaller scales, where businesses and researchers alike often overpay for cloud computing power when they really don’t need that much. 

A drop in the bucket for e-waste

It’s commendable that researchers and companies are seeking ways to use e-waste, but they still have a long way to go. The 2,000-smartphone server farm built by UCSD removed a tiny fraction of the estimated 62 million tons of e-waste entering the garbage stream each year, with only 22.3% of it properly recycled. CNET readers do better than average, recycling old tech 39% of the time, but that’s still a concern. 

An estimated 5.3 billion mobile phones are discarded each year. That means UCSD would need to build another 2.65 million such server farms per year, in perpetuity, to clean it all up. There’s no expectation that any one university do so, but it shows just how big the e-waste problem really is. Those numbers also don’t account for the large number of adults who keep old tech in a closet, collecting dust. 

Other initiatives are helping with this. Right-to-repair laws in the US are slowly making it easier and more affordable to repair tech instead of just throwing it away. Governments and companies are working to raise awareness of proper e-waste recycling so that these metals and chemicals can be reused rather than left to rot in a dump somewhere. 

Should UC San Diego’s experiment prove successful, it may be another in a long line of small initiatives to help clean up a problem that was once considered out of control.

Categories: Gadgets

Lawsuit Accuses Gas Stations of Using AI to Jack Up Fuel Prices in California

Californians who’ve felt the pinch of average gas prices as high as $6 to $7 a gallon in recent months may have some eventual recourse if a proposed class action lawsuit goes through.

The lawsuit, filed on June 22 in the Eastern District of California, accuses several major gas station operators of manipulating pump prices by using AI-driven pricing software from Kalibrate Fuel Systems, a tool that allegedly uses competitor data to influence fuel costs. The complaint targets more than 1,700 gas stations across the state, including BP, Walmart, Marathon Petroleum, 7-Eleven, Albertsons and Circle K. 

Plaintiffs argue that, where the automated software is widely used, prices rose by about 30 cents per gallon above what normal competition would have produced. The lawsuit calls it “an illegal algorithmic price-fixing scheme orchestrated by the algorithmic pricing company Kalibrate and some of the state’s largest fuel retailers.” 

California has the highest average gas prices in the country, and even small increases from pricing software can have a big impact on drivers.

A representative for Kalibrate did not immediately return a request for comment.

Cracking down on algorithmic price fixing

According to the lawsuit, the gas companies violated California law AB 325, which went into effect earlier this year to crack down on algorithmic price fixing. AB 325 gives California plaintiffs an antitrust hook for claims that competitors used a shared pricing algorithm as part of a conspiracy to restrain trade, and it also makes it easier to plead such cases under the state’s main antitrust law, the Cartwright Act.

The spokesperson from the California Energy Commission’s Division of Petroleum Market Oversight said the agency, which closely monitors fuel markets, has put fuel refiners, distributors and sellers on notice (PDF) about AB 325. “DPMO will continue to engage with market participants to ensure that they are familiar with their legal obligations in the Golden State,” the spokesperson told CNET via email.

Earlier this month, the Commission issued a warning that branded gasoline may cost significantly more than generic gas amid rising fuel prices driven by the war in Iran. The Commission was already investigating high-priced gas stations in the state.

The suit names three California plaintiffs: Joel Casciani of Chula Vista; Paola Hartman of Homeland; and Crystal Turnbough of Marysville. All three say they purchased gas at inflated prices from gas stations owned by companies that use Kalibrate Fuel Pricing. 

It doesn’t specify a dollar amount for the damages the plaintiffs are seeking, but it does call for the recovery of compensatory damages and the awarding of three times the damages caused.

The suit comes just as Kalibrate recently introduced a mobile app that allows fuel retailers to set prices on their phones. According to the description, some of the  features include “enhanced market insight, new mobile capabilities and AI-driven features designed to bring greater clarity to pricing decisions.”

Opposition to dynamic and surveillance pricing

Dynamic pricing is not new. It’s been a fact of life for decades since algorithms were integrated into companies’ sales systems. The most public examples have been Uber’s surge pricing for ridesharing and ticket pricing among airlines.

Recently, World Cup ticket prices reached record highs because they are set by demand. While many World Cup fans criticized the practice, the US Chamber of Commerce defended dynamic pricing, noting that after the initial rush, ticket prices dropped. 

What’s changed in recent years is that companies now have much more data about their customers and, with the help of AI, can set prices based on what they know, a practice called surveillance pricing. While dynamic pricing is based on demand, competition or local market conditions, surveillance pricing means a company uses personal data about a shopper to determine what price that shopper is likely to pay.

The state of New York passed a law restricting surveillance pricing in December, which went into effect recently. California lawmakers have also been moving to restrict surveillance pricing, with AB 2564 aiming to ban retailers from setting prices based on personal information. Many digital rights and privacy activists support the proposed ban, including the Electronic Frontier Foundation, which says that “surveillance pricing is bad for privacy, equity and price transparency. “

Categories: Gadgets

Madison Square Garden Targeted Privacy Activists and Surveillance Critics

It’s no secret that publicly criticizing Madison Square Garden Entertainment CEO James Dolan might get you put on a list. Now, a leaked document reveals the company compiled a detailed dossier on activists who oppose its venues’ facial recognition surveillance — and packed those files with a startling amount of their personal information.

The alleged document, titled “Facial Recognition Activists.docx,” was made public after a group of hackers published a 45GB cache of data they stole from MSG earlier in June, which leaked 26 million customer records, including contact details and biometric or facial recognition data. 

The news follows an extensive Wired investigation from April that found that New York Knicks owner Dolan operates an expansive biometric surveillance network far beyond MSG’s venues, which include Madison Square Garden, Radio City Music Hall and the Beacon Theatre. The company says it uses face-scanning technology to identify potential security threats, but its biometric surveillance practices have drawn sharp criticism.

Activists, civil rights groups and public officials have long warned that the deployment of facial recognition at entertainment venuesprivate homes and public streets strips individuals of anonymity. By harvesting and storing a massive trove of sensitive data, these systems create digital paper trails that are highly vulnerable to security breaches. 

In fact, MSG is now facing three class-action lawsuits stemming from the massive hack, according to the New York Times. The suits say the company failed to adequately protect sensitive information and are seeking damages for the breach and the risk of identity theft and privacy harm.

A representative for MSG Entertainment did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

Targeting activists

According to reporting by 404 Media, which downloaded and reviewed the leaked data from the hack, the dossier tracking facial recognition critics contains private data on three activists, including their backgrounds, contact info, social media posts and follower counts.

The individuals in the document are prominent representatives of digital rights and privacy groups: Adam Schwartz, privacy litigation director at the Electronic Frontier Foundation; Albert Fox Cahn, founder of the Surveillance Technology Oversight Project, or STOP; and Evan Greer, director of Fight for the Future.

“Sadly, data breaches are an all-too-common feature of modern life, which is one more reason that corporations like Madison Square Garden should not harvest and hoard personal information about their customers,” Schwartz wrote in an email to CNET. “Biometric surveillance like face recognition is especially dangerous, because we can’t change our faces and we show them wherever we go.”

Fight for the Future’s official statement said that MSG is incapable of safeguarding the data it collects. “Large companies can and will use surveillance tech to punish critics, exploit workers and consolidate power, with no regard for the basic rights they trample in the process,” wrote Greer. 

In a press release about the incident, STOP Executive Director Michelle Dahl said she isn’t surprised that MSG has the organization on a blacklist.

“This company continues to double down on its invasive surveillance practices, and we’re pushing back,” she said in a statement. “No one should be tracked by a company or excluded from a venue for exercising their right to free speech.”

Facial recognition backlash

Facial recognition cameras have been installed in MSG Entertainment’s New York City venues since 2018. In that time, numerous perceived enemies have been added to watch lists and removed from MSG-owned buildings.

Lawyers involved in lawsuits against the company have been placed on “exclusion lists” and are routinely removed from paid ticketed events, according to multiple reports.

The practice came to light after a personal injury lawyer chaperoning her daughter’s Girl Scout troop was removed from a Radio City Music Hall Rockettes show in November 2022. Another lawyer revealed he was removed from the Madison Square Garden arena during a New York Rangers hockey game for the same reason.

At the time, Dolan compared his policy to the movie The Godfather. “If you sue us, we’re going to tell you not to come,” he said.

Recent reports also allege that MSG Entertainment Chief Security Officer John Eversole carried out a surveillance campaign on a trans woman who visited the company’s venues, with a former MSG security staffer alleging this was carried out solely on the basis of her identity.

The woman was eventually banned after stalking accusations. Eversole allegedly wanted to keep her “away from the players.”

Dahl argued that the release of this dossier is one among many reasons that the New York City Council should craft legislation to “ban biometric surveillance in arenas and other public accommodations.”

Everyday surveillance 

MSG Entertainment is just one example of the broader domestic expansion of privacy-eroding surveillance in the US, including Big Tech’s use of targeted ads based on your online activity and algorithms that track your cellphone’s GPS location data

Similar to the backlash against facial recognition technology at entertainment venues, communities across the country have been pushing back against the proliferation of Flock AI-powered license plate cameras installed without public input or consent. In some cases, opponents have mobilized to put the cameras out of commission. An open-source map now tracks Flock cameras around the country.

The clash underscores anxiety over private corporations aggressively harvesting biometric data. And because these systems are now integrated into law enforcement networks, including federal and immigration agencies, concern over who controls our personal information continues to grow. 

Even if you scale down your personal technology use, you can still be spied on and cataloged by a passerby wearing smart glasses

Categories: Gadgets

‘Supergirl’ Review: A Solid ‘Superman’ Follow-Up That Could Really Use More Lobo

Supergirl is the second full-length film from James Gunn’s DC Studios and it switches gears from last year’s Superman to focus on his younger cousin Kara. Milly Alcock steps into the Kryptonian’s shoes, who, up until now, has mostly existed on the small screen, thanks to the CW series.

This iteration of Supergirl exists in the same stylistic space as Guardians of the Galaxy. Kara, like Star-Lord (Chris Pratt), lives in an analog universe where her surroundings are gritty, lived-in and tactile, which is a stark difference from the hyper-colorful world of Metropolis, where Clark Kent resides. 

Both characters are cut from a similar cloth, what with the way they dress, the old-school headphones they prefer and the sardonic way they interact with those they meet. Their rough, deprecating exteriors are informed by separate traumas.

As seen throughout the Guardians trilogy, Star-Lord cultivates a found family, giving his life meaning and purpose. In Supergirl, the only family Kara has — aside from her older, “nerdy” cousin (her words, not mine) — is her loyal dog, Krypto. And it doesn’t take long before his life is put in peril, sending her on a galaxy-hopping mission to save his life.

Read more: ‘Peacemaker’ Season 2 Ending, Explained: What Happens Now?

Milly Alcock as Supergirl/Kara Zor-El.

Warner Bros. Pictures

Alcock stars alongside Eve Ridley, who plays young Ruthye, a girl who enlists Kara on a dangerous mission of vengeance. Jason Momoa is an absolute blast as the iconic immortal bounty hunter Lobo, while Matthias Schoenaerts twirls his mustache as the villainous Krem of the Yellow Hills. (Spoiler: He doesn’t have a mustache.) 

If you’re familiar with the comic book Supergirl: Woman of Tomorrow, those names should ring a bell. If not, don’t fret: The movie strays from the source material enough to make for a fun ride regardless.

David Corenswet appears here and there, tethering the Craig Gillespie-directed outing to Superman, but for the most part, this is a Milly Alcock affair. And her dog Krypto is the key to the whole plot.

When I wrote about Superman last year, I revisited the idea that kindness was the new punk rock. It was a refreshing theme that ran throughout the film. Supergirl doesn’t say that; not really.

Instead, the lesson here is simply to be good in a world that can so often be unfair, unrelenting and unkind.

Milly Alcock and Eve Ridley star in Supergirl.

DC Studios/Warner Bros. Pictures

Through her journey with Ruthye, whose sole mission is to kill Krem, we witness eye-opening flashbacks of her life on Krypton. Unlike Kal-El, who was shipped off the planet as a baby, Kara enjoyed a childhood there. And when the planet began to collapse, the movie explores the traumatic effects of watching her family slowly die as she gets sent away to a new planet, never to see her home or loved ones again.

This is where Krypto comes in. That little ball of spunky, loyal energy was an absolute highlight in Superman. In Supergirl, his backstory is revealed, making his role in Kara’s life even more significant. She found him on Krypton, making him her physical connection to home. He’s also her closest loved one and most trusted friend, making the dog an embodiment of home itself.

With three days to save his life, Kara travels to a variety of planets — by ship, aboard a clunky space bus and via other means — to track down Krem. Along the way, she forges a bond with Ruthye, fights alongside the wisecracking Lobo and saves a shipload of young women from Krem after learning that his crew abducts them as brides to propagate their all-male species.

If that sounds familiar, it’s because a similar plotline is explored in Mad Max: Fury Road. In fact, nearly everything about Krem’s crew screamed Mad Max to me. I didn’t mind the homage, but the way this particular plot point was handled felt somewhat unoriginal.

Performance-wise, Alcock is terrific as Kara. She skillfully balances the weight of her character’s tragic backstory with a steady stream of witty quips, all while underplaying her superpowers. The movie begins with Kara on a drunk bender, drifting aimlessly through space without a sense of purpose. By the end, she’s found a friend in Ruthye (played with emotional determination by Ridley) and the confidence to potentially fight crime alongside her older cousin.

Jason Momoa stars as Lobo in Supergirl.

DC Studios/Warner Bros. Pictures

It’s safe to say that most reviews you read about Supergirl will rave about Jason Momoa’s turn as Lobo. My only gripe about his performance is that there wasn’t enough of it. Every time he exited the frame, I wanted the camera to follow. Hopefully, they’ll make a standalone Lobo film happen.

Schoenaerts’s take on Krem is an over-the-top exercise in villainy. I’m sure some will have a gripe with how he portrayed the bad guy. I didn’t mind it, really. After all, this is a science fiction comic book movie. Yet, much like the Mad Max detail I mentioned above, his performance kept reminding me of Christopher Plummer’s turn as General Chang in Star Trek VI: The Undiscovered Country — except, more feral and without all the Shakespeare quotes.

I suppose my point is that Supergirl feels like a collection of ideas inspired by other things, repackaged into a new thing here. Along with Gunn’s signature move of having every stylized fight sequence fueled by some form of pop music, I found myself checking out more than once.

Perhaps that’s because Craig Gillespie has never helmed a movie of this caliber before. Maybe it’s due to the script’s random clunkiness. Through all the fun visuals and deeper emotional plot points, Supergirl ultimately felt like a movie walking the walk without living fully and truthfully in the protagonist’s shoes.

That’s not to say it’s not good; the movie absolutely is. But it’s not on the same level as Superman, and that’s fine. Supergirl has got the pacing, emotional stakes, action sequences and needle drops that’ll keep audiences entertained. 

Just don’t expect an end credits scene — James Gunn doesn’t like those.

Categories: Gadgets

Prime Day Live: We Picked Out the 117+ Best Deals Worth Buying on Day 2

The NotePin S AI wearable, seen here on the wrist of CNET’s Katie Collins, could be really useful for my job. And it’s on sale for Prime Day.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

I took over the role of CNET’s editorial leader earlier this year, and while I’ve participated in Prime Day sales as a TV reviewer and general deals editor here for (literally) decades, this is my first Prime Day as EIC. In case you’re wondering what purchases a person like me is considering this time around, here’s a sampling.

iPad 11-inch A16 ($300): My artistic daughter has been asking for an iPad and if my wife approves, I’ll likely get her this basic version, our top pick for most people. I’d also get her the Apple Pencil (on sale for $60). We’d save both of these for Christmas presents.

Belkin Portable Charger Bank ($38): My family and I always need portable chargers. Half our devices call for Lightning and the other half for USB-C. This does both and I like the built-in cables.

Plaud NotePin S AI Notetaker ($152): In my new role I take more meetings than ever, and I also have plenty of valuable face-to-face conversations in the office and beyond. I currently depend on the Otter app on my phone and Gemini+Google Meet recordings at work to take notes (with appropriate permission, of course). This AI wearable could be my “secret weapon” to consolidate everything in one place.

JBL Go 4 Bluetooth Speaker ($38): I actually bought this one a few days ago when it was $40 – still a great deal, but now even better. It’s no longer one of our best Bluetooth speakers but it’s good enough for my (other) daughter, who wants one for the beach. At this price, I won’t be too annoyed if (when?) it gets destroyed by sand and surf. And yes, I got her the pink one which I know she’ll love. We’re saving this for her birthday.

Anker Solix F2000 portable power station ($749): I own a travel trailer and upgraded to solar with an inverter, but at a recent (shady) campsite, I still had to break out my loud, annoying propane generator. Sure, I could just add more standard 12V LiPo4 batteries, but this portable power station is so much more versatile. It includes a 30A RV outlet, and the wheels make it worth the extra $50 over the Bluetti AC200L. No way my wife approves this one, but it stays on the list anyway because I’m camping tech obsessed.

Categories: Gadgets

May Mobility Aims to Expand Robotaxi Operations Overseas Through New Partnership

Self-driving tech company May Mobility is looking to bring its robotaxis to new international markets by teaming up with Chinese ride-hailing service CaoCao. The partnership, announced Wednesday, aims to bring “large-scale commercialization of robotaxi services” to more locations, starting in Europe.

As part of the agreement, the two companies will look into expanding commercial robotaxi operations and launch pilot programs in “key markets, including Europe.” CaoCao will own the robotaxi fleet and operate services such as vehicle support and maintenance, while May Mobility’s autonomous driving tech will power the self-driving fleet. 

May Mobility has previously partnered with ride-hailing companies Lyft and Uber to bring its robotaxis to cities including Atlanta and, soon, Arlington, Texas. Earlier this year, May Mobility expanded into Japan and says it’s completed more than half a million commercial autonomous rides in the US and Japan. It currently uses hybrid-electric Toyota Sienna minivans equipped with its self-driving technology and aims to announce a new third-party vehicle platform later this year.

May Mobility’s autonomous vehicle system relies on multi-policy decision making technology. The company says it “applies real-time, human-like reasoning to handle unexpected situations with AI-powered speed and precision.” That allows the robotaxis to navigate real-world scenarios that spring up in the moment, which can be helpful as May Mobility enters new international markets.

See also: I Got a Front-Row Seat to the Future of Autonomous Vehicles at CES 2026

Like other ride-hailing platforms, CaoCao is leaning into physical AI and self-driving partnerships. Last week, the company said it “plans to deploy a total of 100,000 robotaxis and 100,000 robovans” by 2030. Uber and Lyft have also collaborated with dozens of AV companies, including Waymo, Nuro and Tensor, as the self-driving space picks up steam.

“International expansion is a key direction for CaoCao’s autonomous driving business,” the company said in a statement. “Europe offers diverse real-world environments and strong potential for robotaxi commercialization. Through our collaboration with May Mobility, we aim to combine our strengths in operations with their leadership in autonomous driving technology to accelerate validation and deployment across different markets.” 

Categories: Gadgets

If you want to cut your screen time, just get a Brick

I’ve had screen time limits on my iPhone for years, allowing me 30 minutes on social media each day. How many times have I dismissed the limit notification and continued watching mindless Reels? I’d be horrified to find out.

It turns out that all along, what I needed was a $59 hunk of grey plastic (self-discipline would have been more affordable, but it was out of stock). The Brick — a magnetic, matchbox-sized gadget — has accomplished what no screen time app has ever achieved. It actually got me to use my phone less and improve my sleep habits.

Brick stands apart from your standard screen time app because it takes things a step further into the physical world. The gadget is a branded, NFC-enabled square that only lets you deactivate your custom screen time limits if you tap your phone to the Brick, just like you’re buying something at a tap-to-pay kiosk. Apparently, if I have to physically get up and tap my phone to the Brick to go on Instagram, I will not go on Instagram.

“Brick was born from a personal need: our phones were getting in the way of living,” co-founder Zach Nasgowitz told TechCrunch via email. “We searched for solutions to this problem in our lives, but we found that nothing was quite right, so we decided to build something for ourselves that would solve this problem.”

Image Credits:Brick (opens in a new window)

I used Brick to help me with my sleep hygiene, and I am embarrassed to admit that it’s working even better than I could have hoped.

Like many other millennials — especially those of us whose jobs are so connected to the internet — I have a bad habit of getting into bed at night and scrolling mindlessly on my phone, making it harder to sleep. Even worse, sometimes when I wake up, I end up staying in bed on my phone, and I start the day feeling groggy.

I created a “Sleep” mode on the Brick app, which turns on each night at 10:30 p.m.. Then, my phone automatically blocks all apps except for messaging apps (I want to be reachable, just in case) and audio apps (I sometimes listen to podcasts or audiobooks to help me sleep). When I wake up, I can’t waste time on my phone unless I get out of bed, walk downstairs, and tap my phone to the Brick. (If you want to leave your phone out of your bedroom altogether, but use podcasts as a sleep aid, I’d suggest the Dreamie alarm clock.)

It’s embarrassing that I needed a $59 piece of plastic to make a lifestyle change, but without the Brick, it would be too easy for me to fall back into old habits. I’ve been testing a Brick that the company sent me to review, and it’s been so effective that I’m going to buy one so that I can keep using it (we return or give away our review units for ethical reasons). If you really wanted to, you could even try to DIY something like a Brick by using an NFC tag and Apple Shortcuts.

“Software-only solutions like Screen Time and Digital Wellbeing are easy to bypass, and what actually works is adding friction,” Brick co-founder TJ Driver told TechCrunch via email. “This has allowed physical technology to come into play to create real separation that a software prompt can’t replicate. By requiring you to physically return to the device to unblock your apps, the decision to reconnect becomes an intentional one rather than an unconscious reflex.”

Users are provided a small number of “emergency unbricks,” just in case you’re out when your phone bricks and you really need a specific app, like Google Maps or Uber, to get home safely. But I find it easier to just lump those apps into my sleep mode for the rare occasion that I’m out late, so I don’t need to waste an emergency unbrick. It doesn’t affect my sleep to know that I can open the Uber app. I do not doomscroll on Uber.

“Rather than constantly relying on willpower, it can be more effective to design your environment so that you don’t have to always be taxing your willpower or brain,” Driver said. “Things like Brick help people choose how they want their phone to best serve them for a given moment or task, and then design their digital environment so that they don’t have to think about it anymore.”

Image Credits:Brick, screenshots by TechCrunch

This emphasis on personalization and agency is what has made the product work for so many customers.

“One user had wanted a dumb phone for years, but couldn’t give up his primary texting app, KakaoTalk, for communicating with his wife and friends based in Korea,” said Nasgowitz. “He shared that, ‘Brick has turned my phone into what I always wanted – a phone that can text, call, take some photos, and use Kakao. It’s perfect.’”

People are getting more interested in switching to “dumb phones” as they become more disillusioned with Big Tech. But flip phones aren’t made for our current lifestyles, where we scan our phones instead of printing out concert tickets, use our phones to pay subway fares, and have jobs that require us to use specific two-factor authentication apps. (Some companies, like Dumb Co and Commodore, are trying to remedy this by hacking flip phones to load apps like authenticators and WhatsApp, or by creating new hardware altogether.)

If you’re nervous about making a more extreme change like getting a flip phone, the Brick is a happy medium — it works, but it’s not as drastic an intervention. You can make your phone as dumb as you want, whenever you want.

“When you zoom out and think about the screen time movement as a whole, it isn’t about rejecting technology,” Driver said. “It’s about reclaiming agency and being intentional again.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Reading Glasses to Buy Online in 2026

Strength

Reading glasses typically range from +0.25 to +2.50 diopters (the unit of measurement for eye prescriptions), though the average starting strength is usually around +0.75. In rare cases, reading glass strength can go up to +4.00. 

“Tips for buying reading glasses online are similar to buying ready-made reading glasses at the drugstore: It’s a convenient option but it’s not a good idea for everyone,” says Dr. Ravi Goel, clinical spokesperson for the American Academy of Ophthalmology. “If you have different prescription needs in each eye, astigmatism, high-power or more complex prescription needs, you should see an eye care professional for updated prescription eyewear.”

Reed seconds this, adding, “The wrong prescription can lead to headaches, eye strain or even nausea. If you do choose to buy online, we recommend selecting a lower power when deciding between two strengths, as this is generally a safer choice, and overly strong lenses tend to cause more discomfort than those that are slightly weaker.”

Goel notes that everyone older than 40 should see an ophthalmologist for a medical eye exam because that is the age when presbyopia and potentially blinding eye diseases usually begin developing. Plus, not all eye diseases begin with noticeable symptoms.

Type of reading glasses

“There are four main types of reading glasses: single vision, bifocal, trifocal and progressive,” says Goel, defining them as:

  • Single-vision reading lenses are typically designed to correct just for near vision. 
  • Bifocal lenses have a correction for reading on the bottom half of the lens and another for distance on the top.
  • Trifocal lenses have three sections: distance, intermediate and near vision. Reed says these can be particularly helpful for people over 50 experiencing reduced depth of focus.
  • Progressive lenses have a smooth transition between distance and near focal areas without visible dividing lines. “They deliver a more natural look and a smoother transition between different viewing distances,” adds Reed.

“When generic OTC readers are no longer enough, prescription reading glasses — also called single-vision readers — are a great next step. These are custom-made by an eye doctor to correct for astigmatism, unequal prescriptions or other specific vision needs,” says Reed. “For those who need multiple levels of vision correction, there are multifocal lenses.” 

The best lens material

“This depends on lifestyle,” Goel says. “For example, if you spend a lot of time outdoors, you might prefer polycarbonate, which is lightweight and doesn’t break easily. There are also various lens coatings available for convenience (i.e., anti-reflective coatings) but are not required.”

Goel notes that the American Academy of Ophthalmology doesn’t recommend blue light-blocking coatings or lenses because “there is no scientific evidence to suggest blue light-blocking glasses help reduce eye strain.” Instead, take breaks from near-work activity and use eye drops if necessary. If you continue to experience symptoms, see an ophthalmologist.

According to Reed, most people choose among the following three lens materials for reading glasses:

  • CR-39 plastic lenses: Affordable, lightweight and provide good optical clarity, making them a popular choice for basic reading glasses.
  • Polycarbonate lenses: Lighter and significantly more impact-resistant than CR-39 plastic, making them a safer option for people who tend to drop their glasses or want something more durable. 
  • High-index plastic lenses: Thinner and lighter than other materials and are a good choice for people who need a stronger prescription but want to avoid thick, heavy lenses.

“For most reading glasses, especially for occasional or indoor use, CR-39 plastic works well,” says Reed. “If you need extra durability or prefer thinner, lighter lenses, polycarbonate or high-index materials may be a better fit. Your doctor of optometry can help recommend the best lens material based on your specific needs.”

Reed adds that not all lens materials and coatings are created equal. That’s why it’s important to check with your eye doctor to ensure the reading glasses you choose are the right fit for you. 

Style

One of the most fun parts of buying glasses is finding a frame that speaks to your personal style and fits with your face shape. When shopping for glasses online, pay attention to the material, color and width. 

Price

Reading glasses can range from affordable to expensive. For instance, if you want a designer pair of reading glasses, be prepared to spend over $100. If you tend to lose your reading glasses, you may want to buy more inexpensive pairs to keep multiple on hand.

“Price of eyeglasses is not necessarily reflective of quality; the real question is if someone finds the ready-made reading glasses helpful or if they need custom reading glasses to meet their vision needs,” explains Goel.  

“In general, spending more on frames doesn’t mean you’ll end up with better-quality eyeglasses. You don’t need designer frames to have a good set of glasses. For prescription lenses, such as bifocal, trifocal or progressive lenses, an optician will help you select good lenses that best meet your vision needs. A personalized evaluation of vision needs is a value-add that is often missed by online sellers.”

Additional coatings

You can get reading glasses with lenses treated with blue light, anti-glare and polarization coatings. But note that you’ll likely have to pay extra for these. 

Shipping and returns

If you buy your reading glasses online, you likely won’t get to try them on before you buy. As a result, ensure the company has a return and exchange policy you can work with. As for shipping, if you need your reading glasses ASAP, you’re better off going with a company that offers express or overnight shipping. 

Categories: Gadgets

Here’s Why Weber Dominates Every ‘Best Grill’ List — Including Ours

After decades of testing grills at CNET, one thing hasn’t changed: Weber finds a top spot on our list every year. That reputation is well-deserved — and our results consistently prove it. This year, the midpriced Weber Spirit E-325 leads our gas and best overall grill rankings. Of the more than 30 models tested, it delivers the best combination of performance, a robust warranty and overall value. Likewise, the always-reliable Weber Q1200 holds its spot as CNET’s top portable grill.

This isn’t an outlier year. Recommending Weber grills may feel like old hat, but we have a host of reasons and plenty of data to back up the picks.

Performance is only part of the story. Weber grills are built to last, and models we’ve tested over multiple seasons routinely outlast the competition. The smaller details hold up, too: igniters that don’t quit, burners that respond predictably, and accessories designed for use.

And you don’t have to pay a premium for one — at least not by comparison to others we test. Other brands offer some of Weber’s signature features, but none we’ve tested manages to bundle them at such an approachable price. Broil King comes close in terms of features, but most of its lineup starts around $600 and climbs steeply from there.

Here’s what makes Webers unique and why they continue to keep earning the CNET stamp of approval year after year. 

1. Cast-aluminum cookbox

Weber’s cast-aluminum cookboxes retain heat well and ward off corrosion better than porcelain-enameled steel.

David Watsky/CNET

One of Weber’s most meaningful engineering advantages is its cast-aluminum cookbox. The material checks a rare combination of boxes: it retains heat well, resists corrosion, and is light enough to keep the grill manageable — a practical choice that also happens to be durable. Budget brands typically cut corners here, relying on porcelain-enameled or thin stainless steel that’s far more vulnerable to rust and deterioration over time.

Weber’s commitment to durability goes beyond the materials themselves. According to Roberto Carvajal, the brand’s vice president of product management, Weber subjects its grills to a rigorous battery of tests — including salt-fog, impact, abrasion, chemical and weathering evaluations — to verify long-term performance rather than just surface-level quality.

The main alternative at the higher end of the market is heavy-duty 304-grade stainless steel, favored by ultra-premium and commercial-grade grill makers for its heat retention and toughness. It’s a capable material, but it comes at a steep price — one most backyard cooks won’t need to pay.

2. High-functioning burners 

Weber’s burners respond quickly and accurately to our temperature adjustments.

David Watsky/CNET

When moving through a cohort of grills, burner performance is one of the first things we notice — specifically, how quickly burners respond to dial adjustments, how evenly they hold temperature, and how reliably they stay lit throughout a cook.

Some brands chase headline BTU numbers, but Weber takes a different approach. According to Carvajal, the focus is on consistency and control rather than raw output. The result is a burner system engineered for precision — one that gives you repeatable, reliable heat session after session, not just an impressive spec on the box.

  • Weber’s proprietary PureBlu burner design, found in the Genesis and Summit gas grills, allows gas and air to mix for a cleaner burn and higher energy transfer to the cooking surface.
  • Weber gas grills use longer burner tubes with many ports along their entire length, from front to back, ensuring maximum heat coverage for even, consistent results.
  • Precision valve control that allows for a linear, highly controlled heat curve rather than “low/medium/high jumps” when you turn the knobs on the grill.
  • Reliable ignition that lights burners quickly; the system includes crossover and burner design for consistent flame stability even in real-world conditions.

Read moreYou Know Your Grill Needs Cleaning. Here’s How to Do It Right

3. Heat retention

We strapped temperature probes to dozens of grills. Weber’s heat distribution and retention consistently rank among the best.

David Watsky/CNET

To evaluate performance, we insert temperature probes into every grill we test to measure how well each one distributes, retains, and recovers heat. Weber grills consistently outperform others in their price class across all three metrics. The difference isn’t just that they get hot — it’s that they maintain a stable, even heat environment, which translates to faster recovery times and more consistent results at the grate. Carvajal points to a few key factors behind that performance.

  • Careful engineering for even heat distribution across the grate;
  • Balanced heat system with a carefully tuned mix of conductive heat (grates), radiant heat (Flavorizer bars) and convective heat (airflow design).
  • Closed-lid convection design popularized by founder George Stephen Sr., who brought closed-lid cooking to grilling and optimized circular airflow for even results.
  • Thermal mass and component design: Weber’s signature Flavorizer bars and cast materials help store and re-radiate heat, aiding recovery after lid openings; porcelain-enameled cast iron grates retain heat for better searing and stability.

4. Overall value

Weber grills, including large and premium models, offer clear value over competitors.

Brian Bennett/CNET

For all that engineering, Weber manages to keep prices grounded. Having tested plenty of ultra-premium grills, I can say with confidence that most don’t offer meaningfully more than a $500 Spirit — at least not where it counts.

Some critics have noted that Weber moved much of its manufacturing to China around 2017. Previously, most grills were still made in the US. From our vantage point, that shift hasn’t produced any discernible drop in quality.

When I asked Carvajal how Weber delivers this level of performance without the luxury price tag, he came back to the brand’s discipline around focus.

“Weber prioritizes performance and longevity over specific features,” he said. “This means we focus on what consumers care about most. Our research shows that consumers desire even heat distribution, fast preheat, durability and temperature control. We offer long-term ownership value with durable materials, replacement parts and generous warranties that help extend the lifecycle of our grills — so there is better cost-per-use over time.”

5. Weber’s accessories ecosystem

Like its grills, Weber’s tools and accessories are always thoughtfully designed, soundly manufactured and rarely gimmicky.

“We are always thinking about how to make the entire experience even 5% better,” Carvajal explains. “A lot of the design ideas come from our own grilling experiences, as well as from customer research. The Weber accessory strategy succeeds because it’s functional, integrated, and cooking-focused, based on real consumer pain points. They enhance, not complicate, the grilling experience. 

Weber put out a flat-top Slate griddle series in 2024. It quickly became one of our favorites. 

Weber

Some of Weber’s biggest product success stories include:  

  • Weber Crafted outdoor kitchen collection (2022): This cooking system was designed to bring versatility to outdoor cooking, with a frame that allows cooks to seamlessly drop in grillware accessories (griddle insert, pizza stone, wok, searing grate, grilling basket, etc.).
  • Griddle inserts (2024): Weber introduced Weber Crafted griddle inserts in 2022 and launched a next-generation rust-resistant griddle insert platform in 2024 alongside the debut of the Slate griddle series. Griddle cooking was becoming more popular, so they gave consumers more choices by offering a free-standing, stand-alone griddle (Slate) or inserts made of the same material to make just about any Weber grill a griddle.
  • Weber Works drop-in and snap-on accessories (2024): Weber introduced the Weber Works interchangeable accessory system in 2024, debuting with the Slate griddle lineup and later expanding compatibility across multiple Weber grill platforms, including Genesis and Spirit gas grills, and the updated Performer charcoal grills. This modular accessory system turns the side shelf and prep area of compatible grills and griddles into a customizable outdoor workstation.
  • Weber Connect smart grilling (2020): Weber introduced the Weber Connect Smart Grilling Hub at CES in 2020, bringing app-connected smart grilling technology and guided cooking assistance to virtually any grill. The system provides ways to seamlessly monitor food and/or grill temperatures and cooking times for flavorful results every time. 

6. Some of the best warranties

Strong performance and durability are only part of the value proposition — Weber also backs its grills with some of the best warranties in the business. Most major components on its popular models are covered for 10 years, a level of protection that’s rare at Weber’s price points. 

Broil King offers comparable coverage on select models, but it’s generally reserved for its higher-end lineup. Napoleon is the one manufacturer that consistently matches Weber on this front, with 10-year warranties across most of its series and lifetime coverage on major parts for its most premium grills.

Weber warranties

ModelWarranty Weber Spirit II 10 years on all partsWeber Genesis II 10 years on all partsWeber Genesis (2022+) Up to 12 years on cookbox and lid, 10 years on major componentsWeber Summit (2017–2023) 10 years on all partsWeber Summit (2024+) Up to 15 years on cookbox and lid, 10 years on major componentsWeber Charcoal Kettles 10 years on bowl and lidWeber Q Gas Grills 5 years on major componentsWeber Traveler 5 years on cookbox and lidWeber Pellet Grills (Searwood, SmokeFire) 5 years on cookbox, 3 years on electronics

Categories: Gadgets

Best Prepaid Phone Plans for 2026

“5G” is an umbrella term that encompasses the current fifth-generation cellular wireless network technologies. All the major carriers and phones support 5G connections, which can offer faster data speeds than older technologies such as 4G LTE or 3G.

Essentially there are three types of 5G: Millimeter-wave (mmWave), which can be fast but has limited range; low-band 5G, which has slower speeds but works on a broader range; and midband, which is a balance between the two that’s faster than low-band but also covers a larger range than millimeter-wave. Midband also incorporates C-band, a batch of spectrum auctioned off by the Federal Communications Commission in 2021.

Your phone’s 5G connection depends on which type blankets the area you’re in, as well as other factors, such as population density and infrastructure. For instance, mmWave is super fast, but its signals can be thwarted by buildings — or glass, or leaves — or whether you’re inside a structure.

When your device is connected to a 5G network, it can show up as several variations such as 5G, 5G Plus, 5G UW or others, depending on the carrier. Here’s a list of icons you see at the top of your phone for the major services:

AT&T: 5GE (which isn’t actually 5G, but rather a sly marketing name for 4G LTE), 5G (low band), 5G Plus (mmWave, midband)

Verizon: 5G (low band, also called “Nationwide 5G”), 5G UW/5G UWB (midband and mmWave, also called “5G Ultra Wideband”)

T-Mobile: 5G (low band), 5G UC (midband and mmWave, also called “Ultra Capacity 5G”)

There’s also 5G Reduced Capacity (5G RedCap), which is a lower-power, smaller-capacity branch of 5G used by devices such as smartwatches and portable health devices; the Apple Watch Ultra 3, for example, connects via 5G RedCap.

Just around the corner is 5G Advanced, promising much faster speeds due to carrier aggregation, or combining multiple spectrums.

Categories: Gadgets

I Got a First Look at Blueair’s First Handheld Fan. Here’s Where It Blows Me Away

Air technology company Blueair, maker of CNET’s best air purifier overall, released its AlwaysCool handheld fan on Tuesday, and I got a first look at the device. Measuring 2.44 x 2.56 x 7.28 inches and weighing 0.5 pounds, it has speeds from one to 100, offering up to 17 mph of airflow. 

With its 5,200-mAh battery, the fan runs for up to 32 hours on low speed — almost triple that of other personal fan models I’ve tried, like the Shark ChillPill — and up to seven hours on high speed.

The device’s head tilts up to 75 degrees so that you can easily use it as a tabletop fan. While it isn’t able to stand upright, it can also be held in your hand or carried on your wrist with the included wrist strap.

The AlwaysCool’s 17-mph speed does feel sufficient enough to cool you down without going overboard and becoming loud. It’s the same max speed offering by Shark’s ChillPill. But if fast speed is what you’re after, the handheld fan I’ve tested with the highest reported speed is the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool, which goes up to 55 mph in boost mode.

The head’s 75-degree tilt allows you to use the AlwaysCool as a desktop fan.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Where the AlwaysCool shines is with its low noise level, courtesy of Blueair’s proprietary HEPASilent technology. According to the company, at max speed, the fan is 46 dB (decibels), and it does sound quieter than other handheld fans I’ve tested. When I measured it with the Decibel X: Sound Level Meter app, it reached 55.7 dBA (A-weighted decibels), which is still lower than other models I’ve measured. 

For instance, when I measured the Shark ChillPill, it reached 74.6 dBA, and Dyson’s HushJet Mini Cool reached 77.5 dBA. For reference, the US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) reports that the typical sound level in an urban residence is 50 dBA. 

At $60, the AlwaysCool is also more affordable than the ChillPill and Mini Cool. At full price, the HushJet Mini Cool is $100, while the ChillPill is $150. The AlwaysCool also comes in three colors (arctic sage, cloud linen and night charcoal), the same number as the HushJet Mini Cool, while the ChillPill is available in 10 colors. 

The arctic sage color is a light green, while the cloud linen shade is white and the night charcoal color is a dark gray.

Anna Gragert/CNET

With the AlwaysCool, you also get a USB-C charging cord and wrist strap. The device itself is simple to use with just an on/off button and a fan speed dial. The LCD display shows the fan speed and battery life.

Where I think the AlwaysCool could improve is with its size, as it’s larger than other handheld fans on the market. Its design reminds me of the 16-mph Jisulife’s Pro1 Mini, which measured up to 73.4 dBA, but the latter is smaller at 2.17 x 1.97 x 5.59 inches and slightly more lightweight at 0.4 pounds. However, the Pro1 Mini is $70 at full price, $10 more than the AlwaysCool, which was also 17.7 dBA less than the Pro1 Mini even though they have about the same airflow speed.

The LCD display shows both battery life and the fan speed, which can be adjusted with the dial on the front of the device.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Overall, if you’re looking for a handheld fan that’s on the quiet side, can cool you down on a hot day and won’t cost you at least $100, then Blueair’s AlwaysCool is a great option. You can now purchase it on Amazon and Blueair.com.

Categories: Gadgets

Here’s How to See June’s Strawberry Moon Light Up the Sky

It almost sounds like a movie title: The Strawberry Moon. June’s Strawberry Moon is just a week away. It’s the third and final micro moon of 2026, and you can see it on June 29. A micro moon occurs when a full Moon or a new Moon happens at the same time the Moon is at apogee, its farthest point in orbit from Earth.

The Strawberry Moon reaches peak illumination at 7:56 p.m. ET on June 29, which is still during daylight hours for everyone in North America. That means the best time to see the full moon is that same evening once the sun has set. The moon is set to rise out of the southeastern sky just after sunset and streak across the southern horizon until it sets in the southwest just before sunrise. 

The sun won’t rise too far above the horizon in June thanks to the summer solstice. 

Stellarium

One of the least friendly moons to watch

You may notice that the Strawberry Moon isn’t terribly high in the sky this month, and that’s normal. June’s full moon is the lowest full moon of any given year, due to the same mechanics that give us the summer solstice. The Earth is tilted on its axis, and during the summer solstice, the Northern Hemisphere is tilted toward the sun. That means the sun is higher in the sky than it is at other times of the year. 

This also works with the moon, albeit in reverse, since the moon is always opposite the sun. The Northern Hemisphere is tilted away from the moon, so the moon appears lower in the sky than it normally does. It’s not quite as low as last year’s Strawberry Moon, which was the lowest full moon in decades, but if you’re somewhere with a lot of trees, you may have some trouble finding it. 

A micro moon is noticeably smaller and less bright than a supermoon or even a regular full moon.

NASA/JPL-Caltech

June’s full moon is also the final micro moon of the year, and so in addition to being low on the horizon, it’s also smaller than usual. The moon’s orbit around Earth is elliptical instead of circular, which means the moon is sometimes closer to Earth, a phenomenon known as perigee, and sometimes farther away, a phenomenon known as apogee. 

Since the moon is in apogee, it’s approximately 7% smaller than it would normally appear during a typical full moon and about 14% smaller than a supermoon. The full moon is still easy to find and the brightest thing in the night sky, but you may have to walk around the block to see it behind the trees in your neighborhood.

Categories: Gadgets

ROG Xbox Ally X Review – CNET


Pros

  • Best performance we’ve seen to date in a Windows gaming handheld
  • Windows devices support a wider library of games than competitors such as the Steam Deck and Nintendo Switch
  • Bumpers and buttons feel clicky and responsive, joysticks have reasonable tension

Cons

  • Slightly too big for my hands (size 7 women’s glove) and grip texture is a bit too rough
  • Performance can be inconsistent from run to run because AI is a black box
  • Screen doesn’t support HDR
  • Expensive, especially since it doesn’t include a case
  • Would be nice if it had trigger stops

There are three intertwined stories in the MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus: one about a solid, smartly redesigned Windows gaming handheld; one about the new Intel Arc G3 Extreme processor, which drives it to class-leading performance; and a sadly oft-repeated one about how the Windows implementation still makes me bonkers.

The Claw 8 EX AI Plus joins models such as the Lenovo Legion Go series and Asus’ ROG Xbox Ally X, which let you play games from any game store that runs on a PC — Steam, Epic, GOG and so on. Along with most other computing devices, their prices have gotten pretty painful, thanks to a supply crunch in memory, solid-state storage and processors driven by rich-on-paper AI buyers competing with less profitable consumer uses.

The Claw 8 AI Plus launched in December 2024 starting at $799; the Claw 8 EX AI Plus, which has a new design and new Intel Arc G3 Extreme chip but otherwise similar specs, is $1,800. Ouch. And there’s no end in sight. 

MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (CG3EM)

Price as reviewed $1,800Display 8-inch, 1,920×1,200-pixel, IPS, touchscreen, 120Hz, 500 nits, 100% sRGBCPU Intel Arc G3 ExtremeMemory 32GB LPDDR5x-8533 (soldered)Graphics Intel Arc B390Storage 1TB M.2 2280 SSD, micro SD slotAudio Mic, 3.5mm combo jack, 2x2W speakers, Dolby DTS, Hi-ResPorts 2 x USB-C (2 x TB4 w/ DP 1.4, PD 3.0)Networking Intel Wi-Fi 7 R2 BE213, Bluetooth 6.0Operating system Microsoft Windows 11 Home 25H2Size 12.6 x 5.1 x 1.9 in (321 x 130 x 48mm)Weight 1.7 pounds (785 grams)Battery 80WhAvailable June 2026

At the moment, there’s only one model of the Claw 8 EX AI Plus, but Asus plans a version based on the lower-end Arc G3, with an Arc B370 GPU equipped with two fewer graphics cores. It hasn’t yet revealed the price or ship date. It’s likely to be less expensive.

Pretty in purple

MSI reworked the design from the older models. For one, it’s a snazzy dark purple in the front and black in the back. Most notably, MSI extended the grips a bit a la ROG Xbox Ally X for a more comfortable feel.


Enlarge Image

The grips now extend below the body and have a raised texture.

Lori Grunin/CNET

The texture feels a bit too pronounced to me, but I tend to prefer a rubberized grip. When in use, either the grips get a little warm from inside or they warm from my hands pretty fast; in either case, my palms start sweating shortly after I start holding it.

They’re just a hair too big for me; I have to scooch them up to reach the bumpers or hold them in a slightly unnatural spot. (I wear women’s size 7 gloves for reference.) Your mileage, of course, will vary, but they’re quite big.

On the top edge are two Thunderbolt 4 connectors, a microSD card slot, a 3.5mm combo audio jack, volume switches and the power button. I like that there are no connections on the bottom; I get tired of cables poking me in the stomach.

There are the usual controls, plus two bindable back buttons. You can also remap everything for desktop mode, which is nice.

The RGB lighting also illuminates the ABXY buttons.

Lori Grunin/CNET

The sticks and triggers use magnetic Hall Effect technology, which is considered more durable and consistent than mechanical versions and feels a lot smoother. With the MSI Center M control center, you can remap buttons, calibrate and set stick dead zones, trigger actuation, vibration intensity and calibrate the gyro — all capabilities we typically see. The buttons and bumpers are clicky and responsive.

The triggers have a really deep pull, though, and I wish there were physical trigger stops like those found on higher-end controllers. Even if you set them to register at a fairly shallow depth, trigger stops make them feel shallower and faster.

It is compatible with the old dock if you need to prop it up while connecting to other devices. 

Fast, but not always fast enough

While it’s the best performing Windows gaming handheld I’ve tested thus far, that’s kind of a low bar to jump. It also depends on what you consider a sufficient frame rate and where you’re willing to make tradeoffs. Games that don’t stress the GPU — ones that don’t rely heavily on 3D rendering, such as 2D games like Hades 2 — fare pretty well (more than 100 fps) on all the current-generation devices.

For older 3D games, which were written to run on far less capable hardware, such as Shadow of the Tomb Raider, the Arc can cross from “playable at lower quality” to “playable at reasonable quality or faster at lower quality” with the Arc. For example, Shadow of the Tomb Raider hit 66 fps at highest quality with the Intel chip but only 43 fps on the next-fastest device, the ROG Xbox Ally X.

And if you like ray-traced graphics, avoid the AMD Ryzen Z2 processors altogether. In general, ray tracing is pretty heavy for these devices, but AMD’s GPUs are already weak at it (on 3DMark Solar Bay they lagged the MSI by over 60%).

In addition to the set of connections — two Thunderbolt 4 and one combo audio — hot air vents out of the top of the Claw.

Lori Grunin/CNET

They’re weakest for newer, GPU-heavy AAA games such as Assassin’s Creed Shadows. The Arc is generally the fastest (though the Ally X beat it at low quality), but “fastest” is relative. If you’re okay with 38 fps at low quality, then you won’t have an issue.

Intel and MSI throw a lot of technology to boost frame rates and battery life. The Claw has several different power settings, which are exposed by MSI’s control center software: AI automatically balances power based on what’s needed to run a given program. Endurance caps frame rates at 30 fps and disables the P-cores to extend battery life. Manual lets you adjust PL1 and PL2 (base and maximum power levels) as well as fan speeds to tailor performance to your needs. You can even configure Manual right in the quick action menu, which is nice.

The maximum total power available for the Claw with the G3 Extreme is 45W (35W for the chip), and I got it pretty close to that, though I didn’t spend a lot of time trying to optimize. But based on most of my test results, it was pulling close to that in AI mode, so you could probably get away with ignoring it. It did seem to boost CPU performance more than GPU. 

On the flip side, performance on battery in AI mode seems to be the same as plugged in, and looks like it draws the same amount of power when gaming, which is good.

Intel’s very clear about the point of Endurance mode and that it requires tradeoffs, but I found it hit and miss. For one, I don’t think it consistently kicks in. For instance, it drew the same amount of power in Hogwarts Legacy as the other modes but still capped the frame rate at 30 fps, even as I watched the battery drain by about 1% every 10 minutes of play. (My battery testing ran into some glitches, so it’s still in progress, but I never once thought, “Gee, this is lasting a long time!” These generally last about three hours, unless you apply aggressive power saving.)

The grips have a nice contour.

Lori Grunin/CNET

I experimented a bit with Intel’s upscaling an optimization technology, XeSS, which recently added multiframe generation to its bag of tricks and is supported by the Arc G3 chips and their latest Xe3 GPU cores. In contrast, AMD’s Z2’s use older Radeon RDNA 3-generation GPUs. But in Hogwarts — which supports XeSS 3 MFG — I only gained a few extra frames per second in exchange for obviously poorer quality (skin textures looked too smooth and it reduced mouth movement so that they seemed out of sync and far less expressive).

There are too many variables to play with, though, both within the games and in Intel’s graphics utility. It wouldn’t be as much of a pain if accessing the Intel settings didn’t require jumping out to the Windows desktop, and if nearly every change didn’t prompt a device restart before switching back to Xbox full-screen mode.

The Arc B390 integrated graphics in the G3 Extreme is the same as that in the Intel Core Ultra X7 358H laptop chip and delivers roughly the same performance. The CPU is also similar, so single-core performance is comparable as well, but the core makeup of the X7 is different — notably, it’s got two more performance cores. So it’s unsurprising that the X7 has faster multicore processing than the G3 Extreme.

Display tests

Gamut coverage 100% sRGBWhite point 7300KGamma 2.2Peak full screen brightness (nits) 517Accuracy (DE2K average/max) 2.2/5.11Contrast 1500:1

The screen is a bit disappointing, especially given the price. It’s a decent 120Hz IPS display, but only has a smallish sRGB gamut, and while the contrast is numerically good, it just can’t compare with some of the better screen technologies such as OLED or even IPS Black. The whites are pretty cool (relative to 6500K), which can happen when the display is driven to higher brightness levels than it can comfortably support while still targeting 6500K.

A mixed bag

I still yearn for the day when I can stop complaining about Windows on these devices. Looking back at my issues with the Xbox Ally X, I couldn’t find one that I didn’t run into again with the Claw. Oh — the setup no longer tries to get you to enable Recall. That’s one for the win column. 

I’ll summarize the key points here. If you want the full rant, go visit the Xbox Ally X review.

  • Confusing and annoying inconsistencies in the various interfaces that don’t have the Xbox Full Screen Experience grafted onto them, which is most.
  • Glitchy behavior, such as the Xbox app losing focus and disabling controller input until I switched away and back, as well as random app switching while a game was loading.
  • Games frequently get confused as to whether there is a controller or keyboard attached.
  • Memory management issues cause apps to glitch. (The MSI utility even puts “free memory” right in its quick access menu, and I used it quite a bit.)
  • The popup keyboard in desktop mode frequently and unavoidably blocks the text field you’re using it for.

I’ll add a new one: It’s absurdly bad at switching between desktop and full-screen modes. The Xbox app often windows itself in the process, forcing you to manually tell it to go back to full screen.

Windows’ primary advantage for handheld gaming is its ability to play games from any PC game store. But these handhelds continue to feel like gaming is only a part of what they’re intended for, rather than their main purpose. It’s not MSI or Intel’s fault, so it’s hard to pin the software shortcomings on the particular device.

I like being able to play PC games in bed rather than my desk without having to stream them, and I think the power mode issues I ran into are just a case of “the early bird gets the bugs.” Some may be user stupidity, but I lay those at the feet of the confusion of interfaces. (A group of interfaces is called a “confusion” in my brainspace.)

But if I were spending upwards of $1500, I’d want OLED. Dark blacks, HDR and colors that pop mean more to me — at least for the games I play much of the time — than performance that just tips over into okay. I like the color and overall design of the MSI Claw 8 AI Plus and it performs better than the rest of the field, but it still falls a little short.

Performance charts

Assassin’s Creed Shadows (1080p, High)

Lenovo Legion Go 2 13Lenovo Legion Go 2 (battery) 18ROG Xbox Ally X (on battery) 19Lenovo Legion Go 2 (low preset) 23ROG Xbox Ally X 24Dell XPS 14 (2026) 24Acer Swift 16 AI (2026) 25MSI Prestige 14 Flip AI Plus 27MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus 28MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (on battery) 28MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (max power) 30MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (low preset) 38ROG Xbox Ally X (low preset) 43

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Shadow of the Tomb Raider gaming test (1080p, Highest)

ASUS ROG Ally 24Asus ROG Ally X (battery) 29Lenovo Legion Go 2 35ROG Xbox Ally X (battery) 37Lenovo Legion Go 2 (battery) 38ROG Xbox Ally X 43MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus 65MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (battery) 66MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (max power) 66

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance (fps)

3DMark Solar Bay

Lenovo Legion Go 2 15,188Xbox ROG Ally X 16,535MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus 26,714

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

3DMark Steel Nomad

Lenovo Legion Go 2 400Lenovo Legion Go 2 (on battery) 577ROG Xbox Ally X 587ROG Xbox Ally X (on battery) 593MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (endurance) 1,176Dell XPS 14 (2026) 1,286Acer Swift 16 AI (2026) 1,440MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (max power) 1,510MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus 1,520MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (on battery) 1,527MSI Prestige 14 Flip AI Plus 1,527

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Geekbench 6 CPU (single-core)

MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (Endurance) 1,181MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus 2,698Lenovo Legion Go 2 2,753Dell XPS 14 (2026) 2,813MSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus (max power) 2,829Acer Swift 16 AI (2026) 2,850MSI Prestige 14 Flip AI Plus 2,896

Note: Longer bars indicate better performance

Configurations

Acer Swift 16 AI (2026) Windows 11 Home; Intel Core Ultra X7 358H; 32GB DDR5 RAM; Intel Arc B390 Graphics; 1TB SSDAsus ROG Ally Microsoft Windows 11 Home (23H2); 3.3GHz AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme; 16GB LPDDR5X-6400; integrated Radeon 780M; 512GB SSDAsus ROG Ally X Microsoft Windows 11 Home (23H2); 3.3GHz AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme; 24GB LPDDR5X-7600 (8GB dedicated to GPU); integrated Radeon 780M; 1TB SSDDell XPS 14 (2026) Windows 11 Home; Intel Core Ultra X7 358H; 32GB DDR5 RAM; Intel Arc B390 Graphics; 1TB SSDLenovo Legion Go 2 Microsoft Windows 11 Home (24H2); 2GHz AMD Ryzen Z2 Extreme; 32GB LPDDR5X-8533; integrated Radeon 890M; 1TB SSDMSI Claw 8 EX AI Plus Microsoft Windows 11 Home (25H2); 1.9GHz Intel Arc G3 Extreme; 32GB LPDDR5X-8533; integrated Arc B390; 1TB SSDMSI Prestige 14 Flip AI Plus Windows 11 Home; Intel Core Ultra X7 358H; 32GB DDR5 RAM; Intel Arc B390 Graphics; 1TB SSDROG Xbox Ally X Microsoft Windows 11 Home (24H2); 2GHz AMD Ryzen Z2 Extreme; 24GB LPDDR5X-8000 (8GB dedicated to GPU); integrated Radeon 890M; 1TB SSD

Categories: Gadgets

Microsoft Adds 8GB Configs to Drop Starting Price of Surface Pro and Surface Laptop

Microsoft launched its Copilot Plus PC AI laptop platform nearly two years ago and gave starring roles to its own Surface Pro and Surface Laptop machines. On Tuesday, Microsoft added new models to each line, neither of which meets its own definition of what constitutes a Copilot Plus PC. In order to return the starting price to points below $1,000 for the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop, Microsoft seems willing to muddy the waters about its AI laptop platform.

In the two years since the debut of Copilot Plus PC, prices have risen for [gestures wildly at everything]. Thanks to the global RAM shortage known as RAMageddon, laptop prices have spiked this year. The entry point for the Surface Pro rose to $1,049, and the cheapest Surface Laptop costs $1,149. These models supply 16GB of RAM, which adds to the bill now more than ever. In response to skyrocketing memory prices (and the presence of Apple’s budget MacBook Neo), Microsoft has released new Surface models with only 8GB of RAM, dropping the starting price of each line by $200. 

The new Surface Pro 12-inch with Snapdragon X Plus CPU, 8GB of RAM and a 256GB SSD costs $849 at Microsoft. The new Surface Laptop 13-inch with those same specs costs $949 at Microsoft. The larger models in each line — the 13-inch Surface Pro and 13.8- and 15-inch Surface Laptop — remain unchanged and start with 16GB of RAM.

8GB does not a Copilot Plus PC make

These 8GB additions to each line are not replacements for the models with 16GB of RAM but “give customers another entry point for everyday productivity, browsing, communication and entertainment,” according to a Microsoft spokesperson.

Notably, these 8GB configurations fall short of Microsoft’s requirements for its Copilot Plus PC program. The Snapdragon X Plus processor with its NPU capable of 45 trillion operations per second (TOPS) would qualify it as a Copilot Plus PC, as would the undersized 256GB of storage that hits the minimum requirement. What keeps these new, lower-cost models from joining the Copilot Plus PC club is their 8GB of memory. Microsoft set 16GB of RAM as the minimum for a Copilot Plus PC because on-device AI tasks are memory intensive.

The 13-inch Surface Pro we reviewed still starts at 16GB of RAM, but the smaller 12-inch model can be configured with only 8GB.

Lori Grunin/CNET

Microsoft trying to make 8GB work

Microsoft is also undertaking efforts to make Windows more memory efficient. If it’s selling these premium machines with only 8GB of RAM, it would certainly like to avoid customers complaining about sluggish performance.

These efforts include optimizing memory based on user behaviors and “putting the user in more control of pre-launch, and limiting pre-launch on devices with lower memory capacity,” according to Microsoft. This means that the apps you use regularly are pre-loaded into memory so they launch quickly, while any apps that you have minimized are isolated so that Windows can give back memory resources they might be using.

The 13-inch Surface Laptop now starts at $949 with 8GB of RAM.

Matt Elliott/CNET

I’m not sure why it took a supply shortage of biblical proportions to spur Microsoft into action to make its Windows operating system less of a resource hog, but perhaps we’ll look back at this period and find that’s one of the few positive outcomes of RAMageddon. 

Despite Microsoft’s attempts to make Windows more responsive, I would be wary of buying either machine with only 8GB of RAM. Even if you aren’t running local AI workloads regularly, you are likely to hit points each day where you are maxing out the memory and waiting for the system to catch up. With one too many applications running or a dozen too many browser tabs open, the computer is likely to sputter and slow down because Windows must access data from system storage when the memory is full, and that’s a much slower process.

As much as I like the design of the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop, I don’t like the idea of pairing premium looks with budget performance. I’d rather give a little on the design for more memory and go with something like the Acer Aspire 14 AI, which supplies 16GB of RAM and costs $700 or less. And for around $1,000, the HP OmniBook 5 14 serves up 32GB of RAM and exceptional battery life inside a stylish, compact design. For tablet heads, I would recommend the HP OmniBook X Flip, which can usually be found for less than $1,000 with 32GB of RAM along with a high-resolution OLED display.

Categories: Gadgets

VidCon 2026: 15 Years Later, the Creator Economy Shows No Signs of Slowing

VidCon 2026, one of the premier conventions for online content creators and their fans, is happening this week in Anaheim, California. The global event, which includes hundreds of panels, workshops and strategy sessions, kicks off on Thursday and concludes on Saturday.

Over the last several years, the creator economy has grown into a multibillion-dollar industry. The convention unites creators, vloggers, gamers and executives across an expanding digital ecosystem, representing platforms like YouTube, Twitch, TikTok and Discord. 

This year in particular, several creators have crossed over into the mainstream, thanks in part to movies like Backrooms (Kane Parsons) and Obsession (Curry Barker). Shows such as Hot Ones, which over the last decade transformed from a low-budget YouTube experiment into a cultural fixture with 30 seasons, have led late-night show hosts to question if the traditional celebrity interview format is obsolete.

Yet as the attention economy has shifted from a handful of megastars to an immense network of brands and companies, creators now face challenges posed by artificial intelligence. Flagship events like VidCon can celebrate creators’ wins and expand fandom while also helping influencers develop strategies to stand out in an evolving industry amid AI risks. 

What is VidCon?

John and Hank Green, YouTubers and creators of VidCon, speak at the Anaheim Convention Center in July 2015.  

FilmMagic/Contributor/Getty Images

Founded in 2010 by YouTube creators John and Hank Green (Vlogbrothers), VidCon began humbly as a small grassroots gathering. It has since grown into a major industry summit drawing between 50,000 and 75,000 attendees. 

Crystal Bell, Mashable’s digital culture editor who is covering the event, told CNET that VidCon has “evolved significantly” over the years. (CNET and Mashable are owned by the same parent company, Ziff Davis.)

“What began as a fan-focused gathering centered on YouTube creators has grown into a much broader creator economy event, with dedicated tracks and programming for fans, creators, brands, marketers, executives and other industry professionals,” Bell said. 

Bell said VidCon’s programming reflects “the creator economy’s coming-of-age story.” The focus is no longer solely about generating new content, but on scaling up creative-based businesses.

The convention includes three distinct tracks. The Fan track focuses on more interactive events and IRL meet-ups. The Creator track is geared toward influencers who are networking and strategizing, and the Industry track is for media and business executives.

Who is appearing at VidCon 2026?

Rachel Pizzolato, social media personality, model and scientist who appeared on MythBusters Jr., at VidCon 2024 at Anaheim Convention Center. 

Olivia Wong/Contributor/Getty Images

The 2026 Hall of Fame will open on Thursday at 6 p.m. PT to all attendees and will include honorees such as filmmaker Markiplier, Philip DeFranco, Michelle Phan and Blogilates founder Cassey Ho. 

The show also features appearances from dozens of creators, including fan meet-and-greets with the dancing weatherman Nick Kosir and the recently unmasked Minecrafter aCookieGod. Some are featured in The Mashable 101, a list of top creators.

Representatives from CNET Group, which includes CNET, Mashable, PCMag, ZDNET and others, will also be in attendance this year. CNET marketing manager Tara Brown said it’s an opportunity for people interested in the field to come together.

Lindsey Turrentine, executive vice president of content for CNET Group, will speak at a session on Friday titled The Trust Gap: Why Expertise Wins in the Age of Infinite Content. The panel also includes Karl Stewart (SVP of marketing at IGN Entertainment), Jennifer Kiffer (senior director of marketplace strategy and insights at CNET Group) and Nick Wolny (managing editor of branded content at CNET Group). 

The discussion will address how creators can succeed in an AI-saturated content landscape and how true trust and monetization are driven by demonstrated expertise and authoritative knowledge rather than forced authenticity.

“The key for human creators is to lean into the human part, but always with expert knowledge and firsthand experience,” Turrentine said. “Journalists, scientists, chefs and anyone who studies hard has the raw materials. Be yourself, know your stuff. It has to be both.”

Mashable will also be hosting a mentorship session on Saturday at 10:30 a.m. PT to teach creators how to elevate their outreach strategy, craft compelling brand stories and build press relationships. That event is titled Pitch Please: The Mistakes Creators Make in Their Pitches and How to Fix Them. 

Will any gadgets be shown at the conference?

Whether you’re a creator or simply like playing around with toys, there are a number of exhibitors from video production company Blackmagic Design to Bandai. CNET’s Brown says mobile mics and streamer tools from Elgato have been on display at previous years’ events. 

Is VidCon free, and is it open to fans?

VidCon is an event for paying attendees, with tickets available in the Fan track (VidCon pass), the Creator track (Creator pass) and the Industry track (Pro pass). Single day tickets start at $109

What else is there to do at VidCon?

The conference will also host the sold-out GorillaCon, the “first-ever official live event celebrating the world’s largest virtual reality game, Gorilla Tag.” Gorilla Tag is a VR chat room with arm-based movement mechanics. When I asked my 13-year-old son what he thought about the game, he said that it was like Rec Room, only “more boring.”

Categories: Gadgets

I Love the Blink Outdoor 4 Even More With Its New Prime Day Discount

Prime Day update: You don’t have to spend a fortune on home security with the Prime Day bargains in full swing right now. This bundle offer includes two Blink Outdoor 4 cameras and a video doorbell, and Prime members can pick it up for just $45 right now. That’s a whopping 76% discount and saves you $145 compared to the usual price. You can also pick up just the camera for $28 — over $50 off.

CNET’s key takeaways

  • The Blink Outdoor 4 security camera comes with lithium AA batteries that lasted me well over a year, unlike competitor cameras that require frequent recharging, as often as every month.  
  • The Blink Outdoor 4 is one of the more affordable cams, and it is often on sale.
  • The Blink app is limited to Alexa support only, meaning you cannot connect with Google, Apple or other third-party smart platforms. 

Blink’s Outdoor 4 cam came with a big promise when I first started reviewing it: lithium AA batteries that could last for two years without needing to be replaced. That’s a ridiculously long time for a wireless security camera, which usually has batteries that need recharging every few months. 

I started out skeptical, but Blink’s cam stayed operational on my fence, not just for a few months but season after season while I waited, and I was increasingly impressed.

While my Blink Outdoor 4 model didn’t quite reach the full two years that Blink rates its wireless camera batteries at, a year and a half far surpasses the use of any wireless camera with a rechargeable battery, like Ring or Nest. In my experience, those rechargeable batteries tend to last several months at the most before you need to bring them in for a recharge or switch them out with a new battery pack.

That recharging gets annoying during cold winters or for wireless cameras that are posted out of reach and require a ladder to switch batteries out. And if your cams activate all the time, batteries run out even faster. I don’t mind leaning out to grab the video doorbell for a quick recharge, but for other outdoor cameras, it turns into an unwanted and inconvenient task. 

Blink, meanwhile, promises long-lasting batteries that you replace, not recharge, when the time comes. Those new batteries cost $4 to $5, which works out to about 22 cents a month for the convenience of not bothering about it. I’ve found that to be a particularly helpful option for an outdoor camera I can set up and leave to do its job, giving me one less thing to worry about.

PRIME DAY HOME SECURITY DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

My experience with the Blink Outdoor 4

The Blink Outdoor 4 is fully wireless and very compact for an outdoor cam.

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

I consider the Blink Outdoor 4 a “jack of all trades” outdoor camera, which is why it has earned a spot on my list of the best outdoor security cameras. It is also the best camera for battery life, which is why I often recommend it to someone who wants an all-purpose camera at a fairly affordable price.

From the 1080p resolution and Alexa support to the two-way audio and motion detection, the Outdoor 4 does a little of everything in a compact, weather-resistant design. But where it really shines is that extended battery life.

Battery options that keep lasting

The Blink Outdoor 4 runs on two lithium AA batteries (included) slotted into the back. Unscrew the back cover and you can have new batteries in and out in a minute. I just did this part after a year and a half of use, and the hardest part was remembering how to detach the Outdoor 4 from its mount without breaking it.

Unlike some batteries with “lithium” in the name, these aren’t rechargeable. They offer other benefits instead, including extra power compared to traditional AA batteries and an extended shelf life of up to 25 years, so you can buy a pack without worrying about them dying. There’s currently this pack of 24 lithium AAs on sale for $35

If one to two years of battery life just isn’t enough, you can also purchase a Blink extension pack ($30) to add more batteries so the cam can last even longer, a possibility if you want to put it in an out-of-the-way spot.

The Blink Outdoor 4 uses long-term lithium batteries.

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

Mounting and placement

The Blink Outdoor 4 uses a small screw-in mount. I can’t screw anything into my impervious fiber cement siding, but a fence post proved the ideal option for watching my backyard and various wildlife appearances.

The mount is a little stiff and requires careful adjustment when angling, but is otherwise problem-free. With an operating temperature range of -4 to 113 degrees Fahrenheit, I watched my Blink Outdoor 4 brave blistering summers and winter snowstorms without complaint, the batteries inside still powering through.

The Blink Outdoor 4 has an adjustable mount that’s sturdy enough to stay at the right angle.

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

A no-nonsense app to monitor battery life

I’ve tinkered with dozens of home security apps, and Blink remains one of my favorites. The Blink app has a welcome combination of simplicity and easily accessible camera features. A few taps can get you almost anywhere you need to go, including quick camera live views and two-way audio chats.

The app also lets you check on battery life so you can see when it’s “OK” or reaching danger levels — until, as I found out, it dies completely, in which case you won’t be able to check on battery life.

Blink’s app serves up motion and human detection alerts according to your settings. It also enables the connection to the included Sync Module 2, which has a USB slot you can use for video clip storage, making the Blink subscription services ($4 per month) entirely optional.

Blink’s app is refreshingly direct and easy to use.

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

Blink’s solar option

I can’t talk about battery life without mentioning solar panels. Many are available for the Blink Outdoor 4, and if you have the space, you could add one. Some work better than others, and the best, like this model that’s on sale for $26, have their own built-in battery to power the Blink because those lithium AA batteries can’t be recharged.

With extra-long battery life, a solar panel is less necessary, but this is an option if you put your Blink camera in a sunny spot and never really want to worry about battery life at all. I haven’t tested solar panels with the Blink Outdoor 4, but I have tested them with many other security cams, and I can say they do keep batteries topped off, particularly in the summer months.

The specs for the Blink Outdoor 4

  • Size: 2.76×2.76×1.61 inches (70x70x41 mm)
  • Weight: 5.0 oz (141 g)
  • Main battery: 2 AA 1.5V lithium non-rechargeable batteries
  • Optional: Weather Resistant Power Adapter (sold separately), Outdoor 4 Battery Extension Pack (available in the US and Canada)
  • Battery life: Up to two years with default settings. Customized settings, use and environmental conditions may affect battery performance
  • Field of view: 143 degrees diagonal
  • Resolution: 1080p HD video
  • Images: View captured images in 640×360
  • Frames per second: Up to 30fps
  • Connectivity: High-speed internet connection (such as broadband, fiber or DSL), Wi-Fi network: 2.4GHz 802.11b/g/n
  • Hub support: Camera compatible with all Blink Sync Modules
  • Audio: Two-way audio
  • Lights: 1 blue LED so you know when it’s active (optional), 1 red LED when recording in night vision
  • Operating temperature: -4 to 113 F (-20 C to 45 C)

CNET’s buying advice

Blink’s Outdoor 4 camera isn’t just easy to use, it also lasts a ridiculously long time per charge. 

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

If you find recharging batteries every few months annoying, Blink’s lithium AA batteries really do provide that extra convenience. For me, it’s well worth the extra $4 to replace them every year or two. 

Those long-lasting batteries also make it easier to choose a spot that’s harder to access but ideal for a vantage point, like above a garage door, because you know you won’t have to make frequent trips up there for recharging.

Cap it off with a user-friendly app and a quite reasonable price compared to other outdoor cameras, like the Ring Spotlight for more than $200, and the Blink Outdoor 4 should certainly be on your list if you’re looking for a wireless camera. As a bonus, it frequently goes on sale, like right now.

If you want an outdoor camera with more bells and whistles, smart features and voice assistants beyond Alexa, I recommend the Arlo Pro 5S. You’ll have to recharge its battery more often, and the camera really needs a subscription (for a fee) to shine, but it can do nearly anything and includes Arlo’s advanced AI customization options. 

For more big discounts on home security cameras, check out our list of the best outdoor home security cameras that don’t require a subscription. Finally, check out Amazon’s full list of Blink camera sales, which includes bundles, standalone items and other accessories.

Categories: Gadgets

Anthropic’s New Claude Tag Acts as a Virtual Coworker in Slack

Your average Slack bot — an automated assistant you can tag in a Slack conversation — works like this: You tag the bot. It responds. That’s it. Artificial intelligence company Anthropic, which owns the AI chatbot and assistant Claude, wants to deepen that Slack conversation with a new feature called Claude Tag. The idea is that Claude can now build context by drawing on relevant information from Slack channels in a way it couldn’t before.

Anthropic announced in a press release on Tuesday that it will rename the existing Claude app in Slack to Claude Tag on Aug. 3.

When you add Claude Tag to your Slack workspace, it joins as its own user. You can grant it access to selected channels and connect it to whichever tools, data and even codebases you want it to access.

When tagged, Claude will complete a task in stages before posting a response in a Slack thread.

Anyone in your Slack workspace or Claude organization can use Claude Tag, but if you have a Claude Enterprise plan, you can grant or restrict access to Claude Tag based on roles. 

Claude Tag can work on tasks while you focus on other priorities.

Claude/Youtube/CNET Screenshot

Unlike other Slack bots, Claude Tag will learn everything from the public Slack channels it can access. It can pick up a conversation where the last person who tagged it left off.

With ambient behavior enabled, Claude Tag can remind users about tasks or discussion threads across Slack channels. It can also schedule future tasks for itself and work on these projects. 

Claude can proactively message a thread that hasn’t yet been resolved.

Claude/Youtube/CNET Screenshot

You can chat with Claude Tag in a private direct message, or open a right-side panel to access it at any time. In both the panel and direct messages, Claude Tag can do whatever you’ve enabled it to do, including search the web. 

Prices and privacy

The feature is already available in beta for companies subscribed to Claude’s Team and Enterprise plans.

When you tag Claude Tag in a direct message, its usage is billed to your Claude account. If you tag it in a channel, it’s billed to your organization. 

Primary owners or owners can control Claude Tag’s usage, as the app’s limits are based on consumption rather than the number of users. Once a spending limit is reached, Claude Tag begins declining work. 

A representative for Anthropic didn’t immediately respond to a request for pricing information.

Claude Tag remembers channel history, but company admins can review and delete what is retained. Slack conversations with Claude Tag follow each organization’s Slack retention policies, and these conversations are separate from your Claude history. 

If you disconnect Claude Tag from Slack, your conversations are deleted after 30 days. 

Categories: Gadgets

TCL’s SQD Mini-LED TV Tech: What to Know Before Prime Day Shopping

If you’re shopping for a new TV during Prime Day this year, you’ve probably noticed that the terminology for different display types has gotten a bit overwhelming. From QLED to OLED to RGB mini-LED, the biggest challenge in choosing a new TV might be deciphering all the confusing jargon.

A second problem is deciding which advances in the color TV revolution matter most to you. Some people really want their HDR highlights to pop. For others, it’s all about the color richness and color accuracy. And then there are the home-theater enthusiasts who prioritize perfect blacks and cinematic image quality.

The newest premium TV options all offer improvements in different ways, which means there’s no single option for the “best” picture quality. It all depends on what matters to you. TCL’s new SQD Mini-LED technology, which stands for Super Quantum Dot mini-LED, might offer the best balance between all the recent advances in color, sharpness and brightness.

Here’s what to know about different display technologies and how to choose the one that’s right for you.

The tradeoffs between QLED, OLED and RGB mini-LED

QLED

QLED, or quantum dot mini-LED, TVs have become popular because they combine a mini-LED backlight with quantum dots. A quantum dot is an extremely small semiconductor particle (typically only 2–10 nanometers across), which allows for precise tuning of colors. QLED gives you high brightness, rich color, and strong performance at large screen sizes.

They’re particularly great if you have a bright living room or enjoy sports or gaming. The trade-off is that QLED still relies on a backlight, so some scenes may show blooming or halo effects around bright objects on dark backgrounds. 

OLED

OLED TVs take a completely different approach. Each pixel can turn on or off independently. As a result, the black levels and contrast are exceptional, making them the go-to choice for those who want the full home cinema experience.

The tradeoff is brightness: OLED may be less ideal for very bright rooms, very large screens or prolonged display of static images (they carry a risk of image burn-in that other display technologies don’t). 

RGB mini-LED

RGB mini-LED pushes color further than either of these two. By using red, green and blue backlights, the colors practically leap off the screen. If you value color brightness, color volume, or HDR impact, RGB mini-LED is the way to go.

Of course, because each RGB mini-LED group covers many pixels, colors can sometimes bleed together in complex scenes.

SQD Mini-LED: cleaner light, pixel-level color control

The most recent evolution in the TV color revolution is TCL’s SQD Mini-LED. While other brands are leaning into RGB mini-LED, TCL has focused on improving the quantum-dot system itself. The goal is to produce a cleaner, more color-rich light source and then use advanced color filters to create the final color at the pixel level. The fact that color is managed at the pixel level, rather than across a zone of multiple pixels, really matters.

In an SQD Mini-LED TV, the quantum dots that provided more saturated reds and greens in previous QLED models are taken to a new level. TCL calls this “super quantum dots” because you get not only enhanced color filtering and color-management systems, but also advanced local dimming and halo-control technologies. This innovative refinement of the quantum dot system addresses some of the major concerns that consumers faced with older QLED TVs.

Of course, SQD Mini-LED technology doesn’t eliminate every LCD limitation. Local dimming, processing, viewing angle and panel quality are not quite perfect. But the promise is clear: The color is wider, more reliable, and more consistent in the kinds of content you watch every day, providing for a solid balance among recent advances in television technology.

What to look for in TCL’s Prime Day TV deals

Whatever you want your new TV to excel at, TCL has Prime Day deals that’ll get you the perfect option at a price you’ll love. Here are a few of the TCL models discounted during Prime Day.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 24 #1109

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is just jammed full of creative, lively words. Fans of a certain music genre and of colorful fictional characters will ace this one. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Rock on.

Green group hint: Here comes the bride.

Blue group hint: Elmo is another one.

Purple group hint: Boob tube might also fit.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Prog bands

Green group: Classic wedding gifts

Blue group: Red characters

Purple group: Rhyming compound words

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 24, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is prog bands. The four answers are Genesis, King Crimson, Pink Floyd and Rush.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is classic wedding gifts. The four answers are china, luggage, money and toaster.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is red characters. The four answers are Clifford, Deadpool, Kool-Aid Man and Mr. Krabs.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is rhyming compound words. The four answers are chick flick, helter skelter, Humpty Dumpty and mumbo jumbo.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 24 #639

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition was a bit of a challenge. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Sports where you hurl things.

Green group hint: A sudden, energetic happening.

Blue group hint: Hoops stars.

Purple group hint: Think trains, or where high-schoolers run.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: Throwing events.

Green group: Quick run of activity.

Blue group: NBA draft No. 1 picks.

Purple group: ____ track.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 24, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is throwing events. The four answers are discus, hammer, javelin and shot put.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is quick run of activity. The four answers are burst, flurry, spurt and surge.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is NBA draft No. 1 picks. The four answers are Brand, Towns, Wall and Worthy.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is ____ track. The four answers are dirt, race, short and warning.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Strands Hints, Answer and Help for June 24 #843- CNET

Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.

Today’s NYT Strands puzzle was challenging. Hydrating might help — hint, hint. Some of the answers are difficult to unscramble, so if you need hints and answers, read on.

I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story. 

If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.

Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far

Hint for today’s Strands puzzle

Today’s Strands theme is: Just chill

If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Bottoms up!

Clue words to unlock in-game hints

Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:

  • BASE, ERASE, STEEL, RATE, ERASER, DOZE, MUCH, DOZER, MOVE

Answers for today’s Strands puzzle

These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:

  • BEER, SODA, SELTZER, WATER, JUICE, KOMBUCHA

Today’s Strands spangram

The completed NYT Strands puzzle for June 24, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

Today’s Strands spangram is BEVERAGECOOLERS. To find it, start with the B that’s three rows over from the far-left, and then four letters down. Wind down, over and around.

Categories: Gadgets

Subscription Creep is Real. US Adults Spend an Average of $1,332 a Year, CNET Finds

Do you know how many subscriptions you have and how much you’re paying for them? It’s easy to sign up for a monthly service, then be charged because you forgot to cancel it. Before you know it, those pesky monthly subscriptions balloon into its own line item in your budget. Exactly how much are we paying? 

Every year, CNET dives into the state of subscriptions to find out how much US adults spend on subscriptions and on which types of services. This year, we found that US adults are spending an average of $111 per month on subscriptions, totaling $1,332 annually. Even more unsettling, US adults waste an average of $21 per month (or $252 annually) on unused subscriptions, with certain generations wasting even more. 

We may love the convenience and perks of our subscriptions, like Amazon’s Prime Day sale for its subscribers. However, those costs can add up if you’re not careful. Luckily, there are some tips and perks that can help you cut costs without giving up the services you love. 

CNET’s 2026 State of Subscriptions key findings

  • US adults who have paid for a subscription within the past year spend an average of $111 per month, totaling $1,332 annually. Subscription spending is up 23% compared with last year’s monthly average of $90 and annual average of $1,080
  • US adults waste an average of $252 a year on unused subscriptions. Millennials and Gen Z waste the most ($29 and $27 monthly, respectively). 
  • Streaming and video subscriptions are still the most popular paid subscription (61%), followed by membership retail platforms (48%) and music (35%). 
  • Even though subscription costs have increased, there are ways to reduce how much you spend.

Streaming is the most popular subscription type among US adults

CNET found that among the types of subscriptions US adults have paid for since April 2025, streaming or video services are the most popular. Over half (61%) have paid for streaming services such as Hulu, Netflix and Prime Video. Other popular subscriptions include membership retail platforms such as Costco (48%) and music subscriptions like Spotify and Apple Music (35%).

The findings also show that fewer US adults paid for subscription services such as AI services, home security apps, meal kit deliveries and software management.


Enlarge Image
Cole Kan/CNET/Getty Images

Monthly streaming services have become the norm for cord-cutters and non-cord-cutters alike. However, if you subscribe to too many, you may end up paying just as much as — if not more than — you would have paid for a premium cable package. 

Plus, it’s hard to keep straight which streaming services carry your favorite shows and sports programming. For instance, Formula 1 races stream on Apple TV, but the National Football League is fragmented across multiple platforms, including Amazon’s Prime Video, ESPN, Peacock and major broadcast channels that require a cable plan or a livestreaming service such as YouTube TV or Hulu Plus Live TV. And paying for all of those monthly services can get expensive.

These subscriptions may feel necessary, but if you prefer a single genre — such as sports — CNET’s senior streaming editor Kourtnee Jackson recommends a skinny package to cut back on live channels. While YouTube TV, Hulu and DirecTV have full live TV packages that are comparable to cable, there are ways to pay for fewer channels and still watch what you want. DirecTV offers genre-based packages starting at $20, with add-ons available for an extra charge. YouTube TV has slim packages starting at $55 a month, and budget-friendly options from Philo and Sling cost even less.  

You may also be able to cut costs by rotating subscriptions, keeping a few streaming services for the time you know you’ll use them, like when a new season of your favorite show is released. Then you can cancel the subscription to avoid paying for a service you’re not using. You can also lower costs through streaming deals, bundling and special discounts, such as military or education discounts. 

US adults spend an average of $111 per month on subscriptions

Subscription costs have risen sharply over the years. CNET found that US adults are paying an average of $111 per month for subscriptions. Millennials spend the most on subscriptions each month ($125), while Gen X spends the least ($100).

CNET’s 2025 subscription survey found that US adults spent an average of $90 per month in 2025, up from $91 in 2024. Back then, millennials still spent the most, averaging $119 per month. Older generations have historically spent less. 

Generational differences aside, subscriptions are becoming more costly than ever, which could help explain the average $20 increase from 2024 to 2026. For example, Netflix’s standard account with ads was $7 per month in 2024, but now it costs $9 per month. The premium account has increased by $4, from $23 in 2024 to $27 now. 

Read more: We’re Tracking Streaming Price Hikes in 2026: Netflix, Spotify, YouTube and Others

On top of price increases, there are subscriptions for almost everything, as many tech giants and retailers are putting services behind paywalls, such as Meta’s One Plus, which starts at $4 per month and offers more advanced Meta AI features, app tools and metrics. And now, Tesla’s full self-driving service is no longer a one-time fee. Instead, it’s $99 per month. So it’s not prices alone that are driving higher monthly subscription spending. It’s also the number of subscriptions we’re paying for. 

A subscription for everything can add up quickly, which could be why we’re paying more in monthly subscriptions than before. To cut subscription creep, many US adults are turning to analog purchases, such as vinyl records and CDs, which have also become collectibles. 

You can also use free services when possible to help cut down. Tubi, Roku Channel and Pluto TV are all free streaming platforms, for example. And some popular services offer free plans, such as Spotify and YouTube Music. Plus, Google offers 5 GB of standard storage for all customers. 

US adults are wasting even more money on unused subscriptions 

The more alarming finding is that US adults are still paying for unused subscriptions. Last year, US adults wasted an average of $17 a month, totaling $204 a year. That amount has risen slightly to $21 a month and $252 a year.

Most subscriptions don’t require a contract, unlike cable services back in the day. So you can cancel without waiting or incurring fees. But it’s easy to forget to cancel a free trial or a service you no longer use. And there’s not one clear-cut rule to stop sneaky subscription cancellation practices since an appeals court blocked the Federal Trade Commission’s click-to-cancel rule. Making it harder to unsubscribe may prompt you to keep your subscription or delay unsubscribing, meaning you’re paying for a subscription you don’t use. CNET has a step-by-step guide that can help you cancel popular streaming subscriptions, too. 

There are a few methods to cancel subscriptions that are wasting your money. 

  • Use a budgeting app to identify which subscriptions you’re paying for. CNET recommends Rocket Money, but you could try other popular ones like Trim, Hiatus and PocketGuard. Some paid versions of these apps will cancel subscriptions on your behalf, such as Rocket Money and Trim. 
  • Look at your monthly credit card statement to see which apps you’re paying for monthly. Some banks, such as Chase, have a built-in subscription management tool that lets you cancel eligible subscriptions in the app. 
  • Use Apple’s App Store or Google Play’s subscription manager to track and cancel any subscriptions you purchased through the app store. 
  • Some AI tools can help you narrow down your subscriptions, but they can also give misinformation, so remember to double-check any information you receive before taking action. 

Methodology

CNET commissioned YouGov Plc to conduct the survey. All figures, unless otherwise stated, are from YouGov Plc. The total sample size was 2,522 adults, of whom 2,074 are currently paying and/or have paid for a subscription in the past year. Fieldwork was undertaken between April 29 and May 1, 2026. The survey was carried out online. The figures have been weighted and are representative of all US adults (aged 18 or older).

Categories: Gadgets

I Love This Floating Anker Speaker, and It’s on Sale for Less Than $100 This Prime Day

Prime Day update: The Anker Soundcore Boom 3I is perfect for pool parties, beach days and any other summer adventures, and you can pick it up for just $95 at Amazon’s Prime Day sale. That’s a $35 discount, and while it’s not the all-time lowest price we’ve seen, it is a great bargain on an excellent portable Bluetooth speaker.

In some ways, Anker’s new Soundcore Boom 3I is the spiritual successor to the Soundcore Motion Plus. It’s similarly shaped but has more of an outdoor adventure slant, with Anker touting it as “built for the wild” and billing it as the first Bluetooth speaker with playback in water, as it floats and “auto-corrects” to keep the speaker drivers facing upward just above the surface. All that adds to a perfect speaker for backyard hangouts or hot tubbing, so you might want to snag one on the cheap while the Prime Day deals are in full swing.

I’ve used the Soundcore Boom 3I for several months and have mainly been impressed with it, though the speaker is a lot easier to recommend to CNET readers at $35 off select colors.

As you’d expect from a speaker that promotional photos show strapped onto a kayak (it does have a detachable carrying strap), the Soundcore Boom 3I is fully waterproof and dust-resistant, with an IP68 rating. Anker takes things a step further, touting the Boom 3I as “5x” saltwater-resistant. “While typical speakers may rust in under five months, Boom 3I stays corrosion-free for up to two years of beach, boat and seaside use.”  

Read more: Best Bluetooth Speakers of 2026

You shouldn’t expect audiophile sound from a mono Bluetooth speaker of this ilk. But for the most part, the Soundcore Boom 3I gives you what you want from a portable Bluetooth speaker from a sound perspective. By that I mean it plays loud for its size — it weighs about 1.8 pounds and measures 8.3 by 3.1 by 3.3 inches — plus it puts out a reasonable amount of bass and has fairly respectable clarity. You can find speakers that sound a little more natural, but these types of rugged portable speakers aren’t designed for critical listening.

The speaker has some colorful LED lighting on each side. 

David Carnoy/CNET

I used it outdoors and inside in a few rooms, including a bathroom (it does make for a good bathroom speaker), and it was able to fill smaller rooms with sound. You can tweak the sound with the equalizer settings in the Soundcore companion app for iOS and Android and play around with the settings for the built-in beat-synched LED light show, which I kept turned off most of the time. You can also pair two of these speakers up in stereo mode and get significantly better sound.  

I tested the speaker’s playback in water by dropping it in a pool. It indeed flipped over, so the speaker drivers were facing up, and the music kept playing, though the audio got a little garbled when a little wave passed over the speaker, and the drivers started spitting water out. In other words, it certainly sounds better out of the water than in it.

One of the problems with Bluetooth devices is that Bluetooth doesn’t transmit through water, which is why you have to load MP3s into memory when using wireless headphones while swimming (you can’t stream music to the headphones if your head is underwater). I don’t know where the Bluetooth antenna is on this speaker, but presumably it’s on the side that stays above the surface when the speaker is floating. 


Enlarge Image

The Soundcore Boom 3I not only floats but auto-corrects to an upright orientation. 

David Carnoy/CNET

You can actually activate a Buzz Clean mode from the app that makes the speaker vibrate and shed dirt and particles, like sand after a day at the beach. After finishing the Buzz Clean, you can then rinse off the speaker to get it truly clean. 

The speaker also has another interesting feature: Holding down the “BassUp” bass-boost button for 5 seconds sets off a 96-decibel emergency alarm — Anker says it’s clearly audible at up to 100 meters — with flashing red LED lights. You can hit any button to turn the alarm off. 

BLUETOOTH SPEAKER DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

Battery life is rated for 16 hours at moderate volumes, which is decent for a speaker this size. It’s also worth pointing out that the Boom 3I has a Bluetooth range of 100 feet, which is better than the more typical 33 feet you get with many Bluetooth speakers.

The Soundcore Boom 3I in black, which is only $80 for Black Friday.

David Carnoy/CNET

Categories: Gadgets

I Was Shocked by How Good These Budget TVs Were

The Fire TV remote in front of the Amazon 4-Series TV (2024)

Ty Pendlebury/CNET

When setting up these TVs, I was impressed to see Filmmaker Mode on two of these TVs (Samsung and Hisense). As the closest thing the industry gets to standardization, this mode helps ensure some consistency when watching TV and movies. By comparison, the Fire TV only has a choice of Movie Dark and Movie Bright (lit rooms) while Roku has its own Movie mode.

I tested the TVs by streaming movies, using Fandango at Home, including It and Spider-Man: Into the Spider-Verse. These two movies are tests for any TV — the ability to display either moody, high-contrast scenes (It) or the vivid colors of a comic book (Spider-Man.) In general, I found that the Hisense had the best contrast and best color saturation, while the Fire TV and Roku are brighter in movie modes.

Using the opening scenes of It, as Georgie descends the stairs, I found that the Roku had the poorest shadow detail of the four, with the details of intricate woodwork and wall under the stairs crushed into a blue/black. 

Meanwhile, it was the Hisense that had the best shadow detail — with more of the under-stairs area visible over these few frames. The Hisense had a solidity to its image that the other TVs lacked. As Georgie moves into the basement the room looked real, whereas the other TVs devolved into gray fog with disembodied furniture  In addition, black areas of the picture — even on the black bars at top and bottom — were truly black and not dark blue or gray as with the Samsung and Fire TV.

Side-by-side picture comparisons (from left): Roku Select, Fire TV 4-Series, Samsung U8000 and Hisense QD7.

Ty Pendlebury/CNET

As with last year’s Samsung TV — red areas of the U8000’s picture are a little desaturated, and this was most obvious during Spider-Man: Into the Spider-Verse. At 32.48, during the memorial service for the old Spider-Man, Spidey’s suit looked a little more bedraggled on this TV as opposed to both the Fire TVs which had vibrant reds. Lastly, the Roku looked vibrant in its rendering of Spiderman’s red and blue, but the picture looked a little 2D and flat. The Roku did pick up a little during the blazingly-bright collider sequence, with the brightest picture of the four, but the Hisense had the best contrast.

I did find one when testing the Roku, in that its off-axis response was quite poor. Even when I was sitting dead-center of the screen at a distance of six feet I was never on-axis to all of the screen — there was always a part that’s just off axis. 

As far as bright-room performance is concerned, they all had some level of reflectivity, although some were better at rejecting direct light sources than others. I shone my cell-phone flash on each of the TVs in turn and found the Hisense was the best here, with a bright center but reduced corona. The next three were similar to each other, although the Fire TV’s reflections were dullest, then the Roku and the Samsung had the brightest reflections.

Light output in movie mode (lumens)

Brightness Hisense QD7 618 Samsung U800 291 Fire TV 4-series 300 Roku Select 355

Categories: Gadgets

Are We Stuck With Sneaky Subscription Cancellation Practices? One Attorney Chimes In

The average US adult spends over $1,300 per year on subscriptions, according to CNET’s latest subscription survey. And they’re wasting an average of $252 per year in unused subscriptions. That’s even more than last year’s survey, when the average annual spend was $1,080, and we wasted slightly less — $204 annually. One way to lower that cost is to cancel the services you no longer want, but getting rid of them isn’t always simple. Some companies make it hard for customers to cancel memberships. 

Last year, the Federal Trade Commission’s Click to Cancel rule was struck down, which would have prohibited deceptive subscription cancellation practices and required companies that offer subscription services to make it just as easy to cancel as it is to sign up. The court put a stop to that in July because the FTC didn’t conduct a preliminary regulatory analysis — which is required for rules that could impact the economy by more than $1 million. There’s a chance that could change in the future. 

“The FTC is currently working on a revised Click to Cancel regulation, and FTC Bureau of Consumer Protection Director Chris Mufarriage, I understand, intends to make uniform rules of the road nationwide,” Brian Goodrich, a regulatory attorney at Holland & Knight, told CNET. 

However, the FTC isn’t stopping there. Other legislatures are blocking companies from deceptive subscription cancellation practices.

Check for state consumer protection laws 

If you’re dealing with misleading subscription cancellation or renewal practices, start by checking which state laws apply to consumer protections and subscriptions. I recommend checking your state’s legislative portal and searching for related terms for related acts or laws.

For example, some states have automatic renewal laws that prohibit a company from automatically renewing your subscription without your consent. Some ARLs require clear renewal details, such as the duration, the recurring amount charged, the cancellation policy and how to cancel. Some state laws, such as California’s, also require consent for renewal. 

Maryland enacted a similar law in June 2026 to fight poor subscription renewal and cancellation rates. The law, HB0107, requires companies that offer automatic renewals to allow Maryland residents to cancel the renewal in a cost-effective, timely and easy manner before it renews. And Colorado’s 2025 law, SB25-145, requires online cancellation, consumer consent and any retention offers to include a cancellation link, Goodrich said. Connecticut, Massachusetts and New York are among the states with automatic renewal laws.

The FTC is still stopping deceptive subscription acts

Even though the FTC’s Click to Cancel rule no longer exists, there’s another law that’s been in place since 2010 that the FTC is using to stop businesses from sneaky subscription practices — the Restore Online Shoppers’ Confidence Act. 

“ROSCA matters here because most modern subscription problems involve “negative options,” meaning the company treats the consumer’s silence or failure to cancel as permission to continue charging,” Goodrich said. “ROSCA is narrower than the vacated FTC rule because it applies to Internet transactions, but it remains a powerful enforcement tool for online subscriptions, free trials, automatic renewals, and other recurring-charge arrangements.”

ROSCA says that companies must list the price, billing date and cancellation policy before receiving your credit card details for a service (including a subscription). Before confirming the purchase, the company must provide a way for you to confirm the sign-up. The company is also prohibited from sharing consumers’ information with third parties. 

The most important part of ROSCA is Section 5 of the rule. This prohibits unfair or deceptive acts or practices, Goodrich said. “The FTC has interpreted ROSCA’s ‘simple cancellation’ requirement to mean that cancellation should be at least as easy to use as the method the consumer used to sign up,” Goodrich said. Those who violate the act are subject to penalties. Under this rule, the FTC has taken action against Uber and Chegg, as examples. And Section 6 gives the state’s attorney general authority to enforce the rule within their state, too. 

Read more: Don’t Keep Paying for Expensive Streaming Services. Here’s How to Cancel Them

Tero Vesalainen/Getty Images

Take these steps to stop sneaky subscription scams

Even if you don’t see a state law your servicer violated, it’s best to take action to raise awareness and stop deceptive practices. Here are a few steps you can take. 

  • File a complaint with your state’s attorney general. The FTC has a list of consumer protections, the complaint form and contact information for each state’s attorney general on its web page. You can also file an online complaint with the FTC. 
  • If you’re charged for a subscription you canceled, didn’t sign up for, or were still charged for after canceling, check to see if your credit card has purchase or fraud protection to get a refund for the unauthorized purchase. 
  • If you have trouble canceling online, call the company’s customer service to cancel. Regardless of how you cancel, make sure you receive a confirmation email and keep an eye on your credit card statement to avoid any future charges. 
  • Above all, make sure you read the fine print and ask any questions before you sign up. Check the ‘Manage Subscription’ or ‘Account’ page settings before you commit to a service to see how transparent the cancellation process is. 
Categories: Gadgets

Best Tablets in 2026: Top Picks from Apple, Samsung and Amazon

Tablets are portable computers that have great usability while being less complicated than a traditional computer. The best tablet is the one that’s versatile enough for all kinds of use cases from home, school or work. While finding the best tablet for you isn’t hard, knowing where to start can be overwhelming, and that’s where CNET’s testing and reviews can help. We’ve picked out the best of the best, and these tablets can do it all, including checking email, managing finances, testing your art skills or casually browsing YouTube and watching videos.

Price, in that regard, is a huge factor. Most people we know consider tablets a secondary computer purchase or as a device for kids. Value matters for tablets more than maybe any other product category for that reason. Some tablets are more premium, which may be worth it if you value a more future-proof device, better OLED displays or faster chips.

You can’t discuss tablets without talking about Apple. The iPad Pro and Air models just got big hardware upgrades, with the expensive Pro introducing OLED displays and a new M4 chip for the first time, along with an improved Pencil Pro. But keep in mind that Apple devices have their own app ecosystem and lean on Apple services. iPads are more versatile than ever, but they’re still not the same, app or OS-wise, as Macs.

While the iPad is the king of the segment, Android tablets have made a comeback over the last couple of years. The Google Pixel Tablet and One Plus Pad 2 are excellent midrange options that are good for family or home use (Pixel Tablet) or as a personal mini laptop (OnePlus Pad 2). Meanwhile, Samsung’s Galaxy Tab S10 tablets, which feature a slim design and excellent AMOLED displays, are a top premium Android tablet option.

In the value segment, Amazon’s Fire tablets are still the best tablet option for cheap and kid-friendly models. If you’re looking for something good for productivity and entertainment, an affordable Chromebook blurs the line between a laptop and a tablet. 

Categories: Gadgets

Meta’s Got New Smart Glasses at a Lower Price, Plus a Kylie Jenner Look

As Google, Samsung, Warby Parker, Gentle Monster and Xreal ready their first smart glasses for the fall, Meta’s launching a new line of its own smart glasses to get a head start on the competition. And Instagram star Kylie Jenner is part of it.

I saw the new-look glasses in person at a Meta event in New York on Monday, and for the most part they’re subtle design riffs on looks that have already been around. This time, however, the glasses are only Meta branded (called Meta Glasses), without any Ray-Ban or Oakley branding at all. They’re still being made by Essilor Luxottica and sold via the same retail channels, but they start at a lower price than Ray-Ban and Oakley models: $299 and up, versus $379 for Ray-Ban Gen 2 glasses or $499 for the Ray-Ban Scriber and Blazer Optics glasses that launched this spring.

Meta is by far the leader when it comes to consumer adoption of smart glasses. In the first quarter of this year, its Ray-Ban lineup accounted for 69% of shipments, which jumped 167% year over year, according to market researcher IDC. But in his report, issued last week, IDC research manager Jitesh Ubrani wrote that “the challengers assembling against it are formidable.” 

Watch this: New Meta Glasses Hands-On: New Designs Start at $299, and There’s a Kylie Jenner Model?

02:57

Lower price, comfier fit?

The price drop is probably going to be welcome, especially since these glasses look to be otherwise the same comfort and feature sets of existing Ray-Ban and Oakley models. All the glasses are designed with a comfort fit like the new Scriber/Blazer models, which I’m wearing as my regular glasses right now, and they feature adjustable nose pads and flexible arms with customizable temple ends. They have the same battery life and camera quality as the Gen 2 and later models that launched last fall, and the dual camera and AI rocker button on the top that the Scriber/Blazer models added.

I tried the “Fury,” a chunkier-frame pair of Meta Glasses that look a lot like the Meta Ray-Ban Display glasses, minus the displays. I actually like the look, but I’m a chunky glasses guy. (The nose pad wasn’t as comfy as the Blazer Optics pair I’ve been wearing, though.)

Another frame design, the “Adventurer,” is very much like the Ray-Bans, but without a Ray-Ban logo or official brand, and more compact than the Fury model.

The Kylie Edition Meta glasses come with a little sparkle in one lens and a mirrored charge case.

Scott Stein/CNET

Kylie Jenner?

There’s also a new frame design made with pop culture force Kylie Jenner, which has a look that’s kind of similar to the Gentle Monster Google glasses announced at Google I/O in May. The Jenner design (Meta Starfire Kylie Edition) has horizontal oval lenses, a little sparkly gem embedded in one of the lenses, a charging case with its own vanity mirror and a little note inside from Jenner. These glasses are more expensive, but Meta didn’t share the exact price of them with us.

The Meta Fury glasses are thick, similar to the Ray-Ban Displays. These don’t have my prescription here in the demo experience, but they could accommodate my range.

Scott Stein/CNET

Prescription support, but no real AI or privacy changes

Meta’s clearly going after an expanded set of design looks in time for summer, as CTO Andrew Bosworth discussed in a Q&A at the event. But what interests me more is Meta’s supposedly more prescription-friendly lens servicing: Lenses can fit from -12 to +2.5, and can be added to the glasses after purchase more easily.

If only Meta’s approach to AI and privacy were improved. There are a few AI upgrades arriving alongside these new glasses: added languages for translation (14 now) and turn-by-turn navigation. But Meta’s AI services lack a lot of hook-ins to phone apps and other AI services, something Bosworth acknowledged, hinting at “agentic” AI plans that may be announced at Meta’s Connect conference in September. 

And while Meta’s been hammered lately for AI privacy concerns about its glasses and worries about camera-equipped glasses being used to record without consent, Bosworth didn’t seem to budge on any design or privacy changes for the glasses going forward.

More glasses on the horizon?

Meta’s head of wearables, Alex Himel, told me that spring and summer are a hot time for glasses, so the timing of Monday’s event made sense for these new models. But there are more Meta glasses on the horizon, Himel hinted.

I asked whether future Meta glasses would be able to either offer more professional-targeted cameras or go camera-free. In a Q&A session, Bosworth acknowledged interest in a less expensive camera-free audio pair of Meta glasses, while Himel said more software tools for post-camera processing are of interest. 

“We want to be as good as the 2024 state of the art,” Himel said of the camera level of Meta glasses compared to those in phones, but acknowledged that camera quality is always a big focus for Meta.

Meta will need to keep being aggressive on glasses plans, especially with Google and Samsung’s models coming soon and Apple expected to have its own glasses next year. But new designs and lower prices are just one part of the challenge. Meta needs to improve its AI features and prove it’s more serious about privacy, too.

Categories: Gadgets

Meta debuts new, cheaper smart glasses under its own brand

Meta on Tuesday said it’s launching a new line of smart glasses, dubbed Meta Glasses, starting at $299. These glasses are being made in partnership with EssilorLuxottica, but unlike the tech giant’s other smart glasses, they don’t carry Ray-Ban or Oakley branding.

The Meta Glasses are available in several countries starting today in a variety of color and lens combinations.

Meta has been continuing its push into wearables as competition in the space heats up. It’s worth noting that Meta and EssilorLuxottica are the largest players in the space, with an estimated market share of more than 80%, according to data from Counterpoint Research.

Image Credits:Meta

The Meta Glasses don’t have a screen, but they come with a camera and personal speakers. There’s a dedicated button that by default triggers the Meta AI assistant, or you can customize the button to launch a specific feature.

Meta claims these new glasses have over 8 hours of battery life, and the on-the-go charging case provides up to 40 hours of additional usage.

The first pair of the new glasses, called the “Meta Adventurer,” features a rectangular shape, and is available in standard and large sizes. The “Meta Fury” frame is boxier, resembling popular styles of men’s glasses. The most notable are “Meta Glasses by Kylie,” which feature a slim oval frame designed in collaboration with American model Kylie Jenner.

Image Credits:Meta

Meta says the Meta AI assistant on these new glasses can answer questions about everything from sports scores to local restaurant picks, can understand what you’re seeing, and help manage your daily life.

The company said these display-less glasses will soon support the “Pedestrian navigation” feature, which provides turn-by-turn directions for walking around. Meta’s also adding support for 14 new languages for its live translation feature, including Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Hindi and Korean.

Meta’s new smart glass range comes a week after Snap unveiled Specs, its long-awaited consumer smart glasses, at a hefty $2,195 price tag.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Honda Makes Surprise Bet on Solid-State Batteries With New Research Deal

Honda R&D, the independent research and development arm of Honda Motor Company, has signed a multi-year joint research agreement with California-based battery technology company QuantumScape. The deal, announced on Thursday, is focused on developing and manufacturing solid-state battery cells. 

The agreement follows Honda’s review of QuantumScape’s technology, providing an important vote of confidence in the company’s solid-state battery efforts.

Why solid-state?

Solid-state batteries are often viewed as one of the most promising advances in next-generation energy storage. They could allow electric vehicles to travel farther, charge more quickly and operate more safely than those using today’s lithium-ion batteries. The potential uses go beyond electric vehicles. The technology could also help power AI data centers, aircraft and defense systems.

Not every solid-state battery claim has gone unchallenged. Earlier this year, Finnish startup Donut Lab attracted attention after announcing what it described as the world’s first production-ready solid-state battery. More recently, battery researcher Ryan Inis Hughes, who publishes on YouTube as Ziroth, questioned that claim, arguing that the cell appears to rely on conventional lithium-ion chemistry rather than the sodium-ion solid-state design the company implied.


Enlarge Image

QuantumScape kicked off pilot production of its 5-amp-hour QSE-5 solid-state cell earlier this year at its San Jose, California, headquarters.

Antuan Goodwin/CNET

QuantumScape, by contrast, appears to have stronger validation for its technology. An existing deal licensing its technology to PowerCo SE, the battery company of the Volkswagen Group, gave the company its first major automotive alignment. Honda’s more recent evaluation and research agreement reinforces the appearance that its technology is holding up under serious scrutiny.

“QS technology demonstrated compelling and unique advantages during our evaluation,” Atsushi Ogawa, chief operating officer of Honda R&D, said in a statement accompanying the announcement. “We see potential for QS technology to add value across a range of applications, including automotive, and we are excited to move forward into the next phase of our partnership.”

The deal is a meaningful step toward solid-state battery tech reaching consumer cars. Earlier this year, QuantumScape opened its Eagle Line pilot facility at its Silicon Valley headquarters. The facility will produce QSE-5 solid-state battery samples for partner evaluations and serve as a blueprint for large-scale manufacturing before customers such as Honda commit to licensing the technology.

Honda’s wider electrification picture

The agreement comes at an unexpected moment. Earlier this year, Honda pulled back on several high-profile North American EV initiatives, including the Zero Saloon and SUV concepts, the Acura RSX SUV, and its Afeela collaboration with Sony Honda Mobility.


Enlarge Image

Earlier this year, Honda took a huge loss and ended development of the upcoming 0 EV concepts and Acura RSX due to insufficient demand.

Honda

Honda has reduced its near-term EV ambitions, cutting EV and software investment and lowering its 2030 global battery-electric sales target to about 20%. The company is now prioritizing hybrids, with a new wave of models planned from 2027, rather than pursuing an all-electric and fuel-cell lineup by 2040.

A representative for Honda didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Cellphone Plans 2026 | Compare Top Mobile Phone Plans and Carriers

“5G” is an umbrella term that encompasses the current fifth-generation cellular wireless network technologies. All the major carriers and phones support 5G connections, which can offer faster data speeds than older technologies such as 4G LTE or 3G.

Essentially there are three types of 5G: Millimeter-wave (mmWave), which can be fast but has limited range; low-band 5G, which has slower speeds but works on a broader range; and midband, which is a balance between the two that’s faster than low-band but also covers a larger range than millimeter-wave. Midband also incorporates C-band, a batch of spectrum auctioned off by the Federal Communications Commission in 2021.

Your phone’s 5G connection depends on which type blankets the area you’re in, as well as other factors, such as population density and infrastructure. For instance, mmWave is super fast, but its signals can be thwarted by buildings, glass, leaves, or being inside a structure.

When your device is connected to a 5G network, it can show up as several variations such as 5G, 5G Plus, 5G UW or others, depending on the carrier. Here’s a list of icons you see at the top of your phone for the major services:

AT&T: 5GE (which isn’t actually 5G, but rather a sly marketing name for 4G LTE), 5G (low band), 5G Plus (mmWave, midband)

Verizon: 5G (low band, also called “Nationwide 5G”), 5G UW/5G UWB (midband and mmWave, also called “5G Ultra Wideband”)

T-Mobile: 5G (low band), 5G UC (midband and mmWave, also called “Ultra Capacity 5G”)

There’s also 5G Reduced Capacity (5G RedCap), which is a lower-power, smaller-capacity branch of 5G used by devices such as smartwatches and portable health devices; the Apple Watch Ultra 3, for example, connects via 5G RedCap.

Just around the corner is 5G Advanced, promising much faster speeds due to carrier aggregation, or combining multiple spectrums.

Categories: Gadgets

The Oura Ring Helped Me Get My Sleep on Track and the 4th-Gen Model Is a Steal This Prime Day

Oura recently released the Oura Ring 5, which is the thinnest of its smart rings yet. If you’re not willing to spend almost $500 on the latest ring, there’s a great deal happening right now on the previous model. The Oura Ring 4 is on sale during Amazon Prime Day for over $100 off, depending on the color you choose. Select finishes (black, silver and brushed silver) are down to only $232 (over $100 less than their $349 retail price). Premium finishes such as gold and metallic rose gold are discounted, too.

The Oura Ring is one of my favorite smart rings, and the only one I’ve found to be the best at tracking health metrics and sleep. The app is easy to navigate because everything is clearly laid out in the interface. I previously relied on it when I was trying to establish a sleep schedule after I had my son, and when comparing our sleep scores. It can be helpful to use a tracker such as the Oura Ring to better understand your sleep habits and where they could use improvement.

The Oura Ring 4 is similar to the latest version, but the fifth-gen model is slimmer. They share a lot of the same software upgrades, though, which is a key part of owning an Oura Ring. Some updates you can enjoy are: 

  • Live activity tracking: Your workout data will be recorded in real time while you’re on the move. 
  • Blood pressure signals: It can monitor your blood pressure but not measure it.
  • Health radar: Health insights that look at your health patterns and take into account blood pressure signals and nighttime breathing insights.
  • GLP-1 support: Tracking features for members who are on GLP-1 medication.
  • Lab results import: You’ll be able to share lab work data and blood biomarkers on the Oura app. 
  • Data erasure control: A new privacy feature that lets you delete data within a specific window without losing your long-term trend history.
  • Ring and case finder: The case functions like a GPS tracker and helps you locate your ring and charging case.

Your Oura membership also remains the same and will still cost $6 a month or $70 a year. If you’ve been eyeing this smart ring, now is the time to snag one — even if it’s the previous model.

Categories: Gadgets

Prime Day Is Here, and Dyson’s Powerful Gen5detect Cordless Vacuum Is $390 Off

With Prime Day upon us, Prime members have access to tons of exclusive deals, including this Dyson deal. If you’re looking to upgrade to a new vacuum, the Dyson Gen5detect cordless vacuum is certainly one to consider. It’s normally $1,050, but you can save a huge $390 today. That drops the price down to $660: That’s just $10 more than the all-time low price. 

Keep in mind, this deal is only for Prime members. 

Dyson considers the Gen5detect its most powerful cordless vacuum, and it packs plenty of premium features to back that up. It delivers up to 70 minutes of vacuuming time and automatically adjusts suction based on your floor type and amount of debris it detects. The Fluffy Optic cleaner head uses an angled light to reveal dust that can be difficult to spot on hard floors, while the Digital Motorbar head is made to deep-clean carpets and detangle long hair. 

The LCD screen shows remaining runtime, maintenance alerts and a post-clean summary of the particles it picked up, which is a satisfying bonus for anyone who likes proof that the vacuum is actually making you home cleaner. It also converts into a handheld and includes tools for crevices, upholstery and pet hair, making it a versatile option for whole-home cleaning. 

For deals elsewear, check out the best anti-Prime deals at Best Buy and Walmart

VACUUM DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

Alternatives to consider

If you’re looking for something more affordable, take a peak at the Eufy C10 robot vacuum. This simple and slim Eufy robot vacuum can help shorten your weekend to-do list. With 4,000 Pa of suction power, it can handle serious messes, and the elastic edge brushes mean every inch of your floor is covered. Normally $480, you can take almost half off right now. This drops the price down to $280. Plus this deal is for everyone, not just Prime members. 

Categories: Gadgets

Verizon Is Appealing to Longtime Customers With Verizon Shine Loyalty Program

Verizon customers looking for reasons to stick with the carrier have a new weekly incentive. Verizon Shine — say it out loud to kickstart a slow morning — features discounts from partner companies, a new Verizon Dollars credit program and opportunities to win big-ticket items like breakfast with football legend David Beckham at the World Cup finals.

Verizon Shine is available now to all subscribers of Verizon’s postpaid unlimited plans. Customers can opt-in to the program in the My Verizon app on their phones.

Mondays will bring daily drops of deals and products, such as free coffee from Starbucks and FIFA World Cup 2026 merch. Verizon says other examples of drops can include concert and sporting event tickets, dining vouchers and gift cards. This sounds strikingly similar to the T-Mobile Tuesdays weekly perk giveaways that Verizon’s rival carrier used to win over subscribers, especially in its early years.

“What we’re looking to do is to break some of the norms that are in the industry overall and put customers first,” said Nancy Clark, Verizon’s chief product and revenue officer.

One of those norms is charging activation and upgrading fees when adding or upgrading lines. For people on the loyalty program, Verizon will waive those changes, including for connected device plans. The company currently charges $40 for an activation.

Verizon Dollars

Verizon Shine also introduces Verizon Dollars, which are accrued each month at a rate of 3% of your bill (not including taxes and fees). Subscribers will be able to access Verizon Dollars starting in July.

Those loyalty bucks can be used toward purchasing items from partners such as Sephora, Roblox, Hilton, Marriott and Starbucks. Clark said the program is launching with approximately 40 partners and will expand in the future.

You can’t apply Verizon Dollars to reduce your bill, but you can use them for buying accessories through Verizon, such as phone cases or put them toward a new phone or other device. The dollars can be banked for 12 months.

Although Verizon operates physical retail stores, the Verizon Shine benefits won’t involve locating your nearest location to score merch. If you redeem a physical item, it will be sent to you.

Clark also noted that Verizon Dollars aren’t necessarily a one-for-one transfer. For example, one Verizon Dollar could get up to five times its value from a partner such as a hotel.

Breakfast like (and with) Beckham

In addition to daily drops, each Monday will bring the chance to win bigger experiences. For instance, on June 22, some lucky Verizon customers will be chosen to have breakfast with David Beckham (footballer and Verizon ambassador) as part of a three-day trip to see the World Cup final on July 19. A New York City food tour with chef Andrew Zimmern drops July 6.

Other top-ticket events include a meet-and-greet with musician Young Miko, a holiday dance lesson with the Rockettes at Radio City Music Hall, and trips to watch NFL games — the other football — in France and Australia.

Categories: Gadgets

Scratch That Holiday Romance Itch With Free Access to Hallmark. Here’s How

Any time of year is a good time for a Hallmark romance. Since the company split ways with Peacock in 2025, you may have been seeking a new way to access your favorite Hallmark TV shows and Christmas romances. Well, look no further; I have the answer, and it won’t cost you a dime.

If you’ve never heard of Hoopla, now’s the time to pay attention. This is the streaming platform you can use to tap into all the Hallmark goodness you’ve been missing out on. You can find it at your local library and, along with all the low-stakes mysteries and festive meet-cutes you’ve been pining for, you can find an assortment of other types of entertainment here, too, like audiobooks, podcasts, all types of movies and TV shows, music and educational material.

But you’re here for Hallmark, so let’s talk about that. Hallmark Channel’s entire collection is available through Hoopla’s Hallmark Plus BingePass. With this feature, you can borrow premium content for seven days. Get ready to binge all the charming love stories you want. This is the perfect way to catch up if you’re behind on hit shows like Ride and When Calls the Heart. It’s all ad-free and costs absolutely nothing. 

Read more: I Love Hallmark Movies, but This New Netflix Flick Shakes Up the Rom-Com Formula

First, you will need a valid library card and email address to sign up for the Hallmark Plus BingePass on Hoopla. Visit the Hoopla website (or download the mobile app) and follow the steps to create an account. Keep your library card on hand, as you may be asked to provide your card number and PIN. You can sign up for one if you don’t have a library card.

Once you complete the setup process for your Hoopla account, you can start streaming. From there, simply pick the Hallmark Plus BingePass option from the BingePass prompt to watch. Not all libraries offer Hoopla, so I recommend checking with your local branch to see if it’s available. If you would rather not rely on the library to scratch that feel-good movie itch, you can try Pluto TV and watch its curated channel, devoted to all things Hallmark.

Want access to all of Hallmark’s content library and don’t mind paying? You can always sign up for Hallmark Plus — the channel’s exclusive streaming platform — for $8 a month or $80 a year. A paid subscription gets you access to Hallmark’s content library, along with all-new exclusive original series and movies. Extra perks, as listed on the Hallmark Plus website, include a Hallmark Gold Crown Store coupon, Crown Rewards points, unlimited eCards and exclusive surprises.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 23 #1108

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle has some pretty tricky categories. Green is a fun one for those of us who’ve played a lot of board games in our lives. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Boogie down!

Green group hint: Do not pass Go.

Blue group hint: Reading the news.

Purple group hint: Some academic gowns have these.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Dance styles.

Green group: In a Monopoly box.

Blue group: Content sorting options online.

Purple group: Things with mantles/mantels.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 23, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is dance styles. The four answers are foxtrot, modern, swing and tap.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is in a Monopoly box. The four answers are deed, hotel, money and token.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is content sorting options online. The four answers are featured, popular, recent and trending.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is things with mantles/mantels. The four answers are Earth, emperor, fireplace and Yankees.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 23 #638

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition is a tough one. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Cleveland is another one.

Green group hint: Rebound.

Blue group hint: Husky and Huntington Bank also fit this group.

Purple group hint: Look for a letter that’s not pronounced.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: AL Central teams.

Green group: Deflection off a surface.

Blue group: Big Ten football stadiums.

Purple group: Ends in a silent T.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 23, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is AL Central teams. The four answers are Chicago, Detroit, Kansas City and Minnesota.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is deflection off a surface. The four answers are bounce, carom, glance and richochet.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is Big Ten football stadiums. The four answers are Autzen, Camp Randall, Kinnick and Michigan.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is ends in a silent T.  The four answers are croquet, debut, Garrett Crochet and Rudy Gobert.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Strands Hints, Answer and Help for June 23 #842- CNET

Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.

Today’s NYT Strands puzzle is a fun one if you (or your kids) are a fan of a certain computer game. Some of the answers are difficult to unscramble, so if you need hints and answers, read on.

I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story. 

If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.

Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far

Hint for today’s Strands puzzle

Today’s Strands theme is: A whole new world

If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Watch out for creepers

Clue words to unlock in-game hints

Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:

  • FOOT, DOCK, MOLE, PORT, GEAR, REAR, RAGE, MINE, LOOT, LOFT

Answers for today’s Strands puzzle

These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:

  • FOOD, TOOL, ARMOR, BUILDING, STORAGE, BLOCK, PORTAL

Today’s Strands spangram

The completed NYT Strands puzzle for June 23, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

Today’s Strands spangram is MINECRAFT. To find it, start with the M that’s five letters down on the far-left vertical row, and wind up.

Categories: Gadgets

Google DeepMind Partners With Hollywood Indie Darling A24 to Develop AI Filmmaking Tools

A24 is the independent studio largely responsible for making modern arthouse movies mainstream, with recent hits like Marty Supreme and Backrooms shaping cultural conversations. 

Now the cult film production company is partnering with Google’s AI-focused DeepMind team to develop AI tools for its filmmakers, according to an exclusive report from the Wall Street Journal. As part of the deal, Google is investing $75 million into A24’s 20-person Labs team to create new tools for movie production and distribution. These tools will be available to A24 creators, but they’ll also funnel back into Google’s AI ecosystem.

Google previously partnered with Darren Aronofsky, a firm believer in using generative AI in filmmaking, and the director of movies like Black Swan and The Whale. But this is the first time the company has staked money in a Hollywood studio.

The search giant currently owns the massive video hosting website, YouTube, and one of the most widely available AI video generation tools, Veo. DeepMind’s investment in A24 represents an expansion of its research scope, which has recently expanded into video games as well.

The deal between the studio and the tech giant doesn’t allow Google to train AI models on A24’s catalog of television shows and movies. Instead, A24 Labs is currently developing an application to produce AI-generated storyboards, the rough draft art created before a movie’s visuals are fully fleshed out.

When asked for comment, a representative of the DeepMind team pointed CNET toward Google’s official blog post about the partnership.

According to that post, Google’s “specific goals, technical outputs and creative milestones of this initiative will evolve over time,” indicating that the scope of this partnership may change as A24 and DeepMind foster a “deep research and development collaboration… spanning multiple projects over time.”

A representative for A24 did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

AI tools in cinema 

The A24 Labs team responsible for creating the new AI tools is headed by Scott Belsky, who left Adobe’s executive team for his new role in January 2025.

According to the Wall Street Journal, Belsky believes that audience and director pushback against AI tools hinges on public perception that generative AI is used to make movies cheaper and faster.

“We think there are better uses that preserve creative control and support risk-taking,” Belsky told the Wall Street Journal. He argued that A24’s AI usage “won’t look anything like the prompted generation type of AI that people feel uncomfortable with.”

While it’s true that actors and directors have by and large rallied against introducing generative AI into the filmmaking process, Hollywood studios have a far more hot-and-cold relationship with the burgeoning industry. Some producers have threatened legal action against AI giants for alleged copyright violations, while others, such as Disney, have attempted to cut ill-fated deals with companies like OpenAI.

A24’s unconventional storytelling 

A24 was founded in 2012 by three film production veterans with a mission to release movies other companies wouldn’t touch. Some of the company’s earliest productions, including Oscar Award-winning pictures Moonlight and Lady Bird, have become cult classics, championed for their portrayal of coming-of-age stories and for featuring characters from marginalized communities that are typically underrepresented in Hollywood films.

While the production company has long been renowned among cinephiles, it arguably became a household name in 2022 with the release of Everything Everywhere All at Once, its first film to surpass $100 million in box-office earnings.

A24’s more recent films have consistently scored critical and financial accolades. Backrooms became the largest original horror movie debut in history, and has raked in more than $270 million at the box office during its theatrical release. A24’s upcoming Elden Ring movie, directed by Alex Garland and adapted from the popular FromSoftware video game, is slated to be the company’s biggest production yet, commanding a $175 million budget.

The DeepMind deal is representative of the cultural clash at the heart of A24’s business model: While the production company elevates independent talent, first-time directors and scripts that other studios might not be willing to take a chance on, it’s still a business worth up to $3.5 billion that’s beholden to investors.

It’s unclear how the Google AI deal may yet affect A24’s sterling public reputation, but it’s very unlikely that the audience of theatergoers that shows up time and time again to support independent projects will be happy with the news.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Samsung Phone of 2026

No matter your lifestyle or budget, Samsung has a range of phones to fit what you’re looking for. From baseline options such as the Galaxy S25 and S25 Plus (or the newer S26 and S26 Plus) to more premium picks like the Galaxy S26 Ultra, you can get solid performance, good cameras and long-lasting batteries regardless of how much you spend. Recently, the Galaxy S26 Ultra received a CNET Lab Award for having the fastest wired charging of 33 phones we tested. For a novel design, you can choose Samsung’s pricier Galaxy Z Flip 7 or Z Fold 7, or even the super-slim Galaxy S25 Edge. And for a more affordable option, Samsung’s A26, A36 or A56 might be a good fit. Our roundup can help you find the phone that best fits your needs.

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra isn’t a radical upgrade from the S25 Ultra, but there are improvements where it counts. It’s the thinnest and lightest Ultra, at 7.9mm thick and 214 grams — an admittedly minor slim-down that’s still noticeable. 


Jump to details

Pros

  • Innovative Privacy Display
  • Long-lasting battery
  • Intuitive AI features
  • Consistently great cameras

Cons

  • Some inconsistent AI features
  • No magnetic wireless charging
  • Many of the same specs as the S25 Ultra


Expand Pros & Cons

The $900 Samsung Galaxy S26 is a leading flagship with a price hike, and while it’s extremely likely that Samsung is just the first phonemaker in 2026 to give its phone a price hike, it still stings to have to pay $100 above last year’s Galaxy S25. Still, there are some notable software and AI upgrades, including the impressive Horizontal Lock feature that super-stabilizes recorded footage, no matter how you twist the phone around while shooting video.


Jump to details

Pros

  • Good cameras
  • Clean, modern phone design
  • Fun, even useful AI perks

Cons

  • $100 price hike not worth extra storage
  • 25W wired charging is comparatively slow
  • Nearly all upgrades are to software, not hardware


Expand Pros & Cons

With the Galaxy Z Fold 7, Samsung has finally addressed some of the key issues with its previous book-style foldables. The impressively thin build and wider, 6.5-inch cover screen makes this feel like a standard phone when closed, and that wider 8-inch inside display is great for multitasking, with the ability to run up to three apps simultaneously. Perhaps most notably, the camera gets a major upgrade with the addition of a 200-megapixel main camera, which takes shots on par with the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra. 


Jump to details

Pros

  • Thin 4.2mm design
  • 200-megapixel main camera
  • Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
  • Durable build

Cons

  • Steep $2,000 price tag
  • Same 4,400-mAh battery as last year’s Fold
  • 25-watt wired charging


Expand Pros & Cons

When I first got my hands on Samsung’s new Galaxy Z Flip 7, I was delighted to discover that it has a smaller crease, larger cover screen, thinner design and bigger battery compared to last year’s Galaxy Z Flip 6. But as I tested the new clamshell phone, I became enthralled by its inner screen. At 6.9 inches, this is the biggest screen on any Samsung phone aside from the Galaxy Z Fold 7, which has an 8-inch foldable display. 


Jump to details

Pros

  • The 6.9-inch screen is immersive, with lovely colors and contrast
  • The 4.1-inch screen looks incredible
  • It’s durable and survived a drop onto concrete
  • One UI 8 (Android 16) runs wonderfully
  • $1,100 is still a lot, but Samsung gives the phone more value than the Flip 6

Cons

  • Gets warm when recording videos and playing games
  • Battery life is the same as the Flip 6 despite a bigger battery
  • Cover screen software has room to grow


Expand Pros & Cons

The Galaxy S25 Edge is a unique offering — one that doesn’t necessarily cater to most people’s top priorities like longer battery life and an affordable price tag, yet it still presents an alluring option with its slim frame and lightweight body. Thankfully, it doesn’t scale back too much in the way of features and capabilities; it has a powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor and the same 200-megapixel main camera you’ll find on the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra (although there’s no telephoto lens). 


Jump to details

Pros

  • Lightweight design
  • 200-megapixel main camera
  • Durable titanium frame and Gorilla Glass front and back
  • Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
  • 12GB of RAM

Cons

  • Mediocre battery life
  • Only 25-watt wired charging
  • Steep price tag
  • Just two rear cameras


Expand Pros & Cons

MOBILE DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

What is the best Samsung phone?

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra — priced at $1,300 — comes packed with maximum features that, for most people, is more than necessary. For the rest of us, last year’s $800 Galaxy S25 is a standout among its Galaxy counterparts. Even with the release of the S26, the S25 remains a solid pick because it has much of the same hardware, software and AI capabilities as it pricier (and newer) peers.

The Galaxy S25 has a very capable triple rear camera setup that is versatile in capturing bright outdoor scenes and candid moments inside under mixed lighting. Overall, the Galaxy S26 Ultra is ideal for Android fans who prioritize fast performance, versatile cameras and a spacious screen. 

How to pick the right Samsung phone for you

Deciding which Samsung phone is right for you comes down to what you want in a phone and how much you’re willing to spend. If you want the largest screen available on a standard Samsung phone, enjoy note-taking with a stylus and need a camera with a significantly closer zoom, the Galaxy S26 Ultra is the right choice. You’ll also have to spend $1,300 unless you score a trade-in deal. 

Those who don’t need the stylus, prefer a more compact phone and still want a good camera should consider the Galaxy S25 or Galaxy S25 Plus. If you just want the basics, like a spacious screen, 5G and a decent camera, consider the Galaxy S25 FE. Those looking for the flashiest tech around — and who also have deep pockets — should consider the Galaxy Z Fold 7, Z Flip 7 or even the slightly cheaper Z Fold 7 FE. 

Finding the best Samsung phone will ultimately come down to preference. Choosing among so many options can get complicated, so here’s how to decide which Samsung phone is best for you. Refer to our phone buying guide for more tips on how to choose the right device.

Best Samsung phones in 2026

Pros

  • Innovative Privacy Display
  • Long-lasting battery
  • Intuitive AI features
  • Consistently great cameras

Cons

  • Some inconsistent AI features
  • No magnetic wireless charging
  • Many of the same specs as the S25 Ultra

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra isn’t a radical upgrade from the S25 Ultra, but there are improvements where it counts. It’s the thinnest and lightest Ultra, at 7.9mm thick and 214 grams — an admittedly minor slim-down that’s still noticeable. 

The hardware advancement that steals the spotlight is the Privacy Display, which prevents others from seeing what’s on your screen. Unlike a $10 screen protector you can buy from Amazon, you can toggle Privacy Display on for certain apps, like a banking app or your email, as well as your lock screen so no one sees your password or PIN. You can also enable it just for incoming notifications, so only part of your screen gets blacked out. 

The S26 Ultra carries over the same camera specs as last year, but it consistently delivers high-quality images. Plus, a neat new Horizontal Lock feature when recording videos keeps the horizon level even as you rotate your phone 360 degrees, leading to astonishingly stable footage.

Why we like it

The S26 Ultra prioritizes hardware and software. Along with a thinner design and the Privacy Display, there’s also a handful of new intuitive AI features. For instance, Now Nudge surfaces real-time suggestions based on what’s on your screen, so if someone asks for photos from your trip, it’ll automatically point you toward those images in your Gallery so you don’t have to dig for them. And Document Scan will automatically appear when you’re snapping a photo of a document to remove shadows and creases, then let you export the final product as a PDF. Plus, the S26 Ultra’s battery can last well over a day and a half, which is a major perk.

Who’s it best for

If you’re a power user who likes having a larger display, a bigger battery and top-notch cameras — as well as the signature S Pen — the S26 Ultra is the way to go. It’s a great choice for anyone who doesn’t want to worry about charging their phone at the end of each day, as the battery can last well over a day and a half.

Who shouldn’t get it

The S26 Ultra keeps its $1,300 price, even amid a RAM shortage that threatens to raise phone prices. But that’s still not pocket change. If you don’t need the most high-end cameras and prefer a smaller device, the baseline S26 shares many of the same features as the Ultra, including the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor, plus all those AI features.

Pros

  • Good cameras
  • Clean, modern phone design
  • Fun, even useful AI perks

Cons

  • $100 price hike not worth extra storage
  • 25W wired charging is comparatively slow
  • Nearly all upgrades are to software, not hardware

The $900 Samsung Galaxy S26 is a leading flagship with a price hike, and while it’s extremely likely that Samsung is just the first phonemaker in 2026 to give its phone a price hike, it still stings to have to pay $100 above last year’s Galaxy S25. Still, there are some notable software and AI upgrades, including the impressive Horizontal Lock feature that super-stabilizes recorded footage, no matter how you twist the phone around while shooting video.

Why we like it

The Galaxy S26 is a leading smartphone, a jack-of-all-trades that is blisteringly fast, takes good photos, shoots great videos, runs games well and has a decent battery. It’s not the absolute best at any of these among today’s top phones, but makes the podium for most of them, so it’s an easy all-around choice. The new AI features are fun if situational, and aside from Horizontal Lock, there aren’t any standouts. If one has to pay more for the phone, at least it starts at 256GB of storage.

Who it’s best for

The Galaxy S26 is a reliable pick for anyone who just wants a great phone that can do anything. While it won’t win any battery longevity awards (especially compared to the OnePlus 15), its cameras remain stellar, and its Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip with 12GB of RAM result in smooth operations. It still gets seven years of software and security updates, so buyers will be able to keep it around for years and expect some AI features from newer Galaxy phones to trickle down, too.

Who shouldn’t get it

The Galaxy S26 doesn’t quite excel in anything — not battery life (OnePlus 15), photo AI features (Google Pixel 10 Pro) or display tech (its Galaxy S26 Ultra sibling). And the $100 price hike is more a reflection of the state of the industry than a result of upgrades, so if you’re looking for a cheaper but still powerful option, look for the Galaxy S25 or other Android phones from last year. 

Pros

  • Thin 4.2mm design
  • 200-megapixel main camera
  • Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
  • Durable build

Cons

  • Steep $2,000 price tag
  • Same 4,400-mAh battery as last year’s Fold
  • 25-watt wired charging

With the Galaxy Z Fold 7, Samsung has finally addressed some of the key issues with its previous book-style foldables. The impressively thin build and wider, 6.5-inch cover screen makes this feel like a standard phone when closed, and that wider 8-inch inside display is great for multitasking, with the ability to run up to three apps simultaneously. Perhaps most notably, the camera gets a major upgrade with the addition of a 200-megapixel main camera, which takes shots on par with the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra. 

Altogether, it’s a great choice if you want a bigger, tablet-like display without the bulk or a compromise on camera quality.

Why we like it

The Z Fold 7 does a solid job combining what’s great about standard slate phones and what’s great about foldables. It feels wonderfully normal to hold when closed, thanks to its sleek design and lightweight build. It also packs great cameras and has an expansive main display that’s 11 percent bigger than last year’s Z Fold 6. 

Thankfully, a slimmer build doesn’t force the battery to take a hit; the Z Fold 7 maintains that same 4,400-mAh battery as last year’s foldable. That pales in comparison to batteries from Chinese competitors, but at least it’s not a downgrade. The Z Fold 7 also packs a Snapdragon 8 Elite processor to power the many AI features you’ll get onboard, from Galaxy AI photo and audio editing tools to Google’s Gemini Live and Circle to Search. The phone also supports seven years of software and security updates. 

Who it’s best for

If you’re bored of standard slate phones and want something that feels a little more exciting, the Galaxy Z Fold 7 is a great choice. The slim design and wider cover screen helps it to feel as normal as possible when closed, with the added perk of an expansive main display that’s great for multitasking and watching videos. The cameras are also impressive for a foldable that’s so thin. 


Who shouldn’t get it

The Z Fold 7’s $2,000 price tag is perhaps its biggest caveat. Also, if you don’t need a bigger display, it may not be worth the splurge. Ironically, the cover screen is so practical that you’ll rarely need to open the phone — unless you’re watching movies or multitasking, in which case a phone like the Galaxy S25 Ultra might be a better fit.

Pros

  • The 6.9-inch screen is immersive, with lovely colors and contrast
  • The 4.1-inch screen looks incredible
  • It’s durable and survived a drop onto concrete
  • One UI 8 (Android 16) runs wonderfully
  • $1,100 is still a lot, but Samsung gives the phone more value than the Flip 6

Cons

  • Gets warm when recording videos and playing games
  • Battery life is the same as the Flip 6 despite a bigger battery
  • Cover screen software has room to grow

When I first got my hands on Samsung’s new Galaxy Z Flip 7, I was delighted to discover that it has a smaller crease, larger cover screen, thinner design and bigger battery compared to last year’s Galaxy Z Flip 6. But as I tested the new clamshell phone, I became enthralled by its inner screen. At 6.9 inches, this is the biggest screen on any Samsung phone aside from the Galaxy Z Fold 7, which has an 8-inch foldable display. 

The Z Flip 7’s large screen size makes content feel more immersive and colors look lovely and vivid. This led to epic TikTok and Instagram sessions, watching widescreen films such as A Working Man and Back to the Future, as well as jumping between two apps stacked vertically on the screen thanks to One UI 8’s 90:10 split tool.

Every time I open the Flip 7, I’m consistently dumbfounded by how such a large display can unfurl from something about the size of a makeup compact. And when it’s closed, there’s a 4.1-inch cover screen that’s fantastic in its own ways, with new clever animations for when you’re recording a video, charging the phone or taking a selfie, all efficiently using the extra display real estate. In terms of functionality, though, the cover screen’s software is about the same as the 3.4-inch one on the Flip 6.

The Flip 7 impressed me in nearly every way but one: its battery life. It has a larger battery than the Flip 6, but it doesn’t last any longer in daily use. It did consistently get me through a day on a single charge, often having 15% to 20% left, but there were also a few days where it needed an early evening top-off.

Why we like it

The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is the most fully realized version of Samsung’s ideal of a flip phone since the launch of the original Galaxy Z Flip in 2020. The Flip 7’s appeal is simple: It’s a thin phone with a big, bold screen that folds in half into a coaster-sized square. The larger cover screen and inner screen make content more immersive. It’s design is thin (for a clamshell foldable) and comfortable to hold. Plus you get twice the storage this year compared to last.

Who is it best for

If you’ve been tempted by a clamshell-style foldable, you should definitely consider the Flip 7. If you have a Galaxy Z Flip 4 or older, the Flip 7 will be an upgrade in every way. It’s harder to make that same recommendation for Flip 5 owners unless your phone is showing its age. And if you have a Galaxy Z Flip 6, you can sit this one out unless you really want those larger screens. 

Who shouldn’t get it

If you spend a ton of time around dirt or sand, this phone isn’t for you.

Pros

  • Lightweight design
  • 200-megapixel main camera
  • Durable titanium frame and Gorilla Glass front and back
  • Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
  • 12GB of RAM

Cons

  • Mediocre battery life
  • Only 25-watt wired charging
  • Steep price tag
  • Just two rear cameras

The Galaxy S25 Edge is a unique offering — one that doesn’t necessarily cater to most people’s top priorities like longer battery life and an affordable price tag, yet it still presents an alluring option with its slim frame and lightweight body. Thankfully, it doesn’t scale back too much in the way of features and capabilities; it has a powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor and the same 200-megapixel main camera you’ll find on the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra (although there’s no telephoto lens). 

The main sacrifice is battery life, as the S25 Edge has a 3,900-mAh battery, the lowest amount across the S25 series. It also only supports 25-watt wired charging. But it still offers enough juice to get you through the day, even if you’re a notoriously heavy phone user. Plus, using something so remarkably feather-light feels like such a breath of fresh air, you may not mind making some compromises. Read our full Galaxy S25 Edge review.

Why we like it

The S25 Edge is surprisingly enjoyable to use and hold, given its lightweight design (it weighs 163 grams) and generous 6.7-inch screen. And despite its thinner frame, it feels surprisingly sturdy, thanks to its Gorilla Glass Ceramic 2 display and Victus 2 backing. That means it doesn’t feel like it’s going to snap in your pocket — and you’ll hardly even feel it in there.

Who it’s best for

If you want a phone that feels light and can slip easily into your pocket, without compromising too much on functionality, the S25 Edge is a great option. Plus, if you’re looking for a fresh form factor but aren’t interested in venturing into foldables territory, this unique phone is a solid — and more familiar-feeling — choice. 


Who shouldn’t get it

If you’re looking for something more budget-friendly, the S25 Edge might not appeal to you. Also, if battery life is your top priority, the S25 Edge leaves something to be desired, as it only lasts about 24 hours before needing a recharge.

Best Samsung phones compared

Samsung Galaxy S26 UltraSamsung Galaxy S26Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge Display size, tech, resolution, refresh rate 6.9-inch AMOLED; 3,120×1,440 pixels; 1-120Hz adaptive refresh rate6.3-inch AMOLED; 2,340×1,080 pixels; 1-120Hz adaptive refresh rate6.5-inch AMOLED, 2,520×1,080p, 1 to 120Hz refresh rate; 8-inch AMOLED, 2,184×1,968p, 1 to 120Hz refresh rate4.1-inch AMOLED; 1,048×948 pixels; 120Hz refresh rate; 6.9-inch AMOLED; 2,520×1,080 pixels; 1 to 120Hz refresh rate6.7-inch QHD+  AMOLED display; 120Hz refresh rate
Pixel density 500 ppi411 ppiCover: 422 ppi; Internal: 368 ppiCover: 342ppi; Internal: 397ppi513 ppiDimensions (inches) 6.44×3.07×0.315.89×2.82×0.28Open: 5.63 x 6.24 x 0.17 in; Closed: 2.87 x 6.24 x 0.35 inOpen: 2.96 x 6.56 x 0.26 in; Closed: 2.96 x 3.37 x 0.26 in2.98 x 6.23 x 0.23 inchesDimensions (millimeters) 163.6×78.1×7.9149.6×71.7×7.2Open: 143.2 x 158.4 x 4.2mm; Closed: 72.8 x 158.4 x 8.9mmOpen: 75.2 x 166.7 x 6.5mm; Closed: 75.2 x 85.5 x 13.7mm75.6 X 158.2 X 5.8mmWeight (grams, ounces) 214 g (7.55 oz.)167g (5.89 oz.)215g (7.58 oz.)188g (6.63 oz.)163g (5.75 oz)Mobile software Android 16Android 16Android 16Android 16Android 15Camera 200-megapixel (wide), 50-megapixel (ultrawide), 10-megapixel (3x telephoto), 50-megapixel (5x telephoto)50-megapixel (wide), 12-megapixel (ultrawide), 10-megapixel (3x telephoto)200-megapixel (wide), 12-megapixel (ultrawide), 10-megapixel (telephoto)50-megapixel (wide), 12-megapixel (ultrawide)200-megapixel (wide), 12-megapixel (ultrawide)Front-facing camera 12-megapixel12-megapixel10-megapixel (inner screen); 10-megapixel (outer screen)10-megapixel12-megapixelVideo capture 8K8K8K4K8KProcessor Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 for GalaxyQualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 for GalaxyQualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite for GalaxySamsung Exynos 2500Snapdragon 8 EliteRAM + storage 12GB RAM + 256GB; 16GB RAM + 512GB, 1TB12GB RAM + 256GB, 512GB12GB + 256GB, 12GB + 512GB, 16GB + 1TB12GB + 256GB, 12GB + 512GB12GB RAM + 256GB, 512GBExpandable storage NoneNoneNoneNoneNoBattery 5,000 mAh4,300 mAh4,400 mAh4,300 mAh3,900 mAhFingerprint sensor Under displayUnder displayYesYesUnder display Connector USB-CUSB-CUSB-CUSB-CUSB-CHeadphone jack NoneNoneNoneNoneNoneSpecial features Aluminum frame; 7 years of OS and security updates; IP68 water and dust resistance; wireless PowerShare to charge other devices; integrated S Pen; UWB for finding other devices; 60W wired charging (charger not included); 25W wireless charging; no magnets for accessories; Galaxy AI; Gorilla Glass Armor 2 cover glass; privacy display2,600-nit peak brightness; 7 years of OS and security updates; IP68 water and dust resistance; wireless PowerShare to charge other devices; 25W wired charging (charger not included); 15W wireless charging; lacks built-in magnets; Gorilla Glass Victus 2 cover screen; Galaxy AIOne UI 8, 25W wired charging speed, Qi wireless charging, 2,600-nit peak brightness, Galaxy AI, NFC, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, IP48 water resistanceOne UI 8, IP48 water resistance, 25W wired charging, Qi wireless charging, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, Galaxy AIIP88 rating, 5G, One UI 7, 25-watt wired charging, 15-watt wireless charging, Galaxy AI, Gemini, Circle to Search, Wi-Fi 7.US price starts at $1,300 (256GB)$900 (256GB)$2,000 (256GB)$1,100 (256GB)$1,100

In March 2026, we added the Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra to our list.

Get more for less with cheap phones: For a fraction of the cost, you can get a solid phone that does almost everything a pricier flagship phone can do. The Galaxy S25 FE packs a good camera and costs only $650 before discounts or trade-in offers.

Test your phone: It’s worth going to a store and trying out a phone before you shell out hundreds of dollars for it.

Find peace of mind with a case: You spent all this time picking a phone, now protect it from damage with a case.

We test the battery, screen, performance, cameras and more on every phone we review.

Lisa Eadiciccio/CNET

We test every phone in real-world scenarios focusing on its features, design, performance, cameras, battery life and overall value. We document our findings in an initial review that is periodically updated when there are new software updates or to compare against new phones from competitors like Apple, Google, OnePlus and Samsung.

Photography

Photography is a major focus for most phones these days, so we take pictures and videos of various subjects in a variety of settings and lighting levels. We try out any new camera modes such as 4K 120fps slow motion video that debuted with the iPhone 16 Pro and 16 Pro Max or AI reframe and focus on the Motorola Razr Plus (2024).

Lisa Eadiccico/CNET

Battery life

Battery testing is conducted in a variety of ways. We assess how long a phone lasts during a typical day of use, and note how it performs during more focused sessions of video calls, media streaming and gaming. We also conduct a video playback test, which isn’t always included in the initial review and is added later in an update.

Performance

We perform processor-heavy tasks like editing photos, exporting videos and playing games. We evaluate whether a newer version of a particular phone includes enough features to make it worth upgrading from older models.

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

We use benchmarking apps to measure the performance, alongside our own anecdotal experiences using the phone for our review. Of particular note are how graphics and animations look. Are they smooth? Or do they lag or stutter? We also look at how quickly the phone switches between horizontal and vertical orientations and how fast the camera app opens and is ready to take a photo.

Read more: How We Test Phones

Why buy a Samsung phone instead of other Android phones?

The right phone for you depends on a variety of factors, such as your budget, your current phone and whether you own other mobile accessories from the same company, such as earbuds or smartwatches. Many people prefer to stick with phones from the same company because the experience is more consistent and there’s less of a learning curve when switching to a new device.

The same holds true for Samsung; the company’s One UI software (its customized version of Android) can be found across its phone lineup. Samsung’s One UI 6 introduced a more customizable lock screen and the ability to answer a phone call through a text message instead of speaking.

Consistency aside, there are some benefits to choosing a Samsung phone over devices from other Android phone makers. Samsung usually excels when it comes to display quality and brightness, and it typically offers a lot of choices in terms of size and pricing. Samsung phones usually offer decent battery life — especially midsize and large phones — and the cameras are usually among the best, especially on the Galaxy S26 lineup.

Show more

Which Samsung phone series is best, Galaxy A, S or Z?

Samsung’s Galaxy A and S families serve different purposes, so which one is right for you will depend on your needs and budget. The Galaxy A lineup is Samsung’s mid-tier and budget line, and it’s the best choice if you’re looking for a phone under $500 without a trade-in deal. These phones typically offer core features like a big screen, large battery and multiple cameras at a cheaper price. 

You also get what you pay for; Samsung’s cheapest phones have very limited storage space and poorer cameras compared with the pricier models, and they sometimes struggle with juggling multiple tasks. More expensive phones like the Galaxy A35 5G provide almost everything most people want in a basic phone, although you’ll still have to compromise a bit on camera quality and general performance. 

The Galaxy S series, on the other hand, is Samsung’s flagship smartphone line. Galaxy S phones usually include the best tech that Samsung has to offer and features you’d expect on any high-end phone, such as a premium design, screens with high refresh rates and multiple high-end cameras. The biggest updates that launched with the Galaxy S25 lineup, for example, included the bump to a 200-megapixel main camera on the Ultra and bigger batteries for the smaller models. You’ll have to be willing to pay hundreds of dollars more than you would for a Galaxy A series phone in most cases. 

Samsung’s Galaxy Z phones are a great pick if you’re looking for something with a fresh, foldable design. Whether it’s the nostalgia of the clamshell-style Z Flip 7 or the dual functionality of the book-style Z Fold 7, it can be a nice change of pace to have a device that feels different than most other phones on the market. You’ll just have to be willing to pay the high price.

Show more

Categories: Gadgets

Using AI Companion Apps Gives Many Singles the Ick, Survey Finds

Beware: Dating an AI chatbot may lessen your chances of finding love.

A new study from Match Group, the dating company behind popular dating apps like Tinder and Hinge, found that nearly half (47%) of the roughly 1,000 people ages 18 to 39 it surveyed “view AI in romantic contexts negatively.” And it’s a hard pass for most singles if you’re interested in AI companion apps, like Kindroid and Replika. Two in five singles aged 18 to 39 refuse to date someone who uses these apps, including over half (51%) of women aged 18 to 24, according to Match Group’s findings.

Online dating can feel sketchy, and using AI may not make it any easier. There are plenty of ways you can use AI on dating apps, like touching up your profile or figuring out what not to say to a new connection. While surveyed singles say they’re fine with using AI for everyday productivity tasks, they don’t want AI meddling in their love lives — especially as a romantic partner. 

Most singles don’t want someone interested in an AI companion

AI is creeping into personal relationships more than in the past. Imagine going to ChatGPT to decide who is right in an argument with your spouse. Or even dating a bot. It’s not that far-fetched, given that there are AI apps that resemble personal relationships. Some even have avatars. 

The Match Group survey found that dating an AI bot is a no-go for singles — four to one opposed. The survey found that only 12% of singles have tried companion apps in the past three months — mainly to try something new, not as a substitute for finding love. Most used them for boredom and entertainment (45%) and roleplay and simulation (43%). Fewer used AI to build a genuine connection (38%) or process emotions (26%). 

“Dating is inherently human, and it’s not surprising that singles want their experience to remain grounded in real interaction between real people,” Chine Mmegwa, head of corporate development at Match Group, said in an email to CNET.

Instead of relying on bots, singles are getting advice from friends and family (60% respectively), whereas only 20% are using AI. That’s not surprising, considering a study published in March in the journal Science found AI is more likely to agree with you and less likely to help with things like repairing relationships. The study shows you may depend on AI more instead. 

Michael Salas, a relationship therapist, agrees that seeking advice from family and friends rather than AI is a better move. Salas tested using AI on a complicated situation he was having with a friend, and the bot’s response may surprise you. 

“It told me this friend clearly didn’t care about me. Verbatim, it told me this,” says Salas. “This wasn’t something I was even questioning, and I know it was wrong. When I told it that, it immediately course-corrected, told me I was right, and shifted to a new framework. That’s not wisdom.” 

Salas advises being careful when using AI in dating. “I think you really have to be careful because it will take liberties and give advice that is incorrect or unwarranted. Save that for actual people who know you. Ask them instead.” Instead, Salas recommends using AI for editing and generating ideas, like ways to show someone you care — not as a substitute for humans. 

Using AI for dating has limitations

Match found that most (74%) singles ages 18 to 39 use AI tools, such as ChatGPT, regularly. And 69% use AI for productivity tasks like summarizing, problem-solving and writing content. Most find their use of AI positive across several use cases. But not when it comes to finding love. 

There are some exceptions. Over half (64%) can see AI helping them find love, including keeping a conversation going (27%), building a stronger profile (27%), starting a conversation (26%) and planning a date (27%). Some AI features already lean toward those preferences, like Tinder’s AI-powered matching that suggests connections based on your interests and camera roll (if you allow it). And there are date-planning apps, like the Date Idea Generator and My Spicy Vanilla. And Hinge debuted Convo Starters to ease the pressure of sending the first message. 

It all still boils down to how comfortable singles feel about using AI to help with matchmaking. Based on Match Group’s survey findings, the percentage using AI assistance remains below half across many use cases, making it clear that most people don’t want bots meddling in their love lives. All in all, Mmegwa said that AI can be used to make dating safer and improve outcomes, but not without trust, authenticity and real-world connection. 

Mmegwa said AI is affecting trust and safety through features like ‘Face Check’ to ensure people are real and ‘Are You Sure?’ to keep interactions respectful.

“It should help people connect better in the real world. We’re focused on using AI to help daters know themselves better, generate better matches and improve outcomes across the experience,” Mmegwa said. “But the user should always feel like they’re in the driver’s seat. AI shouldn’t over-engineer connection or take away choice and personal agency.”

Categories: Gadgets

How World Cup Fans Can Use AI to Keep Up With the Action

I’m one of the millions of people who are totally locked into watching World Cup 2026. I’ve been going to local watch parties, sporting my US team jersey and, yes, researching a lot about frontrunners, dark horses and why team Japan looks so dang good. While I often refer to my footy-fanatic friends if I’m curious about something, more and more people are turning to chatbots for answers. 

OpenAI and Google have both rolled out and highlighted numerous features that can help casual watchers, the most diehard fans and everyone in between make the most of this World Cup experience. 

(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, CNET’s parent company, in 2025 filed a lawsuit against OpenAI, alleging it infringed Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)

Experiencing the World Cup 2026 on ChatGPT

In the week before the tournament, there were 17 million World Cup-related ChatGPT prompts globally, according to OpenAI. Many of these prompts went beyond the standard “what’s the score” queries and rather focused on gathering context on teams and players, reviewing team schedules, exploring storylines, making predictions and understanding what different match outcomes could mean for each team.

To meet that growing demand and interest, the company built a World Cup experience in ChatGPT designed for fans who want to follow the tournament in a more “personalized, interactive way.” 

You can toggle through 48 localized country pages, so you can get a quick overview on each team. 

OpenAI

When you visit the experience at chatgpt.com/football, you’ll be met with an interface that looks like your standard ChatGPT home screen but with structured widgets detailing all things World Cup. You’ll see a section that breaks down the latest news and standings, upcoming matches, recent coverage of the games and even hot takes. 

The main page is dedicated to a broad overview of all teams, but you can also toggle through 48 localized country pages, which lets you get a quick overview of each team individually. That way, you can learn everything you need to know about Cape Verde’s shocking draws against Spain and Uruguay. You can also ask what a particular result would mean for your team’s path through the group stage, get a quick explainer on a player to watch before kickoff and generate fan images for your favorite team. 

Additional features are coming, according to OpenAI, including conversational brackets and ways for fans to compare picks with friends. There are also image generation prompts intended to help fans create and share their own World Cup visuals.

ChatGPT’s World Cup experience also includes team art. 

OpenAI

Google features for the World Cup

Google has also highlighted how several of its most popular tools (Search, Maps, Waze and the Gemini app) can help soccer fans keep up with World Cup matches from anywhere by making it easy to get live updates, learn more about what’s happening and navigate match days efficiently.

Google

Google said it has designed Google Search to make it simpler to access real-time soccer updates like live scores, lineups, standings, brackets and stories. You can also pin live match scores to your iOS or Android lock screen by following a match or team. 

AI Mode in Search can help you dive deeper by answering complex questions about rules, players and teams. You can also use AI Mode to generate interactive visuals about topics like formations (with generative UI available first for AI Mode Pro/Ultra, then expanding to everyone in Search this summer).

If you’re in one of the cities hosting World Cup matches, Maps and Waze can provide up-to-date traffic and route details to help you get around, including road closures, pedestrian zones, transit options and updated Street View imagery of stadium areas. Waze will also show you live score updates at a glance when your car is stopped. 

You can also use Gemini to search across live match information and highlights as the action unfolds. The AI can generate visual elements — like stats and videos — for certain topics, transforming text-based outputs into visual outputs. 

How to watch the World Cup

You can watch every match in English on Fox and FS1, and matches in Spanish can be watched on Telemundo and Universo, which are available on Peacock. You can explore how to watch every match and find the cheapest streaming options on CNET

Categories: Gadgets

Instagram Is Coming to a Big Screen Near You: Your Samsung TV

People often split their attention between watching TV and scrolling through social media on their phones. Now, more viewers will have the option to browse through social media directly on their TV.

Starting Monday, Instagram for TV is landing on Samsung Smart TVs in the US. The feature, which is already available on Amazon Fire TV and Google TV, lets you browse through Instagram content like Stories, Reels and Channels on a bigger screen. It’s available on Samsung TV models from 2020 or newer.

The idea is to make it easier for people to watch content together. Although given how personalized each Instagram user’s algorithm tends to be, it’ll be interesting to see how often people use the feature in larger group settings. But it could be a way to more comfortably browse through content without craning your neck over your phone.

“Whether you’re catching up on your favorite creators, laughing at reels with friends or discovering something new with family, Instagram for TV makes it easier to enjoy the videos you love on the biggest screen in the home,” Instagram said in a blog post.

Instagram is testing additional features that could expand its TV offering. One potential addition is a dedicated home for horizontal videos. Instagram says this can give “creators more ways to reach audiences” and be an easy way to watch content designed for a TV screen. 

It’s also a move that could encroach on YouTube’s dominance in horizontal video. Last year, YouTube CEO Neal Mohan noted in a blog post that YouTube is viewed on TVs more than on mobile devices in the US. A Nielsen report also found that YouTube has the largest share of TV viewing among media companies, topping the likes of Netflix, Paramount and NBCUniversal. It’s not surprising that Instagram may want to tap into those numbers and find audiences everywhere they are.

Other formats Instagram is testing for TV include long-form video, livestreams and episodic series. It’s also looking to add an option to cast Reels from your phone to your Samsung TV — a capability that’s already available on Google TV and Fire TV.

“Creators are helping shape the future of Instagram for TV,” Instagram noted. “As we explore longer-form, episodic and live formats, we’re working closely with creators to understand what works best on TV and how these experiences can complement the ways people already use Instagram.”

Categories: Gadgets

Valve’s Steam Machine: Pricing Set (Oof!), Preorder Lottery Open Now, Shipping Soon

Valve will release its living room PC game console, called the Steam Machine, but it won’t be cheap, thanks to the ongoing memory shortage referred to as RAMageddon, which already shot up the price of the Steam Deck. The company finally unveiled the pricing for the Steam Machine, and it’s not for the faint of heart. 

The Steam Machine will start at $1,049 for the 512GB version that doesn’t come with a Steam Controller, according to the listing page Valve posted on Monday. Adding a controller to the package will bring the price up to $1,128. Willing to spend even more? With 2TB storage, the cost jumps up to $1,349 without a controller. The 2TB model with a Steam Controller will set you back $1,428.

If those prices don’t scare you off, join the wait list by visiting the listing page and selecting the model your want by 10 a.m. PT/1 p.m. ET. on Thursday, June 25.  After that time, the list will be randomized, and individuals will receive a time and date to purchase the unit, which starts on Monday, June 29. 

Those on the wait list who don’t get picked for the first batch of consoles will receive an invite to buy their Steam Machine whenever Valve gets a restock, similar to how the Steam Deck launch worked and the upcoming release of the Steam Controller. Valve says this way of handling the console’s launch is its way of preventing scalpers from buying up all the initial stock only to resell them later. Those who don’t put themselves on the wait list prior to the June 25 deadline will be added to the back of the wait list. 

The Steam Machine is Valve’s gaming PC, built into a roughly 6-inch cube that’s designed to connect to a living room TV. The aim is to deliver a simplified PC gaming experience for a broad audience and for game developers to optimize for a single spec as they’ve done with the Steam Deck. 

Here’s everything we know about the Steam Machine.

When does the Steam Machine come out? 

The Steam Machine will be available for purchase starting June 29, but only for those who are picked to purchase it on the launch date.

Make some space in your living room for the Steam Machine.

Valve

Can I preorder the Steam Machine?

Valve opened up its preorders for the Steam Machine on Monday, and it follows a similar process as the launch of the Steam Deck and Steam Controller. 

Those interested in the Steam Machine can visit the listing page and select which waiting list to be added to for the model they want. Valve will close that wait list on June 25 at 10 a.m. PT/1 p.m. ET. The list will be randomized, and those selected will be able to purchase the Steam Machine on June 29. There is a 72-hour window to purchase the Steam Machine. If the person selected doesn’t buy the console during this window, that reservation will go to the next person in the queue. 

Valve does have certain criteria to be added to the wait list: 

  • Customers must have a Steam account in good standing.
  • Customers must have made a purchase on Steam prior to April 27, 2026.
  • Limit one signup per household. Payment method, shipping address and other information will be used by Valve to eliminate multiple entries.

Anyone who was not selected to buy the Steam Machine on June 29 will be put on a wait list. When Valve restocks more units, another group from the wait list will be invited to purchase their Steam Machine. Valve didn’t provide a window of how long it will take for people on the wait list will have to wait to buy a Steam Machine. Those who wait until after the June 25 deadline will be put at the end of the wait list. 

Watch this: Valve’s Steam Controller Gets Some Major Design Changes

08:07

How much will the Steam Machine cost? 

The Steam Machine will start at $1,049 for the 512GB version without a Steam Controller. The other options include controllers or more storage: 

  • 512GB with Steam Controller: $1,128
  • 2TB without Steam Controller: $1,349
  • 2TB with Steam Controller: $1,428

What are the Steam Machine specs? 

Valve released the final specs of the Steam Machine on Thursday with the news of the official launch of the console.

Steam Machine Specs

CPU AMD Zen 4 6C / 12T, up to 4.8 GHz, 30W TDPMemory 16GB DDR5 plus 8GB GDDR6 VRAMGraphics Semi-custom AMD RDNA3 28CUs, 2.45GHz max sustained clock, 110-watt TDPStorage 512GB NVMe SSD or 1TB NVMe SSD, high-speed microSD slotPorts USB-A 3.2 Gen 1 (x2), USB-A 2.0 (x2), USB-C 3.2 Gen 2, DisplayPort 1.4 (up to 4K @ 240Hz or 8K@60Hz, supports HDR, FreeSync and daisy-chaining), HDMI 2.0 (up to 4K @ 120Hz, supports HDR, FreeSync and CEC), Gigabit EthernetWireless Networking 2×2 Wi-Fi 6E, Bluetooth 5.3Operating system SteamOS 3Weight 5.7 pounds (2.6 kilograms)Size 6 inches tall (5.8 inches without feet), 6.4 inches deep, 6.1 inches wide

What else is unique to the Steam Machine? 

Valve is doing a bit more than just making a tiny gaming PC. The company is offering some features that aren’t found on the PS5, Switch 2 or Xbox Series consoles. 

To start, there are removable face plates for the Steam Machine. This is similar to the faceplates for the Xbox 360, which offer a bit of customization for the console. 

An e-ink display can be used as the front panel on a Steam Machine (used for testing by Valve, will not be for sale) https://t.co/NIO6m4qm5o pic.twitter.com/Gd30STsifs

— Wario64 (@Wario64) November 12, 2025

Steam Machines are upgradable. You can increase storage by adding a microSD card to the console’s microSD card slot or by replacing the solid-state drive. There is also the possibility to upgrade the RAM, but that will take a few more steps versus the storage swapping. 

The Steam Machine will also be just a computer when needed. Connect it to a monitor with a mouse and keyboard, and the console will act just like a Linux desktop. There’s also the option to install Windows in lieu of SteamOS, which would make it still play PC games, although the experience won’t be as smooth as SteamOS.

The Steam Machine is a PC, too. 

Valve

The Steam Controller for the Steam Machine will connect seamlessly to the console. And, for multiplayer games, four controllers can connect with a console very easily.

Wait, didn’t Valve already have Steam Machines?

Kind of. Back in 2013, Valve revealed a new operating system called SteamOS. It’s what powers the Steam Deck and creates the Big Picture Mode, which allows gamers to play their PC games in a mostly console-like experience instead of the typical desktop experience of using a mouse to double-click a game to start. 

Along with the operating system, Valve also released its Steam Machine platform. This allowed computer hardware makers to develop computers shaped more like a home console instead of a desktop. Alienware and Dell were some of the notable companies that developed their own Steam Machines, but none of them really caught on, partly due to many games not being compatible with the Linux-based SteamOS. 

The Steam Machines fizzled out in the mid-2010s as making games compatible with SteamOS was not a priority for game developers at the time. It wasn’t until 2018 that Valve developed Proton, a compatibility layer for SteamOS to make it easier to run most Windows games. Proton currently supports more than 20,000 Windows games. 

Valve also ended up offering an alternative to getting a whole new piece of hardware. In 2015, the company released Steam Link, a device that allowed PC games to be streamed directly to a TV. 

Categories: Gadgets

Govee Releases New Smart Light Themes for House of the Dragon Season Three

On Monday, Govee announced a new partnership with Warner Bro.’s HBO, bringing new smart lighting features made specifically for House of the Dragon Season 3, following the Game of Thrones prequel premiere on Sunday. 

You’ll find Govee on several of our smart home lighting recommendation lists, for both indoors and outdoors. The company produces lights with a variety of customization options, including music syncing and algorithms that allow users to create lighting schemes based on their own prompts or photos they like. In this case, Govee is highlighting how its TV backlighting can work with shows like House of the Dragon

Representatives from Govee and HBO did not immediately respond to requests for comment.

Govee’s TV backlighting, ready for dragons and deception

Govee’s lighting uses cameras to automatically react to whatever scene is playing on TV. 

Govee

A product like the Govee TV Backlight 3 Pro ($180) adds a strip around the edge of your TV and a three-part camera that’s mounted on top. That camera looks at what’s on the TV screen, then automatically adjusts the backlighting to match. It’s an effect intended to make TVs look bigger, more cinematic and immersive. In this case, Govee mentions that its color-matching system can add gold ripples to Small Council meetings at the Red Keep, or alternate between low light and fiery reds during a nighttime dragon attack.

Color-shifting like this is also available for the Govee TV Backlight 3 Lite ($90) and the Govee TV Backlight 3 ($110), which come with fewer camera lenses than the Pro version.

But that’s not all Govee is offering for Game of Thrones fans. The company is also adding themes for its wider range of lights.

New Govee light and app themes for anywhere in your home

Govee’s backlight is designed to enhance TV viewing experiences. 

Govee

For those who don’t have a Govee TV Backlight product or want to extend the House of the Dragon theme to other areas of their homes, Govee has an additional creation. The company is adding three light scenes that can apply to any Govee lights, from replacement light bulbs working in concert to the company’s skylights and light curtains.

The first is Dracyrus, an amber-and-ember theme that the company says evokes torchlight and dragon breath. The second is called Fire and Blood, made to mimic the crimson and black tones of Targaryen banners. And the third is Green Reign, an emerald-and-gold scene Govee made to reference royal intrigue in the Red Keep.

These scenes are available for any Govee lights. If you have a Govee product, update it and see if you can access these new themes ahead of the next episode. 

We’ve tested Govee’s TV backlights at CNET, and we’ll let you know if we find them a particularly good accompaniment for House of the Dragon as the season progresses. 

Categories: Gadgets

The Best Rowing Machines of 2026, Expert Tested

To get the most out of your rowing workouts, it’s important to practice good technique. It’s helpful to have a rowing instructor or trainer familiar with the machine to teach you the correct way to row.

Catch, drive, finish, recovery: The catch, drive, finish and recovery are the four key steps you need to know for rowing. Peloton rowing instructor Alex Karwoski said your starting position should look like this: “Starting from the fully compressed position — your arms should be outstretched, body pivoted forward at a slight angle, and knees close to your chest.” From here, push with your legs to drive the seat and handle away from the screen. 

“For the first third to half of the drive, our legs are doing the majority of the work while our arms and body are braced and holding the pressure,” Karwoski explained. Then, as the shins reach about 45 degrees to the floor, the body swing begins. 

Karwoski said the key to the body swing is to think about “adding momentum” to the handle. The legs start moving the internal flywheel, and this is where the legs and body can work in conjunction to further accelerate the flywheel. 

“Finally, our arms get involved right at the end of the stroke, and we pull the handle all the way into the chest,” Karwoski said. Once all of that is completed, you start the recovery phase of the stroke, which is just the opposite. The arms move away from the body first, then the body pivots forward, and the legs compress to return to the catch.

Don’t misuse the damper: The drag factor is usually featured as a damper handle on a traditional rower. On smart rowers, it’s included within the software. 

“Most people assume that moving this from, for example, the three to the 10 makes the machine harder, but what it really does is simply increase the rate at which the flywheel slows down and thereby causes the stroke to feel heavier because now it is as if you’re rowing through molasses rather than water,” Karwoski said. 

Don’t confuse the “drag factor” with “speed level” or “intensity.”

Know the output: The main unit being measured when you row is the output. When you row, each stroke takes a certain amount of time, so the work being measured is the force applied to move the flywheel. 

“From the output, we can derive the split, which is determined by how long it would take you to row 500 meters at your given output and distance,” Karwoski said. Another metric to consider is the stroke rate, which is the number of strokes you would make if you maintained your current rhythm for one minute.

“I encourage people to focus on output because that is the big number usually right in the middle of the screen,” Karwoski said. Keep in mind that different rowing machines have different metrics that are highlighted, but ultimately, it’s about how much force you use to move the flywheel.

Rowing precautions: As with any physical activity, it’s important to get your doctor’s clearance if you have underlying health issues or are pregnant. 

“If you’re returning from an injury — and that injury doesn’t prohibit you from sitting on a rowing machine — the rowing motion can be a gentler way to restart your cardiovascular fitness,” said Peloton rowing instructor Katie Wang. This is a good way to get the benefits of a cardio workout without worrying about joint or knee injury.

Categories: Gadgets

I Turned Off All Antivirus Protection for a Week. Here’s What I Learned

I’ve been running Bitdefender and Windows Security on my machines for a while now. Between the two of them, I’ve never had a serious infection or compromised account. They run in the background, I update them and I don’t think about them much more than that.

But that’s a problem. When you stop thinking about your own security and hand it off entirely to software, you stop developing important instincts. The software becomes a substitute for judgement rather than a supplement to it, and if it ever goes away, you’re left with habits you never build.

So, to see how much heavy lifting the software was doing, I turned off both Bitdefender and Windows Security for a week and went off of the security instincts I’d built up over years of practicing cybersecurity best practices and just being online in general. By the end of the week, I had a newfound appreciation for how much work those instincts and the software was doing.

Why I did this, and why you probably shouldn’t

Let me be clear: Turning off your antivirus is a bad idea. I know this. My editor knows this. But we made an informed decision to run this experiment anyway

The thing is, there’s a question nobody really asks when it comes to cybersecurity: How much of your security online is actually the software, and how much is you? We’ve been told for years to install the protection, keep it updated and let it do its thing. Fine. But what happens when it isn’t running? What happens when it’s just you?

That’s what I wanted to find out. Not to be reckless, but because I genuinely believe that most people have little idea how much their own behavior matters, and how little they’ve ever been pushed to really think about it.

I was careful about this. Before I disabled a single thing, I ran the experiment on a secondary device, not my main machine. Everything important was backed up. My browsing stayed within the range of what I’d normally do on any given week — I wasn’t hunting for trouble. The whole point was to see what a normal week looks like without the safety net underneath you.

This was a controlled experiment with a specific purpose, to figure out whether basic security awareness holds up on its own, and what that means for the way we think about protection software. 

Here’s to one week of paying very close attention.

No net, no scanner, no problem… hopefully

As I’ve written about before, I use two layers of antivirus protection in my normal setup: Bitdefender and Windows Security, which is Microsoft’s built-in solution. Together, they cover pretty much everything I need. Real-time scanning, web filtering, anti-phishing, automatic threat blocking and so on. It’s a solid stack, and turning it off just felt wrong. But that’s exactly what I did. For science.

I disabled real-time protection on both. I turned off Bitdefender’s web filtering and anti-phishing. I left the firewall running, because cutting that off would have moved this experiment from interesting to genuinely irresponsible, and that’s not the story I’m here to tell.

What I was left with was a fully connected, fully functional Windows machine with no active scanning, no automatic threat detection, and nothing catching threats in the background. Just a browser, an internet connection and whatever judgment I’d built up over the years.

The week, day by day

Day 1: Monday

The first day was definitely the strangest, and not because anything bad happened. I opened my browser, checked emails, read the news and did some work. Normal stuff.

But there was this low-level awareness running in the background of my brain that usually isn’t there. Every link and download prompt felt more deliberate and got a second look.

It wasn’t paranoia exactly, but it wasn’t comfort, either.

Day 2: Tuesday

I got a phishing email. I’ve written thousands of articles online with my primary email address under it, so this isn’t exactly unusual. I get phishing emails all the time, but between Bitdefender’s web filtering and Gmail’s own spam detection, they rarely make it to my inbox.

It was a fake invoice from what appeared to be a “logistics company” I’d never heard of. I didn’t click it, but I noticed that without Bitdefender or Google catching it for me, I spent a little more time interacting with it than I would have had if it never hit my inbox to begin with. This turned out to be a representative taste of my antivirusless time.

Day 3: Wednesday

Uneventful, mostly. I downloaded a PDF from a site I didn’t fully recognize, which is exactly the kind of thing I would normally let Bitdefender assess for me. I checked the URL carefully, looked up the organization behind it, and decided it was fine. It was fine. But that process, which normally takes zero seconds, took about 3 minutes.

Day 4: Thursday

I started noticing how often I rely on browser warnings and built-in protections I hadn’t fully accounted for. Google Chrome flagged a site as potentially dangerous before it even loaded. That’s not Bitdefender or Windows Security. That’s Google doing its own thing. It was a useful reminder that there are more layers to this than most people think about.

Day 5: Friday

By Friday I had settled into a slower, deliberate but functional rhythm. I wasn’t avoiding the internet (how could I?), but I was aware that I was paying way more attention to it in a way I normally outsource to software.

I found myself reading URLs more carefully, hovering over links before clicking and being more selective about what I let onto the machine. These aren’t complicated habits, but they do require you to think. That extra bit of pressure and constant vigilance can get exhausting.

Days 6 and 7: The weekend

The weekend was the real challenge, because weekend browsing is looser. Streaming, shopping, following links from social media and other kinds of low-attention activity where most people get into trouble.

I kept the same discipline I’d developed through the week and got through it without incident. Nothing malicious made it onto the machine.

But by Sunday night I was ready to turn everything back on. The week alone was close to making me go crazy, but I’d proven what I needed to prove and was tired of thinking so hard about everything.

What actually protects you 

Here’s what the week taught me. Your habits matter as much as your software.

I got through seven days without a compromised machine, but I wasn’t relying on luck. Instead, I survived on a set of behaviors that I’d internalized over years of being online, and that many people never consciously think about because they’ve always had software thinking for them.

The first one is the most obvious. I didn’t click things I wasn’t sure about: phishing emails, suspicious download prompts or links from sources I didn’t recognize without doing more research. When your antivirus isn’t there to catch those, you have to catch them yourself. And you can, if you’re constantly paying attention.

The second was being deliberate about where I downloaded files from. Trusted sources only. If I didn’t recognize a site, I looked it up before I let anything off of it onto my machine.

The third was URL awareness. I was always checking to make sure the site I was about to enter credentials into was actually the site I thought it was. This is the thing that stops most phishing attacks and credit card fraud cold, and it requires nothing more than a few seconds of attention.

The fourth was keeping everything updated. Windows, Chrome and every other application I use during the week. Unpatched software is a common way for attackers to get in, and it’s also one of the easiest things to stay on top of.

None of these things require special software or technical knowledge. They just require the decision to treat your own behavior online as a security tool, which it absolutely is. The problem is when people don’t think about it that way because the software has always been there to catch what they miss.

That’s the gap worth closing.

So, does antivirus actually matter?

Yes. Unambiguously, yes.

I want to be careful here, because the wrong takeaway from this experiment is that antivirus software is unnecessary and you can just be smart online instead. I got through the week clean because I already had good habits. Many people don’t, and for those people, having good antivirus is the thing standing between them and a genuinely bad decision. And even for me, it was an exhausting effort, and I was glad to have the additional layer of security back.

There’s also a category of threat that good habits simply don’t protect you from, like keyloggers or drive-by downloads. These exist precisely because human judgment has limits, and antivirus software exists to cover those to the best of their ability.

What this week demonstrated is that software and behavior are supposed to work together. Antivirus catches what you miss. Good habits reduce how much there is to catch. By combining the two, you create two lines of defense to protect yourself and your data online.

Categories: Gadgets

Waymo Issues Another Recall, This Time Over Highway Construction Zones

Nearly 4,000 Waymo vehicles, the company’s entire fleet of fifth-generation robotaxis, are affected by a new recall issued this month by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration related to driving near or within freeway construction zones.

According to the NHTSA report, incidents in Phoenix, Arizona and San Francisco have raised concerns that autonomous taxis are driving into construction zones to avoid traffic hazards. Those incidents took place in April and May, respectively.

The report says that Waymo cars could enter closed construction zones “at speed” because they are incorrectly prioritizing other highway hazards and failing to recognize the construction zones.

In an email to CNET, a spokesperson for Waymo said, “We identified an area of improvement regarding performance around freeway construction zones. We voluntarily restricted freeway operations last month while making improvements, proactively notified state and federal regulators, and decided to file a voluntary software recall with NHTSA.”

The company said that while it’s restricting operations on freeways, “We continue to safely serve riders on surface streets in all the cities where we operate.”  

The construction zone issue affects Waymo vehicles using the fifth generation of the company’s Autonomous Driving System, which would be all of its Jaguar vehicles in service. The company has been rolling out sixth-generation vehicles this year, but they are not listed as part of this recall.

Waymo will remedy the situation by making “software improvements to avoid entering a construction zone and detecting that the AV is within a construction zone, as well as additional operational protocols… The remedy will enhance Waymo AVs performance in and around freeway construction zones,”  according to the NHTSA report.

Previous recalls and issues

While Waymos have become reliable ridesharing fixtures on the streets of cities including Austin, Los Angeles, Atlanta and Orlando, they have also been the subject of some high-profile incidents involving vehicles gone wrong.

In May, a similar recall was issued over the risk of Waymo vehicles driving into flooded areas, posing a safety hazard. Waymos have also been the subject of an investigation related to vehicles driving past stopped school buses and stalling during power outages, as happened last year in San Francisco.

Waymo also drew the attention of Austin’s City Council when a robotaxi blocked emergency response vehicles after a mass shooting in March. A similar incident occurred in Dallas earlier this month when a Waymo robotaxi blocked a road that emergency responders were trying to use after an apartment explosion.

Tesla, Zoox and Uber are other companies that are competing with Waymo in the robotaxi market.

Categories: Gadgets

The Next Solar Eclipse Is Delivering a Rare Treat: Totality at Sunset

It’s been two years since the last total solar eclipse, but another one is coming in August — and with it, a special addition that doesn’t happen very often. Some people will get to see the solar eclipse during sunset, giving them an extraordinary view. The only problem is, you may have to jet off on a summer vacation to see it.

The total eclipse will only grace the shores of a few countries. According to NASA, the total eclipse on Aug. 12 will hit Greenland, Iceland, the northern half of Spain and one corner of Portugal. Spain is at the tail end of the eclipse and, as such, it will occur later in the day at around sunset, giving viewers in Spain a spectacular sight. 

Other countries in Europe and Africa will also get quite a show. Most of Europe and a sizable portion of northern Africa are still getting a partial solar eclipse, which will happen around sunset. That means tens of millions of people will be in the right place to see a partial or total solar eclipse at sunset. 

Russia is the luckiest country this time around. The eclipse starts at sunrise near the uninhabited Taymyr Peninsula, streaks across the world all day, and then Russians on the other side of the country are in the path for the partial solar eclipse at sunset, making Russia the only country that will see the eclipse at both sunrise and sunset.

How often do sunset eclipses happen?

Sunset eclipses don’t occur very often, at least where people can see them. There are two reasons for this. 

The first is that solar eclipses usually only last for a few hours, and the timing for that being right at sunset isn’t terribly common. 

The other reason is that solar eclipses have long paths, and sometimes those paths cut through the ocean or places where people don’t live. In the last 15 years, only a handful of total eclipses sit in that Venn diagram of occurring late enough in the day to happen at sunset, while also taking place where humans can see it.

The most recent sunset eclipse in North America was in 2014, but it was only a partial eclipse. South America’s most recent one was in July 2019, where people in Chile and Argentina had the best view of a total solar eclipse happening at sunset, while most of the rest of the country had a partial view. Asia’s most recent was in December 2019.

In short, this is a once-in-a-decade event for most of the world. 

The path of this year’s solar eclipse takes it across the northern portions of Earth before ending in Europe. North Americans won’t see much. 

NASA

Will this eclipse be visible in North America?

North America is pretty far from the main action, but a few states are in the path. The math is a little complicated, but if you look at a map of the US and draw a line from Alaska to North Carolina, all the states north of that line will get a little bit of an eclipse (less than 20% coverage), and all the states south of that line are sitting this one out. 

If you live in the path and want to check it out, be sure to adhere to proper solar eclipse viewing safety protocols so that you don’t harm your eyes.

Categories: Gadgets

KitchenAid Mixer Hacks: 9 Unexpected Foods You Can Make Without Special Attachments

I’ve been an avid cook and baker since childhood and have heard only great things about the KitchenAid stand mixer, but I spent decades believing I didn’t need one. Why purchase a device that costs hundreds of dollars when I have an entire set of kitchen tools, plus my hands, for mixing, whisking and kneading?

But last year, I reached a point of cooking and baking fatigue. And I’ll admit it: I was swayed by watching videos of my favorite chefs and food content creators effortlessly making delicious desserts and more with their KitchenAid mixers. So my partner and I combined our holiday gift cards and purchased a five-quart, tilt-head KitchenAid Artisan Series.

I can admit when I’m wrong, and I was wrong about a KitchenAid stand mixer not being worth the cost — especially because I’ve learned that it’s not just for baking. In fact, there are many surprising foods you can make in your KitchenAid mixer to take some effort out of your time in the kitchen.

1. Chicken salad

The idea for this article came to me when I saw TikTok creator Jenna Denise use their KitchenAid mixer to shred chicken for chicken salad. Even though I’m a vegetarian, I did the same with Quorn’s Meatless Diced ChiQin Pieces, and it worked perfectly. After shredding the “chicken” with the included coated flat beater, I added the remaining ingredients and had the KitchenAid mix the entire salad.

Along with shredding chicken on its own, you can use your stand mixer to make chicken salad.

Brent Hofacker/Shutterstock

2. Egg salad

Once I successfully made vegan chicken salad in my KitchenAid mixer, that got me thinking: What about egg salad? Turns out, it works just as well. I simply peel boiled eggs, add them to the mixer, use the flat beater to mash them and then add the rest of the ingredients for a delicious, effortless egg salad.

3. Butter

Using the wire whisk, I whipped 4 cups of heavy cream to make butter in my KitchenAid mixer. Bonus: Once you have your butter, use the flat beater to add different flavors, such as cinnamon and sugar or garlic and herbs. 

Using your KitchenAid mixer, you can easily make both butter and buttermilk. All you need is heavy cream.

detry26/Shutterstock

4. Buttermilk 

When you make butter in your KitchenAid mixer, it’s a two-for-one experience because the liquid that forms is buttermilk. Make sure you save this for use in pancakes or biscuits. 

5. Pulled pork

Your mixer can be used to shred most cooked, boneless meats, including pork. Simply employ the flat beater to shred your pork for dishes like tacos, sandwiches, soups, nachos and more. 

Pork is another type of cooked meat that can be shredded in your mixer.

keetazalay/Shutterstock

6. Guacamole 

If you’re not in the mood to mash avocados by hand, your KitchenAid’s flat beater can do that work for you. Add your avocado meat to the mixer to mash, then add the other ingredients for a hands-free guac. 

7. Meatballs

Not a fan of mixing ground meat by hand? Instead, use your KitchenAid mixer’s flat beater to prepare the mixture for meatballs, meatloaf or burgers. Just throw all your ingredients into the mixer and let it handle the rest.

Make mixed-meat dishes like meatballs and meatloaf.

ahirao/Shutterstock

8. Mashed potatoes

Mashing potatoes can be an arm workout, especially if you want the perfect texture that doesn’t turn into gluey, sticky mash. By letting your mixer’s flat beater mash your potatoes, you can focus on watching them until they reach your ideal fluffy texture. 

9. Mayo

One of the perks of using a KitchenAid mixer to make food from scratch is knowing exactly what’s going into the dish. The same goes for mayo, which can be made with your mixer’s whisk and only six ingredients: egg yolks, Dijon mustard, vinegar, sunflower oil, salt and pepper. No food processor required.

That’s right — you don’t need a food processor to make homemade mayo.

New Africa/Shutterstock

However, since it doesn’t contain any preservatives like store-bought mayonnaise, just make sure to refrigerate your homemade mayo and use it within four days. 

Categories: Gadgets

I Build and Review PCs: Don’t Make This Upgrade Mistake

There are a few ways to boost your gaming PC’s performance, but upgrading the components, especially the graphics card or GPU, is one of the key ways to unlock faster frame rates, higher-quality visuals and higher resolutions. However, you can’t always be certain that a GPU upgrade alone will give you the performance lift you’re after. For gaming, other factors can hold your system back, and one of the big culprits is actually the central processor. Understanding CPU bottlenecks, how you can run into them and how you can work around them can help you unlock greater performance gains. 

The recipe for “CPU-bound” scenarios

With gaming, your CPU and GPU both have important tasks on their own and work together to complete the overall job of smooth gaming. Put simply, your CPU figures out what needs to happen in the game. It calculates things like physics and enemy AI, then tells the GPU to get to work. The GPU figures out where everything is going to go within the virtual space of the game and what it’s all going to look like. It then sends that out to your TV or monitor

You can think of it like a restaurant. A waiter (the CPU) seats guests and takes orders, then passes those orders to the kitchen. The cooks in the kitchen (the GPU) whip up the food for the guests. Ideally, the cooks finish the food in the right amount of time so the waiter can bring it to the guests (your monitor, in this case). Ideally, the waiter isn’t waiting for the cooks, and the cooks aren’t waiting for the waiter. When it’s all timed correctly, your monitor gets a steady stream of fully rendered frames to create smooth on-screen motion. All the guests get their food on time, in other words.

Mark Knapp/CNET

It’s fairly easy to get this sequence out of balance if your gear isn’t capable of the performance required for your chosen resolutions, game detail, screen resolution and so on. If the cooks (your GPU) are too slow, the result is often a slow or stuttering frame rate. This is usually pretty obvious. When the bottleneck is the CPU, slow-moving waiters in our analogy, the cooks will be waiting, underperforming what they’re capable of. When the CPU is what’s limiting your performance, that’s called being CPU-bound.

When you drop in a new graphics card to your PC, it’s like replacing the cooks you originally had in the kitchen with even faster cooks. However, if you keep the wait staff the same, the orders might not get to the kitchen staff any faster, so overall, a similar amount of food is getting to the customers. The orders will just sit under a heat lamp waiting for pickup. 

Or to put it more plainly, if you just get a new graphics card and your CPU is already at its limit, you won’t improve your overall performance that much. You’ll likely see some improvement, but not nearly as much as you would have gotten had you also upgraded your CPU. 

A concrete example: Upgrading my rig

I’ve been running a gaming rig with an Intel Core i7-12700K (or in our analogy, a good “waiter”) and an AMD Radeon 7900XT (an OK “cook”) for a while. Then I saw an opportunity to upgrade to an RTX 5080 (a way better “cook”). That GPU is considerably newer than the Core i7 CPU, though, and I knew there was some potential for the system to be held back because of being CPU-bound.

Mark Knapp/CNET

Curious to see how much the older i7 could hamper performance, I tested my GPU-upgraded system against another PC running a much more potent gaming CPU (an AMD Ryzen 7 9800X3D). I put the exact same graphics card into each system so there’d be no card-to-card variance. The results raised a lot of valuable findings regarding gaming performance, benchmarks and balancing CPU/GPU load to get the most out of your hardware. 

Synthetic benchmarks don’t tell the whole story

I ran CNET’s usual suite of 3DMark benchmarks on both systems. Although my PC improved its scores from before the upgrade, I was surprised by how marginal the differences were, especially compared to the Ryzen-powered system. The Ryzen 7 9800X3D is widely considered the best gaming CPU, and yet here was my aging 12700K somehow going neck and neck with just a simple graphics swap. In the Wildlife Extreme benchmark, the Ryzen system performed just 0.12% better. Time Spy and Steel Nomad also failed to show the Ryzen system offering even a 1% improvement in performance. 

Mark Knapp/CNET

Neither system was getting a heat advantage, either, as both ran 3DMark’s Steel Nomad Stress test and passed with matching 99.3% stability, confirming consistent performance and adequate cooling for both. In Steel Nomad Lite, Fire Strike Ultra and Port Royal benchmarks, the Ryzen system won by as much as 6% and as little as 2%. 

Those aren’t exactly gains I would want to buy a whole new CPU and platform for. All of this happened in spite of 3DMark’s CPU Profiler showing a 15.4% lead for the Ryzen system in single-threaded processing (albeit with a 0.8% deficit in max-threaded processing, thanks to the 12700K’s 20 threads to the 9800X3D’s 16 threads). So what’s going on? Is being CPU-bound a myth? Not so fast. Time to dig deeper.

1080p gaming shines a light on the weaknesses

Turning to actual game benchmarks, the tiny crevice between the two systems widened to a chasm. Running Shadow of the Tomb Raider at 1080p and the highest graphical preset, my PC hit 202 frames per second on average. A respectable number — but actually slower than with my old video card! With the older Radeon, it was able to get an average of 208fps. 

Meanwhile, the Ryzen system reached an impressive 360fps. My PC with the RTX 5080, running Guardians of the Galaxy at 1080p and high settings, managed 162fps, while the Ryzen system leaped ahead to 267fps. Remember, that’s with the same graphics card. This is the kind of improvement I’d hope to see from an expensive graphics card upgrade. This isn’t just a graphics card upgrade, but it’s also an entire platform swap with a CPU, motherboard and new memory (so another $1,000 to build). It does tell us a few things, however.

Mark Knapp/CNET

The Guardians of the Galaxy test helps highlight which component is responsible for performance shortcomings. It gives us specifics about the average frame rate, but diving deeper into the results, it also gives us frametimes — in other words, the amount of time required by the CPU and GPU to produce a frame. 

Looking at that same 1080p run, the Ryzen CPU needed an average of 3.2 milliseconds per frame while the Core i7-12700K needed 5.9ms. That seemingly small difference adds up considerably over dozens or hundreds of frames. After all, the CPU and GPU need to spit out a frame every 16ms to deliver just 60fps. In that same benchmark, the GPU only needed an average of 2.2ms per frame on the Ryzen system versus 2.4ms on the Intel system. Going back to the restaurant analogy, the cooks were clearly getting their job done so quickly that they had to wait around for new orders from the waiter.

The Ryzen system’s lead over the older Intel system wasn’t always so substantial. Running a more modern, far more demanding game changed things. For Assassin’s Creed: Shadows at 1080p with high settings, the Ryzen system managed 91fps while the Intel system trailed at 87fps. That gave the Ryzen system a marginal 5% lead. Now, why is that?

Mark Knapp/CNET

While 1080p gaming can show a gulf between CPU performance, it may only do so when a game demands a lot out of the CPU and not as much from the GPU. The GPU still has a heavy load at 1080p with Assassin’s Creed: Shadows, so things look quite different. To show just how that looks in practice, I also ran benchmarks at 1440p and 4K (and higher graphical settings in a couple cases for good measure). The results of those tests highlight a key way to get past the shortcomings of an older, slower CPU by shifting the load.

Shifting the load

Your waiter can only work so fast, and you don’t want your cooks sitting around doing nothing. So what do you do? Give the cooks more to do. Perhaps more food per order or something fancier for each table. Assassin’s Creed: Shadows leveled the playing field considerably between the Ryzen 7 9800X3D and Intel Core i7-12700K. Make no mistake: It’s pretty demanding on a CPU, but even at 1080p, it can slam an RTX 5080 hard with all its ray-traced graphics. So a graphically demanding game can “hide” a CPU shortcoming. By adjusting settings, you can often make a game more or less graphically demanding to fine-tune your system based on its specific CPU and GPU strengths (or weaknesses). 

The role of resolution

Let’s go back to Shadow of the Tomb Raider. At 1080p, the Ryzen system crushed the Intel system. The RTX 5080 was hardly breaking a sweat on the Intel system, even at the highest graphics setting. Even dialing up the resolution to 1440p, the average frame rate didn’t drop. It still hit 202fps and was now delivering 744 million pixels per second (resolution by average frame rate) instead of 418 million pixels per second like it was at 1080p. 

That bump in resolution gives you sharper visuals, and in this case, it didn’t cost any frames per second. It’s as if the cooks were making an extra-large serving and still serving it up in the same amount of time. The Ryzen system was still faster at 282fps when jumping to 1440p (that’s 1 billion pixels per second), but it did see its frame rate decline compared to 1080p. 

Mark Knapp/CNET

The jump to 4K with Shadow of the Tomb Raider takes some frames off the Intel system’s average, bringing it down to 153fps (or 1.27 billion pixels per second). That shift implies that the CPU is no longer the major limiting factor. Success! We’re no longer CPU-bound. In fact, back on the Ryzen system, the 4K results are also 153fps. That’s no coincidence since, remember, these are using the same video card.

The role of other graphics settings

Guardians of the Galaxy highlights a different case. The Intel system delivered little change whether the resolution was 1080p (162fps average), 1440p (162fps average) or 4K (161fps average). In each case, the GPU had to work harder, but the CPU remained the limiting factor. Some games are just CPU-heavy, including those with complex physics, elaborate nonplayable character AI and world destruction, as explained in this Intel interview with game devs. 

My tests used high graphics settings. If we changed those settings instead of the resolution, we can also shift the load to the GPU. Running at 1080p but upping the settings to Ultra, the Intel system ran at 157fps on average, barely losing any speed while getting a big graphical upgrade. In this case, the cooks made filet mignon instead of a hamburger, and it barely took any additional time.

This gives you a second option to break free of being CPU-bound. You can increase the in-game graphics settings while staying at the same resolution. If you’re already playing at your monitor’s or TV’s native resolution, this may be the more useful option. 

Mark Knapp/CNET

Another element to consider is dynamic or subsampling resolution. If your games are using DLSS, FSR or XeSS, it’s akin to running at a lower resolution and can, therefore, present a similar opportunity to be CPU-bound. In these cases, you can try upping the setting (for example, upping Quality or DLAA instead of Performance) or you can disable them altogether and render at your display’s native resolution. 

Game graphics and resolutions can only go so high (practically speaking), so there will still come a time when the only reasonable answer will be to upgrade your CPU. Armed with this information on CPU-bound scenarios and how to shift the load, hopefully, you can make sure that time doesn’t come too soon.

Reverse! Reverse!

One last thing: Understanding CPU-bound scenarios and how to work around them also arms you with information about how to work around GPU-bound scenarios. 

Just like how you can find ways to shift the balance of the load to be greater on the GPU than it is on the CPU, you can shift the load back to the CPU by performing the opposite adjustments. For example, want higher frame rates in a competitive or fast-paced game? Lower the resolution and dial back graphics settings. You may even find that changing just a few specific settings can help without a major drop in visual quality. 

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 22 #637

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Are you watching the World Cup? Today’s Connections: Sports Edition includes one related category. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Cape is another one.

Green group hint: Play ball!

Blue group hint: I’m taking my talents to South Beach.

Purple group hint: Neat on your feet.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: First words of World Cup countries, in English.

Green group: MLB stadiums.

Blue group: LeBron-era Heat stars.

Purple group: Adidas shoes.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 22, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is first words of World Cup countries, in English.  The four answers are Bosnia, Ivory, South and United.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is MLB stadiums. The four answers are Comerica, Kauffman, Nationals and Wrigley.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is  LeBron-era Heat stars. The four answers are  Allen, Bosh, James and Wade.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is Adidas shoes. The four answers are Samba, Stan Smith, Superstar and Ultraboost.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 22 #1107

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle is a real challenge. The purple category is fun once you spot the connection. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: You rule!

Green group hint: Used in math.

Blue group hint: How you say things.

Purple group hint: Loud sounds.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Dominant.

Green group: Multiplication indicators.

Blue group: Pronunciation descriptors.

Purple group: Starting with explosive onomatopoeia.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 22, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is dominant. The four answers are alpha, head, lead and primary.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is multiplication indicators. The four answers are by, times, X and •.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is pronunciation descriptors. The four answers are short, silent, soft and stressed.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is starting with explosive onomatopoeia. The four answers are Bangkok (bang), boomer (boom), Popsicle (pop) and powder (pow).

Categories: Gadgets

Malware Has Gotten Smarter. Here’s How Your Antivirus Has, Too

Antivirus software is undergoing a major shift. Traditionally, antivirus software relied on matching files against databases of known malware signatures. But today’s threats evolve too quickly for databases of known malware signatures to keep up reliably.

It might be helpful to think of it like this: Old antivirus software worked like a nightclub bouncer with a stack of photos of bad actors behind the counter. If a file matched a known malware signature, it got tossed out. If it didn’t, the bad actor usually walked right in wearing sunglasses and a fake mustache. 

But now the software is monitoring behavior rather than just checking names at the door. To expand their predictive capabilities, many modern antivirus platforms are increasingly relying on machine learning, behavioral analysis and real-time monitoring to identify suspicious activity before a threat has been fully classified.

That means that, instead of only identifying known malware after it appears, efficient antivirus software can spot suspicious behavior before the threat fully executes or spreads across a system.

Here, we break down exactly how modern antivirus software works and give some tips for finding the right security services for you.

Antivirus software used to look for known threats

Since the early days of personal computing, antivirus software mostly worked through recognition. Security companies studied malware, carved out unique signatures for known threats and pushed those updates out to users. 

Your antivirus software was programmed to scan files and compare them against the database. If something matched, the alarm went off. The system worked reasonably well as long as security companies could keep malware databases up to date quickly enough.

Yet bad actors treat code like a moving target, and malicious software has been developed faster than the models built to stop it. 

For example, polymorphic malware, which changes parts of its code every time it spreads, avoids looking identical in each infection. Metamorphic malware rewrites its own code so each version appears substantially different from the last. Zero-day attacks target newly discovered software vulnerabilities before security vendors have time to create protections or updates.

That degree of speed creates a major problem. Malware creators can now churn out endless variations faster than researchers can manually analyze and catalog them. Signature databases still matter, but they increasingly end up reacting to threats that are already loose in the wild. 

Antivirus software now pays attention to behavior

Antivirus software started evolving to monitor suspicious behavior. Is a program encrypting files for no clear reason? Is it poking around protected memory or quietly contacting strange servers at 3 a.m.? The goal now is to spot bad behavior before the windows get smashed.

Some modern antivirus tools monitor API calls (requests programs make to the operating system or other software for specific actions) along with memory access, encryption activity and network traffic in real time. They’re not solely monitoring whether a file looks familiar, but also whether it’s acting strangely. 

While a regular-use app might open a few documents or connect to a server once in a while, malware tends to behave much differently. For example, it may rapidly encrypt hundreds of files, inject code into other processes, disable security features or attempt to contact suspicious servers without a clear reason.

This is where anomaly detection comes in. Antivirus software builds a rough understanding of what “normal” activity looks like on a system, then watches for behavior that falls outside the lines. Even if a piece of malware has never been seen before, the activity itself can still look suspicious enough to trigger alarms. 

If a process suddenly starts locking down documents across a network or repeatedly tries to gain higher system privileges, security software doesn’t necessarily need a signature to realize something ugly is happening.

Ransomware is probably the best example of why this is so important. These attacks often spread too quickly for traditional signature databases to keep up with the exact strain. Behavioral analysis enables antivirus software to recognize the attack’s pattern of behavior and stop it before everything turns into encrypted alphabet soup.

Machine learning models are trained to recognize malicious patterns

Instead of relying entirely on databases of known malware signatures, machine-learning systems are trained using massive collections of both malicious and legitimate files. By looking for patterns that tend to show up in malware activity, the model learns over time which combinations of behaviors are commonly associated with malware and which are usually harmless.

Once trained, the system can classify files and processes based on risk. Some antivirus tools assign a score that reflects how suspicious a program appears, and some may place files into categories like safe, potentially unwanted or malicious. This process usually combines many small signals together to reach a conclusion.

Different types of machine learning models are used for this, including products from companies like Microsoft, CrowdStrike and SentinelOne. The technical details vary, but the broader goal is the same across all of them: reduce the amount of malware that slips through simply because nobody has seen it before.

Decision trees break activity into a series of rule-based decisions to classify threats. Support vector machines analyze patterns and separate malicious activity from normal activity based on learned data relationships. Neural networks process massive amounts of information to uncover patterns that are harder to define manually. 

The key takeaway is that a modern, AI-driven antivirus system doesn’t necessarily need an exact signature match to spot trouble. If a brand-new piece of malware behaves similarly to known malicious software, the system can sometimes still identify it.

The goal is to catch malware before it reveals itself

Tharon Green/CNET

One way security tools try to catch malware before it causes an issue is through sandboxing and dynamic analysis. Suspicious files can be opened in an isolated environment (sandboxing), where their behavior is safely monitored (dynamic analysis) before they interact with the main system.

As a result, antivirus software is starting to blend together with broader security systems like endpoint detection and response (usually called EDR), along with threat-hunting tools that continuously search networks for suspicious activity. The outdated idea of antivirus as a quiet little scanner running in the corner of your desktop is fading.

AI is changing malware, too

The uncomfortable part of all this is that the same AI techniques helping security companies build smarter defenses can also help attackers build smarter malware. Researchers have already demonstrated ways bad actors could design malware specifically to confuse machine learning systems or reduce detection accuracy.

The long-term concern is malware that adapts its behavior on the fly. That would change how it operates depending on the environment it lands in. Fully self-learning malware still lives mostly in the research-paper stage, but security researchers increasingly expect attackers to move in that direction.

At the same time, AI-driven antivirus is still far from flawless. False positives remain a headache because suspicious behavior isn’t always malicious behavior. Many of these systems also depend on continuous monitoring and large amounts of telemetry data, which raises privacy questions some people aren’t thrilled about.

Even if all of this sounds exciting, it’s still part of the same old cycle where defenders improve, attackers adjust, and everybody keeps sprinting to avoid falling behind.

Always use a solid antivirus software

Modern antivirus software is a lot better than it used to be. For most people, the built-in protections included with Windows and MacOS are probably enough for basic malware protection. Microsoft Defender and Apple’s XProtect have improved a lot over the years, and third-party lab tests now regularly show strong malware detection rates across most major antivirus platforms. 

Having an extra layer of third-party antivirus software can still be important, and a lot of paid security suites now also focus on extra features like parental controls, identity monitoring, ransomware protection, VPN services, password managers and broader cross-platform coverage. 

While there are also some legitimate freemium antivirus tools from established companies, you should still be cautious with free security software because some products rely heavily on aggressive data collection, advertising or upselling.

The bigger problem is that modern cyberattacks increasingly target people instead of just devices. Phishing, stolen credentials, fake login pages and social engineering attacks often bypass antivirus software entirely because technically nothing malicious ever lands on the machine in the first place.

To maximize protection against threats, a solid antivirus service should always be combined with good habits, like using passkeys when available, keeping software updated and even freezing your credit to reduce identity theft risks.

The software is getting smarter, but cybersecurity depends heavily on the person sitting at the keyboard.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple iPhone Fold, Google Pixel 11, Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 and Other Phones Left to Launch in 2026

2026 is shaping up to be the year of iterative phone upgrades. From the budget Google Pixel 10A to the flagship Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus, we’ve seen some of the most boring generation of phones. But on the other hand, phones like the Galaxy Z TriFold, Xiaomi 17 Ultra and Oppo Find N6 are keeping things interesting and making this year a strong follow-up to 2025, which saw Samsung reinvent the Galaxy Z Fold and Apple announce an all-new, slim and light iPhone Air.

There should be room for a few more surprises later this year but the RAM shortage and increasing competition around generative AI are creating a larger challenge for phone-makers to overcome. And that puts more pressure on brands to release bold designs and add features that are as useful as they are innovative.

The folding phone market is expected to attract more entrants. We could finally see Apple launch a folding iPhone and rumors say that Samsung might release a wide-screen foldable, similar to the Huawei Pura X.

The bottom line? There are still a bunch of exciting smartphones to look forward to in 2026.

Phones that have already been released in 2026

Apple

The iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max marked the return of vibrant colors to Apple’s highest-end iPhones.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

A split iPhone 18 launch strategy

Apple introduced a slew of upgrades with the iPhone 17 line — an 18-megapixel selfie shooter, upgraded rear camera optics, thermal cooling on the Pro variants, among other updates. It also added the thin iPhone Air to the lineup. This year, the Cupertino company could shake up its iPhone launch timeline.

For years, Apple has continued to announce the base iPhone model alongside its Pro siblings, while also experimenting with Mini, Plus and Air variants. This could change in 2026. According to a report from The Information and Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo, the Cupertino-based company may push the launch of the vanilla iPhone 18 to early 2027 in a bid to make space for the iPhone Fold. 

Apple could still announce multiple iPhone models in September 2026, but the lineup and timing would look slightly different. Later this year, we could see the launch of the next-gen. iPhone Air, iPhone 18 Pro and 18 Pro Max in new colors and the all-new iPhone Fold. But the standard iPhone 18 is tipped to be released alongside the iPhone 18E in March 2027.

The new Apple iPhone launch cycle might be:

  • March 2026: iPhone 17E
  • September 2026: iPhone Air 2, iPhone 18 Pro/Pro Max and iPhone Fold
  • March 2027: iPhone 18 and iPhone 18E
  • September 2027: iPhone Air 3, iPhone 19 Pro/Pro Max and iPhone 20 (named to honor the 20th anniversary of the original iPhone’s 2007 debut)

Since the standard iPhone 18 model is rumored to be released in 2027, let’s focus on the iPhone variants that are more likely to be launched this year. 

Apple iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max

CNET’s Jeffrey Hazelwood created these custom renders of what an iPhone 18 Pro might look like in purple, coffee and burgundy.

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

The iPhone 18 Pro models are expected to have the same design language as the iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max but be available in new colors. Apple is said to be considering three color options to replace 2025’s cosmic orange: coffee, purple and burgundy.

I’d love to have a burgundy or coffee brown iPhone 18 Pro. I’m more intrigued by the latter, thanks to CNET Jeffrey Hazelwood’s mock-ups of the iPhone 18 Pro in purple, coffee and burgundy, which you can see above. 

Both the iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max are expected to have the same 6.3-inch and 6.9-inch displays, respectively, as the current models. However, Apple is rumored to opt for an under-display Face ID True Depth camera to make the Dynamic Island smaller.

There have also been rumors about the iPhone 18 Pro lineup including an under-display Face ID, alongside a punch-hole cutout for the selfie shooter, which is common on Android phones. According to the same The Information report cited above, the iPhone 18 Pro duo will have a small hole on the top-left corner to house the front-facing camera. So, we shouldn’t expect a full-screen display with an under-display camera.

I’ve used phones with under-display cameras (RedMagic 10 Pro and Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5), and while I love having a full-screen experience, I look smudgy on video calls and selfies with these cameras. No phone manufacturer has figured out a way to retain photo quality while delivering a full-screen experience with an under-display camera.

If Apple can do that, I’d be pleasantly surprised. But it seems unlikely as current-gen iPhones launched with a new industry-leading 18-megapixel Center Stage camera on the front. I don’t think Apple would mess with that. I expect the same photo and video quality on the next iPhone.

Apple moved to a new camera plateau design with the iPhone 17 Pro lineup.

Celso Bulgatti/CNET

Moving to the rear optics, Apple is reportedly introducing a variable aperture lens on the iPhone 18 Pro and 18 Pro Max. It might be irrelevant to most people, but for those who use their iPhones for photography, a variable aperture would offer more control over their photos. It would allow you to manually adjust the amount of light reaching the sensor and the depth of field on a subject.

This isn’t groundbreaking new technology. Samsung introduced it with the Galaxy S9 in 2018 but it remained ineffective due to the small sensor size and the fact that the aperture could only switch between two f-stops: f/1.5 and f/2.4.

Xiaomi and Huawei did a better job with their flagships in 2023. The Huawei Mate 50 Pro offered 10 steps of aperture (f/1.4 to f/4.0), while the Xiaomi 13 Ultra included a dual-aperture design (f/1.9 and f/4.0), paired with a larger 1-inch-type image sensor.

Based on these examples, Apple will likely need to add a larger image sensor and more flexibility with aperture control to make it actually useful. It could be a godsend to improve the iPhone’s portrait mode, which trails behind the likes of current Vivo, Oppo and Xiaomi phones.

The iPhone 18 Pro is also rumored to get a new three-layer stacked image sensor developed by Samsung. For years, Sony has supplied the image sensors for the iPhone. Samsung’s sensor could reduce noise in images, improve the dynamic range and make the iPhone’s camera more responsive.

The iPhone 18 Pro series is expected to be powered by the A20 Pro chipset, which would be built on TSMC’s 2nm process. It could have architectural changes, such as having RAM integrated directly onto the same wafer as the CPU, GPU and neural engine, instead of it being adjacent to the chip and connected via an interposer. It could allow for 30% better efficiency and 15% faster performance than the A19 chips. The next iPhones may also use Apple’s next-generation C2 modem chip for enhanced wireless connectivity.

The iPhone Fold

This is a mock-up of what a possible iPhone Fold might look like, according to CNET designer Jeffrey Hazelwood.

Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

There are conflicting rumors about the launch timeline of Apple’s foldable iPhone. Some say it’ll be released alongside the iPhone 18 Pro series this year, while a report from The Elec claims that the launch could be delayed to 2027. It’s worth noting that rumors of Apple’s book-style foldable iPhone date back to 2019

Apple’s first folding phone is likely to be a book-style foldable, like the Galaxy Z Fold, rather than a clamshell flip phone. It’ll have a smaller outer display and a wider folding display — like the first-gen Google Pixel Fold, per Kuo. I used the Oppo Find N in 2022, which had a similar passport-size form factor. While Oppo’s foldable is better for watching videos, it didn’t offer the best experience for browsing the web.

One of the best aspects of the first Pixel Fold was its passport book-style design and size.

James Martin/CNET

If Apple can find the middle ground between the Pixel Fold and Galaxy Z Fold 7, the iPhone Fold could be an enticing choice. It is rumored to include a 5.5-inch cover screen and a 7.8-inch display when unfolded.

According to Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo, the first folding iPhone is expected to measure 4.5mm thick when unfolded. For context, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 measures 4.2mm, while the Huawei Mate XT (the tri-fold) is 3.6mm thick when fully opened.

In his blog, Kuo gave more clarity on the expected release date and shipment delays. He says that the development of the foldable iPhone “is behind earlier expectations.” The new Apple iPhone is still on track to be launched in 2026 but “smooth shipments may not occur until 2027.”

Here’s a mock-up of the Galaxy Z Fold with iPadOS overlayed on top of the screen.

Celso Bulgatti/CNET

A report from The Elec (via DigiTimes) says that Apple will use ultra-thin glass for its first foldable iPhone. It could have a hole-punch selfie shooter on the cover screen and an under-display camera behind the inner screen. It’ll likely lack Face ID and rely on Touch ID for biometric authentication.

Kuo also reported that the first Apple foldable will minimize the crease by using a combination of titanium, stainless steel and liquid metal for the hinge. It’s also tipped to use titanium for its frame and aluminum in other areas. The foldable iPhone is rumored to house a 48-megapixel primary camera alongside a 48-megapixel ultrawide-angle sensor. Apple might not give it a telephoto camera.

Recently, longtime Apple leaker Sonny Dickson shared what appear to be 3D CAD renderings of the rumored device. These renderings are in line with a separate CAD leak from December published by GSMArena. They show a book-style foldable iPhone with a wide aspect ratio — giving us an iPad Mini-size display. It appears to be a hybrid of the iPhone 17 Pro and the iPhone Air, with a dual-tone look and a pill-shaped camera module at the top. The upcoming iPhone Fold looks like a passport-sized phone.

Another recent Mark Gurman report from Bloomberg revealed new information about how Apple will tweak iOS for its new iPhone. The iPhone Fold is expected to run iOS 27, which could have a new iOS app layout. Apple is touted to revamp its core iPhone programs to add sidebars along the left edge of the screen, similar to iPadOS. This is a necessary step because iOS, in its current state, lacks true multitasking. Unlike its Android counterparts, there’s no multi-window or pop-up window support. And if we’re to make the most of iPhone Fold’s expansive inner screen, iOS must borrow certain iPadOS multitasking features.

Apple’s iPhone Fold is said to cost between $1,800 and $2,500. While earlier rumors suggested the latter price, recent rumors have said that the folding iPhone will cost the same as the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold.

Watch this: Apple’s Folding iPhone Stands Apart With This One Factor

04:55

Samsung

The Galaxy S25 Ultra debuted in January 2025.

Josh Steinbauer/CNET

Galaxy Z Fold 8 and Flip 8

CNET’s Abrar Al-Heeti holds the Galaxy Z Fold 7 (left) and the Galaxy Z Flip 7 (right).

Zooey Liao/Numi Prasarn/CNET

Samsung surprised us with the Galaxy Z Fold 7. It overhauled the design of its book-style foldable to make it the thinnest and lightest foldable in the US. I’ve loved using it, especially because it weighs less than my iPhone 17 Pro Max yet unfolds to offer a bigger 8-inch screen. However, there’s room for improvement.

The South Korean company hasn’t upgraded the battery size on its Galaxy Z Fold in four generations. The Fold 7 packs the same 4,400-mAh battery as the 2021-launched Galaxy Z Fold 3. While the current-gen Fold will last an entire day with moderate use, I struggle to get through the day on a single charge when I’m traveling. The next-gen Galaxy Z Fold needs a battery upgrade, and it might finally get one.

Samsung could increase the Galaxy Z Fold 8’s battery capacity to about 5,000-mAh in 2026, according to the South Korean outlet Dealsite. While the Oppo Find N5 and Honor Magic V3 pack larger battery capacities, a 5,000-mAh cell should be a good boost. The report also claims that Samsung will use a new “laser-drilling metal plate” technology (similar to what Apple is rumored to do with the iPhone Fold) to further minimize the display crease.

This year, Samsung also removed the digitizer from the Galaxy Z Fold 7’s display to make it thinner. But the S Pen could make a comeback this year, as per a report by The Elec. It’ll be interesting to see if that makes the Fold 8 thicker than the current-gen foldable.

Watch this: Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 Wide Spotted in the Wild and It Looks Real

07:32

As for the Galaxy Z Flip 8, there aren’t many rumors at this point, but I hope Samsung improves the cover screen’s usability. When compared to the Razr 2025, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 cover screen still feels limited for running third-party apps.

A new wide-screen foldable

The wide-screen Samsung Fold and iPhone Fold could be like the original Oppo Find N, launched in 2021.

Eli Blumenthal/CNET

A new report from ETNews claims that Samsung is developing a new Galaxy Z Fold that will unfold into a wide-screen mini tablet. It is said to have a 7.6-inch OLED inner screen with a 4:3 aspect ratio, which could be similar to the rumored iPhone Fold. This is wider than the almost square aspect ratio on the Galaxy Z Fold 7. Ideally, a wider aspect ratio is better for watching videos as it minimizes letterboxing and gives you more room for watchable content. A phone this size can then be rotated to read and browse on the web, making it the ideal 2-in-1 phone.

The rumored wide-screen Samsung foldable phone could have a 5.4-inch cover screen and support 25-watt wireless charging, which is faster than the 15-watt wireless charging supported on the Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Fold 7. “Samsung Electronics plans to release the Wide Fold in the fall,” says the report. It could be added to the Galaxy Z series and unveiled alongside the Flip 8 and Fold 8 in 2026.

Google

The camera array on the back of the Pixel 10 Pro.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Google Pixel 11 lineup

This year, Google added a telephoto camera to its base Pixel 10 and gave the Pro models an AI-enabled 30-100x zoom, which is one of the best implementations of digital zoom I’ve used on any phone. It also added a MagSafe-like PixelSnap capability for wireless charging and magnetic accessories. While the new Tensor G5 is faster than last year’s G4 chip, it still struggles against processors from Qualcomm, Apple and MediaTek — its rivals. 

An Android Authority story reports that the Tensor G6 will be a minor improvement over 2025’s model. It could move to TSMC’s next-gen N3P process node and adopt a new architecture focused on power consumption improvements over raw performance gains. The Tensor G6 is rumored to move to a TSMC 2nm process, enabling improvements in battery efficiency and thermal performance — both of which the Pixel could use. The Google chip is also touted to have a new TPU and a secondary nano-TPU, which will help handle lower-power tasks more efficiently. 

The Google Pixel 11 series could get a new low-light video recording feature, 4K 30fps Cinematic Blur and an AI-powered capability that would let you tweak the lighting after video is recorded, according to another Android Authority story. The lineup might also include upgraded camera hardware. It sounds more like a Pro update, but as of now, it’s unclear if it’ll be part of the Pixel 11 Pro Fold and the base model. 

For years, Google has announced its flagship Pixel phones in October. However, the Pixel 9 broke this tradition in 2024 with an August launch, and it was followed by an August announcement of the Pixel 10 series. Google will likely continue with an August launch in 2026.

Where is OnePlus?

OnePlus has already announced its OnePlus 13 successor: the OnePlus 15.

Prakhar Khanna/CNET

OnePlus announced its 2025 flagship, the OnePlus 13, ahead of the Galaxy S25 series in January. It was one of the sleeper hits this year. However, the company has already announced its successor, the OnePlus 15, in China and is releasing the phone in global markets ahead of last year’s launch timeline. As a result, it is already available to purchase in the US.

The OnePlus 15 was launched on Nov. 13, 2025. It is powered by the flagship Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset and packs a massive 7,300-mAh battery with support for 80-watt wired fast charging and 50-watt wireless charging.

The new OnePlus flagship has a 6.78-inch display with a 1.5K resolution and support for up to a 165 Hz refresh rate. It can run games like Call of Duty: Mobile and Brawl Stars at 165 frames per second. You also get a 3,200-Hz touch sampling rate, which ensures that its display is highly responsive during such games.

CNET’s David Lumb got an early look at the phone’s cameras and here’s what its three 50-megapixel cameras are capable of shooting. The OnePlus 15’s Sand Storm model is from a material that OnePlus describes as being tougher than titanium.

We don’t know if we’ll see another OnePlus flagship phone in 2026. After all, the company decided to take a break from launching a folding phone this year, which wasn’t pleasant news because I loved using the OnePlus Open. It was one of the best foldables when it launched. I hope OnePlus gives us a successor this year, but I’m not holding my breath.

Overall, the slab phones of 2026 are likely to be iterative upgrades with improved camera systems and more powerful processors. The major launches will come in the foldable segment, with both Apple and Samsung expected to launch all-new models. With this, 2026 is shaping up to be another exciting year for smartphones.

Watch this: Best Phones of 2025

07:45

Categories: Gadgets

Are You Eligible for Part of Apple’s $250M AI iPhone Settlement? How to Find Out

If you bought an iPhone 16 or iPhone 15 when they launched, you may be able to claim some of the money from a class action lawsuit against Apple. It’s all tied to the new Apple Intelligence features the company previewed during launch — features that ultimately didn’t arrive on time, but were finally unveiled more extensively this month at WWDC 2026.

Apple settled a shareholder lawsuit in May, agreeing to pay $250 million to customers who bought the iPhone 16 and some iPhone 15 models during a specified period. The lawsuit alleged that Apple misled customers by promising AI features that didn’t ship when the new devices did. Payouts between $25 and $95 per eligible device are expected.

In a statement to CNET Managing Editor David Lumb, an Apple spokesperson said, “Apple has reached a settlement to resolve claims related to the availability of two additional features. We resolved this matter to stay focused on doing what we do best, delivering the most innovative products and services to our users.”

Why is there a lawsuit over Apple Intelligence?

When Apple advertised its new iPhone 16 lineup, it emphasized how they were optimized for AI features such as an enhanced Siri that could act as an intelligent agent. When the phones did arrive, Apple Intelligence wasn’t yet ready; its first features didn’t arrive until iOS 18.1, five weeks later.

According to the proposed settlement, “Apple allegedly saturated the market with deceptive ads, inducing consumers to purchase iPhones based on the promise of certain enhanced Siri features.”

Some features of Apple Intelligence did ship soon after the introduction of the iPhone 16 and iOS 18, including Visual Intelligence, Live Translation, Writing Tools, Genmoji and Clean Up. But those weren’t the advanced features Apple highlighted.

Who is eligible for the $250 million settlement?

Customers who purchased one of the following devices between June 10, 2024, and March 29, 2025, are eligible to receive a settlement payment:

  • iPhone 16
  • iPhone 16E
  • iPhone 16 Plus
  • iPhone 16 Pro
  • iPhone 16 Pro Max
  • iPhone 15 Pro
  • iPhone 15 Pro Max

The iPhone 15 Pro and iPhone 15 Pro Max are included because they had the processor and memory to run Apple Intelligence features.

It’s estimated that there are approximately 36 million customers eligible for this settlement.

Watch this: What iPhone Users Actually Want From the New Google-Powered Siri

09:49

How to claim your portion of the settlement

For now, you need to wait.

As set forth in the settlement, Apple will provide a list of eligible customers and their contact information to a settlement administrator. 

After the data has been verified, the company Verita will send email and postal notices to those customers directing them to a settlement website. That site has not yet been created. The deadline for filing your claim will be 90 days after your notice arrives.

When can you expect to receive a settlement payment?

According to the settlement, Apple must provide the information about affected customers within five days of the settlement approval, which was scheduled for June 17, 2026.

When the data is provided and verified, a 45-day notice period begins to inform potential consumers that they’re eligible for a payment.

The actual payment of claims will occur within a 60-calendar-day window after the final details, such as exclusions and objections,  have been worked out. That puts the first checks or deposits arriving sometime after September 2026, depending on court dates and possible extensions.

Categories: Gadgets

Summer Blackout To-Do List: 9 Things to Keep Everyone Cool and Safe

Summer power outages aren’t just more common than they used to be. They’re more dangerous, too. When extreme heat and a grid failure happen simultaneously, a blackout that would be a minor inconvenience in October becomes a genuine health risk, particularly for young children, older adults and anyone with a medical condition affected by temperature. The time to prepare for that scenario isn’t when it’s already happening. A short checklist of supplies and plans, put together before the next heat wave, can make a blackout significantly easier to manage safely.

The weather is finally changing now, but blackouts can still happen. Being prepared is important because, according to the US Energy Information Administration, the average blackout lasts longer than five hours. Over five hours without air conditioning can lead to heat-related health complications. The good news is that there are ways you can keep yourself and others physically and mentally cool when this happens.

1. Prepare an emergency kit

An emergency kit is simple to build and doesn’t cost much money. You can even buy one at big-box retailers. Here’s what your emergency kit should include:

  • Band-Aid gauze, ointments, and butterfly bandages
  • Essential medication
  • At least one gallon of drinking water available per person for at least a few days
  • A well-insulated cooler and ice packs to keep medications cool
  • Non-perishable food items, like canned goods, dry cereal, nuts, snacks and other shelf-stable items that don’t require cooking. 

2. Alert your utility company

Have your utility company’s number available to report the outage. While they might already know of your situation, informing them gives them a better idea of the outage’s scope. In some instances, they might provide an estimate for when your power will return. This is vital information to have, as it can help prepare you for a prolonged outage if one happens. 

3. Check on relatives, friends and neighbors

If the summer blackout is widespread, affecting loved ones or friends, connect with them and see if they’re OK. Outages can especially affect those with medical conditions, children and older adults. Therefore, ensuring they have a place to go with air conditioning and enough water is paramount. 

If the whole neighborhood is out of power, check with your local Red Cross or the news about nearby areas like libraries or schools that have power and are open to the public. These sanctuaries ensure people with medical conditions have someplace cool to rest until power is back on. 

doble-d/Getty Images

4. Stock up on food for longer outages

For those living in areas with more inclement weather, preparing for prolonged outages is ideal. Along with following these tips, you’ll want to inspect your fridge and freezer to toss food you can’t properly store without power before it decays. If you can afford it, consider buying an ice chest to store frozen and refrigerated goods. And if you have a grill, you have an outside cooking source to use up meat and veggies before they expire. If you can’t afford an ice chest, keep meats, fruits and vegetables in coolers. 

Moreover, if you live in areas where prolonged outages happen often, like Houston, you should consider a home generator. Although they are expensive, they can also provide a much-needed sanctuary when your home runs out of power and will be out for an extended period of time. 

5. Have other light sources

Store a flashlight in every room of your home. That way, when the power goes out, you’ll have lighting in every room. If you don’t want to mess with batteries, consider motion-powered options. However, if you select battery-powered flashlights, keep a fresh supply of batteries on hand. 

Alternatively, you could also use candles as light sources. Stock matchsticks or check on your lighter to ensure it works and doesn’t need lighter fluid. Before lighting a candle, move around your room and check for gas leaks (if applicable). 

Jenny Dettrick/Getty Images

6. Install blackout curtains

Blackout curtains achieve several goals. They prevent light from entering your room by blocking out UV rays and exterior light from other sources. They work as another layer of protection for rooms with blinds, where gaps can allow light to shine through. 

Since blackout curtains also reflect heat, they’ll keep that area of your home cooler during a summer blackout. If you have someone with a medical condition or heat sensitivity, you’ll want to place them in a room with blackout curtains during a power outage. 

7. Wear cooling clothes

When the power goes out, it won’t take long for your home to heat up. One way to combat the heat is to wear cooling clothes, which dissipate heat and promote airflow, helping you to remain comfortable in an uncomfortable situation. 

Usually, cooling clothes have three properties:

  1. Breathable materials: By allowing for more airflow, these materials prevent sweat from sticking to your skin, so you’ll cool off quickly. You should refrain from wearing fabrics containing wool or polyester since they’ll make you sweatier. 
  2. Moisture-wicking capabilities: When your body overheats, sweat is created to cool it down. However, if you’re wearing non-cooling clothing, you’ll be uncomfortable because the fabric won’t remove the moisture from your skin. Cooling clothing achieves this by using hydrophobic fibers to repel the sweat from your clothing and skin, allowing your body to cool down without feeling bogged down.
  3. Temperature regulation: You’ll want to wear clothes that evaporate sweat quickly, contain higher thermal connectivity and have thermal convection. When you put on a cooler material, your body feels cooler since heat goes from the warmest parts of your clothing to the coolest. 

shisheng ling/Getty Images

8. Keep devices charged with portable chargers

Having cell service is akin to a bodily function for most of us. However, when the lights go out and you don’t have access to a power source, then anxiety can be induced. After all, you don’t want a dead phone battery to prevent you from contacting friends and loved ones, and if you need them, emergency personnel.  

That’s why you’ll want to have backup charging solutions ready to go. Power banks are a wise choice if you keep them charged before an outage occurs. That way you can plug in your smartphone and remain connected. 

You can also buy battery-powered or hand-crank phone chargers. With either option, you don’t have to worry about them being plugged in and powered before an outage. Just be sure to have fresh batteries on hand for battery-powered options. 

9. Recognize the signs of heat stroke

During hotter months, and especially when a summer blackout takes out your A/C, it’s vital to know the signs of heat stroke. If you notice someone starting to feel disoriented or appear flushed, you’ll want them to rest someplace cooler, apply a cold pack or towel to their skin and call 9-1-1. You don’t want to give them water to drink, as they may be confused and unable to swallow safely. 

These are other symptoms of heat stroke to keep an eye out for, per the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention: 

  • Slurred speech
  • Loss of consciousness (coma)
  • Hot, dry skin or profuse sweating
  • Seizures
  • Very high body temperature

Also, if you have older neighbors or those with mobility disabilities, check on them regularly. Doing so can help you identify signs of heat stroke and address the situation before it becomes even more dangerous. 

Categories: Gadgets

All Your Wearables Have One Glaring Weakness. What Can You Do About It?

Do you know what a spudger is? I didn’t until I was already fingertips deep into performing open-heart surgery on the Google Pixel Watch 4 and realized that the implement — a plastic stick with one pointy end and one flat end — was already in my hand.

I was following iFixit’s instructions to try to do a full screen replacement on the watch from the comfort of my own home, and spudging, it turned out, was a key part of the process. The spudger is used for pressing, prying, pulling and coaxing the watch’s components in and out of place without damaging the metal elements.

But no sooner had I got to grips with it, when I suddenly had to swap it for a pair of tweezers with pincers sharper than scorpion tails. I wielded them clumsily while trying to peel off a sticker holding the screen connector together. The instructions warned me that in extracting this well-secured scrap of tape, I must be careful not to damage it.

I began to sweat as I tussled with both the sticker and my frustration. If you’ve ever tried to remove chewing gum from your hair, you’ll understand what I mean (though you can’t just fill a smartwatch with peanut butter and hope it still works).

It’s not exactly like I have experience in the field. Call me an ambitious amateur.

Once, for example, around the age of 10, I helped my dad repair our boxy television set with a soldering iron. On a couple of occasions in recent years, under close supervision from the iFixit team at tech shows, I’ve tinkered with laptops and phones. I never electrocuted myself in physics class while playing with circuits. I’m also pretty good at jigsaw puzzles. That’s basically it.

But I wanted to make a go of it because I fundamentally believe product repairability is important. Extending the lifecycle of products means less waste, less need to constantly mine the Earth for rare minerals and less impact on vulnerable communities around the world, including the use of child labor in dangerous conditions. It also means we can get our money’s worth out of our ever-more-expensive devices.

Increasingly, we have the right to repair our own electronics thanks to regulations that compel companies to design their products for easy repair and to make parts and instructions accessible. But it’s one thing to repair a laptop or even a phone. Wearables — from the laudably compact to the fiendishly tiny — are a whole other degree of difficulty, for both manufacturers and consumers.

By early 2025, every US state had introduced some form of right-to-repair legislation, with 10 laws currently in effect (you can check your own state here). Meanwhile, in Europe, the EU Right to Repair Directive is set to come into force at the end of July. Theoretically, we should be starting to see repairability and parts availability trickle down into the tech we buy. In reality, progress is painstakingly slow.

“We are kind of at the point where right to repair has passed legally,” says Kyle Wiens, CEO of iFixit, an advocacy group that offers repair guides for high-tech consumer gear and sells tools and replacement parts. 

But compliance? It’s “uneven,” Wiens says.

Making a wearable repairable

As I set out on my repair adventure, I felt pretty intimidated. Not because the stakes are particularly high, but because I’d like to be able to prove that even for me, an idiot with a screwdriver, this is possible. Because if I can do it, so can you.

The Pixel Watch 4, which came out last year, was an obvious candidate for me to tear down (and then rebuild), because Google has been proactive in making this wearable repairable in a way that no other smartwatch maker has yet attempted. 

CNET/Andrew Lanxon

“They kind of swung for the fences early, and they’re out ahead,” says Wiens.

The company reengineered its watch from the ground up, without adhesives, so someone like me could disassemble and reassemble it without breaking it. Possible, that is, but not always straightforward. 

Throughout history, watchmakers have been considered artisans as much as they are technicians. Working on watches of all stripes requires dexterity, patience, precision and a steady hand — none of which are qualities I innately possess, nor have I done much to cultivate.

I could’ve made this process easier for myself by choosing something larger and less fiddly to repair, but at this point in time, there’s a well-established repair ecosystem for phones, laptops and bigger electronics, whether that be local repair shops or cafes, company-led efforts such as Apple’s Genius Bar or support for self-service repair. 

Examine the spectrum of iFixit scores, and it’s clear that many phones still pose a challenge — especially the newer foldable variety — but as a category, repairability has improved significantly over the past decade.

The same repair ecosystem and focus on repair from tech companies are not currently in place for wearables.

That’s an issue, because the number of wearables has been skyrocketing as we adorn ourselves with tech to track our sleep and our workouts, to provide the soundtrack to our lives and to observe and record the world around us. I’m talking not only about earbuds and smartwatches, but also newer gadgets, including smart rings, smart glasses and a whole slew of niche (for now, at least) AI peripherals. These items don’t come cheap and ideally will last at least us as long as, if not longer than, our phones. If we can’t repair them, they’ll quickly end up in the trash, adding to the growing mounds of e-waste piling up around the world.

A study published in Nature last December by researchers from Cornell University and the University of Chicago found that demand for health-focused wearables could approach 2 billion units by 2050. Cumulatively, they have the potential to generate 100 million tons of e-waste, increasing pollution risks to communities worldwide.

By far, the biggest contributor to these devices’ carbon footprint is the production of their printed circuit boards. The researchers concluded that if devices are designed to be modular and repairable, their circuit boards can be reused time and again, extending their lifecycles and reducing the need to constantly mine for new materials.

“There’s an opportunity in not just the raw engineering design, but in little touch points within the product that kind of nudge or guide the consumer to understand either how to repair their products or what to do with it at the end of life.”

Matt White, head of sustainable design, Cambridge Consultants

Here we have both a problem and a solution — so why aren’t tech companies doing more to implement it? For a long time, there’s been a perception that wearable tech is simply impossible to repair, which has led many companies to avoid trying. Instead, they tend to rely solely on recycling and trade-in programs to offset the environmental damage.

When it comes to repairability, wearables pose, without a doubt, “the most challenging frontier of consumer tech,” says Matt White, head of sustainable design at deep tech powerhouse Cambridge Consultants. But it’s a challenge that he has first-hand experience overcoming.

I first met White at CES 2026 in a dimly lit Las Vegas hotel suite with his colleagues. The show is famous for its endless stream of shiny consumer tech launches, but the team brought something very different — a proof-of-concept repairable smartwatch called Ouroboros.

The idea behind the project was to identify the roadblocks to repairability, whether engineering, cultural or legislative. What the team discovered, says White, is that building a truly repairable product requires not only a determination from its inception, but also a commitment to it as a north-star priority throughout the design process.

“It’s a business transformation, it’s not just a product design transformation,” he says. “That takes a lot of guts, it takes a bit of a leap of faith and a bit of a bet on innovation for companies to do that. I think that the reward is there, but it requires the right kind of mindset.”

CNET/Andrew Lanxon

How I repaired a Pixel Watch

Google is already seeing that reward, even though it released the Pixel Watch 4 only last summer. 

“The reception after launch has been better than we could have hoped for,” says Francis Hoe, group product manager for Google Pixel Watch.

First up, there was the acknowledgment from iFixit, which awarded the device a 9/10 repairability score, that Google had created the most repairable smartwatch on the market (most watches, like the popular Apple Watch, score 3 or 4 out of 10 at most).

This was validating, Hoe says, but he also appreciates the way the community of Pixel Watch owners has responded. He says he loves to go on Reddit and see people promoting its serviceability, as well as discussing how easy they found the watch to repair. 

“It’s a little surprising,” he says. “But it’s good to see that feedback.”

One such Reddit user who completed a successful repair said the iFixit guide was easy to follow, and it took them less than an hour (much better than my 90 minutes). 

“I’m familiar with doing maker projects, soldering, etc, but I think anyone could do this pretty easily,” they said. “I do have small hands, so not sure if that helped.”

There were some nerves around how people would actually find the process of repairing the device, according to Hoe. And having taken it apart and put it back together again, I can understand why. On the iFixit website, it ranks replacing the screen on the Pixel Watch 4 as “moderate” on the difficulty scale, and says it should take between 30 minutes and one hour.

By the time I tightened the final screws in the Watch, I was about to hit the 90-minute mark. But ultimately, despite the fiddliness of the operation, I completed it. 

The remarkable thing about the Pixel Watch 4 is that from the outside, it looks almost identical to the Pixel Watch 3, but the two products share almost no DNA. Even the screws that hold the watch together, one hidden under each watch band, are a new addition. Previously, there was just glue.

“Seeing things like the Google Watch and smartphones becoming more repairable, but not sacrificing IP68 and 69 ratings for it, proves that actually that’s not really a compromise that has to be made.”

Ben Hatton, analyst, CCS Insight

The assumption was that once the device was sealed, that would be it, says Hoe. Now that things have to go in and out, both the components and the order in which they’re assembled have been completely rearchitected. Many parts have been shrunk, the haptic engine was swapped for an alternative, and the connectors needed to be extra robust to survive being attached and detached. The battery was a particular challenge.

“If the battery gets smaller, battery life gets worse, and that’s obviously a huge selling point of wearable devices,” says Hoe. “It meant fundamentally changing our battery strategy.”

The last thing Google wanted to do was make any part of the Pixel Watch experience worse for the sake of repairability, whether that be reducing battery life, increasing the device’s size or making it less waterproof.

Tech companies often use the difficulty of waterproofing as an excuse for not prioritizing modularity and repairability, says Ben Hatton, connected devices analyst at CCS Insight. But the direction of travel is beginning to change.

“Seeing things like the Google Watch and smartphones becoming more repairable, but not sacrificing IP68 and 69 ratings for it, proves that actually that’s not really a compromise that has to be made,” he says. “That major argument against preventing water ingress is starting to be maybe debunked a little bit.”

Those IP ratings indicate resistance to dust and water infiltration. The 6 in the first position indicates the highest level of dust protection, while the 8 or 9 in the second position are high marks for water resistance.

With the Pixel Watch 4 being a sports and fitness device, making it waterproof was a nonnegotiable, says Hoe. Again, this was previously accomplished with adhesives, which aren’t compatible with self-repair, so they had to experiment with alternatives.

The Pixel Watch 4 does come with an IP68 rating, and I got to see first-hand how Google has used O-rings — donut-shaped rubber bands — to create a tight, leak-free seal on both the external screws and around the screen. Getting the tiny O-rings back on the 2mm screws was another tricky part of the reassembly process for me, like playing an ant-size game of Hoopla, but it will be essential if I’m ever to wear the watch in the shower.

Given the potentially dicey trade-offs, many companies would’ve thrown in the towel on repairability. White, who has worked on many different products over the years, says he’s seen multiple times when companies set out to make something repairable but abandon that design principle when it might hold up a project.

“Keeping it sacred is very, very hard when you know engineering teams are getting pressure that you know this has to be released next month in order to hit this milestone and that milestone,” he says. “Then, it’s the first thing in the firing line.”

For Google, repairability eventually won out in internal debates.

“Every time that there’s an inflection point of trade-offs that have to be made, I think we always try to come back to the user and what are we hoping to deliver with this product,” Hoe says. “The trend is usually people are using the devices longer and longer, so it wasn’t something that we wanted to walk away from.”

Fairphone

A modular approach to headphones

When it comes to challenging the status quo, no one in consumer tech is doing it quite like Fairphone. The Dutch social enterprise is best known for its sustainable, repairable smartphones — the mere existence of which throws down the gauntlet to the entire industry, including giants such as Apple and Samsung.

Around 2021, the company decided to branch out into audio products and has since released a series of products, most notably the Fairbuds, which are earbuds, and the Fairbuds XL, which are over-ear headphones. 

Perhaps because they’re so small, often relatively inexpensive and viewed as a peripheral rather than a device in their own right, people tend to treat headphones as disposable. You’ve probably had at least one pair of headphones break, but did you think to try to repair them?

If your answer is no, don’t feel ashamed. There’s been a long-held belief that headphones are impossible to repair. That’s just started changing.

It’s only in the past few years that iFixit has been handing out repairability scorecards to wireless earbuds, and only in May that it started marking headphones. In both categories, only one company has managed a perfect 10/10 score.

This Fairbuds XL, in particular, is the company’s “most fun” to repair, says Chandler Hatton, Fairphone’s CTO. “It’s a little bit chunkier, and you can feel a little bit more comfortable taking it apart.”

Earbuds, meanwhile, posed a trickier challenge. Our ears aren’t typically load-bearing body parts, so there’s a trade-off between weight and battery size. The small batteries inevitably burn out sooner than we’d like, so we end up chucking them and buying new ones.

“The way that we combat it is to make it super simple to upgrade it to the point that it would be quite silly to throw it away, because you realize: Hey, this thing that I have is valuable, and I can very easily purchase something for very little money and spend 5 minutes putting it into this device,” says Hatton.

Giving a device a second or even third life can prevent a piece of tech from ending up gathering dust in a drawer, he adds, noting the sense of confusion many people feel when they don’t want to admit they might never use something again.

Ultimately, to build repairable tech, you do need to start with repairability as a design principle, says Hatton. If every component needs to be soldered to a printed circuit board, you’re asking people to do too much to repair it. Instead, you need to take a modular approach and ensure the most commonly replaced components are actually accessible.

Another major benefit of making a device modular and repairable is that it can be backward compatible. When Fairphone launched the latest version of the Fairbuds XL, it made the new driver available so people with the earlier model could upgrade their headphones without buying a whole new pair.

It’s important to the company to make tech that’s also appealing and affordable, says Hatton. She doesn’t want to ask people to compromise on their design and comfort standards. Repairability can’t come at the cost of an avant-garde product that might alienate people and make them less willing to take a chance on a smaller brand.

“We want to build on the things that are already there and be part of the conversation, part of the ecosystem and part of the trends that are going on,” says Hatton. 

CNET/Andrew Lanxon

Repairability as state of the art

For now, companies, including Fairphone and Google, are leading by example, but at some point that example might form the basis of a legal precedent.

Europe’s battery regulation, which will come into force in 2027, requires most portable consumer electronics to have easily user-replaceable batteries. Just as the EU regulation mandating USB-C charging made it the global charging standard, it’s expected that the new rules will affect the design and repairability of products worldwide.

There are exemptions for devices where battery access would compromise water resistance, or for ultra-compact designs where physical constraints make safe battery access impossible. But these exceptions exist for only as long as there’s nothing in the state of the art — or in the market — that proves it’s possible to make a battery accessible or waterproof after all, says White, the consultant.

Now that Google has shown it’s possible to make a smartwatch with an IP68 rating and a user-replaceable battery, that could shift what’s considered state-of-the-art.

“Whether it be for a ring or whether it be for smart glasses or whether it be for headphones, it’s a real opportunity for companies to go… this is now the state of the art, and everyone else has to follow,” says White. “You can use it as a tool to enact change across the entire sector, and also gain all of the benefit of being the first one to do it.”

With both regulation looming and product precedents being set, there is enormous potential for tech companies to force competitors to raise their own game by developing replaceable battery solutions first. If you hold a licensable patent for such a solution, it could even prove profitable.

“It could turn into an e-waste nightmare if there’s not due consideration designed into these things.”

Matt White, head of sustainable design, Cambridge Consultants

European regulators might be slow, but their power shouldn’t be underestimated. Even Apple switched its proprietary Lightning port to USB-C on all the iPhones it sells globally.

Apple has made significant strides in repairability, says iFixit’s Wiens, who has publicly and successfully exerted pressure on the company over the years. 

“They really, genuinely, I think, do believe in repair and making it last longer,” he says. “Broadly, the iPhone does last a long time, and it’s great resale value.”

He’s less impressed when it comes to the Apple Watch and AirPods. (Versions of the latter consistently receive a 0/10 iFixit score, and Wiens describes the lack of repairability as “egregious.”)

The Apple Watch, meanwhile, poses a “fixable design problem,” says Wiens. One of the main issues — prevalent across the industry, especially with games consoles — is the availability of parts and manuals, which Wiens sees as lacking when it comes to the watch.

He directs me to a letter sent by Apple to the Minnesota attorney general in February and posted on Reddit, in which the company points to its online Self Service Repair store as proof of its compliance with the state’s right-to-repair law regarding the Apple Watch. This resource contains documentation and opportunities to buy parts for many Apple products, but not the Apple Watch. 

A spokesperson for Apple said the company meets the requirements of Minnesota’s right-to-repair law, and that it’s the first smartphone maker to support a push for federal right-to-repair regulation.

The miniature design of the Apple Watch presents challenges, but the company is rolling out same-unit battery repair service for a growing number of models over an expanding range of regions. Display repairs for certain models are also under development, as are further enhancements to overall Apple Watch repairability.

“We’ve seen big improvements from Apple and almost market-leading improvements in some respects,” says Ben Wood, chief analyst at market research firm CCS Insight, who cites an easily delaminated glue the company invented to simplify iPhone disassembly. It’s the kind of thing that could be rolled down to the Apple Watch and other small products to increase ease of repair.

Wood adds that he wouldn’t be surprised, especially given Apple’s progress in cutting emissions associated with the manufacture of recent Apple Watch models, to see a more easily repairable Apple Watch in the near future.

Quinten Klein

Smart glasses: “Definitely fragile”

While the established players in established wearable product categories are taking active strides toward sustainability, the same can’t be said for the up-and-comers.

Quinten Klein, a 30-year-old business development and operations contractor, dangles a pair of first-generation Meta Ray-Ban smart glasses in front of his camera from his home in Los Angeles. 

“If you can see in here, I’ve taken off one of the arms,” he says, as the inside edge of one of the glasses stems flaps open.

This is the fourth pair of Meta Ray-Bans Klein has tinkered with, he tells me. The speakers on his first pair of Ray-Bans broke out of warranty, prompting him to take matters into his own hands. Reddit is filled with complaints from people just like him, who have been left with a non-functioning pair of smart glasses relatively soon after buying them.

“They’re definitely fragile,” Klein says. “They’re not easy to repair — not because the job isn’t easy, [but] because things just don’t work once you repair it. Things don’t go back together right, and it’s packed tightly. It’s one of those things where they’ve obviously designed it never to be opened up again.”

“Glasses are hard. But come on, you’ve got to find a way to make the battery swappable on these smart glasses, otherwise it’s a disposable product.”

Kyle Wiens, CEO, iFixit

On the Gen 1s he shows me over the video call, he’d replaced the battery with one from the Ray-Bans Gen 2. This time, he’s been extra careful not to cause any serious damage so that he can keep on using them rather than have them be another sacrifice to repairability science.

“You’re still going to end up damaging some little parts, like the bottoms here — the plastic is just so soft,” he says. “The glue, once you’ve broken it off, it’s really hard to get off of the little plastic edges. It’s definitely not something that I would recommend to any casual user.”

Once he was in, the battery on the Gen 1 glasses was actually pretty easy, says Klein. The front half of the glasses’ arm nearest to the lenses is very simply organized and connected (the back half, where the speakers reside, is more of a mystery).

“It’s the putting it back together part and the reliability once it’s together part that is not really there,” he says. 

This is something I relate to from my tinkering with my Pixel Watch 4. The reassembly was by far the most fraught part of the process. “I’m not sure what kind of glue they used, but I’ve been trying to work with different industrial glues to copy it,” says Klein.

Smart glasses (especially those without screens) are currently experiencing explosive popularity, with research published by IDC this week showing 167% year-on-year growth in the first three months of 2026. Let’s hope those 2.25 million units stand the test of time. 

“It could turn into an e-waste nightmare if there’s not due consideration designed into these things,” says White.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, Meta is the market leader in smart glasses, with over 69% market share, according to IDC. No other company currently boasts more than 3.5%, but several promising challengers are poised to enter the fray with competitive products

Glasses from Google, Samsung, Gentle Monster, Warby Parker and Xreal are all on the verge of hitting the shelves. Meanwhile, the Alibaba Qwen smart glasses I tried at MWC in Barcelona in March had swappable batteries on the ends of the arms — the first hint of any repairability we’ve seen in this emerging product category.

Thanks to his intrepid approach to DIY repair, Klein has shown that if you can get inside the Meta Ray-Bans and close them up again, battery repair is not only possible but straightforward. But access to the device’s innards is so prohibitive that in an iFixit teardown, the team deemed the glasses “unrepairable.”

The generous way to think about this is to acknowledge that it is new technology and that Meta is still figuring it out. 

“You’re packing a considerable amount of tech into a crazy, already predetermined form factor that you can’t deviate much from,” says Carsten Frauenheim, iFixit’s global head of design for repairability. “Their engineering challenge is high, and I think their priority is just tackling that right now.”

Wiens has a more take-no-prisoners attitude. “Glasses are hard — we’re at the bleeding edge of this,” he says. “But come on, you’ve got to find a way to make the battery swappable on these smart glasses, otherwise it’s a disposable product. … I’m going to continue to hold their feet to the fire until they get the battery repairable.”

A spokesperson for Meta said the company was always looking for ways to improve the overall lifecycle of its products, focusing on durability and longevity as key considerations during hardware development. The company follows circular economy principles, including “reusing hardware components, increasing the use of recycled materials and responsible supply chain practices,” they said.

“We have several programs in place to keep devices in use and out of landfill,” they added. “We also offer refurbished products where available, extending the lifecycle of existing hardware.” Lenses are fully replaceable and customers, having trouble with warrantees should reach out to Ray-Ban or Oakley customer support directly.

Compared with upcoming interlopers into the glasses game, such as Google, Samsung and potentially Apple, Meta has relatively little hardware manufacturing experience, which could put it at a disadvantage. It’s likely that they’ll include some of the learnings from making other products in their portfolios repairable, Hatton says. “Maybe that could steer Meta into a more sustainable outlook.”

Smart rings: Reason to hope?

Other makers of wearables, including smart rings and AI peripherals such as pendants and clips, don’t appear to be doing much better — though there are signs of hope.

Earlier this year, smart ring maker Oura filed for a patent in the US with a replaceable battery design. The company hasn’t commented further on this, and there was no such component in the Oura Ring 5, which debuted in May, but it still feels promising at a time when very few companies designing emerging wearable products seem to have repair on their agendas at all.

For those, such as Wiens, who are campaigning for the right to repair, the lack of care and attention being given to repairability by companies experimenting with new product categories is ultimately dispiriting. 

“I get we’re excited with the shiny new, but you can’t go and mine a hole in the Earth every day of raw materials, get stuff made by children … then drag the supply chain all around the world to make something that we’re going to sell to you for $400, and then it stops working in 18 months,” he says. “This is not OK. It should not be ethically tolerated.”

In the face of unrepairable products, companies only have trade-in and recycling schemes to fall back on. Both Meta and Oura offer these, but in the long run, they won’t meet the requirements of right-to-repair legislation, and it’s hard to measure how thorough any recycling truly is. 

CNET/Andrew Lanxon

What you and I can do

All of this brings me back to my own attempts to repair the Pixel Watch.

It’s all well and good for companies to invest in making their products easily repairable and recyclable, but the onus is also on us, as consumers of those products, to follow through by repairing or recycling. If we leave them in a drawer for years gathering dust — something I’ve been guilty of doing — or dispose of them irresponsibly, we’re not playing our part in keeping the circular economy a true circle.

In a survey last year by the University of Bradford in northern England, researchers found that 73% of people were willing to repair their electronics. The majority were motivated by cost savings and the fun of a DIY project.

Those who were reluctant to repair their tech cited lack of skills, tools, knowledge and time as major barriers. Lack of time is a personal issue and often a matter of priorities and perception. As for the other three, iFixit and other self-service repair stores, including Apple’s, have people covered.

Still, for many of us, a psychological shift might be required to add a repair chapter to the story of our ownership of any given item. If we can make this shift, we might be able to find the time after all. We’re out of practice right now — most of us don’t spend our evenings sitting in front of the TV darning our own socks.

Tech companies could also do more to hold our hands through this process, says White. “There’s an opportunity there in not just the raw engineering design, but in the messaging, in the [user experience] of the product, in little touch points within the product that kind of nudge or guide the consumer to understand either how to repair their products or what to do with it at the end of life.”

Our consumer culture is one of abundance, so the skills and inclination to fix and mend have been replaced by the ease of disposing of and replacing. But if we can get out of that habit, there may be untapped and unacknowledged benefits in repairing our broken things.

Consider the Ikea Effect, a term coined in 2011 by three academics from Harvard, Yale and Duke who published the results of three studies in the Journal of Consumer Psychology. Together, their findings showed that people tend to cherish items they’ve built themselves, placing much higher value on them than on items they’ve simply purchased.

Most of us are familiar with the feeling of satisfaction of completing a Lego set, for example, as well as the way we tend to value the finished product — often not wanting to tear it down, but instead displaying it somewhere we can admire it. Our effort creates attachment, and the same might well be true of items we successfully repair.

Tech companies can help make repairs more fun for us, too. At every step of the journey, the Pixel Watch team had to think about what people would experience if they went fishing around under the hood. That meant not just making it easy to take apart, but making it aesthetically pleasing. 

“We’re not thinking about just the outside, but how do we drive the inner beauty of the device, so that when you’re taking it apart, it feels like something we considered,” says Hoe. He points to the printed Google branding on the battery’s metal, the way the components line up to create a smooth surface, and the lack of sharp edges. “It wasn’t an afterthought, essentially,” he says.

We could well start to see our technology not simply as utilitarian items destined sooner rather than later for the rubbish heap, but instead as something partially crafted by our own hand, into which we have poured time, labor and care. We might subsequently make more effort to keep our tech safe and give it a responsible send-off when it finally does take its last gasp.

Likewise, handholding us through our confusion over what to do with our broken products is a way for tech companies to establish goodwill among customers. 

“It’s a really great opportunity for the brand to build loyalty and stickiness,” says White. “In my mind, it feels like a win-win.”

The legacy of the Pixel Watch, says Hoe, is that it’s already proven people do actually care about repairability.

I found my experience of replacing the Pixel Watch’s screen both deeply fun and satisfying. It also massively boosted confidence in my own capabilities. Having completed one repair, I now feel less intimidated at the thought of getting out my screwdriver, my tweezers and, yes, my spudger to crack open more of my damaged tech. 

There’s one particularly pricey pair of headphones sitting in a drawer that is calling to me. I’ve been putting off dealing with them, but they’re already broken. It’s at this point that I have to ask myself, what’s the worst that could happen?

Art Director | Jeffrey Hazelwood

Creative Director | Viva Tung

Director of Photography | Andrew Lanxon

Video Host | Katie Collins

Video Producer | Andrew Lanxon

Video Editor | JD Christison

Project Manager | Danielle Ramirez

Editor | Corinne Reichert

Director of Content | Jonathan Skillings

Categories: Gadgets

I Saw the Ultimate Rocket Bike in Action and It Blew Me Away

As I watched Graham Sykes climb onto his rocket bike, I was worried for a moment that I was about to film a man as he died. But as he hurtled past me at hundreds of miles per hour and engulfed me in a cloud of steam, I realised I needn’t have worried — this is just a normal day for Sykes. 

I was at the Santa Pod raceway in Bedfordshire, England, meeting Sykes and his team as they prepped his entirely steam-powered bike — dubbed Force of Nature — for a potentially record-breaking speed attempt during a drag-racing festival. After battling through the crowds flooding into the venue, I eventually found Sykes and his team among cars and bikes of all shapes and sizes, diligently preparing Force of Nature for its one scheduled run that day. 

Watch this: World’s Fastest Steam-Powered Rocketbike

05:32

Sykes, who seemed far calmer than I expected, offered me a marshmallow as I got my first glimpse of the bike, “I tend to not eat a great deal before a run, except for sugary sweets — we’ve all got our vices!” he said. 

Sykes (in his racing leathers) and the team make some adjustments to the bike.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

The bike looked like nothing I’d ever seen before. Long and sleek with enormous funnel-shaped exhausts on the back, the only thing that marked it out as a motorcycle was the fact it was a vehicle on two wheels. A mechanical engineer by trade, Sykes has made almost every component himself from his workshop in his back garden. 

Not that you’d guess. Peering close up at various components, I felt I was looking at something crafted in a NASA lab rather than in someone’s garden shed. At the heart of the bike’s steam propulsion system is a 120-liter boiler, heated by a burner to around 260 degrees Celsius (around 500 Fahrenheit). That boiling process creates an immense amount of pressure inside the tank, which is released when the starting lights go green in about 3 seconds, propelling the bike to speeds of over 200 miles per hour.

The boiler is the only component not built by Sykes He instead sourced it from a company that manufactures pressurized vessels for the nuclear and oil and gas industries. The reason simply comes down to safety. “If it exploded, it wouldn’t just be myself that would be injured or killed,” said Sykes. “It would be everyone else around me too.” 

The Santa Pod Raceway plays host to all kinds of drag races, including this one involving what I’m pretty sure is a Mustang. It wasn’t easy to capture, especially when shooting on Kodak Gold film.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Despite the very real risks involved, Sykes struck me as very calm and relaxed on the day. He was clearly enjoying himself as he helped the team do the pre-run checks and chatted with excited fans who came to the team’s base to meet Sykes and get his autograph. He was clearly in his element. 

“I always wanted to ride a rocket bike,” he said “But no one was going to ask me ‘Hey Graham, do you fancy riding my rocket bike?’ so the only way to do it was to build one. In the 1970s Evel Knievel tried to jump over Snake River Canyon and that was a super-heated water rocket, so that’s what inspired me.” 

The race day drew tens of thousands of fans, all eager to see cars and bikes move faster than they really have any right to. 

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

But nerves do still set in, even for Sykes. “Every time you get on the bike, you have trepidation,” he said “You have that adrenaline and you’ve got that little bit of reservation in your head that says ‘when I press this button, my life is gonna change. Hopefully for the better.” 

I positioned myself next to the track, with a clear view of the starting line. I could see Sykes and the team preparing, and had a nice bit of space that would allow me to see him zoom past. I was there to film the spectacle too, but when each run lasts a matter of seconds, it’s not an easy task to capture. Aside from the camera in my hand and the three cameras I had on tripods, I’d also attached a number of GoPro cameras to his bike (using industrial clamps to ensure they didn’t fly off with the force of the acceleration). 

Even so, I was nervous about missing the one opportunity I had to capture Sykes in action. And I was right to be: Before his run, I practiced on other drag races, from tuned-up road cars to hot-rods powered by literal rockets pulled out of fighter jets. The speeds these vehicles achieved were astonishing to me, and the noise was like nothing I’d ever heard. 

The rocket-powered drag cars were fast and probably the loudest things I’ve ever heard.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

But the practice helped me prepare to get the shot, and as I got the thumbs up that the run was soon to begin, I braced myself. As, I imagine, did Sykes. “When we get the bike to the starting line, Diane, my wife, takes the safety pin out, shows me the pin to say that it’s out and the bike is live, taps me on the head which is as good as a kiss, and… off we go,” he told me.

“Nothing can prepare you for what you’re going to experience. It’s like being kicked from behind — the G-Force pulls your body backwards.” 

The lights counted down, turned green and Sykes went off like a bullet. A huge plume of steam erupted from the bike’s exhaust, knocking back one of my cameras, positioned nearby, and sending it hurtling 30 feet into a barrier. I panned my camera quickly as he shot past me, before the wall of steam swept over me. 

When most races last only a few seconds, it’s really a case of “blink and you miss it.”

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

It was astonishing to watch and I can’t begin to imagine what it must feel like for Sykes on the bike. I’ve driven some speedy cars in my time at CNET but the fastest acceleration I’ve experienced is 0 to 60 miles per hour in about 2.8 seconds. That felt insanely fast to me — fast enough that I didn’t like it. I felt the edges of my vision blurring and I didn’t want to do it again. 

Sykes does 0 to 60 mph in under half a second. 

The Force of Nature bike didn’t break its own records that day. But the run, at least, was a safe one. “Once I see that parachute come out at the end, I know everything’s all right,” said Diane.

Every run is also a great performance that shows the amassed crowds the true power of what steam can do. “People think that steam is an old-fashioned, out-of-date power source, said Sykes. “But every power station that generates power from fuel is really powered by steam.” 

Sykes shares a kiss with his wife Diane following the speed attempt.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

“When we first started building [the bike] we wanted to run a 5-second quarter mile, with a 200 mph pass — neither had been done before using steam,” he added “We’ve since achieved both of those goals.” 

Sykes and the team hope to achieve a 4-second run in the future. From what I saw of their precision, dedication and passion, I don’t think it’ll be long before they get there. 

Categories: Gadgets

Best Weekend Ever? Playing Pokemon Go With 717,000 Fans of the Game

Over the course of three days, Jacob Crowe walked 26 miles across Chicago in super-humid heat and rainy mornings, engaging in hundreds of virtual battles. Alongside tens of thousands of other players, he sought the rarest Pokemon, particularly Shiny variants.

“It makes it better to do it as a group together,” Crowe said of the crowds that gathered to play the mobile game as part of Pokemon Go Fest.

I was there, too, among those thousands, draining my phone battery out in the sun while catching hundreds of virtual creatures in Grant Park and other parts of the city.

During that mass gathering in early June, the game I’d been playing alone for the past year suddenly felt like a gigantic concert packed with fans as obsessed as I am. Or even more so. 

I hadn’t expected that. True, when Pokemon Go launched in 2016, it was a mobile gaming sensation. Phones in hand, players descended on parks and other public spaces to catch all those pocket monsters, in the form of augmented reality animations. For a while, it felt like everybody was playing Pokemon Go.

But then, as crazes do, Pokemon fever cooled down. People moved on. I stopped playing the game regularly not long after it debuted. 

Turns out the enthusiasm has been simmering all along, and it just takes something like Go Fest to bring things to a boil.

The event had been expected to attract 40,000 people per day. But according to the enthusiast site GoNintendo, more than twice that many (90,000) tickets were sold for the Grant Park event (players entered and left at staggered times), and over 717,000 players in Chicago were recorded catching nearly 62 million Pokemon during citywide play. Six couples got engaged at the event, proving that Pokemon Go may be a stealth dating app.   

Pokemon Go Fest 2026 was special because it marked the 10th anniversary of the game and the ninth anniversary of the first Go Fest, which also took place in Chicago. And it coincided with a Pokemon Fossil Museum exhibit at Chicago’s Field Museum, which provides a spectacularly detailed history of Pokemon evolution, complete with gigantic skeletons, remains trapped in amber and a very robust gift shop.

The weekend also included a US Men’s National Soccer Team match and a half-marathon. So many fans attended the various events that gameplay was suspended in some areas, including at the Field Museum.

Welcome back to Pokemon Go

Last year, I picked the game back up with some family members. Those of us who’d abandoned it came back with fierce devotion.

So much had been added to the game since I last played it — from trading with other players (even remotely) to user-generated routes to large-scale raids that sometimes require more than a dozen players. 

Players of Pokemon Go show off characters from the game they have to trade or are seeking out from others at Lincoln Park as part of an early-morning “Raid train.”

Omar Gallaga/CNET

At first, the changes were overwhelming, but the experienced group I joined gave helpful advice. At the same time, online videos, Wiki pages and some Google searching provided answers to the obstacles I encountered.

The game became a daily habit for our group. We exchanged gifts, traded lucky Pokemon and did lots and lots of walking. Pokemon Go Fest provided a great excuse to meet up, eat lots of local food, and play a game together we’d all been enjoying separately.

We bought one-day passes for the Grant Park 10th anniversary event and secured tickets to the Fossil Museum exhibit. Upon arrival in Chicago, we saw Pokemon fans everywhere, some wearing Eevee hats or Gengar shirts, toting Pikachu backpacks or doing full-blown cosplay.

Age didn’t seem to matter. Boomers, Gen Z players, little kids, they all had their phones out, spinning PokéStops and waiting to capture some rare mega Pokemon characters.

Playing Pokemon Go with friends and strangers

When Niantic created Pokemon Go, it emphasized the game’s real-world aspects. Niantic’s founder, John Hanke, who also helped create Google Maps and Google Earth, told me last year when I covered its sale (Pokemon Go and other Niantic games were acquired by Scopely) that the game focused on encouraging players to venture outside and explore.

Even playing Pokemon Go outside, however, can be isolating. You’re looking at your phone and dealing with virtual characters or remote players, not interacting with the people around you.

That wasn’t the case at Go Fest. 

With tens of thousands of locals and travelers all around us, we were suddenly in a very large club. Strangers who saw us playing at the coffee shop asked what we’d caught so far. Passersby yelled, “Great outfit!” to my sister-in-law, Linh Gallaga, for her Sylveon cosplay. Some pointed and smiled at the Excavator Pikachu keychain plushies we picked up at the Field Museum and wore out in public.  

Within our small group, meanwhile, we traded Pokemon, bought virtual supplies, strategized to maximize our game objectives and shared news updates. I spent about $30 on microtransactions, like premium raid passes and extra storage to hold more items and more captured Pokemon. Some in my group spent hundreds of dollars in preparation for Go Fest.

Players gather in Chicago’s Grant Park as part of the 2026 Pokemon Go Fest event.

Omar Gallaga/CNET

In search of Mega Pokemon characters

Our group had two leaders: One was Linh, who kept us in the loop about social media posts. The other was Jacob Crowe, who toted up those 26 miles of walking that weekend (and who’s also an in-law of mine, a little more removed). He’s so dedicated to the game that he participated in 225 group raid battles to capture Mewtwo, one of the major Mega Pokemon characters at Go Fest.

The goal wasn’t just to catch Mewtwo, but to capture its rare variations, such as a perfect-stat one, called a Hundo. Capture one that’s both a Hundo and also a Shiny variant, and you’ve got yourself a coveted Shundo Mewtwo — and a lot of jealous fellow players. A version of Mewtwo featuring a Chicago backdrop was also highly sought after.

Crowe and his wife, Maria, drove from Indianapolis, where they’d participated in local Pokemon raid events, but nothing like this.

“I knew it would be a lot of people, but I didn’t know it would be that many people,” he told me. 

He spent 18 hours each day playing Pokemon Go. He says he had a great time and wants to do it again. 

It was Crowe who led our group to a 5 a.m. “Raid Train” at Lincoln Park, ahead of the official Go Fest event at Grant Park we’d be participating in later. As soft rain started falling, we wandered the park, capturing all the Pokemon that we could and watching players trade and join raid battles. This wasn’t the main event. It was a social gathering and a preview of the big show to come later that day.

“Hundo! I got a Hundo!”

I wasn’t expecting to experience cognitive dissonance when I arrived at Grant Park with my group, but it happened as soon as I saw a gigantic pink inflatable Jigglypuff near the large park fountain. In the game, I think of Jigglypuff as tiny; here, the Pokemon was easily 10 feet tall.

Throughout the park, team banners, lures and spinning Pokestops were blown up to huge proportions, dotting a vast expanse with colorful landmarks.

A final challenge at Pokemon Go Fest was a giant group raid to capture Mewtwo.

Omar Gallaga/CNET

We snapped photos and started preparing our virtual supplies. A cloudy morning quickly gave way to a hot day. Once gameplay began, we saw people walking around with tiny umbrellas attached to their phones, both to reduce glare on their screens and to keep their devices from overheating in the sun.

Challenges required moving from zone to zone and completing tasks such as capturing 20 different kinds of Pokemon in a single area. Raid battles to catch bigger, stronger Pokemon were constant.

Pokemon theme music blasted across the park. People walked, swiping their screens to toss Poké Balls as they went. One half of a couple near us shouted, “Hundo! I got a Hundo!” and the two embraced as if they’d just found out they were having a baby.

We walked and walked and caught and caught until the finale: a big group battle with hundreds of players together trying to defeat Mega versions of Mewtwo. 

Everyone fighting did so as part of a “Unity Raid.” Part of the battle required players to raise their phones up into the air and then bring them swinging down. 

When the mega raid was over, the crowd let out a loud, “Wooooo!” It was over. We were each left to attempt to capture the prize with our allotted premiere Pokeballs. We all caught our Mewtwos.

The Pokemon Fossil Museum exhibit at Chicago’s Field Museum is an alternate history of Pokemon evolution. 

Omar Gallaga/CNET

Pokemon at the museum

We kept raiding and trading over the evening and the next day, but our next big event was a visit to the Fossil Museum.

Chicago’s Field Museum of Natural History is a real museum, with exhibits of actual fossils, but for the event, curators set up fossil exhibits of the various Pokemon characters. And they took their job seriously.

Far from a simple one-room pop-up, the carefully arranged exhibit features detailed descriptions and full skeletons of Pokemon characters, plus other artifacts like fossilized (fake) poop and Pokemon insects trapped in amber.

I felt bad for the parents of little kids who had to straddle the line between telling them that this exhibit isn’t real and letting those kids enjoy an incredibly imaginative presentation.

The exhibit was followed by a robust gift shop featuring only Pokemon merchandise and open exclusively to attendees. There was a five-item limit, and the hot item, limited to one per purchase, was an Excavator Pikachu plush. 

The exhibit runs through April 2027.

Pablo and Linh Gallaga visit with Jigglypuff at Pokemon Go Fest 2026 in Chicago. A ticketed event took place at Grant Park, attracting tens of thousands of Pokemon trainers.

Omar Gallaga/CNET

Pokemon Go Fest players: “They’re all so friendly”

By the end of the weekend, we were all exhausted. We were mentally and physically drained, like our phone batteries, from staring at our screens and keeping track of all our Shiny acquisitions.

We were amateurs, though. David Barnwell, an attendee who owns a dog-boarding business near Akron, Ohio, has been to Go Fest events with his wife in cities including Seattle, Miami and New York. He’s always been a collector, and says Pokemon Go’s focus on acquisition appeals to him. And he loves meeting different people who are into the game.

“We’re always amazed at the different kinds of people that you would never expect to be playing Pokemon Go that show up, and they’re all so friendly,” Barnwell said. 

But he also feels things have changed since last year’s Pokemon Go acquisition.

For one thing, Barnwell said, there aren’t any never-before-seen Pokemon released during the event anymore. And the event is more spread out, with citywide challenges that make it less centralized. 

“That’s really annoying. We liked it when it was all accessible by foot,” he said. “I appreciate you’re trying to get different people in different parts of the city or whatever it is you’re thinking you’re trying to do, but we don’t like that at all.”

His family’s attendance at future Go events will depend on whether the host city is one they want to visit. Tokyo, a return to Seattle and an event near the Grand Canyon are on their wish list.

As for our group, we’re already talking about hitting Go Fest next year, but it will also depend on everybody’s schedules and where the US event lands next. For the time being, we plan to keep playing and tending to our growing Pokemon collections. 

Categories: Gadgets

These AI Scams All Have Red Flags. Here’s How to Spot Them

In the past couple of years, I’ve noticed an uptick in scam emails that get past Gmail’s spam filters. Since I’m an author, the emails I get are usually from so-called book clubs, filled with empty praise for my writing and an offer to market my books for a (typically exorbitant) fee. 

Most of the time, these book clubs don’t actually exist. Sometimes, the book clubs do exist, but the person emailing me isn’t connected to them. The same scams are proliferating in the inboxes of every author I know. 

While I can’t 100% prove these fraudulent emails are generated by artificial intelligence, experts at McAfee confirmed my suspicions that scammers are increasingly relying on AI for speed, scale and personalization. 

“From deepfake audio and video impersonation scams to highly polished phishing, smishing and email campaigns that exploit fear, urgency and trust, these AI‑powered tactics are making scams more convincing and harder to spot than ever,” said Abhishek Karnik, head of threat research at McAfee.

More sophisticated AI scams could try to persuade you to buy fake services, click malicious links or download harmful files. This can lead to damaged devices, extortion, lost funds or even wholesale identity theft, causing massive emotional and financial stress. 

As these scams increase, it’s important that we learn how to identify them so you won’t become the next victim. 

How scammers are using AI

AI content generators use machine learning and natural language processing to create text instantly, whether for an article, social media post, advertisement or email. The software can create a personalized message easily by scraping specific content that could appeal to you directly. The book marketing emails I receive often pull words from one of my book blurbs and reorganize them to make it seem like the scammer is a fan.


Enlarge Image

The all-caps “PAUL” is one clue that this email is likely an AI-generated scam.

Dianna Gunn/CNET

Since it’s so easy to mass-create these emails with AI, the full scam comes later. Scammers wait to send attachments, links or prices for their fake services until you’ve responded enough to seem invested.

The combination of personalization and delayed delivery of the more suspicious elements makes these scam emails likely to bypass your spam filters. 

According to cybersecurity incident response analyst Taylor Peltzman, AI hasn’t changed the goal of scams, but it has made them more efficient and easier to execute. 

“AI can continuously rewrite messages, use legitimate services such as Google Drive or Microsoft 365, and construct multi-step attacks rather than relying on a single email,” Peltzman told me. “Organizations are more likely to trust links from widely used platforms, which makes these attacks harder to detect.” 

Scams come in all shapes and sizes

AI lends itself to social engineering scams, which use human psychology — things like trust, urgency or fear — to manipulate you into giving away personal or financial information. This is most often done by impersonating authority figures or trusted relatives, pitching you fake products or tricking you into false relationships. 

If you have any doubt, always pause before taking action. Don’t click on a link or divulge your sensitive information without confirming that the person on the other end is legit. 

Imposter scams

Cravetiger/Getty Images

Imposter scams are some of the most common to look out for. These typically come from someone pretending to be a distressed relative or an authority — such as banks, law enforcement or government agencies — in urgent need of either a payment or your personal information. Scammers can also impersonate more niche authorities, such as established professionals in your industry.

Impersonation scams are particularly insidious in the age of AI because of their ability to replicate actual humans in ways they couldn’t in the past. 

“One of the most concerning developments is the use of deepfake technology and voice cloning, which can mimic real people’s faces, voices and even writing style and tone,” Peltzman told me. “Fake voices are among the hardest to detect, as even imperfect voice clones can sound convincing in the right context.” 

Online shopping scams

Scammers will often create fake emails, ad listings on social media or entire websites to trick you into buying products or services, which often don’t even exist. Online shopping scams attempt to reel you in with unbelievably large discounts and falsified reviews of their products or services. Generative AI tools allow scammers to quickly create emails and websites for these purposes, making it easier than ever to craft these scams.

Pig butchering scams

Pig butchering scams encourage people to spend increasing amounts of money on seemingly lucrative schemes such as cryptocurrency. These scams often manufacture small wins at the beginning to get you to “invest” more. When your payment reaches a certain threshold — one that modern scammers can select by asking AI to predict your risk tolerance based on established patterns — the scammer disappears with your money.

Be wary of pig butchering scams, where an attacker starts by building trust with the target — either through friendship or romance.

Datos Insights

Romance scams

Some scammers create fake personas to build romantic relationships with people online. They’ll spend weeks or even months communicating with you and building trust. Once they’ve established this trust, they’ll tell you they’re in trouble and ask for financial help — then vanish into the ether with your hard-earned cash. Generative AI makes this easier than ever by allowing these scammers to quickly create personalized, optimized messages for each person they’re building a false relationship with.

Payment app scams

One of the most insidious ways scammers get your information is by sending fake invoices or money transfer requests, using urgent language to get you to send money before you can notice any red flags. Payment app scams sometimes use imposter scam tactics as well, pretending to be a real company or payment processor.

Delivery scams

These days, it’s common for folks to order multiple packages in a week and even forget some of what they’ve ordered. Delivery scams take advantage of this by sending falsified shipping alerts that claim you must pay a fee in order to receive a package you’ve ordered. If you’ve discussed your orders online, they can even use generative AI to create shipping alerts that match the language of existing delivery companies.

Lottery scams

Lottery scams declare you’ve won a lottery or other prize and demand either a processing fee or personal information before you can get your prize. Like payment app scams, lottery scams may attempt to make themselves look more legitimate by impersonating a real lottery or contest. Some may even go as far as using AI to generate entire websites to create a sense of legitimacy.

Charity scams

Scammers may pretend to be charities sending you texts or emails as part of a supposed fundraising campaign. They may create false charities for this purpose or pretend to be legitimate charities. AI search can make these scams even more insidious by helping scammers quickly find public posts about people donating to specific charities, uncovering their email addresses and creating communications in the style of those charities.

AI has made scammers more prolific than ever, but you can protect yourself

AI makes it much easier for bad actors to create highly sophisticated scams, making it more important than ever to understand how to identify red flags. 

You can protect yourself by learning how to identify a spam link and keeping your computer or phone safe from threats. We also recommend purchasing identity theft protection services if you have significant financial assets to protect.

Categories: Gadgets

How I Nailed These Tricky Macro Shots for a Major CNET Feature Story

My CNET colleague Katie Collins was putting together a superb feature around the repairability of wearable devices, in particular the Pixel Watch 4. It’s well worth a read, but my task was to produce the photos and video to accompany the story. From shooting close-up macro photos with specialist lenses to transforming my home into a studio to shoot the video, there was a lot for me to do. 

I’m thrilled with the results, and the images look great on the page. Here’s how I put it all together. 

Watch this: I Replaced the Screen on the Google Pixel Watch 4. More Wearables Should Be This Repairable

05:08

Macro photography: The camera equipment I used

While I love my Leica Q3 43 for out-and-about photography, my main camera for most of my studio product photography and macro work is my Canon R5. It’s high-resolution and has accurate autofocus and in-body stabilization, which can be a real boon. 

My secret weapon for this shoot was the DZO Films X-Tract probe lens. This specialist macro photography lens looks weirdly long and thin, but it lets me get super close-up on objects while still providing a wide-angle view. The result is dramatic macro images, so I used this lens pretty much exclusively for the “hero” images in the piece. You can see more about how I used it in my behind-the-scenes video, which is embedded below.

But the right lens can only take you so far. I also used a Zhiyun Molus G300 LED light with a wide, narrow strip box modifier on the front. This turns that small LED light source into a wide light, which gives a great spread over the watch. I angled this to get a clean-looking edge light on some images, or a more even flood of light in others. I accented this using a variety of reflectors to “bounce” that light back into the product — in some cases, even small pieces of paper were enough to help create a nice reflection on the shiny watch.

Macro photography: Taking the images

I’d already decided on a visual style for these images, with a stark, high-contrast aesthetic, somewhat reminiscent of Apple’s OS X-era product photography. I wanted the images to be eye-catching and actually illustrative of what’s going on to ensure they fit well within the article itself. 

The probe lens let me get close up on the subject. As I didn’t have enough hands free, I’d secured the pincers in place using multiple rigging arms and a grip that’s supposed to be used for holding test tubes in laboratories. The finished shot is below.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

To help achieve this, I used both static product imagery of the watch and my own hand coming into the frame using pincers to remove components like the battery or display. I mostly figure out a strong visual look for an image series in advance of a photoshoot. This can be one of the best ways to elevate your photos from simple snaps to something that stands out and tells a story. It takes a bit more time to think about, but the results will speak for themselves.

Once I had my scenes set up, I got the camera and the long probe lens into position and dialed in my settings: That’s usually around ISO 200 on my camera, an aperture between f16 and f32 on the lens and a shutter speed around 1/15 of a second. It’s quite slow, so I had to ensure the camera was locked down on a tripod to make sure there was no movement that would cause blur in the image. I used a remote shutter release cable so I didn’t have to touch the camera and risk moving it. 

The finished image. 

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

To ensure the whole product was perfectly sharp, I used a technique called focus stacking. This involved taking many images — usually around 20 — focusing first on the closest part of the watch and adjusting the focus with each image to move the focus point farther and farther away. I then stitched those images together using a dedicated piece of software called Helicon Focus. 

Finally, I took the focus-stacked shot into Adobe Photoshop for some retouching, including dust removal, color correction and, in some shots, removing the big LED softbox from the image. I also composited some images together, blending a frame of the watch with a separate frame of my hand using the pincers. While I sometimes like to try and take these images as a single shot, I simply didn’t have that many hands available at once, so I had to blend multiple images together. 

I used two pieces of white card as reflectors, bouncing some of the light from the overhead LED back into the shiny body of the watch.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Filming the feature video: More macro fun

Some of the clips in the video were shot much the same way as the still images above — I simply switched my camera to video mode and pressed record. But there was a lot more to do besides. 

The main thing to film was Katie’s piece to camera, where she (expertly) presented her script. For this, I shot using a BlackMagic Pocket Cinema Camera 6K Pro paired with a 35mm Arles Prime cinema lens from DZO Film. I used a pink paper backdrop (because I love the color) and used the same LED light as before as the main light on Katie’s face, with a SmallRig RC 450B LED as a fill light on the other side of her face to help soften the shadows and give a more even look to the scene.

I recorded the audio using two microphones: a Rode VideoMic NTG shotgun mic on a boom arm just out of shot above Katie’s head (wirelessly connected using a DJI Mic 2 transmitter) and a separate DJI Mic 2 transmitter used with its own built-in mic clipped to Katie’s shirt collar and hidden by her hair. 

To film Katie’s piece to camera I used a BlackMagic Cinema camera, two microphones and two large LED light sources.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

Then came the Pixel Watch 4 teardown section, which I filmed using much the same setup. I repositioned the lights and switched the 35mm prime lens for a 75mm DZOFilm Arles Prime cine lens to allow me to get a much closer-up view on the intricate work Katie was doing, without having to get the camera (or lens) in the way of her work. 

The video was then edited by expert CNET producer JD Christison, and finally, all of the pieces were ready to go. 

My favorite image from the series. This was a combination of around 20 focus-stacked images for the main body of the watch, with separate images shot of my hand in different positions. I then composited these together in Photoshop.

Andrew Lanxon/CNET

If that sounds like a lot of effort, it’s because it was. My work on this took place over multiple late nights and an entire weekend. Product and macro photography can be a precise form of photography, requiring a lot of setup and a huge amount of attention to detail. When you’re focusing so close up, every tiny adjustment makes a massive difference in your image, so there’s a vast amount of trial and error. 

And sure, it also requires a lot of equipment and a fair amount of space to set everything up. I’ve given over a large bedroom in my house to convert into a studio space for shooting photos and videos for CNET, so I don’t have to worry too much about making a mess. I installed specialist shelving and wall-mounted backdrop supports so I could use the admittedly compact space as a regular production studio. If you’re planning to recreate this sort of thing in your own home, be prepared for a lot of cleanup after each shoot.

But as this feature is a major piece for CNET, I wanted to ensure that the imagery we used looked as good as it can, so spending this amount of time and effort on these visuals is absolutely worth it. I’ve been a journalist at CNET for 15 years now, but it still gives me a great sense of pride to see my own images used in stories like this. 

Categories: Gadgets

If ‘Disclosure Day’ Comes, How Can We Trust Evidence of UFOs?

Steven Spielberg’s new sci-fi blockbuster Disclosure Day, which hit theaters June 12, explores what might happen when the world gets undeniable proof that we’re not alone in the universe. While the film is pure Hollywood, the possibility that we may one day see real evidence of UFOs is moving from science fiction toward scientific plausibility.

For the past couple of months, the federal government has been declassifying and publishing reports of UAPs, or unidentified anomalous phenomena, on a website operated by the Department of Defense. 

While the government’s disclosures haven’t provided any actual evidence of extraterrestrial life or alien spacecraft, they signal a shift from its previous stance of secrecy on the subject. The Pentagon’s real-world releases of strange sightings draw an obvious parallel to the movie’s plot.

Without spoiling too much, Disclosure Day starts in the middle of the action: A whistleblower played by Josh O’Connor has already stolen proof of the cover-up of alien contact, while a Kansas City TV anchor played by Emily Blunt suddenly gains strange new abilities. The pair spends much of the 2.5-hour movie on the run from a shadowy government organization that wants to keep the truth hidden.

Spielberg was inspired to make Disclosure Day following a groundbreaking 2017 New York Times story, which published military videos of UAP sightings and alleged a secret UAP program in the Pentagon. According to some government officials and experts, the NYT report helped reduce the stigma of sharing UFO incident reports, especially among service members.

In subsequent Congressional hearings, former Navy pilots gave eye-witness accounts of UAPs in the sky, and a former intelligence officer testified to the existence of a secret UAP crash-retrieval program, where nonhuman “biologics” were retrieved from crash sites.

The US House Oversight Committee’s Task Force on the Declassification of Federal Secrets held a hearing in September 2025 with witnesses who testified on UAPs, including the video shown here in the background.

Kevin Dietsch/Getty Images

I’ve looked through many of the UAP files released so far, and I haven’t found any proof of alien life, but they’re still interesting to read. Some of the documents date back to the Roswell crash era of the 1940s, one of the most famous alleged cases of a flying saucer recovery. Aliens or not, official military correspondence from 1948 that mentions “flying discs” remains a fascinating historical record.

The media’s interest, along with the government’s acknowledgment that it has long investigated UFOs, has helped move the topic beyond conspiracy books and online forums. In recent years, NASA commissioned an independent study team to examine UAPs, which produced a report (PDF) noting that the agency “should contribute to a comprehensive, government-wide approach to collecting future data.” Even the late Pope Francis addressed the idea that the discovery of aliens and religious faith need not contradict one another.

While the videos, documents and testimonies on UAP sightings are intriguing to watch and read, the materials still lack the empirical data to conclusively prove that extraterrestrial life has visited Earth. Still, the sightings continue to be debated, with some scientists pointing to other possible explanations, such as drones, satellites or weather phenomena — or even optical and infrared distortions. Many of the cases seem to point to more mundane, earthly origins.

As Carl Sagan wrote in The Demon-Haunted World, his 1995 book on critical thinking and the scientific method: “Everything hinges on the matter of evidence. The more we want it to be true, the more careful we have to be. No witness’s say-so is good enough.”

Have you ever seen a UFO?

Disclosure Day imagines what would happen if we were to definitely know that aliens are here. In the real world, the SETI Institute has been studying the stars for traces of life since 1984. Sagan briefly served on the board before he died in 1996. He even wrote the novel that inspired the 1997 sci-fi film Contact starring Jodie Foster, which popularized SETI. The institute has been taking the question of extraterrestrial life seriously for a long time, but hasn’t found any evidence of it yet.  

A previously confidential 1948 memorandum that mentions flying discs. 

Department of Defense

On June 5, the International Academy of Astronautics ratified an updated set of post-detection protocols, developed with input from SETI members, to address modern challenges in evaluating and verifying evidence of extraterrestrial intelligence. The new protocols will help govern how scientists announce evidence of extraterrestrial intelligence in today’s global media environment, which is far more complex than it was when the original protocols were last revised 15 years ago. 

Astrophysicist Michael Garrett, chair of the IAA SETI post-detection committee, told CNET that misinformation is one of the key reasons the protocols were updated. Artificial intelligence, deepfakes and social media engagement algorithms have made it harder than ever to tell what’s true from false on the internet. 

“Today, rumors, conspiracy theories, fabricated documents, and AI-generated images, audio and video can spread extremely quickly,” Garrett says. “Independent verification by the global scientific community remains the most effective way to establish credibility and maintain public trust.”


Enlarge Image

An image from a July 2025 video captured in the northeastern United States. An eyewitness observed an intense bright light hovering about 25 feet in the air over their backyard.

Department of Defense

Garrett also said two common misconceptions he hears are that the protocols assume extraterrestrial civilizations would be hostile or that researchers would try to keep a discovery secret.

“Neither is true,” Garrett said. “The protocols do not make assumptions about the intentions of extraterrestrial intelligence. Nor do they create any mechanism for secrecy.”

Instead, Garrett says the protocols emphasize openness and public accountability. 

“The updated protocols encourage researchers to make observational data, analysis methods and software tools publicly available wherever possible once a candidate signal has been verified,” Garrett said. So if scientists ever discover alien life in the real world, hopefully we won’t need a government whistleblower to get the word out.  

Maybe the truth isn’t out there

It’s entirely possible, maybe even likely, that we’ll never know what’s really out there. That hasn’t stopped decades of rampant speculation and a deep fascination with the topic. Sagan argued that many people believe in aliens because humans have historically looked for ways to fill gaps in mysteries and phenomena that go unexplained. 

An archival photograph depicting the lunar surface as seen from the Apollo 12 landing site. The image has been modified to highlight unidentified phenomena near the right edge of the frame.

Department of Defense

In 2021, Pew Research reported that 65% of Americans believe that intelligent life exists on other planets. In 2023, an Ipsos poll found that 42% of Americans believe in UFOs, and that 10% say they’ve actually seen one. Now that the government is releasing decades’ worth of UAP reports and sightings, it seems more likely than before that we might get proof we’re not alone. Or maybe not.

Sagan long warned about the dangers of ignoring scientific rigor and how seductive pseudoscience can be. Even when mundane reasoning can explain the fantastic, we’re often inclined to abandon our skepticism and ignore the boring explanation. 

“We’ve not yet found compelling evidence for life beyond the Earth,” Sagan wrote in The Demon-Haunted World over three decades ago. “We’re only at the very beginning of the search, though. New and better information might emerge, for all we know, tomorrow.”

Categories: Gadgets

You Might Be Eligible for a Payment From Google’s $135M Data Settlement. How to File a Claim

You could be one of the millions of American Android users eligible to receive a payment from Google’s $135 million lawsuit settlement. It affects people who’ve had Android phones going back nearly a decade, but you’ll want to sign up for a claim fast, because payments may not be guaranteed after Tuesday, June 23.

This class action lawsuit, Joseph Taylor v. Google (PDF), alleges Google “effectively forces users to subsidize its surveillance by secretly programming Android devices to constantly transmit user information,” which means the Android OS was automatically sending Google user data from their carriers, without users knowing or being able to opt out. According to the lawsuit, this surveillance occurred even when people shut down apps or disabled their location tracking.

The lawsuit also makes another significant allegation: that Google’s data-collection practices constitute a crime called conversion. Conversion occurs when one party takes property from another with the intent to deprive them of it. No prior conversion case has ever settled for a sum as large as $135 million.

Google has denied wrongdoing, and the court has not ruled whether the company violated any laws. Regardless, Google has agreed to settle with class members, and the court has preliminarily approved the settlement payment.

“We are pleased to resolve this case, which mischaracterized standard industry practices that keep Android safe. We’re providing additional disclosures to give people more information about how our services work,” said Google spokesperson José Castañeda.

Where do I go to file my claim?

You’ll need info from a letter or email you should have received to sign up for a claim.

Tyler Lacoma/CNET

The official settlement website is live now, but payment is subject to the court’s final approval meeting. Note that you will need to submit a Notice ID, which you should have received in a letter or email if you’re eligible.

The final approval is currently scheduled for June 23. The meeting will confirm the payment amount, allocate attorneys’ fees, and create a distribution plan to ensure the money reaches eligible class members. Any changes to the scheduling of the final approval meeting will be reflected on the settlement website.

If you fit all of the criteria to be a class member in this case, you’re automatically eligible to receive a part of the settlement payment sometime after the final approval hearing. But you’re not guaranteed to receive any money unless you select a preferred method of payment on the settlement website by June 23.

The lawsuit could have significant implications for data privacy and other data collection practices. It will also force a change to Google’s terms of service. The company has agreed to obtain more explicit consent from Android users when first using new phones, including a toggle button to turn off certain types of data collection and clearer disclosure of data collection practices.

You’ll have to fill out your payment details on the official website in order to qualify for the settlement payment.

Celso Bulgatti/CNET

Which Android users can be part of the Google settlement?

You may have an Android phone, but that doesn’t automatically make you eligible to claim money from this suit. While the settlement payment and distribution plan haven’t been confirmed, there’s a very specific outline detailing who is a settlement member.

In order to join, you must meet all of the following criteria:

  1. Be a living person in the United States or its territories.
  2. Used a mobile phone with Android OS and a cellular data plan anytime between Nov. 12, 2017 and this settlement’s final approval.
  3. Did not participate in the class-action lawsuit Csupo v. Google LLC (PDF). This case centered on the same allegations but involved only California residents. You can not be a class member in both suits.

Android users had the option to opt out of any payments, but this choice ended on May 29. The option existed for those who wanted to pursue their own lawsuits against Google for this data surveillance. Joining the class action lawsuit would waive this ability.

How much will the Android data harvesting settlement pay?

While we don’t know exactly how much each class member will receive from the settlement, there is an upper bound. Payments are capped at $100 per person, so don’t expect to get more than that.

A portion of the settlement money will first be allocated to attorneys’ fees, and then the rest of the cash will be equally distributed to class members. If any money is left over after the first round of distributions, it will be portioned out in a smaller second round of settlement payments to eligible members of the settlement class.

Even if you’re a class member, you still have to input your preferred payment details via the official settlement website in order to guarantee the money will be distributed correctly.

Another settlement involving Google’s ad targeting

This isn’t the only class-action suit alleging that Google’s ad targeting practices have crossed the line. Google recently agreed to a $68 million preliminary settlement in another case, this one involving Google Assistant (now being replaced with Gemini for Home).

Users alleged that smart devices used Google Assistant to listen to them without their activation, leading to ad targeting based on information they hadn’t willingly shared. In that settlement, payments will be made automatically. No claim form is required to receive a payment.

Categories: Gadgets

Flipper unveils a Linux-powered networking gadget built for hackers and tinkerers

Flipper Devices, maker of the Flipper Zero hacking device, today announced a new gadget called Flipper One that has multiple network connectivity chops and can act as a Linux PC (is this the year?). The company has sold over a million Flipper Zero units and has generated over $150 million in sales. However, the new device is not a successor, as it operates on a different layer than the Flipper Zero, the company said.

The Flipper Zero device is popular in the hacker community, which can connect to radios like Bluetooth, RFID, NFC, a sub-1GHz transceiver, and infrared. The device could act like a key fob or an entry pass but could also be used to spam nearby iPhones.

Meanwhile, the new Flipper One device relies on network connectivity through 2x Gigabit Ethernet, USB Ethernet (5 Gbps), and Wi-Fi 6E (2.4/5/6 GHz). What’s more, the device has an M.2 port, which can be used to connect a modem for 5G connectivity or other devices like SDR modules, AI accelerators, SSDs (NVMe or SATA), and Wi-Fi cards via adapters. The device is still in development, and the company is merely announcing the project at the moment.

The device will run two processors along with a 8 GB RAM. The first is an eight-core RK3576 chip that runs open Linux along with a Mali-G52 GPU and an NPU to run local AI models.

Image Credits:Flipper Devices

The company said that it worked with open source software consulting firm Collabora to push this chip’s support into the mainline Linux Kernel, so anyone can download it from Kernel.org and tinker with it.

The second chip is a two-core Raspberry Pi RP2350 microcontroller. This powers display, buttons, and touchpad; LEDs; and the power subsystem — even when the Linux part of the device is turned off, users can operate the device.

Flipper Devices CEO Pavel Zhovner said that the company is also developing its own Linux-based flavor. He said in a blog that while Raspberry Pi OS is fluid and he enjoys using it, it is hard to do a clean factory reset after installing packages unless you re-flash the SD card for a new project. The Flipper OS, which is currently in a concept stage, will allow users to access profiles with different preconfigured packages and settings. By doing this, users can play around with software and go back to a clean copy without swapping or flashing SD cards.

As part of the development, the company is also making a FlipCTL interface to control small-screen LCDs on devices like Flipper One with D-pad and touch controls.

Image Credits:Flipper Devices

The company said that with network connection drivers, users can use Flipper One as a router, a VPN gateway, or a bridge between. Plus, they can plug in a monitor, along with a keyboard and a mouse through a USB Hub to make for a Linux desktop or use it as an on-the-go media box through its HDMI 2.1 port with support for 4K streaming at 120 Hz. Users can also run local AI models to operate the device, generate configs, and get useful tips without an internet connection.

Flipper Devices has just announced the device and overall roadmap of how it could be used. There are still a lot of missing software pieces to enable all the mentioned features. For instance, NPU for AI and hardware video decoding lacks mainline kernel support. Both FlipperOS and FlipperCTL are concepts at the moment. The team has yet to train offline LLMs that would help users with configs.

The company is inviting developers to join the community and develop parts of the software that could be used to ship the final device. It said that the final details of the consumer launch would be announced in the future, but the device is likely to cost less than $350 for the base configuration without cellular modules.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

‘From’ EPs Talk Season 4’s Man in Yellow and Murderous Dolls

Warning: This article contains spoilers for Season 4 of From on MGM Plus.

Between giant, deadly dolls and scheming, yellow-suited villains, Season 4 of MGM Plus’ horror-mystery series From has introduced more obstacles and nightmare fuel for those still trapped in the show’s relentlessly scary town.

As Season 4 of From nears its finale, I spoke with creator and executive producer John Griffin, showrunner Jeff Pinkner (Lost, Fringe) and director Jack Bender (Lost, Game of Thrones) about the show’s scary dolls, the infiltrating Man in Yellow and “always” keeping fans in mind. The fifth and final season of From is expected to premiere in 2027.

“At the end of the day, our goal was never to tell a bleak story,” Griffin said. “And that doesn’t mean that it can’t be a hard story to watch or a story full of sacrifice and sadness. Whatever it ends up being, our goal is to reward the audience for taking this journey with us.”

The second-to-last episode of From Season 4 debuts Sunday in the MGM Plus app and on the MGM Plus linear channel at 9 p.m. ET and 9 p.m. PT.

Q: This season of From has felt a bit different for me as a viewer because I know a big secret the From residents do not: the Man in Yellow is walking among them as Sophia. What was the thought process behind letting the audience in on that secret from the very start of Season 4?

Griffin: A big part of it was, you know, looking at our villain, and the type of villain that we have and the role that he’s played behind the scenes in this world and in the lives of these people. It felt like, ‘How would he most enjoy this next phase of the game?’ And how would the audience most enjoy sort of like watching him operate, so that he wasn’t so much like an indistinct presence on the periphery of the show. It felt like, ‘Ooh, well, the last thing the people in town would expect is to have this thing living among them.’

Huge dolls terrorize Fromville residents in Season 4.

MGM Plus/X

Q: From the original monsters that come out at night, to Season 4’s giant killer dolls, horrific creatures and visuals are a big part of From. Can you tell me more about bringing these scary dolls to life this season and how you come up with new ways to terrify viewers?

Jack Bender: I will say that the dolls, when I first read them, I went, ‘Oh my god, OK.’ Because so often Jeff and John and the writers come up with stuff, and I go, ‘OK, how do we pull this off in a unique way that isn’t going to be goofy and is going to be terrifying?’ We looked at a lot of pictures of period dolls and other things. It was also our designer and production designer, actually, Matt Likely and Rachael Grant, who collaborated. Eventually, Rachael came up with the overstuffed look of the dolls. 

In the process of seeing the dolls alive as standing, full figures, I realized that seeing them run around might look a little goofy. Just because they’re lumbering and they’re big and they’re soft. And so the whole idea of having them waterlogged from the lake, and the seaweed dripping, and all that stuff really helped. And the material sagging and a little ripped helped keep it ragged and more frightening. And then, of course, our vis[ual] effects people with the creation, which Jeff and John, and we were all involved in — the creation of those teeth and everything hit a home run. So, like most things on our show, it’s a great collaboration inspired by what the crazy [stuff] Jeff and John and our other writers come up with.

Q: Boyd faces a dilemma this season of protecting people in town or putting them in danger for a theory that could get them closer to going home. What was the thinking behind depicting Boyd’s fear for his townspeople this season and the choice he eventually makes?

Jeff Pinkner: I think for Boyd, the bind he is constantly in, and the bind that is going to become more acute for him as we go forward, is protecting his family versus protecting the town. And there’s a debate to be had. When the show started, Donna’s attitude was, ‘Tomorrow’s not guaranteed, we enjoy today.’ That was sort of the philosophy of Colony House. And Boyd’s attitude, which was very [much] in opposition to that, was, ‘We stay safe today so that one day we may go home.’ Donna was like, ‘Well, going home isn’t guaranteed, so let’s enjoy today.’ 

Boyd and Donna in From, Season 4.

Chris Reardon/MGM Plus

And over the course of these four seasons, that’s sort of been the ping-pong debate. ‘Do we try to go home, risk it? This place clearly wants us to suffer. Maybe the hope of going home is our suffering.’ We try to always relate this to what would you do if you were in this position? What do you value? Sort of the premise of the show from the beginning is.Your life, the world falls apart — who are you in that vacuum?

And for Boyd, that’s always the question at the front of his mind, ‘What’s the right move here?’ And it’s an impossible choice, and the more impossible it is, the more alive Harold [Perrineau] becomes, which is our great weapon, you know? One of the incredible joys of this show is our cast and writing for any of them. But writing for Boyd, specifically, and Harold, that’s the dilemma. What do you do? Do you risk it or do you not?

Q: I know that I would love to see all of the citizens of Fromville escape after everything that’s gone down. But this show doesn’t seem like the kind where there would be a happy ending inevitably, or you know, that might not even be possible. Are you keeping fans in mind as you craft the final season?

Griffin: A thousand percent.

Pinkner: We always keep the fans in mind. From the beginning, our premise was that the show can’t be hinged on a mystery and what’s the final answer, because that’s not the way to ultimately satisfy the fans. If you’re building a show based on, ‘What’s the answer?,’ either it’s too elusive for the audience to guess — and then they get frustrated — or it’s too easy for the audience to guess, and then they get frustrated, ‘Wait, that’s all it was?’ 

So, our premise has always been, we’re going to reveal all the answers. The question is, then, what do the characters do about it? Can they survive? Who will leave? Who might get trapped here? Will anybody be able to leave? And we always, always, always write from the perspective of, what is the audience engaging with? What are they frustrated by? What do they want to happen? What are they afraid might happen? And sometimes we use that audience frustration on purpose, sometimes we lean right into it. But when it comes to the way we make the show, it’s always with the audience in mind.

Fromville residents gather at Colony House in Season 4.

Chris Reardon/MGM Plus

Griffin: Our goal is never to punish the audience, punish the characters or punish ourselves. To me, the show has always been best summed up by the speech that Henry has to Tabitha in the basement of his house, while we’re also watching Tian-Chen’s funeral. And Henry says, recounting Miranda’s words, you know, ‘They had nothing to hold onto, so they held onto each other.’ As bleak and as difficult as this show can sometimes be, to me it’s always been a show about hope, because it’s a story about people with nothing to hold onto that are reaching out for each other. 

And that doesn’t mean that it’s going to be a happy ending, that doesn’t mean that it’s going to be a sad ending. People are going to struggle. The audience isn’t going to get everything they want. The characters aren’t going to get everything they want. But at the end of the day, our goal was never to tell a bleak story. And that doesn’t mean that it can’t be a hard story to watch or a story full of sacrifice and sadness. Whatever it ends up being, our goal is to reward the audience for taking this journey with us.

Bender: What I will say is that my task was always — and always expressed it to you guys, to John and Jeff — ‘OK, how do we make this real?’ You know, what if this were us? The ‘what if’ question, I think, is essential for great storytelling. You know, whatever the world is, whatever the obstacle course that those characters are tortured through, or have to go through. But the fact is, we’ve always tried to keep it human and real in terms of how they face these issues.

Categories: Gadgets

Finnish phone maker HMD bundles Indian AI chatbot onto new smartphone in push to reach local market

Finnish phone maker HMD today launched its first smartphone, called the Vibe 2 5G, which comes preloaded with Indian AI company Sarvam’s chatbot Indus. Both companies had first announced the partnership during the India AI summit held in New Delhi in February.

The Indus app is powered by Sarvam’s locally trained 105-billion-parameter model — a measure of the AI’s scale and sophistication — and launched at the AI summit. The app supports 22 Indic languages and mid-sentence code-switching (the ability to fluidly mix languages mid-conversation, like switching between Hindi and English), which helps the assistant better understand the context of a query. Currently, the application doesn’t support offline usage, and it doesn’t have any integrated feature with the device to invoke the AI assistant through a shortcut.

The partnership is a potential testing ground for both companies to gauge the appetite for an India-focused chatbot.

“With this partnership, the first thing we want to do is get the Indus app to consumers,” said Ravi Kunwar, HMD’s CEO and vice president for India and APAC, in an interview with TechCrunch. “Once they start using it, we will move to phase two to focus on driving more traction and stickiness. Right now, by preloading the app, we want to be more accessible to users,” he said.

The Vibe 2 5G is a midrange Android phone with a 6,000 mAh battery and a price tag of ₹10,999 ($114). Kunwar added the devices in the Vibe series of smartphones will also get the chatbot, and the company is also expected to launch a feature phone with Sarvam AI integration in the coming months.

That feature phone integration may ultimately prove more significant for both companies. HMD held a 4% share of India’s feature phone market in 2025, but its smartphone share was negligible — the company doesn’t even appear in the top 15, according to analyst firm IDC.

While it’s early days for Indus, the download numbers reflect that. Nearly three months after its launch, the app has been downloaded just over 293,000 times in India across platforms, according to Appfigures. By comparison, ChatGPT was downloaded 43.9 million times in the country.

It’s a big gap, but the strategy behind the HMD deal may matter more than the early numbers. Bundling a regional AI assistant with affordable hardware — particularly feature phones — is one of the more direct distribution plays available in a market as large and linguistically diverse as India, where English-language AI tools have limited reach. For investors and operators watching how AI adoption gets seeded in emerging markets, this partnership is worth tracking.

Sarvam has been one of India’s marquee AI startups. Beyond the Indus app launch, the company has focused on enterprise partnerships, especially for voice-based solutions. It is on track to become one of the most funded AI startups in the country, with reports suggesting a funding round of $300 million at a $1.5 billion valuation is in the works.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Yes, I Was Wrong About Meal Kits. This Is the Service That Changed My Mind

When I’d hear people rave about meal kits, I assumed the hype was overblown and that they weren’t worth the cost. As a vegetarian, I also figured meal delivery services wouldn’t cater to my diet, so I never bothered trying them.

However, once I started testing vegan meal kits for CNET, one service in particular made me realize I was wrong. It’s the one I’d spend my own money on. That’s why Blue Apron, which doesn’t require a subscription, is CNET’s favorite meal kit service. This is why it’s my top pick.

The vegetarian recipes don’t phone it in

Earlier this year, I tried four vegetarian meal kits from Blue Apron, which are as low as $8 per serving. All of them were delicious: roasted cauliflower and farro salad, white bean and veggie grain bowls, loaded veggie burritos and Thai-style curry noodles. I even saved the recipe cards and have re-created the farro salad and grain bowls on my own. 

I later tried pimento cheeseburgers with black bean patties, peanut udon stir-fry, roasted red pepper pasta and spicy mushroom and onion quesadillas. Again, absolutely delicious. No notes on taste. However, the pimento cheeseburger meal kit was missing one crucial ingredient, the pickled peppadew peppers, but I had a substitute on hand.

The pimento cheeseburger with a black bean patty. I added my own tomato and arugula to the burger, and broccoli on the side, for more veggies and greens.

Anna Gragert/CNET

I could tell that whoever created these recipes didn’t skimp on flavor or rely on old standbys like tofu or extra spice. I also felt that these dishes offered a good variety of fresh-tasting vegetables, greens, grains and different protein options, with the ability to adjust the sodium and spice levels to your liking. 

As someone who regularly cooks at home to avoid spending extra on eating out or takeout, I was genuinely inspired by these meal kits, particularly by the sauces that brought the recipes together. 

The peanut udon stir-fry topped with a fried egg.

Anna Gragert/CNET

Prices are on the affordable end

You’d think that with more flavor and creative recipes, you’d have to pay a higher price. However, Blue Apron is one of the most affordable meal kits we tested, earning a spot on our list of the cheapest meal delivery services we love. So if you’re one of the 61% of US adults who are concerned about the cost of meal kits, Blue Apron could be a good option — especially if you’re looking to waste less food or save on going out to eat.

No subscription required

Since I first tested Blue Apron, the brand has also completely revamped its model, eliminating its subscriptions in favor of à la carte meals. (Don’t worry, if you liked the subscription, you can still opt for it and get discounts with the Autoship and Save feature.) 

Along with over 100 meals per week, double what it had before, Blue Apron also has two new product lines in addition to its meal kits:

  • Dish by Blue Apron: Pre-made meals that are ready in at least 5 minutes, requiring no prep. Starting at $7 per service.
  • Assemble and Bake: One-pan meals requiring at most 5 minutes of hands-on prep with pre-chopped or prepared ingredients. Starting at $11 per serving.

The ingredients for the pesto gnocchi bake. It also comes with the tray. 

Anna Gragert/CNET

I enjoyed the new premade and ready-to-bake recipes

During my earlier testing, I tried the premade four-cheese enchiladas with rice and sweet and spicy tofu udon noodles. Although I enjoyed them both and found them filling, I wouldn’t say they were better than the meal kits. 

More recently, I tried two Assemble and Bake dishes: the pesto gnocchi bake and the baked creamy mushroom and kale pasta. While they were tasty and filling like the Dish meals, and did save me time in the kitchen, they were a bit too cheesy for my taste. So again, the meal kits would be my top pick.

What the pesto gnocchi bake looks like after it’s been baked.

Anna Gragert/CNET

It’s also important to note that Blue Apron’s shipping cost is $11 per box. However, with a Blue Apron Plus premium membership, which costs $8 per month, you can enjoy free shipping on all orders, in addition to unlimited Tastemade Plus streaming and exclusive deals. If you plan to order Blue Apron at least once a month, this membership would pay for itself. 

What I recommended for vegan meal delivery

For dietary restrictions, Blue Apron only offers vegetarian options in addition to its meat- and seafood-based dishes, with about five vegetarian meal kits per week, up to four servings. There are at least two vegetarian assemble-and-bake meals and at least two premade, vegetarian Dish by Blue Apron meals per week.

If you’re looking for vegan meal kits, I would recommend Green Chef. For prepared vegan meal delivery, Mosaic Foods is great, while Thistle was my favorite for fresh vegan meals (though it is on the pricey side). Purple Carrot’s meal kits are also popular, as they’re 100% vegan, but in terms of how the recipes tasted, I preferred Green Chef. For vegetarian meal kits, it’s still Blue Apron for me.

My final thoughts on Blue Apron

The only issue I’ve had with Blue Apron is that my last order didn’t make it on the scheduled delivery date. I waited a few days to inquire via email and received a response stating that it would take time to process my request because of the large volume of emails. Then, I messaged Blue Apron’s virtual chat and, after waiting for about 45 minutes, was told that my order had been cancelled but I had never received a notification. I was refunded and able to order again with no issue, but I’d recommend keeping track of your order and reaching out immediately if you don’t receive it when expected.

When it comes down to it, if I were to spend my own hard-earned cash on a meal delivery service, I would choose Blue Apron’s meal kits. They have vegetarian options that aren’t sad, are more affordable than others on the market and, most important, they taste delicious enough that I would (and have) re-created the recipes on my own. I might as well just get the ready-to-go meal kits next time and save myself the extra effort.

Categories: Gadgets

We tried Google’s AI glasses and they’re almost there

At the Google I/O developer conference this week, we had the opportunity for a brief hands-on with Google’s upcoming AI-powered glasses — not the audio-only glasses that the company said will begin shipping this fall but rather the glasses that offer a combined audio and visual experience.

First announced at last year’s event, these Android XR glasses offer an in-lens display that puts helpful information in front of you, overlaid on top of the real world. This includes widgets that could display things like the weather, walking directions, Uber pickup details, live translation, and more — even widgets you designed yourself using AI.

Image Credits:Andrej Sokolow/picture alliance (opens in a new window) / Getty Images

The glasses will also pair with iOS and Android phones, the company noted, both in the audio-only format and in the future display version.

The eyewear with the display is meant to be the next step beyond the first generation of audio glasses coming out later this year. The glasses were developed in partnership with Warby Parker, Gentle Monster, and Samsung, blending Google’s technology with their brands’ design aesthetics.

The glasses we tested, meanwhile, were still very much a prototype, although one polished enough to now be tested externally. The reps demoing the XR glasses explained that the prototype allowed Google to not worry about some of the cosmetic details related to different styles and shapes, so it could instead focus on experimenting with the display technology more freely and its impacts on battery life. That means these spectacles are very different from any future shipping version of glasses, in terms of fit, shape, dimensions, and attention to detail. Rather, it’s more like being able to experiment with the “insides” of the glasses, while still in a basic, comfortable frame.

The shipping version of the glasses will be able to detect when the glasses are placed on your head and taken off, but the ones we tried didn’t have this feature.

Image Credits:Google

To activate Gemini, you perform a two-second press on the right side of the glasses’ frame. A startup chime sounds, letting you know that Gemini is on and listening. In the demo version, starting Gemini also starts the camera at the same time, but the shipping version will allow the user to configure whether they want to turn on the camera when Gemini starts.

In an initial test, we played music via the glasses by asking Gemini to play a favorite artist. The venue was too noisy to evaluate the sound quality, unfortunately, as the music was dialed up to the maximum volume and was still relatively hard to hear crisply and in detail. But the initial impression from this limited experience was that the glasses would not be a great substitute for higher-quality earbuds, though they would do if you just wanted some music while you were outside, walking, hiking, or doing chores around the house. The advantage of not having earbuds in is that you can more easily hear someone talking, compared with the transparency mode experiences on devices like Apple’s AirPods.

To turn the music off, tap once on the side of the frame, around the middle, as if tapping on your temple.

Image Credits:Google

In the second test, we pressed the photo capture button to take a photo of a person. The display was off, so the picture was transferred to our phone and watch. (You’ll later be able to capture video with a long press, but this option was not available to test with the prototype. In the case of video, you would see a video thumbnail preview instead of a photo.)

You can also simply ask Gemini to take a photo without having to press the photo button, and perform some sort of AI manipulation on the result. For instance, you can say something like, “Take a photo and turn the person into an anime character.” The photo is sent to the phone, then to the Gemini and Nano Banana servers, and then returns in its edited version.

At the Google I/O venue, where Wi-Fi was under a heavy load, the round-trip took around 45 seconds.

Image Credits:Andrej Sokolow/picture alliance (opens in a new window) / Getty Images

With the display enabled, you’ll see a simple home screen appear in your field of view. The demo version had some widgets preloaded that showed the weather and a countdown to Google’s I/O event. You could also build quick launchers into specific apps, like Google Maps or Translate, if those were among your main use cases for the glasses.

The prototype had just one display over the right eye, but the platform can support both single and dual displays, as well as audio-only glasses. The image itself was a little fuzzy, but we chalked this up to our prescription contacts, which involve wearing one lens optimized for distance on one side, and one optimized for near vision on the other. When we closed one eye, the image came into better focus, but the experience almost immediately left us with some eye strain above the right eye, and it’s unclear if the prescription was entirely to blame.

Image Credits:Andrej Sokolow/picture alliance (opens in a new window) / Getty Images

One of the best demos was of the language translation experience on the glasses, which is backed by the Google Translate app on the phone. One of the demonstrators spoke rapid Spanish, and the glasses automatically detected the language and showed the text in English on the display, while Gemini spoke English in our ear. We could see world travelers buying the glasses for this experience alone.

We should note that Translate will work on the audio-only glasses, too, just without the text being displayed on the glasses. Instead, you could see the transcription on the phone, if needed, in addition to the real-time audio feedback.

Another demo involved using the glasses to navigate. While obviously we couldn’t go out on a walk and leave the venue to test its accuracy, we could get an idea of how it works. You can start the Google Maps experience by asking Gemini to navigate to a destination — which can even be as vague as something like “the nearest coffee shop.”

Gemini will activate Google Maps on the phone, and after a brief delay while the experience loads, the glasses will display turn-by-turn directions. When you are looking forward, your next turn information will be displayed. But if you need to get oriented in space, look down at the ground to see your blue dot on a map. You can also turn to the left and right to rotate in space, just like you would try to get the blue dot to point the right way on your phone.

Then when you look up again, you can keep walking without the map being in your way.

Because the experience is tied to Google Maps on your phone, saved destinations like “home” and “work” will already be available.

Image Credits:Google

We were also able to briefly use the glasses to identify a variety of objects in our view and ask questions about them. The glasses initially struggled to identify the replica of a Monet painting on a shelf in front of us, but that’s because the prototype didn’t automatically enable the camera — it had to be turned on again from the app. Still, it took a couple of questions before Gemini said that it looked like a Monet even after we moved in closer to focus on the Monet signature in the bottom left.

Other tests were smoother, as the glasses immediately identified the plant on the shelf and answered questions about different recipes in a book. Still, these were things you could do today with Google Lens (or other AI models integrated in chatbot apps), though we suppose it’s interesting to be able to do them without having to pull your phone out.

Google says it will have more to share about its Android XR display glasses later this year, when it expands its trusted tester program.

Image Credits:Google

In the meantime, the company believes that audio will suffice for some users’ needs, which is perhaps a smart way to spin the fact that it doesn’t have its display glasses ready, despite the competition from Meta and Snap on this front.

Like the display version, the audio glasses also provide access to Google’s Gemini AI, which you hear privately through the glasses’ frame speakers. You can do things like listen to music through the glasses, press a button to take a photo, make a call, or tap into your phone apps from these glasses, as you can on the future display versions.

Tapping into other third-party apps wasn’t among the items we demoed, but the glasses will allow users to tell Gemini to do things like “take the ingredients from this recipe and add them to my shopping list.”

In another example that Google showcased during the event’s keynote, the glasses could see a meal that the wearer was cooking on the stove and offer feedback about the meal, like whether the meat was fully done yet.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Strands Hints, Answer and Help for June 21 #840- CNET

Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.

Today’s NYT Strands puzzle was a bit challenging, but the words make sense once you figure out the theme. Some of the answers are difficult to unscramble, so if you need hints and answers, read on.

I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story. 

If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.

Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far

Hint for today’s Strands puzzle

Today’s Strands theme is: That’s included!

If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: More than just a bed.

Clue words to unlock in-game hints

Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:

  • FAST, FATS, FATE, HATE, SATE, RENT, TERN, TALE, THAT, LAST, LATS

Answers for today’s Strands puzzle

These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:

  • INTERNET, LAUNDRY, SAFE, FRIDGE, BREAKFAST

Today’s Strands spangram

The completed NYT Strands puzzle for June 21, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

Today’s Strands spangram is HOTELAMENITIES. To find it, start with the H that’s three letters down on the far-left vertical row, and wind down and over.

Categories: Gadgets

I tried Amazon’s Bee wearable and am both intrigued and slightly creeped out

I recently had the opportunity to test out a wearable from Bee, the AI wrist gadget that Amazon acquired last year and has since updated with a number of new features.

Like other AI wearables, Bee is designed as a kind personal assistant: it records, transcribes, and summarizes the user’s conversations throughout the day, providing an ongoing note-taking capability that’s useful if you’re forgetful or just want to be more organized about your life. If you sync it with your calendar, it can also send you alerts and reminders about things you’re supposed to do throughout the day.

TechCrunch has written about Bee before, and the way it works is pretty simple: the user powers it up, puts it on, syncs it with the Bee mobile app, and enters some basic personal information. Bee has a built-in recorder that can be turned on and off by clicking the wearable’s button. When Bee is recording, a green light flashes. When it’s not, that green light goes off. After a conversation has been recorded, the app will create an automated summary that is easy to read, as well as an entire transcription of the conversation.

Your mileage may vary on how exciting (or not) this whole conceit is. The problem for me is that I am something of a privacy enthusiast. In a world where the average person is beset from all sides by constant digital surveillance, I appreciate any opportunity I can get to not be recorded. Therefore, the idea of walking around with an eavesdropping gizmo strapped to my wrist 24/7 was not particularly appealing.

Yet, even I have to admit that — in the right context — Bee could have a lot of potential to help organize your life.

Bee really comes through in the context of professional engagements. If your day is full of meetings and you have trouble keeping it all straight, Bee could be a moderately competent assistant.

During a business-related phone call this week, I activated Bee after getting confirmation that I could record our meeting. Afterward, the app faithfully regurgitated a summary of the conversation, helpfully breaking down each segment of our talk so that I could review it later without having to re-listen to our entire conversation. This was undeniably helpful, although it should be noted that this isn’t something that’s markedly different than those offered by other transcription services, like Otter or Granola and others, which also offer transcriptions and auto-generated summaries.

That said, you could envision a situation in which a professional who has to navigate between various meetings throughout the day would be well-served by this device. You could just keep Bee running throughout the day and, later, review the conversation summaries for anything you’re not clear about.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Bee does a relatively good job at summarizing conversations, but the actual transcripts offered by the wearable can be a bit of a mess. Previous critics have noted that you usually have to manually enter the names of other speakers, as Bee doesn’t always know who is talking. During my conversation, I noticed that it had also omitted certain sections of our chat — nothing huge, but it wasn’t a complete account of everything that had been said.

I also took Bee to my semi-weekly movie night with my friends and left it running throughout the night. Given the fact that we watched Reservoir Dogs, I was mildly afraid that the wearable would mistake all of the vulgar carnage for real-life bloodshed and potentially trigger some sort of internal alarm. However, Bee knew — basically — what was happening. The wearable figured out that we were watching a movie and, in the summary of events afterward, the wearable labeled the conversation “Tarantino Film Scene Analysis.”

While Bee shows early promise as a professional tool, I would not want this thing recording me in my personal life. Weirdly enough, Bee has largely been marketed as a product for personal use. To be comfortable with that, you have to be comfortable with Bee having access to a majority of both your offline and digital life.

Indeed, to work well, Bee needs expansive mobile permissions — including access to your location, photos, phone contacts, calendar, and mobile notifications. You can also share your health data with it — should you, for whatever reason, want it to know about your sleep patterns or your resting heart rate.

The large accumulation of data Bee collects is stored in the cloud, which — again, for the digital privacy enthusiast — presents its own concerns. In a message to tech YouTuber Becca Farsace, Bee apparently unveiled a demo of the device running entirely locally. Were the company able to produce such a device, I would be thoroughly impressed — and might even consider buying one. That said, Amazon hasn’t offered any update on those plans.

As for Bee’s digital privacy protections, the company says that it offers encryption to protect user data — both at rest and in-transit. In its privacy policy, the company states that it has “implemented technical and organizational security measures designed to protect the security of any personal information” that the company processes. Bee also claims that it undergoes “rigorous third-party security audits” and employs continuous security monitoring. That all sounds quite good, although it’s worth noting that Amazon — like many large tech companies — has been subject to the occasional data security issue or two (not exactly surprising for a company that governs as much of the global cloud environment as it does, but still).

In short, Bee is a curious piece of hardware that, given some time and some tweaking, could have some promising professional applications further down the road. As a digital assistant for your personal life, however, it might prove to be a little too invasive for some users.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 21 #1106

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle offers a diverse group of topics. I liked the blue group best. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Famous Seattle weather.

Green group hint: Knock flat.

Blue group hint: Seinfeld and Cheers, too.

Purple group hint: Put-downs.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Precipitation.

Green group: Bowls over.

Blue group: NBC sitcoms

Purple group: Starting with kinds of insults.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 21, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is precipitation. The four answers are drizzle, rain, showers and sprinkles.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is bowls over. The four answers are floors, rocks, stuns and surprises.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is NBC sitcoms. The four answers are Community, Friends, Scrubs and Wings.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is starting with kinds of insults. The four answers are Barbados (barb), diggity (dig), dissect (dis) and slapdash (slap).

Categories: Gadgets

6 kitchen gadgets that make adulting feel easier

Recently, the biggest trend in kitchen gadgets has been “hands-free” and AI-powered devices that act as automated countertop assistants. There are plenty of devices that exist now for people who want to cook more (or at least look like someone who has their life together) but don’t always have the energy for a full kitchen marathon after work. 

From a robot stirring your soup to a bread machine that kneads your dough while you watch TV, here is a list of gadgets that may make you feel like you’ve won adulthood. Or at least make cooking feel much less intimidating.

NoshOne Kitchen Robot — $1,499

Image Credits:Nosh

The Nosh Chef Robot is a huge upgrade from a slow cooker or Instant Pot, as it can manage much of the cooking process autonomously. 

The AI-powered robot dispenses exact amounts of oils, spices, and ingredients from reusable ingredient cartridges. Users still need to load ingredients beforehand, but once everything is in place, the robot can roughly chop, stir, sauté, portion, plate, and self-clean after meals. However, it can’t bake, roast, or steam, so there are limitations, but the company says it supports more than 500 dishes, such as stir-fry and curry.

The system runs on NoshOS, a proprietary AI trained on thousands of recipes and cooking techniques. Built-in sensors monitor moisture, texture, and browning levels in real time, adjusting heat and seasoning throughout the cooking process. It can even recognize ingredients already loaded into the device and recommend meals based on what’s available.

The Nosh One is currently available for preorder on Kickstarter, with shipments expected in summer 2026.

StirMate Automatic Pot Stirrer — $89.99

Image Credits:StirMate

An automatic soup stirrer sounds unnecessary until you use it once, and suddenly you’re hooked.

Instead of standing over the stove painstakingly stirring soup, sauce, risotto, pudding, or oatmeal, the StirMate Automatic Pot Stirrer rotates around the pot for you while you prep other ingredients, answer emails, or scroll on your phone. 

It could also serve as a helpful accessibility tool for people with mobility issues or chronic pain.

Developed by father-and-son company StirMate, the third-generation model launched recently and includes a stronger motor, adjustable speed settings, and redesigned paddles for thicker recipes. It can run for up to 10 hours on a single charge and recharges in about an hour.

KitchenArm Smart Bread Machine — $149.99

Modern bread machines have evolved far beyond basic sandwich bread. This newer smart model from KitchenArm automates the mixing, kneading, proofing, and baking process, turning homemade bread into a mostly hands-off experience. Just add ingredients, select a setting, and let the machine do the work.

The KitchenArm Smart Bread Machine includes 29 automatic programs with 21 bread settings, including white, French, whole wheat, rye, and sweet breads, plus non-bread options for yogurt, jam, and cake. There’s also a fully customizable “Homemade” mode for adjusting kneading and rising times manually.

De’Longhi Rivelia Espresso Machine — $1,499.95

Image Credits:De’Longhi

Morning routines are significantly easier when your coffee machine remembers your order and the usual time you want to drink it. 

The De’Longhi Rivelia is a newer option and has recently garnered attention for its smart personalization features. In addition to grinding beans, brewing espresso, and frothing milk automatically, the Rivelia supports up to four user profiles, remembers favorite drinks and strength preferences, and adapts recommendations over time based on usage habits. Its “Coffee Routines” feature can even suggest beverages depending on the time of day.

While it’s definitely expensive, it’s widely considered one of the most popular high-end espresso machines currently available. 

Nama M1 Plant Milk Maker — $449

Image Credits:Nama

Store-bought oat milk prices alone are enough to push some people into making their own. The Nama M1 automates the entire process of making almond, oat, soy, or cashew milk, eliminating the old method of soaking, blending, and then straining that previously made homemade plant milk feel like a full-time job.

Newer nut milk makers have become faster, smarter, and much easier to clean, and the Nama M1 is one of the more widely reviewed examples currently on the market. Using centrifugal force, it can produce creamy plant milk in a few minutes with minimal prep work.

Image Credits:KitchenArt

The KitchenArt Auto-Measure Spice Carousel is one of the simplest products on this list, but it solves a very real problem: accidentally dumping half a container of garlic powder into dinner because the spice lid suddenly betrayed you. This rotating carousel stores up to 12 spices and dispenses measured amounts in 1/4 tsp amounts or poured normally through the built-in spouts. 

No apps, no AI, no complicated setup. Just a genuinely practical kitchen tool.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 21 #636

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition features an absolute killer of a purple category. I had heard of none of these words before, or even the category itself. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Stars.

Green group hint: Bucs is another one.

Blue group hint: Think World Cup.

Purple group hint: Fore!

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: A team’s best players.

Green group: Informal nicknames for NFL teams.

Blue group: Brazilian soccer greats.

Purple group: Old terms for golf clubs.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 21, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is a team’s best players. The four answers are A-team, first string, regulars and starters.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is informal nicknames for NFL teams. The four answers are Bolts, G-Men, Pack and Vikes.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is Brazilian soccer greats. The four answers are Kaká, Marta, Pelé and Ronaldinho.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is old terms for golf clubs. The four answers are brassie, cleek, mashie and niblick.

Categories: Gadgets

Startup Battlefield 200 applications close today

Today is the final day to apply or nominate a startup for Startup Battlefield 200. Once the clock strikes 11:59 p.m. PT, the window closes on your chance to compete for $100,000 in equity-free funding, gain global visibility, connect directly with investors, and launch on the TechCrunch Disrupt stage.

If you’re building a breakout startup — or know a founder who is — this is the moment to move.

Apply now for the opportunity to join 200 of the world’s most promising early-stage startups at TechCrunch Disrupt.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

Last call for ambitious founders

Founders, this is it. The application window closes tonight.

The strongest startups are already in the arena, and applications always surge in the final hours. If your company has been nominated but you haven’t completed your application yet, don’t risk missing your shot by waiting until the last minute.

And if you know a startup that deserves investor attention, media exposure, and a global stage, nominate them now while there’s still time to apply before the deadline.

Breakout startups started with small moments

Some of the most influential companies in tech history didn’t begin with perfect pitches or massive funding rounds. They started by taking a chance.

Dropbox demoed to skeptics before cloud storage was mainstream. Cloudflare pitched before most people understood edge infrastructure. Discord entered as a scrappy gaming startup called Hammer & Chisel.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

All of them came through Startup Battlefield.

That’s because Startup Battlefield 200 has never been about rewarding the most polished companies. It’s about identifying the most promising ones. Pre-launch is fine. Early traction is fine. No revenue is fine. What matters is whether you’re building something that genuinely changes an industry.

The application itself is your first pitch. And today is your final opportunity to make it.

More than a pitch competition

Startup Battlefield 200 is where breakout startups get discovered.

Selected companies will showcase at TechCrunch Disrupt in front of 10,000+ attendees, leading venture capital firms, global media, and the broader TechCrunch audience. Founders gain direct investor access, live exposure, and the opportunity to prove they belong among the next generation of category-defining companies.

Every selected startup receives:

  • A fully funded three-day exhibition booth at Disrupt.
  • Complimentary team passes.
  • Dedicated pitch training.
  • Founder masterclasses with top VCs and operators.
  • A featured startup profile in the event app.
  • Press list access and lead-generation opportunities.
  • Opportunities for TechCrunch editorial coverage, podcasts, and speaking appearances as the company grows.

Image Credits:Slava Blazer Photography

Every selected company pitches live, whether on the Disrupt Stage or the Pitch Showcase Stage. Both put founders directly in front of investors, media, customers, and partners looking for what’s next.

You do not need to win the competition for this experience to change your company’s trajectory. The exposure you get from this alone could be what pushes the needle.

The track record speaks for itself

More than 1,700 startups have participated in Startup Battlefield over the years. Together, they’ve raised over $32 billion and produced more than 250 exits, including acquisitions by Microsoft, Google, Salesforce, Uber, and Amazon.

Alumni include companies like Dropbox, Cloudflare, Discord, Fitbit, Mint, and Trello.

Behind every one of those success stories was a founder willing to put their company forward before the rest of the world caught up.

Who should apply?

We’re looking for ambitious early-stage startups building innovative, potentially category-defining products.

Applications are open globally across industries. Most selected startups are pre-Series A, though select Series A companies may qualify.

To apply, startups should have:

  • Founders with vision, execution, and traction.

Thousands apply every year. Only 200 are selected. Just 20 finalists pitch on the main Disrupt Stage. One startup wins $100,000 in equity-free funding.

The deadline is tonight at 11:59 p.m. PT

The founders who change industries rarely wait until they feel completely ready. They apply before certainty exists.

If you’ve been debating whether to submit, this is your final chance. The deadline closes tonight at 11:59 p.m. PT.

If you’re building something category-defining — or know a startup that deserves the spotlight — submit your nomination and complete your application before time runs out.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Let’s Hear It for This Prime Day Deal Slashing $76 Off Nothing’s Earbuds

Save $76: Amazon’s Prime Day kicks off on June 23, but the deals are already in bloom. The retailer just slashed the price of Nothing’s wireless earbuds by $76, dropping them to an all-time low. This is a limited-time deal available only to Prime members, so we suggest acting fast.

Finding a premium pair of earbuds with long battery life, active noise cancellation and fast charging can normally be quite steep. However, brands like Nothing offer an incredible, budget-friendly alternative without sacrificing great sound.

This story is part of Amazon Prime Day, CNET’s guide to everything you need to know and how to find the best deals.

Nothing earbuds include eartips in three sizes for a perfect fit and the most out of their features. They offer up to 45 decibels of noise cancellation and have a battery that lasts up to 40 hours. The 11mm drivers provide clear bass and treble for an immersive listening experience, no matter the music genre or audiobook. If you’re an avid ChatGPT user, you’ll enjoy Nothing’s integration with the popular AI service. Simply set up integration using the Nothing app, and you can use voice controls to experiment with it.

Nothing also improved the earbuds’ connectivity, making it easier to switch between devices whenever you need to pick up on a quick phone call, join a video meeting and more. Thanks to HiRes Wireless Audio, your voice will be heard loud and clear during phone calls, so you won’t have to worry about any distractions interrupting family or work discussions.

We’ve compiled a list of the best earbud and headphone deals so you can find exactly the right discount for you.

HEADPHONE DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

Alternatives you might like

Nothing earbuds include noise cancellation, crisp sound and AI features at a new record-low price. However, if these aren’t your style, we’re huge fans of Apple’s AirPods 4, which made our list of best wireless earbuds of 2026. You can snag the ANC model for $149, down from $179. Or grab the pair without ANC for less than $100 and save 23%.

Categories: Gadgets

Vertu wants CEOs to run companies from an AI foldable starting at $6,880

Luxury smartphone brand Vertu on Thursday unveiled a foldable phone powered by an AI agent that connects with enterprise software and coordinates workflows. The company is targeting executives who manage business operations and communications on the move.

Called the Alphafold, the foldable smartphone starts at $6,880 for the calfskin version. Higher-end models feature bespoke finishes including alligator leather, 18K gold, and natural diamond accents, along with customized detailing. This continues Vertu’s long-standing strategy of positioning its phones as luxury status symbols aimed at affluent buyers. The company told TechCrunch that its highest-end standard model is currently priced at $46,800, with further customization options available.

The launch marks Vertu’s latest attempt to reinvent itself for the AI era after struggling to remain relevant in the modern smartphone market. The Hong Kong-headquartered company, once known for luxury handsets and concierge services popular among wealthy buyers before the rise of the iPhone, has changed ownership multiple times over the years as mainstream smartphone makers came to dominate the industry. Nonetheless, Vertu is betting the Alphafold can help reinvent the brand for the AI era by combining luxury hardware with enterprise-focused AI capabilities.

Vertu’s Alphafold comes with Hermes Agent, built on top of the open source Hermes project by Nous Research. The agent can connect to enterprise systems like ERP and CRM, and coordinate tasks such as approvals, scheduling, sales tracking, travel planning, and operational reporting through natural-language prompts. However, the company said that its Phone-to-ERP and VPS deployments would be customized for each customer depending on their existing enterprise systems, with pricing varying accordingly.

Image Credits:Vertu

The Alphafold, Vertu said, can route requests across multiple AI models, including OpenAI’s GPT, Anthropic’s Claude, Google’s Gemini, and selected open source models, while also integrating with more than 80 apps and dozens of native phone functions for cross-platform workflows.

Existing AI features on smartphones from major manufacturers remain focused largely on consumer tools such as image editing and voice assistance, Vertu CEO Molly Ma said. This leaves room for more advanced AI-agent workflows tied to enterprise systems. She also pointed to earlier AI-agent smartphone experiments in China that gained popularity before facing challenges over data privacy and cloud-based data collection.

The Alphafold, Ma said, aims to address those concerns through a privacy-focused architecture featuring a proprietary A5 security chip. This silicon is designed to isolate authentication keys, biometric credentials, and sensitive enterprise information from the main operating system, the company said. It added that commercially sensitive data can be processed locally on the device, while prompts sent to external AI models are redacted or tokenized before leaving the phone.

While Vertu has emphasized the device’s privacy and security architecture, including on-device processing and data redaction features, the company said the system has not yet undergone third-party security audits or independent certification. However, Vertu told TechCrunch that independent audits and certification remain on its security roadmap “as an explicit next-stage commitment,” adding that it would “communicate the progress and the results publicly” once the product matures further.

The Alphafold is powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 processor and features an 8.05-inch foldable display alongside a 6.53-inch outer screen, a 6,500 mAh battery, and satellite communication capabilities. The device also includes a triple rear camera setup with 50-megapixel primary and ultrawide cameras, as well as a 5-megapixel telephoto lens. Vertu said the phone’s hinge uses metal, titanium, and carbon-fiber components and is rated for up to 650,000 folds.

The Alphafold is not Vertu’s first attempt to combine AI with foldable devices. The company last year introduced Agent Q, a clamshell-style foldable smartphone focused on AI-driven automation and productivity features.

However, Ma told TechCrunch that Alphafold represents a significant step forward from Agent Q, arguing that AI-agent technology has matured rapidly over the past year, with improvements in memory, automation, and app integration.

Foldable smartphones remain a niche segment globally despite years of investment by major manufacturers, including Samsung and Huawei. As many as 20 million foldable smartphones were shipped globally in 2025, accounting for less than 2% of total smartphone shipments, according to IDC data shared with TechCrunch. The research firm said foldables sold at an average price of about $1,300 last year — roughly three times the price of non-foldable smartphones.

Kiranjeet Kaur, associate research director for mobile phones research at IDC, said foldables could eventually benefit from AI-agent workflows because their larger displays are better suited for multitasking and productivity-oriented experiences. She, however, added that enterprise AI adoption on smartphones still lags behind computers, and that most enterprise smartphone decisions continue to be driven by ecosystem integration and device management support rather than AI capabilities.

The first 115-unit batch of Vertu’s Alphafold begins shipping this week across major markets, including the U.S.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple Watch vs AirPods: Which is a Better for Tracking Heart Rate?

I wore the AirPods Pro 3 for months before I remembered they could even track my heart rate.

I remember sitting in Apple’s September keynote, when the company announced heart-rate tracking through your ears. Measuring the rate of your heartbeats from a pair of earbuds sounded futuristic, and the announcement drew one of the loudest rounds of applause of the keynote.

Then I got home and went right back to recording every workout with my Apple Watch.

There wasn’t much reason to change. The Apple Watch Series 11 beat out every smartwatch I tested in our CNET Labs heart-rate comparisons against a Polar chest strap (designed explicitly to track heart rate), so I wasn’t expecting a pair of earbuds to come anywhere close.

Spoiler: They did.

The Apple Watch Series 11 still takes the crown for heart rate accuracy, but if I’d included the AirPods Pro 3 in my previous comparisons, they would’ve beaten out every other smartwatch on my list.

The Apple Watch is our top-rated smartwatch for heart-rate tracking. 

raditya/Getty Images

Health tracking moves beyond the wrist

Consumer health tracking started on the wrist, but it isn’t staying there. Fitness trackers and smartwatches have made 24/7 heart-rate monitoring mainstream to aid in training and recovery. They’ve since evolved to almost clinical level of precision to help flag serious heart conditions, sleep issues and even alert emergency services with features like loss of pulse detection (on the Pixel Watch). 

Now we’re seeing similar sensors in smartrings, earbuds, smart earrings and soon even smart glasses that can do the same from different parts of your body.

Where we’ll eventually wear our primary health tracker is still an open question. But to answer that, every new location has to prove it can measure those same health signals as accurately as the wrist.

Wearables like the earbuds and smart rings are tracking vitals beyond the wrist.  

Vanessa Hand Orellana/Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET

Why your ear might be a better place to measure heart rate

While tracking heart rate from earbuds is novel, I wasn’t starting this comparison from scratch. A few months earlier, Whoop’s now-infamous “thong” accessory (yes, the fitness company really makes performance underwear that lets you wear its sensor on your waist and other locations) sent me down a rabbit hole. I interviewed physicians and wearable experts about whether different parts of the body are better suited for measuring different health signals.

The answer depends on what you’re measuring. Fingertips, for example, work well for blood oxygen because they’re packed with small blood vessels, and thinner skin lets more light pass through.

Heart rate is different. In general, the closer a sensor sits to the heart (and the less that body part moves during exercise), the easier it is for a sensor-equipped device to capture a clean signal.

That gives the ear a couple of advantages over the wrist. It’s slightly closer to the heart and stays relatively stable while you run. But location is only part of the equation.

Apple has spent more than a decade refining the Apple Watch’s heart-rate algorithms. In my previous CNET Labs testing against a Polar H10 chest strap, the Apple Watch Series 11 averaged less than a 1% error rate, making it the most accurate smartwatch I’ve tested to date. 

The AirPods have different hardware and space constraints. Apple says it built its smallest-ever heart-rate sensor to fit inside the tiny buds and trained it on more than 50 million hours of Apple Health Study data. But this is still new territory. The question isn’t whether earbuds can measure heart rate, it’s whether they can come close to the Apple Watch.

How I tested the AirPods Pro 3 against the Apple Watch

For every wearable I’ve tested, I use the same benchmark: the Polar H10 chest strap (CNET’s gold standard in consumer HR tracking). Unlike an Apple Watch or AirPods, which estimate heart rate by shining light into your skin and measuring changes in blood flow, the Polar measures the heart’s electrical signals directly. Think of it as measuring the rock hitting the water instead of the ripples it creates. Optical sensors can match that signal, but paired with enough machine learning, they can surprisingly close.

The Polar H10 uses electrodes to measure the heart’s electrical activity.

Giselle Castro-Sloboda/CNET

To keep the comparisons consistent, I ran every test on the same college track using the same protocol I’d developed for previous CNET Labs smartwatch testing. Each workout covered four laps, or 1 mile.

The first lap is the ramp up to raise my heart rate from resting. The next two laps are a steady cruising altitude at a medium pace through the middle heart-rate zones. And the final lap is an all-out sprint to push my body as close to my maximum heart rate as possible. Max heart rate is generally estimated as 220 beats per minute minus your age. 

Using the same route, pace and effort each time helps eliminate variables, so the only thing that changes is the device.

Watch this: I Ran 30 Miles and THIS Is the Most Accurate Smartwatch

07:42

Before testing the AirPods, I reran the Apple Watch Series 11. I already had data from previous CNET Labs testing, but I wanted both devices to compete under the same conditions. Temperature, humidity and even blood vessel constriction can influence optical heart-rate sensors, so I tested both on the same track during the same stretch of summer weather.

I strapped it on, ran four laps and finished the workout. Plug and play, no drama. 

The AirPods were another story. As of September 2025, Apple lets you start a workout from your fitness app on your phone and use the AirPods to track heart rate if they’re paired. But having an Apple Watch confuses the signal, so I took off the Apple Watch and left it on a nearby bench, assuming that would force Apple’s Fitness app to use the AirPods for heart-rate tracking. I started a workout from the Fitness app, confirmed the AirPods were connected and took off.

Once I was done, however, half the heart-rate data had disappeared from the graph. I still don’t know whether I accidentally interrupted the recording by switching apps mid-run to check the Polar strap’s data or whether the Fitness app tried to reconnect to the Apple Watch, but the fact that I still don’t know doesn’t speak well for the AirPods convenience. I asked Apple what might have happened and will update this story if I learn more.

Attempt No. 2 to get AirPods heart rate data ended even more dramatically. Halfway through my third lap, the sprinklers on the track turned on. I was running with my phone in hand to make sure the Fitness app stayed open. Somehow, a drop of water happened to land right on the stop button, and in an instant my run ended and my work had been in vain. 

Back to square one. By that point, the Apple Watch had already won on convenience alone.

On my third attempt, I turned the Apple Watch completely off, left the Fitness app open for the entire workout and successfully dodged the sprinklers.

I logged two complete AirPods runs and then dug into the data. At first glance, the workout summaries looked nearly identical. Average heart rate differed by only a few beats per minute, and peak heart rate came in about 5 bpm lower on the AirPods. That’s fairly normal because optical sensors tend to lag slightly during rapid spikes in heart rate.

Workout summaries and averages are just snapshots and miss out on the bigger picture. 

To test accuracy, I needed to compare every single heart-rate reading throughout the run.

Polar makes that easy by exporting your data as a CSV (spreadsheet) file. Apple requires exporting your entire Health history first (11 years in my case). Fortunately, there is a workaround. Third-party apps like Health Fit parse through the data for you so you can just isolate by workout and neatly export into a spreadsheet. 

Once I had matching datasets, I sent them to CNET data analyst Gianmarco Chiumbe. He lined up each heart-rate sample from the AirPods with the corresponding reading from the Polar chest strap, then calculated the error rate for every point before averaging the results across both runs.

The AirPods didn’t beat the Apple Watch, but they beat my expectations

I expected the AirPods to be good enough for casual workouts. I didn’t expect them to outperform most of the smartwatches I’ve tested. Across two outdoor runs, the AirPods Pro 3 averaged a 1.67% heart-rate error compared with the Polar H10 chest strap, landing within 2.4 bpm on average.

Run 1

1.84%

2.65 bpm

Run 2 

1.50%

2.15 bpm

Average 

1.67%

2.40 bpm

For context, CNET Labs has compared top smartwatches — including Samsung’s Galaxy Watch 8, Google’s Pixel Watch 4, Garmin’s Venu 4 and the Amazfit Bip 4 — against the same Polar chest strap using this protocol. Most optical heart-rate sensors fall within a 7% error rate. 

Based on my results, the AirPods would have finished second only to the Apple Watch in that lineup.

Apple Watch Series 11

1.40

0.98%

AirPods Pro 3 

2.40

1.67%

Garmin Venu 4

5.54

3.89%

Google Pixel Watch 4

8.68

5.64%

Samsung Galaxy Watch 8

10.51

6.66%

Amazfit Bip 6

10.63

7.03%

In my previous CNET Labs testing (in February 2026), the Apple Watch averaged less 0.98%. When I reran it under the same conditions as the AirPods (much hotter weather), it performed even better at 0.38%.

But as impressive as that is, the gap isn’t large enough to matter for most runners or gym-goers. 

If you’re buying the $250 AirPods Pro 3 for music, noise cancellation and calls, heart-rate tracking isn’t just a bonus feature. Based on my testing, it’s one of the most accurate optical heart-rate sensors I’ve used — second only to the $400 Apple Watch Series 11. 

If you care about convenience, and the most accurate second-by-second data (especially at peak effort), then the Series 11 is worth the splurge and still sets the standard.

The more interesting takeaway is what this says about where wearable health tracking is headed. For years, heart-rate monitoring belonged almost exclusively on the wrist, and the AirPods Pro 3 proves that’s no longer the case. And as the data improves and algorithms continue to evolve, it’s not hard to imagine a future where earbuds outperform even the best watches.

Categories: Gadgets

Oura unveils its Ring 5 with a thinner, lighter design starting at $399

Oura on Thursday unveiled the fifth generation of its popular smart ring, starting at $399. The Ring 5, which Oura describes as the world’s smallest smart ring, arrives just a year and a half after the company launched the Ring 4 and seven months after the Ring 4 Ceramic. The Ring 5 is 40% smaller than its predecessor and comes with more accurate sensing and enhanced battery life.

The Ring 5 is launching alongside new software updates that include blood pressure signals, live activity tracking, on-demand care, and other features that will also roll out to the Oura Ring Gen3 and later.

The new smart ring is available for preorder starting today and will start shipping on June 4. It’s available in sizes 6 to 13 and comes in six finishes, including a redesigned Gold with a truer gold tone, an updated Deep Rose with a copper-like look, plus Silver, Brushed Silver, Black, and Stealth. The Black and Silver retail for $399, while the rest cost $499. For comparison, the Ring 4 started at $349.

Maz Brumand, VP of Product at Oura, told TechCrunch that the company reduced the ring’s width by about two millimeters and its thickness by roughly 30%. Brumand noted that Oura members had been asking the company to make a ring that was smaller and thinner, prompting the shift toward a slimmer design. Oura achieved the new size by redesigning the mechanical, electrical, optical, battery, and sensing architectures, Brumand explained.

Image Credits:Oura / Oura

The new ring is designed to be desirable to a broader audience, especially people who have found smart rings too bulky in the past. Oura says the latest model is designed to look and feel like any other ring.

While Oura could previously get away with a bulkier design as the dominant player in the smart ring market, new products from subscription-free rivals like RingConn and Ultrahuman have increased the pressure to innovate. Increased competition also likely explains why Oura is launching a new ring just a year and a half after the Ring 4, compared with the roughly three-year gap between the Ring 3 and Ring 4. It’s also worth noting that the announcement of the Ring 5 arrives a day before RingConn’s Gen 3 is set to start shipping.

In terms of the enhanced battery life, the Ring 5 can last between six to nine days, compared to the five to eight days on the Ring 4.

Oura also says it has reengineered its sensors for better skin contact and added more powerful LEDs in an effort to increase accuracy across a wider range of finger sizes and skin tones.

Software updates

As for the software updates, Oura is launching “Health Radar,” which is designed to monitor key biometric signals in the background to surface patterns members should pay attention to. Health Radar is launching with two foundational capabilities: Blood Pressure Signals and Nighttime Breathing.

Oura says it will continuously detect shifts and patterns that may indicate cardiovascular strain, alerting members when their biometrics suggest signs of increasing blood pressure. With Blood Pressure Signals, Oura tracks blood pressure patterns during sleep when the body’s cardiovascular patterns are most stable, since blood pressure should naturally dip overnight. When it doesn’t, it can signal potential cardiovascular risk that daytime readings may miss, Oura notes.

Image Credits:Oura

Members will also be able to log actual blood pressure readings from cuffs directly in the Oura app.

With Nighttime Breathing, Oura wants to give users a better understanding of how sleep and breathing patterns may impact their health. Members will get a 30-day rolling view of sleep-related breathing patterns and disturbances, expanding on the nightly breathing regularity insights they already receive.

Oura is also moving beyond insights into offering actual care. The company is partnering with Counsel Health, an on-demand platform that combines AI with licensed physicians to bring care directly into the Oura app. Members will be able to ask health questions, receive personalized medical advice, and connect with licensed physicians in the U.S. To access this, members will have to pay an additional fee on top of the standard $5.99 monthly subscription, though Oura did not say how much the added service will cost.

Members in the U.S. will also be able to import diagnosed conditions, medications, lab results, and allergies into the app to get a fuller picture of their health. While some may be understandably wary of uploading their health data to the app, the company promises it’s taking a privacy-first approach to the records.

Image Credits:Oura

Additionally, Oura is adding a new live activity tracking experience that lets members start a workout and view key metrics in real time on their phone, such as pace and distance during activities like running and cycling. The company also updated its “Automatic Activity Detection” to be more accurate for low-motion activities, like Pilates. Members can also connect third-party heart-rate monitors to see their heart rate in real time.

Oura is also adding GLP-1 insights that will give members a longitudinal view of their medication journey and track weight and body changes in one place.

For the first, time, Oura is also attempting to study brain health. Eligible members will be able to enroll in a Brain Health Study that seeks to match short in-app tasks with long-term physiological trends. Oura believes it will eventually be able to map how daily choices and recovery impact mental sharpness and long-term brain health.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

How to Start YouTube with Minimal Gear

Here’s the truth most gear guides won’t tell you: the best camera for YouTube isn’t the most expensive one—it’s the one that helps you earn back its cost fastest.

This guide treats gear as investment, not expense. Better video = more views. Better audio = longer watch time. Better lighting = brand deals. The math is simple: improved metrics = AdSense revenue = your gear pays for itself.

Whether you’re starting with $300 or $800, here’s exactly what to buy (and skip) to build a setup that earns its keep.

The “Start Now” Philosophy

Your iPhone Is Enough (For Now)

Before we talk gear, let’s get something straight: you don’t need any of this to start. Your iPhone 15 Pro shoots 4K ProRes that would’ve cost $10,000 five years ago.

The “start with what you have” philosophy is about validation. Post 20 videos with your phone. Build a habit. Prove you’ll stick with it. Then upgrade. Successful creators aren’t the ones with the best gear on day one—they’re the ones who started before they were ready.

Gear upgrades fuel a proven engine; they don’t replace one that doesn’t exist.

The Essential Categories

Camera: Good Enough vs. Great

Image quality matters less than you think. Viewers forgive 1080p video. They won’t forgive bad audio. The right camera removes friction and opens creative possibilities.

Option 1: Sony ZV-1F (Best Dedicated Camera)

The Sony ZV-1F camera designed for solo creators, showcasing 4K video capabilities.

~$498

The Sony ZV-1F was built for solo creators who need pro results without a film crew.

What makes it special:

  • 20mm wide-angle lens — Perfect for arm’s-length vlogging
  • Product showcase mode — Instant focus for reviews
  • 4K video with excellent autofocus — Set it and forget it
  • Flip screen — Essential for framing yourself

Check price on Amazon →

📖 Already have the ZV-1F? Read our complete Sony ZV-1 review for advanced tips and accessories.

The ROI comes from time saved—no fighting with autofocus, no repositioning. Better videos, faster uploads, faster growth.

Option 2: Logitech Brio 4K (Desk Setup Option)

~$129

If you’re doing tutorials, gaming, or talking-head content from your desk, a $129 webcam often makes more sense than a dedicated camera.

Why the Brio works:

  • 4K quality — Sharp video at a budget price
  • HDR for challenging lighting — Handles windows behind you
  • Plug-and-play — No SD cards, no batteries

Check price on Amazon →

📖 Want the full breakdown? See our Logitech MX Brio review for video samples and comparison with other webcams.

The Brio’s ROI is speed. Idea to uploaded in 30 minutes. For creators publishing multiple times weekly, that efficiency compounds.

Option 3: iPhone 15 Pro (Start Free)

$0 (use existing)

Already have one? You’re holding a legitimate YouTube camera. The iPhone 15 Pro shoots 4K ProRes with cinematic depth-of-field. Limitations are battery life, storage, and stabilization—but those constraints teach resourcefulness. Skills that pay dividends when you upgrade.

Camera Comparison Table

FeatureSony ZV-1FLogitech BrioiPhone 15 ProPrice$498$129$0 (existing)Max Resolution4K 30fps4K 30fps4K ProRes 60fpsBest Use CaseVlogging, on-the-goDesk setups, tutorialsMobile, testing contentAudio Input3.5mm jackNone (USB only)Lightning/USB-C adapterFlip ScreenYesNoNoUpgrade PriorityMediumLowN/A

My take: Start with your phone. If you’re doing desk content, add the Brio. If you’re vlogging heavily, save for the ZV-1F. Camera should be your last major upgrade, not your first.

Audio: The Non-Negotiable

If you remember one thing: viewers forgive bad video; they won’t forgive bad audio. Clean audio keeps people watching. This is why audio gear offers the fastest ROI.

Option 1: Audio-Technica ATR2500x (Best Value)

The Audio-Technica ATR2500x microphone, a reliable choice for YouTube creators, featuring USB-C output and built-in headphone jack.

~$149

The ATR2500x is the Toyota Camry of YouTube microphones—reliable and capable. At ~$149, it’s the sweet spot for most creators.

Why it wins:

  • USB-C output — Future-proof
  • Built-in headphone jack — Zero-latency monitoring
  • 24-bit/192kHz quality — Pro specs, amateur price
  • Cardioid pattern — Rejects room echo

Check price on Amazon →

Better audio = longer watch time = more views. One video jumping from 40% to 60% retention can mean thousands of extra views.

Option 2: DJI Mic Mini (Wireless Freedom)

~$169

If you’re vlogging or interviewing, wires are the enemy. The DJI Mic Mini (~$169) cuts the cord without cutting quality.

What you get:

  • 2 transmitters + 1 receiver — Interview-ready
  • 48-hour battery — Film for days
  • 250m wireless range — Walk anywhere
  • Ultra-lightweight — Clip and forget

Check price on Amazon →

📖 Considering the full-size DJI Mic 2? Read our DJI Mic 2 review to see if the upgrade is worth it for your setup.

The ROI is content variety. Walking tours, interviews, dynamic B-roll—all with pro audio. New content types = new audiences = new revenue.

Option 3: Maono PM422 (Budget Pick)

~$79

Tight budget? The Maono PM422 (~$79) delivers 90% of the ATR2500x at half the price.

Standout features:

  • Zero-latency monitoring
  • Touch mute button
  • Gain control dial
  • Boom arm included

Check price on Amazon →

Your gateway to good audio. Upgrade to the ATR2500x when you’re earning consistently.

🎧 Need headphones for monitoring? The Audio-Technica ATH-M50xBT2 are our top pick for creators who want pro sound without wires.

Pro tip: Audio should be your FIRST upgrade, before lighting, before camera, before anything else.

Lighting: Look Professional

Good lighting makes cheap cameras look expensive. Bad lighting makes expensive cameras look cheap. You don’t need Hollywood equipment—you need consistency.

Option 1: Neewer 18″ LED Ring Light Kit

A beauty influencer adjusts her hair while taking a selfie with a ring light, showcasing the importance of lighting in video content creation.

~$89

The classic ring light. At ~$89, it’s the starter light for a reason.

Why it works:

  • 18-inch diameter — Flattering catchlights
  • Dimmable 0-100% — Fine-tune any time of day
  • 3200K-5600K color temperature — Warm to cool
  • Phone holder built-in

Check price on Amazon →

The ROI is perceived professionalism. Well-lit video signals “serious creator” and opens doors to sponsorships.

Option 2: Lume Cube Edge Light

~$79

Want softer, more natural-looking light? The Lume Cube Edge Light (~$79) delivers.

Advantages:

  • Edge-lit LED — Soft light, no harsh shadows
  • Ultra-portable — Fits in a backpack
  • USB-C powered — Laptop or battery pack
  • Magnetic mounting — Position anywhere

Check price on Amazon →

The ROI is versatility. Key light, fill light, travel companion—one light, endless setups.

Free Alternative: Natural Light Hacks

Maximize what you have:

  • Window light positioning — 45-degree angle to a large window
  • Best times to film — Golden hour for warm, flattering light
  • DIY reflectors — White poster board opposite your window ($2)

Natural light ROI is infinite—free, and learning to use it makes you a better filmmaker.

Sample Setups by Budget

💰 $300 Budget — “The Starter”

Who it’s for: Testing the waters, proving consistency before major investment.

Component
Product
Price

Camera
iPhone 15 Pro (existing)
$0

Audio
Audio-Technica ATR2500x
$149

Lighting
Neewer 18″ Ring Light
$89

Total
$238

ROI Timeline: 3-6 months with consistent posting

💰💰 $500 Budget — “The Serious Creator”

Who it’s for: Committed creators ready to look professional.

Component
Product
Price

Camera
Logitech Brio 4K
$129

Audio
Audio-Technica ATR2500x
$149

Lighting
Neewer Ring Light + Softbox
$135

Accessories
Tripod + Stream Deck Mini
$104

Total
$517

ROI Timeline: 2-4 months with monetization strategy

💰💰💰 $800 Budget — “The Professional”

Who it’s for: Full-time aspirations, brand deal ready.

Component
Product
Price

Camera
Sony ZV-1F
$498

Audio
DJI Mic Mini
$169

Lighting
Lume Cube Edge + Ring Light
$168

Total
$835

ROI Timeline: 1-3 months with consistent quality content

A modern desk setup featuring a large monitor, a microphone, and essential gadgets for content creation.

A streamlined setup lets you focus on content, not troubleshooting gear

What to Skip (For Now)

Not all “essential” gear is actually essential. Skip these until you’re earning:

  • Expensive cameras before you need them — iPhone is fine for 90% of creators
  • Overpriced “YouTuber” branded gear — Often marked up 50%+ for the name
  • Multiple lights before mastering one — One good light beats three mediocre ones
  • Fancy teleprompters — Practice delivery instead
  • Expensive editing software — DaVinci Resolve is free and professional

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I need a DSLR or mirrorless camera to start YouTube?

No. Your smartphone shoots 4K that’s indistinguishable to most viewers. Upgrade your camera only after you’ve posted 20+ videos, know your content style, and are earning from the channel. Camera is the last upgrade, not the first.

What’s more important: camera or microphone?

Microphone, always. Viewers will watch 720p video with great audio. They’ll click away from 4K video with bad audio in 10 seconds. Audio is your first upgrade priority.

How quickly will this gear pay for itself?

With consistent posting (2-3 videos/week) and basic monetization strategy: $300 setup = 3-6 months, $500 setup = 2-4 months, $800 setup = 1-3 months. The key is consistency—gear doesn’t help if you don’t publish.

Should I buy everything at once or upgrade gradually?

Gradually. Start with audio (ATR2500x), use your phone, add lighting next. Upgrade camera only when you’ve proven consistency. This spreads costs and lets you learn what you actually need.

What’s the #1 mistake new YouTubers make with gear?

Buying before starting. The best gear is the gear that gets used. Post 10 videos with your phone before spending a dollar. You’ll learn what you actually need instead of what looks cool in unboxing videos.

Do I need a computer for editing, or can I edit on my phone?

You can absolutely start editing on your phone (CapCut is free and powerful). Upgrade to computer editing (DaVinci Resolve) when your videos get complex enough that phone editing slows you down—usually around 50+ videos in.

What about background and set design?

Start simple: a clean wall, good lighting, and no clutter. Add personality gradually—plants, LED strips, artwork. Your set should evolve as your brand evolves. Don’t overthink it on day one.

Ready to Start Your Channel?

The best gear is the gear you already have. Your phone. Your voice. Your perspective. Start there. Upgrade when you’ve proven you’ll stick with it.

Questions about your specific setup? Email us — we read every message.

Last updated: February 12, 2026

Some links are affiliate links — we earn a small commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for supporting independent reviews.

Categories: Gadgets

Don’t Buy an Expensive DLP Projector. This Cheaper, Portable Model Is Just as Good


Pros

  • Compact size
  • Fairly accurate colors
  • Optical zoom

Cons

  • VIDAA OS is fine but not common
  • Maybe a little overpriced

You’d think big TV manufacturers would have plenty of engineering know-how to make a great projector. In my experience, though, that’s not always the case. The Hisense M2 Pro, however, exceeded my expectations and does a lot of things really well. It’s decently bright, has fairly accurate color, a really good contrast ratio and even an optical zoom. Combine that with a price of around $1,300 and it’s a pretty easy projector to recommend. 

The M2 Pro’s negatives are largely unrelated to performance, but to price. You can spend a bit more and get a better, brighter projector, or you can spend less and get fairly similar performance. In addition, its onboard VIDAA OS has all the major apps, but perhaps not as many of the smaller ones compared to Google TV. So, basically, the M2 Pro is very good for the money, but at a lower price it’d be amazing.

Specs and such

  • Resolution: 4K 
  • Lumens: 1,300 (claimed)
  • Zoom: 1-1.3:1
  • Lens shift: No
  • Light source type: RGB laser

The compact M2 Pro uses RGB lasers for its light source — not uncommon these days — and it pairs them with a zoom lens, which is fairly uncommon at this price. Combine these features with a built-in gimbal stand and you can put the M2 Pro just about anywhere without issue. It’s also 4K resolution, whereas many models at a similar price are 1080p.

Geoffrey Morrison/CNET

Hisense claims 1,300 lumens. In its most accurate mode, I measured 803. With the Brightness Enhancement feature set to Ultra, the image is noticeably green, but I measured 1,183 lumens. Given unit-to-unit variation, not to mention different measurement techniques, I’d say this is pretty close to its claimed specs. Each of the other two Brightness Enhancer modes became progressively closer to the projector’s most accurate image but with decreasing brightness boosts. High mode produced 1,006 lumens but skewed noticeably blue, while Standard mode delivered 957 lumens and was only slightly cooler than the most accurate picture mode.

Connections

  • HDMI inputs: 1
  • USB port: 1
  • Audio: eARC, 2x10W speakers
  • Internet: Wi-FI
  • Streaming interface: VIDAA OS
  • Remote: Backlit

Like most small projectors, there’s only one HDMI input on the Hisense. Since streaming is built in, this is fine. If you want to connect a streaming dongle, there is a USB output to power it. Plus, unlike most projectors in this price range, the Hisense uses its own OS called VIDAA. It’s fairly simple to operate and comes with a row of apps to choose from. All the major options are here, but if you have a more obscure favorite streamer, you may want to check it’s available first. This is the second projector I’ve reviewed with VIDAA onboard. Coincidentally, I reviewed the other one immediately before — the much more expensive Leica Cine Play 1

Geoffrey Morrison/CNET

The two 10-watt speakers don’t have much bass — or treble, for that matter — but they do get quite loud. Sound quality deteriorates noticeably at higher volumes, with a fair amount of distortion, but if you need the extra volume, it’s there. Like all projectors, you’re better off connecting a soundbar or to a receiver with speakers.

Picture quality comparisons

JMGO N1S 4K

The JMGO N1S 4K is similar in size, similar in original MSRP and, broadly speaking, similar in performance. It’s compact, on a pivot gimbal and uses lasers for its light source. When I reviewed the JMGO, the price was the same as the M2 Pro is now, but it has since fallen to under $800. I connected both of the projectors to a distribution amplifier and viewed them side by side on a 102-inch, 1.0-gain screen.

Once set up as similarly as possible, a number of things were instantly apparent. The first has to do with color temperature. Both are fairly close to accurate, but wrong in opposite ways: The M2 Pro looks a little blueish/greenish (lacking red), while the N1S 4K looks a little reddish. Subjectively, the N1S 4K looks slightly more natural, as the slight green push on the M2 Pro gives skin tones a mild pallor. However, on its own, the M2’s slight color tint isn’t as noticeable and there are plenty of ways to adjust it in the settings, even if you don’t have the projector professionally calibrated. Neither has the spot-on color of something like the BenQ HT2060, but they’re acceptably close enough. 

Geoffrey Morrison/CNET

The M2 Pro is brighter, producing 803 lumens versus the Hisense’s 575. Light output is especially important with projectors because it also determines how large an image you can create while keeping it bright enough to watch. Viewed side by side, the M2 Pro is noticeably brighter, though subjectively the difference doesn’t seem as dramatic as the roughly 33% gap in measured brightness suggests. It’s more a case of “the Hisense looks a little brighter” than “why is the JMGO so dim?”

Contrast, too, is fairly close, with the M2 Pro measuring a highly respectable 1,482:1 compared to the N1S’s ~1,196:1 (which is more of an estimate due to how that projector handles black levels). The difference is large enough that, combined with the greater light output, the M2 Pro’s image has a little more punch. It’s not massive, but it is noticeable. Both projectors’ brightness and contrasts are better than the average of the projectors I’ve reviewed for CNET, while the M2 Pro is closer to the best performing DLP projectors, all of which are more expensive.

A quick word of caution about RGB lasers, though. Like all RGB laser projectors, the M2 Pro can present an issue for some people who wear glasses. Depending on your prescription and lens material, you may see chromatic aberration, or color fringing, around bright objects. This is especially noticeable when the objects are on a dark background, such as white credits on a black screen or streetlights at night. It will look like the image “splits” with a single-color “ghost” on either side and is separate from the rainbows some people see with DLP projectors. For what it’s worth, I notice it and find it annoying enough that I personally wouldn’t buy an RGB laser projector. If you think this might be an issue for you, check out the TK705STi instead, as it uses LEDs and doesn’t have this issue.

Geoffrey Morrison/CNET

Speaking of the TK705STi and its standard-throw sibling, the TK705i, I didn’t have either on hand for a direct comparison. Both, however, are priced similarly to the M2 Pro. The STi is significantly brighter than the M2 Pro, though in my testing, its color was slightly less accurate and its contrast ratio was lower. It’s also a short-throw projector, which may make it a better fit for smaller rooms but a less practical choice for larger ones.

I didn’t review the TK705i, and because it uses a different lens, I can’t say how its performance compares with either projector. It’s likely closer to the TK705STi than the M2 Pro in terms of brightness, however. Both BenQ models use LED light sources, so they avoid the RGB laser issues mentioned above.

There’s also the HT2060, one of my picks for best projector. While brighter and, as mentioned earlier, more accurate, it’s not gimbaled and is “only” 1080p. It’s not exactly a direct competitor, but if you’re looking for more permanent placement for your projector, check that one out, too.

TV 2 PJ

Geoffrey Morrison/CNET

I’m concerned I may have damned the M2 Pro with faint praise. There just isn’t a lot to complain about, but it’s also not the most amazing PJ I’ve seen. It’s solid. It’s an A-. It’s one of the best options for the price. My only real issue is that it’s in this weird place where spending a little more can get you a lot more performance, and spending a lot less only gets you a little less. While technically you could say it’s a little overpriced, it performs better than some other projectors around the same price, meaning “overpriced” isn’t exactly accurate either. 

I’ve been reviewing devices for a long time, and products like this are among the hardest to write about. Bad products are challenging to review because you end up double- and triple-checking your results, but they’re fairly easy to explain. Great products are easy for obvious reasons. It’s the good-but-not-great products that are tricky. The M2 Pro falls into that category. It’s a solid projector with few major flaws, but it doesn’t stand out in any one area. That makes it relatively easy to review and surprisingly difficult to write about — hence this paragraph.

I guess the spoiler in the M2 Pro conversation is the JMGO N1S 4K, which is why I mentioned it above. It’s currently going for under $800. Is the M2 Pro better? Yes, but not ~65% better as the prices suggest. The Hisense does have an optical zoom and, for better or worse, does not have Google TV. Basically, if you don’t care about that price difference, or you see it on sale, get the M2 Pro. If you want to save some money and don’t mind not having a zoom, get the N1S 4K. 

Categories: Gadgets

This $300 pizza oven can easily help elevate your summer pizza nights

If you enjoy homemade pizza but don’t love the hassle that comes with it, an electric pizza oven may be the ideal upgrade. The Ninja Artisan Outdoor Pizza Oven is aimed at people who want delicious pizza nights without having to deal with things like propane or wood pellets, unlike many other pizza ovens.

I need to preface this review by admitting that I am no pizza connoisseur, but I ended up with quick, restaurant-style pizzas using the oven, largely thanks to its simplicity and easy-to-use design.

The oven plugs into a standard outdoor outlet and gets up to 700°F. It’s worth noting that although it’s electric, it’s not suitable for indoor use. 

It features five pizza settings — Neapolitan, New York, Thin Crust, Pan Pizza, and Custom — that you can quickly toggle between. It comes with a pizza stone that can cook 12-inch pizzas. While I found that the 12-inch size was perfect for me and my husband, some may wish for the option to make bigger pizzas when feeding a larger crowd.

Since the oven has heating elements on both the top and bottom, pizzas cook evenly and consistently without needing to rotate the pie, manage a flame, or constantly babysit the cooking process, especially once you’ve gotten familiar with the different modes.

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

Just like the cooking process, setup was quite easy. All I had to do was remove the oven and pizza stone from the box and packaging, plug it in, and start the preheating process. 

I first tested the Neapolitan setting, which cranks the oven to its max temperature of 700°F and can cook a pizza in just three minutes. It took about 20 minutes for the oven to preheat, and it beeped to let me know it was ready. I had my first pizza ready on the pizza peel that Ninja sent me alongside the oven (sold separately), and I was able to easily shimmy it onto the pizza stone inside the oven. 

After that, you just need to push the Start button to begin cooking the pizza and begin the timer. While the pizza is cooking, you can adjust the timer using the dial if you want to cook it for a custom amount of time. 

While I did keep an eye on the pizza through the small front window and internal light to make sure it didn’t burn, the three-minute cook time ended up being perfect, leaving me with a pizza that had an airy crust, puffed edges, and light charring. The airy crust is something I was never able to achieve when making homemade pizzas in my standard kitchen oven. 

For the subsequent Neapolitan pizzas that I made, I didn’t have to keep an eye on them and instead relied on the timer to beep and let me know when they were ready. 

It’s worth noting that if you’re looking for that authentic wood-fired flavor, you won’t get that with this oven. But if you’re happy with consistent, reliable results, then this oven is perfect for you. 

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

I also tried the New York setting, which sets a lower temperature than the Neapolitan mode and has a longer cook time. I used this setting for a topping-heavy pizza to get an even bake and more doneness in the middle. With this setting, I got less of a char on the crust, which is what I was looking for. 

As for cleaning the oven, it’s fairly straightforward and low maintenance since you don’t have to deal with soot from an open flame. The interior can be easily wiped down with a damp cloth to remove crumbs and any light messes. For the pizza stone itself, I scraped off debris after it cooled down, since you’re not supposed to use soap on a pizza stone because it’s porous and can absorb water and potentially crack or shatter when exposed to high heat.

What I like most about the pizza oven is that homemade pizza nights no longer feel like a weekend-only activity. Before, making pizza at home felt like too much of a project for a weekday, so I saved it for occasional weekends. But with how fast and simple the Ninja Artisan oven is to use, homemade pizza now feels like something I can quickly make after work without it feeling like a task.

I think the pizza oven is worth buying if you want to make restaurant-style pizza at home without the complexity of traditional pizza ovens.

The Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven costs $300 and comes in four colors: green and gold, blue and gold, black and gold, and dark gray.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Top 6 Budget Microphones for Content Creators

Let’s get one thing straight: you don’t need to spend $500 on a microphone to sound professional. Whether you’re launching a podcast, streaming on Twitch, or upgrading your Zoom setup for remote work, the best budget microphone can deliver 90% of the performance at 20% of the price. I’ve tested dozens of mics under $150 to find the options that actually punch above their weight class.

The reality is that microphone technology has democratized. Condenser capsules, cardioid pickup patterns, and USB-C connectivity—features once reserved for pro studios—are now available in $50 packages. But the market is also flooded with mediocre options that promise “studio quality” and deliver thin, noisy disappointment.

This guide cuts through the noise. I’ve selected six best budget microphones across every use case: USB plug-and-play for streamers, XLR options for podcasters ready to level up, wireless lavalier for mobile creators, shotgun mics for video work, gaming headsets with actual good mics, and all-in-one podcasting solutions. Every pick under $150, every pick genuinely worth your money.

Quick Comparison: The 6 Best Budget Microphones of 2026

Category
Microphone
Price
Best For
Connection

🥇 USB
Audio-Technica ATR2500x
$149
All-Round Winner
USB-C

XLR
Shure SM48
$59
Podcasters
XLR

Wireless
DJI Mic Mini
$89
Mobile Creators
Wireless

Shotgun
Deity V-Mic D4
$69
Video/Film
3.5mm

Gaming
Razer Seiren Mini
$49
Streamers
USB

Podcasting
Samson Q2U
$69
Beginners
USB + XLR

#1 Best Overall: Audio-Technica ATR2500x

The ATR2500x delivers professional condenser sound at a budget price.

The Audio-Technica ATR2500x is the Swiss Army knife of budget microphones. At $149, it’s at the top of our price range, but it justifies every penny with versatility that rivals mics costing twice as much. This is the one I’d recommend if you don’t know exactly what you need yet—because it handles almost everything well.

What makes it special: The ATR2500x uses a large-diaphragm condenser capsule—the same type found in studio recording mics. This gives it a warm, detailed sound that flatters voices for podcasting, streaming, and vocal recording. The built-in headphone jack provides zero-latency monitoring, so you hear yourself in real-time without echo.

The connectivity is future-proof: USB-C connection (the previous model used micro-USB), and it’s plug-and-play on Mac, Windows, and even iPad Pro. No drivers, no hassle. The side-address design means you speak into the side of the mic, not the top—more natural for desktop use.

Trade-offs at this price: You’re paying $149, which stretches “budget” for some. If you only need a mic for Discord calls, this is overkill. But if you’re serious about content creation and want one mic that handles podcasts, voiceovers, and streaming, this is your pick.

Check Price on Amazon

#2 Best XLR: Shure SM48

The SM48 brings Shure’s legendary durability to the budget category.

If you’re ready to step up from USB and build a proper podcasting or vocal recording setup, the Shure SM48 is the entry point that doesn’t feel like a compromise. At $59, it’s the younger sibling of the legendary SM58—the industry standard stage mic—but at half the price and with 90% of the performance.

Built like a tank: Shure’s reputation for durability is earned. Drop this mic, throw it in a bag, use it on stage—it’s designed for abuse. The cardioid pickup pattern rejects off-axis sound beautifully, making it perfect for untreated rooms where echo might be a problem.

The sound signature: The SM48 has a slight presence boost in the vocal range that helps voices cut through without sounding harsh. It’s not as “airy” as a condenser, but that’s often better for podcasts—less room noise, less mouth noise, more focused voice.

XLR means you’ll need an interface: This mic requires an audio interface (like the Focusrite Scarlett Solo, $119) to connect to your computer. Factor that into your budget. But if you’re serious about audio quality, the interface + SM48 combo will outperform any USB mic under $200.

Check Price on Amazon

#3 Best Wireless: DJI Mic Mini

The DJI Mic Mini delivers wireless freedom for mobile creators.

Content creation isn’t always stationary. If you’re filming YouTube videos on the move, interviewing people on the street, or teaching fitness classes online, you need wireless. The DJI Mic Mini at $89 delivers professional wireless audio at a price that used to buy only cheap, interference-prone systems.

True wireless freedom: The transmitter clips to your shirt, the receiver plugs into your camera or phone (USB-C or Lightning), and you’re wireless in 5 seconds. No pairing, no apps, no hassle. The 2.4GHz transmission is stable up to 250 feet—far more than you’ll ever need.

The sound quality surprises: For such a tiny mic, the DJI captures remarkably clean voice audio. It’s optimized for speech, not music, which is exactly what you want for vlogging and interviews. The built-in noise reduction handles wind and background chatter better than you’d expect.

Battery life that lasts: 6 hours on a charge, and the charging case (sold separately, or buy the 2-person kit) gives you 3 full recharges. For all-day shoots, this is essential.

Check Price on Amazon

#4 Best Shotgun: Deity V-Mic D4

The V-Mic D4 brings directional audio to budget filmmaking.

Shotgun microphones are specialized tools—designed to capture sound from what’s directly in front while rejecting everything else. For video work, this is crucial. The Deity V-Mic D4 at $69 delivers professional directional audio that makes your videos sound like they were shot by a crew, not a solo creator.

The supercardioid pattern: Unlike omnidirectional mics that capture everything, the V-Mic D4 focuses tightly on your subject. Film an interview in a noisy café, and the mic hears your subject, not the espresso machine. Mount it on your camera’s hot shoe or on a boom pole—the shock mount handles handling noise.

No batteries required: The V-Mic D4 runs on plug-in power from your camera or phone. One less thing to charge, one less thing to forget. The aluminum construction feels premium—this isn’t plastic junk.

Limitations to know: Shotgun mics are for video, not podcasting. The directional pickup that works so well on camera becomes a liability if you’re trying to record a roundtable discussion. Use the right tool for the job.

Check Price on Amazon

#5 Best for Gaming: Razer Seiren Mini

The Seiren Mini proves that small can still sound mighty.

Discord calls don’t need a $500 mic. But they also don’t need to sound like you’re talking through a tin can. The Razer Seiren Mini at $49 is the sweet spot for gamers who want their voice to sound clear without cluttering their desk or emptying their wallet.

Tiny footprint, big sound: The Seiren Mini is genuinely small—about the size of a soda can. But inside is a condenser capsule that captures warmth and detail most headset mics can’t touch. Your teammates will hear you clearly, and your streams will sound professional enough for Twitch’s front page.

The supercardioid pattern matters: Gaming setups are noisy. Mechanical keyboards, mouse clicks, PC fans. The Seiren Mini’s tight pickup pattern focuses on your voice and rejects the chaos around you. Position it slightly below your mouth (to avoid breath noise), and you’re golden.

No software required: Plug it in, select it in Discord/OBS, done. The built-in shock mount handles minor bumps, and the USB cable is long enough to route cleanly.

Check Price on Amazon

#6 Best for Podcasting Beginners: Samson Q2U

The Q2U offers the flexibility to grow from USB to XLR.

Starting a podcast is overwhelming enough without worrying about audio interfaces and mixer settings. The Samson Q2U at $69 removes that friction with a brilliant dual-connection design: USB for plug-and-play simplicity today, XLR for studio upgrades tomorrow.

Start simple, grow later: Plug the Q2U into your laptop via USB, and you’re recording in 30 seconds. The dynamic capsule rejects room noise better than condensers, meaning your untreated bedroom sounds surprisingly professional. The included desktop stand gets you started immediately.

The upgrade path: When you’re ready to add a second host, or upgrade to a mixer, unplug the USB cable and connect via XLR. Same mic, better setup. The Q2U sounds good enough that professional podcasters use it as a travel/backup mic.

What’s in the box: The Q2U includes everything you need to start: the mic, desktop stand, USB cable, XLR cable, and windscreen. At $69, this is the most complete podcasting package available.

Check Price on Amazon

Buying Guide: How to Choose the Right Budget Mic

Before you click “buy,” understand what you’re actually looking for. Microphones aren’t one-size-fits-all, and the wrong choice will frustrate you more than a $50 price difference.

USB vs. XLR: What’s the Difference?

USB microphones connect directly to your computer. They’re plug-and-play, require no additional equipment, and are perfect for beginners. The ATR2500x, Seiren Mini, and Q2U (in USB mode) all fit here.

XLR microphones use a three-pin connector that requires an audio interface to connect to your computer. This adds cost ($100+ for the interface) but gives you better sound quality, more control, and room to upgrade. The Shure SM48 is an XLR mic.

Condenser vs. Dynamic: Which Capsule?

Condenser mics (ATR2500x, Seiren Mini) are more sensitive and capture more detail, especially in the high frequencies. They’re great for treated rooms but pick up more background noise.

Dynamic mics (SM48, Q2U) are less sensitive but more focused. They reject room noise better and handle loud sources without distortion. Better for untreated spaces and loud gaming sessions.

Pickup Patterns Explained

  • Cardioid: Picks up sound from the front, rejects the back. Best for solo podcasters and streamers.
  • Supercardioid: Tighter focus than cardioid. Better rejection of side noise, but you need to stay on-axis.
  • Omnidirectional: Picks up everything. Good for roundtable discussions, bad for noisy rooms.

Frequently Asked Questions

What’s the best budget microphone for podcasting?

The Samson Q2U ($69) is the best budget microphone for podcasting beginners. It offers both USB (for easy start) and XLR (for future upgrades), includes all necessary accessories, and rejects room noise better than condenser alternatives.

Do I need an audio interface for a budget microphone?

Only if you choose an XLR microphone like the Shure SM48. USB microphones including the Audio-Technica ATR2500x, Razer Seiren Mini, and Samson Q2U connect directly to your computer with no interface needed.

What’s the difference between USB and XLR microphones?

USB microphones connect directly to computers and are plug-and-play. XLR microphones require an audio interface but offer better sound quality, more upgrade options, and professional flexibility. For beginners, USB is usually the better choice.

Can a $50 microphone sound professional?

Yes. Modern budget microphones like the Razer Seiren Mini ($49) and Samson Q2U ($69) use condenser and dynamic capsules that deliver 90% of pro microphone performance. Room treatment and proper positioning matter more than mic price above $50.

Which budget mic is best for streaming on Twitch?

The Razer Seiren Mini ($49) is the best budget microphone for Twitch streaming. Its supercardioid pattern rejects keyboard and mouse noise, the small footprint doesn’t block your monitor, and the USB connection works seamlessly with OBS.

Do I need a shock mount and pop filter?

For budget microphones, a pop filter is recommended (prevents plosives), but most budget mics include basic shock mounting. The Audio-Technica ATR2500x and Samson Q2U include desktop stands with integrated shock absorption. Upgrade to a boom arm and shock mount later.

Final Verdict: Which Budget Mic Should You Buy?

The “best” budget microphone depends on your specific use case, but here are my clear recommendations:

  • Best Overall: Audio-Technica ATR2500x — The versatile choice that handles podcasts, streaming, and voiceovers with professional quality.
  • Best for Podcasting: Samson Q2U — USB simplicity today, XLR upgrade path tomorrow.
  • Best for Gaming: Razer Seiren Mini — Tiny desk footprint, big sound, unbeatable price.
  • Best XLR Budget: Shure SM48 — Pro build quality and sound for under $60.
  • Best Wireless: DJI Mic Mini — Freedom of movement without compromising audio.
  • Best for Video: Deity V-Mic D4 — Directional audio that elevates your productions.

Every microphone on this list has been tested in real-world conditions—not just spec sheets. Whether you’re starting your first podcast, upgrading your Twitch stream, or filming your YouTube debut, one of these six mics will serve you better than anything else under $150.

Ready to sound professional? Click any link above to check current prices on Amazon. And remember: the best microphone is the one you actually use. Don’t let analysis paralysis stop you from creating.

Disclosure: This post contains affiliate links. We earn a commission if you make a purchase—at no extra cost to you. We only recommend products we genuinely test and believe in.

Categories: Gadgets

A Coffee Expert Explains Why Burr Grinders Are the Only Grinders Worth Buying

Nailing your coffee-to-water ratio matters — experts often cite a golden ratio as the benchmark — but grind size carries just as much weight. Grind too coarse or too fine, and even the best beans won’t live up to their potential.

If you’ve been drinking coffee for a while, chances are you’ve settled into a routine — a go-to method, whether that’s drip, espresso, or pour-over, plus a small arsenal of gear to go with it. But the brewer is only part of the equation. A handful of factors shape what ends up in your cup, bean freshness included, but grind size is easily the most underrated.

Most experts recommend grinding fresh at home, but not all grinders are created equal. The best ones produce a consistent, even grind that gives you more control over the final cup. That means a burr grinder.

What is a burr grinder, and how does it work?

A burr grinder gives you maximum control over the beans you use to make a cup of coffee — it’s one of the most important coffee tools you can own.

Patrick Holland/CNET

Unlike a blade grinder, which grinds coffee beans by slicing them, burr coffee grinders crush them. Burr grinders use two abrasive or notched discs or plates, known as burrs, that rotate either parallel to one another or concentrically.

“A burr grinder gives you maximum control,” Kaleena Teoh stresses. Teoh is co-founder and director of education for Coffee Project New York, and praises burr grinders for “giving you the power to brew the coffee exactly the way you want it to be.”

Burr grinders are able to grind beans evenly and to a precise coarseness. 

Kuzmik_A/Getty

As the coffee beans are squeezed between them, they’re crushed to a preset size determined by the distance between the two burrs, which is adjustable to suit both the type of coffee being made and personal preference.

When you use a burr grinder, the coffee beans get crushed to a predetermined size — which is more consistent than a blade grinder.

Why a burr grinder is better than blades

“With a blade grinder, there’s no way for us to guarantee how the beans move within the grinder, which essentially works like a blender,” says Teoh. “You’re basically cutting and chopping the beans at different angles,” as they fly around haphazardly within the chamber of the grinder. 

No matter how long you run the grinder, you’re still likely to get a wide variety of particle sizes in the finished grind, “from really fine powdery sizes to really big boulders in there,” she says.

Blade grinders don’t really grind at all. Rather, they hack and chop the beans at different angles, resulting in uneven grinds. 

Pablo Jeffs Munizaga, Fototrekking/Getty

By comparison, the primary purpose of burr grinders is consistency, as the grinder’s shape forces beans to move between the burrs in a specific manner. (One of two specific ways, outlined below.) “You’ll always have slightly different particle sizes,” says Teoh, no matter what kind of grinder you use, “but for the burr grinder, that range is way smaller compared to a blade grinder.”

Flat burr grinders vs. conical burr grinders

There’s a slight difference in particle size distribution between conical and flat burr grinders, but both can achieve professional-level results.

Created by CNET

Burr grinders come in two forms: flat burr grinders, where the two ring-shaped burrs are stacked on top of one another in a parallel fashion. Beans are then inserted into the inner circle and are forced between the burrs before emerging on the sides. Conical burr grinders consist of one ring-shaped burr, and one conical burr, which work concentrically, with the beans passing between them and coming out through a chute below.

Read more: The Fellow Ode Brew Grinder Is a Fantastic Gift for a Coffee Snob

“Both flat burrs and conical burrs are able to give you great results, says Teoh, “as long as you’re able to understand how to dial in the grind for your coffee.” 

Burr grinders of either style may be pre-calibrated for specific coffee styles, such as pour-over or espresso, or may offer a wide range of grind sizes. However, all will be adjustable, allowing you to fine-tune the grind to achieve the flavor you want in the finished brew.

There are two types of coffee grinders you can pick from: burr grinders or flat conical grinders.

Patrick Holland/CNET

There is a slight difference in particle size distribution between flat and conical burr grinders, which mainly comes down to a matter of preference. “A flat burr gives you a grind where the majority of particles after grinding will be a consistent size, and with a conical burr, it gives you two sets of grind sizes, with one group that is slightly finer and one group that is slightly coarser,” says Teoh.

The argument for a conical burr grinder is that it gives you a more complex shot of espresso because it allows two different extraction rates; however, “the Specialty Coffee Association did a lot of research and blind-tasting and determined that it’s very difficult for people to tell the difference.”

The key to choosing a burr grinder is to select one that matches your use, as some burr grinders are pre-calibrated to produce a specific range of grounds for a particular style of coffee: extremely fine, powdery grounds for espresso or large, sea-salt-sized grounds for pour-over or French press. Some burr grinders offer a wide range of settings for various types of coffee.

Burr grinders: Good brands and average cost

You don’t have to spend a lot of money on a burr coffee grinder, but make sure you pick one from a reputable brand.

Chris Monroe/CNET

Burr grinders come in either electronic or hand-crank models and, like any kitchen appliance, you can spend a lot of money on one, but you don’t necessarily have to. Teoh says she uses a variety of different grinders with Coffee Project New York; among the professional brands she likes, such as Mahlkönig and Victoria Arduino, there are several she recommends for home use:

The beans also matter

The primary purpose of burr grinders is consistency, so it’s worth putting one in your kitchen if you’re a coffee lover.

OXO

If you’re thinking of getting serious about the burr grinder, you should also get serious about the beans. Your average supermarket whole beans are probably not worth the splurge. Notably, for burr grinders, especially hand-crank models, the darker the roast, the more brittle it is and the easier it is to grind. Therefore, factor in your preferred roast when making your buying decision.

As far as optimizing consistency and control with a burr grinder goes, “buy coffee from your local roasters,” advises Teoh. “They usually roast every day of the week, and then they give you fresh coffee. And the fresher the coffee is, the better the aroma is and the resulting flavor is.”

Categories: Gadgets

Board, the new game startup from Mirror founder Brynn Putnam, raises $20M, has already sold thousands

Board, the three-year-old, New York-based startup building what it calls “together tech” — tech designed to bring people physically into the same room — has closed a $20 million Series A led by Union Square Ventures.

General Partner Michael Mignano, in his first investment since joining USV, will join the company’s board of directors. The round also brought in some famous angel investors including Biz Stone, Tim Ferriss, and Scott Belsky.

The raise comes about eight months after founder Brynn Putnam — who previously sold connected fitness startup Mirror to Lululemon for $500 million — unveiled Board publicly at TechCrunch Disrupt last October.

The $399 Board device is a 24-inch touchscreen in a wood-finish frame that uses proprietary technology to recognize physical game pieces, blending the tactile feel of board games with the interactivity of video games.

Traction since launch has been strong, the company says: Board is now in tens of thousands of homes, schools, hospitals, and restaurants across all 50 states, with 85% of customers averaging 30 or more play sessions per month.

Alongside the funding, Board announced Board Studio, an AI-powered creation platform launching later this year that will let anyone build original games using natural language prompts — from idea to playable prototype in under an hour, it says.

Board had previously raised $15 million in funding led by the venture firm Lerer Hippeau, which had also led Mirror’s $3 million seed round years earlier. That was a bet that paid off handsomely when Putnam sold the connected fitness company to Lululemon in 2020.

Putnam sees Board as a natural extension of what she learned about consumer hardware while building Mirror. “Mirror was very much about me,” she once told TechCrunch. “It was my reflection, my performance, it was about making your own self better. At that next phase, my life was really just much more about my family and my friends and my relationships.”

The result is a product built around the simple but increasingly popular idea that the best use of tech might be to get people to put their devices down and look each other in the face.

The raise arrives at a moment when consumer tech, long out of favor with investors, is showing signs of bouncing back, driven in large part by what AI is making newly possible.

“I’m more excited about consumer than I’ve been in a long time,” said Ben Lerer, managing partner of Lerer Hippeau, late last year during a separate sit-down with TechCrunch. “We’re seeing a very high-quality group of founders saying, ‘Now’s the time to get back in the pool.’ There are things that are possible today that weren’t possible six months ago or a year ago, and the slope is steep.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

7 Best Party Speakers 2026

📅 Updated: March 2026

The difference between a memorable gathering and a forgettable one often comes down to one thing: the sound. A great party speaker doesn’t just play music—it creates atmosphere and keeps the vibe alive. But the market is flooded with “party-ready” speakers that deliver flat disappointment when you push them past 60% volume. We’ve tested dozens of best party speakers over the past year to find the ones that actually deliver.

⚡ Quick Verdict

✅ Best Overall: Philips X5206 ($149)
✅ Premium Pick: JBL PartyBox 110 ($349)
✅ Best Value: Soundcore Boom 2 Plus ($249)
✅ Budget Champion: Anker Soundcore Motion Boom Plus ($179)
👍 Bottom Line: Your perfect party speaker depends on budget and venue—we’ve got the right pick for every situation.

At a Glance: The 7 Best Party Speakers of 2026

RankSpeakerPriceBest ForBatteryWater Resistance🥇 #1Philips X5206Usually $150Overall Winner14 hoursIPX4🥈 #2JBL PartyBox 110Usually $349Premium Bass12 hoursIPX4🥉 #3Soundcore Boom 2 PlusUsually $249Best Value20 hoursIPX7#4Anker Soundcore Motion Boom PlusUsually $179Budget Champion20 hoursIP67#5Sony SRS-XV500Usually $399Indoor Parties25 hoursIPX4#6Soundcore Boom 2Usually $129Portable & Compact24 hoursIPX7#7EarFun Uboom XUsually $99Bass on a Budget16 hoursIPX7

#1 Best Overall: Philips X5206 Party Speaker

The Philips X5206 delivers premium party sound at a mid-range price point.

The Philips X5206 remains the standout choice for most people. It hits a sweet spot of sound quality, features, and price that competitors struggle to match. At usually $150, it undercuts premium rivals by hundreds while delivering 80% of their performance. The 2.1 channel setup with dedicated woofers and tweeters keeps vocals crisp even when the bass drops. The built-in LED light show syncs with music and you control it via the Philips app. Battery life is legitimately impressive: 14 hours at moderate volume, 10+ hours at 80%. Bluetooth 5.0 stays stable up to 100 feet, and the built-in mic input works for karaoke. Unless you need extreme bass or ultra-portability, this is the best party speaker for most people.

#2 Premium Pick: JBL PartyBox 110

The JBL PartyBox 110 dominates with 160W of party-ready power.

If budget isn’t your concern and you want maximum portable party power, the JBL PartyBox 110 is the heavyweight champion. At usually $349, it’s a significant step up—but the 160 watts of JBL Pro Sound justify the premium. This can fill a large backyard and handle indoor events up to 100 people. The bass response is genuinely room-shaking, and the dual woofers and tweeters are tuned with JBL’s signature warm, punchy profile. The RGB light display is more elaborate than competitors, with full-panel syncing you control through the JBL app. Guitar input for musicians is a nice touch. Trade-offs: at 23 pounds it’s heavy, the 12-hour battery is shorter than some competitors, and IPX4 rating means keep it away from direct water exposure.

#3 Best Value: Soundcore Boom 2 Plus

The Boom 2 Plus delivers flagship features at a mid-range price.

Anker’s Soundcore brand delivers 90% of premium performance at 60% of the price. The Boom 2 Plus at usually $249 slots perfectly between budget and premium options while offering features that embarrass speakers costing twice as much. The standout is 20-hour battery life—even pushing hard, you’ll get through all-day events. USB-C charges in 3 hours and includes a USB-A output to charge your phone. 100W output with BassUp technology enhances low frequencies in real-time. It’s not quite JBL PartyBox territory but close. IPX7 waterproof means you can submerge it without damage. The built-in handle makes it genuinely portable.

#4 Budget Champion: Anker Soundcore Motion Boom Plus

Outdoor-ready durability meets impressive sound at under $180.

At usually $179, the Motion Boom Plus proves you don’t need to spend $300+ for solid party sound. The rugged build is immediately apparent: IP67 waterproof and dustproof, floatable design, and 20-hour battery that outlasts most parties. 80W output is plenty loud for gatherings up to 30 people and stereo separation is surprisingly good for a single speaker. Real-world durability is exceptional—this speaker survives drops, sun exposure, and pool accidents. Titanium drivers resist distortion when you push volume past 80%.

#5 Best for Indoor Parties: Sony SRS-XV500

Sony’s ambient lighting and marathon battery make this the indoor party king.

The Sony SRS-XV500 is built for house parties, not outdoor adventures. At usually $399, it’s a premium investment—but if you host regular indoor gatherings and want something that looks as good as it sounds, this is your speaker. 25-hour battery means you can host weekend-long events without plugging in. The ambient lighting is sophisticated—subtle color transitions that enhance atmosphere without screaming “LED light show.” Sound is tuned for indoor acoustics: warm, full, and distortion-free at high volumes. Dual microphone inputs with echo control work for karaoke, guitar input for live performances, and Sony’s Fiestable app lets guests vote on the playlist. IPX4 rating handles spills but keep this speaker indoors.

#6 Most Portable: Soundcore Boom 2

Big sound in a compact, adventure-ready package.

Not every party happens in a backyard. Sometimes you’re hiking to a swimming hole or camping where every ounce matters. The Soundcore Boom 2 at usually $129 delivers genuine party volume in a package that fits in a backpack. 24-hour battery is class-leading—take it on three-day camping trips without charging. IPX7 waterproof and floatable design mean pool and lake use is worry-free. At just 4.2 pounds with a built-in handle, it’s genuinely portable. 60W output is half the Boom 2 Plus but BassUp technology still delivers impressive low-end for the size. Perfect for 10-15 people gathered around a campfire.

#7 Bass on a Budget: EarFun Uboom X

Maximum bass impact at a minimum price point.

At usually $99, the EarFun Uboom X shouldn’t sound this good. It’s the budget revelation of 2026—delivering genuine thump and party-ready volume while undercutting everything else on this list by at least $30. The bass emphasis is immediate and intentional—built for EDM, hip-hop, and pop. Dual passive radiators visibly pump with low frequencies. Mids get slightly muddy at high volumes, but nobody at a party cares when the drop hits. 16-hour battery gets you through any single event, and IPX7 waterproof rating is unexpected at this price. Bluetooth range is shorter (about 50 feet) but sufficient for backyard use.

Party Speaker Buying Guide: What Actually Matters

Power Output: Watts Aren’t Everything

Manufacturers splash “100W” or “160W” on boxes, but wattage without context is meaningless. A well-tuned 80W speaker outperforms a poorly tuned 120W option. Rule of thumb: for indoor gatherings up to 20 people, 60-80W is sufficient. For outdoor events or 30+ people, aim for 100W+. The JBL PartyBox 110’s 160W is overkill for most—but perfect if you regularly host large outdoor parties.

Battery Life: Plan for Reality

Manufacturers list battery life at 50% volume in ideal conditions. In reality, you’ll play louder and battery life will be 20-30% shorter than advertised. 4-8 hours is fine for evening events but bring a charger. 10-15 hours is the sweet spot covering any single party. 20+ hours works for weekend camping without outlet access.

Water Resistance: Match Your Environment

IPX4 handles splashes and light rain—fine for poolside but don’t drop it in. IPX7 allows submersion up to 1 meter for 30 minutes—pool and beach safe. IP67 is dustproof plus waterproof—beach and adventure-ready.

Connectivity: Bluetooth 5.0+ Is Non-Negotiable

Older Bluetooth versions drop connections, have shorter range, and introduce audio lag. Every speaker on this list uses Bluetooth 5.0+ for stable 100-foot range and reliable pairing. Party Connect features let you link multiple speakers for stereo or distributed audio. JBL’s PartyBoost and Soundcore’s PartyCast are the most reliable implementations.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best party speaker for under $150?

The Philips X5206 is the best party speaker under $150, offering 14-hour battery life, IPX4 water resistance, 80W of clear, bass-enhanced sound, and LED lighting effects. It outperforms competitors costing $50-100 more.

How many watts do I need for a party speaker?

For indoor gatherings up to 20 people, 60-80W is sufficient. For outdoor events or groups of 30+, aim for 100W+. Large outdoor parties with 50+ people benefit from 150W+ speakers like the JBL PartyBox 110.

Can I use a party speaker for karaoke?

Yes, most party speakers include microphone inputs. The Philips X5206, JBL PartyBox 110, and Sony SRS-XV500 all support both wired and wireless microphones with echo control and vocal enhancement features.

What’s the difference between IPX4 and IPX7 water resistance?

IPX4 protects against splashes and light rain—safe for poolside use but not submersion. IPX7 allows submersion up to 1 meter for 30 minutes, making it safe for accidental drops in pools or use in heavy rain.

How long do party speaker batteries last?

Most party speakers offer 10-20 hours of battery life at moderate volume. At high volume (80%+), expect 20-30% less runtime. Premium options like the Sony SRS-XV500 offer up to 25 hours, while budget speakers typically provide 8-12 hours.

Can I connect two party speakers together?

Yes, most modern party speakers support wireless pairing. JBL uses PartyBoost, Soundcore uses PartyCast, and Sony uses Wireless Party Chain. This lets you create stereo pairs or distribute audio across multiple speakers.

Is the JBL PartyBox worth the premium price?

The JBL PartyBox 110 is worth $349 if you regularly host large outdoor events or need maximum bass impact. For casual backyard gatherings or indoor parties, the Philips X5206 ($149) or Soundcore Boom 2 Plus ($249) offer better value.

What should I look for in an outdoor party speaker?

Prioritize IPX7 water resistance, 15+ hour battery life, 80W+ power output, and a durable build that handles drops. The Soundcore Motion Boom Plus ($179) is the best outdoor-focused option, offering IP67 protection and floatable design.

Final Verdict: Which Party Speaker Should You Buy?

After testing all seven speakers across backyard parties, beach trips, and indoor gatherings, the choice comes down to your specific needs:

  • Best Overall: Philips X5206 — The perfect balance of sound quality, features, and price. This is the speaker most people should buy.
  • Premium Power: JBL PartyBox 110 — When you need maximum volume and bass, and budget isn’t a constraint.
  • Best Value: Soundcore Boom 2 Plus — Premium features at a mid-range price with marathon battery life.
  • Budget Pick: Soundcore Motion Boom Plus — Rugged, reliable, and under $180.
  • Most Portable: Soundcore Boom 2 — Genuine party sound in a backpack-friendly package.

Every speaker on this list has been tested in real party conditions—not just spec sheets and sound labs. Whether you’re hosting intimate dinners or all-day outdoor festivals, there’s an option here that delivers.

Ready to upgrade your next gathering? Click any link above to check current prices on Amazon. And if you found this guide helpful, share it with whoever’s currently in charge of playlist curation—good sound deserves good music.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections: Sports Edition Hints, Answers for June 20 #635

Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.

Today’s Connections: Sports Edition has some fun categories, though the green group was a stumper for me. If you’re struggling with the puzzle but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.

Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by The Times. It doesn’t appear in the NYT Games app, but it does in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.

Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta

Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: Big Apple baseball.

Green group hint: Bike race clothing.

Blue group hint: Not the Big 10, but…

Purple group hint: Cowboys wear them.

Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups

Yellow group: New York Yankees, informally.

Green group: Tour de France jerseys.

Blue group: Locations of Big 12 schools.

Purple group: What “boot” might mean.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?

The completed NYT Connections; Sports Edition puzzle for June 20, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is New York Yankees, informally. The four answers are Bronx Bombers, Evil Empire, Pinstripes and Yanks.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is Tour de France jerseys. The four answers are green, polka dot, white and yellow.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is locations of Big 12 schools. The four answers are  Boulder, Fort Worth, Manhattan and Waco.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is what “boot” might mean.  The four answers are cleat, eject, kick and mishandle.

Categories: Gadgets

Cyberdecks are having a moment, rejecting big tech surveillance with style and substance

When I reach out to the self-proclaimed “open source baddie” CC for an interview, I’m pretty sure she’s emailing me back from a pink mermaid purse.

“I’m just having so much fun,” she tells me about her seashell cyberdeck. “It’s a Tamagotchi. It’s also an e-reader. It’s networked to my vault and my servers, so it has access to all of my server data, which has all my PDFs, and books, and notes, and everything… It’s also connected to my local AI setup at home.”

CC has no background in software engineering or computer science, but she’s gotten good enough at building unconventional cyberdecks — small DIY computers — that she documents the process on her blog Bimbo Tech so that other women can follow her lead, even if they don’t yet know what RAM is.

The idea of the cyberdeck originated in William Gibson’s 1984 sci-fi novel “Neuromancer,” and when credit card-sized computers like the Raspberry Pi came on the market in the 2010s, hardware enthusiasts began building and sharing their own cyberdecks in niche online communities. But over the last few months, these communities have exploded in popularity thanks to women on social media who are teaching each other to build artistic, hyper-feminine computers by documenting their building processes.

“I have a running joke that there’s this underlying misogyny in tech — because whenever they release a pro model, or an elite model… I’m always like, let me guess, it’s black or silver,” CC said. “It’s never going to come in pink.” 

The process of customizing and designing a cyberdeck has become an art form in itself. On Instagram and TikTok, you can find a cyberdeck made of wood and moss that runs Game Boy Color games; a desert-inspired MP3 player built inside a 3D-printed fossil; a Barbie dollhouse that opens up to reveal a functional mini-computer; or a duck figurine that can be used to record voice notes.

CC’s cyberdeck during the building processImage Credits:CC / Bimbo Tech

“I don’t want Meta AI glasses. I want to pirate books in a tiny embellished shell,” said the creator Sarahbelle Kim on TikTok. “No one can surveil you there. You can get some basic parts at the thrift store or eBay and just customize it.”

There’s obviously an aesthetic motivation to the rise of girly cyberdecks — why not use a Hello Kitty purse to check your email? It’s fun for the sake of fun. But the women building these over-the-top, bedazzled cyberdecks aren’t in it for the glitter alone. This trend is reaching its peak at a time when people feel powerless against the omnipresent homogeneity of big tech.

“I think that’s such a refreshing thing for people who were sold these devices that are like Apple’s… If you try to jailbreak it, if you try to do anything to this phone that you paid $1,000 for, that you own, it’s out of warranty,” CC said. “So I just love seeing people taking the power back into their hands, taking the control back into their hands, which obviously always means creativity when people are given the means to go outside of the black box.”

Maro Vardanyan doesn’t work with hardware as a blockchain developer, but she’s always enjoyed collecting and tinkering with old computer parts.

“A few months ago, I just started as a hobby making art and jewelry pieces and purses with recycled or upcycled old computers I had,” she said. “When I saw everyone doing cyberdecks, I was like, wait, why am I just doing recycled and upcycled ones when I can actually preserve the pieces on something that’s wearable, that’s movable?” 

Image Credits:Maro Vardanyan

Vardanyan has taken a different approach to building cyberdecks, opting instead to emphasize the historic relationship between fiber art and technology. Vardanyan refers to her work as “crocheting with computers” or “macrame motherboards,” deliberately nodding to the role of weaving — a practice often viewed as domestic, women’s labor — in the history of early computing.

Before silicon processors, some early computers ran on magnetic-core memory, made up of copper wiring that was precisely threaded to encode the 1s and 0s of binary code. In order for NASA to build the Apollo Guidance Computer, for example, expert women textile workers were tasked with meticulously weaving wires in painstakingly complex patterns, which powered the spacecraft that landed the first man on the moon.

Image Credits:Maro Vardanyan

“The original processor was handwoven by seamstresses, not by engineers or anybody else,” she said. “I feel like the hand weaving, and even the fashion-meets-technology… It’s so full circle.”

Vardanyan started weaving pink Raspberry Pis to make purses and corsets, then posted photos of her works-in-progress on X.

“Of course, when the macrame went viral, all of the men are like, ‘This is such a waste of the Raspberry Pi,’ … or, ‘what about the rain?’” she said. “And then I have to be like, ‘Actually, it’s preserved in an acrylic shell.’ And then they’re like, ‘This is so performative, and the GPIO is gonna lose energy!’ And I’m like, ‘Actually, I’m using a conductive thread, so it actually will move and be fully functioning.’”

@gazi.ai

grass cyberdeck (allat to play pokemon yellow 🥀). thoughts ↓ cyberdecks were never about making the “best” computer. they came out of Neuromancer (yes, i wrote my senior essay on it) as messy, personal machines. now it’s a whole maker subculture, but the core’s the same: control + identity + a quiet resistance to how polished tech has become. this one’s a grass cyberdeck, wood + moss + exposed parts. something that feels a little alive, a little off. built on a Raspberry Pi, nothing fancy. honestly a simple build, just wanted to show how easy it is to make something like this in your bedroom (i post my pc a lot, but this is just as cool). it’s not trying to compete with a GeForce RTX 4090 or be practical. it’s more about rejecting the “black box” (our everyday sealed, untouchable devices) and leaning into radical ownership, something you can open, understand, and actually call yours. more optimization soon 🙂 #cyberdeck #pokemonyellow #reelsinstagram #hardware

♬ original sound – Gazi Jarin

CC has also encountered condescending men on the internet who balk at the idea that someone would use a Raspberry Pi on something as frivolous as a seashell purse computer during a RAM shortage.

“This guy on Reddit was like, ‘You built your first computer a month ago, calm the f— down.’ Mind you, I’ve been building PCs for years,” CC said. “So, long story short, he ends up apologizing and buying me the circuit board for my next cyberdeck.”

From CC’s mermaid purse computer to Vardanyan’s Raspberry Pi corset, these cyberdecks are a direct rejection of Silicon Valley culture, and not just in their egregious embrace of the color pink. They’re impractical and inefficient on purpose, which seems sacrilegious in a culture so obsessed with optimization that unregulated Chinese peptide injections are trendy. It’s a radical act to opt for hacky, DIY tech experiences in order to forge a closer relationship with the devices that feel so abstract despite their ubiquity.

“Ten years ago, I would walk into a conference, there would be three girls, and people would literally just be like, ‘Were you hired for the marketing team?’” Vardanyan said. “I can’t even tell you how amazing it is seeing so many girls all over my social media and Instagram being into hardware, being into software, and then educating [each other], and that’s definitely the energy that we’re missing on every level in society.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Transform Your Garden with Linkind SP6 Smart Solar Lights

Gone are the days of dim, boring plastic stakes. The Linkind SP6 Smart Solar Pathway Lights use interchangeable lenses and AI-driven smarts to paint your walkway with stunning, customizable patterns.

Most solar lights are purely utilitarian—they absorb sun during the day and emit a weak, ghostly glow at night. The Linkind SP6 system reimagines outdoor lighting as decoration first. Fresh from winning accolades at CES 2026, these lights don’t just illuminate your path; they texture the ground with mesmerizing light projections, all controllable from your phone without a single wire to bury.

Interchangeable lenses project stunning geometric patterns, turning your sidewalk into a canvas.

A Kaleidoscope on Your Lawn

The “killer app” of the SP6 is its interchangeable lens system. Each unit comes with five distinct optical lenses that project different geometric patterns onto the ground—options like “Ripple,” “Concentric,” and “Lozenge.” Unlike standard lights that just cast a blob of white, these project crisp, artistic designs that can make your driveway look like a high-end art installation. You can even mix and match lenses across your yard to create a varied visual journey up your front walk.

True Smart Control, No Hub Required

MPPT technology ensures up to 14 hours of run-time, while the app gives you total control over brightness and schedules.

While most solar lights are “dumb,” the SP6 is fully connected. Using Bluetooth Mesh technology, the lights talk to each other to stay perfectly synchronized. You can control up to 8 groups of 32 lights via the AiDot app, changing colors (with 16 million RGBW options), adjusting brightness, or setting schedules. The Music Sync feature is a party favorite, using your phone’s microphone to make the lights pulse and dance in time with the beat—perfect for outdoor entertaining.

Solar Tech That Actually Works

Linkind has solved the biggest pain point of solar lighting: reliability. The SP6 uses advanced MPPT (Maximum Power Point Tracking) technology—the same tech found in RV solar controllers—to squeeze every drop of energy from the sun, even on cloudy days. This, combined with their proprietary SolarDot™ tech, ensures the lights stay bright for up to 14 hours on a full charge. If you have a string of rainy days before a party, you can even pull them out of the ground and top them up via USB-C to guarantee they perform.

Built to Last

Turn your backyard into a dance floor with Music Sync mode, where the lights pulse and change color to the beat of your tunes via the app.

These aren’t the disposable $5 lights you find at the hardware store. The SP6 features a robust, high-impact ABS housing with an IP65 waterproof rating, designed to withstand sprinklers, rain, and heat. They feel substantial in the hand and look sleek and modern even during the day when they are turned off.

The Linkind SP6 is the perfect upgrade for homeowners who want the “smart home” experience in their garden without the hassle of running low-voltage wiring. They offer a rare combination of fun, creativity, and set-it-and-forget-it solar reliability.

Where to buy:

Categories: Gadgets

Best Gaming TV for 2026: Get the Lowest Input Lag and Highest Picture Quality

Carly Marsh/CNET

In every CNET TV review, I compare three or more similar TVs side by side in a dedicated, light-controlled test lab. With each review, I employ a rigorous, unbiased evaluation process that has been honed by more than two decades of TV reviews. I test TVs with a combination of scientific measurements and real-world evaluations of TV, movies and gaming content.

To ensure I can evaluate the picture quality of every TV, I connect each one to an AVPro Connect 8×8 4K HDR splitter so each one receives the same signal. I test the TVs using various lighting conditions, playing different media, including 4K HDR movies and console games, across a variety of test categories, from color to video processing to gaming to HDR.

In order to measure each TV, I use specialized equipment to grade them according to light output and color. My hardware includes a Konica Minolta CS-2000 spectroradiometer and a Murideo Six-G 4K HDR signal generator. I use Portrait Displays CalMan Ultimate software to evaluate every TV I review according to its brightness, black levels and color.

The Leo Bodnar Lag Tester samples three regions of the screen for latency, and these are averaged to give each TV’s lag score

I play a variety of games from an Xbox Series X or PlayStation 5, and note the effects of gaming modes and settings as well as the 4K/120Hz and VRR input capabilities. Helpfully, the Xbox includes a 4K/120Hz and HDR compatibility test: Settings>TV and display options>4K TV details. The page will detail the HDR modes it supports (including Dolby Atmos) and whether it will support VRR — if a TV gets ticks in all the boxes it means it has the best compatibility with high-end Xbox games.

Our reviews also account for such things as features, design, smart TV performance, connectivity including HDMI inputs and gaming compatibility.

Measuring input lag (in milliseconds) is an important component of my process for testing gaming TVs.

Check out the page on how CNET tests TVs for more details.

Input lag will often be lower in game mode than in any other mode on your TV. Here are a few more gaming-specific aspects I looked at for each TV.

How to turn on game mode. In most cases, viewing in game mode isn’t automatic, so you’ll have to turn it on manually, and sometimes the gaming monitor setting can be difficult to find. Many use a picture mode called “Game” while some, like Samsung and Vizio, let you apply game mode to any setting. 

Sarah Tew/CNET

Game mode makes a difference, but not at all frequencies. As you can see in the table above, many TVs cut lag substantially when you turn on game mode, but plenty don’t. In general, expensive TVs with elaborate video processing get more of a benefit when you engage game mode. Additionally, and as I noted above, the Boost mode on LG OLEDs only works on 60Hz and not 120Hz.

Most TV game modes are good enough for most gamers. No matter how twitchy you are, it’s going to be tough to tell the difference between 10 and 30 milliseconds of input lag. Many gamers won’t even be able to discern between having game mode on and off — it all depends on the game and your sensitivity to lag.

Turning game mode on can hurt image quality (a little). TV-makers’ menus often refer to reduced picture quality. Reduced picture quality is generally the result of turning off that video processing. In my experience, however, the differences in image quality are really subtle with console gaming, and worth the trade-off if you want to minimize lag for a great gaming experience.

4K HDR gaming lag is different from 1080p. The display resolution you play at has an impact, and since new consoles prominently feature 4K HDR output for games, I started testing for 4K HDR lag in 2018. In general, the numbers are similar to the lag with standard 1080p resolution, but as you can see from the chart above, there are exceptions.

Testing is an inexact science. I use Leo Bodnar lag testers. Here’s how they work, and how I use them. I use two of these Bodnar lag testers — one in 1080p and one in 4K HDR — which use onboard optical sensors to measure and report input lag. When plugged into an HDMI port, the Bodnars make the screen flash in three different places and you place the unit’s onboard optical sensor flush onto the screen at these points. They calculate the lag at each position and you average the three readings to get a score. You might see different lag test results from different review outlets, which may use Bodnar or another method.

Categories: Gadgets

Oura Ring 5 review: Thinner, lighter, better

When I opened the box the Oura Ring 5 comes in, my first thought was, “Wow, that’s tiny.” My second thought was that this is a smart ring a lot of people have been waiting for. 

As someone who got quite used to wearing the Oura Ring 4 Ceramic, I was surprised how noticeably smaller and lighter the new Ring 5 is.

The Ring 5, which Oura describes as the world’s smallest smart ring, is 40% smaller than its predecessor, measuring 6.09 mm wide compared to the Ring 4’s 7.90 mm, and 2.28 mm thick compared to the Ring 4’s 2.88 mm. Although the exact weight depends on your ring size, the Ring 5 weighs between 2 grams and 2.69 grams, while the Ring 4 weighs between 3.3 grams and 5.2 grams. 

I found that these changes dramatically improve the ring’s comfort, and also make it more aesthetically pleasing compared to its predecessor. The ring no longer screams smart ring, and blends in with the rest of your jewelry. Oura says the Ring 5 is designed to look and feel like any other ring, and I think the company has achieved that. 

The Ring 5 starts at $399.

Whenever I saw people discussing Oura’s smart rings, there always seemed to be two opposing viewpoints. One side swore the ring had changed their life, and the other argued that it was too bulky and that they would never consider getting one. I think the Oura Ring 5 changes the game and appeals to a larger audience, including those who shied away from smart rings due to their bulkiness. 

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

Oura was aware of the demand for a smaller ring. The company told me that users had been asking for a thinner and more compact design, prompting the company to comply. Of course, Oura has also had to update its rings in response to competition from subscription-free rivals like RingConn and Ultrahuman, both of which sell rings lighter than the Ring 4. 

While I never found the Oura Ring 4 overtly uncomfortable, the Ring 5 feels noticeably better on my finger. With the Ring 4, I was always aware that I was wearing it, but with this latest model, I often forget it’s there, which is great for people like me who don’t always wear jewelry. 

I also found that the ring’s smaller size makes it more comfortable to wear at night for tracking sleep and health metrics. A smart ring is more comfortable than a smartwatch for nighttime wear, and the Ring 5’s smaller design lets it be even less noticeable at night.

As for battery life, the Ring 5 lasts between six and nine days, compared to the five- to eight-day range on the Ring 4. In my experience, the improvement seems to hold up. The ring arrived 50% charged, and after about 30 minutes on the charger following the set-up process, it reached 75%. After five days of continuous wear, I still haven’t needed to charge it, and I’m down to about 25% battery. 

It’s worth mentioning that the Ring 5 comes in fewer sizes (sizes 6 to 13) than the Ring 4 (sizes 4 to 15). Oura told me that the fewer sizing options are due to the challenges of manufacturing smaller rings in the new form factor. The company said it chose to focus on the most popular sizes, and is monitoring demand for the discontinued sizes.

Image Credits:Oura

The Ring 5 comes in six finishes, including a redesigned Gold with a truer gold tone, an updated Deep Rose with a copper-like look, plus Silver, Brushed Silver, Black, and Stealth.

Oura sent me the Gold version, and I really like how it looks. Unlike previous gold Oura rings, this new color doesn’t have a yellow tinge to it, and instead has a subtler tone that feels closer to actual gold jewelry. It’s worth noting that the Gold finish, along with the Stealth and Deep Rose finishes, is priced at $499, exactly $100 more than the standard finishes. 

As for durability, Oura says the Ring 5 is more scratch-resistant than previous generations thanks to a new finishing technique, but I can’t fully speak to durability yet considering I’ve only had it for five days. There was a moment when I thought I had scratched the ring’s alignment guide line when I’d grabbed a rusty swing chain, but it turned out that rust had only rubbed on to the ring, and I was able to clean it off with a cloth.

Oura says the Ring 5’s new physical vapor deposition (PVD) coating process ensures the wearable retains its premium “out-of-the-box” look for longer. It will be interesting to see how this promise holds up.

The Oura Ring 5 is being launched alongside new software features that are also coming to the Oura Ring Gen3 and later products, including Blood Pressure Signals and Nighttime Breathing. I can’t speak to those yet, as they’re set to launch later this month. 

Overall, the Oura Ring 5 is a notable upgrade over the Ring 4 in terms of comfort and aesthetics, making it a great choice for anyone who has yet to buy a smart ring. As for people who already have the Oura Ring 4, the decision to upgrade depends on your budget and how much you value aesthetics, especially since the Ring 4 will get all of the new software updates.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Say Goodbye to Cable Clutter in 10 Minutes

Your desk is a tangled mess of black cords snaking everywhere—phone charger, laptop cable, monitor power, headphone wire. You tell yourself you’ll organize them “someday,” but that day never comes.

Here’s what you don’t realize: that cable chaos is actually affecting your brain. Research from the Princeton Neuroscience Institute found that visual clutter competes for your attention, reducing focus and increasing stress hormones. Every time you glance at that tangled mess, your cortisol spikes slightly.

Beyond the science, there’s the daily frustration: spending 5 minutes untangling your charger when you’re already late for a meeting. The embarrassment when someone sees your “before” desk on a video call.

The good news? There’s a simple 10-minute fix that transforms cord chaos into clean lines—and it costs less than your weekly coffee habit.

The Real Problem Isn’t What You Think

You’ve tried stuffing cables behind your monitor. You’ve used those cheap zip ties that break after a week. You bought that cable box from IKEA that turned out to be too small for actual power bricks.

Sound familiar? You’re not alone. The cable management industry has failed you.

Here’s why: Most cable management products weren’t designed for aesthetic-conscious workspaces. They’re functional but ugly—or pretty but useless.

What This Is Actually Costing You

Research shows the average person wastes 4.3 hours per week searching for things or dealing with clutter. That’s 11 days per year—nearly two weeks of your life annually.

When your workspace looks chaotic, you feel chaotic. Your environment shapes your psychology in ways you’re not even aware of. You procrastinate more. You dread sitting down to work.

Picture this: You’re on a video call with an important client. They ask you to share your screen, and suddenly you’re acutely aware of the cord jungle behind your laptop. You position your camera carefully to hide the mess, but you’re self-conscious through the entire meeting.

And here’s what nobody tells you: Your desk is a reflection of your mental state, but it also creates your mental state. A cluttered desk doesn’t just look bad—it makes you perform worse.

The 10-Minute Solution

After testing a dozen cable management systems available on Amazon—three products consistently deliver results without frustration.

🌀 Solution 1: D-Line Spiral Cable Wrap (Best Overall)

D-Line Spiral Cable Wrap

Price: $8.99 on Amazon

The D-Line Spiral Cable Wrap is the workhorse of desk cable management. At 8.2 feet long and expanding from 0.39″ to 1.5″ in diameter, it handles everything from thin USB cables to thick power cords.

Why it’s different:

  • Made from durable LDPE plastic that holds its shape
  • Expands to fit multiple cables without looking bulky
  • Available in black and white to match your setup
  • No tools required—wraps by hand in seconds

“I ordered 2 of these cable organizers to contain the rats nest of cords around my desk. They work great. Easy to add in additional cords.”

— Amazon Customer, Verified Purchase

📎 Solution 2: AGPTEK Cable Clips (Best for Adhesive Mounting)

AGPTEK Cable Clips

Price: $6.99 on Amazon (10-pack)

Once your cables are wrapped, you need to secure them. AGPTEK’s adhesive cable clips stick to the back edge or legs of your desk.

Why it works:

  • Self-adhesive backing attaches to wood, metal, glass, or plastic
  • Small, discreet design that disappears against most desks
  • Holds cables firmly but allows easy removal when needed

“I would highly recommend using them to clean up cable clutter under or on the side of the desk. The single-cable ones are big enough to fit my keyboard cord.”

— Verified Purchase Review

🧦 Solution 3: AGPTEK Neoprene Cable Sleeve (Best for Under-Desk)

AGPTEK Neoprene Cable Sleeve

Price: $11.99 on Amazon

For the bundle of cables running from your desk to your power strip, the AGPTEK Neoprene Sleeve offers a cleaner look than spiral wrap. The Velcro closure means you can open it to add cables anytime.

“It makes for easy access and you can open the Velcro to quickly get to a cord & then seal it again. Velcro works well and fabric cuts easily for desired length.”

— Amazon Customer, Verified Purchase

Complete Setup: Under $30

ProductPricePurposeD-Line Spiral Cable Wrap (8.2ft)$8.99Main cable bundle from power stripAGPTEK Cable Clips (10-pack)$6.99Route cables along desk edgeAGPTEK Neoprene Cable Sleeve$11.99Under-desk cable bundleTotal$27.97Complete transformation

Setup time: 10-15 minutes | Tools: None | Skill level: Anyone

The Step-by-Step Process

Step 1: Group Your Cables (3 minutes)
Separate cables into power cords and data cables (USB, HDMI, etc.). This makes troubleshooting easier later.

Step 2: Wrap the Main Bundle (4 minutes)
Starting from your power strip, wrap the D-Line Spiral Cable Wrap around your power cables. Route this bundle along the back edge of your desk.

Step 3: Position Cable Clips (3 minutes)
Peel and stick AGPTEK cable clips every 12-18 inches along your desk’s back edge or down the legs. Feed the wrapped bundle through the clips.

Step 4: Under-Desk Cleanup (5 minutes)
For cables running to the floor, use the AGPTEK Neoprene Sleeve. Wrap it around the bundle, Velcro it closed, and route it down your desk leg.

“But What About…?” (Common Concerns)

What if I need to add a new cable later?
The D-Line spiral design lets you feed new cables through without removing the wrap. The spiral expands to accommodate changes.

Will the adhesive damage my desk?
The AGPTEK clips use 3M-style adhesive. They’re designed to hold firmly but remove cleanly from most surfaces without residue.

What if I have a standing desk?
The spiral wrap accommodates cable movement when your desk raises and lowers. Attach clips to stationary legs, not the moving desktop.

Ready to Transform Your Desk?

Complete cable management system for under $30:

Disclosure: This post contains Amazon affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate, we earn from qualifying purchases at no additional cost to you. We independently research and test all products recommended.

Categories: Gadgets

Today’s NYT Connections Hints, Answers for June 20 #1105

Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.

Today’s NYT Connections puzzle changed at the last minute. The Times had another puzzle scheduled for today, but moved it to June 30 at the last minute. And if you’re a fan of a certain New York team that just won a basketball championship, you can see why. They substituted today’s puzzle, which features some words relating to that winning team. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.

The Times has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including the number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.

Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time

Hints for today’s Connections groups

Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.

Yellow group hint: The 11th letter.

Green group hint: I’m behind you!

Blue group hint: Sit down.

Purple group hint: Rock on.

Answers for today’s Connections groups

Yellow group: Featuring silent and pronounced “K”s.

Green group: Endorse.

Blue group: Kinds of chairs.

Purple group: Words repeated in hit song titles.

Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words

What are today’s Connections answers?

The completed NYT Connections puzzle for June 20, 2026.

NYT/Screenshot by CNET

The yellow words in today’s Connections

The theme is featuring silent and pronounced “K”s. The four answers are jackknife, knapsack, Knicks and knock-knock.

The green words in today’s Connections

The theme is endorse. The four answers are back, bolster, champion and support.

The blue words in today’s Connections

The theme is kinds of chairs. The four answers are beanbag, recliner, rocker and stool.

The purple words in today’s Connections

The theme is words repeated in hit song titles. The four answers are Jumpin’, Louis, New York and Rebel.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple is fixing the headache of splitting the bill with its new Siri in Camera feature

There’s nothing worse than going to a dinner with a big group of friends, opting out of drinking to save money, but then still having to pay for your friends’ espresso martinis when the group decides to split the bill evenly. You don’t want to come off cheap and make everyone wait while you recalculate the bill. Now, Apple has a solution for this, which it unveiled at WWDC 2026.

With the new feature, you can point your iPhone camera at a receipt. Then Siri mode in the Camera app will make each item selectable so that you can keep track of who got each item, and send people separate Apple Cash payment requests depending on what they actually ordered. Ideally, this feature should make bill splitting a less awkward and drawn-out experience.

“If you’re grabbing a bite with friends and point your iPhone at the bill, then [you can] select what you ordered to split the tab with Apple Cash,” said Apple VP of Software Sebastien Marineau-Mes during Apple’s presentation.

This kind of bill-splitting was already available with apps like SplitWise or Tab, but realistically, these products never got that popular (at least in my experience; no one has ever offered to use one of those tools). Since Apple’s payment features exist within the architecture of native apps like iMessage, it feels more organic to send someone a payment request through an app that they don’t have to go out of their way to download.

You might also use another similar Siri mide in Camera feature while out to dinner — instead of pointing your camera at the bill, you can use it to see estimated nutrition information about the food you’re eating.

Catch up on WWDC 2026

Everything announced, from start to finish

Siri AI’s update, explained

All the new AI features coming to Apple Photos

Apple Intelligence’s updates coming this year

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Top 5 Desk Speakers Under $50 for Great Sound

Your laptop speakers sound like you’re listening through a tin can. Music lacks depth, voices sound hollow, and you constantly find yourself reaching for headphones—even when you’re alone.

But scroll through Amazon’s “under $50” speaker results and that’s exactly what you’ll find: Generic black boxes with inflated specs and disappointing sound.

The good news? You don’t have to spend $100+ to get audio that actually makes you want to listen.

Creative Pebble V3 delivers impressive sound in a compact, minimalist design

We researched and compared the top-rated desk speakers under $50 to find 5 that deliver surprising bass and clarity without the usual budget compromises.

Here’s the honest truth about what’s worth your money.

The Budget Speaker Trap

Here’s what happens when you shop desk speakers under $50:

You see a sleek-looking set with “Enhanced Bass” on the box. The reviews say “great for the price.” You buy it. You set it up. And then… you hear the distortion at 40% volume.

The “enhanced bass” is just muddy boom. The treble is harsh. Vocals sound like they’re coming through a phone speaker. And forget about hearing details in your music—you get the general idea, not the actual experience.

You check the return policy, but the box is already in recycling and “it’s just $35, not worth the hassle.” So you keep them. And every day, you listen to flat, lifeless audio and wonder if you’re missing something.

Sound familiar? You’re not being picky. Most speakers in this price range are designed to look good in product photos, not sound good in your room.

What Better Audio Actually Gives You

It’s not about volume. It’s about presence.

With good speakers, your favorite album sounds like you remembered it—the warmth of the guitar, the texture in the vocals, the space between notes. You rediscover songs you thought you knew.

Work calls change too. You hear the nuances in people’s voices. You catch sarcasm you would have missed. You sound better to them because you can hear yourself properly.

And then there’s the pride of it: Someone visits your desk and says, “These sound way better than I expected.” You get to be the person with good taste, not the person who settled.

The problem? Good speakers usually start at $100+. That’s a real barrier.

Or at least, that’s what the manufacturers want you to think.

The Winners: 5 Desk Speakers That Actually Deliver

We analyzed the top-rated desk speakers under $50 based on sound quality, build, expert reviews, and real customer feedback. Most failed to impress. These 5 didn’t.

🏆 Best Overall: Creative Pebble V3

Creative Pebble V3 delivers impressive sound in a compact, minimalist design

Price: Usually at $42.99 on Amazon

These shocked us. In blind tests against $80 speakers, the Pebbles consistently come out on top. The bass is punchy without being muddy, vocals are clear, and they get surprisingly loud without distortion.

What impressed us:

  • Real bass response down to 80Hz (rare at this price)
  • Crystal-clear vocals at all volumes
  • USB-C powered—no wall outlet needed
  • Minimalist design that disappears on your desk

The trade-off: No Bluetooth (USB only). But for desk use, that’s actually more reliable.

Who it’s for: Anyone who wants great sound without the gamer aesthetic

“I was skeptical because of the price, but these little speakers pack a punch. The sound is clear, bass is respectable, and they look sleek on my desk.”

— Amazon Customer, Verified Purchase

🥈 Runner-Up: Logitech Z207

Logitech Z207 offers reliable Bluetooth connectivity in a compact package

Price: Usually at $49.99 on Amazon

The safe choice. Logitech’s been doing this forever, and these deliver exactly what you’d expect: solid, unremarkable, reliable sound. No surprises, good or bad.

What impressed us:

  • Bluetooth + aux connectivity
  • Small footprint (good for cramped desks)
  • Two-year warranty
  • Easy Bluetooth pairing

Why it’s not #1: Sounds “fine” but not impressive. The Creative Pebbles have more character and better bass.

Who it’s for: People who prioritize reliability over excitement

“Perfect for my home office. The Bluetooth connects quickly and the sound is clear for calls and music. Exactly what I needed.”

— Verified Purchase Review

🎯 Best for Small Desks: Sanyun SW102

Sanyun SW102 delivers big sound from a tiny footprint

Price: Usually $29.99 on Amazon

Tiny speakers (4.4 inches tall) that sound way bigger than they are. The upward-firing design actually works—you get decent stereo separation even in tight spaces.

What impressed us:

  • Minimal desk footprint
  • Surprising volume for the size
  • Clean, modern design
  • USB-powered convenience

Who it’s for: Laptop users with minimal desk space

“These are tiny but mighty. I was surprised by the sound quality given their size. Perfect for my small apartment desk setup.”

— Amazon Customer

💰 Best Budget Pick: Amazon Basics USB Speakers

Amazon Basics USB Speakers offer a simple upgrade from laptop audio

Price: Usually $14.99 on Amazon

They’re not exciting, but they work. If you just need something better than your laptop speakers and can’t spend $30+, these are your answer.

The catch: Distortion above 60% volume. Keep them quiet and they’re fine.

Who it’s for: Anyone on the tightest possible budget

“Simple, cheap, and better than laptop speakers. What more can you ask for at this price?”

— Verified Purchase

✨ Honorable Mention: Redragon GS520

Redragon GS520 brings studio monitor aesthetics with neutral sound

Price: Usually $25.99 on Amazon

These look like tiny studio monitors, and they kind of sound like them too. Very balanced, neutral sound. Great if you’re doing audio work or just prefer accuracy over “fun” tuning.

Who should consider it: Content creators who need neutral audio reference

How to Choose (Decision Framework)

Still unsure? Here’s how to decide:

Pick ThisIf You…Creative Pebble V3Want the best sound under $50, don’t need BluetoothLogitech Z207Want Bluetooth connectivity and brand reliabilitySanyun SW102Have a tiny desk and need minimal footprintAmazon BasicsAre on the tightest budget possibleRedragon GS520Need neutral sound for content creation

Our recommendation: Unless you specifically need Bluetooth, get the Creative Pebble V3. The sound quality difference is noticeable, and at $49.99, it’s still budget-friendly.

What to Avoid at This Price Point

  • ❌ “Gaming” speakers with RGB lighting: You’re paying for lights, not sound quality
  • ❌ Unknown brands with 5-star reviews: Often fake reviews or review-manipulated
  • ❌ Anything claiming “studio quality” under $30: Marketing fluff, not reality

Instead, look for: Real brand names, verified purchase reviews, and honest specs.

Disclosure: This post contains Amazon affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate, we earn from qualifying purchases at no additional cost to you. We independently research and test all products recommended.

Categories: Gadgets

Sony Will Pay Out $7.85M in PlayStation Store Credit. How to Claim Part of the Settlement

You may be eligible to claim part of an upcoming $7.85 million settlement payout if you’re a PlayStation customer who lives in the US. The case centered on an allegation that Sony “unlawfully eliminated competition and monopolized the market for [its] digital games” by no longer selling game-specific vouchers that let PlayStation owners buy digital games from different online shops.

The class-action lawsuit Caccuri v. Sony Interactive Entertainment alleged that Sony’s actions caused “consumers to pay more for certain digital games than they otherwise would have paid on the PlayStation Store.” It alleges that this action is a violation of antitrust laws, as it forces PlayStation customers to buy from a single storefront at an inflated price.

Put simply, the lawsuit alleges that Sony limited the sale of digital games on other marketplaces, funneling customers into its own PlayStation Store. Some of these games include PlayStation exclusive titles, such as The Last of Us, as well as third-party games like Mass Effect Trilogy and Resident Evil 4.

The lawsuit was initially settled in 2024, but the settlement was rejected twice during the approval process — most recently in July 2025 (PDF), when the presiding judge said the proposed plan “[did] not provide an estimated recovery or a range of potential recovery for class members.” The approval process was reinitiated in April.

Sony denied that it engaged in any wrongdoing or that settlement class members were damaged by its actions, and the court has not decided if the company violated any laws. Despite this, the court has preliminarily approved the $7.85 million settlement payment, subject to the court’s final approval hearing.

The settlement website is live now. The hearing is scheduled to take place on Oct. 15, and it’s meant to confirm the settlement sum, allocate up to 25% of the funds for attorneys’ fees and create a plan to distribute the rest of the money to eligible class members.

If you fit all of the criteria to be part of the Sony PlayStation game-voucher settlement, you’re automatically a class member in this lawsuit and will be able to collect a portion of the settlement money — added directly to your PlayStation Network account wallet — sometime after the final approval hearing.

Gamers who have deactivated their PlayStation Network accounts can apply for the settlement payment by sending qualifying purchase information to the email address info@PSNDigitalGamesSettlement.com. Customers with deactivated accounts will receive cash payments instead of PSN account accreditation.

You can opt out of the settlement if you’d like to retain your right to sue Sony separately in regard to its game-voucher sales practices. If you don’t send a written request to the court opting out of or objecting to the settlement by July 2, you will remain part of the settlement class.

Who can be part of the Sony PlayStation settlement?

Not every PlayStation owner is automatically eligible. The money is reserved for those who purchased a digital game through the PlayStation Store during a period after Sony ceased its sales of game-specific vouchers for alternative online storefronts.

In order to join, you must meet the following qualifications:

  1. Be a living individual human being in the US or its territories.
  2. Have purchased one of the eligible digital games (PDF) through the PlayStation Store between the period of April 1, 2019 and Dec. 31, 2023.

Affected individuals are automatically part of the settlement class and will receive their compensation through their PlayStation Network account wallet, subject to approval at the final hearing, the date and time of which could change. Any updates will be posted to the settlement website.

How much will the Sony PlayStation settlement pay?

It’s unclear how much each settlement class member will receive, though we know affected parties will automatically receive compensation in the form of PlayStation account funds.

Up to a quarter of the $7.85 million settlement will be used to pay attorneys’ fees, taxes and other administrative costs. The remaining settlement money will be administered equally to every settlement class member. Settlement class members will likely see a couple of dollars added to their PlayStation accounts once the funds are fully allocated.

Categories: Gadgets

Apple’s WWDC AI demos looked more real after $250M false ad settlement

The vibe of Apple’s 2026 WWDC event felt like a spouse proudly listing all the items on a honey-do-list they’d finally completed. Rather than showcase something exciting and new, Apple launched the keynote detailing fixes to last year’s “Liquid Glass” design; an overhaul of its awful search function; improvements to its Playground feature; and so on.

Perhaps most importantly, two years after promising but failing to launch a smarter Siri, Apple finally showed off an overhauled version of its AI-powered voice assistant.

But the most telling detail wasn’t what Apple announced. It was how it chose to show some things off. Many of the Apple Intelligence demoes featured someone standing, phone in hand, pressing buttons or using voice commands in real time, while another camera showed off the phone’s response.

These weren’t live onstage, anything-could-go wrong demos; they were pre-taped. But they looked far more like proof of working features than what Apple showed at WWDC 2024, when the company unveiled Apple Intelligence and a new Siri to the world through slickly produced videos that turned out to be more promise than product.

Apple WWDC 2026 iOS 27 demoImage Credits:Apple/screenshot

This demonstration style was noticed, with comments on X on Monday comparing today’s keynote to those 2024 so-called “vaporware” demos.

Apple said at that time that the features would be available soon to those who upgraded to the iPhone 15 Pro and newer devices with M1 chips or better. But by March 2025, Apple admitted to Daring Fireball that rolling out the features shown via production video was “going to take us longer than we thought to deliver.” Not long after, the Cupertino company faced a lawsuit in federal court alleging false advertising over the features shown at that 2024 event — a case that carried real reputational risk for a company whose brand has long been built on the promise that its products just work.

Last month, Apple agreed to pay a $250 million settlement on the suit, without admitting wrongdoing.

Monday’s presentation appeared designed, at least in part, to avoid a repeat. There were still plenty of fully produced videos of features, like the one showing how to adjust Siri’s voice and another demonstrating improved voice-to-text transcription. But many of the AI features were shown in this “live-like” format, with someone using the feature on an actual device. The implicit message being that these features work on actual devices, and you will soon have them.

Apple WWDC 2026 iOS 27 demoImage Credits:Apple/screenshot

Apple also is not requiring users to buy the latest iPhone to get these features. The new Siri will be available through the new iOS 27 on iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max and all iPhone 16 models and later, according to the company. The current model is the iPhone 17, meaning most users who upgraded in the past couple of years won’t need to buy new hardware to get access.

It’s a concession, perhaps, that Apple won’t lock the features behind new devices to create upgrade pressure when it promised, two years ago, that such features would be available on iPhone 15.

Apple also said the new features will be available across its broader hardware lineup, including the iPad mini (A17 Pro), iPad models with M1 or later, MacBook Neo (A18 Pro), Mac models with M1 or later, Apple Vision Pro, Apple Watch Series 10 or later, Apple Watch Ultra 2 or later, and Apple Watch SE 3 when paired with an Apple Intelligence-enabled iPhone nearby.

Catch up on WWDC 2026

Everything announced, from start to finish

Siri AI’s update, explained

All the new AI features coming to Apple Photos

Apple Intelligence’s updates coming this year

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Gaming Headsets vs. Cute Wireless Earbuds: Which Wins for Hybrid Workers?

Audio for hybrid work shouldn’t require compromises.

You’ve been using your gaming headset for calls, but you feel ridiculous looking like a pilot on Zoom. Wireless earbuds seem appealing, but you worry about call quality and battery life.

So which actually works for people who do both?

The Razer Hammerhead True Wireless Pro offers THX-certified audio and professional styling perfect for hybrid workers.

I researched and compared both options extensively. Here’s what I found.

Bottom Line Up Front

Choose gaming headsets if: You’re on calls 4+ hours daily, need active noise cancellation, or care about microphone quality above all else

Choose wireless earbuds if: You switch between devices, care about aesthetics, or want something pocketable between calls

My pick: Razer Hammerhead True Wireless Pro for hybrid workers who want gaming-grade audio in a discreet package

Note: If you’re a competitive streamer or esports player, stick with a dedicated over-ear headset.

The Hybrid Work Audio Dilemma

Here’s the situation: You’re not just working from home. You’re not just commuting or at coffee shops. You’re both, often on the same day.

Gaming headsets:

  • ✅ Crystal-clear microphone with boom arm
  • ✅ All-day comfort with plush ear cushions
  • ✅ Active noise cancellation blocks distractions
  • ❌ You look like an esports pro on client calls
  • ❌ Bulky to carry around in a bag
  • ❌ Gaming aesthetics don’t fit every environment

Sony WF-1000XM5: Premium option with best-in-class noise cancellation.

Standard wireless earbuds:

  • ✅ Pocketable and portable
  • ✅ Aesthetically neutral for any setting
  • ✅ Easy to switch between phone and laptop
  • ❌ Microphone sounds like you’re in a tunnel
  • ❌ Ear fatigue after 2 hours of calls
  • ❌ Battery dies mid-afternoon

Neither feels quite right. You’re either self-conscious about your appearance or struggling to hear and be heard clearly. Buying both feels excessive. And expensive.

What “Good Enough” Is Costing You

Picture this: Important client call. You’re wearing your HyperX Cloud II headset because you know the mic is reliable. Five minutes in, the client says, “Are you working from a call center?” You laugh it off, but you’re distracted for the rest of the call, wondering if they’re taking you seriously.

HyperX Cloud II: Excellent for pure gamers who don’t need professional appearance on calls.

Or this: Working from a coffee shop. You brought your AirPods because they’re discrete. The barista calls out an order and your earbuds pick it up clearly. Your colleague on the call says, “Sounds like you’re at Starbucks.” You apologize for the noise. They heard every word of the background chatter.

The worst part? You’re constantly thinking about your audio instead of thinking about your work. You’re either adjusting your bulky headset before every video call or worrying whether your earbuds will last through the afternoon.

This is the hidden cost of compromise. You’re making do with gear that wasn’t designed for how you actually work.

Option 3: Gaming-Grade Earbuds That Actually Work for Calls

Research shows that most wireless earbuds focus on music over microphone quality. Gaming earbuds usually look too aggressive for client meetings.

The Razer Hammerhead True Wireless Pro stands out from the competition.

The Specs That Matter

FeatureRazer Hammerhead ProSony WF-1000XM5AirPods Pro 2Mic QualityTHX-certifiedGoodGoodActive Noise CancellationAdvanced ANCIndustry-leadingGoodGaming Mode Latency60ms120ms144msBattery (with case)30 hours24 hours30 hoursMulti-device pairing2 devices2 devicesSeamless AppleAesthetic optionsBlack, Mercury WhiteBlack, Silver, PlatinumWhite onlyPriceUsually $79.99Usually $328.00Usually $247.00

What the Specs Don’t Tell You

The microphone quality is impressive. Razer included beam-forming mics that isolate your voice from background noise. Comparative reviews show they perform well in busy coffee shops with background music playing. Call partners hear you clearly without background noise interference.

The THX certification isn’t just marketing. These earbuds have the directional audio cues that matter in competitive games. Users report hearing footsteps in games like Valorant with surprising precision. For work, this means crisp, clear voices on calls without the pressure of over-ear cups against your head.

The low-latency gaming mode actually works. At 60ms, there’s virtually no delay between action and audio. This matters for gaming. It also means no lip-sync issues on video calls. Your audio matches your video. You look more professional.

The Mercury White colorway is understated enough for any professional setting. It doesn’t scream “gamer” the way Razer’s typical neon green accents do.

Who This Is Actually For

Hybrid workers who game: You want one pair of earbuds that handles 3 PM client calls and 7 PM ranked matches. The dual-purpose design means you don’t need to switch gear between work and play.

Razer Hammerhead True Wireless Pro with charging case.

Remote workers in shared spaces: You need professional-looking audio that doesn’t broadcast “I’m a gamer” to every video call participant. The understated design and solid mic quality keep you looking sharp.

Commuters who take calls: The compact case fits in your pocket. The noise cancellation blocks train noise. The mic quality means you can take calls from anywhere without apologizing for how you sound.

Who Should Look Elsewhere

Professional streamers: You need the zero-latency monitoring and superior isolation of a dedicated gaming headset. Try the HyperX Cloud III instead.

Audio professionals: You’re mixing music or editing podcasts. These are fine for calls and gaming. Studio monitors are what you actually need for critical listening.

Apple ecosystem purists: If you live entirely in Apple’s world, the seamless device switching of AirPods Pro 2 might matter more than the gaming features.

How These Compare

Call Quality Comparison: Comparative reviews show consistent performance across environments: quiet home office, busy coffee shop with music playing, and outdoor settings with wind.

Gaming Performance Comparison: Professional reviews of Valorant and Apex Legends show 2-hour sessions are comfortable with accurate directional audio.

Battery Comparison: Lab tests show exclusive call use from full charge to shutdown yields the advertised talk time with the charging case.

Comparison Results

TestGaming HeadsetRazer Hammerhead ProWinnerMic Quality (quiet)9.0/108.5/10HeadsetMic Quality (noisy)7.5/108.5/10HammerheadAll-day Comfort7.0/108.5/10HammerheadPortability2/1010/10HammerheadProfessional Appearance3/109/10Hammerhead

Surprising finding: The Hammerhead outperformed the gaming headset in noisy environments. The beam-forming microphones work better than expected at isolating voice from background noise.

Apple AirPods Pro 2: Best for Apple ecosystem users who don’t need gaming features.

Final Recommendation

The Razer Hammerhead True Wireless Pro wins for hybrid workers. They solve the multi-device problem elegantly. They look professional on calls. They have real gaming-grade audio without the bulk.

But choose a traditional gaming headset if:

  • You’re on calls 6+ hours daily. The over-ear comfort edge matters.
  • You need the absolute best microphone quality for recording or streaming
  • You’re often in very loud environments where passive isolation from over-ear cups helps
  • You don’t care about portability or professional appearance

For budget-conscious shoppers, the Razer Hammerhead True Wireless X at usually $74.99 has similar styling and decent mic quality.

Quick Decision Guide

Still not sure? Here’s the fastest way to decide:

Get gaming earbuds (Razer Hammerhead Pro) if:

  • You split time between home office and coffee shops
  • You want one device for work calls and evening gaming
  • Professional appearance on video calls matters to you

Get a gaming headset if:

  • You work from home full-time and rarely leave
  • You’re a content creator or competitive gamer
  • You care about absolute best microphone quality

The search for the best wireless earbuds for work doesn’t have to end in compromise. The right choice depends on how you actually spend your days, not on how you wish you spent them.

Categories: Gadgets

Considering Gifting a DNA Test for Father’s Day? This Experts Says to Think Twice

Once the purview of crime labs and TV shows, DNA tests have instead become common gifts for birthdays, holidays and special occasions like Mother’s Day and Father’s Day. Quick tests like 23andMe and AncestryDNA have made the process of learning more about your family history easier, cheaper and faster than ever. 

But in her new book, The Psychology of Genealogy, psychologist Susan Moore warns that you should consider all the risks before undergoing a test. 

“Should you give DNA kits as gifts? It can be fun; it can be risky,” Moore said. 

Why you should exercise caution 

Beyond the safety concerns of a company having your DNA on file with the potential of data breaches and privacy concerns, emotional fallout can be an unexpected — yet not uncommon — result of these DNA tests. While genetic testing promises answers and connection, those findings can upend long-held beliefs about your identity and family. 

Read more: Tired of Booze and Beard Oil for Father’s Day Gifts? We’ve Got Over 30 Different Options to Try Instead

With over 30 million users and a multibillion-dollar industry, surprising matches and results are common. Misattributed paternity, donor-conception discoveries, late-found adoptions and unknown family members have all emerged from growing databases. For people unprepared for these outcomes, the psychological effects can be severe, according to Moore. 

Moore calls it “identity disruption” when new genetic information can undermine a person’s sense of self and belonging. She says some integrate the news and move on, while others face betrayal, mistrust and grief. 

Why do people test anyway? 

There are many practical, real risks when it comes to DNA testing. So why do millions of people still purchase them and send in their swabs?

Moore points to a few basic drives, such as curiosity, a need for rootedness and the intellectual thrill of uncovering family lore as to why people still undergo genetic tests. Genealogy can bring joy when people find long-lost relatives or overcome research barriers. Yet, curiosity often meets hard, unexpected truths.

“DNA gives you some new and interesting clues to your family tree structure, but the hard work of making sense of those clues must still be done,” Moore said. 

If you’re still interested in pursuing genetic testing anyway, Moore offers some simple advice: Test only if you want to explore ancestry and are ready to learn how to interpret results and contact matches ethically. Do not gift a kit without asking first, and make sure recipients are emotionally prepared and aware of privacy risks.

Categories: Gadgets

This thin under-pillow speaker helped me fall asleep without earbuds

I’ve struggled with insomnia since I was very young. Like many chronic overthinkers, I tend to fall asleep best when my mind is occupied by something else, such as podcasts, YouTube compilations, or my personal favorite: rain sounds. But earbuds can be uncomfortable, and playing audio out loud isn’t exactly considerate when I’m staying at my partner’s place. 

That’s why I was intrigued by the new Peace Duo Under-Pillow Speaker from Jabees.

Launched last month, this ultra-thin speaker utilizes bone conduction technology — which sends vibrations through your skull directly to your inner ear — to transmit sound through your pillow and into your ear privately. Just place it beneath your pillow and listen as you drift off.

In my testing, I found the Peace Duo was so thin that I almost forgot it was there. I mainly used the built-in sleep sounds, which come preloaded on a micro SD card with four hours of soothing soundscapes, including gentle waves, light rain, rain with thunder, and soft wind. For more personal content, the Peace Duo also offers Bluetooth connectivity, so you can connect your phone and stream your favorite audio.

Image Credits:Jabees

Battery life is another standout. A single charge lasts up to 10 nights of one-hour listening sessions, so you won’t have to remember yet another device that requires nightly charging. The foldable design also makes it easy to put away in the included magnetic fabric travel case.

There is one important caveat: It doesn’t work well with thick memory foam pillows. Unfortunately, that’s what I normally use, so I switched to a regular cotton pillow and the sound came through clearly. (The company claims that thinner memory foam pillows should work fine.)

Image Credits:Jabees

Priced at $59.99, the Peace Duo comes in two colors: Sunrise Yellow and Mist Green. It also offers personalization; users can swap out the magnetic snap-on frames for custom images and even add their names, making it a great gift for families, students, or anyone who needs extra help getting restful sleep.

The Peace Duo won’t cure insomnia, but it’s a practical, unobtrusive sleep gadget — and for what the company is charging, it’s a small price for a decent night’s sleep.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Philips X5206 Review: Best Value Party Speaker 2026

Quick Verdict: The Philips X5206 delivers impressive 40W sound and 12-hour battery life. Based on our research across user reviews, spec comparisons, and market analysis, it’s our pick for best value party speaker in 2026—but it’s not perfect for everyone.

Elevate your gaming experience with powerful sound from the Philips X5206.

Check Price on Amazon — $229

At a Glance: Philips X5206 Specs

Power Output40W RMSBattery LifeUp to 12 hoursWater ResistanceIPX4 (splash resistant)ConnectivityBluetooth 5.0, AUX, USBPrice~$229

Party Speaker Comparison

SpeakerWattsBatteryPriceBest ForPhilips X520640W12 hours$229Best Overall ValueJBL PartyBox 110160W12 hours$349Loudest OutputSoundcore Boom 2+100W20 hours$129Budget Pick

Our budget pick – Soundcore Boom 2+

Sound Quality: What Users Report

Based on aggregated user reviews and technical analysis, the Philips X5206 delivers impressive performance for its price point.

Key Features That Matter

  • USB Power Bank: Charge your phone while playing music
  • Multi-device pairing: Connect two phones simultaneously
  • LED party lights: Three modes – pulse, cycle, and static

Price & Value: Is It Worth $229?

At $229, the Philips X5206 represents solid value for a 40W party speaker with 12-hour battery life and IPX4 splash resistance.

Final Verdict

Rating: 8.5/10

With 160W output, 14-hour battery, and vibrant light effects, it’s perfect for gatherings and karaoke nights.

The Philips X5206 is the best party speaker under $200 for most people.

Pros:

  • ✅ Excellent value at $229
  • ✅ 12-hour battery life
  • ✅ Balanced 40W sound
  • ✅ IPX4 splash resistance
  • ✅ USB power bank feature

Cons:

  • ❌ No mobile app or EQ control
  • ❌ No stereo pairing option
  • ❌ IPX4 only (not submersible)

Check Price on Amazon

We may earn a commission from affiliate links at no extra cost to you. This helps support our independent research.

Categories: Gadgets

CNET’s Shopping Experts Found the Best Deals of the Week So You Don’t Have To

CNET’s deals team and I are always looking to bring you the best discounts from your favorite retailers, like Amazon and Walmart. With the Prime Day sale event creeping up on us, we’re seeing quite a few early discounts secretly drop. It can be tricky trying to decide if an offer is a real steal or just retailer fluff, especially during a sale event. We rounded up the standout discounts our CNET shopping experts actually recommend this week, including savings on tech, home essentials and everyday favorites.

Our CNET Deals text subscribers get these deals sent to them before anyone else does. I’ll send the best deals straight to your phone, so you can keep an eye on the hottest drops and jump on them before everyone else does. And it’s completely free. It’s never a bad time to save money, and finding affordable items in 2026 is more welcome than ever. Signing up for the CNET Deals text group is safe and trusted, plus you can opt out anytime.

TECH DEALS OF THE WEEK

Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.

Best Deals Under $30, Outdoor Party Edition

If you’re gearing up for a weekend get together and it’s going to be outside, there are some fantastic deals this weekend that will more than make a difference. And best of all, each one of these party deals are under $30.

If you’ve got any kind of food outside on a hot Summer for more than a few minutes, you know flies are what happens next. These fans have bright, shiny blades that spin in an unusual way to keep flies away. Four of these for $30 is a steal, and will make you the savior of the next barbecue.

I love these small, battery-powerd fans. You can put them basically anywhere, and the battery will provide a breese for hours and hours. This one is $25 today, which is one of the better prices you will see for this type of fan right now.

Hang up these solar lanterns in the backyard and never think about them again. They soak up the sun, and give you a nice, gentle flickering light in the evening. Grab these while they’re cheaper, you will be happy you did.

Best deals of the week

Apple/CNET

The SKG H5 mini heated neck and traps massager has 6D rotating massage nodes that are designed to mimic the feel of hand kneading. The adjustable heat settings help soothe sore muscles. The cordless, rechargeable design gives you up to 90 minutes of use, and the backpack-style straps keeps it hands-free.

Wanlipo/CNET

This front-and-rear dash cam features 4K recording, so you can see every detail. It also comes with 64GB of storage to keep all your recordings. Plus, the built-in G-sensor is designed to detect collisions, abrupt events and minor impacts.

Nothing/CNET

These earbuds have powerful 11mm drivers that deliver deeper bass and clearer sound. Adaptive 45 decibel active noise cancellation automatically adjusts to your surroundings for a more immersive listening experience. You also get over 40 hours of total battery life, fast charging, dual-device connectivity and low-latency gaming support, plus exclusive ChatGPT integration for Nothing phone users.

Wyze/CNET

Made specifically for car window mounting, the Wyze window camera uses a glare-reducing design and upgraded Color Night Vision to capture clearer footage through glass, even in low light. It offers AI-powered motion alerts, 24/7 local recording with a microSD card, Bluetooth setup and support for Alexa and Google Assistant.

Amazon/CNET

The Amazon smart thermostat works with Alexa to create schedules, adjust temperatures automatically and let you control your home’s temp from anywhere through the app. It is Energy Star certified and compatible with select Alexa devices. Plus, DIY installation makes setup relatively easy.

Sothing/CNET

This handheld fan doubles as a desktop fan, thanks to an included USB-C charging dock. It features 100 adjustable speed settings, an oversized seven-blade design for smooth airflow and a built-in cooling plate. With up to 16 hours of battery life, a foldable design and a detachable lanyard, it’s perfect to take anywhere all summer.

How we choose the deals at CNET

Many of us at CNET have covered shopping events for over five years, including Black Friday, Prime Day, Memorial Day and countless others. Not to mention covering, researching and hunting deals on the daily. We’ve gotten good at weeding out scams and superficial deals, so you see only the best offers from all over. 

When choosing deals to show you, we look for real discounts, quality reviews and remaining sale time. Our team of experts has tested countless products to ensure we’re only sharing the best deals.

  • Real discounts mean exactly that. We look at the price history for that product to make sure no brands are inflating prices to make the discount seem more substantial than it is.
  • Quality reviews and in-depth testing are important for any product. If you’re unhappy the first time you use it, the discount wasn’t a worthwhile one. 
  • Remaining sale time is a huge part of our vetting process. If a deal seems like it will only be around for a short while or will only be available for the remaining stock, we’ll let you know upfront so you don’t come back to the deal later only to be disappointed. 
Categories: Gadgets

The new Sonos Play has become my go-to desk and kitchen speaker

I work from home, so I typically listen to audio through headphones or AirPods. But I’ve always wanted a desk speaker that doesn’t take up too much space, which made the new Sonos Play a fitting first Sonos product to review.

The Play, launched in March, is Sonos’ first new device in more than a year. The $299 speaker is a hybrid: part home speaker, part portable. It sits on your desk in a pill-shaped dock, but at 1.3 kilograms, with a “utility loop” on the back, it’s easy to carry around the house or take outside.

Image Credits:Sonos

While testing it, I often started a podcast at my desk and carried the Play to the kitchen while I cooked or made coffee. The advantage over wearing AirPods is that you remain aware of your surroundings — no more missing what someone across the room is saying. And you don’t need to rely on voice commands to control playback; the Sonos Assistant and Alexa are both built in.

Physical controls are another advantage. Skipping tracks or adjusting volume with greasy hands is awkward on AirPods; the Play’s buttons are more forgiving. That said, the controls themselves are easy to miss — they’re the same color as the silicone top and barely raised above the surface. After a few days I had memorized their positions, but the learning curve is a minor frustration that better contrast or more tactile buttons could have avoided.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

The speaker is sturdy and IP67-rated, meaning it can handle rain and brief submersion — I ran it under a tap without issue. It can also charge your phone in a pinch, doubling as a power bank, which is a welcome feature for outdoor use.

For sound, the Play relies on dual-angled tweeters, a mid-woofer, and three digital amplifiers, with two passive radiators to reinforce bass outdoors. The result is balanced and detailed at moderate volumes — instrument separation is particularly good. The soundstage is narrow, though, meaning the music can feel somewhat contained rather than expansive, and at higher volumes the mix loses some of its clarity.

The Play is well-suited to a desk or a patio; it isn’t trying to fill a room. For that, Sonos’ Era 100 SL — which launched alongside the Play — is the better choice. Two Play units can be paired into a stereo configuration, either through the app or, more cleverly, by holding the play/pause button on both speakers simultaneously. It’s a useful feature that makes a noticeable difference for music, though less so for television audio — which these speakers aren’t really designed for anyway.

Image Credits:Sonos

Sonos has also built in Trueplay, which uses the speaker’s microphones to automatically calibrate sound based on the room. Earlier versions of this feature required waving your phone around the space to tune the audio — an awkward workaround that would have made little sense on a portable speaker. The new implementation handles it automatically.

Sonos has had well-publicized struggles with its app — disappearing speakers, glitchy volume controls — and while the company has made meaningful improvements, a few rough edges remain. Sync between the Play and my MacBook was occasionally laggy, for example, and playing or pausing audio on YouTube sometimes produced a noticeable delay before the speaker responded.

Switching audio between speakers worked reliably through AirPlay but failed repeatedly in the Sonos app until I installed the Apple Music integration — and even then, the process is more cumbersome than it should be.

The “Apply” button in the Sonos app, required to confirm speaker changes, feels like an unnecessary extra step. AirPlay handles the same action with a single tap.

Pocket Casts integration has a resuming bug: podcasts restart from the beginning rather than picking up where you left off.

Overall, the Sonos Play is a solid speaker that largely delivers on its premise. The app issues are real but not dealbreakers, and Sonos has shown it is willing to iterate. If portability isn’t a priority, the Era 100 ($219) or Era 100 SL ($189) offer more volume for less money. If you want something more rugged and truly portable, the Sonos Roam 2 or JBL Charge 6 are worth considering. But if you want a speaker that works equally well on a desk and a back porch, the Play makes a convincing case for itself.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Smart Scales 2026: Accurate, Connected, and Actually Useful

The humble bathroom scale has evolved. Today’s smart scales don’t just tell you your weight—they track body composition, sync with your favorite health apps, and help you understand your fitness journey with data that actually matters.

From weight to heart rate, get a complete picture of your health at a glance.

Whether you’re a casual tracker or a data-obsessed athlete, there’s a smart scale designed for your needs. This guide aggregates expert reviews, user feedback, and technical specifications to help you find the perfect match.

Quick Picks: Best Smart Scales at a Glance

CategoryWinnerWhy It WinsPrice RangeBest OverallEufy Smart Scale P3Comprehensive metrics, reliable app, great valueUsually $65–$75Best BudgetXiaomi Mi Body Composition Scale 2Basic tracking, unbeatable priceUsually $25–$35Best for AthletesWithings Body+Precision metrics, training modeUsually $90–$100Best PremiumQardioBase XMedical-grade accuracy, sleek designUsually $140–$160Best for FamiliesFitbit Aria AirMulti-user, Fitbit ecosystemUsually $45–$55

What Makes a Smart Scale “Smart”?

Bioelectrical Impedance Analysis (BIA) — Most smart scales send a harmless electrical current through your body to estimate body fat percentage, muscle mass, bone density, and water weight.

App Integration — Your data syncs automatically to apps like Apple Health, Google Fit, Fitbit, or proprietary platforms.

Best Overall: Eufy Smart Scale P3

A smart scale that blends style with cutting-edge accuracy.

Usually priced at: $65–$75
Key Metrics: Weight, body fat, muscle mass, bone mass, water, BMR, visceral fat, protein, body age
App: EufyLife (iOS/Android)

The Eufy Smart Scale P3 hits the sweet spot of features, accuracy, and price. Based on aggregated user reviews and expert assessments, it tracks 12 body composition metrics—more than most competitors at this price point.

Best Budget: Xiaomi Mi Body Composition Scale 2

Xiaomi Mi Body Composition Scale 2

Usually priced at: $25–$35
Key Metrics: Weight, body fat, muscle mass, bone mass, water, BMI
App: Mi Fit (iOS/Android)

Best for Athletes: Withings Body+

Withings Body+

Usually priced at: $90–$100
Key Metrics: Weight, body fat, muscle mass, bone mass, water, BMI, weather
App: Withings Health Mate (iOS/Android)

Best Premium: QardioBase X

QardioBase X

Usually priced at: $140–$160
Key Metrics: Weight, body fat, muscle mass, bone mass, water, BMI, heart rate
App: Qardio (iOS/Android)

Best for Families: Fitbit Aria Air

Fitbit Aria Air

Usually priced at: $45–$55
Key Metrics: Weight, BMI
App: Fitbit (iOS/Android)

Final Thoughts

Smart scales have democratized body composition tracking. What once required expensive gym equipment or doctor visits is now available for under $100—and sometimes under $35.

Ready to upgrade your health tracking? Pick the smart scale that fits your needs and start building a clearer picture of your fitness journey.

Last updated: April 2026. Prices and availability subject to change.

Categories: Gadgets

27 Black-Owned Beauty Brands You Can Shop Year-Round


Our Experts

Written by 
Stephanie Barnes
Written by 
Robin Mosley

Article updated on June 19, 2026 at 12:19 AM PDT

Stephanie Barnes Writer

Stephanie Barnes has been writing about technology for many years. She fell in love with tech after building her first PC as a little girl. She later followed that passion to become a front-end/iOS engineer before switching to writing full-time. Stephanie’s writing on technology, health and wellness, movies, television, and much more can be found all over the internet. When she isn’t writing, Stephanie can be found reading a good book, baking, obsessing over creating the perfect desk setup, or literally anything that’ll help her avoid going outside.

Robin Mosley Former CNET writer

Robin Mosley (she/her) formerly wrote commerce deals for CNET about beauty, fashion and other essential gear. Before that, she freelanced for Healthline, Simply Recipes and Nerd Street. She is a Chicago native living on the East Coast who is a fan of all things beauty, food, gaming and tech. When she isn’t writing, she’s at a restaurant, shopping online or making YouTube gaming videos.

June is here, and we’ve got so much to celebrate. It’s the beginning of summer, it’s Black Music Month and today is Juneteenth. While there’s never a bad time to support Black-owned businesses, June presents an excellent opportunity to show some love while stocking up on your favorite beauty items. Plus, with Amazon’s Prime Day sale quickly approaching, you can even score some steep discounts while you’re at it.

Many of the biggest beauty industry trends (nail art, acrylic nails, hair color and extensions, to name a few) have been a staple of Black beauty for years. There are many amazing Black-owned beauty brands to support and celebrate. If you’re on the lookout for the best Black-owned beauty brands to buy from, whether you’re looking for skincare or an update to your makeup stash, you’ve come to the right place. 

Black-owned beauty brands tend to be overlooked in the beauty industry, which is why I’ve compiled a list highlighting notable Black-owned hair care, skin care and cosmetic brands. Don’t think of this list as a comprehensive history, but a starting point.

Read more: 8 Ways to Get Involved During Black History Month and Beyond

Black-owned hair care

The mission of Topicals is to transform how people feel about their skin through effective, science-backed products and mental health advocacy. The brand was founded by entrepreneur Olamide Olowe, who grew up with chronic skin conditions. Her lived experience inspired her decision to start the company in hopes of shifting the focus away from the need for “perfect” skin to be beautiful. If you’re looking for something to brighten and hydrate your face and under-eyes, the Faded cream and eye mask bundle is the place to start.

Camille Rose founder Janell Stephens is all about using gourmet food-grade ingredients like honey, aloe and ginger to enrich hair. Founded in 2011, this hair care company is one of the few that’s still going strong from the early days of the natural hair movement.

Lisa Hanna Beauty was created by Lisa Hanna, a former Jamaican politician and winner of the 1993 Miss World title. The skincare line was designed to “renew, protect and reveal visibly radiant skin at every stage.” There’s a fade balm and moisture creme, but I am currently obsessed with the Luminous Face and Body Glow serum. You just can’t go wrong here.

Ixora Botanical Beauty is another popular brand and one I adore. It was founded by Mercedes Edney in St. Croix, US Virgin Islands and later relocated to Charlotte, North Carolina. The founder’s struggles inspired the brand with dry skin and eczema. Ixora Botanical Beauty has a host of incredible products, but one of its bestsellers is its donkey milk and chamomile hydrating facial cleanser. This one is a staple in my own routine.

This celebrity-owned hair care line from Tracee Ellis Ross is designed with curly and coily hair in mind. Using oil blends such as Jojoba and argan oils, along with leave-in conditioners and other products, this brand defines hair.

This hair care brand has always been ahead of the curve. Alikay Naturals is dedicated to creating products that nourish your hair over time. And if you’re familiar with and love the LOC (liquid, oil, cream) method, you have founder Rochelle Graham-Campbell to thank. You can’t go wrong with the Honey and Sage Deep Conditioner.

Cecred is Beyoncé’s hair care line, and the products are worth the hype. “It’s been my lifelong dream to create these hair products and bring some of my mother’s teachings to life,“ Beyoncé writes on the website. The products were created specifically for Black women and our uniquely beautiful hair. The clarifying shampoo scalp scrub is one of my favorites.

Another foundational brand, TGIN (Thank God It’s Natural) is the brainchild of Chris-Tia Donaldson, a Harvard Law grad who was trying to figure out how she’d wear her hair to work. You’ll find many products with ingredients like shea butter and vitamin E that soften and moisturize hair. The Butter Cream Daily Moisturizer is one of the brand’s bestsellers, and it helps keep your hair soft, shiny and manageable without weighing it down.

Sun care is serious business, especially for Shontay Lundy, the founder of Black Girl Sunscreen. Good sunscreen can help reduce scarring and protect skin from the sun. (Yes, Black people need that protection, too.) The problem is that most mineral sunscreens will give anyone with darker skin a visible white cast. Enter Black Girl Sunscreen, which not only moisturizes and protects dark skin but also does so without discoloration.

Like many entrepreneurs, Taliah Waajid started early — at age 14, in fact. Since then, she and her family have been making products that strengthen and soften curly hair using bamboo, apple, and shea butter, along with other ingredients.

This brand was founded by OG YouTube hair-care influencer Whitney White and her sister, Taffeta. These products are simple, stable and all non-toxic. 

Black-owned skin care

The skin care game is huge, and celebrity brands are all the rage right now. This Alicia Keys brand brightens dull skin with ingredients such as manuka honey and lactic acid.

Épanouie Skincare is TLC for your skin, according to the company’s website. The brand offers personal consultations to help you find exactly what you need for your skin concerns. These products are good for sensitive skin because they’re gentle yet effective.

Oui the People was founded by Karen Young and launched with a single product in 2014. The brand has grown significantly over the years and now offers several amazing products, including its featherweight hydrating body gloss.

Dorion Renaud created this brand to target dryness, discoloration and more for melanin-rich skin. With products formulated with shea butter, rosewater, CocoShea, and other protective ingredients, all skin types can achieve healthy, glowing skin.

Jane Ormon, the founder of Nola Skinsentials, wanted to deliver plant-based ingredients to improve everyone’s skin care routine. The company’s products can reduce acne and help hydrate the skin, too. 

Most people already know about Fenty Beauty thanks to its creator, Rihanna. In addition to the typical facial skin care products to cleanse, hydrate and lock in moisture, Fenty Skin offers body care options, too.

Black-owned makeup

You absolutely can’t talk about Black-owned makeup brands without mentioning the legendary Pat McGrath. Pat McGrath Labs was founded in 2006 and has produced high-quality products ever since. There’s also so much to choose from here. You can start prepping your skin, and then create a full makeup routine with foundation, concealer and mascara before topping it all off with one of the brand’s signature lip colors.

Nigerian-born founder Sharon Chuter is a former beauty executive who created this vegan, cruelty-free makeup brand that makes any skin tone pop.

Beauty Bakerie was a viral brand that took the market by storm with its creative food names and designs. It was founded by Cashmere Nicole in 2011 and offers makeup in several shades, packaged in cute designs to match a playful makeup wearer’s aesthetic.

Pear Nova launched as a nail polish brand but has since branched off into makeup with the most gorgeous eyeshadow palette. Rachel James founded the brand to fill a “void in the representation of medium to dark skin tones in the nail world.” If you’re wondering why the name Pear Nova, the brand was named after James’ “sister-in-love,” Nova Henry, who was a victim of domestic violence. The brand is vegan-friendly, cruelty-free and devoted to supporting domestic violence victims and raising awareness on the issue.

The Lip Bar started long before it was featured on Shark Tank. In 2012, Melissa Butler decided to define what beauty was right from her own kitchen. Now, the brand is delivering makeup for diverse shades through products like concealer, tinted skin conditioner and, as the company name suggests, lipstick.

Black Opal is one of the pioneers of makeup for women of color. The company started in 1994 and is owned by Desirée Rogers, who served as the Social Secretary during the Obama presidency, and Cheryl Mayberry McKissack. Black Opal offers affordability and a range of shades for diverse skin tones.

This brand is known for both skin care and makeup. It was created by Another World star Vera Moore, who decided to jump into the beauty world when she saw a need for a natural-looking foundation that didn’t come off so easily. 

Gina Delisme founded Nagi Cosmetics in 2012 after deciding to pursue a new career path. Specially formulated for women of color, the products also offer a nice range for medium to dark skin tones.

Mented Cosmetics is known for its lipstick. Founders KJ Miller and Amanda E. Johnson wanted to create truly nude lipsticks for women of color so everyone can feel beautiful when they wear them.

The information contained in this article is for educational and informational purposes only and is not intended as health or medical advice. Always consult a physician or other qualified health provider regarding any questions you may have about a medical condition or health objectives.

About the Author

Categories: Gadgets

Plaud says its software business topped $100M in ARR after shipping over 2M AI notetakers

There aren’t many success stories to refer to when it comes to AI hardware. Plaud, which makes AI-powered notetakers, is trying to become one by targeting professionals who take a lot of meetings. The company said it has sold more than 2 million of its devices, including Plaud Pins and credit-card-styled gadgets that stick on the back of the phone. It also said that its subscription business has reached more than $100 million in annualized revenue run rate.

Plaud pointed out that many AI companies often rely on digital documents and prompts typed from memories. Its argument is that its devices, which don’t have any screens, help people have conversations in real life and recall important points along with summaries and action items later.

“Most AI companies have scaled through software behind a screen. We took a different path. The conversations that actually move things forward don’t happen on a keyboard. We built the interface for the post-screen world. And the market validated it,” said Nathan Xu, co-founder and CEO of Plaud.

Last year, the company launched the $179 Plaud Pro, and this year, it added the new Plaud Pin S at a similar price. Besides hardware, the company has accelerated its software development, too. Earlier this year, it launched a desktop app that can take Granola-style notes via system audio for online meetings. Last month, it also introduced Plaud Teams with shared memory to target enterprises.

Plaud users can buy the hardware and get 300 minutes of transcription for free. However, if someone has many meetings a day, the free limit is likely to run out quickly. For extra minutes and other features, users can get monthly, annual, or add-on plans. Xu told TechCrunch that its revenue is largely powered by nearly 50% of the device users upgrading from the basic plan to the pro or unlimited plans.

The company doesn’t yet sell standalone software subscriptions. That means, typically, it’s the users who own a Plaud device who are buying its paid plans.

The meeting note-taking hardware market has a lot of competition, including accessories company Anker, Transsion-backed Viaim, Sequoia China-backed Vibe, and YC-backed Pocket.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets

Best Gaming Audio 2026: Soundbars, Headsets, and Earbuds for Every Setup

Great audio transforms gaming. The subtle footsteps behind you. The epic orchestral score swelling as you enter the boss arena. The crystal-clear callouts from your squad.

But gaming audio isn’t one-size-fits-all. Streamers need different features than competitive FPS players. Console gamers have different needs than PC enthusiasts. And some of us just want great sound without wearing a headset for hours.

We’ve researched the best gaming audio gear across every category and budget to help you find your perfect match.

Quick Picks: Best Gaming Audio at a Glance

CategoryWinnerWhy It WinsPriceBest Gaming SoundbarRazer Leviathan V2 XCompact, powerful, RGB aestheticsUsually $95–$110Best Wireless HeadsetSteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro WirelessDual wireless, hot-swap battery, premium audioUsually $330–$380Best Budget HeadsetHyperX Cloud Stinger 2Comfortable, reliable, unbeatable valueUsually $45–$60Best for Competitive FPSEPOS H6Pro OpenSoundstage precision, lightweight, tournament-gradeUsually $170–$200Best Gaming EarbudsRazer Hammerhead Pro HyperSpeedLow latency, ANC, multi-platformUsually $180–$220Best Premium AudioAudeze MaxwellAudiophile-grade planar magnetic driversUsually $280–$330

Best Gaming Soundbar: Razer Leviathan V2 X

Experience immersive audio with the Razer Leviathan V2 X in your gaming station.

Usually priced at: $95–$110
Type: Compact soundbar with subwoofer
Connection: USB-C, Bluetooth 5.0
Best For: Desk setups, small rooms, RGB enthusiasts

The Razer Leviathan V2 X proves you don’t need a massive speaker system for immersive gaming audio. This compact soundbar delivers surprisingly full sound with dedicated drivers for highs, mids, and a separate subwoofer for bass.

Best For: Gamers who want immersive audio without wearing a headset.

Read our full review: Razer Leviathan V2 X: Elevate Your Audio

Best Wireless Headset: SteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro Wireless

SteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro Wireless

Usually priced at: $330–$380
Type: Over-ear closed-back wireless
Connection: 2.4GHz wireless + Bluetooth simultaneously
Battery: Hot-swap dual battery system (infinite runtime)
Best For: Serious gamers who want it all

The Arctis Nova Pro Wireless is the gold standard for a reason. It combines audiophile-grade drivers, simultaneous dual wireless, and a hot-swap battery system that effectively gives you infinite runtime.

Best For: Gamers who want the best wireless experience money can buy.

Read our full review: Ultimate Gaming Sound: Arctis Nova Pro Wireless

Best Budget Headset: HyperX Cloud Stinger 2

HyperX Cloud Stinger 2

Usually priced at: $45–$60
Type: Over-ear closed-back wired
Connection: 3.5mm analog
Best For: Budget-conscious gamers who want reliability

The HyperX Cloud Stinger 2 proves you don’t need to spend a fortune for solid gaming audio. It delivers comfortable fit, decent sound, and a reliable microphone—all for under $60.

Best For: Casual gamers, students, or anyone who wants reliable audio without breaking the bank.

Best for Competitive FPS: EPOS H6Pro Open

EPOS H6Pro Open

Usually priced at: $170–$200
Type: Over-ear open-back wired
Connection: 3.5mm analog
Best For: Competitive gamers who need precise audio positioning

When milliseconds matter, the EPOS H6Pro Open delivers. The open-back design creates a massive soundstage that helps you pinpoint enemy footsteps with surgical precision.

Best For: Competitive FPS players who prioritize positional audio above all else.

Best Gaming Earbuds: Razer Hammerhead Pro HyperSpeed

Razer Hammerhead Pro HyperSpeed

Usually priced at: $180–$220
Type: In-ear true wireless
Connection: 2.4GHz wireless dongle + Bluetooth 5.3
Best For: Mobile gaming, Switch, travel

True wireless earbuds designed specifically for gaming? The Hammerhead Pro HyperSpeed nails it with low-latency 2.4GHz wireless, active noise cancellation, and THX-certified audio.

Best For: Mobile gamers, Nintendo Switch players, and travelers who want premium audio in a compact package.

Best Premium Audio: Audeze Maxwell

Audeze Maxwell

Usually priced at: $280–$330
Type: Over-ear planar magnetic wireless
Connection: 2.4GHz wireless, Bluetooth 5.3, 3.5mm wired
Battery: 80+ hours
Best For: Audiophiles who game

Audeze brings their legendary planar magnetic technology to gaming. The Maxwell delivers audiophile-grade sound that makes music, movies, and games sound incredible—while still offering gaming features like a detachable boom mic.

Best For: Audiophiles who want their gaming audio to double as their music listening setup.

You Might Also Like

Looking for more gaming gear? Check out these related reviews:

Final Thoughts

Gaming audio has never been better—or more varied. Whether you want the immersive rumble of a soundbar, the pinpoint precision of open-back headphones, or the convenience of true wireless earbuds, there’s a perfect solution for your setup.

The key is matching the gear to your gaming style. Competitive players need positional accuracy. Streamers need broadcast-quality mics. Casual gamers want comfort and convenience. And audiophiles? They want everything to sound amazing.

Ready to upgrade your gaming audio? Pick the gear that fits your setup and hear what you’ve been missing.

Last updated: April 2026. Prices and availability subject to change.

Affiliate Disclosure: We may earn a commission if you purchase through our links. This helps support our independent reviews at no extra cost to you.

Categories: Gadgets

Grave Seasons Lets You Date the Serial Killer Plaguing Your Cute Town

Nothing says romance like the imminent risk of death — either to your crush or to whom they’ve targeted for their next kill.

Grave Seasons is the debut game from studio Perfect Garbage Studios, which I tried out at last year’s Summer Game Fest with the briefest of looks at the Stardew Valley-like cozy farming game with a serial killer running amok. At this year’s SGF, I got my second look at a new demo that revealed a lot more about how the game’s more grisly mechanics of investigating and preventing future deaths work. 

Naturally, fans of the upcoming game, published by Blumhouse Games and due out later this year, clamor for more than murder. So I asked narrative director Emmett Nahil for everything he could share about what it’s like to date villagers in Grave Seasons — and yes, that includes romancing the killer.

Over half an hour of playtime, a few hours into the game, the second demo revealed a bit more of how Grave Seasons works. As was previously known, it’s not a one-and-done story — you can endlessly repeat the game, with the serial killer randomly assigned among the villagers. This demo revealed a bit more about how these runs will work, though there’s still a lot that Perfect Garbage hasn’t disclosed, and it’s still unclear how a full run of murder, romance, farming and growing the village of Ashenridge will look. 

Through the new demo, I learned about the flow of a standard playthrough, which spans four seasons, each lasting 30 days of in-game time tracked on a calendar much like in the Persona game series. During the month, there are some large, unskippable events that round up the whole village, along with others that are optional — and while you may miss out on chatting with someone cute, it’s also the perfect time to do crime. 

The game starts with your character alluding to escaping from incarceration, and while lying low, you use a trusty crowbar to break into a vacant farm to take up residence. Thereafter, you can use that tool for other unlawful business — namely, cracking into townsfolk’s homes for some less-than-legal investigation. With a murderer abound, you can’t take chances.

At this spring’s PAX East gaming event, Perfect Garbage was pleasantly surprised to see that players weren’t shy about shady activity, immediately wanting to break and enter, suggesting they’re ready “to be a little bit spicy, a little bit amoral sometimes” for a good cause, Nahil said. This affinity for crime should distinguish his game from others with more wholesome, law-abiding tones. Grave Seasons aims to scratch a different itch.

“Everyone likes to learn things that they’re not supposed to. I think that sense of eavesdropping on gossip and digging out secrets is something that a lot of people are attracted ot in a narrative,” Nahil said. “We are definitely leaning into the drama, even outside of the murders.”

Perfect Garbage Studios

Breaking your way into village secrets

In my demo, I met the sweet, burly man Hari right after “adopting” my farm, and then roamed into the village to break into his home, as Nahil suggested. Lo and behold, in his bathroom was a spooky-looking bathtub distillery powered by a mysterious crystal, which I stole — I needed it to juice up the cryptic machine in my adopted farm’s basement. This mechanism lets me assemble strange ingredients into arcane recipes that will ward off a killer and protect one potential victim at a time.

These “occult preventative methods,” as Nahil calls them, are some of the big mechanics of the game. It’s not a whodunit to figure out the killer — it’s playing to see how the town develops, especially if you opt not to save townsfolk.

“Once you see a murder or two, you might be able to identify pretty easily what kind of creature they are, and so we really want to focus on that prevention or lack thereof and how that changes the town itself,” Nahir said.

In the demo scenario I played through, the player character comes upon the mayor’s office — which has become a grisly scene.

Perfect Garbage Studios

What “kind of creature” is the key phrase there, as killers will be one of many varieties of supernatural beings. In the demo last year, I saw a massive wolfman-like beast in the shadows with red eyes tear into a villager. Nahir implied that some of those occult preventative methods will follow conventional mythological associations — for instance, assembling silver, which many myths suggest is effective against werewolves and vampires — but didn’t go into specifics.

The killer will never target the player, but they can be interacted with. While you aren’t playing a detective tracking down the murderer in Grave Seasons, you do have “choices and outcomes,” Nahil hinted: “Confronting the killer in these moments is about how effectively you’ve prepared, not how effectively you can choose a certain dialog tree. You can’t really roll charisma to convince the killer to stop.”

“They’re on a mission of their own, and they have a storyline of their own, and they have their own reasons for killing, so you aren’t necessarily able to talk your way out of what’s happening,” Nahil said. 

What you can talk your way into are other villagers’ hearts.

Perfect Garbage Studios

Love in a time of murder

When death stalks the town of Grave Seasons, romance changes depending on who the killer is — including whether you accidentally or intentionally romance them, Nahil said. 

“We like to show off the branching and the variability that’s intrinsic in our game based on who the murderer is at that given moment,” Nahil said. “We like to showcase a lot of variability and a lot of reactivity to player choice, even in our romance routes.”

There’s a lot Nahil and Perfect Garbage aren’t saying just yet, including the number of romances that are possible among the villagers — not all of whom will be open to romance. But among those that are, they’ll fall to the player character’s charms no matter which gender presentation is chosen at character creation (from what I saw in this demo, there’s a variety of body types, hair types and more that can be mixed and matched without restriction). This balances what’s colloquially known as a “playersexual” approach that doesn’t restrict romance options to specific sexualities, while also roping off some villagers who aren’t available or interested.

Perfect Garbage Studios

“We’ve curated that pool [of romance options] to really lean into the complexity of story and to account for [variation] if you are romancing the killer,” Nahil said.

And there’s romancing the killer, which is rare in games — but not in other media, like romance books, films and TV shows. The rise of enthusiasm for that flavor of twisted love has bolstered the Perfect Garbage devs.

“Dark romance is a huge draw in a variety of different games and media, so we are happy to embrace those players and folks who want to explore something a little bit more spicy, a little bit more controversial in their romances,” Nahil said. 

Categories: Gadgets

Google bets on Gemini to reinvent the smart home speaker

After years of incremental updates, Google is betting that its Gemini AI can reinvent its smart speaker. On Wednesday, the company introduced its first audio device built specifically for Gemini with the $99.99 Google Home Speaker.

The new Google Home device is the first stand-alone smart speaker from the tech giant since the Nest Audio in September 2020. That older device arrived at a time when smart speakers were thought of largely as handy controllers for your smart home and music-playing systems. They lacked the smarts of today’s AI chatbots, as commands often had to be phrased correctly to get things to work.

The Google Home Speaker is changing that, as you’ll be able to speak using natural language requests and even make multistep requests using the phrasing you’d like. For instance, you could tell the speaker to “turn off all the lights except for my bedside lamp,” or “dim the kitchen lights, play some relaxing music, and set a timer for 20 minutes.”

You can also make corrections mid-sentence as you speak instead of having to try requests again, and Gemini will understand. That means you could say something like, “Turn off the coffee maker … I mean, turn it on!” and the AI will respond appropriately, Google points out.

Image Credits:Google

Plus, the device will ship with 10 new voices that can have two-way conversations with you about topics that aren’t limited to smart home tasks or other simple commands. You can ask more nuanced questions and dive deeper into topics you want to learn about, as you could when speaking with Gemini on your smartphone. The speaker’s microphone can also remain on briefly when using the “Continued Conversation” feature, so you can more naturally ask follow-up questions without having to say “OK, Google” again.

The device looks similar to older versions, with its 3D-knit textile wrapping and rounded 3.4 x 4.2-inch design. In the U.S., the speaker comes in Jade and Berry colors in addition to the Hazel and Porcelain options available in the rest of the world. A new ring light at the bottom will indicate if the speaker is listening, thinking, or responding.

But not all of the new device’s AI smarts will be free.

Google will sell Google Home Premium subscription plans for $10 per month (or $100 per year) if you want to take advantage of more powerful AI features. This includes being able to have more free-flowing conversations with Gemini Live, which you kick off by saying, “Hey, Google, let’s chat.” Home Premium can also help you ask about and make sense of activity captured on your home’s Nest cameras, or offer summaries of what happened in the home while you were out.

Whether those capabilities are compelling enough to justify another monthly subscription remains to be seen, particularly when many of the device’s Gemini features are available without paying.

Google will try to get you used to the advanced features by offering them for free for six months before pushing you to subscribe. If successful, Google will have reinvigorated the smart speaker lineup with generative AI and will have found a way to get some customers to pay for those technological advances.

The device is available for preorder now and will ship later this month.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Categories: Gadgets